Skip to main content

Full text of "japanese manual 113088 : MX-M363N の取扱説明書・マニュアル"

See other formats


SHARR 


OPERATION  GUIDE 


Search  based  on 
what  you  want  to  do 


A 


MAKE  A  COPY  PRINT  A  DOCUMENT 


SEND  A  FAX 


SCAN  AN  IMAGE/  SAVE  A  JOB  AND 

SEND  AN  INTERNET  FAX  REUSE  IT  LATER 


MAINTAIN 
THE  MACHINE 


睐  About  Operation  Guide 


MAKE  A  COPY 


Conserve 


Copy  multiple  pages  on 
one  side  of  one  sheet  of 
paper 


Reduce  copy  mistakes 


Print  one  set  of  copies  for 
proofing 


Check  the  number  of 
scanned  pages  before 
making  copies 


Make  a  copy  of  this  type  of  original 


Make  a  copy  on  this  type  of  paper 


Add  the  date  or  page  numbers 


Add  a  stamp 


Add  the  page  number 


Add  text 


Assemble  output  into  a  pamphlet 


Create  a  stapled  pamphlet 


Staple  output 


Create  a  blank  margin  for 
punching 


墨 


Punch  holes  in  output 


Fold  output  in  half 


Other  convenient  functions 


Functions  used  for  specific  purposes 

•  Make  a  copy  of  arranged  photos 

•  Create  a  large  poster 

•  Make  a  mirror-image  copy 

•  Copy  onto  the  center  of  the  paper 

•  Make  a  negative  copy 

Convenient  functions 

•  Use  two  machines  simultaneously 

•  Give  priority  to  a  copy  job 

•  Check  the  status  of  a  reserved  job 

•  Insert  covers/inserts  in  copy  output 

•  Copy  a  thin  original 


PRINT  A  DOCUMENT 


Conserve 


Print  without  a 
computer 


Print  on  this  type 
of  paper 


Add  text  or  an 
image 


Other  convenient  functions 


|i 


Print  attractive 
output 


Assemble  output 
into  a  pamphlet 


Conserve 


Print  without  a  computer 


Print  attractive  output 


Print  matching  the  size  of 
the  paper 


Bring  out  faint  text  and 
lines 


Adjust  the  brightness  and 
contrast 


Assemble  output  into  a  pamphlet 


Print  on  this  type  of  paper 


A.,  Rotate  the  image  180 
degrees 


Add  a  watermark  to  print 
data 


Overlay  a  fixed  form  on  the 
print  data 


峰 


Add  text  or 


in  image 


Other  convenient  functions 


Correct  the  size  or  orientation  of  the  print  data 

•  Enlarge  or  reduce  the  print  image 

•  Print  a  mirror-image 

Security  is  important 

•  Print  confidentially 

•  Print  an  encrypted  PDF  file 

Functions  used  for  specific  purposes 

•  Print  an  "invoice  copy" 

•  Create  a  large  poster 

Convenient  functions 

•  Give  priority  to  a  print  job 

•  Use  two  machines  simultaneously 

•  Store  frequently  used  print  settings 

•  Store  a  print  job 

•  Print  and  fold  the  output 


SEND  A  FAX 


Conserve 


Send  when  the  rate  is 
lowest 


Check  received  data  before 
printing 


Send  two  original  pages  as 
a  single  page 


mM 

_ 

IIP11 


Relay  a  transmission 
through  a  branch  office 


Send  this  type  of  document 


令 


丄  ^  Bulky  original  (shadows 
appear  at  edges) 


Bound  original  such  as  a 
[KjBj  book  (one  page  at  a  time) 


More  original  pages  than 
can  be  loaded  at  once 


Original  printed  on  both 
sides 


ID  card  or  other  card 


Prevent  transmission  to  the  wrong  destination 


Send  a  clear  document 


Save  trouble 


Store  frequently  used 
settings 


曾  XXXX-9874 
音 XXXX-4567 
®XXXX-5432 
窗  XXXX-9999 


View  the  transmission  log 


Send  to  multiple 
destinations 


©XXXX-6789 

©XXXX-9874 

©XXXX-4567 

@XXXX^5432] 

曾 XXXX-9999 


Easily  specify  an  address 
(search  number) 


Security  is  important 


的… b  / 1  Check  the  destination  once 
more  before  sending 


Print  protected  reception 
data 


Send  a  document  at  the 
other  machine’s  request 


豪 


Send  confidentially 


Initiate  reception  of  a 
document  from  a  sending 
machine 


Other  convenient  functions 


Convenient  management  functions 

•  Forward  a  received  fax  to  a  network  address 

•  Print  a  list  of  addresses 

Convenient  functions 

•  Send  a  thin  original 

•  Select  a  transmission  destination  from  a  global  address  book 

•  Give  priority  to  a  transmission 

•  Use  an  extension  phone 


SCAN  AN  IMAGE/ SEND  AN  INTERNET  FAX 


Send  a  clear  image 


Adjust  the  contrast  or 
image  quality 


Send  without  shadows  at 
the  edges 


Adjust  the  resolution 
before  sending 


峰 


Suppress  the  background  of 
a  transmitted  document 


Send  this  type  of  document 


令 


Bulky  original  (shadows 
appear  at  edges) 


Bound  original  such  as  a 
[a]BI  book  (one  page  at  a  time) 


More  original  pages  than 
can  be  loaded  at  once 


Mixed-size  originals 


■11 

Original  printed  on  both 

k 

---: 

峰 

A 

sides 

==: 

Original  with  background 


Prevent  transmission  to  the  wrong  destination 


Check  the  result  of 
transmission 


Stamp  scanned  original 
pages 


Check  the  log  of  previous 
transmissions 


Send  a  smaller  file 


み •网 


Send  at  low  resolution 


|  Compress  a  file  before 


sending 


^  Reduce  an  image  before 


sending 


Send  an  image 


in  black  & 


Send  two  original  pages  as  ID  or  other  card 


a  single  page 


Save  trouble 


Store  frequently  used 
settings 


■讀 Q 

滅^^、 


Send  to  multiple 
destinations 


aaa@aa.aa.c< 

bbb@  bb.bb.c 


CCC@CC.CC.C( 


ddd  @  dd.dd.c 


View  the  transmission  log 


eee  @ee.ee.C' 


aaa  @  aa.aa.c 

bbb  @  bb.bb. 

ccc  @  cc.cc.c 

♦  ddd  @dd.dd.  | 

eee  @  ee.ee. e 

ノ 

L _ 

Easily  specify  an  address 
(search  number) 


Send  an  Internet  fax  from  a 
computer 


Bound  original  such  as  a 
book  (one  page  at  a  time) 


Other  convenient  functions 


Convenient  management  functions 

•  Forward  a  received  fax  to  a  network  address 

•  Print  a  list  of  transmission  destinations 

Convenient  functions 

•  Scan  a  thin  original 

•  Select  a  transmission  destination  from  a  global  address  book 

•  Send  at  a  specified  time 

•  Give  priority  to  a  transmission 

•  Send  in  USB  memory  mode 


SAVE  A  JOB  AND  REUSE  IT  LATER 


Search  for  a  file 


Organize  my  files 


MAINTAIN  THE  MACHINE 


Clean  the 
machine 


Replace  a  toner 
cartridge 


Replace  the 
staple  cartridge 


Replace  the 
stamp  cartridge 


0 


r 


Replace  the  toner 
collection  container 


Dispose  of  punch 
waste 


Clean  the  machine 


Clean  the  document  glass  and 
automatic  document  feeder 


Clean  the  bypass  feed 
roller 


Clean  the  original  feed 
roller 


ABOUT  OPERATION  GUIDE 

There  are  two  ways  to  search  for  a  topic  in  this  guide:  you  can  use  an  "I  want  to..."  menu,  or  you  can  use  a  regular  table 
of  contents. 

The  following  explanation  assumes  that  Adobe  Reader  8.0  is  being  used  (Some  buttons  do  not  appear  in  the  default 
state.). 


Body  page 


HOW  TO  USE  THIS  MANUAL 

Click  a  button  below  to  move  to  the  page  that  you  wish  to  view. 


4-1-i 


け  I  右, |  M  #  #  N  H /  824  •  2  i  ©  ®  [62.8% >  1  |n|  WlMI 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


e  machine.  F^bb&b  read  ihta  chap  tar  belore  using  mo  fnaEhina. 


PART  NAMES  AND  FUNCTIONS 

EXTERIOR 


lb  iUtenraiiCiiy  Indc  mu  soini  的  mfiJs, B 

d%of  2-iudepd  orlQinafe  c^an  bs  auloiuiicdty  fi^annet 
» l=TJClNdi  THt  CM 


(1) Aulw 
Thlcij 

■s  aulaiuiicairy  & 

苷  d^JdHSUL  Cpa 供 1-37J 

¢3)  Front  cotpt 

Open  1hi&  «w«r  1o  swilcti  ih»  mam  pcwsf  svittc^ki  BOna 
w  TUT  or  Is  reiplsce  a  lanef  cartrkSgfi 
议  tUHNIHQ  tW  POWER  ON  AND  OFF  tpatfe  I-  I6J 
«  REPLACING  THE  TONER 
1 销 

谢  Pop9F  pmv  Mi 

TWi  ovtpui  lo  iN>  li_h«r  dicM«r]  # 


例  Ex"  truy  綱 H  (rfghi 

W 細  instiiM,  OUi| 


晴 }■ 
_  Can  l> 


Ou 料 1納 
FbhliJm- 


&ff  Osllwvil  Id  EHI& 

ki^i  (cAfibBr  bfay) 

d9bi$r«d  b>  W  ivaiy, 


INER  QARTRJDGES  ¢№4 


to_ 抑^  0141 fet  A  pynch 
punch  hc*«in  ouiput, 
*»■  FFNlSHCR  4pag«  1 刪 


«•  mfiW1 2 3 4 * 

_  ovtM 
uMa  Eb4di  llnqfii 

QfArfld«fi  pdlWl 
TMIft  Uftftd  to  u4ect  F4J 
CQ04BS 

保 oe ⑽ TIONP 細 


tuncEifiim  and  mlar  她  fium&H  af 

tEL  ipflgn  1-0) 


■  Pefiptierd  devH» 


1-3 


Contents 


(1)  Return  to  top  page  button 

If  an  operation  does  not  proceed  as  expected,  click  this 
button  to  start  over  again. 

(2)  Back  one  page  button 

Displays  the  previous  page. 

(3)  Forward  one  page  button 

Displays  the  next  page. 

(4)  Return  to  previously  displayed  page  button 

Displays  the  page  that  was  displayed  before  the  current 
page. 


(5)  Adobe  Reader  Help  button 

Opens  Adobe  Reader  Help. 

(6)  Contents  button 

Displays  the  contents  of  each  chapter. 

For  example,  if  the  current  page  is  a  page  in  the  body  of 
the  printer  chapter,  this  button  shows  the  contents  of  the 
printer  chapter. 


•  If  a  button  does  not  appear,  refer  to  Adobe  Reader  Help  to  display  the  button. 

•  Caution  when  printing 

If  all  pages  are  printed,  the  menu  pages  of  the  "I  want  to..."  menu  will  also  be  printed.  To  print  only  the  pages  that  contain 
the  explanation  of  a  function,  specify  a  page  range. 


II 


MANUALS  PROVIDED  WITH  THE  MACHINE 


Operation  manuals  in  PDF  format  (this  manual) 

The  manuals  in  PDF  format  provide  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  machine  in  each  mode.  To 
view  the  PDF  manuals,  download  them  from  the  hard  drive  in  the  machine.  The  procedure  for  downloading  the  manuals 
is  explained  in  "Downloading  the  Operation  Guide"  in  the  Quick  Start  Guide. 


1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 

This  chapter  provides  information,  such  as  basic  operation  procedures,  how  to  load  paper,  and 
machine  maintenance. 


j ^ ^ 


2.  COPIER 

This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  copy  function. 


3.  PRINTER 

This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  print  function. 


4.  FACSIMILE 

This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  fax  function. 


5.  SCANNER/  INTERNET  FAX 

This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  scanner  function  and 
the  Internet  fax  function. 


6_  DOCUMENT  FILING 

This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  document  filing 
function.  The  document  filing  function  allows  you  to  save  the  document  data  of  a  copy  or  fax  job, 
or  the  data  of  a  print  job,  as  a  file  on  the  machine's  hard  drive.  The  file  can  be  called  up  as 
needed. 


7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS 

This  chapter  explains  the  "System  Settings",  which  are  used  to  configure  a  variety  of  parameters 
to  suit  the  aims  and  the  needs  of  your  workplace.  Current  settings  can  be  displayed  or  printed  out 
from  the  "System  Settings". 


8.  TROUBLESHOOTING 

This  chapter  explains  how  to  remove  paper  misfeeds  and  provides  answers  to  frequently  asked 
questions  regarding  the  operation  of  the  machine  in  each  mode.  Refer  to  this  manual  when  you 
have  difficulty  using  the  machine. 


Printed  manuals 


Manual  name 

Contents 

Safety  Guide 

This  manual  contains  instructions  for  using  the  machine  safely  and  lists  the  specifications  of  the  machine 
and  its  peripheral  devices. 

Software  Setup 

Guide 

This  manual  explains  how  to  install  the  software  and  configure  settings  to  use  the  machine  as  a  printer  or 

scanner. 

Quick  Start  Guide 

This  manual  provides  easy-to-understand  explanations  of  all  the  functions  of  the  machine  in  a  single 
volume.  Detailed  explanations  of  each  of  the  functions  can  be  found  in  the  manuals  in  PDF  format. 

■  ■  ■ 
III 


ABOUT  OPERATION  MANUAL 

This  manual  explains  how  to  use  the  MX-M283N/MX-M363N/MX-M453N/MX-M503N  digital  multifunctional  system. 


Please  note 

•  For  information  on  installing  the  drivers  and  software  cited  in  this  manual,  please  refer  to  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 

•  For  information  on  your  operating  system,  please  refer  to  your  operating  system  manual  or  the  online  Help  function. 

•  The  explanations  of  screens  and  procedures  in  a  Windows  environment  are  primarily  for  Windows  Vista®.  The  screens  may 
vary  depending  on  the  version  of  the  operating  system  or  the  software  application. 

•  The  explanations  of  screens  and  procedures  in  a  Macintosh  environment  are  based  on  Mac  OS  X  v10.4  in  the  case  of  Mac  OS 
X.  The  screens  may  vary  depending  on  the  version  of  the  operating  system  or  the  software  application. 

•  Wherever  "MX-xxxx"  appears  in  this  manual,  please  substitute  your  model  name  for  "xxxx". 

•  Considerable  care  has  been  taken  in  preparing  this  manual.  If  you  have  any  comments  or  concerns  about  the  manual,  please 
contact  your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department. 

•  This  product  has  undergone  strict  quality  control  and  inspection  procedures.  In  the  unlikely  event  that  a  defect  or  other  problem 
is  discovered,  please  contact  your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department. 

•  Aside  from  instances  provided  for  by  law,  SHARP  is  not  responsible  for  failures  occurring  during  the  use  of  the  product  or  its 
options,  or  failures  due  to  incorrect  operation  of  the  product  and  its  options,  or  other  failures,  or  for  any  damage  that  occurs  due 
to  use  of  the  product. 

Warning 

•  Reproduction,  adaptation  or  translation  of  the  contents  of  the  manual  without  prior  written  permission  is  prohibited,  except  as 
allowed  under  copyright  laws. 

•  All  information  in  this  manual  is  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Illustrations  and  the  operation  panel  and  touch  panel  shown  in  this  manual 

The  peripheral  devices  are  generally  optional,  however,  some  models  include  certain  peripheral  devices  as  standard  equipment. 

The  explanations  in  this  manual  assume  that  a  right  tray  and  stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  are  installed  on  the  MX-M503N. 

For  some  functions  and  procedures,  the  explanations  assume  that  devices  other  than  the  above  are  installed. 

The  display  screens,  messages,  and  key  names  shown  in  the  manual  may  differ  from  those  on  the  actual  machine 
due  to  product  improvements  and  modifications. 


Icons  used  in  the  manuals 

The  icons  in  the  manuals  indicate  the  following  types  of  information: 


/K  Warning 

This  alerts  you  to  a  situation  where  there  is  a  risk  of  human  death  or  injury. 

A\  Caution 

This  alerts  you  to  a  situation  where  there  is  a  risk  of  human  injury  or  property  damage. 

① 

This  alerts  you  to  a  situation  where 
there  is  a  risk  of  machine  damage  or 
failure. 

This  provides  a  supplemental 
explanation  of  a  function  or  procedure. 

© 

This  explains  how  to  cancel  or  correct 
an  operation. 

This  indicates  the  name  of  a  system  setting  and  provides  a  brief 
explanation  of  the  setting. 

When  "System  Settings:11  appears: 

A  general  setting  is  explained. 

When  "System  Settings  (Administrator):11  appears: 

A  setting  that  can  only  be  configured  by  an  administrator  is 
explained. 


iv 


CHAPTER  1 

BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


This  chapter  provides  information,  such  as  basic  operation  procedures,  how  to  load  paper,  and  machine  maintenance. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


PART  NAMES  AND  FUNCTIONS . 1-3 

•  EXTERIOR . 1-3 

•  INTERIOR . 1-5 

•  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  AND 

DOCUMENT  GLASS . 1-6 

•SIDE  AND  BACK . 1-7 

•OPERATION  PANEL . 1-8 

TOUCH  PANEL . 1-10 

•  STATUS  DISPLAY . 1-12 

•  SYSTEM  BAR . 1-13 

TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF . 1-15 

•  ENERGY  SAVE  FUNCTIONS . 1-16 

•  [POWER  SAVE]  KEY . 1-16 

USER  AUTHENTICATION . 1-17 

•AUTHENTICATION  BY  USER  NUMBER . 1-17 

•  AUTHENTICATION  BY  LOGIN  NAME/ 

PASSWORD . 1-19 

HOME  SCREEN . 1-22 

REMOTE  OPERATION  OF  THE  MACHINE . 1-23 

ITEMS  RECORDED  IN  THE  JOB  LOG . 1-24 


LOADING  PAPER 


IMPORTANT  POINTS  ABOUT  PAPER . 1-27 

•  NAMES  AND  LOCATIONS  OF  TRAYS . 1-27 

•THE  MEANING  OF  "R"  IN  PAPER  SIZES  ■… 1-27 

•  USEABLE  PAPER . 1-28 

TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4 . 1-30 

•  LOADING  PAPER  AND  CHANGING  THE 

PAPER  SIZE . 1-30 

TRAY  SETTINGS  OF  TRAY  5  (LARGE 

CAPACITY  TRAY) . 1-32 

•  LOADING  PAPER . 1-32 

LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY . 1-34 

•  IMPORTANT  POINTS  WHEN  USING  THE 

BYPASS  TRAY . 1-35 


ORIGINALS 


PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL . 1-38 

•  PLACING  ORIGINALS  IN  THE 

AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER . 1-38 

•  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  ON  THE 

DOCUMENT  GLASS . 1-40 


PERIPHERAL  DEVICES 


PERIPHERAL  DEVICES . 1-42 

FINISHER . 1-44 

•PART  NAMES . 1-44 

•SUPPLIES . 1-44 

•  FINISHER  MAINTENANCE . 1-45 

FINISHER  (LARGE  STACKER) . 1-47 

•PART  NAMES . 1-47 

•SUPPLIES . 1-47 

•  FINISHER  (LARGE  STACKER) 

MAINTENANCE . 1-48 

SADDLE  STITCH  FINISHER . 1-50 

•PART  NAMES . 1-50 

•SUPPLIES . 1-50 

•  SADDLE  STITCH  FINISHER 

MAINTENANCE . 1-51 

PUNCH  MODULE . 1-54 

•  DISCARDING  PUNCH  WASTE . 1-54 

SHARP  OSA . 1-57 

•  APPLICATION  COMMUNICATION 

MODULE . 1-57 

•  EXTERNAL  ACCOUNT  MODULE 

(MX-AMX3) . 1-58 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


MAINTENANCE 


REGULAR  MAINTENANCE . 1-60 

•  CLEANING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS 

AND  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  . . . 1-60 

•  CLEANING  THE  BYPASS  FEED  ROLLER  … 1-62 


•  CLEANING  THE  ORIGINAL  FEED 
ROLLER . 1-62 

REPLACING  THE  TONER  CARTRIDGES . 1-63 

REPLACING  THE  TONER  COLLECTION 
CONTAINER . 1-66 

REPLACING  THE  STAMP  CARTRIDGE . 1-68 


ENTERING  TEXT 


FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  MAIN  KEYS . 1-70 

•  ENTERING  TEXT  FROM  A  KEYBOARD . 1-71 


1-2 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


This  section  provides  basic  information  about  the  machine.  Please  read  this  chapter  before  using  the  machine. 


PART  NAMES  AND  FUNCTIONS 

EXTERIOR 


⑴ 


(2) 


⑶ 


This  automatically  feeds  and  scans  multiple  originals.  Both 
sides  of  2-sided  originals  can  be  automatically  scanned. 
隊  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  (page  1-38) 


When  installed,  output  can  be  delivered  to  this  tray. 

(6)  Output  tray  (center  tray) 

Output  is  delivered  to  this  tray. 


Front  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  switch  the  main  power  switch  to  "On" 
or  "Off"  or  to  replace  a  toner  cartridge. 

隊  TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF  (page  1-15) 
隊  REPLACING  THE  TONER  CARTRIDGES  (page 
1-63) 

Paper  pass  unit* 

This  transfers  output  to  the  finisher  (large  stacker)  or 


(7)  Finisher* 

This  can  be  used  to  staple  output.  A  punch  module  can 
also  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output. 

咳  FINISHER  (page  1-44) 


saddle  stitch  finisher. 


(4)  Operation  panel 

This  is  used  to  select  functions  and  enter  the  number  of 
copies. 

隊 OPERATION  PANEL  (page  1-8) 


Peripheral  device. 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


(8)  Punch  module* 

This  is  used  to  punch  holes  in  output. 

Requires  a  finisher  (large  stacker). 

瞭  PUNCH  MODULE  (page  1-54) 

(9)  USB  connector  (A  type) 

Supports  USB  2.0  (Hi-Speed). 

This  is  used  to  connect  a  USB  device  such  as  USB 
memory  to  the  machine. 

For  the  USB  cable,  use  a  shielded  cable. 

(10)  Keyboard 

This  is  a  keyboard  that  is  incorporated  into  the  machine. 
When  not  used,  it  can  be  stored  under  the  operation 
panel. 

隊  ENTERING  TEXT  FROM  A  KEYBOARD  (page  1-71) 

(11)  Saddle  stitch  finisher* 

This  can  be  used  to  staple  output.  The  saddle  stitch 
function  for  folding  and  stapling  output  and  the  fold  function 
for  folding  output  in  half  are  also  available.  A  punch  module 
can  also  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output. 

暖  SADDLE  STITCH  FINISHER  (page  1-50) 

(12)  Finisher  (large  stacker) 

This  can  be  used  to  staple  output. 

隊  FINISHER  (LARGE  STACKER)  (page  1-47) 


(13)  Tray  1 

This  holds  paper. 

暖  TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4  (page  1-30) 

(14)  Tray  2 

This  holds  paper. 

暖  TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4  (page  1-30) 

(15)  Tray  3  (when  a  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  or  a 
stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is  installed)* 

This  holds  paper. 

暖  TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4  (page  1-30) 

(16)  Tray  4  (when  a  stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is 
installed)* 

This  holds  paper. 

隊  TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4  (page  1-30) 

(17)  Tray  5  (when  a  large  capacity  tray  is  installed)* 

This  holds  paper. 

瞭  TRAY  SETTINGS  OF  TRAY  5  (LARGE  CAPACITY 
TRAY)  (page  1 -32) 


Peripheral  device. 


1-4 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


INTERIOR 


(18)  (19)  (20)  (21)  (22) 


(23) 


(24)  (25)  (26)  (27)  (28) 


(18)  Toner  cartridges 

These  contain  toner  for  printing.  When  the  toner  runs  out 
in  the  cartridge,  replace  the  cartridge  with  a  new 
cartridge. 

隊  REPLACING  THE  TONER  CARTRIDGES  (page  1-63) 

(19)  Fusing  unit 

Heat  is  applied  here  to  fuse  the  transferred  image  onto 
the  paper. 

/K  Caution 

The  fusing  unit  is  hot.  Take  care  not  to  burn  yourself 
when  removing  a  paper  misfeed. 

(20)  Right  side  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  remove  a  misfeed. 

(21)  Paper  reversing  section  cover 

This  is  used  when  2-sided  printing  is  performed.  Open 
this  cover  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed. 

(22)  Bypass  tray 

Use  this  tray  to  feed  paper  manually. 

When  loading  paper  larger  than  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  or  A4R,  be 
sure  to  pull  out  the  bypass  tray  extension. 

隊  LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY  (page  1-34) 


(23)  Main  power  switch 

This  is  used  to  power  on  the  machine. 

When  using  the  fax  or  Internet  fax  functions,  keep  this 
switch  in  the  "on"  position. 

隊  TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF  (page  1-15) 

(24)  Toner  collection  container 

This  collects  excess  toner  that  remains  after  printing. 

^  REPLACING  THE  TONER  COLLECTION 
CONTAINER  (page  1-66) 


Your  service  technician  will  collect  the  toner  collection 
container. 

(25)  Handle 

Pull  this  out  and  grasp  it  when  moving  the  machine. 

(26)  Right  cover  of  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer 
Right  cover  of  stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer 
(when  a  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  or  a 
stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is  installed) 

Open  this  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed  in  tray  3  or  tray  4. 

(27)  Paper  tray  right  side  cover 

Open  this  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed  in  tray  1 or  tray  2. 

(28)  Right  side  cover  release  lever 

To  remove  a  paper  misfeed,  pull  and  hold  this  lever  up  to 
open  the  right  side  cover. 


1-5 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  AND  DOCUMENT 
GLASS 


(1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (7) 


(1)  Paper  feed  roller 

This  roller  rotates  to  automatically  feed  the  original. 

(2)  Document  feeding  area  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  remove  an  original  misfeed  or  clean 
the  paper  feed  roller. 

(3)  Original  guides 

These  help  ensure  that  the  original  is  scanned  correctly. 
Adjust  the  guides  to  the  width  of  the  original. 

暖  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  (page  1-38) 

(4)  Document  feeder  tray 

Place  originals  in  this  tray. 1 -sided  originals  must  be 
placed  face  up. 

隊  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  (page  1-38) 

⑼  Original  exit  tray 

Originals  are  delivered  to  this  tray  after  scanning. 


(6)  Scanning  area 

Originals  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray  are  scanned 
here. 

隊  REGULAR  MAINTENANCE  (page  1-60) 

(7)  Original  size  detector 

This  detects  the  size  of  an  original  placed  on  the 
document  glass. 

^  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  ON  THE  DOCUMENT 
GLASS  (page  1-40) 

(8)  Document  glass 

Use  this  to  scan  a  book  or  other  thick  original  that  cannot 
be  fed  through  the  automatic  document  feeder. 

^  PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  ON  THE  DOCUMENT 
GLASS  (page  1-40) 


1-6 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


(6)  Extension  phone  socket 

When  the  fax  function  of  the  machine  is  used,  an 
extension  phone  can  be  connected  to  this  socket. 

(7)  Telephone  line  socket 

When  the  fax  function  of  the  machine  is  used,  the 
telephone  line  is  connected  to  this  socket. 


When  the  fax  expansion  kit  is  installed 


SIDE  AND  BACK 


(1)  USB  connector  (A  type) 

Supports  USB  2.0  (Hi-Speed). 

This  is  used  to  connect  a  USB  device  such  as  USB 
memory  to  the  machine. 

(2)  LAN  connector 

Connect  the  し AN  cable  to  this  connector  when  the 
machine  is  used  on  a  network. 

For  the  LAN  cable,  use  a  shielded  type  cable. 

(3)  USB  connector  (B  type  ) 

Supports  USB  2.0  (Hi-Speed). 

A  computer  can  be  connected  to  this  connector  to  use 
the  machine  as  a  printer. 

For  the  USB  cable,  use  a  shielded  cable. 

(4)  Service-only  connector 


/K  Caution 


This  connector  is  for  use  only  by  service  technicians. 
Connecting  a  cable  to  this  connector  may  cause  the 
machine  to  malfunction. 

Important  note  for  service  technicians: 

The  cable  connected  to  the  service  connector  must  be 
less  than  118"  (3  m)  in  length. 


(5)  Power  plug 


\l7  \17  \—/ 

12  3  4 

/V  /V 


i 

1 

1 

BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


OPERATION  PANEL 


⑴ (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  ⑹ 


(1)  Touch  panel 

Messages  and  keys  appear  in  the  touch  panel  display. 
Touch  the  displayed  keys  to  perform  a  variety  of 
operations. 

When  a  key  is  touched,  a  beep  sounds  and  the  selected 
item  is  highlighted.  This  provides  confirmation  as  you 
perform  an  operation. 

暖  TOUCH  PANEL  (page  1-10) 

(2)  [SYSTEM  SETTINGS]  key 

Press  this  key  to  display  the  system  settings  menu 
screen.  The  system  settings  are  used  to  configure  paper 
tray  settings,  store  addresses  for  transmission 
operations,  and  adjust  parameters  to  make  the  machine 
easier  to  use. 

(3)  [JOB  STATUS]  key 

Press  this  key  to  display  the  job  status  screen.  The  job 
status  screen  is  used  to  check  information  on  jobs  and  to 
cancel  jobs. 

For  details,  see  the  chapters  for  each  of  the  functions  in 
this  manual. 

(4)  PRINT  mode  indicators 

•  READY  indicator 

Print  jobs  can  be  received  when  this  indicator  is  lit. 

•  DATA  indicator 

This  blinks  while  print  data  is  being  received  and  lights 
steadily  while  printing  is  taking  place. 


(5)  Numeric  keys 

These  are  used  to  enter  the  number  of  copies,  fax 
numbers,  and  other  numerical  values.  These  keys  are 
also  used  to  enter  numeric  value  settings  (except  for  the 
system  settings). 

⑹ [CLEAR]  key  (©) 

Press  this  key  to  return  the  number  of  copies  to  "0". 

(7)  [HOME]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  display  the  home  screen.  Frequently 
used  settings  can  be  registered  in  the  my  menu  screen  to 
enable  quick  and  easy  operation  of  the  machine. 

瞭  HOME  SCREEN  (page  1-22) 

(8)  IMAGE  SEND  mode  indicators 

•  LINE  indicator 

This  lights  up  during  transmission  or  reception  of  a  fax 
or  Internet  fax.  This  also  lights  during  transmission  of 
an  image  in  scan  mode. 

•  DATA  indicator 

This  blinks  when  a  received  fax  or  Internet  fax  cannot 
be  printed  because  of  a  problem  such  as  out  of  paper. 
This  lights  up  when  there  is  a  transmission  job  that  has 
not  been  sent. 


1 -8 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


⑼ 


(9)  [START]  key 

Press  this  key  to  copy  or  scan  an  original.  This  key  is  also 
used  to  send  a  fax  in  fax  mode. 

(10)  [LOGOUT]  key  (©) 

Press  this  key  to  log  out  after  you  have  logged  in  and 
used  the  machine.  When  using  the  fax  function,  this  key 
can  also  be  pressed  to  send  tone  signals  on  a  pulse  dial 
line. 

暖  USER  AUTHENTICATION  (page  1-17) 

(11)  [#/P]  key  (©) 

When  using  the  copy  function,  press  this  key  to  use  a  job 
program.  When  using  the  fax  function,  this  key  can  be 
used  when  dialing. 

(12)  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  (@) 

Press  this  key  to  return  to  the  initial  operation  state. 

Use  this  key  when  you  wish  to  cancel  all  settings  that 
have  been  selected  and  start  operation  from  the  initial 
state. 


(13)  [STOP]  key  ((§)) 

Press  this  key  to  stop  a  copy  job  or  scanning  of  an 
original. 

(14)  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))/ indicator 

Use  this  key  to  put  the  machine  into  auto  power  shut-off 
mode  to  save  energy. 

The  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  blinks  when  the  machine 
is  in  auto  power  shut-off  mode. 

隊 [POWER  SAVE]  KEY  (page  1-16) 

(15)  [POWER]  key  (©) 

Use  this  key  to  turn  the  machine  power  on  and  off. 

隊  TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF  (page  1-15) 

(16)  Main  power  indicator 

This  lights  up  when  the  machine's  main  power  switch  is 
in  the  "on"  position. 

暖  TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF  (page  1-15) 


1-9 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


TOUCH  PANEL 

This  section  explains  how  to  use  the  touch  panel. 

•  To  enter  text, see  "ENTERING  TEXT"  (page  1-70). 

•  For  information  on  the  screens  and  procedures  for  using  the  system  settings,  see  "Common  Operation  Methods" 
(page  7-4)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 

Using  the  touch  panel 

Example  1 


(1) 


⑶ 


(1)  Mode  select  keys 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send,  and  document  filing  inodes. 

(2)  Settings  for  each  function  are  easily  selected  and  canceled  by  touching  the  keys  on  the  screen  with  your  finger. 
When  an  item  is  selected,  a  beep  will  sound  and  the  item  will  be  highlighted  to  confirm  the  selection. 

(3)  Keys  that  are  grayed  out  cannot  be  selected. 


If  you  touch  a  key  that  cannot  be  selected,  a  double  beep  will  sound. 


Example  2 


Example  3 


(1)  (2)  (3)  (4) 


I  L 

Special  Modes 

1 

Margin  Shift 

Cancel  |[  OR 

Right  Left  Down 

, Side  1  哩  Side  2 

kn  isr  圍 

ぬ) ね) 

4a  sl  a  a 

(1)  If  the  initial  state  of  a  key  in  a  screen  is  highlighted, 
the  key  is  selected.  To  change  the  selection,  touch 
one  of  the  other  keys  to  highlight  that  key. 

(2)  The  Q  Q  keys  can  be  used  to  increase  or 
decrease  a  value.  To  make  a  value  change  quickly, 
keep  your  finger  on  the  key. 

(3)  Touch  this  key  to  cancel  a  setting. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key  to  enter  and  save  a  setting. 


⑴ (2) 


(1)  Some  items  in  the  special  modes  screen  are  selected 
by  simply  touching  the  key  of  the  item. 

To  cancel  a  selected  item,  touch  the  highlighted  key 
once  again  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 

(2)  When  settings  extend  over  multiple  screens,  touch 
the  [H  key  or  the  3  key  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 


1-10 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Enter  value  via  the  10-key. 


Cancel  I  OK 


Touch  a  numeric  value  display  key  to  directly  enter  a 
value  with  the  numeric  keys. 


Press  the  numeric  keys  to  enter  any  numeric  value 
and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Example  4 


When  at  least  one  special  mode  is  selected,  the  圍 
key  appears  in  the  base  screen. 


Example  5 


The  [SlI  key  can  be  touched  to  display  a  list  of  the 
selected  special  modes. 


_ Exposure  I 

■ 


i  Copy  Ratio 


Original  1  I  Paper  Select  ] 


Function  Review 


..  ■  •  Shift :Rignt 

3  1  " Front : 1/2 inch/Back: 1/2 inch 


. Edge: 1/2 inch 
" Center: 1/2 inch 


. Front : 2 -yiaed/Back : Insert 
' Insertion  A: 10  Page/B:10  Page 


(^\  The  touch  panel  (screen)  shown  in  this  manual  is  a  descriptive  image.  The  actual  screen  is  slightly  different. 


■11 


Contents 


100 


100% 


2 2 -TI j  I- -- 命  j 


a ED a a 


i  Q 


一  a N 


1 1 S 0 

OK - - - - 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


STATUS  DISPLAY 

When  the  base  screen  of  a  mode  appears,  the  right  side  of  the  touch  panel  shows  the  machine's  status. 
The  information  shown  is  explained  below. 


Example:  Basic  screen  of  copy  mode 


(1)  Display  selection  key 

The  status  display  can  be  switched  between  "Job  Status" 
and  "MFP  Status11. 

If  the  job  status  screen  is  displayed,  the  status  display 
automatically  changes  to  "MFP  Status". 

(2)  "Job  Status"  display 

This  shows  the  first  4  print  jobs  in  the  print  queue  (the  job 
in  progress  and  jobs  waiting  to  be  printed).  The  type  of 
job,  the  set  number  of  copies,  the  number  of  copies 
completed,  and  the  job  status  appear. 

Jobs  cannot  be  manipulated  in  this  screen.  Jobs  can  only 
be  manipulated  in  the  job  status  screen. 

For  details,  see  the  chapters  for  each  of  the  functions  in 
this  manual. 


(3)  "MFP  Status"  display 

This  shows  machine  system  information. 

"Maintenance  Information" 

This  shows  machine  maintenance  information  by  means 
of  codes. 


1-12 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


SYSTEM  BAR 


The  system  bar  appears  at  the  bottom  of  the  touch  panel. 

The  items  that  appear  in  the  system  bar  are  explained  below. 


-p 

. _ 


_ Exposure  I 

■ 


8 ■:譏  111 

2.8V2xllRl=J 


.  8V2xl4  1=1 
 11x17 巨! 


% 


Plain 

8%xll 


I  Copy  i 


(1) 


Original  I  I  Paper  Select  I 


MFP  Status 

020/015 

Copying 

020/015 

Waiting 

020/015 

Waiting 

020/015 

(1) Job  status  display 

The  job  in  progress  or  reserved  are  indicated  by  icons. 
The  icons  are  as  follows. 


Print  job 

0 

Copy  job 

eT 

Scan  to  E-mail 
job 

Scan  to  FTP  job 

Scan  to 

Network  Folder 
job 

■P 

Scan  to 

Desktop  job 

V 

Fax 

transmission 

job 

Fax  reception 
job 

¥ 

PC-Fax 

transmission 

job 

ぼ 

Internet  fax 

transmission 

job 

(Including 

Direct  SMTP) 

Internet  Fax 
reception  job 
(Including 

Direct  SMTP) 

PC-l-Fax 

transmission 

job 

Broadcast  job* 
Inbound  routing 
job 

圃 

Scan  to  HDD 
file  print  job 

Tandem 
copy/print  job 

J 

Metadata  send 
job 

This  appears  in  a  multi-mode  broadcast  job. 


When  a  base  screen  other  than  that  of  image  send  mode 
appears,  the  number  of  the  tray  being  used  to  feed  paper 
appears  during  paper  feeding.  The  color  appearing  in  the 
job  status  display  depends  on  the  job  status  as  indicated 
in  the  table  below. 

The  job  status  display  can  be  touched  to  show  the  job 
status  screen. 


Job  status 
display 

Machine  Configuration 

Green 

A  print,  scan  or  other  job  is  being 
executed  normally. 

Yellow 

The  machine  is  warming  up  or  on 
standby,  or  a  job  is  being  canceled. 

Red 

A  paper  misfeed  or  other  error 
condition  has  occurred. 

Gray 

The  machine  has  no  jobs. 

(2)  Icon  display 


This  icon  appears  when  data  is  being  sent  or 
received. 

0 

This  icon  appears  when  fax,  scan,  or 

Internet  fax  data  is  stored  in  the  machine's 
memory.  When  data  to  be  transmitted  is 
stored, 藝  appears.  When  received  data  is 
stored,  0  appears.  When  both  data  to  be 
transmitted  and  received  data  are  stored, 

0  appears. 

This  appears  when  a  service  technician  has 
activated  simulation  mode. 

This  appears  when  a  USB  memory  or  other 
USB  device  is  connected  to  the  machine. 

1-13 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


© 

This  appears  when  the  data  security  kit  is 
being  used. 

亡 

This  appears  while  the  remote  operation 
function  is  used. 

el 

The  icon  appears  when  the  machine  is 
communicating  with  an  external  application. 

(3)  Brightness  adjustment  key 

Touch  this  key  to  adjust  the  brightness  of  the  touch 
panel. 

When  touched,  the  following  screen  appears  next  to  the 
key. 


Touch  the  [+]  key  or  the  [■]  key  to  adjust  the  brightness. 
When  finished,  touch  the  brightness  adjustment  key 
again  to  close  the  screen. 


1-14 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF 

The  machine  has  two  power  switches.  The  main  power  switch  is  at  the  lower  left  after  the  front  cover  is  opened.  The 
other  power  switch  is  the  [POWER]  key  (©)  on  the  operation  panel  at  the  top  right. 


Main  power  switch 

When  the  main  power  switch  is  switched  on,  the  main 
power  indicator  on  the  operation  panel  lights  up. 


Turning  on  the  power 

(1)  Switch  the  main  power  switch  to  the  "on" 
position. 

(2)  Press  the  [POWER]  key  (@)  to  turn  on  the 
power. 


[POWER]  key 

Main  power  indicator 

旬 

# — 

© 

勿 (0) 

J 

[POWER]  key 

Turning  off  the  power 

(1)  Press  the  [POWER]  key  (@)  to  turn  off  the 
power. 

(2)  Switch  the  main  power  switch  to  the  "off" 
position. 


•  Before  switching  off  the  main  power  switch,  make  sure  that  the  DATA  indicator  for  printing  and  the  DATA  and  LINE 
indicators  for  image  send  are  not  lit  or  blinking  on  the  operation  panel. 

Switching  off  the  main  power  switch  or  removing  the  power  cord  from  the  outlet  while  any  of  the  indicators  are  lit  or  blinking 
may  damage  the  hard  drive  and  cause  data  to  be  lost. 

•  Switch  off  both  the  [POWER]  key  (©)  and  the  main  power  switch  and  unplug  the  power  cord  if  you  suspect  a  machine 
failure,  if  there  is  a  bad  thunderstorm  nearby,  or  when  you  are  moving  the  machine. 


When  using  the  fax  or  Internet  fax  function,  always  keep  the  main  power  switch  in  the  "on"  position. 


Restarting  the  machine 

In  order  for  some  settings  to  take  effect,  the  machine  must  be  restarted. 

If  a  message  in  the  touch  panel  prompts  you  to  restart  the  machine,  press  the  [POWER]  key  (©)  to  turn  off  the  power 
and  then  press  the  key  again  to  turn  the  power  back  on. 


In  some  states  of  the  machine,  pressing  the  [POWER]  key  (©)  to  restart  will  not  make  the  settings  take  effect.  In  this  case, 
use  the  main  power  switch  to  switch  the  power  off  and  then  on. 


1-15 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


ENERGY  SAVE  FUNCTIONS 

This  product  has  the  following  two  energy  save  functions  that  conform  to  the  Energy  Star  guidelines  to  help  conserve 
natural  resources  and  reduce  environmental  pollution. 

Preheat  Mode  (Low  power  mode) 

Preheat  mode  automatically  lowers  the  temperature  of  the  fusing  unit  and  thereby  reduces  power  consumption  if  the 
machine  remains  in  the  standby  state  for  the  interval  of  time  set  in  "Preheat  Mode  Setting"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator). 

This  keeps  the  fusing  unit  at  a  lower  temperature  and  reduces  power  consumption  while  the  machine  is  on  standby. 
The  machine  automatically  wakes  up  and  returns  to  normal  operation  when  a  print  job  is  received,  a  key  is  pressed  on 
the  operation  panel,  or  an  original  is  placed. 

Auto  power  shut-off  mode  (Sleep  mode) 

Auto  power  shut-off  mode  automatically  shuts  off  power  to  the  display  and  the  fusing  unit  if  the  machine  remains  in  the 
standby  state  for  the  interval  of  time  set  in  "Auto  Power  Shut-Off  Timer"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  This 
mode  provides  the  lowest  level  of  power  consumption.  Considerably  more  power  is  saved  than  in  preheat  mode, 
however,  the  wakeup  time  is  longer.  This  mode  can  be  disabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

The  machine  automatically  wakes  up  and  resumes  normal  operation  when  a  print  job  is  received  or  when  the  blinking 
[POWER  SAVE]  key  ((©))  is  pressed. 


[POWER  SAVE]  KEY 

Press  the  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  to  put  the  machine  in  auto  power  shut-off  mode  or  wake  it  up  from  auto  power 
shut-off  mode.  The  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  has  an  indicator  that  indicates  whether  or  not  the  machine  is  in  auto  power 
shut-off  mode. 


When  the  [POWER  SAVE] 
key  ((§))  indicator  is  off  in  the 
standby  state 

The  machine  is  ready  to  be  used. 

If  the  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  is  pressed  when  the  indicator  is  off,  the  indicator  will  blink 
and  the  machine  will  enter  auto  power  shut-off  mode  after  a  brief  interval. 

When  the  [POWER  SAVE] 
key  ((§))  indicator  is  blinking 

The  machine  is  in  auto  power  shut-off  mode. 

If  the  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  is  pressed  when  the  indicator  is  blinking,  the  indicator  will 
turn  off  and  the  machine  will  return  to  the  ready  state  after  a  brief  interval. 

[POWER  SAVE] 
key  /  indicator 


1-16 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


USER  AUTHENTICATION 

User  authentication  restricts  the  use  of  the  machine  to  users  that  have  been  registered.  The  functions  that  each  user  is 
allowed  to  use  can  be  specified,  allowing  the  machine  to  be  customized  to  meet  the  needs  of  your  workplace. 

When  the  administrator  of  the  machine  has  enabled  user  authentication,  each  user  must  log  in  to  use  the  machine. 
There  are  different  types  of  user  authentication,  and  each  type  has  a  different  login  method. 

For  more  information,  see  the  explanations  of  the  login  methods. 

隊  AUTHENTICATION  BY  USER  NUMBER  (see  below) 

暖 AUTHENTICATION  BY  LOGIN  NAME/  PASSWORD  (page  1-19) 

AUTHENTICATION  BY  USER  NUMBER 

The  following  procedure  is  used  to  log  in  using  a  user  number  received  from  the  administrator  of  the  machine. 


When  controlled  by  user  number 


[/ 

i 

h  /  ®©@ 

/  ®@® 

/  ⑦®® 

■  /  ®®@ 

Enter  your  user  number  (5  to  8  digits) 
with  the  numeric  keys. 

Each  entered  digit  will  be  displayed  as  ■■氺 ■■■ 


1-17 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


When  you  have  finished  using  the 
machine  and  are  ready  to  log  out,  press 
the  [LOGOUT]  key  (®  )■ 


However,  note  that  the  [LOGOUT]  key  (©)  cannot  be  used  to  log  out  when  a  fax  number  is  being  entered  in  fax 
mode,  as  the  key  is  used  for  fax  number  entry. 

If  a  preset  duration  of  time  elapses  after  the  machine  is  last  used,  the  Auto  Clear  function  will  activate.  When  Auto 
Clear  activates,  logout  takes  place  automatically.  However,  when  PC  Scan  mode  is  used,  logout  does  not  take 
place  when  the  [LOGOUT]  key  (©)  is  pressed  and  Auto  Clear  does  not  operate.  Change  to  a  different  mode  on 
the  machine  and  then  log  out. 


If  an  incorrect  user  number  is  entered  3  times  in  a  row... 

If  "A  Warning  when  Login  Fails"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  machine  will  lock  for  5  minutes  if 
an  incorrect  user  number  is  entered  3  times  in  a  row. 

Verify  the  user  number  that  you  should  use  with  the  administrator  of  the  machine. 


The  administrator  can  clear  the  locked  state. 

This  is  done  from  [User  Control]  and  then  [Default  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


1-18 


Contents 


User  Authentication 


t 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

After  the  entered  user  number  is  authenticated,  the  user  count 
screen  will  appear  briefly. 


Usage  status :  used/remaining  pages 
Black-white  :  87,654,321/12,345,678 


When  page  limits  have  been  set  in  "Pages  Limit  Group  List"  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  number  of  pages 
remaining  will  appear.  (The  remaining  number  of  pages  that  the 
user  can  use  in  each  mode  (copy,  scan,  etc.)  appears.)  The 
amount  of  time  that  this  screen  appears  can  be  changed  using 
"Message  Time  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


When  the  user  number  is  an  8-digit  number,  this  step  is  not  necessary.  (Login  takes  place  automatically  after  the  user 
number  is  entered.) 


④  ® ® @) 
® ® ® @ 
@ ® ® ®l 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


AUTHENTICATION  BY  LOGIN  NAME/  PASSWORD 

The  following  procedure  is  used  to  log  in  using  a  login  name  and  password  received  from  the  administrator  of  the 
machine  or  the  administrator  of  the  LDAP  server. 


When  controlled  by  login  name  and  password 

(Different  items  will  appear  in  the  screen  when  LDAP  authentication  is  used.) 


User  Authentication 

f  Login  Name  j 

七: 

[  Password  ] 

[  Auth  to:  ]  Login  Locally 

Touch  the  [Login  Name]  key  or  the  网 
key. 

If  the  [Login  Name]  key  is  touched,  a  screen  for  selecting  the 
user  name  appears.  Go  to  the  next  step. 

If  the  [^]  key  is  touched,  an  area  for  entering  a  "Registration 
No."  appears  [■■■]■ 

Use  the  numeric  keys  to  enter  your  registration  number  that 
has  been  stored  in  "User  List"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator).  After  entering  the  registration  number,  go  to 
step  3. 


(A) 


Device  Account 


▲ 

User 


(B) 


..  ode  User  Selection 

j  User  0001 

[user  0002 

User  0003 

fuser  0004 

十 

User  0005 

fuser  0006 

了. | 

|  User  0007 

fuser  0008 

H  - 

•  User  0009 

fuser  0010  ] 

3 

User  0011 

fuser  0012 

ABCD  EFGH  |l  IJKL  J|^  MNOP  ||  PRSTU Jj/WXYZ  Jb^Jl 

II 


(D) 


Select  the  user  name. 

(A)  [Direct  Entry]  key 

Use  this  key  if  you  have  not  been  stored  in  "User  List"  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator)  and  are  only  using 
LDAP  authentication. 

A  text  entry  screen  will  appear.  Enter  your  login  name. 

(B)  User  selection  keys 

Touch  your  user  name  that  has  been  stored  in  "User  List" 
in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

(C)  [Back]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  return  to  the  login  screen. 

(D)  Index  tabs 

All  users  appear  on  the  [All]  tab.  Users  are  grouped  on  the 
other  tabs  according  to  the  search  characters  entered 
when  each  user  was  stored. 


LDAP  authentication  can  be  used  when  the  administrator  of  the  server  provides  LDAP  service  on  the  LAN  (local  area 
network). 


1-19 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


User  Authentication 

1.  0K  1 

[ Login  Name  ] 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 

E 

User  Name  :  User  0001 

(  Password  j 

y  J  Login  Locally 

…  - .  飞  I  - - . 

Touch  the  [Password]  key. 

A  text  entry  screen  for  entering  the  password  will  appear. 

Enter  your  password  that  is  stored  in  "User  List"  in  the  system 
settings  (administrator). 

If  you  are  logging  in  to  an  LDAP  server,  enter  the  password  that 
is  stored  with  your  LDAP  server  login  name. 

Each  entered  character  will  be  displayed  as  ■■氺 ■■■  When  you 
have  finished  entering  the  password,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

When  authentication  is  by  LDAP  server  and  you  have  different 
passwords  stored  in  "User  List"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator)  and  in  the  LDAP  server,  use  the  password 
stored  in  the  LDAP  server. 


•  When  an  LDAP  server  has  been  stored,  [Auth  to:]  can  be  changed. 

•If  you  are  logging  in  using  a  user  selection  key... 

The  LDAP  server  was  stored  when  your  user  information  was  stored,  and  thus  the  LDAP  server  will  appear  as  the 
authentication  server  when  you  select  your  login  name.  Go  to  step  4. 

•  When  logging  in  using  the  [Direct  Entry]  key... 

Touch  the  [Auth  to:]  key. 


User  Authentication 


Login  Name  I 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 


User  Name  :  Direct  Entry 


Password  1 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 


Auth  to:  I  Login  Locally 


f  Auth  to: 


Select  the  LDAP  server  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


1-20 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


When  you  have  finished  using  the 
machine  and  are  ready  to  log  out,  press 
the  [LOGOUT]  key  (®  )■ 


© 


However,  note  that  the  [LOGOUT]  key  (©)  cannot  be  used  to  log  out  when  a  fax  number  is  being  entered  in  fax 
mode,  as  the  key  is  used  for  fax  number  entry. 

If  a  preset  duration  of  time  elapses  after  the  machine  is  last  used,  the  Auto  Clear  function  will  activate.  When  Auto 
Clear  activates,  logout  takes  place  automatically.  However,  when  PC  Scan  mode  is  used,  logout  does  not  take 
place  when  the  [LOGOUT]  key  (©)  is  pressed  and  Auto  Clear  does  not  operate.  Change  to  a  different  mode  on 
the  machine  and  then  log  out. 


If  an  incorrect  login  name  or  password  is  entered  3  times  in  a  row... 

If  "A  Warning  when  Login  Fails"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  machine  will  lock  for  5  minutes  if 
an  incorrect  login  name  or  password  is  entered  3  times  in  a  row. 

Verify  the  login  name  and  password  that  you  should  use  with  the  administrator  of  the  machine. 


The  administrator  can  clear  the  locked  state. 

This  is  done  from  [User  Control]  and  then  [Default  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

When  LDAP  authentication  is  used,  the  [E-mail  Address]  key  may  appear,  depending  on  the  authentication  method.  If  the 
[E-mail  Address]  key  appears  in  step  3,  touch  the  key. 

A  text  entry  screen  will  appear.  Enter  your  e-mail  address. 


User  Authentication 


Login  Name  I 氺氺 氺氺氺 木氺氺 


User  Name  :  User  0002 


E-mail  Address! 


Auth  to: I  I  Server  \ 


% 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  User  List 

This  is  used  to  store  names  of  users  of  the  machine.  Detailed  information  such  as  the  login  name,  user  number,  and  password  are 
also  stored.  Ask  the  administrator  of  the  machine  for  the  information  that  you  need  to  use  the  machine. 


■21 


Contents 


User  Authentication 

( ^  ] 

f  Login  Name 

j 木木 木本 木 氺氺氺 

せ 

User  Name 

: User  0001 

f  Password 

j 木木 木木 氺氺氺 本木 木木 本木 氺氺 木木 氺氺 木木 氺氺 木木 氺氺氺 氺氺氺 木 

[  Auth  to: 

j  Login  Locally 

(Different  items  will  appear  in  the  screen  when  LDAP 
authentication  is  used.) 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

After  the  entered  login  name  and  password  are  authenticated, 
the  user  count  screen  will  appear  briefly. 


Usage  status :  used/remaining  pages 
Black-white  :  87,654,321/12,345,678 


When  page  limits  have  been  set  in  "Pages  Limit  Group  List"  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  number  of  pages 
remaining  will  appear.  (The  remaining  number  of  pages  that  the 
user  can  use  in  each  mode  (copy,  scan,  etc.)  appears.)  The 
amount  of  time  that  this  screen  appears  can  be  changed  using 
"Message  Time  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


® ® ® (§) 
@® ® @ 
® @ © ®l 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


HOME  SCREEN 


When  the  [HOME]  key  is  pressed  on  the  operation  panel,  the  home  screen  appears  in  the  touch  panel.  Mode  selection 
keys  appear  in  the  home  screen.  These  keys  can  be  touched  to  open  the  base  screen  of  each  mode.  The  [My  Menu] 
key  can  be  touched  to  display  shortcuts  to  functions  stored  in  "My  Menu". 


1st  screen 


(1) 


(2)  (3) 


2nd  screen 
(1) 


⑺ 


(1)  Mode  select  keys 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send, 
document  filing,  and  Sharp  OSA  modes.  Key  names  and 
images  can  be  changed.  (1st  screen  only) 

(2)  Background  Image 

Background  image  of  the  home  screen.  The  background 
image  can  be  changed. 

(3)  [My  Menu]  key 

Touch  to  go  to  your  my  menu  screen.  Key  names  and 
images  can  be  changed. 

(4)  Application  Keys 

Up  to  four  shortcuts  to  Sharp  OSA  applications  can  be 
displayed. 


(5)  Title 

This  shows  the  title  of  the  my  menu  screen. 

(6)  Shortcut  key 

A  registered  function  appears  as  a  shortcut  key. 

The  key  can  be  touched  to  select  the  registered  function 

(7)  User  name 

This  shows  the  name  of  the  logged  in  user. 

The  user  name  appears  when  user  authentication  is 
enabled  on  the  machine. 


Shortcuts  to  functions  can  be  registered  as  keys  in  the  my  menu  screen.  When  a  shortcut  key  is  touched,  the  screen  for 
that  function  appears.  Register  frequently  used  functions  in  the  my  menu  screen  to  quickly  and  conveniently  access 
those  functions.  When  user  authentication  is  used,  the  my  menu  screen  of  "Favorite  Operation  Group"  can  be  displayed. 

Use  the  Web  page  to  configure  the  following  settings: 

•  Changing  the  name  of  the  home  screen  key,  changing  the  image,  storing  an  application  key 

•  Storing  keys  that  appear  in  the  my  menu  screen. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  My  Menu  Settings 

Registration  is  performed  in  [System  Settings]  -  [Operation  Settings]  -  [My  Menu  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  My  Menu  List 

When  user  authentication  is  enabled,  a  my  menu  screen  can  be  set  for  each  "Favorite  Operation  Group  List". 
Registration  is  performed  in  "My  Menu  List"  in  [User  Control]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


1-22 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


REMOTE  OPERATION  OF  THE  MACHINE 

The  remote  operation  function  allows  you  to  operate  the  machine  from  your  computer. 

When  this  function  is  added,  the  same  screen  as  the  operation  panel  screen  appears  on  your  computer.  This  allows  you 
to  operate  the  machine  from  your  computer  in  the  same  way  as  if  you  were  standing  in  front  of  the  machine. 


The  remote  operation  function  can  only  be  used  on  one  computer  at  a  time. 


How  to  use  the  remote  operation  function 

Before  using  this  function,  set  "Operational  Authority"  to  "Allowed"  in  "Remote  Software  Operation"  of  "Remote 
Operation  Settings"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

^7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS  "Remote  Operation  Settings"  (page  7-64) 

To  use  the  remote  operation  function,  the  machine  must  be  connected  to  a  network  and  a  VNC  application  must  be 
installed  on  your  computer  (recommended  VNC  software:  RealVNC). 

The  procedure  for  using  this  function  is  as  follows: 

Example:  RealVNC 

Connect  from  the  computer  to  the 
machine. 

(1)  Start  the  VNC  viewer 

(2)  Enter  the  IP  address  of  the  machine  in  the 
"Server"  entry  box. 

(3)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


⑶ 


(2) 


Follow  the  prompts  on  the  operation  panel  of  the  machine  to  permit  the 
connection. 


© 


When  the  machine  is  connected  to  the  remote  software,  appears  on  the  system  bar  of  the  machine's  touch  panel. 
If  you  wish  to  disconnect,  exit  the  remote  software  or  touch  」_  ■ 


Use  the  operation  panel  in  the  same  way  as  you  would  on  the  machine.  Note  that  a  key  cannot  be  held  down  to  continuously 
change  a  value  being  entered.  For  detailed  procedures,  see  the  chapters  for  each  of  the  functions  in  this  manual. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Remote  Operation  Settings 

Set  the  operation  authority  for  the  remote  operation  function. 


1-23 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


ITEMS  RECORDED  IN  THE  JOB  LOG 

The  machine  records  the  jobs  that  are  performed  in  the  job  log. 

The  main  information  that  is  recorded  in  the  job  log  is  described  below. 


•To  make  it  easy  to  total  the  usage  counts  of  differently  configured  machines,  the  items  recorded  in  the  job  log  are  fixed, 
regardless  of  what  peripheral  devices  are  installed  or  the  objective  of  the  recording. 

•In  some  cases,  job  information  may  not  be  correctly  recorded,  such  as  when  a  power  failure  occurs  during  a  job. 


No. 

Item  name 

Description 

1 

Main  items 

Job  ID 

The  job  ID  is  recorded. 

Job  IDs  appear  in  the  log  as  consecutive  numbers  up  to  a  maximum 
of  99999 9,  after  which  the  count  resets  to 1 . 

2 

Job  Mode 

The  job  mode,  such  as  copy  or  print. 

3 

Computer  Name 

The  name  of  the  computer  that  sent  a  print  job.* 

4 

User  Name 

The  user  name  when  the  user  authentication  function  is  used. 

5 

Login  Name 

The  login  name  when  the  user  authentication  function  is  used. 

6 

Starting  Date  &  Time 

The  date  and  time  the  job  was  started. 

7 

Completing  Date  & 

Time 

The  date  and  time  the  job  was  completed. 

8 

Black  &  White  Total 

Count 

For  a  print  job,  the  total  count  is  recorded. 

For  a  send  job,  the  number  of  transmitted  black  &  white  pages  is 
recorded.  When  a  broadcast  transmission  is  summarized,  the  total 
number  of  pages  is  recorded. 

For  a  scan  to  HDD  job,  the  number  of  stored  black  &  white  pages  is 
recorded. 

9 

Full  Color  Total  Count 

For  a  send  job,  the  total  number  of  transmitted  full  color  pages  is 
recorded.  When  a  broadcast  transmission  is  summarized,  the  total 
number  of  pages  is  recorded. 

For  a  scan  to  HDD  job,  the  number  of  stored  full  color  pages  is 
recorded. 

10 

Count  according  to  size 

Counts  by  original/paper  size  in  color  mode  and  black  &  white  mode. 

11 

Number  of  sheets 
according  to  size 

Indicates  the  sheet  count  by  paper  type. 

12 

Invalid  Paper 
Count(Black  &  White) 

Indicates  the  black  &  white  invalid  sheet  count. 

13 

Number  of  Reserved 

Sets 

Number  of  specified  sets  or  reserved  destinations. 

14 

Number  of  Completed 
Sets 

Number  of  completed  sets  or  number  of  destinations  to  which 
transmission  was  successfully  completed. 

15 

Number  of  Reserved 
Pages 

Number  of  reserved  original  pages  of  a  copy,  print,  scan  job,  or  other 
job. 

16 

Number  of  Completed 
Pages 

Number  of  completed  pages  of  a  set. 

17 

Result 

The  result  of  a  job. 

18 

Error  Cause 

When  an  error  occurs  during  a  job,  the  cause  of  the  error. 

1-24 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


No. 

Item  name 

Description 

19 

Print  Job  Related  Item 

Output 

The  output  mode  of  a  printed  job. 

20 

Staple 

The  status  of  stapling. 

21 

Staple  Count 

The  staple  count. 

22 

Punch  Count 

The  punch  count. 

23 

Fold 

Recorded  in  a  job  that  uses  the  fold  function. 

24 

Fold  Count 

Number  of  folded  pages. 

25 

Printer  Tone 

The  tone  used  for  a  print  job. 

26 

Image  Send  Related 
Item 

Direct  Address 

Address  of  an  image  send  job. 

27 

Sender  Name 

Sender  name  of  an  image  send  job. 

28 

Sender  Address 

Sender  address  of  an  image  send  job. 

29 

Transmission  Type 

Transmission  type  of  an  image  send  job. 

30 

Administrative  Serial 

Number 

Administrative  serial  number  of  an  image  send  job. 

31 

Broadcast  number 

Broadcast  number  of  an  image  send  job. 

32 

Entry  Order 

Reservation  order  for  broadcast  transmission  of  an  image  send  job. 

For  a  serial  polling  job,  this  is  used  to  correlate  communication  with 
printing. 

33 

File  Type 

File  format  of  an  image  send  job. 

34 

Compression 

Mode/Compression 

Ratio 

Compression  mode  and  compression  ratio  of  the  file  of  an  image 
send  job. 

35 

Communication  Time 

Indicates  the  communication  time  of  image  send  jobs. 

36 

Fax  No. 

Indicates  the  stored  sender's  number. 

37 

Document  Filing 

Related  Item 

Document  Filing 

Status  of  document  filing. 

38 

Storing  Mode 

Document  filing  storing  mode. 

39 

File  Name  2 

File  name  of  a  file  stored  by  document  filing  or  retention  print.* 

40 

Data  Size  [KB] 

File  size. 

41 

Common  Functionality 

Color  Setting 

Color  mode  selected  by  user. 

42 

Special  Modes 

Special  modes  selected  when  the  job  was  executed. 

43 

File  Name  2 

Records  the  file  names  of  print  jobs.* 

1-25 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


No. 

Item  name 

Description 

44 

Detailed  Items 

Original  Size 

Size  of  scanned  original. 

For  a  document  filing  print  job,  the  paper  size  of  the  file. 

45 

Original  Type 

Original  type  (text,  printed  photo,  etc.)  set  in  the  exposure  settings 

screen. 

46 

Paper  Size 

For  a  print  job,  the  paper  size. 

For  a  send  job,  the  transmitted  paper  size. 

For  a  Scan  to  HDD  job,  the  paper  size  of  the  stored  file. 

47 

Paper  Type 

The  paper  type  used  for  printing. 

48 

Paper  Property: 

Disable  Duplex 

Indicates  that  duplex  was  disabled  in  "Paper  Type". 

49 

Paper  Property:  Fixed 
Paper  Side 

Indicates  that  fixed  side  was  specified  in  "Paper  Type". 

50 

Paper  Property: 

Disable  Staple 

Indicates  that  stapling  was  disabled  in  "Paper  Type". 

51 

Paper  Property: 

Disable  Punch 

Indicates  that  punching  was  disabled  in  "Paper  Type". 

52 

Duplex  Setup 

Indicates  the  duplex  setting. 

53 

Resolution 

Indicates  the  scanning  resolution. 

54 

Machine  Item 

Model  Name 

Indicates  the  model  name  of  the  machine. 

55 

Unit  Serial  Number 

Indicates  the  serial  number  of  the  machine. 

56 

Name 

Indicates  the  name  of  the  machine  that  is  set  in  the  Web  pages. 

57 

Machine  Location 

Indicates  the  installation  location  of  the  machine  that  is  set  in  the  Web 

pages. 

*ln  some  environments  this  is  not  recorded. 


1-26 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


LOADING  PAPER 


IMPORTANT  POINTS  ABOUT  PAPER 

This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  loading  paper  in  the  paper  trays. 

Be  sure  to  read  this  section  before  loading  paper. 


NAMES  AND  LOCATIONS  OF  TRAYS 

The  names  of  the  trays  are  as  follows. 


paper  drawer  is  installed) 


Bypass  tray 


Tray  5  (when  a  large 
capacity  tray  is  installed) 


THE  MEANING  OF  "R"  IN  PAPER  SIZES 

Some  original  and  paper  sizes  can  be  placed  in  either  the  vertical  or  the  horizontal  orientation.  To  differentiate  between 
vertical  and  horizontal  orientations,  paper  sizes  in  the  horizontal  orientation  will  be  followed  by  an  "R"  (for  example, 
8-1/2"  x11"R, A4R). 

Sizes  that  can  be  placed  only  in  the  horizontal  orientation  (12"  x  18", 1 1 11  x  17",  8-1/2"  x  14", 8-1/2"  x  13", A3W,  A3,  B4) 
do  not  include  the  "R"  in  their  size  indication. 


SWx  11"R 

S-V2n  x  1 1 11 

11"x  17" 

(A4R) 

(A4) 

(A3) 

Horizontal  orientation 

■■R"  is  appended. 


Vertical  orientation 

11 RM  is  not  appended. 


Can  be  placed  only  in  the 
horizontal  orientation 

11 RM  is  not  appended. 


1-27 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


USEABLE  PAPER 

Various  types  of  paper  are  sold.  This  section  explains  what  plain  paper  and  what  special  media  can  be  used  with  the 
machine.  For  detailed  information  on  the  sizes  and  types  of  paper  that  can  be  loaded  in  each  tray  of  the  machine,  see 
the  specifications  in  the  Safety  Guide  and  "Paper  Tray  Settings"  (page  7-13)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 

Plain  paper,  special  media 

Plain  paper  that  can  be  used 

•  SHARP  standard  plain  paper  (21  lbs.  (80  g/m2)).  For  paper  specifications,  see  the  specifications  in  the  Safety  Guide. 

•  Pain  paper  other  than  SHARP  standard  paper  (16  lbs.  to  28  lbs.  (60  g/m2  to 105  g/m2)) 

Recycled  paper,  colored  paper  and  pre-punched  paper  must  meet  the  same  specifications  as  plain  paper.  Contact 
your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department  for  advice  on  using  these  types  of  paper. 

Types  of  paper  that  can  be  used  in  each  tray 

The  following  types  of  paper  can  be  loaded  in  each  tray. 


Tray  1/Tray  2 

Tray  3/T ray  4 

Bypass  tray 

Tray  5  (large  capacity 
tray) 

Plain  paper 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Pre-printed 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Recycle  Paper 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Letter  head 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Pre-punched 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Color 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Heavy  paper  *1 

Permitted 

Permitted 

Permitted 

一 

Labels 

一 

一 

Permitted 

一 

Transparency  film 

一 

一 

Permitted 

一 

Tab  paper 

一 

一 

Permitted 

一 

Envelopes 

一 

一 

Permitted 

一 

Thin  paper*2 

一 

一 

Permitted 

一 

*1  Heavy  paper  up  to 110  lbs.  (209  g/m2)  can  be  used. 

*2  Thin  paper  from  15  lbs.  to 16  lbs.  (56  g/m2  to  59  g/m2)  can  be  used. 


1-28 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Print  side  face  up  or  face  down 

Paper  is  loaded  with  the  print  side  face  up  or  face  down  depending  on  the  paper  type  and  tray. 

Trays  1  to  4 

l_oad  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  up. 

However,  if  the  paper  type  is  "Letter  Head"  or  "Pre-Printed",  load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  down*. 

Bypass  tray  and  tray  5 

Load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  down. 

However,  if  the  paper  type  is  "Letter  Head"  or  "Pre-Printed",  load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  up*. 

*  If  "Disabling  of  Duplex"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  load  the  paper  in  the  normal  way  (face  up  in 
trays  1  to  4;  face  down  in  the  bypass  tray  and  tray  5). 


Paper  that  cannot  be  used 

•  Special  media  for  inkjet  printers 

(fine  paper,  glossy  paper,  glossy  film,  etc.) 

•  Carbon  paper  or  thermal  paper 

•  Pasted  paper 

•  Paper  with  clips 

•  Paper  with  fold  marks 
•Torn  paper 

•  Oil-feed  transparency  film 

•  Thin  paper  less  than  15  lbs.  (56  g/m2) 

•  Paper  that  is  80  lbs.  (210  g/m2)  or  heavier 

Non-recommended  paper 

•  Iron-on  transfer  paper 

•  Japanese  paper 

•  Perforated  paper 


•  Irregularly  shaped  paper 

•  Stapled  paper 

•  Damp  paper 

•  Curled  paper 

•  Paper  on  which  either  the  print  side  or  the  reverse  side 
has  been  printed  on  by  another  printer  or  multifunction 
device. 

•  Paper  with  a  wave-like  pattern  due  to  moisture 
absorption 


•  Various  types  of  plain  paper  and  special  media  are  sold.  Some  types  cannot  be  used  with  the  machine.  Contact  your 
dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department  for  advice  on  using  these  types  of  paper. 

•  The  image  quality  and  toner  fusibility  of  paper  may  change  due  to  ambient  conditions,  operating  conditions,  and  paper 
characteristics,  resulting  in  image  quality  inferior  to  that  of  SHARP  standard  paper.  Contact  your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP 
Service  Department  for  advice  on  using  these  types  of  paper. 

•  The  use  of  non-recommended  or  prohibited  paper  may  result  in  skewed  feeding,  misfeeds,  poor  toner  fusing  (the  toner 
does  not  adhere  to  the  paper  well  and  can  be  rubbed  off),  or  machine  failure. 

•  The  use  of  non-recommended  paper  may  result  in  misfeeds  or  poor  image  quality.  Before  using  non-recommended  paper, 
check  if  printing  can  be  performed  properly. 


1-29 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


TRAY  SETTINGS  FOR  TRAY  1  TO  4 


LOADING  PAPER  AND  CHANGING  THE  PAPER  SIZE 

A  maximum  of  500  sheets  of  paper  from  size  5-1/2"  x  8_1/2"R  to  size  1 1 11  x  1 7"  (A5R  to  A3)  can  be  loaded  in  trays  1  and  2. 
A  maximum  of  500  sheets  of  paper  from  size  7-1/4"  x  10-1/2MR  to  size  1 1H  x  17"  (B5R  to  A3)  can  be  loaded  in  trays  3  and  4. 


Pull  out  the  paper  tray. 

Gently  pull  the  tray  out  until  it  stops. 

To  load  paper,  go  to  step  3.  To  load  a  different  size  of  paper,  go 
to  the  next  step. 


Adjust  the  guide  plates  A  and  B  by 
squeezing  their  lock  levers  and  sliding 
them  to  match  the  vertical  and 
horizontal  dimensions  of  the  paper  to  be 
loaded. 

The  guide  plates  A  and  B  are  slidable.  Slide  each  guide  plate 
while  squeezing  its  lock  lever. 


Fan  the  paper. 

Fan  the  paper  well  before  loading  it.  If  the  paper  is  not  fanned, 
multiple  sheets  may  feed  at  once  and  cause  a  misfeed. 


Insert  the  paper  into  the  tray. 

Load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  up.  The  stack  must  not 
be  higher  than  the  indicator  line  (maximum  of  500  sheets). 


1-30 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Gently  push  the  paper  tray  into  the 
machine. 

Push  the  tray  firmly  all  the  way  into  the  machine. 


If  you  loaded  a  different  type  or  size  of  paper  than  was  loaded  previously,  be  sure  to  change  the  "Paper  Tray  Settings" 
in  the  system  settings.  If  these  settings  are  not  configured  correctly,  automatic  paper  selection  will  not  operate 
correctly  and  printing  may  take  place  on  the  wrong  size  or  type  of  paper,  or  a  misfeed  may  occur. 


Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  tray  or  press  down  on  the  tray. 


System  Settings:  Paper  Tray  Settings  (page  7-13) 

Change  these  settings  when  you  change  the  size  or  type  of  paper  loaded  in  a  tray. 


1-31 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


TRAY  SETTINGS  OF  TRAY  5  (LARGE 
CAPACITY  TRAY) 

LOADING  PAPER 

The  large  capacity  tray  can  hold  up  to  3500  sheets  of  8-1/2"  x  1 1 11  or  A4  size  paper  (20  lbs.  (80  g/m2)). 

The  paper  size  of  tray  5  can  only  be  changed  by  a  SHARP  service  technician.  If  you  need  to  change  the  paper  size, 
consult  your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department. 


Pull  out  the  paper  tray. 

Gently  pull  the  tray  out  until  it  stops. 


Fan  the  paper. 

Fan  the  paper  well  before  loading  it.  If  the  paper  is  not  fanned, 
multiple  sheets  may  feed  at  once  and  cause  a  misfeed. 


Place  the  paper  in  the  center  of  the 
paper  table. 

Load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  down.  The  stack  must 
not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line  (maximum  of  3500  sheets). 


1-32 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Gently  push  the  paper  tray  into  the 
machine. 

Push  the  tray  firmly  all  the  way  into  the  machine. 


If  you  loaded  a  different  type  of  paper  than  was  loaded  previously,  be  sure  to  change  the  paper  type  setting  in  "Paper 
Tray  Settings"  in  the  system  settings. 


①  Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  tray  or  press  down  on  the  tray. 


System  Settings:  Paper  Tray  Settings  (page  7-13) 

Change  these  settings  if  you  have  loaded  a  different  type  of  paper  in  the  tray. 


1-33 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY 

The  bypass  tray  can  be  used  to  print  on  plain  paper,  envelopes,  label  sheets,  tab  paper,  and  other  special  media.  Up  to 
100  sheets  of  paper  can  be  loaded  (up  to  40  sheets  of  heavy  paper)  for  continuous  printing  similar  to  the  other  trays. 


When  loading  paper  larger  than  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  or  A4R,  be  sure 
to  pull  out  the  bypass  tray  extension.  Pull  the  bypass  tray 
extension  all  the  way  out.  If  the  bypass  tray  extension  is  not 
pulled  all  the  way  out,  the  size  of  the  loaded  paper  will  not  be 
correctly  displayed. 


① 


Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  bypass  tray  or  press  down  on  the  tray. 


Set  the  bypass  tray  guides  to  the  width 
of  the  paper. 


Insert  the  paper  along  the  bypass  tray 
guides  all  the  way  into  the  bypass  tray 
until  it  stops. 

Load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  down. 


•  Do  not  force  the  paper  in. 

•  If  the  bypass  tray  guides  are  set  wider  than  the  paper,  move  the  bypass  tray  guides  in  until  they  correctly  fit  the 
width  of  the  paper.  If  the  bypass  guides  are  set  too  wide,  the  paper  may  skew  or  be  creased. 


Contents 


1-34 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


IMPORTANT  POINTS  WHEN  USING  THE  BYPASS  TRAY 

•  When  using  plain  paper  other  than  SHARP  standard  paper  or  special  media  other  than  SHARP-recommended 
transparency  film,  or  when  printing  on  the  reverse  side  of  previously  used  paper,  the  paper  must  be  loaded  one  sheet 
at  a  time.  Loading  more  than  one  sheet  at  a  time  will  cause  misfeeds. 

•  Before  loading  paper,  straighten  any  curling  in  the  paper. 

•  When  adding  paper,  remove  any  paper  remaining  in  the  bypass  tray,  combine  it  with  the  paper  to  be  added,  and 
reload  as  a  single  stack.  If  paper  is  added  without  removing  the  remaining  paper,  a  misfeed  may  result. 


Inserting  paper 


Place  paper  that  is  7-1/4"  x  10-1/2"  (A5)  or  smaller  in  the  horizontal 
orientation. 


Inserting  tab  paper 

To  print  on  tab  paper,  load  tab  paper  in  the  bypass  tray  with  the  print  side  face  down. 


•  Use  only  tab  paper  that  is  made  of  paper.  Tab  paper  made  of  a  material  other  than  paper  (film,  etc.)  cannot  be  used. 

•  To  print  on  the  tabs  of  tab  paper... 

In  copy  mode,  use  "Tab  Copy"  in  the  special  modes.  In  print  mode,  use  the  tab  print  function. 


Inserting  transparency  film 


•  Use  SHARP-recommended  transparency  film.  When  inserting 
transparency  film  in  the  bypass  tray,  the  rounded  corner 
should  be  at  the  front  left  when  the  film  is  oriented  horizontally, 
or  at  the  far  left  when  the  film  is  oriented  vertically. 

•  When  loading  multiple  sheets  of  transparency  film  in  the 
bypass  tray,  be  sure  to  fan  the  sheets  several  times  before 
loading. 

•  When  printing  on  transparency  film,  be  sure  to  remove  each 
sheet  as  it  exits  the  machine.  Allowing  sheets  to  stack  in  the 
output  tray  may  result  in  curling. 


1-35 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Loading  envelopes 

When  inserting  envelopes  in  the  bypass  tray,  place  them  aligned  to  the  left  side  in  the  orientation  shown  below. 
Only  the  front  side  of  envelopes  can  be  printed  on.  Be  sure  to  place  the  front  side  face  down. 


① 


•  Do  not  print  on  both  sides  of  an  envelope.  This  may  result  in  misfeeds  or  poor  print  quality. 

•  Some  operating  environments  may  cause  creasing,  smudging,  misfeeds,  poor  toner  fusing,  or  machine  failure. 


Restrictions  apply  to  some  types  of  envelopes.  For  more  information,  consult  a  qualified  service  technician. 


Important  points  when  using  envelopes 

•  Do  not  use  the  following  envelopes: 

Envelopes  with  metal  clasps,  plastic  hooks,  or  ribbon  hooks;  envelopes  closed  with  string,  envelopes  with  windows  or 
backing,  envelopes  with  an  uneven  front  surface  due  to  embossing,  double-layer  envelopes,  envelopes  with  an 
adhesive  for  sealing,  hand-made  envelopes,  envelopes  with  air  inside,  envelopes  with  creases  or  fold  marks,  torn  or 
damaged  envelopes 

•  Envelopes  with  an  incorrectly  aligned  corner  gluing  position  on  the  back  cannot  be  used  as  creasing  may  result. 

•  Print  quality  is  not  guaranteed  in  the  area  1 3/32" (10  mm)  around  the  edges  of 
the  envelope. 

•  Print  quality  is  not  guaranteed  on  parts  of  envelopes  where  there  is  a  large 
step-like  change  of  thickness,  such  as  on  four-layer  parts  or  parts  less  than 
three  layers. 

•  Print  quality  is  not  guaranteed  on  envelopes  having  peel  off  flaps  for  sealing  the 
envelopes. 


Contents 


1-36 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Fusing  unit  pressure  adjusting  levers 

In  some  cases  damage  to  the  envelopes  or  smudging  may  occur  even  if  envelopes  within  the  specifications  are  used. 
This  problem  may  be  alleviated  by  shifting  the  fusing  unit  pressure  adjusting  levers  from  their  "normal  pressure  position" 
to  the  "lower  pressure  position".  Follow  the  procedure  on  the  this  page. 


Pull  out  the  right  side  cover. 

While  pushing  up  the  open/close  lever  on  the  right  side  cover, 
gently  open  the  cover. 


Move  the  fusing  unit  pressure  adjusting 
levers  (two)  to  the  lower  pressure 
position  as  shown. 


Return  the  lever  to  the  normal  position 
when  finished  feeding  envelopes. 


/K  Caution 

The  fusing  unit  is  hot.  Take  care  not  to  burn  yourself  when  operating  the  fusing  unit  pressure  adjusting  levers. 

®Be  sure  to  return  the  levers  to  the  "normal  pressure  position"  before  printing  or  copying  on  paper 
other  than  envelopes.  Otherwise,  fusing  problems,  paper  misfeeds,  or  equipment  failure  may  occur. 


1-37 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


ORIGINALS 


This  section  explains  how  to  place  originals  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  on  the  document  glass. 


PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL 

PLACING  ORIGINALS  IN  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 
FEEDER 


This  section  explains  how  to  place  originals  in  the  automatic  document  feeder. 

Allowed  original  sizes 


Minimum  original  size 

Maximum  original  size 

Standard  sizes 

Standard  sizes 

(Minimum  size  that  can  be  automatically  detected) 

(Maximum  size  that  can  be  automatically  detected) 

5-1/2"  (height)  x  8-1/2"  (width) 

11" (height)  x  17"  (width) 

A5: 148  mm  (height)  x  210  mm  (width) 

A3:  297  mm  (height)  x  420  mm  (width) 

Non-standard  sizes 

12"  x  18"  size  paper  (A3W)  cannot  be  used. 

(Minimum  size  that  can  be  specified  manually) 

Non-standard  sizes 

5-1/8"  (height)  x  5-1/2"  (width) 

(Maximum  size  that  can  be  specified  manually) 

131  mm  (height)  x  140  mm  (width) 

Copy  mode:  11-5/8"  (height)  x  17"  (width) 

297  mm  (height)  x  432  mm  (width) 

Image  send  mode: 11" (height)  x  39-3/8"  (width) 

297  mm  (height)  x  1000  mm  (width) 

When  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size,  see  the  appropriate  explanation  below  for  the  mode  you  are  using. 
隊 2.  COPIER  "SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE"  (page  2-27) 

暖 4.  FACSIMILE  "IMAGE  SETTINGS"  (page  4-45) 

暖 5.  SCANNER  /  INTERNET  FAX  "IMAGE  SETTINGS"  (page  5-53) 

Allowed  original  weights 


MX-M363N/M453N/M503N 

1 - sided  copying:  9  lbs.  to  34  lbs.  (35  g/m2  to 128  g/m2) 

2- sided  copying: 15  lbs.  to  34  lbs.  (50  g/m2  to 128  g/m2) 

MX-M283N 

1 - sided  copying:  9  lbs.  to  34  lbs.  (35  g/m2  to 128  g/m2) 

2- sided  copying: 15  lbs.  to  28  lbs.  (50  g/m2  to 105  g/m2) 

To  scan  originals  from  9  lbs.  to 14  lbs.  (35  g/m^  to  49  g/m2),  use  "Slow  Scan  Mode"  in  the  special  modes.  Scanning 
without  using  "Slow  Scan  Mode"  may  result  in  original  misfeeds. 

When  "Slow  Scan  Mode"  is  selected,  automatic  2-sided  scanning  is  not  possible. 


1-38 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Make  sure  an  original  does  not  remain 
on  the  document  glass. 

Open  the  automatic  document  feeder,  make  sure  that  an 
original  is  not  on  the  document  glass,  and  then  gently  close  the 
automatic  document  feeder. 


Adjust  the  original  guides  to  the  size  of 
the  originals. 


Place  the  original. 

Make  sure  the  edges  of  the  originals  are  even. 

Insert  the  originals  face  up  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder 
tray. 

Insert  a  number  of  originals  that  does  not  exceed  the  indicator 
line  on  the  document  feeder  tray. 

Up  to 100  sheets  can  be  inserted. 

Be  sure  to  remove  originals  that  have  been  finished  scanning 
from  the  original  exit  tray. 


•  Originals  of  different  sizes  can  be  placed  together  in  the  automatic  document  feeder.  In  this  case,  select  "Mixed  Size 
Original"  in  the  special  modes  of  the  mode  you  are  using. 

•  Before  inserting  originals  into  the  document  feeder  tray,  be  sure  to  remove  any  staples  or  paper  clips. 

•If  originals  have  damp  spots  due  to  correction  fluid,  ink  or  pasteup  glue,  wait  until  the  originals  are  dry  before  making 
copies.  Otherwise  the  interior  of  the  document  feeder  or  the  document  glass  may  be  soiled. 

•  Do  not  use  the  following  originals.  Incorrect  original  size  detection,  original  misfeeds,  and  smudges  may  result. 

Transparency  film, tracing  paper,  carbon  paper,  thermal  paper  or  originals  printed  with  thermal  transfer  ink  ribbon  should 
not  be  fed  through  the  document  feeder. 〇 riginals  to  be  fed  through  the  feeder  should  not  be  damaged,  crumpled,  folded, 
loosely  pasted  together,  or  have  cut-out  holes.  Originals  with  multiple  punched  holes  other  than  two-hole  or  three-hole 
punched  paper  may  not  feed  correctly. 


•  When  using  originals  with  two  or  three  holes,  place  them  so  that 
the  punched  edge  is  at  a  position  away  from  the  feed  slot  of  the 
document  feeder  tray. 


Feed  slot 


Hole 

positions 


Contents 


1-39 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


PLACING  THE  ORIGINAL  ON  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS 

This  section  explains  how  to  place  the  original  on  the  document  glass. 


Allowed  original  sizes 

Maximum  original  size 

Standard  sizes 

11" (height)  x  17"  (width) 

A3:  297  mm  (height)  x  420  mm  (width) 
Non-standard  sizes 
11-5/8"  (height)  x  17"  (width) 

297  mm  (height)  x  432  mm  (width) 


When  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size,  see  the 
appropriate  explanation  below  for  the  mode  you  are 
using. 

^2.  COPIER  "SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE" 
(page  2-27) 

暖 4.  FACSIMILE  "IMAGE  SETTINGS"  (page  4-45) 
隊 5.  SCANNER/  INTERNET  FAX  "IMAGE 
SETTINGS"  (page  5-53) 


Place  the  original. 


Place  the  original  face  down  in  the  far  left  corner  of  the 
document  glass. 

Document  glass  scale  Document  glass  scale 


The  original  should  always  be  placed  in  the  far  left  corner, 
regardless  of  its  size. 

Align  the  top  left  corner  of  the  original  with  the  tip  of  the  M  mark. 


① 


Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector. 

Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object  underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  and  prevent 
correct  detection  of  the  original  size. 


If  you  are  placing  a  small  non-standard  size  original  on  the  document  glass,  it  is  convenient  to  place  a  blank  sheet  of 
8-1/2"  x  11"  or  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A4  or  B5)  paper  on  top  of  the  original  to  facilitate  detection  of  the  original  size. 


1-40 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Close  the  automatic  document  feeder. 

After  placing  the  original,  be  sure  to  close  the  automatic 
document  feeder.  If  left  open,  parts  outside  of  the  original  will 
be  copied  black,  causing  excessive  use  of  toner. 


Placing  a  thick  book 

When  scanning  a  thick  book  or  other  thick  original,  follow  the  steps  below  to  press  the  book  down. 

(1)  Push  up  the  far  side  of  the  automatic 
document  feeder. 

The  hinges  supporting  the  automatic  document  feeder 
will  release  and  the  rear  side  of  the  automatic  document 
feeder  will  rise. 

(2)  Slowly  close  the  automatic  document 
feeder. 

Do  not  press  a  book  or  other  bulky  document  down  too 
hard  on  the  glass  with  the  automatic  document  feeder. 

If  shadows  around  the  edges  of  the  document  are  a 
problem,  use  the  erase  function. 

隊  Z  COPIER  "ERASING  PERIPHERAL 
SHADOWS  (Erase)"  (page  2-46) 


/j\  Caution 

•  Close  the  automatic  document  feeder  slowly.  Abruptly  closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  may  damage  it. 

•  Take  care  that  your  fingers  are  not  pinched  when  closing  the  automatic  document  feeder. 


The  automatic  document  feeder  cannot  be  closed  correctly  in  this  state.  To  return  the  automatic  document  feeder  to  its 
normal  state,  open  it  completely  and  then  close  it. 


1-41 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


PERIPHERAL  DEVICES 


This  section  describes  the  peripheral  devices  that  can  be  used  with  the  machine  and  explains  how  to  use  the  finisher  and 
saddle  stitch  finisher,  as  well  as  Sharp  OSA  (application  communication  module  and  external  account  module). 


PERIPHERAL  DEVICES 

Peripheral  devices  can  be  installed  on  the  machine  to  increase  its  range  of  functionality. 

The  peripheral  devices  are  generally  optional,  however,  some  models  include  certain  peripheral  devices  as  standard 
equipment. 

(As  of  February,  2009) 


Product  name 

Product  number 

Description 

Stand/1  x500  sheet  paper  drawer 

MX-DEX8 

Additional  tray.  A  maximum  500  sheets  of  paper  can  be  loaded 
in  each  tray. 

Stand/2x500  sheet  paper  drawer 

MX-DEX9 

Large  capacity  tray 

MX-LCX1 

Additional  tray.  A  maximum  of  3500  sheets  of  paper  can  be 
loaded  in  the  tray. 

To  install  the  tray,  a  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  or  stand/2 
x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is  required. 

Exit  tray  unit 
(Right  tray) 

MX-TRX2 

This  can  be  added  to  the  right  side  of  the  machine. 

Finisher 

MX-FNX9 

Output  device  that  enables  the  use  of  the  staple  function  and 
offset  function. 

Punch  module 

MX-PNX1B 

Punches  holes  in  copies  and  other  output.  Requires  a  finisher. 

Finisher  (large  stacker) 

MX-FN11 

Output  device  that  enables  the  use  of  the  staple  function  and 
offset  function. 

To  install  the  finisher  (large  stacker),  a  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper 
drawer  or  stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is  required. 

Punch  module 

MX-PNX6B 

Punches  holes  in  copies  and  other  output.  Requires  a  finisher 
(large  stacker). 

Saddle  stitch  finisher 

MX-FN10 

Output  device  that  enables  use  of  the  staple  function,  offset 
function  and  pamphlet  copy  function. 

To  install  the  saddle  stitch  finisher,  a  stand/1  x  500  sheet  paper 
drawer  or  stand/2  x  500  sheet  paper  drawer  is  required. 

Paper  pass  unit 

MX-RBX3 

Required  when  a  finisher  (large  stacker)  /  saddle  stitch  finisher  is 
installed. 

Punch  module 

MX-PNX5B 

Punches  holes  in  copies  and  other  output.  Requires  a  saddle 
stitch  finisher. 

Barcode  font  kit 

AR-PF1 

Adds  barcode  fonts  to  the  machine. 

PS3  expansion  kit 

MX-PKX1 

Enables  the  machine  to  be  used  as  a  Postscript  compatible 
printer. 

XPS  expansion  kit 

MX-PUX1 

The  machine  can  be  used  as  an  XPS  compatible  printer.  For 
details,  consult  your  dealer. 

To  install  this  kit,  a  1  GB  expansion  memory  board  (MX-SMX3) 
is  required. 

1-42 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Product  name 

Product  number 

Description 

Expansion  memory  board 

MX-SMX3 

This  expands  the  memory  that  can  be  used  on  the  machine. 

Internet  fax  expansion  kit 

MX-FWX1 

Enables  Internet  Fax. 

Facsimile  expansion  kit 

MX-FXX2 

Adds  a  fax  function. 

Application  integration  module 

MX-AMX1 

The  application  integration  module  can  be  combined  with  the 
network  scanner  function  to  append  a  metadata  file  to  a  scanned 
image  file. 

External  account  module 

MX-AMX3 

This  is  required  to  use  an  external  account  application  on  the 
machine. 

Enhanced  compression  kit 

MX-EBX3 

A  scanned  document  can  be  saved  in  Compact  PDF  format. 
Compact  PDF  results  in  a  smaller  size  than  regular  PDF. 

Sharpdesk  1  license  kit 

MX-USX1 

This  software  enables  integrated  management  of  documents 
and  computer  files. 

Sharpdesk  5  license  kit 

MX-USX5 

Sharpdesk  10  license  kit 

MX-US10 

Sharpdesk  50  license  kit 

MX-US50 

Sharpdesk  100  license  kit 

MX-USAO 

Stamp  unit 

AR-SU1 

This  stamps  each  original  page  after  it  is  scanned  in  image  send 
mode. 

1-43 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


FINISHER 

The  finisher  is  equipped  with  the  offset  function,  which  offsets  each  set  of  output  from  the  previous  set. 
In  addition,  each  set  of  sorted  output  can  be  stapled. 

An  optional  hole  punching  unit  can  also  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output. 


PART  NAMES 


The  following  parts  can  be  accessed  when  the  finisher  is  open. 

(1)  (2)  ⑶ 


(1) 


Output  tray 

Stapled  and  offset  output  is  delivered  to  this  tray. 

The  tray  is  slidable.  Extend  the  tray  for  large  output 
(12Mx  18M, 1 1n  x  17", 8-1 /2Mx  14", 8-1 /2M  x  13", 

8-1/2"  x  13-1/2", 8-1/2"  x  13-2/5", 8-1/2"  x  11MR, 

7-1/4"  x  10-1/2MR,  A3W,  A3,  A4R,  B4,  B5R,  8K  and  16KR 
sizes). 

Lever 

Use  this  to  move  the  finisher  in  order  to  remove  a  paper 
misfeed,  replace  staples,  or  remove  a  staple  jam. 

Punch  waste  box  (when  a  punch  module  is  installed) 

This  holds  punch  waste. 


Front  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed,  replace 
staples,  remove  a  staple  jam,  or  remove  the  punch  waste 
box. 

Staple  case 

This  holds  the  staple  cartridge.  Pull  the  case  out  to 
replace  the  staple  cartridge  or  remove  a  staple  jam. 

Staple  case  release  lever 

Use  this  to  remove  the  staple  case. 


(g) : 


A  finisher  cannot  be  installed  simultaneously  with  a  finisher  (large  stacker)  or  a  saddle  stitch  finisher. 

Use  caution  when  you  turn  on  the  power  and  when  printing  is  taking  place,  as  the  tray  may  move  up  and  down. 


SUPPLIES 

The  finisher  requires  the  following  staple  cartridge: 
Staple  cartridge 

(approx.  5000  staples  per  cartridge  x  3  cartridges) 
MX-SCX1 


1-44 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


FINISHER  MAINTENANCE 

When  the  staple  cartridge  runs  out  of  staples,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  operation  panel.  Follow  the  procedure  below 
to  replace  the  staple  cartridge. 

Replacing  the  staple  cartridge 


1-45 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Replace  the  staple  case. 

Push  the  staple  case  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


Slide  the  finisher  back  to  the  right. 

Gently  slide  the  finisher  back  to  the  right  until  it  locks  into  its 
original  position. 


Make  a  test  print  or  copy  in  staple  sort  mode  to  verify  that  stapling  takes  place  correctly. 


1-46 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


FINISHER  (LARGE  STACKER) 

The  finisher  (large  stacker)  is  equipped  with  the  offset  function,  which  offsets  each  set  of  output  from  the  previous  set,  and 
the  staple  sort  function,  which  staples  each  set  of  output. 

A  punch  module  can  also  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output. 

PART  NAMES 


(1)  Stapler  compiler 

This  temporarily  stacks  paper  to  be  stapled. 

(2)  Output  trays  (upper  tray,  lower  tray) 

Stapled  and  offset  output  is  delivered  to  these  trays. 

The  trays  are  slidable.  For  large-size  output  (12"  x  18", 
IT  x  17M,  8-1/211  x  14M,  8-1/211  x  13",  8-1/2"  x  13-1/2", 
8-1/2"  x  13-2/5",  A3W,  A3,  B4  and  8K  sizes),  extend  the 
tray. 


Open  this  cover  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed. 

Front  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  replace  the  staple  cartridge  or  remove 
a  staple  jam. 


•A  paper  pass  unit  is  required  to  install  a  finisher  (large  stacker). 

•  Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  finisher  (large  stacker)  or  press  down  on  the  finisher  (large  stacker). 

•  Use  caution  when  you  turn  on  the  power  and  when  printing  is  taking  place,  as  the  output  tray  may  move  up  and  down. 
•A  finisher  (large  stacker)  cannot  be  installed  simultaneously  with  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  or  a  finisher. 


SUPPLIES 

The  finisher  (large  stacker)  require  the  following  staple  cartridge: 
Staple  cartridge  (approx.  5000  staples  x  3  cartridges) 


1-47 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


FINISHER  (LARGE  STACKER)  MAINTENANCE 

When  the  staple  cartridge  runs  out  of  staples,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  operation  panel.  Follow  the  procedure  below 
to  replace  the  staple  cartridge. 

Replacing  the  cartridge 


Open  the  front  cover. 


Squeeze  the  green  parts  of  the  staple 
case  and  pull  the  case  up  and  then  out. 


Remove  the  empty  staple  cartridge. 

Press  the  lock  button  to  release  the  staple  case  cover  and  then 
remove  the  staple  cartridge. 


When  staples  remain,  the  staple  cartridge  cannot  be  removed. 


Insert  a  new  staple  cartridge  into  the 
staple  case. 

Push  the  staple  cartridge  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


Do  not  remove  the  seal  from  the  cartridge  before  inserting  the  cartridge  into  the  case. 


1-48 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Pull  the  seal  that  holds  the  staples 
straight  out. 


Push  the  staple  case  firmly  back  in. 

Push  the  staple  case  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


Close  the  front  cover. 


Make  a  test  print  or  copy  in  staple  sort  mode  to  verify  that  stapling  takes  place  correctly. 


Contents 


1-49 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


SADDLE  STITCH  FINISHER 


This  includes  the  offset  function  that  offsets  each  set  of  output  from  the  previous  set,  the  staple  sort  function  that  staples 
each  set  of  output,  the  saddle  stitch  function  that  automatically  staples  and  folds  output,  and  the  fold  function  that  folds 
output  in  half.  An  optional  hole  punching  unit  can  also  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output. 


PART  NAMES 


(1)  Stapler  compiler 

This  temporarily  stacks  paper  to  be  stapled. 

(2)  Output  tray 

Stapled  and  offset  output  is  delivered  to  this  tray. 

The  tray  is  slidable.  Extend  the  tray  for  large  output 
(12Mx  18", 1 1n  x  17", 8-1 /2Mx  14", 8-1 /2M  x  13", 

8-1 /2Mx  13-1/2", 8-1/211  x  13-2/5",  A3W,  A3,  B4  and  8K 
sizes). 


Open  this  cover  to  replace  the  staple  cartridge  or  remove 
a  staple  jam. 

Saddle  stitch  tray 

Stapled  and  folded  output  is  delivered  to  this  tray. 

Top  cover 

Open  this  cover  to  remove  a  paper  misfeed. 

Front  cover 

Open  this  to  replace  the  staple  cartridge,  remove 
jammed  staples,  or  remove  misfed  paper. 


A  paper  pass  unit  is  required  to  install  a  saddle  stitch  finisher. 

Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  saddle  stitch  finisher  or  press  down  on  the  saddle  stitch  finisher. 

Use  caution  when  you  turn  on  the  power  and  when  printing  is  taking  place,  as  the  tray  may  move  up  and  down. 
A  saddle  stitch  finisher  cannot  be  installed  simultaneously  with  a  finisher  (large  stacker)  or  a  finisher. 


SUPPLIES 


The  saddle  stitch  finisher  requires  the  following  staple  cartridge: 

Finisher  unit  Saddle  stitch  unit 

Staple  cartridge  (approx.  5000  staples  per  cartridge  x  3  Staple  cartridge  (approx.  2000  staples  per  cartridge  x  3 

cartridges)  MX-SCX1  cartridges)  AR-SC3 


1-50 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


SADDLE  STITCH  FINISHER  MAINTENANCE 

When  the  staple  cartridge  runs  out  of  staples,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  operation  panel.  Follow  the  procedure  below 
to  replace  the  staple  cartridge. 

Replacing  the  staple  cartridge  (finisher  unit) 


While  pulling  the  lever, slide  the  saddle 
stitch  finisher  to  the  left  until  it  stops. 


Lower  the  staple  case  release  lever  and 
remove  the  staple  case. 

Pull  the  staple  case  out  to  the  right. 


Remove  the  empty  staple  cartridge  from 
the  staple  case. 


Insert  a  new  staple  cartridge  into  the 
staple  case  as  shown. 

Push  the  staple  cartridge  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


1-51 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Replace  the  staple  case. 

Push  the  staple  case  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


Make  a  test  print  or  copy  in  staple  sort  mode  to  verify  that  stapling  takes  place  correctly. 


1-52 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Replacing  the  staple  cartridge  (saddle  stitch  unit) 

Before  starting  this  procedure,  remove  all  output  from  the  output  tray  of  the  saddle  stitch  finisher.  Do  not  replace 
removed  output  in  the  output  tray. 


Load  the  new  staple  cartridge. 

Remove  the  cover  from  the  staple  cartridge  and  install  the 
cartridge. 


Close  the  side  cover. 


Make  a  test  print  or  copy  using  the  saddle  stitch  function  to  verify  that  stapling  takes  place  correctly. 


1-53 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


PUNCH  MODULE 

A  punch  module  can  be  installed  to  punch  holes  in  output.  To  install  a  punch  module,  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher 
is  required. 


DISCARDING  PUNCH  WASTE 

Punch  waste  from  punched  holes  is  collected  in  the  punch  waste  box. 
Follow  the  steps  below  to  discard  the  punch  waste. 


Finisher 


Open  the  cover. 


Grasp  the  punch  waste  box  handle, 
gently  pull  out  the  box,  and  discard  the 
punch  waste. 

Discard  the  punch  waste  in  a  plastic  bag  or  other  container, 
taking  care  not  to  let  the  waste  scatter. 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Finisher  (large  stacker) 


Open  the  front  cover  of  the  punch 
module. 


Pull  out  the  punch  waste  box  and 
discard  the  punch  waste. 

Discard  the  punch  waste  in  a  plastic  bag  or  other  container, 
taking  care  not  to  let  the  waste  scatter. 


Replace  the  punch  waste  box. 

If  the  punch  waste  box  is  not  replaced  properly,  printing  will  not 
be  possible  using  the  punch  function. 


1-55 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Saddle  stitch  finisher 


Pull  out  the  punch  waste  box  and 
discard  the  punch  waste. 

Discard  the  punch  waste  in  a  plastic  bag  or  other  container, 
taking  care  not  to  let  the  waste  scatter. 


Return  the  punch  waste  box  to  its 
original  position. 


Close  the  front  cover. 


1-56 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


SHARP  OSA 

Sharp  OSA  (Open  Systems  Architecture)  is  an  architecture  that  enables  external  applications  to  be  directly  connected  to 
a  digital  multifunction  machine  over  a  network. 

When  a  digital  multifunction  machine  that  supports  Sharp  OSA  is  used,  the  operation  panel  controls  and  functions  of  the 
machine  such  as  scan  send  can  be  linked  to  an  external  application. 

There  are  two  types  of  external  applications:  "standard  application"  and  "external  account  application".  An  "external 
account  application"  is  used  for  centralized  account  management  of  a  multifunction  machine  on  a  network.  A  "standard 
application"  refers  to  all  other  applications. 

APPLICATION  COMMUNICATION  MODULE 

When  a  previously  registered  standard  application  is  selected  in  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine,  the  machine  retrieves 
the  operation  screen  from  the  registered  URL  Control  of  the  operation  screen  is  performed  by  the  standard  application, 
and  Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Network  Folder,  and  HTTPS  transmission  can  be  executed. 

Standard  application  setup 

To  enable  a  general  application  in  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine,  click  [Application  Settings]  in  the  administrator  menu 
frame,  and  then  [External  Applications  Settings]  and  [Standard  Applications].  Configure  settings  for  the  standard 
application  in  the  screen  that  appears. 

Selecting  a  standard  application 

The  procedure  for  selecting  a  general  application  that  has  been  enabled  in  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine  is  explained 
below. 


Touch  the  [Sharp  OSA]  key  in  the  mode 
select  keys. 

If  no  standard  applications  have  been  stored  in  the  Web  pages, 
the  key  cannot  be  touched. 


1-57 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Select  the  standard  application. 

If  two  or  more  standard  applications  have  been  stored  in  the 
Web  pages,  the  screen  to  select  the  standard  application  will 
appear.  Touch  the  standard  application  that  you  wish  to  use. 
If  only  one  standard  application  has  been  stored  in  the  Web 
pages,  connection  to  the  standard  application  will  begin. 


The  machine  connects  to  the  standard  application. 

The  message  "Connecting  to  the  external  application."  appears  while  the  machine  communicates  with  the  standard 
application. 


The  mode  select  key  cannot  be  used  during  scanning. 


EXTERNAL  ACCOUNT  MODULE  (MX-AMX3) 

The  external  account  module  is  required  to  use  a  "external  account  application"  on  the  machine. 

An  external  account  application  can  be  used  in  "external  authentication  mode"  or  "external  count  mode".  When  external 
authentication  mode  is  used,  the  login  screen  is  retrieved  from  the  application  when  the  machine  is  started.  When  a  job 
ends,  a  job  notification  screen  is  sent  to  the  application  to  enable  counts  to  be  kept  for  each  authenticated  user. 

When  "external  count  mode"  is  used,  the  login  screen  is  not  displayed  when  the  machine  is  started.  Only  a  job  result 
notification  is  sent  to  the  application.  User  authentication  by  the  external  account  application  cannot  be  used,  however, 
the  external  account  application  can  be  used  in  combination  with  the  internal  account  function. 

External  account  application  setup 

To  enable  an  external  account  application  in  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine,  click  [Application  Settings]  in  the 
administrator  menu  frame,  and  then  [External  Applications  Settings]  and  [External  Accounting  Application  Settings]. 
Configure  settings  for  the  external  account  application  in  the  screen  that  appears.  The  setting  change  will  take  effect 
after  the  machine  is  restarted.  To  restart  the  machine,  see  "TURNING  THE  POWER  ON  AND  OFF"  (page  1-15). 

Operation  in  external  account  mode 

The  two  modes  for  using  an  external  account  application  operate  as  explained  below. 

External  authentication  mode 

When  the  [Enable  Authentication  by  External  Server]  checkbox  is  selected  in  "External  Account  Setting"  of  "Sharp  〇 SA 
Settings"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  machine  enters  external  authentication  mode.  When  the  machine  is 
powered  on  in  external  authentication  mode,  the  machine  accesses  the  external  account  application  and  displays  the 
login  screen.  The  login  screen  also  appears  when  the  [Call]  key  is  touched  to  run  a  job  in  the  job  status  complete  screen. 
(The  login  screen  does  not  appear  if  the  user  has  already  logged  in  by  the  normal  method.) 

The  [JOB  STATUS]  key  can  be  pressed  while  the  login  screen  appears  to  show  the  job  status  screen.  To  return  to  the 
previous  state,  press  the  mode  select  key. 


•  The  user  control  function  of  the  machine  cannot  be  used  in  external  authentication  mode. 

However,  "User  Registration",  "User  Count  Display",  "User  Count  Reset",  "User  Information  Print",  and  "The  Number  of 
User  Name  Displayed  Setting"  can  be  used. 

•  The  mode  select  key  cannot  be  used  while  the  login  screen  appears. 


1-58 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


If  login  fails 

If  the  login  screen  fails  to  appear  or  the  application  does  not  operate  correctly,  the  machine  may  also  stop  operating 
correctly.  In  this  event,  it  is  recommended  that  you  quit  external  account  mode  from  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine.  For 
more  information,  see  [Help]  in  the  Web  pages. 

If  it  is  necessary  to  forcibly  terminate  external  account  mode  using  the  operation  panel  of  the  machine,  follow  the  steps 
below. 

Press  the  [SYSTEM  SETTINGS]  key  and  change  "External  Account  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The 
setting  change  will  take  effect  after  the  machine  is  restarted.  To  restart  the  machine,  see  "TURNING  THE  POWER  ON 
AND  OFF"  (page  1-15). 

External  count  mode 

When  only  the  [External  Account  Control]  setting  is  enabled  in  "External  Account  Setting"  of  "Sharp  OSA  Settings"  in  the 
system  settings  (administrator),  the  machine  enters  external  count  mode. 

Unlike  external  authentication  mode,  when  the  machine  is  started  in  "external  count  mode",  the  login  screen  of  the 
external  account  application  is  not  displayed.  Only  the  job  result  is  sent  to  the  external  account  application.  External 
count  mode  can  be  used  together  with  the  user  control  function  of  the  machine.  (External  count  mode  can  also  be  used 
when  the  user  control  function  is  disabled.) 


1-59 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


① 


•  Do  not  use  thinner,  benzene,  or  similar  volatile  cleaning  agents  to  clean  the  machine, 
housing. 

•  Use  a  soft  cloth  to  gently  wipe  off  dirt  from  the  area  on  the  operation  panel  with  a 
mirror-like  finish  (shown  at  right).  If  you  use  a  stiff  cloth  or  rub  hard,  the  surface 
may  be  damaged. 


The  area  with  a  mirror-like  finish  is 
the  area  that  is  ■■ 


CLEANING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  AND  AUTOMATIC 
DOCUMENT  FEEDER 

If  the  document  glass  or  document  backplate  sheet  becomes  dirty,  the  dirt  will  appear  in  the  scanned  image.  Always 
keep  these  parts  clean. 

Wipe  the  parts  with  a  clean,  soft  cloth. 

If  necessary,  moisten  the  cloth  with  water  or  a  small  amount  of  neutral  detergent.  After  wiping  with  the  moistened  cloth, 
wipe  the  parts  dry  with  a  clean  dry  cloth. 

Document  glass  Document  backplate  sheet 


Scanning  area 

If  black  or  white  lines  appear  in  images  scanned  using  the 
automatic  document  feeder,  clean  the  scanning  area  (the 
thin  long  glass  next  to  the  document  glass). 

To  clean  this  area,  use  the  glass  cleaner  that  is  stored  in 
the  automatic  document  feeder.  After  using  the  glass 
cleaner,  be  sure  to  return  it  to  its  storage  position. 


Examples  of  lines  in  the  image 


S  A 


Black  lines  White  lines 


1-60 


Contents 


MAINTENANCE 


This  section  explains  how  to  clean  the  machine  and  replace  the  toner  cartridges  and  the  toner  collection  container. 


REGULAR  MAINTENANCE 

To  ensure  that  the  machine  continues  to  provide  top  quality  performance,  periodically  clean  the  machine. 

△Warning 

Do  not  use  a  flammable  spray  to  clean  the  machine.  If  gas  from  the  spray  comes  in  contact  with  hot  electrical 
components  or  the  fusing  unit  inside  the  machine,  fire  or  electrical  shock  may  result. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Open  the  automatic  document  feeder 
and  remove  the  glass  cleaner. 


Clean  the  document  scanning  area  on 
the  document  glass  with  the  glass 
cleaner. 


Clean  the  document  scanning  area  in 
the  automatic  document  feeder  with  the 
glass  cleaner. 

(1)  Open  the  document  feeder  cover. 

(2)  Open  the  document  feeder  tray. 

(3)  Clean  the  scanning  area  in  the  automatic 
document  feeder. 


(4)  Close  the  document  feeder  tray. 

(5)  Close  the  document  feeder  cover. 


Replace  the  glass  cleaner. 


1-61 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


CLEANING  THE  BYPASS  FEED  ROLLER 

If  paper  misfeeds  frequently  occur  when  feeding  envelopes  or  heavy  paper  through  the  bypass  tray,  wipe  the  surface  of 
the  feed  roller  with  a  clean  soft  cloth  moistened  with  water  or  a  neutral  detergent. 


CLEANING  THE  ORIGINAL  FEED  ROLLER 

If  lines  or  other  dirt  appear  on  the  scanned  original  when  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  wipe  the  surface  of  the 
roller  with  a  clean  soft  cloth  moistened  with  water  or  a  neutral  detergent. 


1-62 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


REPLACING  THE  TONER  CARTRIDGES 

Be  sure  to  replace  the  toner  cartridge  when  the  message  "Change  the  toner  cartridge."  appears. 

In  copy  mode 


: Ready  to  scan  for  copy. 


: Ready  to  scan  for  copy. 
(Prepare  a  new  one.) 


: Ready  to  scan  for  copy. 
^  (Toner  supply  is  low. ) 


When  the  message  appears  in  the  message  display, 
replace  the  toner  cartridge. 

◊ 

If  you  continue  to  use  the  machine  without  replacing 
the  cartridge,  the  following  message  will  appear 
when  the  toner  runs  out. 


Change  the  toner  cartridge . 


1-63 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Pull  the  toner  cartridge  toward  you. 

Gently  pull  the  toner  cartridge  horizontally  toward  you. 
When  pulling  out  the  toner  cartridge,  pull  it  out  gently.  If  the 
cartridge  is  pulled  out  abruptly,  toner  may  spill  out. 


Hold  the  toner  cartridge  with  both  hands  as  shown  and  pull  it 
out  of  the  machine. 


Remove  the  new  toner  cartridge  from  its 
packaging  and  shake  it  5  or  6  times  as 
shown. 


Insert  the  new  toner  cartridge 
horizontally. 


Push  the  cartridge  in  until  it  locks 
securely  in  place. 

Push  the  cartridge  firmly  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


1-64 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Close  the  front  cover. 

After  the  toner  cartridge  is  replaced,  the  machine  automatically 
enters  image  adjustment  mode. 


/?\  Caution 

•  Do  not  throw  a  toner  cartridge  into  a  fire.  Toner  may  fly  and  cause  burns. 

•  Store  toner  cartridges  out  of  the  reach  of  small  children. 

•  If  a  toner  cartridge  is  stored  on  end,  the  toner  may  harden  and  become  unusable.  Always  store  toner  cartridges  on  their 
side  with  the  top  side  up. 

•  If  a  toner  cartridge  other  than  a  SHARP-recommended  toner  cartridge  is  used,  the  machine  may  not  attain  full  quality 
and  performance  and  there  is  a  risk  of  damage  to  the  machine.  Be  sure  to  use  a  SHARP-recommended  toner  cartridge. 


•  Keep  the  used  toner  cartridge  in  a  plastic  bag  (do  not  discard  it).  Your  service  technician  will  collect  the  used  toner 
cartridge. 

•To  view  the  approximate  amount  of  toner  remaining,  continually  touch  the  [COPY]  key  during  printing  or  when  the  machine 
is  idle.  The  percentage  of  toner  remaining  will  appear  in  the  display  while  the  key  is  touched.  When  the  percentage  falls  to 
"25-0%",  obtain  a  new  toner  cartridge  and  keep  it  ready  for  replacement. 

•  Depending  on  your  conditions  of  use,  the  color  may  become  faint  or  the  image  blurred. 


1-65 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


REPLACING  THE  TONER  COLLECTION 
CONTAINER 

The  toner  collection  container  collects  excess  toner  that  is  produced  during  printing.  When  the  toner  collection  container 
becomes  full,  "Replace  used  toner  container."  will  appear.  Follow  the  procedure  below  to  replace  the  toner  collection 
container. 


Remove  the  toner  collection  container. 

(1) Tilt  the  toner  collection  container  forward. 

Grasp  the  corners  of  the  toner  collection  container  with 
both  hands  as  shown  and  tilt  it  forward  until  it  stops. 


(2)  Slowly  lift  the  toner  collection  container  up. 


Place  the  box  on  a  flat  surface. 

Place  a  sheet  of  newspaper  on  the  surface  before  placing  the 
box. 


Do  not  point  the  holes  down  as  used  toner  will  spill  out. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Plug  the  hole  in  the  toner  collection 
container  with  the  cap. 

Push  the  cap  in  firmly  so  that  toner  will  not  leak  out. 


Do  not  discard  the  toner  collection  container.  Place  it  in  a  plastic  bag  and  keep  it  until  your  service  technician  comes  to 
perform  maintenance.  Your  service  technician  will  collect  the  toner  collection  container. 


Install  the  new  toner  collection 
container. 

Insert  the  box  from  above  at  a  slant. 


Push  the  toner  collection  container  into 
the  machine. 

Push  the  box  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


/?\  Caution 

•  Do  not  throw  the  toner  collection  container  into  a  fire.  Toner  may  fly  and  cause  burns. 

•  Store  the  toner  collection  container  out  of  the  reach  of  small  children. 


When  replacing  the  toner  collection  container,  be  aware  that  it  may  soil  your  clothes  or  the  immediate  surroundings. 


1-67 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


REPLACING  THE  STAMP  CARTRIDGE 

If  a  stamp  unit  (AR-SU1)  is  installed  on  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  stamp  has  become  faint,  replace  the 
stamp  cartridge  (AR-SV1). 

Supplies 

Stamp  cartridge  (2  in  package)  AR-SV1 


Open  the  holders  on  the  automatic 
document  feeder  that  hold  the  original 
pressure  sheet. 

Open  the  holders  (two)  on  the  left  and  right  sides. 


Grasp  the  tab  on  the  stamp  unit  and  pull 
the  unit  out. 


1-68 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Push  the  stamp  unit  back  in. 

Push  the  stamp  unit  in  until  it  clicks  into  place. 


Replace  the  original  pressure  sheet. 

Push  the  holders  in  until  they  click  into  place. 


广 


Contents 


1-69 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


ENTERING  TEXT 


This  section  explains  the  text  entry  screen. 


FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  MAIN  KEYS 


Key 

Description 

1  Caps) 

This  changes  the  text  entry  screen  from  the  lower  case  screen  to  the  upper  case  screen.  The  upper  case 
screen  will  continue  to  appear  until  the  [Caps]  key  is  touched  again  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted.  The 
[Caps]  key  is  convenient  when  you  wish  to  enter  all  capital  letters. 

fShi£tl 

This  key  temporarily  changes  the  keys  in  the  text  entry  screen  to  upper  case  when  lower  case  letters 
appear,  or  to  lower  case  when  upper  case  letters  appear. 

Touch  a  letter  key  after  touching  the  [Shift]  key  to  enter  that  letter.  After  the  letter  is  entered,  the  [Shift]  key 
will  no  longer  be  highlighted  and  the  original  text  entry  screen  will  appear. 

The  [Shift]  key  is  convenient  when  you  only  need  to  enter  one  upper  case  letter  or  one  lower  case  letter,  or 
when  you  need  to  enter  one  of  the  symbols  assigned  to  the  numeric  keys. 

To  cancel  selection  of  the  [Shift]  key,  touch  the  [Shift]  key  again.  The  [Shift]  key  will  no  longer  be  highlighted. 

Enter 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  line  break  when  entering  the  body  text  of  an  e-mail  message. 

El 

Touch  this  key  to  delete  the  characters  to  the  left  of  the  cursor  one  character  at  a  time. 

[Other  Language] 

Touch  this  key  to  temporarily  change  the  key  layout  of  character  entry  mode  to  a  different  language.  Select 
the  key  layout  that  you  wish  to  use. 

Space 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  space  between  letters. 

[ AltGr  ] 

This  temporarily  changes  the  entry  screen  to  the  accented  letter  and  symbol  entry  screen.  Touch  a  letter 
key  after  touching  the  [AltGr]  key  to  enter  that  letter.  After  the  letter  is  entered,  the  [AltGr]  key  will  no  longer 
be  highlighted  and  the  original  text  entry  screen  will  appear. 

To  cancel  selection  of  the  [AltGr]  key,  touch  the  [AltGr]  key  again.  The  [AltGr]  key  will  no  longer  be 
highlighted. 

QQ 

These  keys  move  the  cursor  left  and  right. 

QE) 

These  keys  move  the  cursor  to  the  line  above  or  below  the  current  line  during  entry  of  the  body  text  of  an 
e-mail  message. 

Characters  j 

Touch  this  key  to  select  character  entry  mode. 

Symbols 

Touch  this  key  to  select  symbol  entry  mode.  Symbol  mode  is  used  to  enter  symbols  and  accented  letters. 

Pre-Set  Select] 

Use  this  to  retrieve  a  previously  stored  subject  for  e-mail  or  other  pre-set  text. 

1-70 


Contents 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE 


Key 

Description 

f  Help  ] 

Shows  explanations  of  each  key. 

f  .  com  j  し  net  J  し orq  j 

「 .biz  ] [ . infoj 「http: | 

Use  this  to  enter  a  previously  stored  text  string  such  as  ".com". 

Text  strings  are  stored  in  the  system  settings. 

隊 7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS  "Soft  Keyboard  Template  Setting11  (page  7-64) 

Cancel 

Touch  this  key  to  return  to  the  previous  setting  screen  without  entering  text. 

f  OK  ) 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  the  text  that  currently  appears  and  return  to  the  previous  setting  screen. 

Search 

Search  results  will  appear  based  on  the  entered  characters. 

•  in  the  text  entry  screen  indicates  how  many  characters  can  be  entered.  A  number  of  characters  greater  than  11 
cannot  be  entered. 

•  The  key  layouts  that  can  be  selected  vary  depending  on  the  language  selected  in  "MFP  Display  Language  Setting"  in  the 
system  settings  (administrator). 

•  The  following  symbols  cannot  be  used  when  entering  a  file  name  or  folder  name. 

\  ?/■■;:,<>!*  |  &  # 

Some  computer  environments  may  not  allow  the  use  of  spaces  and  the  symbols  indicated  below.  For  example,  hyperlinks 
will  not  operate  correctly  or  nonsense  characters  may  appear. 

$  %  ■  (  )  +  -  ■  =  @  [ ] 八  '  {  } — 〜 


ENTERING  TEXT  FROM  A  KEYBOARD 

A  keyboard  can  only  be  used  as  a  alternative  for  the  text  entry  screen  that  appears  in  the  machine's  touch  panel. 
The  layout  of  the  keys  in  the  text  entry  screen  in  the  touch  panel  differs  slightly  from  the  layout  of  the  keys  on  the 
keyboard. 

For  details  on  using  the  keys,  press  the  FI  key  to  view  an  explanation  of  each  key. 


①  Do  not  place  heavy  objects  on  the  keyboard  or  press  down  on  the  keyboard. 


1-71 


Contents 


CHAPTER  2 
COPIER 


This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  copy  function. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A 


COPIER 


BASE  SCREEN  OF  COPY  MODE . 2-3 

COPYING  SEQUENCE . 2-6 

ORIGINALS . 2-9 

•  CHECKING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE . 2-9 

PAPER  TRAYS . 2-11 


BASIC  PROCEDURE  FOR  MAKING 
COPIES 


MAKING  COPIES . 2-12 

•  USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 

FEEDER  TO  MAKE  COPIES . 2-12 

•  MAKING  A  COPY  USING  THE 

DOCUMENT  GLASS . 2-14 

AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING . 2-16 

•  USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 

FEEDER  TO  MAKE  2-SIDED  COPIES . 2-16 

•  AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING  USING 

THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS . 2-18 

CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND 

ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE . 2-21 

•  AUTOMATIC  ADJUSTMENT  OF  THE 

EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL  TYPE . 2-21 

•  SELECTING  THE  ORIGINAL  TYPE  AND 
MANUALLY  ADJUSTING  THE 

EXPOSURE . 2-21 

REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . 2-23 

•  AUTOMATIC  RATIO  SELECTION  (Auto 

Image) . 2-23 

•  MANUALLY  SELECTING  THE  RATIO 

(Preset  ratios/Zoom) . 2-24 

•  ENLARGING/REDUCING  THE  LENGTH 

AND  WIDTH  SEPARATELY  (XY  Zoom) . 2-26 

ORIGINAL  SIZES . 2-27 

•  SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE . 2-27 

•  STORING  FREQUENTLY  USED 

ORIGINAL  SIZES . 2-28 


OUTPUT . 2-31 

•OUTPUT  MODES . 2-33 

MAKING  COPIES  USING  THE  BYPASS 

TRAY . 2-38 


SPECIAL  MODES 


SPECIAL  MODES . 2-41 

ADDING  MARGINS  (Margin  Shift) . 2-44 

ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  (Erase) . 2-46 

COPYING  EACH  FACING  PAGE  OF  A 

BOUND  DOCUMENT  (Dual  Page  Copy) . 2-48 

MAKING  COPIES  IN  PAMPHLET  FORMAT 
(Pamphlet  Copy) . 2-50 

COPYING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF 

ORIGINALS  AT  ONCE  (Job  Build) . 2-53 

USING  TWO  MACHINES  TO  MAKE  A  LARGE 
NUMBER  OF  COPIES  (Tandem  Copy) . 2-56 

USING  A  DIFFERENT  PAPER  TYPE  FOR 
COVERS  (Covers/Inserts) . 2-59 

•  INSERTING  COVERS  IN  COPIES  (Cover 

Settings) . 2-60 

•  INSERTING  INSERT  SHEETS  IN  COPIES 

(Insert  Settings) . 2-63 

•  CHANGING  COVER/INSERT  SETTINGS 

(Page  Layout) . 2-67 

ADDING  INSERTS  WHEN  COPYING  ON 

TRANSPARENCY  FILM  (Transparency 

Inserts) . 2-70 

COPYING  MULTIPLE  ORIGINALS  ONTO 

ONE  SHEET  (Multi  Shot) . 2-72 

COPYING  A  PAMPHLET  (Book  Copy) . 2-74 

COPYING  CAPTIONS  ONTO  TAB  PAPER 

(Tab  Copy) . 2-78 

•  RELATION  BETWEEN  THE  ORIGINALS 

AND  THE  TAB  PAPER . 2-78 


2-1 


COPIER 


COPYING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ON  ONE 
SHEET  OF  PAPER  (Card  Shot) . 2-81 

PRINTING  THE  DATE  AND  A  STAMP  ON 

COPIES  (Stamp) . 2-84 

•  GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING 

STAMP . 2-85 

•  ADDING  THE  DATE  TO  COPIES  (Date) . 2-88 

•  STAMPING  COPIES  (Stamp) . 2-90 

•  PRINTING  PAGE  NUMBERS  ON  COPIES 

(Page  Numbering) . 2-92 

•  PRINTING  TEXT  ON  COPIES  (Text) . 2-96 

•  CHECKING  THE  STAMP  LAYOUT 

(Layout) . 2-100 

•  ADDING  A  WATERMARK  TO  A 

COPY  (Watermark) . 2-102 

[Image  Edit]  KEY . 2-104 

•  REPEATING  PHOTOS  ON  A  COPY 

(Photo  Repeat) . 2-105 

•  CREATING  A  LARGE  POSTER 

(Multi-Page  Enlargement) . 2-107 

•  REVERSING  THE  IMAGE  (Mirror  Image)  ..  .  2-110 

•  COPYING  1 1 ■■  x  1 7"  ORIGINALS  WITH  NO 

EDGE  CUT-OFF  (11nx17n  Full  Bleed) . 2-111 

•  COPYING  IN  THE  CENTER  OF  THE 

PAPER  (Centering) . 2-113 

•  REVERSING  WHITE  AND  BLACK  IN  A 

COPY  (B/W  Reverse) . 2-115 

ADJUSTING  THE  SHARPNESS  OF  AN 

IMAGE  (Sharpness) . 2-117 

CHECKING  COPIES  BEFORE  PRINTING 

(Proof  Copy) . 2-118 

CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 

ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  COPYING 

(Original  Count) . 2-121 

COPYING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 

SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original) . 2-123 

COPYING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan 

Mode) . 2-126 


CONVENIENT  COPY  FUNCTIONS 


INTERRUPTING  A  COPY  RUN  (Interrupt 

copy) . 2-128 

CHECKING  A  PREVIEW  IMAGE  OF  A  COPY 
(Preview) . 2-130 

•PREVIEW  SCREEN . 2-132 

JOB  STATUS  SCREEN . 2-133 

•  JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED 

JOB  SCREEN . 2-134 

•  CANCELING  A  JOB  THAT  IS  WAITING  IN 

THE  QUEUE . 2-136 

•  GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  JOB  IN  THE 

QUEUE . 2-137 

•  CHECKING  INFORMATION  ON  A  COPY 

JOB  WAITING  IN  THE  QUEUE . 2-138 

STORING  COPY  OPERATIONS  (Job 

Programs) . 2-139 

•  STORING  (EDITING/DELETING)  A  JOB 

PROGRAM . 2-140 

APPENDIX . 2-142 


2-2 


COPIER 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A 
COPIER 


This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  using  the  machine  as  a  copier. 


BASE  SCREEN  OF  COPY  MODE 

Touch  the  [COPY]  key  in  the  touch  panel  to  open  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

The  base  screen  shows  messages  and  keys  necessary  for  copying, and  settings  that  have  been  selected. 


(i) — 


(2). 

⑶. 

(4) - 

(5) . 

⑹ ■ 


Ti&n 


(7)  (8) 

叫^^ ■■画 r 

I  [  Special  Modes 

|  2 -Sided  Copy 

谭 l  —  -4|^  piain  ( _ , 

_  T.- ■  ■  mril  Qi/vi 1  I  _ 


_ Plain 

®  8Mxn 

I  1  _u 

I  2 離 hr  ^  I 
I  3.  _14  ^)1 
I  4. 11x17  I  _ 


Copy  Ratio  J 


Original  1  I  Paper  Select  1 


[r  i 

I  Quick  File 


⑼ 

■(10) 

■(11) 

■(12) 

■(13) 

■(14) 


(1) Mode  Select  keys 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send,  and 
document  filing  modes. 

If  you  wish  to  switch  to  copy  mode,  touch  the  [COPY] 
key. 

Output  display 

When  one  or  more  output  functions  such  as  sort,  group, 
staple  sort,  or  saddle  stitch  have  been  selected,  this 
shows  the  icons  of  the  selected  functions. 

^  OUTPUT  (page  2-31) 

(3)  [Exposure]  key 

This  shows  the  current  copy  exposure  and  original  type 
settings.  Touch  this  key  to  change  the  exposure  or 
original  type  setting. 

^  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL 
IMAGE  TYPE  (page  2-21) 

(4)  [Copy  Ratio]  key 

This  shows  the  current  copy  ratio.  Touch  this  key  to 
adjust  the  copy  ratio. 

^  REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  (page  2-23) 


(5)  [Original]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  the  original  size  manually. 

When  an  original  is  placed,  the  detected  original  size  is 
displayed.  If  the  original  size  is  set  manually,  the  set  size 
appears. 

隊 ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  2-27) 

(6)  [Paper  Select]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  change  the  paper  (tray)  that  is  used. 
The  tray,  paper  size,  and  paper  type  will  appear.  Trays  1 
to  5  can  also  be  touched  in  the  paper  size  display  to  open 
the  same  screen. 

隊  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 

(7)  Original  feed  display 

This  appears  when  an  original  is  inserted  in  the 
automatic  document  feeder. 


Contents 


2-3 


COPIER 


(8)  Paper  select  display 

This  shows  the  size  of  paper  loaded  in  each  tray. 

For  the  bypass  tray,  the  paper  type  appears  above  the 
paper  size. 

The  selected  tray  is  highlighted. 

The  approximate  amount  of  paper  in  each  tray  is 
indicated  by  [=J  .  Trays  1  to  5  can  be  touched  to  open 
the  same  screen  as  when  the  [Paper  Select]  key  is 
touched. 

隊  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 

(9)  Number  of  copies  display 

This  shows  the  number  of  copies  set. 

(10)  [Special  Modes]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  special  modes  such  as  Margin 
Shift,  Edge  Erase,  and  Dual  Page  Copy. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(11)  [2-Sided  Copy]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  2-sided  copying  function. 
暖  AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING  (page  2-16) 

(12)  [Output]  key 

Touch  this  to  select  an  output  function  such  as  sort, 
group,  offset,  staple  sort,  saddle  stitch,  punch,  or  fold. 
^  OUTPUT  (page  2-31) 


(13)  Customized  keys 

The  keys  that  appear  here  can  be  changed  to  show 
settings  or  functions  that  you  prefer.  The  following  keys 
appear  by  factory  default: 

暖  Customizing  displayed  keys  (page  2-5) 

[File]  key,  [Quick  File]  key 

Touch  one  of  these  keys  to  use  the  File  function  or  Quick 
File  function  of  document  filing  mode.  These  are  the 
same  [File]  and  [Quick  File]  keys  that  appear  when  the 
[Special  Modes]  key  is  touched.  For  information  on  the 
document  filing  function,  see  "6.  DOCUMENT  FILING". 

(14)  [Preview]  key 

Touch  to  view  a  preview  image  of  a  copy  in  the  touch 
panel  before  printing  the  copy. 

瞭  CHECKING  A  PREVIEW  IMAGE  OF  A  COPY 
(Preview)  (page  2-130) 


The  screen  explained  in  this  section  appears  when  a  exit  tray  unit,  saddle  stitch  nnisher,  punch  module,  paper  pass  unit,  and 
large  capacity  tray  are  installed.  The  image  will  vary  depending  on  the  equipment  installed. 


Tray  during  paper  feeding 

Do  not  pull  out  a  tray  while  paper  is  being  fed  from  the  tray.  This  will  cause  a  paper  misfeed. 


Identifying  the  tray  that  is  being  used  to  feed  paper 

(1)  While  paper  is  feeding,  the  job  status  display  of  the  system  bar  on  the  touch  panel  screen  will  show  the  number  of 
the  tray  that  is  being  used  to  feed  paper. 

(2)  The  tray  being  used  to  feed  paper  also  appears  in  green  in  the  paper  size  display  in  the  base  screen  on  the  touch 
panel. 


Base  screen 


(1) 


(2) 


Job  status  display  on  the  system  bar 

Shows  the  number  of  the  tray  being  used  to  feed  paper. 


Paper  size  display 

Shows  the  tray  being  used  to  feed  paper  in  green. 


2-4 


Contents 


COPIER 


Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected 

The  JU  key  appears  in  the  base  screen  when  one  or  more  special  modes  are  selected. 

The  JU  key  can  be  touched  to  display  the  selected  special  modes.  To  close  the  screen,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Function  Review 


Front : 1 / 2 inch /Back : 1 / 2 inch 


Erase 

. Edge: 1/2 inch 
' Center : 1/2 inch 

: Covers /Inserts 

. Front : 2 -Sided/Back : Insert 
' Insertion  A: 10  Page/B: 10  Page 

Exposure  I 

麵 


i  Copy  Ratio  1  i  Original 


]m 


Customizing  displayed  keys 

Special  mode  keys  and  other  keys  can  be  displayed  in  the  base  screen.  By  assigning  frequently  used  functions  to  these 
keys,  you  can  access  the  functions  with  a  single  touch.  To  change  the  function  that  is  assigned  to  a  key,  use  "Customize 
Key  Setting"  in  the  Web  pages. 


When  "Erase",  "Margin  Shift",  and  "Mirror  Image"  are  assigned  to  the  customized  keys 


長 


I  Exposure  | 


〆  Plain 

0  SV2KII 

2. 8y^riRj=j 

• 

3.  8^14  |=| 

4. 11x17  |=| 

Original  I  I  Paper  Select  I 


I  Special  Modes  1 

[  2-Sided  Copy  ] 

Output 

Erase 

1  Margin  Shift  | 礞 

Mirror  工 mage 

Preview 

These  3  keys  can  be  changed 
as  desired. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Customize  Key  Setting 

Registration  is  performed  in  [System  Settings]  -  [Operation  Settings]  -  "Customize  Key  Setting"  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


Auto 


100% 


Ills  l. l> .l 


2-5 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  SEQUENCE 

This  section  explains  the  basic  procedure  for  copying.  Select  settings  in  the  order  shown  below  to  ensure  that  the  copy 
operation  takes  place  smoothly. 

For  detailed  procedures  for  selecting  the  settings,  see  the  explanation  of  each  setting  in  this  chapter. 


Place  the  original. 


Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  of  the  automatic 
document  feeder,  or  on  the  document  glass. 

*  Depending  on  the  copy  functions  used,  there  are  also  cases 
where  functions  are  selected  before  the  original  is  placed. 


Basic  copy  settings 


Select  the  basic  copy  settings. 

The  main  settings  are  as  follows: 

•  Exposure  and  original  type  暖 CHANGING  THE 
EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE  (page  2-21) 

•  Copy  ratio  ^REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM 

(page  2-23) 

•  Original  size  ^ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  2-27) 

•  Paper  Settings  暖 PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 


2-sided  copy  settings 


Select  settings  as  needed  for  2-sided  copying  and  2-sided 
scanning  of  the  original. 

隊  AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING  (page  2-16) 


2-6 


Contents 


COPIER 


Output  settings 

Select  copy  output  settings. 

The  main  settings  are  as  follows: 

•  Sort  mode  ^Sort  mode  (page  2-33) 

•  Group  mode  隊 Group  mode  (page  2-33) 

•  Offset  mode  ^Offset  function  (page  2-33) 

•  Staple  sort  mode 

^Staple  sort  function  /  Saddle  stitch  function  (page  2-34) 

•  Pamphlet  staple  function 

^Staple  sort  function  /  Saddle  stitch  function  (page  2-34) 

•  Punch  function  隊 Punch  function  (page  2-37) 

•  Fold  function  隊 Paper  folding  function  (page  2-36) 


Special  mode  settings 


Special  Modes 


Select  special  modes  such  as  "Margin  Shift"  and  "Erase". 
隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 


f  Margin  Shift 

Erase 

Dual  Page 
|  圓  Copy 

~T- 

\  Pamphlet  Copy 

1 •二  1 

f  Tandem 

信き Copy 

S 

[ Covers/ Inserts 

Transparency  1 
Inserts 

f  Multi  Shot  j 

a 

1  Book  Copy 

1  Tab  Copy 

1  Card  Shot 

Number  of  copies  (sets)  setting 


©@© 

©@® 

©®® 


Start  copying. 

Start  scanning  the  original(s)  and  making  copies. 

Press  the  [START]  key. 


2-7 


Contents 


COPIER 


•  When  one  or  more  special  modes  are  selected,  the  \W\  key  appears  in  the  base  screen.  Touch  the  \W\  key  to  display  a 
list  of  the  selected  special  modes.  This  lets  you  check  what  special  modes  are  selected  and  the  settings  of  each  mode. 
^  Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected  (page  2-5) 

•  To  store  a  copy  job  using  the  document  filing  function,  select  copy  settings  and  then  touch  the  [File]  key  or  the  [Quick  File] 
key. 


@To  cancel  all  settings,  press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  ((§)). 

When  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  (@)  is  pressed,  all  settings  selected  to  that  point  are  cleared  and  you  will  return  to  the  base 
screen. 

To  stop  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying,  press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 

When  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  is  pressed,  a  message  will  appear  asking  you  if  you  want  to  cancel  the  job.  Touch  the  [Yes]  key 
in  the  message  screen. 


2-8 


Contents 


COPIER 


ORIGINALS 

CHECKING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE 

When  [Auto]  appears  in  the  [Original]  key,  the  size  of  the  placed  original  is  automatically  detected.  The  machine  automatically 
detects  the  original  size  when  an  original  is  placed  and  displays  the  size  in  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen. 

Example  of  base  screen 

The  original  size  is  displayed. 


"Auto"  appears  when  the  automatic  original  detection  function  is 
operating. 

The  original  size  is  displayed.  An  icon  shows  the  orientation  of 
the  original. 


Standard  sizes 


Standard  sizes  are  sizes  that  the  machine  can  automatically  detect.  The  standard  sizes  are  set  in  "Original  Size 
Detector  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The  factory  default  setting  is  "Inch-111. 


List  of  original  size  detector  settings 


Selections 

Standard  sizes  (detected  original  sizes) 

Document  glass 

Document  feeder  tray 
(automatic  document  feeder) 

lnch-1 

1  r  x  1 7",  8-1 /2Mx  14",  8-1 /2M  x  1 1n,  8-1/211  x  1 1 MR, 
5-1/2Mx8-1/2M 

11n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  14", 8-1 /2M  x  11M,  8-1 /2M  x  11MR, 
5-1/211  x  8-1/2",  A4,  A3 

Inch-2 

1 1n  x  1 7n,  8-1/2"  x  1 3n  (216  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1/2"  x  1 1n,  8-1/2"  x  11MR,  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

1 1n  x  17M,  8-1/2Mx13M  (216  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1 ",  8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2",  A4,  A3 

Inch-3 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/2Mx  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1/2"  x  1 1n,  8-1/2Mx  11MR,  5-1/2"  x  8-1/211 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1/2"  x  1 1 ■■, 8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1/211,  A3,  A4 

AB-1 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 T, 
8-1/2Mx14M,  11"x17" 

AB-2 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  330  mm 
(8-1/2Mx  13M) 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17", 216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1 /2Mx  13M) 

AB-3 

A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17M,  216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13M) 

AB-4 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R, 

216  mm  x  340  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13-2/5") 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

1  r  x  17", 216  mm  x  340  mm  (8-1 /2Mx  13-2/5") 

AB-5 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R, 

216  mm  x  343  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13-1/2") 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

1  r  x  1711, 216  mm  x  343  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13-1/2") 

•  When  the  automatic  original  detection  function  is  operating  and  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size  (an  AB  size  or  special 
size),  the  closest  standard  size  may  be  displayed  or  the  original  size  may  not  appear.  In  this  event,  manually  set  the 
correct  original  size. 

暖 SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE  (page  2-27) 

•  When  placing  a  non-standard  size  original  on  the  document  glass,  you  can  make  it  easier  for  the  size  to  be  detected  by 
placing  a  blank  sheet  of  8-1/2"  x  11 (A4),  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5),  or  other  standard  size  of  paper  on  top  of  the  original. 


2-9 


Contents 


COPIER 


Standard  original  placement  orientations 

Place  originals  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  so  that  the  top  and  bottom  of  the  original  are 
oriented  as  shown  in  the  illustration.  If  the  original  is  not  oriented  correctly  and  a  function  such  as  stapling  is  selected, 
the  staple  positions  may  not  be  correct.  For  more  information  on  placing  the  original,  see  "ORIGINALS"  (page  1-38)  in 
"1 . BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


[Example  1] 


[Example  2] 


Document  glass 


Place  the  originals 
with  the  corners 
aligned  here. 


Document  feeder  tray 


Place  the  originals 
with  the  corners 
aligned  here. 


Document  glass 


Automatic  copy  image  rotation  (Rotation  Copy) 

If  the  orientation  of  the  original  and  paper  are  different,  the  original  image  will  be  automatically  rotated  90  degrees  to 
match  the  paper.  (When  an  image  is  rotated,  a  message  is  displayed.) 


[Example] 


Orientation  of 
placed  original 


aK 


The  original  seen 
from  behind 


Orientation  The  image  is  rotated 

of  paper  90  degrees 


QD 

V 

ダ 

The  paper  seen 
from  behind 


This  function  operates  in  both  auto  paper  selection  mode  and  auto  image  mode.  Rotation  can  be  disabled  using 
"Rotation  Copy  Setting"  in  the  System  Settings  (Administrator). 


2-10 


Contents 


COPIER 


PAPER  TRAYS 

The  machine  is  set  to  automatically  select  a  tray  that  has  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  size  of  the  placed  original 
(automatic  paper  tray  selection). 

If  the  correct  paper  size  is  not  selected  or  you  wish  to  change  the  paper  size,  you  can  select  the  paper  tray  manually. 


Touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 


You  can  also  touch  the  paper  size  display  (A)  to  open  the  paper  tray  settings. 


Select  the  tray  that  you  want  to  use. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  tray, 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  and  the  selected  tray 
will  be  highlighted. 


If  the  selected  tray  runs  out  of  paper  during  a  copy  job  and  there  is  another  tray  that  has  the  same  size  and  type  of  paper, 
that  tray  will  be  automatically  selected  and  the  copy  job  will  continue. 


To  return  to  automatic  paper  tray  selection  after  selecting  a  tray  manually,  press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  ((§)). 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Status  Settings  (Paper  Tray) 

Use  this  setting  to  change  the  tray  that  is  selected  by  default. 


2-11 


Contents 


COPIER 


BASIC  PROCEDURE  FOR  MAKING 
COPIES 


This  section  explains  the  basic  procedures  for  making  copies,  including  selection  of  the  copy  ratio  and  other  copy 
settings. 


MAKING  COPIES 

USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  TO 
MAKE  COPIES 

This  section  explains  how  to  make  copies  (1 -sided  copies  of  1 -sided  originals)  using  the  automatic  document  feeder. 


Place  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray  with  the  edges 
aligned  evenly. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


Check  the  paper  to  be  used. 

Make  sure  that  the  desired  paper  (tray)  is  selected. 

To  change  the  paper  (tray),  touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 
隊  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  placed  original,  there  may  be  cases  where  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  original  is  not 
selected  automatically.  In  this  event,  change  the  paper  size  manually. 


2-12 


Contents 


COPIER 


@®®  / 

Special  Modes 

⑦®®  / 

®®@  / 

2-Sided  Copy 

/Plain 

Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 


© 


•  Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set. 

•  A  single  copy  can  be  made  even  if  "0"  appears  for  the  number  of  copies. 

If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-13 


Contents 


COPIER 


MAKING  A  COPY  USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS 

To  make  a  copy  of  a  book  or  other  thick  original  that  cannot  be  scanned  with  the  automatic  document  feeder, open  the 
automatic  document  feeder  and  place  the  original  on  the  document  glass.  This  section  explains  how  to  make  a  copy 
(1 -sided  copy  of  a  1 -sided  original)  using  the  document  glass. 


Open  the  automatic  document  feeder, 
place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass,  and  then  gently  close 
the  automatic  document  feeder. 


Document  glass  scale 


Document  glass  scale 


•  Align  the  corner  of  the  original  with  the  tip  of  the  arrow  mark 
M  on  the  document  glass  scale. 

•  Place  the  original  in  the  appropriate  position  for  its  size  as 
shown  above. 

•  After  placing  the  original,  be  sure  to  close  the  automatic 
document  feeder.  If  left  open,  parts  outside  of  the  original  will 
be  copied  black,  causing  excessive  use  of  toner. 


① 


Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector.  Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and  prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


Check  the  paper  to  be  used. 

Make  sure  that  the  desired  paper  (tray)  is  selected. 

To  change  the  paper  (tray),  touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 
暖  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  placed  original,  there  may  be  cases  where  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  original  is  not 
selected  automatically.  In  this  event,  change  the  paper  size  manually. 


2-14 


Contents 


COPIER 


@®®  / 

Special  Modes 

⑦®®  / 

®®@  / 

2-Sided  Copy 

/Plain 

Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 


© 


•  Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set. 

•  A  single  copy  can  be  made  even  if  "0"  appears  for  the  number  of  copies. 

If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Normally  copying  will  start. 

Depending  on  the  copy  settings  (2-sided  copying,  etc.),  copying  may  not  begin  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned.  In  this 
case,  go  to  the  next  step. 


Remove  the  original  and  place  the  next  original,  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  this  step  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


2-15 


Contents 


COPIER 


AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING 


USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  TO 
MAKE  2-SIDED  COPIES 


Originals 


Copies 


Automatic  2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided  Automatic  2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  1 -sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 
originals  originals 


I  Indicator 
'ine 


Place  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray  with  the  edges 
aligned  evenly. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


(1) 


(2) 


2 -Sided  Copy 

1  ~ *  ~~ ) 

二 

卜 0 

1  _  rs 

Select  the  2-sided  copy  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  mode. 

: Automatic  2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals 
: Automatic  2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 
: 1 -sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


[QM 

[SHD 

[瞻 | 


To  make  2-sided  copies  of  a  1 -sided  portrait  original  placed  horizontally,  or  to  invert  the  reverse  side  with  respect  to 
the  front  side  when  copying  a  2-sided  original,  touch  the  [Binding  Change]  key. 

隊  Using  the  [Binding  Change]  key  (page  2-17) 


2-16 


Contents 


COPIER 


Check  the  paper  to  be  used. 

Make  sure  that  the  desired  paper  (tray)  is  selected. 

To  change  the  paper  (tray),  touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 
隊  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  placed  original,  there  may  be  cases  where  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  original  is  not 
selected  automatically.  In  this  event,  change  the  paper  size  manually. 


®@® 

@©® 

©®® 

/  Special  Modes 

/ 

/  2-Sided  Copy 

/plain 

Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 


© 


•  Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set. 

•  If  you  are  only  making  a  single  copy,  the  copy  can  be  made  with  the  copy  number  display  showing  "0". 

If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 

Using  the  [Binding  Change]  key 


To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 


Originals 


パ 

2 

Binding  Change  is  used  Binding  Change  is  not  used 


The  reverse  side 
is  upside  down. 


The  reverse  side 
is  not  upside 
down. 


A  = 

V 

ハ t 

3 

Select  this  when 
the  pages  will  be 
bound  into  a 
tablet. 


Select  this  when 
the  pages  will  be 
bound  into  a 
booklet. 


2-17 


Contents 


AUTOMATIC  2-SIDED  COPYING  USING  THE 
DOCUMENT  GLASS 


COPIER 


Automatic  2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided 
originals 


Open  the  automatic  document  feeder, 
place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass,  and  then  gently  close 
the  automatic  document  feeder. 


Document  glass  scale 


Document  glass  scale 


•  Align  the  corner  of  the  original  with  the  tip  of  the  arrow  mark 
M  on  the  document  glass  scale. 

•  Place  the  original  in  the  appropriate  position  for  its  size  as 
shown  above. 

•  After  placing  the  original,  be  sure  to  close  the  automatic 
document  feeder.  If  left  open,  parts  outside  of  the  original  will 
be  copied  black,  causing  excessive  use  of  toner. 


① 


Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector.  Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and  prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


2-18 


Contents 


COPIER 


Special  Modes 


2-Sided  Copy 


f Plain 


Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 


•  Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set. 

•  A  single  copy  can  be  made  even  if  "0"  appears  for  the  number  of  copies. 

If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 


Remove  the  original  and  place  the  next  original,  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  this  step  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


2-19 


Contents 


(i) 


Select  the  2-sided  copy  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [1 -Sided  to  2-Sided]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


The  [2-Sided  to  2-Sided]  key  and  [2-Sided  to 1 -Sided]  key  cannot  be  used  when  copying  from  the  document  glass. 


Exposure  I 


酬 BIT: 

2.  8V2X11R  m 

3.  8紐14  _ 
4. 11x17  |s| 


Output 


I  Copy  b 


Original  I  Paper  Select  I 

■ 


Check  the  paper  to  be  used. 

Make  sure  that  the  desired  paper  (tray)  is  selected. 

To  change  the  paper  (tray),  touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 
暖  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 


0) 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  placed  original,  there  may  be  cases  where  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  original  is  not 
selected  automatically.  In  this  event,  change  the  paper  size  manually. 


® ® ® © 
④ © ® ④ 
@ ® @® 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Status  Settings  (2-Sided  Copy) 

The  default  2-sided  copy  mode  can  be  changed. 


Contents 


2-20 


COPIER 


CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL 
IMAGE  TYPE 


The  exposure  and  original  image  type  can  be  selected  to  obtain  a  clear  copy. 

AUTOMATIC  ADJUSTMENT  OF  THE  EXPOSURE  AND 
ORIGINAL  TYPE 


Automatic  exposure  adjustment  operates  by  default  to  automatically  adjust  the  exposure  level  and  original  type  as 
appropriate  for  the  original  being  copied.  ("Auto"  is  displayed.) 

Automatic  adjustment  takes  place  to  enable  optimum  copying. 


SELECTING  THE  ORIGINAL  TYPE  AND  MANUALLY 
ADJUSTING  THE  EXPOSURE 


If  you  wish  to  select  the  original  type  or  manually  adjust  the  exposure,  touch  the  [Exposure]  key  in  the  base  screen  of 
copy  mode  and  follow  the  steps  below. 


Select  the  original  image  type. 

Touch  the  appropriate  original  image  type  key  for  the  original. 


•  Original  image  type  select  keys 


Mode 

Description 

Text 

Use  this  mode  for  regular  text  documents. 

Text/P rtd.  Photo 

This  mode  provides  the  best  balance  for  copying  an  original  which  contains  both  text  and 
printed  photographs,  such  as  a  magazine  or  catalogue. 

Text/Photo 

This  mode  provides  the  best  balance  for  copying  an  original  which  contains  both  text  and 
photographs,  such  as  a  text  document  with  a  photo  pasted  on. 

Printed  photo 

This  mode  is  best  for  copying  printed  photographs,  such  as  photos  in  a  magazine  or  catalogue. 

Photo 

Use  this  mode  to  copy  photos. 

Map 

This  mode  is  best  for  copying  the  light  color  shading  and  fine  text  found  on  most  maps. 

2-21 


Contents 


COPIER 


Exposure 

1  ok  1 

Auto 

Original  Image  Type 

Ml  fd  | 

圍  Text/ Photo 

醒^™^  f  1 0  photo  1 

_  Map 

|QD  [JJ| 

Scan 

Resolution 

Adjust  the  exposure  level. 

Touch  the  f  I  )  key  to  make  the  copy  darker. 
Touch  the  0  )  key  to  make  the  copy  lighter. 


Guidelines  for  the  exposure  level  when  [Text]  is  selected: 

1  to  2:  Dark  originals  such  as  a  newspaper 

3:  Normal  density  originals 

4  to  5:  Originals  written  in  pencil  or  light  colored  text 


口」 ■■  I  a^rPhotol 叵 れ 讀 一 


|i  P^fl 旧嘛  |  |1  | 

QD  CD 


Scan 

Resolution 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  If  [Auto]  is  selected  but  the  darkness  or  lightness  of  the  image  does  not  seem  quite  right... 

If  the  image  seems  too  light  or  too  dark  when  [Auto]  is  selected,  the  exposure  level  can  be  adjusted  using  "Copy  Exposure 
Adjustment"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

•  To  change  the  resolution... 

When  making  a  full-size  copy,  you  can  press  the  [Scan  Resolution]  key  to  select  the  scanning  resolution.  On  the 
MX-M283N,  numbers  that  can  be  selected  for  the  document  glass  are  different  from  numbers  that  can  be  selected  for  the 
automatic  document  feeder. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Status  Settings  (Exposure  Type) 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  original  image  type. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Copy  Exposure  Adjustment 

The  exposure  level  used  for  automatic  exposure  adjustment  can  be  adjusted. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  600dpiX600dpi  Scanning  Mode  for  Document  Feeder/Quick  Scan  from 
Document  Glass 

The  default  resolution  setting  can  be  changed. 


2-22 


Contents 


COPIER 


REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM 

AUTOMATIC  RATIO  SELECTION  (Auto  Image) 

This  section  explains  the  automatic  ratio  selection  function  (Auto  Image),  which  automatically  selects  the  ratio  to  match 
the  paper  size. 

When  the  paper  tray  is  manually  changed,  the  [Auto  Image]  key  appears  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode.  Touch  the 
[Auto  Image]  key  to  have  the  reduction  or  enlargement  ratio  automatically  selected  based  on  the  original  size  and  the 
selected  paper  size. 

First  place  the  original  and  select  the  paper  tray,  and  then  touch  the  [Auto  Image]  key. 

Special  Modes  i 
2 -Sided  Copy  j 
Output 


Quick  File  | 


The  selected  ratio  will  appear  in  the  ratio  display. 


•If  the  message  "Rotate  original  from  _  to 画" is  displayed,  change  the  orientation  of  the  original  as  indicated  in  the 
message. 

•  For  a  non-standard  size  original,  the  size  must  be  entered  in  order  to  use  Auto  Image. 


•  To  cancel  automatic  ratio  selection... 

Touch  the  [Auto  Image]  key  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 

•To  return  the  ratio  to 100%... 

To  return  the  ratio  setting  to 100%,  touch  the  [Copy  Ratio]  key  to  display  the  ratio  menu  and  then  touch  the  [100%]  key. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Status  Settings  (Copy  Ratio) 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  copy  ratio. 


2-23 


Contents 


COPIER 


MANUALLY  SELECTING  THE  RATIO  (Preset 
ratios/Zoom) 

Touch  the  [Copy  Ratio]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  to  select  one  of  five  preset  enlargement  ratios  or  four 
preset  reduction  ratios  (maximum  400%, minimum  25%). 

In  addition,  the  zoom  keys  can  be  used  to  select  any  ratio  from  25%  to  400 %  in  increments  of  1%. 

Set  the  ratio. 

Touch  a  preset  ratio  key  and/or  the  zoom  keys  to  set  the  ratio. 
There  are  two  setting  screens.  Use  the  \±j  [jJ  keys  to  switch 
between  the  screens. 


Copy  Ratio 

11x17 增 11 

8 你 114  5 脚幺 1.  1 

[121%  彳 8 你 14 +  11x17 

11x17  4  8 你 14 丨 爪] 
8你14 岭败 11 V  1 

i  z°°m  i 

n^i  _岭_  2 

5 你 8 你 11 

100% 

a 

a 

[ Auto  Image  j  XY  Zoom 

•  1st  screen 

•  Enlargement  keys  (2  ratios):  121%  and  1 29% 

•  Reduction  keys  (2  ratios):  64%  and  77% 

• [100%]  key 


2nd  screen 


(A) 


Copy  E 

tio  |  OK  1 

Q 

H 

|biJ 

|Q 

猶 

丨分 j  Zoom 〔备 j 

s  2 

「40。%】  ^ 

网  {V} 

(,35〇%)  g 

100% 

f  Auto  Image  ]  [  XY  Zoom 

Enlargement  keys  (2  to  4  ratios) 
200%, 400%, any  ratio  (max.  of  two) 
Reduction  keys  (2  to  4  ratios) 

25%,  50%,  any  ratio  (max.  of  two) 
[100%]  key 


(A)  keys 

The  keys  marked  (A)  can  be  set  to  show  any  ratio  using  "Add  or  Change  Extra  Preset  Ratios"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator). 

To  quickly  select  a  ratio,  touch  a  reduction  or  enlargement  key  to  select  a  ratio  close  to  the  desired  ratio  and  then 
use  the  zoom  keys  for  fine  adjustment. 

The  zoom  keys  can  be  used  to  select  any  ratio  from  25%  to  400%  in  increments  of  1%. 

Touch  the  Q  key  to  increase  the  ratio,  or  the  Q  key  to  decrease  the  ratio.  (If  you  continue  to  touch  the  ^1/^1 
key,  the  ratio  will  change  automatically.  After  3  seconds,  the  ratio  will  change  rapidly.) 

As  an  alternative  to  touching  the  Q  ヒ J  Keys,  you  can  also  directly  touch  the  numeric  value  display  key  and 
change  the  value  with  the  numeric  keys. 

If  the  message  "Image  is  larger  than  the  copy  paper."  appears  when  an  enlargement  ratio  is  selected,  the  image 
may  not  fit  on  the  paper. 


2-24 


Contents 


COPIER 


Copy  Ratio  f  OK 

11x17  —  _ 

8 你 11 岭 5 你 8M  L  1 

國赛 

|^121%  |  8^x14  11x17 

11x17  - ►8^x14  [  77%1 
8你1448 你 11 1.  J 

1 分) Zoom 〔森 オ 

顧 他 i7  丁 

V  1  5Mx8M4  8Mxll 

100% 

a 

Q 

|  Auto  Image  |  XY  Zoom 

Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  make  sure  that  a  paper  size 
suitable  for  the  ratio  is  selected. 


When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  the  vertical  and  horizontal  ratio  selection  ranges  are  both  25%  to  200%. 


@To  return  the  ratio  to 100%... 

To  return  the  ratio  setting  to 100%,  touch  the  [Copy  Ratio]  key  to  display  the  ratio  menu  and  then  touch  the  [100%]  key. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Add  or  Change  Extra  Preset  Ratios 

Two  enlargement  preset  ratios  (101%  to  400%)  and  two  reduction  preset  ratios  (25%  to  99%)  can  be  added.  An  added 
preset  ratio  can  also  be  changed. 


2-25 


Contents 


COPIER 


ENLARGING/REDUCING  THE  LENGTH  AND  WIDTH 
SEPARATELY  (XY  Zoom) 

The  XY  Zoom  feature  allows  the  horizontal  and  vertical  copy  ratios  to  be  changed  separately. 

Both  the  horizontal  and  vertical  ratios  can  be  set  from  25%  to  400%  in  increments  of  1%. 

Touch  the  [Copy  Ratio]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  then  follow  the  steps  below. 

When  50%  is  selected  for  the  horizontal  ratio  and  70%  is  selected  for  the  vertical  ratio 


Original  Copy 


Touch  the  [XY  Zoom]  key. 


(2)  (1),(3)  (4) 


Set  the  horizontal  and  vertical  ratios. 

(1)  Touch  the  [X]  key, 

The  [X]  key  will  be  highlighted  and  the  horizontal  ratio  can 
be  set. 

(2)  Touch  one  of  the  preset  ratio  keys  (A)  and  the 
zoom  keys  (B)  to  set  the  X  (horizontal)  ratio. 

(A)  A  touched  preset  ratio  key  will  not  be  highlighted. 

(B)  The  zoom  keys  can  be  touched  to  set  the  ratio  from 
25%  to  400%  in  increments  of  1%. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  set  the  Y  (vertical) 
ratio  in  the  same  way  as  the  [X]  key. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  make  sure  that  a  paper  size 
suitable  for  the  ratio  is  selected. 


•  To  quickly  select  a  ratio,  touch  a  preset  ratio  key  (A)  to  select  a  ratio  close  to  the  desired  ratio  and  then  use  the 
zoom  keys  (B)  for  fine  adjustment. 

•  As  an  alternative  to  touching  the  Q  Q  keys, you  can  also  directly  touch  the  numeric  value  display  key  and 
change  the  value  with  the  numeric  keys. 


© 


When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  the  vertical  and  horizontal  ratio  selection  ranges  are  both  25%  to  200%. 


To  cancel  an  XY  zoom  setting... 

To  cancel  an  XY  Zoom  setting,  touch  the  [XY  Zoom]  key  or  the  [Cancel]  key. 


2-26 


Contents 


COPIER 


ORIGINAL  SIZES 

SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SIZE 

When  the  original  size  is  a  non-standard  size  or  is  not  detected  correctly,  manually  specify  the  original  size. 
Touch  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  then  follow  the  steps  below. 


Specifying  an  inch  original  size 

⑴  (2) 


1 — 

Original 

f ~ OK  ^ I 

Auto 

^Manual 

5^x8^  丨丨  8MxllR  |  [  11x17 

AB 

5Mx8MR  8 ぬ; 13  8 你 132〆 

麵 ,11  | 

[ Size  Input  |  [  Custom  Size  | 

Specifying  an  AB  original  size 


(2)  (1) (3) 


(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  original  size  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


(1)  Touch  the  [AB^Inch]  key, 

(2)  Touch  the  appropriate  original  size  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Specifying  a  non-standard  original  size 


2-27 


Contents 


COPIER 


⑴, (2)  (3) 


Enter  the  original  size. 

(1)  Enter  the  X  (horizontal)  dimension  of  the 
original. 

With  the  [X]  key  highlighted,  enter  the  X  (horizontal) 
dimension  of  the  original  with  the  keys.  When  the 

document  glass  is  used,  a  number  from  1" to 17"  (25  mm 
to  432  mm)  can  be  entered. 

When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  a  number 
from  5-1/2"  to 17" (140  mm  to  432  mm)  can  be  entered. 

If  the  horizontal  dimension  of  the  original  is  less  than 
5-1/2"  (140  mm),  use  the  document  glass. 

(2)  Enter  the  Y  (vertical)  dimension  of  the 
original. 

Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  Y  (vertical)  dimension  of 
the  original  with  the  keys.  When  the  document 

glass  is  used,  a  number  from  1 11  to 1 1 -5/8"  (25  mm  to  297 
mm)  can  be  entered. 

When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  a  number 
from  5-1/8"  to  11-5/8"  (131  mm  to  297  mm)  can  be 
entered. 

If  the  vertical  dimension  of  the  original  is  less  than  5-1/8" 
(131  mm),  use  the  document  glass. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen. 

Make  sure  that  the  entered  dimensions  appear  in  the 
[Original]  key. 


STORING  FREQUENTLY  USED  ORIGINAL  SIZES 

You  can  save  special  original  sizes  that  you  frequently  use.  This  section  explains  how  to  store,  retrieve,  change,  and 
delete  special  original  sizes. 

Storing  original  sizes  (editing/clearing) 

Up  to 12  special  original  sizes  can  be  stored. 

Touch  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  then  follow  the  steps  below. 


2-28 


Contents 


COPIER 


Original 

f.  °k  i 

Custom  Size 

丨  X15M  Y  8M  |  I  [  j 

(.  1  (.  ) (  I (.  ) 

Recall 

^Store/Delete  J 

J 

P)  ⑴ 


Store  the  original  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Store/Delete]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  a  key  for  storing  a  custom  original 
size. 

Touch  a  key  that  does  not  show  a  size  ([  J). 


If  you  wish  to  edit  or  clear  a  previously  stored  key... 

Touch  the  key  that  you  want  to  edit  or  clear.  The  following  screen  will  appear. 


A  custom  size  has  already  been  stored 
in  this  location. 


Cancel  j  f  Delete  j  f  Modify 


~u ~ ; 


•To  edit  the  key,  touch  the  [Modify]  key  and  go  to  the  next  step. 

•  To  clear  the  key,  touch  the  [Delete]  key.  Make  sure  that  the  original  size  has  been  cleared  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Enter  the  original  size. 

(1)  Enter  the  X  (horizontal)  dimension  of  the 
original. 

With  the  [X]  key  highlighted,  enter  the  X  (horizontal) 
dimension  of  the  original  with  the  Q  keys.  A 
dimension  from  1 11  to 17"  (25  mm  to  432  mm)  can  be 
entered. 

(2)  Enter  the  Y  (vertical)  dimension  of  the 
original. 

Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  Y  (vertical)  dimension  of 
the  original  with  the  Q  Q  keys.  A  dimension  from  1 11  to 
1 1-5/8"  (25  mm  to  297  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


The  stored  original  size  will  be  retained  even  if  the  main  power  is  turned  off. 


@To  cancel  the  operation... 

Press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  ((§))■ 


2-29 


Contents 


COPIER 


Retrieving  a  stored  original  size 

To  retrieve  a  stored  original  size,  touch  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  perform  the  steps  below. 


(2) (1)  (3) 


Original 

「基] 

Custom  Size 

|Ti^ 

1 

f  Recal 

1  OK  1 

.1  ^  J  Store/Delete 

Retrieve  the  desired  stored  original  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Recall]  tab, 

(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  original  size  that  you 
wish  to  retrieve, 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


@To  cancel  the  operation... 

Press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  (㉘) ■ 


2-30 


Contents 


] 


COPIER 


OUTPUT 


To  select  output  functions  and  the  output  tray,  touch  the  [Output]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode.  Output  functions 
that  can  be  selected  are  sort,  group,  offset,  staple  sort,  saddle  stitch,  and  punch.  All  explanations  of  the  settings  below 
assume  that  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed. 


(3)  —i(  Sort 


⑶ 

(4) 

(5) 


⑼ 


0 

□ 


(1)  [Offset  Tray]  key  ([Center  Tray]  key*) 

Output  is  delivered  to  the  offset  tray.  The  [Offset  Tray] 
key  is  automatically  selected  when  the  [Staple  Sort]  key 
is  selected. 

*  When  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  not  installed, 
this  key  is  the  [Center  Tray]  key. 

(2)  [Offset]  key 

This  is  used  to  offset  each  set  of  output  from  the  previous 
set. 

The  offset  function  operates  when  the  checkbox  is 
selected  ど J  and  does  not  operate  when  the  checkbox  is 
not  selected  _ J.  (The  offset  checkmark  is  automatically 
cleared  when  the  staple  sort  function  is  selected.) 

^  Offset  function  (page  2-33) 

(3)  [Sort]  key 

This  is  used  to  sort  (collate)  output  into  sets. 

隊  Sort  mode  (page  2-33) 

(4)  [Staple  Sort]  key 

This  is  used  to  sort  output  into  sets,  staple  each  set,  and 
deliver  the  sets  to  the  tray.  (Note  that  the  sets  will  not  be 
offset  in  the  output  tray.)  When  this  function  is  selected, 
three  keys  will  appear  for  selecting  the  staple  position. 
隊  Staple  sort  function  /  Saddle  stitch  function  (page 
2-34) 

(5)  [Group]  key 

This  is  used  to  group  copies  by  page. 

暖  Group  mode  (page  2-33) 

(6)  Output  display 

An  icon  will  appear  to  indicate  the  output  mode. 


(7)  [Right  Tray]  key 

Select  this  key  to  have  output  delivered  to  the  right  tray. 
When  the  right  tray  is  selected,  offset,  staple  sort,  saddle 
stitch,  punch,  and  fold  cannot  be  selected. 

(8)  [OK]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  close  the  output  screen  and  return  to 
the  base  screen. 

(9)  [Saddle  Stitch]  key 

This  is  used  to  staple  and  fold  each  set  of  copies  at  the 
centerline. 

隊  Staple  sort  function  /  Saddle  stitch  function  (page 
2-34) 

When  this  key  is  touched,  the  saddle  stitch  setting  screen 
appears.  (Only  when  "Automatic  Saddle  Stitch"  is 
enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).) 

(10)  [Punch]  key 

This  is  used  to  punch  holes  in  the  output. 

瞭  Punch  function  (page  2-37) 

(11)  [Fold]  key 

This  folds  printed  output  in  half.  You  can  choose  whether 
the  output  is  folded  inward  or  outward. 

隊  Paper  folding  function  (page  2-36) 


2-31 


Contents 


COPIER 


The  above  screen  shows  the  keys  that  appear  when  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed.  The  keys  that  appear  will  vary 
depending  on  what  peripheral  devices  are  installed. 

In  addition,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  select  some  keys  depending  what  peripheral  devices  are  installed.  If  your  screen  is 
different  from  the  screen  of  previous  page,  see  the  screens  that  follow. 


Example 

The  screen  when  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  not  installed. 


2-32 


Contents 


COPIER 


Set  the  number  of  copies  (5). 


Group  mode 

This  function  groups  copies  by  page. 

Example:  Groups  of  5  copies  of  each  page 

Originals  Output 


OUTPUT  MODES 

This  section  explains  the  output  modes. 

Sort  mode 

This  is  used  to  sort  (collate)  output  into  sets. 

Example:  Sorting  the  output  into  5  sets 

Originals  Output 


I  i 


Set  the  number  of  copies  (5). 


Output 


Touch  the  [Output]  key. 


Touch  the  [Sort]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


The  sort  function  is  automatically  selected  when 
originals  are  placed  in  the  automatic  document  feeder. 
When  the  Quick  File  Folder  for  document  filing  is 
full,  copying  of  a  large  number  of  originals  using  the 
sort  function  will  be  impeded.  Delete  unneeded  files 
from  the  Quick  File  Folder. 


f  outPut  1  Touch  the  [Output]  key. 


巧 


普 


Touch  the  [Group]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


The  group  function  is  automatically  selected  when  an 
original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass. 


Offset  function 

This  function  offsets  each  set  of  copies  from  the  previous  set  in  the  output  tray,  making  it  easy  to  separate  sets  of  copies. 


Offset  function  "ON" 


Offset  function  "OFF" 


The  offset  function  cannot  be  used  in  the  right  tray. 

The  offset  function  cannot  be  selected  when  the  staple  sort  function  is  selected. 


2-33 


Contents 


® ® ^ @ 
® @ ® ® 


® ® ^ @ 

® ® ©^ ® 


COPIER 


Staple  sort  function  /  Saddle  stitch  function 

The  staple  sort  function  sorts  output  into  sets,  staples  each  set,  and  delivers  the  sets  to  the  tray. 

The  saddle  stitch  function  staples  each  set  in  2  places  at  the  centerline  and  folds  the  stapled  set. 

The  relations  between  the  stapling  positions,  paper  orientation,  permitted  paper  sizes  for  stapling,  and  number  of  sheets 
that  can  be  stapled  are  shown  below. 

For  original  placement  orientations,  see  "Original  placement  orientation  (for  the  staple  sort  and  punch  functions)11  (page  2-37). 


Staple  sort 


Stapling  positions 

1  staple  at  top  left 
corner*1 


0® 


Vertically-oriented  paper 


1  staple  at  bottom  left 
corner*1 


因 


Applicable  paper  sizes 
8-1/2"  x11n,A4,  B5, 16K 
Number  of  sheets  that  can 


2  staples  at  left  edge 

r -  I 

0®  ^ 


be  stapled: 

Max.  50  sheets*2 


Horizontally-oriented  paper 


•  Saddle  stitch  finisher 
Applicable  paper  sizes 

11" x  17n,  8-1 /2M  x  14",  8-1/2Mx  13-1/2", 
8-1/2nx  13-2/5",  8-1/2Mx13M, 

8-1/2"  x  11"R,  A3,  B4,  A4R,  B5R,  8K, 
16KR 

Number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled 

11n  x  17", 8-1 /2Mx  14", 8-1/2"  x  13-1/2", 
8-1/2"  x  13-2/5",  8-1/211  x  13M,  A3,  B4, 
8K: 

Max.  25  sheets*2 
8-1/2Mx11MR,  A4R,  B5R,  16KR: 

Max.  50  sheets*2 

•  Finisher 

Applicable  paper  sizes 

11n  x  17", 8-1 /2Mx  14", 8-1/2Mx  13-1/2", 
8-1/2"  x  13-2/5",  8-1/2"  x  13", 

8-1/2"  x11nR, A3,  B4,  A4R,8K, 16KR 
Number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled 
11" x  17M,  8-1 /2M  x  14", 8-1 /2Mx  13-1/2", 
8-1 /2M  x  13-2/5",  8-1/211  x  13M,  A3,  B4, 
8K: 

Max.  30  sheets*2 


8-1/2"  x11nR,A4R, 16KR: 
Max.  50  sheets*2 


•  Finisher  (large  stacker) 

Applicable  paper  sizes 

11" x  17n,  8-1 /2M  x  14",  8-1/2Mx  13-1/2", 
8-1 /2M  x  1 3-2/5" ,  8-1/2Mx13M, 
8-1/2Mx11MR,  A3,  B4,  A4R,  8K 


Number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled 


Max.  30  sheets*2 


Saddle  stitch  (only  with 
saddle  stitch  finisher) 


Saddle  stitch  cannot  be  used 
when  the  paper  is  oriented 
vertically 


Applicable  paper  sizes 

11n  x  17",  8-1/2Mx  14",  8-1/211  x  11MR,  A3, 
B4,  A4R,  8K, 16KR 

Number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled: 

Max. 15  sheets*2 


*1  When  the  top  left  corner  or  the  bottom  left  corner  of  the  paper  is  stapled  in  one  place  by  the  finisher  (large  stacker),  the  staple  is 
placed  diagonally.  (Diagonal  stapling) 

*2  Two  sheets  (one  sheet  when  pamphlet  stapling  is  performed)  of  paper  up  to  68  lbs.  (256  g/m2)  can  be  stapled  as  covers.  When  this 
is  done,  the  number  of  sheets  that  can  be  used  is  two  less  (one  less  for  saddle  stitch)  than  the  stated  maximum. 


2-34 


Contents 


COPIER 


•  The  number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled  at  once  includes  any  covers  and/or  inserts  that  are  inserted. 

•  When  Mixed  Size  Original  in  the  special  modes  is  used  with  the  "Same  Width"  setting,  the  maximum  number  of  sheets  that 
can  be  stapled  is  25  for  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  or  30  for  a  finisher  regardless  of  the  paper  size. 

•  The  saddle  stitch  function  can  only  be  used  when  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed. 


2-35 


Contents 


COPIER 


Paper  folding  function 


When  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  the  fold  function  can  be  used  to  fold  printed  output  in  half. 

Paper  sizes  that  can  be  folded  using  the  paper  folding  function  are  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R,  8-1/2"  x  14", 11" x  17",  A4R,  B4,  A3, 
16KR,  and  8K.  For  detailed  information  on  the  sizes  and  types  of  paper  that  can  be  folded,  see  the  specifications  in  the 
Safety  Guide. 


Fold  inside 

Touch  the  [Fold]  key  to  open  the  fold  settings  screen.  To  fold  inward  (printed  side  inside),  touch  the  [Fold  Inside]  key.  To 
fold  outward  (printed  side  outside),  touch  the  [Fold  Outside]  key. 


•  Special  media  such  as  transparency  film  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used. 

•  When  the  paper  folding  function  is  selected,  the  staple  or  hole  punch  function  cannot  be  used. 

•  When  two-sided  printing  is  disabled  in  the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator),  the  paper  folding  function  cannot  be 
used. 


2-36 


Contents 


COPIER 


Punch  function 


If  an  optional  punch  module  is  installed,  holes  can  be  punched  in  output. 

Paper  size  that  can  be  punched  is  7-1/4"  x  10-1/2"  to 11" x  17"  (B5R  to  A3).  However, 12"  x  18"  (A3W)  sized  paper  and 
special  media  such  as  transparency  film  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used. 

[Examples]  [Original  1]  [Punch  positions] 


A  - A 


[Original  2]  [Punch  positions] 


The  hole  punch  function  cannot  be  used  with  the  saddle  stitch  or  paper  folding  function  together. 


Original  placement  orientation  (for  the  staple  sort  and  punch  functions) 


When  using  the  staple  sort  function  or  the  punch  function,  the  original  must  be  placed  as  shown  below  to  enable  stapling 
or  punching  in  the  desired  position  on  the  paper. 


2-37 


Contents 


COPIER 


MAKING  COPIES  USING  THE  BYPASS  TRAY 

In  addition  to  plain  paper, the  bypass  tray  allows  you  to  make  copies  on  transparency  film,  envelopes,  tab  paper,  and 
other  special  media. 

For  detailed  information  on  paper  that  can  be  loaded  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "IMPORTANT  POINTS  ABOUT  PAPER" 
(page  1-27)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE".  For  precautions  when  loading  paper  in  the  bypass  tray,  see 
"LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY"  (page  1-34)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 

When  placing  the  originals  on  the  document  glass... 

After  placing  the  original,  be  sure  to  close  the  automatic 
document  feeder.  If  left  open,  parts  outside  of  the  original  will 
be  copied  black,  causing  excessive  use  of  toner. 


Place  paper  in  the  bypass  tray. 

Insert  the  paper  with  print  side  face  down. 

However,  if  the  paper  type  is  "Letter  Head"  or  "Pre-Printed", 
load  the  paper  with  the  print  side  face  up*. 

*  If  "Disabling  of  Duplex"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator),  load  the  paper  in  the  normal  way  (face  up  in 
trays  1  to  5;  face  down  in  the  bypass  tray). 

When  loading  paper  larger  than  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  or  A4R,  be  sure 
to  pull  out  the  bypass  tray  extension.  Pull  the  bypass  tray 
extension  all  the  way  out.  If  the  bypass  tray  extension  is  not 
pulled  all  the  way  out,  the  size  of  the  loaded  paper  will  not  be 
correctly  displayed. 


Touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 


2-38 


Contents 


COPIER 


Check  the  paper  type  setting  for  the 
bypass  tray.  If  you  need  to  change  the 
setting,  touch  the  paper  type  key. 

If  you  do  not  need  to  change  the  paper  size  and  type  that 
appear  under  "Bypass  Tray",  go  to  step  7. 


Select  the  type  of  paper  used  in  the 
bypass  tray. 

Select  the  paper  type  that  you  will  use. 


Set  the  paper  size. 

(1)  Select  the  paper  size. 

[Auto-Inch]  key 

When  the  paper  placed  in  the  bypass  tray  is  an  inch  size 
(8-1/2"  x  11",  etc.),  the  paper  size  will  be  detected 
automatically  and  an  appropriate  size  set. 

[Auto-AB]  key 

When  the  paper  inserted  in  the  bypass  tray  is  an  AB  size 
(A4,  etc.),  the  paper  size  will  be  detected  automatically 
and  an  appropriate  size  set. 

[Custom  Size]  key 

Touch  this  key  if  you  wish  to  enter  numeric  values  for  the 
size  of  the  loaded  paper. 

暖  Enter  the  paper  size  of  the  bypass  tray  (page  2-40) 

[Manual]  key 

This  key  can  be  touched  to  display  the  [16K],  [16KR],  and 
[8K]  keys.  Touch  one  of  these  keys  if  you  loaded  the 
corresponding  size  of  paper. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  When  [Envelope]  is  selected,  specify  the  size  of  the  envelope.  When  finished,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

•  If  tab  paper  is  selected,  check  the  size.  Touch  the  [Auto-Inch]  key  or  the  [Auto-AB]  key.  When  you  have  finished 
checking/changing  the  setting,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


2-39 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  the  bypass  tray. 

(1)  Touch  the  paper  size  key  of  the  bypass  tray. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  the  originals  were  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  the  originals  are  copied. 

•  If  you  placed  the  originals  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  using  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
press  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Enter  the  paper  size  of  the  bypass  tray 

When  the  [Custom  Size]  key  is  touched,  the  paper  size  entry  screen  appears. 


Touch  the  [X]  key  and  enter  the  horizontal  dimension  of 
the  paper  with  the  Q  Q  keys,  and  then  touch  the  [Y] 
key  and  enter  the  vertical  dimension.  When  finished, 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Stored  custom  paper  sizes  appear  in  the  keys  on  the  left  side  of  the  screen.  Custom  paper  sizes  are  stored  in  the  system 
settings.  For  details,  see  "Paper  Tray  Settings"  (page  7-13)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS".  If  the  key  for  the  size  that  you  wish 
to  enter  appears,  touch  that  key. 


2-40 


Contents 


COPIER 


SPECIAL  MODES 


This  chapter  explains  Margin  Shift,  Erase, Dual  Page  Copy,  and  other  special  modes. 


SPECIAL  MODES 

When  the  [Special  Modes]  key  is  pressed  in  the  base  screen,  the  special  modes  menu  screen  appears.  The  special 
modes  menu  consists  of  two  screens.  Touch  the  [ヨ  keys  to  move  between  the  screens.  After  selecting  special 
mode  settings,  touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  special  modes  menu  screen  to  complete  the  settings  and  return  to  the  base 
screen  of  copy  mode. 


Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen) 


(1)  [Margin  Shift]  key 

暖  ADDING  MARGINS  (Margin  Shift)  (page  2-44) 

(2)  [Erase]  key 

隊  ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  (Erase)  (page 
2-46) 

(3)  [Dual  Page  Copy]  key 

^  COPYING  EACH  FACING  PAGE  OF  A  BOUND 
DOCUMENT  (Dual  Page  Copy)  (page  2-48) 

(4)  [Pamphlet  Copy]  key 

^  MAKING  COPIES  IN  PAMPHLET  FORMAT 
(Pamphlet  Copy)  (page  2-50) 

(5)  [Job  Build]  key 

^  COPYING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF  ORIGINALS  AT 
ONCE  (Job  Build)  (page  2-53) 

⑹ [Tandem  Copy]  key 

^  USING  TWO  MACHINES  TO  MAKE  A  LARGE 
NUMBER  OF  COPIES  (Tandem  Copy)  (page  2-56) 

(7)  [Covers/Inserts]  key 

^  USING  A  DIFFERENT  PAPER  TYPE  FOR  COVERS 
(Covers/Inserts)  (page  2-59) 


(8)  [Transparency  Inserts]  key 

^  ADDING  INSERTS  WHEN  COPYING  ON 
TRANSPARENCY  FILM  (Transparency  Inserts) 
(page  2-70) 

(9)  [Multi  Shot]  key 

^  COPYING  MULTIPLE  ORIGINALS  ONTO  ONE 
SHEET  (Multi  Shot)  (page  2-72) 

(10)  [Book  Copy]  key 

暖  COPYING  A  PAMPHLET  (Book  Copy)  (page  2-74) 

(11)  [Tab  Copy]  key 

^  COPYING  CAPTIONS  ONTO  TAB  PAPER  (Tab 
Copy)  (page  2-78) 

(12)  [Card  Shot]  key 

^  COPYING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ON  ONE 
SHEET  OF  PAPER  (Card  Shot)  (page  2-81) 


2-41 


Contents 


COPIER 


Special  modes  menu  (2nd  screen) 


Special  Modes 


m —— - 

Image  Edit 


Quick  File 


Sharpness 


2 

Q 

a 


(1)  [Stamp]  key 

^  PRINTING  THE  DATE  AND  A  STAMP  ON  COPIES 
(Stamp)  (page  2-84) 

(2)  [Image  Edit]  key 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 

(3)  [Sharpness]  key 

隊  ADJUSTING  THE  SHARPNESS  OF  AN  IMAGE 
(Sharpness)  (page  2-117) 

(4)  [File]  key 

This  saves  a  job  in  a  folder  of  the  document  filing 
function. 

(5)  [Quick  File]  key 

This  saves  a  job  in  the  Quick  File  folder  of  the  document 
filing  function. 


(6)  [Proof  Copy]  key 

^  CHECKING  COPIES  BEFORE  PRINTING  (Proof 
Copy)  (page  2-118) 

⑺ [Original  Count]  key 

暖  CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 

ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  COPYING  (Original 
Count)  (page  2-121) 

(8)  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key 

^  COPYING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT  SIZES 
(Mixed  Size  Original)  (page  2-123) 

(9)  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key 

瞭  COPYING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode) 
(page  2-126) 


Special  modes  can  generally  be  combined  with  other  special  modes,  however,  there  are  some  combinations  that  are  not 
possible.  In  this  case,  a  message  indicating  that  the  combination  is  not  possible  will  be  displayed. 


2-42 


Contents 


COPIER 


[OK]  key  and  [Cancel]  key 

In  some  cases  two  [OK]  keys  and  one  [Cancel]  key  will  appear  in  the  special  mode  screens.  The  keys  are  used  as 
follows: 


(A)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  settings  and  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

(B)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  settings  and  return  to  the  special  modes  menu  screen.  Touch  this  key  when  you 
wish  to  continue  selecting  other  special  mode  settings. 

(C)  During  selection  of  special  mode  settings,  this  key  returns  you  to  the  special  modes  menu  screen  without  saving  the 
settings.  When  settings  have  been  completed,  this  cancels  the  settings  and  returns  you  to  the  special  modes  menu 
screen. 


Contents 


2-43 


COPIER 


ADDING  MARGINS  (Margin  Shift) 

This  function  is  used  to  shift  the  copy  image  right,  left  or  down  to  adjust  the  margin. 

This  is  convenient  when  you  wish  to  bind  the  copies  with  a  string  or  in  a  binder. 


Shifting  the  image  to  the  right  so  the  copies  can  be  bound  at  the  left  edge  with  a  string 

Not  using  margin  shift 


三 □ 


The  punch  holes  cut  off 
part  of  the  image 


Using  margin  shift 


o 


The  image  is  moved  to 
allow  space  for  the  string 
holes  so  the  image  is  not 


cut  off. 


Margin  shift  positions 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Margin  Shift]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


(1)  (2)  (3) 


1— , 

Special  Modes 

圓 

[ 一 OK  一 ) 

Margin  Shift 

Cancel  Jf  OK 

Right  Le: 

m  i 

ft  Down 

Ll 

i 

仙 

1 

Side  1  _  Side  2 

(0~1)  (o-l) 

inch  inch 

LzJ  W 

Set  the  margin  shift. 

(1)  Touch  the  margin  shift  position. 

Select  one  of  the  three  positions. 

(2)  Set  the  amount  of  the  margin  shift  with 

aa- 

0"  to 1 11  (0  mm  to  20  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


2-44 


Contents 


COPIER 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)).  ^ 


Rotation  copy  cannot  be  used  in  combination  with  margin  shift. 


@To  cancel  the  margin  shift  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Margin  Shift  Setting 

The  default  margin  shift  setting  can  be  set  from  0"  to 1 11  (0  mm  to  20  mm).  The  factory  default  setting  is  1/2" (10  mm). 


2-45 


Contents 


COPIER 


ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  (Erase) 

The  erase  function  is  used  to  erase  shadows  around  the  edges  of  copies  that  occur  when  copying  thick  originals  or 
books. 


When  a  thick  book  is  copied 


Erase  modes 


Not  using  the  erase 
function 

Using  the  erase 
function 

三 □ 

i 三 □ 

_ 

i 

_  1 

I  ! 

l  | 

_ 

i  ! 

!  ! 

Shadows  appear  on  the 
copy. 

Shadows  do  not  appear  on 
the  copy. 

Edge  Erase 


三 □ 


Center  Erase 


Edge  +  Center  Erase 


三 □  iED: 


Side  Erase 


兰 □) 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Erase]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-46 


Contents 


COPIER 


Special  Modes 


Erase 


Edge 

Erase 


[> 


(1) 


Center 

Erase 


Edge+Center 

Erase 

Ell 


Side  Erase 


(2)  (3) 


^^5 


3  0  3  3 


Select  the  erase  settings. 

(1) Touch  the  desired  erase  mode. 

Select  one  of  the  four  positions. 

Touch  the  [Side  Erase]  key  to  open  the  following  screen. 


Erase 

Side  Erase 

_ 

Cancel 

□  up 

Erase  position 
for  Side  2 

& 

VO 

Left 口 

Right 

i 

な 

□  D。 

wn 

^Different  Side 

|  from  Side  1 

Touch  the  checkbox  of  the  edge  that  you  wish  to  erase 
and  make  sure  that  a  checkmark  appears. 

When  performing  1 -sided  to  2-sided  copying  or  2-sided  to 
2-sided  copying,  set  the  erase  edge  on  the  reverse  side. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Same  Side  as  Side  1] key,  the  edge  in 
the  same  position  as  on  the  front  side  will  be  erased. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Different  Side  from  Side  1], the  edge  in 
the  position  opposite  to  the  erased  edge  on  the  front 
side  will  be  erased. 

When  you  have  completed  the  erase  edge  settings,  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 


(2)  Set  the  erasure  width  with  QS- 

0"  to 1 " (0  mm  to  20  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


© 


If  a  ratio  setting  is  used  in  combination  with  an  erase  setting,  the  erase  width  will  change  according  to  the  selected  ratio. 

For  example,  if  the  erase  width  setting  is  1 11  (20  mm)  and  the  image  is  reduced  to  50%,  the  erase  width  will  be  1/2" (10  mm). 

To  cancel  the  erase  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Erase  Width  Adjustment 

The  default  erase  width  can  be  set  from  0"  to 1 11  (0  mm  to  20  mm).  The  factory  default  setting  is  1/2" (10  mm). 


2-47 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  EACH  FACING  PAGE  OF  A 
BOUND  DOCUMENT  (Dual  Page  Copy) 

The  dual  page  copy  function  produces  separate  copies  of  two  document  pages  that  are  placed  side  by  side  on  the 
document  glass.  This  function  is  useful  when  making  copies  of  the  facing  pages  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document. 

Copying  the  facing  pages  of  a  book  or  bound  document 


Book  or  bound  document 


5  ]  [  6 

The  facing  pages  are  copied 
onto  2  separate  pages. 


Place  the  original  on  the  document  glass. 

Align  the  center  of  the  original  with  the  appropriate  size  mark  T . 


Size  mark 

圔 
▼  ▼ 

1 

Centerline  of 

n 

Centerline  of 

A3  original 

11" x  17"  original 

Select  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  size  paper. 

Select  the  paper  as  explained  in  "PAPER  TRAYS"  (page  2-11). 


2-48 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  Dual  Page  Copy. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Dual  Page  Copy]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


I  Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  When  using  dual  page  copy,  the  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•To  erase  shadows  caused  by  the  binding  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document,  use  the  erase  function. 
However,  note  that  [Center  Erase]  and  [Edge  +  Center  Erase]  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  dual  page  copy... 

Touch  the  [Dual  Page  Copy]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-49 


Contents 


COPIER 


MAKING  COPIES  IN  PAMPHLET  FORMAT 
(Pamphlet  Copy) 

This  function  copies  2  original  pages  onto  the  front  side  and  2  original  pages  onto  the  reverse  side  of  each  sheet  of 
paper  so  that  the  copies  can  be  folded  at  the  centerline  to  form  a  pamphlet. 

This  function  is  convenient  for  arranging  copies  into  an  attractive  booklet  or  pamphlet. 


Pamphlet  copy  using  8  original  pages 


Originals 


1st  page  2nd  page 

厄 


5 

5th  page  6th  page 


1 

~| 

三 □ 

3 

4 

3rd  page  4th  page 

k 

7 

7th  page  8th  page 


Binding  side 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


If  the  originals  are  2-sided,  place  them  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Pamphlet  Copy]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-50 


Contents 


COPIER 


(1)  (2)  (3) 


Select  pamphlet  copy  settings. 

(1)  If  the  original  is  1 -sided,  touch  the  [1 -Sided] 
key.  If  the  original  is  2-sided,  touch  the 
[2-Sided]  key, 

(2)  Select  the  binding  edge  ([Left  Binding]  or 
[Right  Binding]). 

(3)  To  insert  a  cover,  touch  the  [Cover  Setting] 
key. 

If  you  do  not  want  to  add  a  cover,  go  to  step  5. 


(1) 


Pamphlet  Copy 

: Cover  Setting 

Bypass 

Tray 


•i 


11x17 

Plain 


(A) 

(B) 


Cancel 


Print  on  Cover (2 -Sided) 


□ 


Select  cover  settings. 

(1)  If  the  cover  sheet  will  be  copied  on,  touch 
the  [Yes]  key.  Otherwise,  touch  the  [No] 
key. 

(2)  Select  paper  settings  for  the  cover. 

(A)  The  currently  selected  paper  tray  for  the  cover  is 
displayed. 

(B)  The  size  and  type  of  paper  in  the  currently  selected 
tray  is  displayed. 

To  change  the  paper  tray  for  the  cover,  touch  the  "Paper 
T  ray 11  key. 

When  the  "Paper  Tray"  key  is  touched,  a  tray  selection 
screen  appears.  Select  the  paper  tray  for  the  cover  in  the 
tray  selection  screen  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Pamphlet  Copy 


Cover  Setting 


Paper  Tray 


|l.  8你11 

l=J 

Plain 

[2.  8V2X11R 

l=J 

Plain 

卜 8 紐 14 

l=J 

Plain 

卜 11x17 

1=) 

Plain 

Bypass  Tray 


(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


If  the  cover  will  be  copied  on,  label  sheets,  transparency  film,  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  cover  settings... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


2-51 


Contents 


COPIER 


n  [^i  [W\  i— 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned 
and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  of  the  original  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•To  make  pamphlet  copies  of  a  book  or  other  bound  original,  use  the  book  copy  function. 

•  When  the  pamphlet  copy  function  is  selected,  2-sided  copying  mode  is  automatically  selected.  When  settings  are  selected 
that  prevent  2-sided  copying,  the  pamphlet  copy  function  cannot  be  used. 

•  Scan  the  originals  in  order  from  the  first  page  to  the  last  page.  The  order  of  copying  will  be  automatically  adjusted  by  the 
machine.  Four  original  pages  will  be  copied  onto  each  sheet  of  paper.  Blank  pages  will  be  automatically  produced  at  the 
end  if  the  number  of  original  pages  is  not  a  multiple  of  four. 


•  When  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  the  saddle  stitch  function  can  be  used. 

When  pamphlet  copy  is  used  in  combination  with  the  saddle  stitch  function  and  the  number  of  originals  is  greater  than  the 
number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled,  a  message  will  appear  showing  the  [Cancel]  key,  the  [Continue]  key,  and  the 
[Divide]  key. 

To  cancel  the  job,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key.  To  make  pamphlet  copies  without  stapling,  touch  the  [Continue]  key.  To  divide 
the  pages  into  sets  that  can  be  stapled,  touch  the  [Divide]  key. 

If  you  selected  cover  insertion  settings,  it  will  not  be  possible  to  select  "Divide".  You  can  either  continue  pamphlet  copying 
without  stapling,  or  cancel  the  job. 

@To  cancel  pamphlet  copy... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Automatic  Saddle  Stitch 

When  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  this  setting  can  be  enabled  to  have  saddle  stitch  take  place  automatically  when  the 
pamphlet  copy  function  is  selected. 


2-52 


Contents 


COPIER 


Special  Modes 


l  Marqin  Shift  j 
l  Pamphlet  Copy j 


[ E 職  I  gDUaCopPyage| 


r#  xt  i 

[Covers/lnsertsj  I  ^  t  ^  I  I  Multi  Shot  j 


f  Book  Copy 

Tab  Copy 

Card  Shot 

Select  Job  Build. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  first  set  of  originals. 

Scanning  begins. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-53 


Contents 


COPYING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF 
ORIGINALS  AT  ONCE  (Job  Build) 

When  copying  a  very  large  number  of  originals,  this  function  allows  you  to  divide  the  originals  into  sets  and  feed  each 
set  through  the  automatic  document  feeder  one  set  at  a  time. 

Use  this  function  when  you  wish  to  copy  all  of  the  originals  as  a  single  job  but  the  number  of  originals  exceeds  the 
maximum  number  that  can  be  inserted. 

This  function  is  convenient  when  you  wish  to  sort  copies  of  a  large  number  of  originals  into  multiple  sets.  Because  all 
originals  are  copied  as  a  single  job,  you  are  saved  the  trouble  of  sorting  the  copies  that  would  be  required  if  the  originals 
were  divided  into  separate  copy  jobs. 

When  scanning  originals  in  sets,  divide  the  sheets  so  that  no  set  has  more  than  the  number  of  paper  that  can  be  loaded, 
and  then  scan  from  the  set  with  the  first  page.  The  settings  that  you  select  for  the  first  set  can  be  used  for  all  remaining  sets. 


Sorting  the  copies  of  a  large  number  of  originals  into  2  sets 

Originals  are 

Originals  scanned  in 

separate  sets 


门 


门 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


a a 


COPIER 


Insert  the  next  set  of  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  this  step  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


© 


The  copy  settings  (Exposure,  Paper  Select,  and  Copy  Ratio  only)  can  be  changed  for  each  set  of  originals.  If  you  need 
to  change  the  copy  setting,  follow  the  steps  in  "Changing  the  copy  settings  for  each  set  of  originals". 

To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)).  All  scanned  data  will  be  cleared. 


Place  next  original  and  press  [Start] . 
to  change  copy  settings, 
press  [Change] . 


Change 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


If  the  Quick  File  Folder  of  document  filing  mode  is  full,  copying  in  job  build  mode  will  be  impeded.  Delete  unneeded  files  from 
the  Quick  File  Folder. 


@To  cancel  job  build  mode.... 

Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-54 


Contents 


COPIER 


Changing  the  copy  settings  for  each  set  of  originals 

The  copy  settings  (Exposure,  Paper  Select,  and  Copy  Ratio  only)  can  be  changed  for  each  set  of  originals. 
Perform  the  step  below  before  pressing  the  [Start]  key  to  scan  the  originals  in  step  4  above. 


Touch  the  [Change]  key. 


Change  the  desired  copy  settings  in  the 
screen  that  appears  and  press  the  [Start] 
key. 

Scanning  of  the  originals  will  begin  using  the  changed  copy 
settings. 

To  cancel  the  copy  setting  changes  and  begin  copying  without 
scanning  the  new  originals,  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


•  The  original  size  cannot  be  changed  manually  with  the  [Original]  key.  If  the  automatic  original  detection  function  is 
operating,  the  original  size  will  be  detected  for  each  set  of  originals  placed. 

•  When  the  bypass  tray  is  selected,  it  is  not  possible  to  change  the  paper  type. 

•If  "XY  Zoom"  was  set  for  the  ratio  when  the  previous  original  was  scanned,  it  will  not  be  possible  to  change  the  ratio. 

•  When  "Job  Build"  is  used  in  combination  with  the  functions  below,  the  [Change]  key  will  not  appear  in  the  screen  of  step  1 
above. 

Pamphlet  copy,  tandem  copy,  covers/inserts,  transparency  inserts,  multi-shot,  book  copy,  tab  copy,  staple  sort,  saddle 
stitch 


2-55 


Contents 


COPIER 


# 


_ ュ I 


] raxpri 


Covers/Inserts 


Transparency 

Inserts 


Select  tandem  copy. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Tandem  Copy]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


USING  TWO  MACHINES  TO  MAKE  A  LARGE 
NUMBER  OF  COPIES  (Tandem  Copy) 

Two  machines  connected  to  the  same  network  can  be  used  to  run  a  large  copy  job  in  parallel. 

Each  machine  prints  half  of  the  copies,  reducing  the  time  required  to  complete  the  job. 

Master  machine  and  slave  machine 

In  the  following  explanation,  the  master  machine  is  the  machine  that  is  used  to  scan  the  originals.  The  slave  machine  is 
another  machine  specified  in  the  master  machine  that  only  helps  print  the  copies;  it  is  not  used  to  scan  the  originals. 


Masfer  machine 


4  sets  of  copies  are 
made 


2  sets  of 
copies 


2  sets  of 
copies 


Slave  machine 

_ ' 

Network  environment 

Before  using  tandem  copy 

•  To  use  this  function,  two  machines  must  be  connected  to  your  network.  Even  if  more  machines  are  connected  to  the 
network,  this  function  can  only  be  used  to  have  one  other  machine  share  a  job. 

•  To  use  the  tandem  copy  function,  "Tandem  Connection  Setting"  must  be  configured  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator). 

•  When  configuring  the  system  settings  in  the  master  machine,  the  IP  address  of  the  slave  machine  is  required.  For  the 
port  number,  it  is  best  to  use  the  initial  setting  (50001).  Unless  you  experience  difficulty  with  this  setting,  do  not 
change  the  port  number.  The  tandem  settings  should  be  configured  by  your  network  administrator.  If  the  master 
machine  and  slave  machine  will  switch  roles,  configure  the  IP  address  of  the  master  machine  in  the  slave  machine. 
The  same  port  number  can  be  used  for  both  machines. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B E 


2-56 


Contents 


COPIER 


Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 

Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set.  When  the  [START]  key  is 
pressed,  the  copies  will  automatically  be  divided  between  the 
master  and  slave  machines. 

If  an  odd  number  of  copies  is  set,  the  master  machine  will  print 
the  extra  set. 


© 


If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  {©)  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned 
and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


The  following  screen  appears  when  the  [START]  key  is  pressed. 


After  the  message  appears,  tandem  copying  begins. 

If  tandem  copying  is  not  possible,  the  following  screen  appears. 


A 


Tandem  output  is  not  allowed. 

Output  all  sets  using  master  machine? 
(Cancel  will  delete  the  job. ) 


Cancel 


To  have  the  master  machine  make  all  copies,  touch  the  [OK]  key.  To  cancel  the  job,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


© 


•  To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 

•  To  cancel  tandem  copying... 

Touch  the  [STOP]  keys  (®)  on  both  the  master  machine  and  the  slave  machine. 


2-57 


Contents 


® ® ® @ 

® ® ® @ 

® @ ⑦ © 


COPIER 


In  this  situation... 

A  punch  module  is  installed  on  the  master  machine  but  not  on  the  slave  machine. 

•Copying  without  punching:  tandem  copy  is  possible. 

•Copying  with  punching:  tandem  copy  is  not  possible. 

In  this  way,  if  tandem  copying  is  executed  using  a  function  that  the  slave  machine  does  not  have,  a  message  will  appear.  To 
have  the  master  machine  make  all  copies,  touch  the  [OK]  key.  To  cancel  the  job,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


If  a  machine  runs  out  of  paper 

If  either  the  master  machine  or  the  slave  machine  run  out  of  paper,  the  machine  that  ran  out  of  paper  will  hold  the  job  while 
the  machine  that  still  has  paper  continues  the  job.  When  paper  is  added  to  the  machine  that  ran  out,  the  job  resumes. 


When  user  authentication  is  enabled 

User  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  master  machine:  tandem  copying  is  possible. 

User  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  slave  machine  but  not  in  the  master  machine:  tandem  copying  is  not  possible. 


If  tandem  copying  is  performed  without  setting  the  number  of  copies 

A  message  will  appear  and  the  master  machine  and  slave  machine  will  each  make  one  set  of  copies  (total  of  two  sets). 


@To  cancel  tandem  copy... 

Touch  the  [Tandem  Copy]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Tandem  Connection  Setting 

This  must  be  configured  to  use  the  tandem  function.  This  can  also  be  used  to  disable  the  tandem  function. 


2-58 


Contents 


COPIER 


USING  A  DIFFERENT  PAPER  TYPE  FOR 
COVERS  (Covers/Inserts) 

A  different  type  of  paper  can  be  inserted  in  positions  corresponding  to  front  and  back  covers  of  a  copy  job  when  the 
automatic  document  feeder  is  used.  A  different  type  of  paper  can  also  be  automatically  added  as  an  insert  at  specified 
pages. 


Example  of  adding  covers 


Example  of  adding  inserts 


Example  of  adding  covers/inserts 


About  the  explanations  of  covers  and 
inserts 

There  are  various  ways  of  using  covers  and  inserts.  To 
keep  the  explanations  simple,  covers  and  inserts  are 
explained  separately.  For  specific  examples,  see 
"Examples  of  covers  and  inserts"  (page  2-142). 


Preparations  for  using  covers  and  inserts 

•  Load  the  cover/insert  paper  in  the  tray  before  using  the  cover/insert  function. 

•  Before  selecting  the  cover/insert  function,  place  the  originals  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  select  1 -sided  or  2-sided 
copying,  and  select  the  number  of  copies  and  any  other  desired  copy  settings.  When  these  settings  have  been 
completed,  perform  the  procedure  to  select  covers/inserts. 

•  The  originals  must  be  scanned  using  the  automatic  document  feeder.  The  document  glass  cannot  be  used. 

•  For  covers,  only  one  sheet  can  be  inserted  for  the  front  cover  and  only  one  sheet  can  be  inserted  for  the  back  cover. 
For  inserts,  up  to 100  sheets  can  be  inserted.  Note  that  two  insert  sheets  cannot  be  inserted  between  the  same  two 
pages. 

•  When  performing  2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals,  an  insert  cannot  be  inserted  between  the  front  and  reverse 
sides  of  an  original. 


2-59 


Contents 


COPIER 


INSERTING  COVERS  IN  COPIES  (Cover  Settings) 


A  different  type  of  paper  can  be  inserted  at  the  positions  corresponding  to  the  front  and  back  covers  of  a  copy  job. 
This  is  useful  for  arranging  documents  in  an  attractive  format  and  for  using  a  different  type  of  paper  as  a  cover  on  an 


estimate  sheet  or  similar  document. 

Covers  can  be  used  in  combination  with  inserts. 

Copying  on  a  front  cover  and  inserting  together  with  a  back  cover 
AAA  -  - - - 


1  2  3  4  5 


Front  cover  paper  Back  cover  paper 


The  document  glass  cannot  be  used. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Covers/Inserts]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


Touch  the  [Front  Cover]  key. 


2-60 


Contents 


COPIER 


(3)  (2) (1)  (4) 


Select  cover  settings. 

(1)  If  the  cover  sheet  will  be  copied  on,  touch 
the  [Yes]  key.  Otherwise,  touch  the  [No] 
key. 

If  the  [No]  key  is  touched,  only  cover  insertion  will  be 
performed. 

In  this  case,  go  to  step  (3). 

(2)  To  copy  on  one  side  of  the  cover,  touch  the 
[1 -Sided]  key.  To  copy  on  both  sides  of  the 
cover,  touch  the  [2-Sided]  key. 

(3)  Select  paper  settings  for  the  cover. 

(A)  The  currently  selected  paper  tray  for  the  cover  is 
displayed. 

(B)  The  size  and  type  of  paper  in  the  currently  selected 
tray  is  displayed. 

To  change  the  paper  tray  for  the  cover,  touch  the  "Paper 
T  ray 11  key. 

When  the  "Paper  Tray"  key  is  touched,  a  tray  selection 
screen  appears.  Select  the  paper  tray  for  the  cover  in  the 
tray  selection  screen  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Covers /Inserts 

Front  Covei 

:  [  OK  1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Paper  Tray 

Bypass  Tray 

1.  8%xll  (=)  Plain 

Plaia 

2 .  SViKllR  l=J  Plain 

3  •  81Acl4  l=j  Plain 

4 . 11x17  |=j  Plain 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


© 


If  the  cover  will  be  copied  on,  label  sheets,  transparency  film,  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used.  If  not  copied  on,  tab 
paper  can  be  inserted. 

To  cancel  cover  settings... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


Special  Modes 

f  0K  1 

Covers/ Inserts 

( " Cancel  ]|  OK  | 

Cover  Setting 

I 

1 

Inserts 

Setting 

IHBI 

Insertion 

Type  A 

_  Insertion  1 

\  Settings  J 

Back 

Cover 

Insertion 

Type  B 

| 

i  Tray  Settings  |  Page  Layout 

If  you  wish  to  insert  a  back  cover,  touch 
the  [Back  Cover]  key. 

The  screen  of  step  4  appears.  The  procedures  are  the  same  as 
for  the  front  cover.  Follow  the  procedures  in  step  4. 

When  following  the  procedures,  substitute  "Back  Cover"  for 
"Front  Cover". 


2-61 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

You  can  touch  the  [Insertion  Type  A]  key  or  the  [Insertion  Type 
B]  key  to  select  insert  settings. 

隊  INSERTING  INSERT  SHEETS  IN  COPIES  (Insert 
Settings)  (page  2-63) 

To  check  your  settings,  touch  the  [Page  Layout]  key. 

隊  CHANGING  COVER/INSERT  SETTINGS  (Page  Layout) 
(page  2-67) 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  of  the  originals  in  the  document  feeder  tray  begins. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  combination  with  the  saddle  stitch  function. 

•  The  document  glass  cannot  be  used. 

•  Cover  settings  cannot  be  selected  if  insertion  of  covers  and  inserts  is  disabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


@To  cancel  cover  sheet  insertion... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


2-62 


Contents 


COPIER 


INSERTING  INSERT  SHEETS  IN  COPIES 
(Insert  Settings) 

You  can  have  different  paper  automatically  inserted  as  inserts  at  specified  pages  of  copies.  Two  types  of  paper  can  be 
used  as  inserts,  and  the  insertion  positions  can  be  specified  separately  for  each. 

Covers  can  be  used  in  combination  with  inserts. 

Example:  Insert  A  after  page  3  and  insert  B  after  page  5. 


The  document  glass  cannot  be  used. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Covers/Inserts]  key, 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


Touch  the  [Insertion  Type  A]  key. 


2-63 


Contents 


COPIER 


(3)  (2) (1)  (4)  Select  insert  settings. 

(1)  If  the  insert  will  be  copied  on,  touch  the 
[Yes]  key.  Otherwise,  touch  the  [No]  key. 

If  the  [No]  key  is  touched,  only  insert  sheet  insertion  will 
be  performed. 

In  this  case,  go  to  step  (3). 

(2)  To  copy  on  one  side  of  the  insert,  touch  the 
[1 -Sided]  key.  To  copy  on  both  sides,  touch 
the  [2-Sided]  key, 

(3)  Select  insert  paper  settings. 

(A)  The  currently  selected  paper  tray  for  the  insert  is 
displayed. 

(B)  The  size  and  type  of  paper  in  the  currently  selected 
tray  is  displayed. 

To  change  the  paper  tray  for  the  inserts,  touch  the  "Paper 
T ray"  key. 

When  the  "Paper  Tray"  key  is  touched,  a  tray  selection 
screen  appears.  Select  the  desired  paper  tray  in  the  tray 
selection  screen  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Covers/Inserts 


Insertion  Type  A  Settings 


Paper  Tray 


Bypass  A  A\ 

Tray  1  ~ 

8^x11 —i 

Plain  — I -  (B) 


Cancel  j  f  OK 

^  Print  on  Insert  Sheets 

nE] 

1-Sided  2-Sided 

-r 画, 

Covers /Inserts 


Insertion  Type  A 


Paper  Tray 


Bypass  Tray- 

Plain 


(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


If  both  sides  of  the  insert  will  be  copied  on,  label  sheets,  transparency  film,  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used.  If  not  copied 
on,  tab  paper  can  be  inserted. 


If  you  wish  to  insert  a  different  type  of 
insert  sheet,  touch  the  [Insertion  Type  B] 
key. 

The  screen  of  step  4  appears.  Settings  are  selected  in  the 
same  way  as  for  insert  type  A.  Follow  the  procedures  in  step  4. 
When  following  the  procedures,  substitute  "Insert  Type  B"  for 
"Insert  Type  A". 


Contents 


2-64 


COPIER 


Special  Modes 


_ i.  0K  1 

Cancel  J  丨  OK 


Cover  Setting 


Front 

Cover 


Back 

Cover 


Touch  the  [Insertion  Settings]  key. 


(1)  (2)  (5) 


(A)  (B)  ⑶  (C) 


Specify  the  pages  where  inserts  A  and  B 
will  be  inserted. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Insertion  Type  A]  key  or  the 
[Insertion  Type  B]  key, 

Specify  the  page  where  the  highlighted  insert  will  be 
inserted. 

(A)  This  shows  the  tray  selected  for  insert  type  A  and  the 
paper  size  and  type. 

(B)  This  shows  the  tray  selected  for  insert  type  B  and  the 
paper  size  and  type. 

When  the  [Insertion  Type  A]  key  is  highlighted,  the  insert 
sheet  insertion  settings  are  applied  to  [Insertion  Type  A]. 
When  the  [Insertion  Type  B]  key  is  highlighted,  the  insert 
settings  are  applied  to  [Insertion  Type  B]. 

(2)  Enter  the  page  number  where  the  insert 
sheet  will  be  inserted  with  the  numeric 
keys, 

For  more  information,  see  "Inserts  (copying  of  1 -sided 
originals)11  (page  2-147)  and  "Inserts  (copying  of  2-sided 
originals)11  (page  2-147). 

The  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  can  be  pressed  to  return  the 
setting  of  the  selected  item  to  the  default  value.  If  you 
make  a  mistake,  press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  and  then 
enter  the  correct  number. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Enter]  key. 

(C)  This  shows  the  total  number  of  inserts.  Up  to 100 
insert  sheets  can  be  inserted.  To  insert  multiple 
inserts,  touch  the  [Enter]  key  after  entering  each 
insertion  page  number  (insertion  position)  with  the 
numeric  keys. 

(4)  To  insert  another  insert  sheet,  repeat  steps 
(1)to ⑶. 

(5)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


If  both  sides  of  the  insert  will  be  copied  on,  label  sheets,  transparency  film,  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used.  If  not  copied 
on,  tab  paper  can  be  inserted. 


Contents 


2-65 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

To  select  cover  settings,  touch  the  [Front  Cover]  key  or  the 
[Back  Cover]  key. 

隊  INSERTING  COVERS  IN  COPIES  (Cover  Settings)  (page 
2-60) 

To  check  your  settings,  touch  the  [Page  Layout]  key. 

隊  CHANGING  COVER/INSERT  SETTINGS  (Page  Layout) 
(page  2-67) 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  of  the  originals  in  the  document  feeder  tray  begins. 


To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  Use  the  same  size  of  paper  for  the  inserts  as  for  the  copies. 

•  Up  to 100  insert  sheets  can  be  added.  Note  that  two  insert  sheets  cannot  be  inserted  between  the  same  two  pages. 

•  When  performing  2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals,  an  insert  cannot  be  added  between  the  front  and  reverse  sides  of 
an  original  page. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  combination  with  the  saddle  stitch  function. 


•  Cover/insert  settings  cannot  be  selected  if  insertion  of  covers  and  inserts  is  disabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


@To  cancel  cover  sheet  insertion... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


2-66 


Contents 


COPIER 


CHANGING  COVER/INSERT  SETTINGS  (Page  Layout) 

Cover  settings  and  insert  settings  can  be  combined. 

This  section  explains  how  to  check  completed  cover  and  insert  insertion  page  settings,  and  change  or  delete  insertion 
pages. 


Changing  insert  A  from  page  4  to  page  5 


4th  page,  insert  A 

7th  page,  insert  B 
9th  page,  insert  B 

12th  page,  insert  A 


5th  page,  insert  A 
7th  page,  insert  B 
9th  page,  insert  B 

12th  page,  insert  A 


I  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Covers/Inserts]  key, 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


Touch  the  [Page  Layout]  key. 


2-67 


Contents 


COPIER 


Example:  Touch  insert  A  at  page  4 


Touch  the  key  of  the  page  that  you  wish 
to  delete  or  change. 

If  you  do  not  need  to  change  the  setting,  touch  the  [OK]  key 
and  go  to  step  6. 

•  Each  key  shows  a  print  image  icon  and  the  insertion  page. 

•  If  there  are  multiple  screens,  touch  the  [_^J  Q  keys  to  move 
through  the  screens. 

To  edit  a  cover,  touch  the  [Front  Cover]  key  or  the  [Back  Cover] 
key  and  go  to  step  4. 

Touch  the  key  of  the  insertion  page  that  you  want  to  edit  or 
clear.  The  following  screen  will  appear. 


Modify  the  insertion? 


Cancel  j  i  Delete  レ  Modi tv 

•To  delete  the  page,  touch  the  [Delete]  key.  After  deleting  the 
key,  touch  the  [OK]  key  and  go  to  step  6. 

•To  edit  the  page,  touch  the  [Modify]  key. 

To  edit  an  insert,  touch  the  [Insertion  Type  A]  key  or  the 
[Insertion  Type  B]  key  and  go  to  step  5. 

•To  cancel,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


lcons 

^ /  P:  Copy  on  front  side  only 

P:  Copy  on  reverse  side  only 
P:  2-sided  copy 
P:  Do  not  copy 

For  inserts,  the  insertion  page  also  appears. 
*  represents  a  page  number. 

*/-:  Copy  only  on  front  side  at  page  * 

*/*:  2-sided  copy  at  page  7* 

<*:  Insert  without  copying  at  page  * 


Covers /Inserts 

Front  Cover  Setting  [  Cancel  ]f  OK 

Paper  Tray 

Print  on  Front  Cover 

nE] 

1-Sided  2-Sided 

Bypass 

Tray 

8V2X11 

Plain 

Change  the  front/back  cover  settings. 

The  settings  are  changed  in  the  same  way  as  they  are  initially 
configured.  See  step  4  of  "INSERTING  COVERS  IN  COPIES 
(Cover  Settings)"  (page  2-60)  to  change  the  cover  settings. 
After  changing  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK]  key  and  return  to 
step  3. 


@To  cancel  cover  settings... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


2-68 


Contents 


COPIER 


Covers /Inserts 

Insertion  Modify 

鼸 OK  1 

Insertion  Page 

11 [Ml 

: f [~1  Insertion 
U7  Type  B 

Tray  1 

syixii 

Plain 

Bypass 

Tray 

8V2X11 

Plain 

, -  Total: 4 

Enter 

Change  the  settings  for  insert  type  A/B. 

The  settings  are  changed  in  the  same  way  as  they  are  initially 
configured.  See  step  7  of  "INSERTING  INSERT  SHEETS  IN 
COPIES  (Insert  Settings)11  (page  2-63)  to  change  the  insert 
settings. 

After  changing  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK]  key  and  return  to 
step  3. 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


2-69 


Contents 


COPIER 


ADDING  INSERTS  WHEN  COPYING  ON 
TRANSPARENCY  FILM 
(Transparency  Inserts) 

When  copying  on  transparency  film,  the  sheets  may  stick  together  due  to  static  electricity.  The  transparency  inserts 
function  can  be  used  to  automatically  insert  a  sheet  of  paper  between  each  sheet  of  transparency  film,  making  the 
sheets  easy  to  handle. 

It  is  also  possible  to  copy  on  the  inserts. 


Place  the  transparency  film  in  the 
bypass  tray. 

•  Transparency  film  can  only  be  placed  in  the  bypass  tray. 

•  Place  the  transparency  film  face  down  on  the  bypass  tray. 
When  placing  the  transparency  film,  the  rounded  corner  of 
the  film  should  be: 

- At  the  front  and  left  if  the  film  is  oriented  horizontally. 

-At  the  back  and  left  if  the  film  is  oriented  vertically. 

•  After  loading  the  transparency  film,  configure  the  bypass  tray 
settings  as  explained  in  "MAKING  COPIES  USING  THE 
BYPASS  TRAY11  (page  2-38). 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Transparency  Inserts]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-70 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  insert  settings. 

(1)  Select  whether  or  not  the  insert  paper  will 
be  copied  on  ([Yes]  or  [No]). 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

Explanation  of  (A) 

When  transparency  inserts  is  selected,  paper  suitable  for 
the  inserts  is  automatically  selected.  The  automatically 
selected  paper  tray,  paper  size,  and  paper  type  are 
indicated  here. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  The  number  of  copies  cannot  be  selected  in  this  mode. 

•  When  performing  2-sided  copying,  only  "2-sided  to 1 -sided"  mode  can  be  used. 


@To  cancel  the  transparency  inserts  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


2-71 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  MULTIPLE  ORIGINALS  ONTO 
ONE  SHEET  (Multi  Shot) 

Multiple  original  pages  can  be  copied  onto  a  single  sheet  of  paper  in  a  uniform  layout.  Select  2in1  to  copy  two  original 
pages  onto  one  sheet,  or  4in1  to  copy  four  original  pages  onto  one  sheet.  This  function  is  convenient  when  you  wish  to 
present  multiple  pages  in  a  compact  format,  or  show  a  view  of  all  pages  in  a  document. 

2in1  copying  4in1  copying 


A 

B 

C 

D 

Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Multi  Shot]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-72 


Contents 


COPIER 


(1)  (3)  (2)  (4) 


Special  Modes 

回 

[ 一 基 一 ) 

Multi  : 

Shot 

Cancel 

OK 

Layout 

2  ini 

4  ini 

1 圔回 

m 

,田 

! 

Border 

Select  the  number  of  originals  to  be 
copied  onto  one  sheet  of  paper,  the 
layout,  and  the  border. 


(1)  Touch  the  [2in1]  key  or  the  [4in1]  key, 

If  needed,  the  images  will  be  rotated. 

(2)  Select  the  layout. 

Select  the  order  in  which  the  originals  will  be  arranged  on 
the  copy. 


Number 
of  pages 


2in1 


4in1 


Layout 


/ 

: 

舟 


4F 


i  O  \ 

( 

i  f 

:- . ■ . : 

; ^ 

凰 

ぐ 


⑶ 

(4) 


The  arrows  in  the  above  diagram  indicate  how  the  images 
are  arranged. 

Select  the  border. 

Solid  lines,  broken  lines,  or  no  lines  can  be  selected. 

Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


I  Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned 
and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


When  using  the  multi  shot  function,  the  appropriate  copy  ratio  will  be  automatically  set  based  on  the  original  size,  paper  size, 
and  the  number  of  originals  to  be  copied  onto  one  sheet.  The  minimum  possible  reduction  ratio  is  25%.  The  original  size, 
paper  size,  and  selected  number  of  original  pages  may  require  that  the  ratio  be  less  than  25%.  As  copying  will  take  place  at 
25%  in  this  case,  part  of  the  original  images  may  be  cut  off. 


@To  cancel  a  multi  shot  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


2-73 


Contents 


COPIER 


The  copies  are  in  the  same 
layout  as  the  original. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Book  Copy]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-74 


Contents 


COPYING  A  PAMPHLET  (Book  Copy) 

This  function  is  used  to  make  a  copy  of  the  two  facing  pages  of  an  open  book  or  other  bound  document. 
Copies  made  with  this  function  can  be  folded  at  the  center  to  create  a  booklet. 

This  function  is  convenient  for  arranging  copies  into  an  attractive  booklet  or  pamphlet. 


How  to  place  the  original 
Originals 


Back  cover  Cover 


Place  the  original 


© 

Inside  of  1st  page 
cover 


2nd  page  3rd  page 


4th  page  Inside  of 

back  cover 


III 


III 


III 


COPIER 


(1)  (2) 


Select  book  copy  settings. 

(1)  Select  the  binding  position  ([Left  Binding] 
or  [Right  Binding]). 

(2)  To  insert  a  cover,  touch  the  [Cover  Setting] 
key. 

If  a  cover  will  not  be  added,  go  to  step  4. 


Cover  settings  cannot  be  selected  if  insertion  of  covers  and  inserts  is  disabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


(1) 


Select  cover  settings. 

(1)  If  the  cover  sheet  will  be  copied  on,  touch 
the  [Yes]  key.  Otherwise, touch  the  [No] 
key. 

(2)  Select  paper  settings  for  the  cover. 

(A)  The  currently  selected  paper  tray  for  the  cover  is 
displayed. 

(B)  The  size  and  type  of  paper  in  the  currently  selected 
tray  is  displayed. 

In  the  example  screen, 11 11  x  1 7"  (A3)  size  plain  paper  is 
loaded  in  the  bypass  tray. 

To  change  the  paper  tray  for  the  cover,  touch  the  "Paper 
T  ray 11  key. 

When  the  "Paper  Tray"  key  is  touched,  a  tray  selection 
screen  appears.  Select  the  desired  paper  tray  in  the  tray 
selection  screen  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


If  the  cover  will  be  copied  on,  label  sheets,  transparency  film,  and  tab  paper  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  cover  settings... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


2-75 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 

Place  the  opened  front  cover  and  back  cover  face  down. 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  first  original. 

Scanning  begins. 

Scan  the  remaining  original  pages  in  the  following  order: 

Opened  inside  of  front  cover  and  1st  page 
Opened  2nd  and  3rd  page 


Opened  last  page  and  inside  of  back  cover 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Place  the  next  pair  of  opened  pages  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  this  step  until  all  original  pages  have  been  scanned. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-76 


Contents 


COPIER 


Place  next  original . Press  [Start] . 
When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


零 


To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 


•  Four  original  pages  will  be  copied  onto  each  sheet  of  paper.  Blank  pages  will  be  automatically  added  at  the  end  if  the  total 
number  of  original  pages  is  not  a  multiple  of  four. 

•  If  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  the  book  copy  function  can  be  used  in  combination  with  the  saddle  stitch  or  paper 
folding  function. 

•  When  book  copy  is  selected,  2-sided  copying  is  automatically  selected.  When  settings  are  selected  that  prevent  2-sided 
copying,  the  book  copy  function  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  book  copy... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-77 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  CAPTIONS  ONTO  TAB  PAPER 
(Tab  Copy) 

Captions  can  be  copied  onto  the  tabs  of  tab  paper.  Prepare  appropriate  originals  for  the  tab  captions. 

Tab  copy  is  possible  from  the  bypass  tray. 


Prepare  originals  that  The  image  is  shifted 

match  the  tab  positions.  by  the  width  of  the  tab 


RELATION  BETWEEN  THE  ORIGINALS  AND  THE  TAB 
PAPER 

Tab  copying  with  a  left  binding 


2-78 


Contents 


COPIER 


Tab  copying  with  a  right  binding 


Originals 


Placing  the  originals 

•  Document  feeder  tray 


Loading  tab  paper 


Originals 


Final  image 


Insert  the  originals  so  that  the  side  with 


no 


tab  text  enters  first. 


•  Document  glass 


Place  so  that  the  side  with  the  tab  text  is 


on  the  left. 


Load  the  tab  paper  so  that  the  tab  on  the 
first  sheet  is  away  from  you. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Tab  Copy]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


(1) 


Set  the  tab  width. 

(1)  Set  the  image  shift  width  (tab  width)  with 
the  QS  keys. 

0"  to  5/8"  (0  mm  to  20  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Contents 


2-79 


COPIER 


Load  the  tab  paper. 

When  using  the  bypass  tray,  place  the  paper  with  the  print  side 
down. 

Place  the  paper  so  that  the  sides  with  the  tabs  enter  the 
machine  last. 

After  loading  the  tab  paper,  configure  the  bypass  tray  settings 
as  explained  in  "MAKING  COPIES  USING  THE  BYPASS 
TRAY11  (page  2-38). 


The  width  of  the  tab  paper  can  be  as  wide  as  8-1/2"  x  1 1" paper  (8-1/2")  plus  5/8"  (or  A4  width  (210  mm)  plus  20  mm). 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


@To  cancel  tab  copy... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Tab  Copy  Setting 

The  default  image  shift  width  can  be  set  from  0"  to  5/8"  (0  mm  to  20  mm).  The  factory  default  setting  is  "1/2" (10  mm)11. 


2-80 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ON  ONE 
SHEET  OF  PAPER  (Card  Shot) 

When  copying  a  card,  this  function  allows  you  to  copy  the  front  and  reverse  sides  together  onto  a  single  sheet  of  paper. 
This  function  is  convenient  for  making  copies  for  identification  purposes  and  helps  save  paper. 


Originals 

Front 


Back 


Copies 


J  Example  of  an  8-1/2"  x  1 1 

Example  of  an  8-1/2"  x  1 1"  (A4)  size  landscape  copy 

(A4)  size  portrait  copy 


Select  the  paper  to  be  used  for  card 
shot. 

Select  the  paper  as  explained  in  "PAPER  TRAYS"  (page  2-11). 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Card  Shot]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (1st  screen)  (page  2-41) 


2-81 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  card  shot  settings. 

(1)  Enter  the  original  size. 

With  the  [X]  key  highlighted,  enter  the  X  (horizontal) 
dimension  of  the  original  with  the  Q  Q  keys. 

Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  Y  (vertical)  dimension  of 
the  original  with  the  Q  keys. 

(A)  To  enlarge  or  reduce  the  images  to  fit  the  paper 
based  on  the  entered  original  size,  touch  the  [Fit  to 
Page]  key. 

(B)  The  [Size  Reset]  key  can  be  pressed  to  return  the 
horizontal  and  vertical  dimensions  to  the  values  set  in 
"Card  Shot  Settings"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator). 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode.  Make 
sure  that  the  entered  dimensions  appear  in  the  [Original] 
key. 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  front  side  of  the  card. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Turn  the  card  over  and  press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  reverse  side  of  the 
card. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


To  cancel  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 


2-82 


Contents 


COPIER 


•  The  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  Copying  is  only  possible  on  standard  size  paper. 

•  XY  Zoom  cannot  be  used  when  using  this  function. 

•  The  image  cannot  be  rotated  when  using  this  function. 


@To  cancel  card  shot... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Card  Shot  Settings 

This  is  used  to  set  the  values  to  which  the  size  returns  when  the  [Size  Reset]  key  is  pressed. 1 11  to  8-1/2"  (25  mm  to  210  mm) 
can  be  entered  for  both  the  horizontal  and  vertical  dimensions. 

The  factory  default  settings  are  3-3/8"  (86  mm)  for  X  (the  width)  and  2-1/8"  (54  mm)  for  Y  (the  height). 


2-83 


Contents 


COPIER 


PRINTING  THE  DATE  AND  A  STAMP  ON 
COPIES  (Stamp) 

Use  this  function  to  print  the  date,  a  stamp,  the  page  number,  and  text  on  copies.  In  addition,  specific  text  can  be  added 
to  a  copy  as  a  watermark  (Watermark). 

Six  printing  positions  are  available:  top  left,  top  center,  top  right,  bottom  left,  bottom  center,  and  bottom  right. 

The  printing  positions  are  separated  into  areas  that  are  used  for  the  date,  page  number  and  text  (A  below),  and  areas 
that  are  used  for  a  stamp  (B  below).The  watermark  is  printed  at  the  center  of  the  paper. 


Stamp 

Print  area 

Maximum  number 
of  positions 

Date 

A 

1  position  only 

Stamp 

B 

6  positions 

Page 

Numbering 

A 

1  position  only 

Text 

A 

6  positions 

Watermark 

Center  of 

paper 

一 

•  If  the  selected  stamp  content  of  one  position  overlaps  the  stamp  content  of  another  position,  priority  will  be  given  in  the 
following  order:  watermark,  right  side,  left  side,  center.  Content  that  is  hidden  due  to  overlapping  will  not  be  printed. 

•  Text  will  be  printed  at  the  preset  size  regardless  of  the  copy  ratio  or  paper  size  setting. 

•  Text  will  be  printed  at  the  preset  exposure  regardless  of  the  exposure  setting. 

•  Depending  on  the  size  of  the  paper,  some  printed  content  may  be  cut  off  or  shifted  out  of  position. 


When  used  in  combination  with  other  special  modes 


When  Stamp  is  used  in  combination  with  the  following  special  modes,  the  special  modes  are  reflected  in  the  stamp 
content. 


Special  Modes 

Printing 

Margin  Shift 

Together  with  the  image,  the  stamp  content  is  shifted  the  amount  of  the  margin  width. 

Tab  Copy 

Centering 

Unlike  a  copy  image  that  moves,  the  image  will  be  printed  in  the  position  set  in  the  stamp. 

Dual  Page  Copy 

Card  Shot 

The  stamp  is  printed  on  each  copy  sheet. 

Multi  Shot 

The  print  content  is  printed  on  each  original  page. 

Pamphlet  Copy 

Book  Copy 

The  stamp  is  printed  on  each  page  of  the  resulting  pamphlet  or  book. 

Covers/Inserts 

Use  the  stamp  settings  to  select  whether  or  not  the  item  is  printed  on  inserted  covers  and 
inserts. 

2-84 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  the  print  position. 

Select  from  6  positions:  top  left,  top  center,  top  right,  bottom 
left,  bottom  center,  bottom  right. 

You  can  also  skip  this  step  and  go  directly  to  the  next  step.  In 
this  case,  the  stamp  items  will  be  printed  in  the  following 
positions: 

Date:  Top  right  Stamp:  Top  left 

Page  number:  Bottom  center  Text:  Top  left 

The  position  of  a  watermark  cannot  be  selected.  Proceed  to  the 

next  step. 


Print  positions 

The  keys  that  show  the  print  positions  will  appear  as  follows 
depending  on  the  state  of  the  settings. 


Not  selected,  stamp  setting  has  not 
been  selected. 


Selected  during  selection  of  the  stamp 
setting. 


Not  available,  stamp  setting  has  already 
been  selected. 


The  above  key  is  the  top  left  key.  The  appearance  of  each  key 
varies  depending  on  the  position  of  the  key. 


"Date"  and  "Page  Numbering"  cannot  be  selected  in  multiple  positions.  If  the  [Date]  key  or  [Page  Numbering]  key  is 
touched  when  "Date"  or  "Page  Numbering"  has  already  been  selected  for  a  position,  a  message  will  appear  asking 
you  if  you  wish  to  move  that  item  to  the  selected  position.  To  move  the  item,  touch  the  [Yes]  key.  Otherwise,  press 
the  [No]  key. 

If  you  attempt  to  set  "Date",  "Text",  or  "Page  Numbering"  in  a  position  where  one  of  these  items  is  already  set,  a 
message  will  appear.  To  change  the  previously  selected  item  to  the  new  item,  touch  the  [Yes]  key.  To  keep  the 
previous  item,  touch  the  [No]  key. 


2-85 


Contents 


GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP 

To  select  stamp  settings,  follow  the  steps  below. 

Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 

Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Stamp]  key. 

瞭  Special  modes  menu  (2nd  screen)  (page  2-42) 


COPIER 


Select  settings  for  the  original  and 
covers/inserts. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Original  Orientation]  key  and 
specify  the  orientation  of  the  placed 
original. 

If  2-sided  originals  have  been  placed,  touch  the 「_H  I 
key  and  specify  the  binding  position  (booklet  binding  or 
tablet  binding)  of  the  originals. 

(2)  Select  stamp  settings  for  covers/inserts, 

If  you  do  not  want  to  print  the  stamp  items  on 
covers/inserts,  touch  the  checkbox  to  remove  the 
checkmark  [  |. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 

To  edit  a  stamp  position  or  delete  a  stamp  item,  touch  the 
[Layout]  key. 

隊 CHECKING  THE  STAMP  LAYOUT  (Layout)  (page 
2-100) 


•  When  copying  on  covers/inserts  is  not  selected,  printing  will  not  take  place  even  if  a  checkmark  appears. 
v ^ ノ  •  This  setting  cannot  be  selected  if  insertion  of  covers  and  inserts  is  disabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


2-86 


Contents 


Select  Stamp. 

For  detailed  information  on  each  of  the  stamp  items,  see  the 
following  sections: 

Date:  ADDING  THE  DATE  TO  COPIES  (Date) 

(page  2-88) 

Stamp:  STAMPING  COPIES  (Stamp)  (page  2-90) 

Page  numbering:  PRINTING  PAGE  NUMBERS  ON  COPIES 
(Page  Numbering)  (page  2-92) 

Text:  PRINTING  TEXT  ON  COPIES  (Text)  (page 

2-96) 

Watermark:  ADDING  A  WATERMARK  TO  A 

COPY  (Watermark)  (page  2-102) 


~w 


\  OK  I 


Date 

Stamp 

Page 

|  Numbering 

Text 

I  1. .す. 1 [ 


へ i 


〕 r^j〔 


When  you  have  finished  selecting  stamp 
settings,  touch  the  \±]  key. 


COPIER 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


@To  cancel  Stamp … 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


2-87 


Contents 


COPIER 


ADDING  THE  DATE  TO  COPIES  (Date) 

The  date  can  be  printed  on  copies.  The  position  of  the  date,  format,  and  page  (first  page  only  or  all  pages)  can  be 
selected. 


Example:  Printing  APRIL  4,  2010  in  the  top  right  corner  of  the  paper. 


1  1 
1  .  -  .  J 

APR/04/2010 

J 

Touch  the  [Date]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Cancel  I  OK 


YYYY/MM/DD 

醒 

□ 

DD/MM/YYYY 

1] 

MM  DD,  YYYY 

□ 

1 

(1) 

1 

(2) 

APR/04/2010 


First  Page 


Cancel 


YYYY/MM/DD 

圓 

□ 

APR/04/2010 

Date  Change 

DD/MM/YYYY 

□ 

l 

MM  DD,  YYYY 

□ 

i^l 


Set  the  date  format. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  that  shows  the  desired  date 
format, 

(2)  If  you  selected  [YYYY/MM/DD], 
[MM/DD/YYYY],  or  [DD/MM/YYYY],  touch  the 
[/],[■], [■], or  [  ]  key  to  select  the  separator. 


Check  the  displayed  date.  If  you  need  to 
change  the  date,  touch  the  [Date 
Change]  key. 

Set  the  date  that  you  wish  to  use  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Stamp 

Date  Change 

l  °K  1 

Year  Month  Day 

0|  |  04  |  [  04 

aa 

As  an  alternative  to  touching  the  Q  keys,  you  can  also 
directly  touch  the  numeric  value  display  key  and  change  the 
value  with  the  numeric  keys. 


•  If  you  select  a  date  that  does  not  exist  (such  as  Feb.  30), the  [OK]  key  will  be  grayed  out  to  prevent  entry. 

•  Changing  the  date  here  will  not  change  the  date  that  is  set  in  the  machine  using  "Clock"  in  the  system  settings. 


2-88 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  the  pages  that  the  date  will  be 
printed  on  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Select  printing  on  the  first  page  only,  or  printing  on  all  pages. 
After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  continue  from  step  5  of  "GENERAL 
PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP"  (page  2-85)  to  complete 
the  copy  procedure. 


@To  cancel  the  date  print  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-89 


Contents 


COPIER 


STAMPING  COPIES  (Stamp) 

Text  such  as  "CONFIDENTIAL"  can  be  printed  in  white  on  a  dark  background  as  a  "stamp"  on  copies. 
The  position,  size,  density,  and  pages  (first  page  only  or  all  pages)  can  be  selected  for  a  stamp. 

Printing  "CONFIDENTIAL"  in  the  top  left  corner  of  a  copy 


The  following  12  selections  are  available  for  the  stamp  text. 


CONFIDENTIAL 

PRIORITY 

PRELIMINARY 

FINAL 

FOR  YOUR  INFO. 

DO  NOT  COPY 

IMPORTANT 

COPY 

URGENT 

DRAFT 

TOP  SECRET 

PLEASE  REPLY 

Three  levels  can  be  selected  for  the  density  of  the  stamp  background. 
Two  stamp  sizes  can  be  selected. 


D  Touch  the  [Stamp]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Touch  the  key  of  the  stamp  that  you 
wish  to  use. 


2-90 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [Exposure]  key  and  set  the 
density. 

If  you  wish  to  darken,  touch  the  [  I  I  key.  If  you  wish  to 
lighten,  touch  the  [  0  )  key. 

When  you  have  finished  selecting  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 


Touch  the  [Larger 令 Smaller]  key  to 
select  the  size  of  the  stamp. 


Select  the  pages  that  the  date  will  be 
printed  on  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Select  printing  on  the  first  page  only,  or  printing  on  all  pages. 
After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  continue  from  step  5  of  "GENERAL 
PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP"  (page  2-85)  to  complete 
the  copy  procedure. 


© 


The  stamp  text  cannot  be  edited. 


To  cancel  a  stamp  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-91 


Contents 


COPIER 


PRINTING  PAGE  NUMBERS  ON  COPIES 
(Page  Numbering) 

Page  numbers  can  be  printed  on  copies. 

The  position,  format,  and  page  number  can  be  selected  for  page  numbering. 

Printing  the  page  number  at  the  bottom  center  of  the  paper. 


Touch  the  [Page  Numbering]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Select  a  format  for  the  page  number. 

If  the  [1/5,  2/5,  3/5]  key  is  selected, 

"Page  number /total  pages"  will  be  printed.  "Auto"  is  initially 
selected  for  the  total  pages,  which  means  that  the  number  of 
scanned  original  pages  is  automatically  set  as  the  total  pages, 
If  you  need  to  set  the  total  pages  manually,  such  as  when  a 
large  number  of  originals  are  divided  into  sets  for  scanning, 
touch  the  [Manual]  key  to  display  the  total  pages  entry  screen. 


Enter  the  total  pages  (1  to  999)  with  the  numeric  keys  and 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 

The  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  can  be  pressed  to  return  the  setting  of 
the  selected  item  to  the  default  value.  If  you  make  a  mistake, 
press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  and  then  enter  the  correct 
number. 


•  When  2-sided  copying  is  performed,  the  total  pages  is  the  total  number  of  sides  of  the  paper.  If  the  final  page  is 
blank,  it  is  not  counted.  However,  if  a  back  cover  will  be  added  and  the  [Count  Back  Cover]  checkbox  is  selected 
V|,  the  final  page  is  counted.  (See  step  7.) 

•  When  used  in  combination  with  "Dual  Page  Copy",  "Multi  Shot",  or  "Card  Shot",  the  number  of  sides  of  the  paper 
copied  on  is  the  total  pages. 

•  When  used  in  combination  with  "Pamphlet  Copy"  or  "Book  Copy",  the  total  number  of  pages  in  the  resulting 
pamphlet  or  booklet  is  the  total  pages. 


2-92 


Contents 


COPIER 


To  configure  page  number  settings, 
touch  the  [Page  Number]  key. 

If  you  do  not  need  to  configure  page  number  settings,  go  to 
step  8. 


(1)  (2) 


Select  page  number  settings. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Manual]  key. 

(2)  Set  the  first  number,  the  last  number,  and 
the  "Printing  Starts  from  Page"  number. 

Touch  each  key  and  enter  a  number  with  the  numeric 
keys  (1  to  999). 

The  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  can  be  pressed  to  return  the 
setting  of  the  selected  item  to  the  default  value.  If  you 
make  a  mistake,  press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  and  then 
enter  the  correct  number. 


A  "Last  Number"  smaller  than  the  "First  Number"  cannot  be  set. 

The  "Last  Number"  is  initially  set  to  "Auto",  which  means  that  page  numbers  are  automatically  printed  through  the 
last  page  based  on  the  "First  Number"  and  "Printing  Start  from  Page"  settings. 


•If  the  "Last  Number"  is  set  to  a  number  smaller  than  the  "Total  Pages",  page  numbers  are  not  printed  on  pages  after 
the  page  set  as  the  "Last  Number". 


•  "Printing  Starts  from  Page"  is  used  to  set  the  page  number  from  which  you  want  to  begin  printing  page  numbers. 
For  example,  if  "3"  is  set  and  1 -sided  copying  is  being  performed,  page  numbers  will  be  printed  beginning  from  the 
3rd  copy  sheet  (the  3rd  original  page).  If  2-sided  copying  is  being  performed,  page  numbers  will  be  printed 
beginning  from  the  front  side  of  the  2nd  copy  sheet  (the  3rd  original  page). 


If  covers/inserts  will  be  inserted,  touch 
the  [Covers/Inserts  Counting]  key  if  you 
want  to  include  the  covers/inserts  in  the 
page  number  count  and  want  page 
numbers  printed  on  the  covers/inserts. 


2-93 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  each  item  that  you  want  counted 
in  the  page  numbers 土〇  that  a 
checkmark  appears  '^)5  and  then  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 

Items  with  a  checkmark  ( vj  will  be  reflected  in  the  print  image 
on  the  right  side  of  the  screen. 

(A) :  Front  cover  image 

(B) :  Insert  image 

(C) :  Back  cover  image 


(A)  (B)  (C) 


© 


When  the  checkboxes  are  selected  ノ 1, each  inserted  sheet  of  paper  (front  cover,  insert,  or  back  cover)  will  be 
counted  as  one  page  in  the  case  of  1 -sided  copying,  or  two  pages  in  the  case  of  2-sided  copying.  However,  when 
the  body  sheets  are  1 -sided  copies  and  the  inserted  sheets  are  2-sided  copies,  each  body  sheet  is  counted  as  one 
page  and  each  inserted  sheet  is  counted  as  two  pages. 

Page  numbers  are  printed  on  covers/inserts  if  the  covers/inserts  are  counted  and  if  they  are  copied  on. 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Page  Numbering 


Page  Numbering  I 


Jl), (2),(3)..」 


. . i  rp.i,p.2,p.3. .j 

f<l>,<2>,<3>. .1  I  1/5,2/5,375. . J 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  continue  from  step  5  of  "GENERAL 
PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85)  to  complete 
the  copy  procedure. 


2-94 


Contents 


COPIER 


•  When  Page  Numbering  is  selected,  copying  in  group  mode  is  not  possible.  The  mode  automatically  changes  to  sort  mode. 

•  When  the  page  number  printing  position  is  set  to  the  right  side  or  left  side  and  pamphlet  copy  or  book  copy  is  used,  the 
print  position  is  changed  so  that  the  page  numbers  always  appear  on  the  outer  side  of  each  opened  page  (the  left  and  right 
sides  of  the  opened  pages).  If  a  stamp  is  set  in  the  area  where  page  numbering  is  set,  the  position  of  the  stamp  changes  in 
the  same  way  as  the  page  number. 

If  another  stamp  item  is  set  in  this  changing  position,  the  page  numbers  will  alternate  sides  with  this  stamp  item. 

A  stamp  item  that  is  in  a  position  not  affected  by  the  changing  page  number  position  will  be  printed  in  its  original  set 
position. 

Example:  When  four  pages  are  copied  using  pamphlet  copy  and  the  page  number  format  is  "1 , 2,  3…", the  result  is  as 
follows: 

In  this  example,  the  page  number  is  set  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  and  the  date  is  set  at  the  top,  and  thus  the 
date  does  not  move. 


Print  settings 


Sidel 


Side  2 


Date 

Stamp 

No. 

Text 

APR/04/201 0  APR/04/2010 


CONFIDENTIAL 


4  AAA 


CONFIDENTIAL 


AAA  i 


APR/04/2010  APR/04/2010 


CONFIDENTIAL 


2  AAA 


CONFIDENTIAL 


AAA  3 


@To  cancel  the  page  numbering  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-95 


Contents 


COPIER 


PRINTING  TEXT  ON  COPIES  (Text) 

Entered  text  can  be  printed  on  copies.  Up  to  30  frequently  used  text  strings  can  be  stored. 


Example:  Printing  "April  2010  Planning  Meeting"  in  the  top  left  corner  of  the  paper 


ぐ 

\ 

,  >  — 1 

V _ 

April  2010  Planning  Meeting 

J 

Touch  the  [Text]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Stamp 

Text  [  Cancel 

First  Page 

圆 1 

All  Pages 

I 

Pre-Set 

Recall  j  |  Store/Delete  | 

\  Direct  Entry 

Touch  the  [Recall]  key. 

The  [Direct  Entry]  key  can  be  touched  to  display  the  text  entry 
screen.  When  all  characters  have  been  entered,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 

To  store  or  delete  a  text  string,  touch  the  [Store/Delete]  key. 
隊  Storing,  editing,  and  deleting  text  strings  (page  2-98) 


(1) 


I 

I  — 

Stamp 

Text 

Cancel  j [  OK 

f  5  <>MM\ 

U  |no.02  BBB  BBB  _ 

1 

[no. 03  CCC  CCC 

[No .04  DDD  DDD 

3 

s 

[no.  07 

[no.  08 

[no. 09 

(no. 10  |  |  +  j 

Specify  the  text  to  be  printed. 

(1)  Touch  the  text  string  that  you  wish  to 
select. 

You  can  touch  the  [5  4^  10]  key  to  switch  the  number  of 
keys  displayed  in  the  screen  between  5  and  10.  When 
5-key  display  is  selected,  the  entire  text  string  appears  in 
each  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


2-96 


Contents 


COPIER 


Select  the  pages  to  be  printed  on  and 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Select  printing  on  the  first  page  only,  or  printing  on  all  pages. 
After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  continue  from  step  5  of  "GENERAL 
PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP"  (page  2-85)  to  complete 
the  copy  procedure. 


Text  settings  can  also  be  configured  in  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Application  Settings],  [Copy  settings]  and  then  [Text  Settings 
(Stamp)]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


@To  cancel  a  text  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-97 


Contents 


COPIER 


Storing,  editing,  and  deleting  text  strings 


Touch  the  [Text]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Stamp 

Text  1"  Cancel 

First  Page 

画 

All  Pages 

Pre-Set 

Recall  j  丨  Store/Delete  | 

|  Direct  Entry  | 

Touch  the  [Store/Delete]  key. 


Stamp 

Text 

|  ♦  Back  ] 

1  5 仆  BB  I 

Store/Delete 

1 

||No.01  AAA  AAA 

|  |no.02  BBB  BBB 

3 

f|No.03  CCC  CCC 

I  [No . 04  DDD  DDD 

s 

3 

卜〇.05 

I 

f|No.07 

1 卜。.  08 

[^0.09 

|  卜 10  ) 

Store  a  text  string,  or  edit/delete  a  stored 
text  string. 

•To  store  a  text  string,  touch  a  key  with  no  text  stored. 

A  text  entry  screen  will  appear.  A  maximum  of  50  characters 
can  be  entered.  When  you  have  finished  entering  the  text, 
touch  the  [OK]  key.  The  text  entry  screen  will  close. 

•To  edit  or  delete  a  text  string,  follow  the  instructions  below. 


To  edit  or  delete  a  text  string... 

•  When  the  key  with  the  text  string  is  touched,  the  following  screen  appears. 

When  the  [Modify]  key  is  touched,  a  text  entry  screen  appears.  The  stored  text  string  appears  in  the  text  entry 
screen.  Edit  the  text.  When  you  have  finished  entering  the  text,  touch  the  [OK]  key.  The  text  entry  screen  will  close. 

•  When  the  [Delete]  key  is  touched,  the  stored  text  is  deleted. 


A  text  has  been  already  stored  to  this 
location.  Change  the  text? 


コロ 

永 


•  Text  settings  can  also  be  configured  in  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Application  Settings],  [Copy  settings]  and  then  [Text 
Settings  (Stamp)]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


2-98 


Contents 


COPIER 


Stamp 

Text 

^  Back  ] 

l  5 仆 ai 

Store/Delete 

[No. 01  AAA  AAA 

] |no.02  BBB  BBB 

~ )  3 

(no. 03  CCC  CCC 

1 [No .04 

) m 

|  扉, 05 

] |no.06 

」 二 # 

|  [no.08 

1  s 

|no.09 

j  [no.10 

_ 

Touch  the  [Back]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  2. 

To  copy  using  a  stored  text  string,  continue  from  step  2  of 
"PRINTING  TEXT  ON  COPIES  (Text)11  (page  2-96). 


2-99 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [Layout]  key. 


The  [Layout]  key  can  only  be  touched  when  stamp  items  have  been  selected. 


If  the  layout  is  correct,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 

Touch  the  key  of  the  stamp  item  that  you  want  to  delete  or 
whose  position  you  want  to  change. 


A  maximum  of  14  characters  appear  in  each  key. 


Do  you  want  to  move  or  delete  the 
selected  item? 


Cancel  1  f  Delete 


§ 


To  change  the  position  of  the  item, 
touch  the  [Move]  key.  To  delete  the  item, 
touch  the  [Delete]  key. 

•  If  the  [Move]  key  is  touched,  a  screen  for  selecting  the 
destination  position  appears. 

•  If  the  [Delete]  key  is  touched,  the  item  is  deleted.  (Go  to  step 
6-) 


2-100 


Contents 


CHECKING  THE  STAMP  LAYOUT  (Layout) 

After  stamp  items  have  been  selected,  you  can  check  the  print  layout,  change  the  print  position,  and  delete  stamp  items. 


s  s 


501 


等 


COPIER 


Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  destination 
position. 

The  touched  position  key  is  highlighted  and  the  print  position 
changes. 


The  keys  that  show  the  print  positions  will  appear  as  follows 
depending  on  the  state  of  the  settings. 


! 

Not  selected,  stamp  setting  has  not 
been  selected. 

Selected  during  selection  of  the  stamp 
setting. 

j 

Not  available,  stamp  setting  has  already 
been  selected. 

The  above  key  is  the  top  left  key.  The  appearance  of  each  key 
varies  depending  on  the  position  of  the  key. 


If  you  wish  to  swap  the  position  of  the  selected  stamp  item  with  the  position  of  another  stamp  item,  temporarily  move 
either  one  of  the  items  to  an  unoccupied  position  and  then  switch  the  print  positions. 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

If  you  attempt  to  move  the  stamp  item  to  a  position  that  is 
already  occupied  by  another  stamp  item,  a  message  will 
appear  asking  you  if  you  wish  to  overwrite  the  other  stamp 
item.  To  overwrite  the  other  stamp  item,  touch  the  [Yes]  key.  To 
cancel  the  move,  touch  the  [No]  key. 


An  item  has  been  already  selected  to 
this  location.  Overwrite  the  item? 


No  |  I  Yes 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


2-101 


Contents 


COPIER 


ADDING  A  WATERMARK  TO  A  COPY  (Watermark) 

When  making  a  copy,  specific  text  can  be  added  to  the  copy  as  a  watermark.  The  density,  angle,  and  pages  (first  page 
only  or  all  pages)  can  be  selected  for  a  watermark.  The  watermark  is  printed  at  the  center  of  the  paper. 

Printing  "CONFIDENTIAL11  on  the  paper 


The  following  12  selections  are  available  for  the  stamp  text. 


CONFIDENTIAL 

PRIORITY 

PRELIMINARY 

FINAL 

FOR  YOUR  INFO. 

DO  NOT  COPY 

IMPORTANT 

COPY 

URGENT 

DRAFT 

TOP  SECRET 

PLEASE  REPLY 

Three  levels  can  be  selected  for  the  density  of  the  watermark. 

The  angle  of  a  watermark  can  be  selected  in  the  range  +90  degrees  to  -90  degrees  in  increments  of  45  degrees. 


D  Touch  the  [Watermark]  key  in  the  stamp  selection  screen. 

See  steps  1  to  4  of  "GENERAL  PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP11  (page  2-85). 


Touch  the  key  of  the  watermark  that  you 
wish  to  use. 


2-102 


Contents 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [Exposure]  key  and  set  the 
density. 

If  you  wish  to  darken,  touch  the  [  I  I  key.  If  you  wish  to 
lighten,  touch  the  [  0  )  key. 

When  you  have  finished  selecting  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 


Touch  the  こ 0 keys  to  set  the  angle  of 
the  watermark. 

An  angle  from  +90  degrees  to  -90  degrees  in  increments  of  45 
degrees  can  be  selected. 


Select  the  pages  that  the  watermark  will 
be  printed  on  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Select  printing  on  the  first  page  only,  or  printing  on  all  pages. 
After  touching  the  [OK]  key,  continue  from  step  5  of  "GENERAL 
PROCEDURE  FOR  USING  STAMP"  (page  2-85)  to  complete 
the  copy  procedure. 


The  watermark  text  cannot  be  edited. 


@To  cancel  a  watermark  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 


2-103 


Contents 


COPIER 


(1)  [Photo  Repeat]  key 

暖  REPEATING  PHOTOS  ON  A  COPY  (Photo  Repeat) 
(page  2-105) 

(2)  [Multi-Page  Enlargement]  key 

暖  CREATING  A  LARGE  POSTER  (Multi-Page 
Enlargement)  (page  2-107) 

(3)  [Mirror  Image]  key 

隊  REVERSING  THE  IMAGE  (Mirror  Image)  (page 
2-110) 


(4)  [11x17  Full  Bleed]  key 

^COPYING  11Mx  17M  ORIGINALS  WITH  NO  EDGE 
CUT-OFF  (11Mx  17M  Full  Bleed)  (page  2-111) 

(5)  [Centering]  key 

^  COPYING  IN  THE  CENTER  OF  THE  PAPER 
(Centering)  (page  2-113) 

(6)  [B/W  Reverse]  key 

瞭  REVERSING  WHITE  AND  BLACK  IN  A  COPY  (B/W 
Reverse)  (page  2-115) 


Contents 


[Image  Edit]  KEY 


When  the  [Image  Edit]  key  is  touched  in  the  2nd  special  modes  menu  screen,  the  image  edit  menu  screen  opens. 


Image  edit  menu  screen 


Special  Modes 


2-104 


COPIER 


REPEATING  PHOTOS  ON  A  COPY  (Photo  Repeat) 

Photo  Repeat  is  used  to  create  repeated  images  of  a  photo-size  original  (3"  x  5"  size,  5"  x  7"  size,  2-1/2"  x  4"  size, 
2-1/2"  x  2-1/2"  size  or  2-1/8"  x  3-5/8"  size  (130  mm  x  90  mm  size, 100  mm  x  150  mm  size,  70  mm  x  100  mm  size, 
65  mm  x  70  mm  size  or  57  mm  x  100  mm  size))  on  a  single  sheet  of  copy  paper  as  shown  below.  Up  to  24  images 
(when  the  image  is  2-1/2"  x  2-1/2"  size  (65  mm  x  70  mm  size))  can  be  repeated  on  a  single  sheet  of  paper. 


•  Original  sizes  up  to  3"  x  5" (130  mm  x  90  mm) 


Original  sizes  up  to  5"  x  7" (100  mm  x  150  mm) 


i! 191 


ぶ 


關關 


Copying  on  11" x  17" 
(A3)  size  paper 

8  copies  are  made. 


[ 

Copying  on  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 

size  paper 

J^K:K 

4  copies  are  made. 

糸 

Copying  on  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 
size  paper 

2  copies  are  made. 


J^K:K 

J^K:K 

J^K:K 

糸: 

糸: 

Copying  on 

11" x17"  (A3)  size 

paper 

4  copies  are  made. 


•  Original  sizes  up  to  2-1/2"  x  4"  (70  mm  x  100  mm) 


み 

ゞ 


国 S 


国民 


Copying  on  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 
size  paper 

8  copies  are  made. 


ssss 

国国 s 国 
同 〇  S  [3 


Copying  on  11" x  17" 
(A3)  size  paper 

16  copies  are  made. 


•  Original  sizes  up  to  2-1/8"  x  3-5/8" 
(57  mm  x  100  mm) 


SH 

so 


Copying  on  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 
size  paper  (Ratio  95%) 

10  copies  are  made. 


Original  sizes  up  to  2-1/2"  x  2-1/2" 
(65  mm  x  70  mm) 


1 


為 


1 

1 

じ 

_ 

1! 

IS 

M 

I 

1: 

i 

i 

園 

Copying  on  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 
size  paper 

12  copies  are  made. 


國 

I 

I 

s 


m 

1 

£ 

m 

m 

E 

鼸 

s 

E 

£ 

n 

£ 

Copying  on  11" x  17" 
(A3)  size  paper 

24  copies  are  made. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 

•  When  placing  a  3n  x  5", 5"  x  7", 2-1/2"  x  4", 2-1/2"  x  2-1 /2M  or 
2-1/8"  x  3-5/8"  (130  mm  x  90  mm, 100  mm  x  150  mm, 

70  mm  x  100  mm,  65  mm  x  70  mm  or  57  mm  x  100  mm) 
photo  size  original,  place  the  original  with  the  long  side 
aligned  against  the  left  side  of  the  document  glass. 

•  When  placing  a  business  card  size  original,  place  the  original 
with  the  long  side  aligned  against  the  far  side  of  the 
document  glass. 


2-105 


Contents 


COPIER 


-130x  90mm 
-  3x  5" 


A4/ 8^x11  A3/11X17 


(1) 


Image  Edit 


[dd| 

|mm| 


Cancel 


Select  Photo  Repeat  settings. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  showing  the  original  type 
and  paper  size  combination  that  you  want 
to  use. 

Touch  the  [_fj  _tj  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens  and 
touch  the  desired  repeat  type  key  (8-1/2"  x  11"  or 
11nx17"(A4  or  A3)). 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


When  making  repeat  copies  of  a  business  card  size  original  (up  to  2-1/8"  x  3-5/8"  (57  mm  x  100  mm)),  only  8-1/2"  x 
11" (A4)  can  be  selected  for  the  paper  size. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


®  : 


© 


The  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

Only  8-1/2"  x  1 1" (A4)  or  1 1" x  1 7"  (A3)  size  paper  can  be  used. 

The  copy  ratio  is  100 %  when  this  function  is  used.  (The  ratio  cannot  be  changed.)  However,  for  a  business  card  size 
original  (up  to  2-1/8"  x  3-5/8"  (57  mm  x  100  mm)),  the  images  are  reduced  to  95%. 


To  cancel  the  photo  repeat  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


Contents 


I  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  0  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Photo  Repeat]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


1 5 S S 


2-106 


COPIER 


CREATING  A  LARGE  POSTER  (Multi-Page 
Enlargement) 

This  function  is  used  to  enlarge  an  image  of  an  original  and  print  it  as  a  composite  image  using  multiple  sheets  of  paper. 


Original 

(8-1/2"  x11M  (A4)  size) 


m 

m 

■ 

H 

H 

Copy  (enlarged  image  on  8 
sheets  of  1 T  x  1 7"  (A3)  paper) 


I  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  0  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Multi-Page  Enlargement]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


2-107 


Contents 


COPIER 


(2)  (3)  (A)  (1) 


Enlargement  size  ►  Original  size 

O 

22"x17" 

◄- ►IV'x  17M,  8-1/2"  x  14M,  8-1/2Mx11M 

(/) 

22"  x  34M 

◄- ►IV'x  17M,  8-1/211  x  1 4",  8-1 /2M  x  1 1" 

»< 

% 

34"  x  44"  ◄- ►11" x  17",  8-1/211  x  14M,  8-1 /2M  x  1 1 ■ 

<D 

3 

44M  x68M  ◄- ►IV'x  17" 

> 

A2 

料  A3,  A4,  A5 

U) 

A1 

►  A3,  A4,  A5 

(/) 

(D 

AO 

料  A3,A4 

3 

A0x2* 

►  A3 

CD 

B3 

►  B4,  B5 

(/) 

B2 

— ►  B4,  B5 

(J) 

O 

B1 

►  B4,  B5 

3 

BO 

►  B4 

Set  the  enlargement  size  and  the  original 
size. 

(1)  Select  the  size  system  that  you  wish  to  use 
for  multi-page  enlargement. 

Touch  the  ヨ  keys  to  display  the  screen  that  shows 
the  desired  group  of  sizes. 

• 1st  screen:  Inch  system 

•  2nd  screen:  A  system 

•  3rd  screen:  B  system 

(2)  Select  the  enlargement  size. 

(3)  Select  the  size  of  the  original  to  be  used. 

A  suitable  original  placement  orientation  (A)  and  the 
number  of  sheets  of  paper  required  for  the  enlarged 
image  (B)  are  displayed  based  on  the  selected  original 
size  and  enlargement  size. 

Check  the  placement  orientation  and  number  of  sheets. 
The  combinations  of  original  sizes  and  enlargement  sizes 
shown  in  the  table  at  left  are  possible  for  multi-page 
enlargement. 


The  size  that  is  twice  AO  size. 


•  An  A  size  original  cannot  be  enlarged  to  a  B  size,  and  a  B  size  original  cannot  be  enlarged  to  an  A  size. 
•To  print  a  borderline  around  the  copy  image,  touch  the  [Border  Print]  key  so  that  it  is  highlighted. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass  in  the  orientation 
indicated  in  the  screen. 


2-108 


Contents 


〕 


COPIER 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the  [OK]  key 
to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


•  The  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  Overlap  of  sections  of  image 

- There  will  be  a  margin  around  the  edges  of  each  copy. 

- Areas  for  overlapping  the  copies  will  be  created  at  the  leading  and  trailing  edges  of  each  copy. 

•  If  an  original  size  is  selected  first,  a  message  will  appear  indicating  the  enlargement  sizes  that  can  be  selected.  If  an 
enlargement  size  is  selected  first,  a  message  will  appear  indicating  the  original  sizes  that  can  be  selected. 

•  If  a  combination  of  settings  is  selected  for  which  multi-page  enlargement  is  not  possible,  invalid  selection  beeps  will  sound. 

•  The  paper  size,  number  of  sheets  required  for  the  enlarged  image,  and  the  ratio  are  automatically  selected  based  on  the 
selected  original  size  and  enlargement  size. 

(The  paper  size  and  ratio  cannot  be  selected  manually.) 

•  If  no  paper  trays  have  the  size  of  paper  that  was  automatically  selected,  "Load  XXX  paper"  will  appear.  Change  the  paper 
in  one  of  the  trays  or  the  bypass  tray  to  the  indicated  size  of  paper. 


© 


•  To  cancel  the  multi-page  enlargement  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2. 

Although  the  multi-page  enlargement  setting  is  canceled,  the  ratio  selected  automatically  is  kept  valid. 

•To  return  the  ratio  to 100%... 

To  return  the  ratio  setting  to 100%,  touch  the  [Copy  Ratio]  key  to  display  the  ratio  menu  and  then  touch  the  [100%]  key. 


2-109 


Contents 


COPIER 


REVERSING  THE  IMAGE  (Mirror  Image) 

This  feature  is  used  to  make  a  copy  that  is  a  mirror  image  of  the  original. 


/t 

Original 


Mirror  image  copy 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  jj  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


(1) (2) 


Special  Modes 

i 弧 i 

Image  Edit 

OK  j 

( 

1  —  -p-t  | 

ilpullBYeed]  こ  e 


Select  Mirror  Image. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Mirror  Image]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you  have 
selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then  touch  the 
[Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


@To  cancel  a  mirror  image  setting... 

Touch  the  [Mirror  Image]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-110 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  11" x  17"  ORIGINALS  WITH  NO  EDGE 
CUT-OFF  (11" x  17"  Full  Bleed) 


This  feature  lets  you  copy  an  entire  11" x  17"  (A3)  size  original  at  full  size  with  no  image  cut-off  at  the  edges. 
12"  x  18"  (A3W)  size  paper  is  used,  which  is  slightly  larger  than  11" x  17"  (A3)  size. 

11" x  17"  (A3)  size  original  12"  x  18"  (A3W)  full  bleed  copy 


■  ■■■■■■■■■■■■■  ■  i 

■  ■■■■■■■■■■■■■a 

■  ■■■■■■■■■■■■a  ii 

■  ■  ■  I 

■  ■■■■■■■■■■■■a  ■  i 

WSSSSSSSftWS 

離 

級 

■■■国 

■■■国 

s 

■  ■ 

w 八 

■  ■国 

%wwwwww^ 

: ベ::: 

SSSSSSSSSSSSH 

■  ■ 

s 

■  ■  ■ 

■  ■  ■ 

■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ 

■  ■ 

■  ■  ■ 

SS 

■  ■  ■  ■  ■■■■■ 

: 

m  Mmm  ■■■■■■■■  mm 

Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


Select  11x17  Full  Bleed. 

(1)  Touch  the  [11x17  Full  Bleed]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


2-111 


Contents 


COPIER 


Place  12"  x  18"  (A3W)  paper  in  the 
bypass  tray. 

Pull  out  the  extension  tray,  adjust  the  guides  to  the  width  of 
12"  x  18"  (A3W)  paper,  and  place  the  paper  in  the  bypass  tray. 
After  loading  the  paper,  configure  the  bypass  tray  settings  as 
explained  in  "MAKING  COPIES  USING  THE  BYPASS  TRAY" 
(page  2-38). 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•To  use  this  function,  one  of  the  following  output  devices  must  be  installed; 

Exit  tray  unit,  Finisher,  Finisher  (large  stacker),  Saddle  stitch  finisher 

•  The  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  The  copy  ratio  is  1 00%  when  this  function  is  used.  The  ratio  cannot  be  changed. 

•  The  staple,  paper  folding,  and  punch  function  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  11x17  Full  Bleed... 

Touch  the  [11x17  Full  Bleed]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-112 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  IN  THE  CENTER  OF  THE  PAPER  (Centering) 

This  is  used  to  center  the  copied  image  on  the  paper. 

This  lets  you  place  the  image  in  the  center  of  the  paper  when  the  original  size  is  smaller  than  the  paper  size  or  when  the 
image  is  reduced. 


Not  using  the  centering  function 


Using  the  centering  function 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


(1)  (2) 


Special  Modes 

|Image  Edit 

し  。K  | 

|  Photo  Repeat 

f  Multi -Page 

|  Enlargement 

1C 

岡 11x17 
|l-±-lFull  Bleed 

b/w 

| 1 -泌  Reverse 

Select  Centering. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Centering]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-113 


Contents 


COPIER 


© 


•  The  image  can  be  reduced  when  using  the  centering  function,  but  not  enlarged. 

•  When  the  original  size  or  the  paper  size  is  displayed  as  a  special  size,  this  function  cannot  be  used. 

To  cancel  centering... 

Touch  the  [Centering]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-114 


Contents 


COPIER 


REVERSING  WHITE  AND  BLACK  IN  A  COPY  (B/W  Reverse) 

This  is  used  to  reverse  black  and  white  in  a  copy  to  create  a  negative  image. 

Originals  with  large  black  areas  (which  use  a  large  amount  of  toner)  can  be  copied  using  Black/White  Reverse  to  reduce 
toner  consumption. 


Originals 


B/W  Reverse  copy 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  jj  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Image  Edit]  key. 

隊 [Image  Edit]  KEY  (page  2-104) 


(1)  (2) 


Special  Modes 

i  °k  i 

(Image  Edit 

一一  OK  | 

j  Photo  Repeat 

[ Multi -Page 
|  Enlargement 

11x17 

ICijFull  Bleed 

|  Centering 

Select  B/W  Reverse. 

(1)  Touch  the  [B/W  Reverse]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you 
have  selected  sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then 
touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-115 


Contents 


COPIER 


When  this  function  is  selected,  the  "Original  Image  Type"  setting  for  exposure  adjustment  automatically  changes  to  "Text". 


@To  cancel  B/W  reverse... 

Touch  the  [B/W  Reverse]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-116 


Contents 


j 


COPIER 


ADJUSTING  THE  SHARPNESS  OF  AN 
IMAGE  (Sharpness) 

This  is  used  to  sharpen  an  image  or  make  it  softer. 


Sharp 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Sharpness]  key, 


(1)  (2) 


Adjust  the  image. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Soft]  key  or  the  [Sharp]  key  so 
that  it  is  highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  special  modes  screen.  Touch  the 
[OK]  key  to  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  original  pages,  copying  will  take  place  as  you  scan  each  original.  If  you  have  selected 
sort  mode,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


When  this  function  is  selected,  the  exposure  adjustment  setting  automatically  changes  to  manual  adjustment. 
Automatic  exposure  adjustment  cannot  be  selected. 


@To  cancel  the  sharpness  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


Contents 


2-117 


COPIER 


CHECKING  COPIES  BEFORE  PRINTING 
(Proof  Copy) 


This  feature  prints  only  one  set  of  copies,  regardless  of  how  many  sets  have  been  specified.  After  the  first  set  is  checked 
for  errors,  the  remaining  sets  can  be  printed.  Previously  it  was  necessary  to  re-scan  the  original  each  time  changes  to 
settings  were  required.  However,  this  feature  makes  it  possible  to  change  settings  for  the  scanned  original  without 
scanning  it  again,  allowing  you  perform  copying  more  efficiently. 


■■Proof  Copy11  is 
selected  and  5  sets  of 
copies  are  executed 


1  set  of  copies  is 
printed  for  you  to 
check 


If  OK 


The  remaining  4 
sets  are  printed 


Adjust  the 
settings 


If  OK 


After  adjustments  are 
made, 1  set  is  printed 
for  you  to  check 


The  remaining  4  sets 
are  printed 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 

Select  copy  settings  in  the  base  screen. 

Select  Proof  Copy. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  33  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Proof  Copy]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


(2)  (4) 


2-118 


Contents 


COPIER 


Special  Modes 


2-Sided  Copy 


Set  the  number  of  copies  (number  of 
sets)  with  the  numeric  keys. 

If  you  will  copy  multiple  originals  using  the  document  glass, 
switch  to  sort  mode  after  this  step. 

隊  Sort  mode  (page  2-33) 


@ 


Up  to  999  copies  (sets)  can  be  set. 


If  an  incorrect  number  of  copies  is  set... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (© )  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

One  set  of  copies  is  printed. 

If  you  are  using  the  document  glass  to  copy  multiple  originals,  change  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all 
pages  have  been  scanned  and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key.  One  set  of  copies  will  be  printed. 


@To  cancel  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Press  [End]  to  continue. 

To  make  a  proof  copy  again,  press 
[Start] . 


Change 


Check  the  printed  set  of  copies.  If  the 
copies  are  acceptable,  touch  the  [End] 
key.  If  you  need  to  change  the  settings, 
touch  the  [Change]  key. 

When  the  [End]  key  is  touched,  the  remaining  sets  are  printed. 
If  you  touched  the  [Change]  key,  go  to  the  next  step. 


© 


To  cancel  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (©). 


2-119 


Contents 


④ ® ® © 

® ® ® ® 

® ® ® ® 


COPIER 


(1)  (2) 


Change  the  settings. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  setting  that  you  want 
to  change. 

The  setting  screen  of  the  touched  key  opens.  Change  the 
settings  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•To  change  the  number  of  sets  printed,  set  the  desired  number  of  copies  (sets)  with  the  numeric  keys.  After  changing 
the  number  of  sets,  touch  the  [End]  key  in  the  touch  panel  (not  the  [START]  key)  to  print  the  sets. 

•  Special  modes  that  can  be  adjusted  are  Margin  Shift,  Pamphlet  Copy,  Tandem  Copy,  Covers/Inserts,  Transparency 
Inserts,  Multi-Shot,  and  Stamp. 

•  For  Pamphlet  Copy,  Covers/Inserts,  and  Multi  Shot,  only  changes  to  the  settings  of  the  functions  can  be  made;  the 
functions  cannot  be  newly  added  or  deleted. 

•  When  transparency  film  is  used,  the  settings  can  be  changed,  new  settings  can  be  added,  and  the  function  can  be 
canceled.  However,  this  is  not  possible  when  pamphlet  copying  is  enabled. 


B  Press  the  [START]  key. 

One  set  of  copies  is  printed  again  using  the  adjusted  settings.  Check  the  results.  If  further  adjustments  are  needed,  repeat 
steps  6  through  8.  (Repeating  Proof  Copy  does  not  decrease  the  remaining  number  of  sets  to  be  printed.) 


To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Touch  the  [End]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  the 
remaining  sets  will  be  printed. 


If  Proof  Copy  is  executed  while  the  machine  is  printing  another  job,  the  other  job  is  interrupted  and  the  proof  copies  are 
printed.  The  previous  job  will  resume  after  the  proof  copies  are  printed. 

However,  if  proof  copy  is  executed  during  output  of  a  job  for  which  both  two-sided  printing  and  stapling  are  enabled,  the  proof 
copy  will  be  output  after  the  job  in  progress  is  finished. 

If  the  [End]  key  is  touched  to  execute  printing  of  the  remaining  sets  while  the  machine  is  printing  another  job,  the  remaining 
sets  will  be  printed  after  all  previously  reserved  jobs  are  completed. 


2-120 


Contents 


COPIER 


CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  COPYING 
(Original  Count) 

The  number  of  scanned  original  sheets  can  be  counted  and  displayed  before  copying  is  executed.  By  allowing  you  to  check 
the  number  of  original  sheets  that  were  scanned,  this  helps  reduce  the  occurrence  of  copy  mistakes. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


(3)  (2)  (4) 


Select  Original  Count. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

瞭  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  \±]  3  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-121 


Contents 


COPIER 


After  scanning  is  finished,  check  the 
number  of  sheets  that  were  scanned  and 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 

•  When  job  build  mode  is  used,  the  number  of  scanned  sheets 
appears  when  the  [Read-End]  key  is  touched. 

•  The  number  that  is  displayed  is  the  number  of  scanned 
original  sheets,  not  the  number  of  scanned  original  pages. 
For  example,  when  two-sided  copying  is  performed  using 
one  original,  the  number  "1" will  appear  to  indicate  that  one 
original  sheet  was  scanned,  not  "2"  to  indicate  the  front-side 
page  and  the  reverse  side  page. 


If  the  displayed  number  of  original  sheets  is  different  from  the  actual  number  of  original  sheets... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


@To  cancel  the  original  count  mode  setting... 

Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


2-122 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT  SIZES 


(Mixed  Size  Original) 

Even  when  8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  originals  are  mixed  in  with  1 1" x  17"  (A3)  originals,  all  originals  can  be  copied  at  once.  When 
scanning  the  originals,  the  machine  automatically  detects  the  size  of  each  original  and  uses  paper  appropriate  for  that  size. 
When  mixed  size  original  is  combined  with  auto  ratio  selection,  the  ratio  is  adjusted  individually  for  each  original  according 
to  the  selected  paper  size,  enabling  output  on  a  uniform  paper  size. 


Originals 


Copies 


When  mixed  size  original  is  combined  with  auto  ratio  selection 

(Auto  ratio  selection  and  1 1" x  1 7"  (A3)  are  selected) 

Originals  Copies 


An  8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  size  original  will  be 
enlarged  to 11" x  17"  (A3)  size. 


There  are  two  settings  for  mixed  size  originals. 


Same  Width 

Use  this  setting  for  originals  that  are  different  sizes  but  have  sides  that  are  the  same  length.  The  originals 
are  inserted  in  the  document  feeder  tray  with  the  sides  that  are  the  same  length  aligned  together  on  the  left. 

• 11" x  17"  and  8-1/2"  x  11" •  8-1/2"  x  14"  and  8-1/2"  x  11"R  •  8-1/2"  x  14"  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

•  8-1/2"  x  13"  and  8-1/2"  x  11"R  •  8-1/2"  x  13"  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  •  8-1/2"  x  11"R  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

•  A3  and  A4  •  B4  and  B5  •  A4R  and  A5 

Different  Width 

Use  this  setting  when  the  originals  are  different  sizes  and  do  not  have  sides  that  are  the  same  length.  This 
setting  can  only  be  used  for  the  following  combinations  of  sizes: 

• 1 1 ■■  x  1 7"  and  8-1/2"  x  1 4"  • 1 1" x  1 7"  and  8-1/2"  x  1 3"  • 1 1" x  1 7"  and  5-1/2  x  8-1/2" 

•  A3  and  B4  •  A3  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4  •  A4  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4R  •  B4  and  A5 

•  B5  and  A4R  •  B5  and  A5 

2-123 


Contents 


COPIER 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 


•  When  "Same  Width"  is  used 


Place  the  originals  with  the  sides  that  are  the  same  length 
aligned  on  the  left. 


•  When  "Different  Width"  is  used 


8-1/2"  x  14" 
(B4) 


Place  the  originals 
aligned  to  the  far  left 
corner. 


/8-1/2"x  14" gi 


°  |§§§°〇0  of" 
O  J  0000  | 

^=^=1  - - 

17"  (A3) - 

Place  the  originals  with  the  corners  aligned  in  the  far  left  corner 
of  the  document  feeder  tray. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  3  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key. 

隊  Special  modes  menu  (2nd  screen)  (page  2-42) 


Select  Mixed  Size  Original  settings. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Same  Width]  key  or  the 
[Different  Width]  key  as  appropriate  for  the 
originals. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


2-124 


Contents 


COPIER 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  When  [Different  Width]  is  selected  on  the  MX-M283N,  the  "2-Sided  to  2-Sided"  and  "2-Sided  to 1 -Sided"  settings  of 
automatic  2-Sided  copying  cannot  be  used. 

•  When  [Different  Width]  is  selected,  the  staple  function  cannot  be  used. 


•  The  mixed  size  original  function  cannot  be  used  to  copy  originals  that  are  the  same  size  but  are  placed  in  different 
orientations  (8-1/2"  x  1 1" and  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  (A4  and  A4R),  etc.). 

@To  cancel  the  mixed  size  original  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

The  original  feeding  mode  can  be  set  to  always  scan  mixed  size  originals. 


2-125 


Contents 


COPIER 


COPYING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan 
Mode) 

Use  this  function  when  you  wish  to  scan  thin  originals  using  the  automatic  document  feeder.  This  function  helps  prevent 
thin  originals  from  misfeeding. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


If  the  originals  are  inserted  with  too  much  force,  they  may  crumple  and  misfeed. 


Select  Slow  Scan  Mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  2-41) 

(2)  Touch  the  [±]  3  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Copying  will  begin. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-126 


Contents 


COPIER 


The  "2-Sided  to  2-Sided"  and  "2-Sided  to 1 -Sided"  modes  of  automatic  2-sided  copying  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  the  slow  scan  mode  setting... 

Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

This  is  used  to  have  scanning  always  take  place  in  slow  scan  mode. 


2-127 


Contents 


COPIER 


CONVENIENT  COPY  FUNCTIONS 


This  section  explains  convenient  copy  functions  such  as  interrupting  a  copy  run,  changing  the  order  of  reserved  copy 
jobs,  and  storing  copy  settings  in  a  program. 


INTERRUPTING  A  COPY  RUN 
(Interrupt  copy) 

When  you  need  to  make  an  urgent  copy  and  the  machine  is  busy  with  a  long  copy  run  or  other  job,  use  interrupt  copy. 
Interrupt  copy  temporarily  stops  the  job  in  progress  and  lets  you  perform  the  interrupt  copy  job  first. 


Touch  the  [Interrupt]  key. 

The  [Interrupt]  key  does  not  appear  while  an  original  is  being 
scanned. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  copy  settings  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

The  interrupt  copy  job  begins. 


When  the  interrupt  copy  job  is  completed,  the  interrupted  job  resumes. 


@To  cancel  scanning  and  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-128 


Contents 


COPIER 


•  If  user  authentication  is  enabled,  the  login  screen  will  appear  when  the  [Interrupt]  key  is  pressed.  Enter  your  user  name 
and  password  to  log  in.  The  number  of  copies  made  will  be  added  to  the  count  of  the  user  that  logged  in. 

•  Depending  on  the  settings  of  the  job  in  progress,  the  [Interrupt]  key  may  not  appear. 

•  Interrupt  copy  cannot  be  used  in  combination  with  the  following  special  modes: 

Job  Build,  Tandem  Copy,  Book  Copy,  Card  Shot,  Multi-Page  Enlargement,  Original  Count 
•If  the  document  glass  is  used  for  an  interrupt  copy  job,  2-sided  copying,  sort  copying,  and  staple  sort  copying  cannot  be 
selected.  If  any  of  these  functions  are  necessary,  use  the  automatic  document  feeder. 


2-129 


Contents 


COPIER 


CHECKING  A  PREVIEW  IMAGE  OF  A  COPY 
(Preview) 

You  can  touch  the  [Preview]  key  so  that  it  is  highlighted  in  the  base  screen  and  then  scan  the  original  to  check  a  preview 
image  of  the  copy  in  the  touch  panel  before  printing  the  copy. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Touch  the  [Preview]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 


Select  copy  settings  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

After  the  original  is  scanned,  a  preview  image  of  the  copy  appears  in  the  touch  panel.  The  copy  is  not  printed  until  the  [Start 
Copy]  key  is  touched  in  the  preview  screen. 


IDi splay  Output] 

I  Function  Rev.】 


Display  Rotation 

I 这 陶  1 


Check  the  preview  image  and  then  touch 
the  [Start  Copy]  key. 

Copy  printing  begins. 

For  details  on  the  preview  screen,  see  "PREVIEW  SCREEN" 
(page  2-132). 


- :  •••••V  : n  ; a: 

』 *x«  -  ft  •  . . 

- |  •,钃 w 二*, 

— - . •'  —— - - 


I M  J  i  I  1 000 ij  /ooio  |  ►  I  |^) 


If  you  need  to  change  the  copy  settings,  touch  the  [Reset]  key. 


@To  cancel  copying... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


2-130 


Contents 


COPIER 


@To  cancel  the  operation... 

Press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key  ((g)). 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Preview 

You  can  set  the  default  state  of  the  [Preview]  key  to  always  selected  (highlighted).  Enable  this  setting  if  you  wish  to  check  a 
preview  image  each  time  you  make  a  copy. 


Contents 


2-131 


COPIER 


PREVIEW  SCREEN 


The  preview  screen  is  explained  below. 


⑶ 

(4) 

⑼ 

⑹ 

⑺ 

⑻ 


(1)  Preview  image 

A  preview  image  of  the  scanned  original  is  displayed. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and 
slide  it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to 
scroll.) 

(2)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages  of  images,  use  these  keys 
to  change  pages. 

•  M  1  W I  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page. 

•  I  ◄ 1 1  ►  i  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display:  This  shows  the  total  number  of 

pages  and  the  current  page 
number.  You  can  touch  the 
current  page  number  key  and 
enter  a  number  with  the 
numeric  keys  to  go  to  that  page 
number. 

(3)  [Reset]  key 

Touch  to  change  the  copy  settings  after  checking  the 
preview  image.  After  changing  the  settings,  touch  the 
[Preview  Again]  key  to  update  the  preview  image  with  the 
new  settings. 


Preview/Reset 

[ 

Cancel  丨 [ Preview  Again  ] 

I 

1  ( 

1  1 

1 

2-Sided  Copy  j 

Special  Modes j 

Output 

(4)  [Display  Output]  key 

Touch  to  show  the  selected  modes  and  settings  as  icons. 
Functions  that  are  displayed  are  as  follows: 

•  2-sided  copying  •  Pamphlet  copy 

•  Book  copy 

•  Staple  (including  saddle  stitch)  function 

•  Punch  function  •  Stamp  menu 

•  Covers/Inserts  •  Transparency  inserts 

This  key  can  only  be  touched  when  the  entire  preview 
image  is  displayed  in  the  preview  screen. 

(5)  [Function  Rev.]  key 

Touch  to  check  special  mode  items,  2-sided  copying,  and 
output  settings. 

(6)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  Tull  Page",  "Twice  V4 
Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in  the 
file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(7)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(8)  [Start  Copy]  key 

Touch  to  start  printing  the  copy. 


•A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  It  will  differ  from  the  actual  print  result. 

•  The  preview  image  reflects  certain  copy  settings  and  special  mode  settings.  Settings  that  are  reflected  in  the  preview 
image  are  as  follows: 

Copy  settings:  ratio,  paper  size 

Special  modes:  margin  shift,  edge  erase,  dual  page  copy,  pamphlet  copy,  covers/inserts,  transparency  film,  2  in  1/4  in  1, 
book  copy,  card  shot,  image  edit  menu,  Sharpness 


•  Fine  lines  (such  as  borderlines  printed  by  the  2in1/4in1  function)  may  not  appear  correctly  at  some  zoom  ratios. 


2-132 


Contents 


COPIER 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  is  displayed  when  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  on  the  operation  panel  is  pressed.  The  job  status 
screen  shows  the  status  of  jobs  by  mode.  When  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  is  pressed,  the  job  status  screen  of  the  mode 
that  was  being  used  before  the  key  was  pressed  appears. 


Example:  Pressing  the  key  in  copy  mode 


The  job  status  display  (A)  is  in  the  lower  left  corner  of  the  touch  panel.  The  job  status  display  can  be  touched  to  display  the 
job  status  screen.  The  first  four  jobs  in  the  print  queue  (the  job  in  progress  and  reserved  jobs)  can  be  checked  in  the  job 
status  display  (B). 


2-133 


Contents 


COPIER 


⑺ 

Use  these  tabs  to  select  the  mode  that  is  shown  in  the 
job  status  screen. 

The  status  of  copy  jobs  can  be  checked  by  touching  the 

[Print  Job]  tab.  (8) 

(2)  Job  list  (job  queue  screen) 

Jobs  waiting  to  be  printed  appear  in  the  job  queue  as 

keys.  The  jobs  are  printed  in  order  from  the  top  of  the 

queue.  Each  job  key  shows  information  on  the  job  and 

the  current  status  of  the  job.  ' 

(3)  Job  status  screen  selector  key 

Touch  this  key  to  switch  through  the  job  queue  screen, 
the  completed  jobs  screen,  and  the  spool  screen. 

(4)  [Detail]  key  (job  queue  screen) 

Touch  this  key  to  display  detailed  information  on  a  job. 

(5)  [Priority]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  give  priority  to  a  selected  job. 

(6)  [Stop/Delete]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  stop  or  delete  a  selected  job. 


JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED  JOB  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  consists  of  the  job  queue  screen  that  shows  copy  and  print  jobs  waiting  to  be  printed  and  the  job 
currently  in  progress,  the  completed  job  screen  that  shows  jobs  that  have  been  completed,  and  the  spool  screen  that 
shows  print  jobs  that  have  been  spooled  and  encrypted  PDF  jobs  that  are  waiting  for  a  password  to  be  entered.  This 
section  explains  the  job  queue  screen  and  the  completed  jobs  screen,  which  are  related  to  copy  mode.  The  job  status 
screen  switches  between  the  job  queue  screen  and  the  completed  jobs  screen  each  time  the  job  status  screen  selector 


2-134 


i あ 


: nternet  Fax  I 


&  Print  Job  [ 


1 

Computer02 

11; 

:00 

04/01 

001/001 

IOK 

2 

Computer 03 

10; 

:33 

04/01 

010/010 

IOK 

3 

暫 

Computer 04 

10: 

:31 

04/01 

013/013 

IOK 

[4 

% 

file-01 

10: 

:30 

04/01 

010/010 

IOK 

卜 

% 

Copy 

10: 

:13 

04/01 

001/001 

IOK 

6 

Copy 

10: 

:03 

04/01 

001/001 

IOK 

7 

Computer 05 

10: 

:01 

04/01 

003/003 

IOK 

8 

Copy 

10: 

:00 

04/01 

010/010 

IOK 

■⑺ 

■⑻ 


a 
a  | 二 


L 


—⑼ 


Job  list  (completed  jobs  screen) 

This  shows  up  to  99  completed  jobs.  The  result  (status) 
of  each  completed  job  is  shown.  Copy  jobs  that  used  the 
document  filing  function  are  indicated  as  keys. 

[Detail]  key  (completed  jobs  screen) 

When  a  job  is  shown  as  a  key  in  the  job  list,  the  [Detail] 
key  can  be  touched  to  show  detailed  information  on  the 
job. 

[Call]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  retrieve  and  use  a  copy  job  stored 
using  the  document  filing  function. 


Contents 


key  is  touched. 


(1 ) で  a  Print  Job  |  —Scan  to  ^ |  — Fax ^ Job  |  设 Interne 


TrxK  A” ハ” ハ 

一—〜 

|2  CD 

Copy 

002  / 

'  000 

Waiting 

|3  ^ 

Computer 01 

002  y 

'  000 

Waiting 

[4 钇. 

0312345678 

001  ノ 

'  000 

Waiting 

⑴  Mode  select  tabs 


Spool 

▼ 

Job  Queue 


^  1-1  s  s 


COPIER 


Job  key  display 

Each  job  key  shows  the  position  of  the  job  in  the  job  queue  and  the  current  status  of  the  job. 

oo^[oooj 


(1) (2) 


|  copy 


Waiting 


(4)  (5) 


(1)  Indicates  the  number  (position)  of  the  job  in  the  job 
queue. 

When  the  job  currently  being  printed  is  finished,  the  job 
moves  up  one  position  in  the  job  queue. 

This  number  does  not  appear  in  keys  in  the  completed 
jobs  screen. 

(2)  Mode  icon 

The  (Q  icon  appears  when  the  job  is  a  copy  job. 

(3)  Job  name 

"Copy"  appears  for  a  copy  job. 

When  user  authentication  is  enabled,  the  name  of  the 
user  that  performed  the  job  appears. 

(4)  Number  of  copies  (sets)  entered 

This  shows  the  number  of  copies  (sets)  specified. 

(5)  Number  of  completed  copies 

This  shows  the  number  of  copies  (sets)  completed.  "0001 
appears  while  the  job  is  waiting  in  the  job  queue. 


(6)  Status 

Shows  the  job  status. 


Message 

Status 

"Copying" 

Copying  is  in  progress. 

"Waiting11 

The  job  is  waiting  to  be  executed. 

"Toner 

Empty" 

The  toner  cartridge  is  out  of  toner. 
Replace  the  toner  cartridge  with  a 
new  cartridge. 

"Paper 

Empty" 

The  paper  used  for  the  job  has  run 
out.  Add  paper  or  change  to  a 
different  paper  tray. 

■■Limit" 

The  copy  page  limit  has  been 
exceeded.  Check  with  the 

administrator  of  the  machine. 

"Error11 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed.  Clear  the  error 
condition. 

2-135 


Contents 


COPIER 


CANCELING  A  JOB  THAT  IS  WAITING  IN  THE  QUEUE 

A  copy  job  that  is  waiting  to  be  printed  can  be  canceled. 


JOB  STATUS 

f  N 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


(3)  (4) 


Cancel  the  job. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Print  Job]  tab, 

(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to  [Job 
Queue]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  copy  job  that  you  wish 
to  cancel. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Stop/Delete]  key. 

(5)  A  message  appears  to  confirm  the 
cancelation.  Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

A  Delete  the  job? 

吃) Copy 


The  selected  job  key  is  deleted  and  printing  is  canceled. 


If  the  job  in  progress  is  a  copy  job,  you  can  also  press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  display  the  above  screen. 
To  cancel,  touch  the  [Yes]  key. 


@lf  you  do  not  want  to  cancel  the  selected  print  job... 

Touch  the  [No]  key  in  step  (5). 


2-136 


Contents 


COPIER 


GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  JOB  IN  THE  QUEUE 

If  a  copy  job  is  begun  when  there  are  already  multiple  jobs  in  the  queue,  the  copy  job  will  appear  at  the  end  of  the  queue. 
However,  if  you  have  an  urgent  copy  job,  you  can  give  priority  to  the  job  and  have  it  executed  first. 


JOB  STATUS 

ご  \ 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


Give  the  desired  job  priority. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Print  Job]  tab, 

(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to  [Job 
Queue]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  copy  job  to  which  you 
want  to  give  priority. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Priority]  key. 

The  job  being  printed  stops  and  the  job  selected  in  (3)  is 
printed. 


2-137 


Contents 


COPIER 


CHECKING  INFORMATION  ON  A  COPY  JOB  WAITING 
IN  THE  QUEUE 

Detailed  information  can  be  displayed  on  a  copy  job  waiting  in  the  queue. 


r 

JOB  STATUS 

v  ノ 

Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 

(2) 

Checking  job  details 

tint  Jot) 1  Scan  to  ( tP  Fax  Job  internet  Fax  j ^ 


Job  Queue 

Sets  / 

Progress 

Status 

1 

2 

© 

Copy 

002 

/  000 

) Waiting 

皆 

Computer 01 

002 

/  000 

Waiting 

4 

0312345678 

001 

/  000 

Waiting 

Spool 

▼ 

▼ 

Complete 


S' 


Stop/DeleteJ 


(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to  [Job 
Queue]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  job  that  you  wish  to 
check. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Detail]  key. 

The  job  check  screen  of  the  job  selected  in  (3)  appears. 


[Paper  Select]  key 

If  a  copy  job  is  stopped  because  the  paper  ran  out,  the  [Paper  Select]  key  can  be  pressed  to  change  to  a 
different  paper  tray. 

When  the  [Paper  Select]  key  is  pressed,  the  paper  tray  selection  screen  appears. 

隊  PAPER  TRAYS  (page  2-11) 

Touch  the  key  of  the  tray  that  has  the  size  of  paper  that  you  wish  to  use  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key.  The 
stopped  copy  job  will  resume. 


2-138 


Contents 


COPIER 


Set  1  r  x  1 7n  (A3)  to  8-1/2"  x  11M  (A4)  reduction 


Change  the  exposure  setting 


Select  2-sided  copying 


Select  margin  shift 


Select  punch  hole  settings 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


©  _ 

Press  the  [#/P]  key  (©  ). 


Touch  the  stored  program  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 


Considerable  time  is  required  to  copy  the  drawings  each 
month  because  the  above  settings  must  be  selected. 

In  addition,  mistakes  are  occasionally  made  when  selecting 
the  settings,  so  some  copies  must  be  redone. 


The  settings  are  stored  in  a  job  program,  so  they  can  be 
selected  by  the  touch  of  a  key.  This  is  simple  and  takes  no  time. 
In  addition,  the  settings  are  all  stored  so  there  are  no  chances 
for  mistakes,  and  thus  no  need  to  redo  copies  due  to  setting 
mistakes. 


®  : 


Up  to  48  job  programs  can  be  stored.  The  job  programs  are  retained  even  if  an  interruption  occurs  in  the  power  supply. 
Job  programs  can  also  be  stored  in  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Job  program]  and  then  [Copy]  in  the  Web  page  menu  to  store  a 
job  program. 


2-139 


Contents 


STORING  COPY  OPERATIONS  (Job  Programs) 

A  job  program  is  a  group  of  copy  settings  stored  together.  When  copy  settings  are  stored  in  a  job  program,  the  settings 
can  be  retrieved  and  used  for  a  copy  job  by  means  of  a  simple  operation. 

For  example,  suppose  1 1 11  x  1 7"  (A3)  size  CAD  drawings  are  copied  once  a  month  for  archive  purposes  using  the 
following  settings: 

11" x  17"  (A3)  size  CAD  drawings 


Copies 


□I 


(1 )  The  1 1" x  17"  (A3)  size  CAD  drawings  are 
reduced  to  8-1/2"  x  11 11  (A4)  size. 

(2)  The  drawings  have  fine  lines  that  do  not 
show  clearly,  and  thus  a  dark  exposure 
setting  (level  4)  is  used. 

(3)  To  reduce  paper  use  by  half,  2-sided 
copying  is  used. 

(4)  Margin  shift  is  used  so  that  holes  can  be 
punched  for  filing. 


When  a  job  program  is  not  stored 


When  a  job  program  is  stored 


Ex 丄 4  |  ♦=  |  l JM 


COPIER 


Press  program  number. 


1 _ ^ _ I 

1 _ ^ _ I 

[.  10  1 (.  11  1 


Store/Delete 


Touch  a  numeric  key. 

Numeric  keys  in  which  job  programs  are  already  stored  are 
highlighted. 

•  To  store  a  job  program,  touch  a  numeric  key  that  is  not 
highlighted. 

•  To  edit  or  delete  a  job  program,  touch  the  key  in  which  the 
job  program  is  stored  (highlighted  key). 


STORING  (EDITING/DELETING)  A  JOB  PROGRAM 

The  procedures  for  storing  copy  settings  in  a  job  program  and  deleting  a  job  program  are  explained  below. 


®@© 

@©© 

©®® 

®®(&) 


Press  the  [#/P]  key  (©). 


Job  Programs 


Press  program  number. 


Touch  the  [Store/Delete]  tab. 


© 


Editing  or  deleting  a  job  program... 

When  a  highlighted  numeric  key  is  touched,  the  following  screen  appears. 

The  [Store]  key  can  be  touched  to  delete  the  stored  settings  and  store  new  settings.  Go  to  the  next  step. 

When  the  [Delete]  key  is  touched,  the  stored  settings  are  deleted.  After  the  deletion  is  finished,  touch  the  [Exit]  key  to 
return  to  the  base  screen. 


A  job  program  has  been  already  stored 
in  this  location. 


Cancel  j  f  Delete  I  I  Store 


When  "Disabling  Deletion  of  Job  Programs"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings,  a  stored  job  program  cannot  be  edited 
or  deleted. 


2-140 


Contents 


1 4 〔今- j rrl l 


s  s 


TJ  ^ ^  ^  f — ^ 


V  f  】 , )  ^ J 


COPIER 


Select  the  copy  settings  that  you  wish  to 
store  in  the  job  program  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key. 

To  assign  a  name  to  the  program,  touch  the  [Program  Name] 
key.  A  text  entry  screen  will  appear. 

Up  to 10  characters  can  be  entered  for  the  name. 

When  you  have  finished,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  with  the  stored  information 
reflected  in  the  screen. 


The  number  of  copies  cannot  be  stored. 


2-141 


Contents 


COPIER 


Back  cover  when  a  1 -sided 
original  is  copied  on  one 
side  of  the  back  cover. 


rx 


Back  cover  when  a  2-sided 
original  is  copied  on  one 
side  of  the  back  cover. 
(One  page  is  not  copied.) 


Front  cover  when  one  side 
is  copied  on. 


Front  cover  when  a  2-sided 
original  is  copied  on  one 
side  of  the  cover.  (One 
page  is  not  copied.) 


2-sided  original  or  output 
page  of  regular  2-sided 
copying. 

1 -sided  original  or  output 
page  of  regular  1 -sided 
copying. 


Insert  when  one  side  is 
copied  on. 


Insert  when  a  2-sided 
original  is  copied  on  one 
side  of  the  insert.  (One 
page  is  not  copied.) 


P 


Back  cover  when  both 
sides  are  copied  on. 


w 


Output  page  of  2-sided 
copying  when  only  1  side  is 
copied  on  due  to  lack  of 
originals. 


2-142 


Contents 


Front  cover  when  both 
sides  are  copied  on. 


w 


Insert  when  both  sides  are 
copied  on. 


P 


Back  cover  when  not 
copied  on. 


1 -sided  original  or  output 
page  of  regular  1 -sided 
copying. 


APPENDIX 


Examples  of  covers  and  inserts 


The  relations  between  the  originals  and  finished  copies  when  covers  or  inserts  are  inserted  are  shown  on  the  following 
pages. 

Covers 


1 -sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals 
1 -sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 


, 2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals 
, 2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 


Inserts 

• 1 -sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals  •  2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals 

• 1 -sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals  •  2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals 

Symbols  used  for  covers  and  inserts 

The  following  symbols  are  used  to  make  the  explanations  easier  to  understand. 

The  numbers  that  appear  indicate  what  original  a  copy  corresponds  to,  and  will  vary  depending  on  the  settings. 


さ 


Symbol 


Meaning 


Icon 

appearing 
in  display 


Symbol 


Meaning 


Icon 

appearing 
in  display 


Front  cover  when  not 
copied  on. 


Insert  when  not  copied  on. 


£ 


sloqulAS  J CD LUO 


^ 


s r CD (o ul 


Ili Q/ 


J a) > o o luoJ LI. 


J a) >o o >l o (Q g 


COPIER 


Covers  (1 -sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals) 

1 -sided  copies  are  made  of  the  following  1 -sided  originals. 

1st  page  2nd  page  3rd  page  4th  page  5th  page  6th  page 


1  2  3  4  5  6 


Cover  copying  condition 
Front  cover  Back  cover 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2 


3 


2 


2 


3 


3 


Resulting  copies 


2  3  4  5 


3  4  5  6 


2  3  4  5 


4 ~~  [5 ~~ 


6 


2-143 


Contents 


COPIER 


Covers  (2-sided  copying  of  1 -sided  originals) 

2-sided  copies  are  made  of  the  following  1 -sided  originals. 

1st  page  2nd  page  3rd  page  4th  page  5th  page  6th  page 


1  2  3  4  5  6 


Cover  copying  condition 
Front  cover  Back  cover 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


Resulting  copies 


Tlkl  Rk 


TT^I  FIX  R\ 


six  fsi\ 


2-144 


Contents 


COPIER 


Covers  (1 -sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals) 

1 -sided  copies  are  made  of  the  following  2-sided  originals. 


1st  page 

2nd  page 

3rd  page 

plk 

Cover  copying  condition 
Front  cover  Back  cover 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2 


3 


2 


2 


3 


3 


Resulting  copies 


2  3  4  5 


3  4  5  6 


2  3  4  5 


4 ~~  [5 ~~ 


6 


2-145 


Contents 


COPIER 


Covers  (2-sided  copying  of  2-sided  originals) 

2-sided  copies  are  made  of  the  following  2-sided  originals. 


1st  page 

2nd  page 

3rd  page 

plk 

Cover  copying  condition 


Front  cover  Back  cover 


Resulting  copies 


No  copying 


No  copying 


Tlk1 


1 -sided 
copying 


No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


No  copying 


No  copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


S  N 

W/A 

s  s 

V  X  X  x  x  xS 

No  copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


rx 


1 -sided 
copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


1 -sided 
copying 


_ 

鍾 

v '  \  \ 、 '、 

2-sided 

copying 


2-sided 

copying 


2-146 


Contents 


COPIER 


Inserts  (copying  of  1 -sided  originals) 

1 -sided  and  2-sided  copying  of  the  following  1 -sided  originals.  The  example  of  adding  an  insert  at  the  3rd  sheet  is 
shown,  (when  "Insertion  Page"  is  set  to  "3"  in  the  insertion  settings  of  the  insert  settings  in  the  special  modes) 


Insert 

copying 

condition 

Resulting  copies  (1 -sided  copying) 

Resulting  copies 
(2-sided  copying) 

No  copying 

i 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1 -sided 
copying 

i 

2 

4 

5 

6 

2-sided 

copying 

i 

2 

5 

6 

slk 

Inserts  (copying  of  2-sided  originals) 

1 -sided  and  2-sided  copying  of  the  following  2-sided  originals.  The  example  of  adding  an  insert  at  the  3rd  sheet  is 
shown,  (when  "Insertion  Page"  is  set  to  "3"  in  the  insertion  settings  of  the  insert  settings  in  the  special  modes) 


1st  page 

2nd  page 

3rd  page 

plk 

Insert 

copying 

condition 

Resulting  copies  (1 -sided  copying) 

Resulting  copies 
(2-sided  copying) 

No  copying 

i 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

plk 

1 -sided 
copying 

i 

2 

4 

5 

6 

5~[k 

2-sided 

copying 

i 

2 

5 

6 

slX 

2-147 


Contents 


CHAPTER  3 
PRINTER 


This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  printer  function. 


PRINTER  FUNCTION  OF  THE  MACHINE . 3-3 


PRINTING  FROM  WINDOWS 


BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE . 3-4 

•  SELECTING  THE  PAPER . 3-6 

•  PRINTING  ON  ENVELOPES . 3-7 

PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER 

AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED _ 3-8 

VIEWING  PRINTER  DRIVER  HELP . 3-10 

SAVING  FREQUENTLY  USED  PRINT 

SETTINGS . 3-11 

•  SAVING  SETTINGS  AT  THE  TIME  OF 

PRINTING . 3-11 

•  USING  SAVED  SETTINGS . 3-13 

CHANGING  THE  PRINTER  DRIVER 

DEFAULT  SETTINGS . 3-14 


PRINTING  FROM  A  MACINTOSH 


BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE . 3-16 

•  SELECTING  PAPER  SETTINGS . 3-16 

•  PRINTING . 3-17 

•  SELECTING  THE  PAPER . 3-19 

•  PRINTING  ON  ENVELOPES . 3-20 

PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER 

AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED  … 3-21 


FREQUENTLY  USED  FUNCTIONS 


SELECTING  A  PRINT  MODE  SETTING . 3-23 

TWO-SIDED  PRINTING . 3-25 

FITTING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  TO  THE  PAPER  … 3-27 

PRINTING  MULTIPLE  PAGES  ON  ONE 

PAGE . 3-28 

STAPLING  OUTPUT/PUNCHING  HOLES  IN 
OUTPUT . 3-30 


CONVENIENT  PRINTING  FUNCTIONS 


CONVENIENT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  CREATING 
PAMPHLETS  AND  POSTERS . 3-32 

•  CREATING  A  PAMPHLET 

(Pamphlet/Pamphlet  Staple) . 3-32 

•  INCREASING  THE  MARGIN  (Margin  Shift)  ■… 3-34 

•  CREATING  A  LARGE  POSTER  (Poster 

Printing) . 3-35 

FUNCTIONS  TO  ADJUST  THE  SIZE  AND 
ORIENTATION  OF  THE  IMAGE . 3-36 

•  ROTATING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  180 

DEGREES  (Rotate  180  degrees) . 3-36 

•  ENLARGING/REDUCING  THE  PRINT 

IMAGE  (Zoom/XY-Zoom) . 3-37 

•  ADJUSTING  LINE  WIDTHS  WHEN 

PRINTING  (Line  Width  Settings) . 3-38 

•  REVERSING  THE  IMAGE  (Mirror  Image)  .  .  .  .  3-39 

IMAGE  ADJUSTMENT  FUNCTION . 3-40 

•  ADJUSTING  THE  BRIGHTNESS  AND 

CONTRAST  OF  THE  IMAGE  (Image 
Adjustment) . 3-40 

•  PRINTING  FAINT  TEXT  AND  LINES  IN 

BLACK  (Text  To  Black/Vector  To  Black) . 3-41 

FUNCTIONS  THAT  COMBINE  TEXT  AND 
IMAGES . 3-42 

•  ADDING  A  WATERMARK  TO  PRINTED 

PAGES  (Watermark) . 3-42 

•  PRINTING  AN  IMAGE  OVER  THE  PRINT 

DATA  (Image  Stamp) . 3-43 

•  CREATING  OVERLAYS  FOR  PRINT 

DATA  (Overlays) . 3-44 


3-1 


PRINTER 


PRINT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  SPECIAL 

PURPOSES . 3-45 

•  PRINTING  SPECIFIED  PAGES  ON 

DIFFERENT  PAPER  (Different  Paper) . 3-45 

•  ADDING  INSERTS  WHEN  PRINTING  ON 
TRANSPARENCY  FILM  (Transparency 

Inserts) . 3-47 

•  PRINTING  A  CARBON  COPY  (Carbon 

Copy) . 3-48 

•  PRINTING  TEXT  ON  TABS  OF  TAB 
PAPER  (Tab  Paper  Print/Tab  Paper 

Settings) . 3-49 

•TWO-SIDED  PRINTING  WITH  SPECIFIC 
PAGES  PRINTED  ON  THE  FRONT  SIDE 
(Chapter  Inserts) . 3-52 

•  FOLDING  PRINTED  PAPER  IN  HALF 

(Fold) . 3-53 

CONVENIENT  PRINTER  FUNCTIONS . 3-54 

•  USING  TWO  MACHINES  TO  PRINT  A 

LARGE  PRINT  JOB  (Tandem  Print) . 3-54 

•  SAVING  AND  USING  PRINT  FILES 

(Retention/Document  Filing) . 3-55 


PRINTING  WITHOUT  THE  PRINTER 
DRIVER 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  FROM  THE  MACHINE _ 3-57 

•  DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  ON  AN  FTP 

SERVER . 3-58 

•  DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  IN  USB 

MEMORY . 3-59 

•  DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  IN  A 

NETWORK  FOLDER . 3-61 

DIRECTLY  PRINTING  FROM  A  COMPUTER  ....  3-64 

•SUBMIT  PRINT  JOB . 3-64 

•  FTP  PRINT . 3-64 


CHECKING  THE  PRINT  STATUS 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN . 3-66 

•  SPOOL  SCREEN/JOB  QUEUE 

SCREEN/COMPLETED  JOB  SCREEN . 3-67 

PRINTING  AN  ENCRYPTED  PDF  FILE . 3-69 

GIVING  A  PRINT  JOB 

PRIORITY/CANCELING  A  PRINT  JOB . 3-70 

•  GIVING  A  PRINT  JOB  PRIORITY . 3-70 

•  CANCELING  A  PRINT  JOB . 3-71 

CHANGING  TO  ANOTHER  PAPER  SIZE  AND 
PRINTING  WHEN  PAPER  RUNS  OUT . 3-72 


APPENDIX 


PRINTER  DRIVER  SPECIFICATION  LIST . 3-73 


•  E-MAIL  PRINT . 3-65 


3-2 


PRINTER 


PRINTER  FUNCTION  OF  THE  MACHINE 

The  machine  is  equipped  standard  with  a  printing  function.  To  enable  printing  from  your  computer,  a  printer  driver  must 
be  installed. 


See  the  table  below  to  determine  which  printer  driver  to  use  in  your  environment. 


Environment 

Printer  driver  type 

Remarks 

Windows 

PCL6,  PCL5e 

The  machine  supports  the  Hewlett-Packard  PCL6  and  PCL5e  printer 
control  languages.  It  is  recommended  that  you  use  the  PCL6  printer 
driver.  If  you  have  a  problem  printing  from  older  software  using  the  PCL6 
printer  driver,  use  the  PCL5e  printer  driver. 

Can  be  used  in  the 

standard  machine 
configuration. 

PS 

This  printer  driver  supports  the  PostScript  3  page  description  language 
developed  by  Adobe  Systems  Incorporated,  and  enables  the  machine  to 
be  used  as  a  PostScript  3  compatible  printer. 

(A  PPD  file  is  available  if  it  is  desired  to  use  the  Windows  standard  PS 
printer  driver.) 

The  PS3  expansion  kit 
must  be  installed. 

Macintosh 

Installing  the  printer  driver  in  a  Windows  environment 

To  install  the  printer  driver  and  configure  settings  in  a  Windows  environment,  see  "2.  SETUP  IN  A  WINDOWS 
ENVIRONMENT"  in  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 


The  explanations  in  this  manual  of  printing  in  a  Windows  environment  generally  use  the  screens  of  the  PCL6  printer  driver. 
The  printer  driver  screens  may  differ  slightly  depending  on  the  printer  driver  that  you  are  using. 


Installing  the  printer  driver  in  a  Macintosh  environment 

In  a  Macintosh  environment,  the  PS3  expansion  kit  must  be  installed  to  use  the  machine  as  a  network  printer. 

To  install  the  printer  driver  and  configure  settings  in  a  Macintosh  environment,  see  "3.  SETUP  IN  A  MACINTOSH 
ENVIRONMENT"  in  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 


3-3 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  FROM  WINDOWS 


BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE 

The  following  example  explains  how  to  print  a  document  from  "WordPad", which  is  a  standard  accessory  program  in 
Windows. 


Document  -  WordPad 

|  File]  Edit  View  Insert 

Format  卜 

New... 

Ctrl+N  . 

Open... 

Ctrl+O 

Save 

Ctrl+S 

Save  As … 

2 

Print... 

Ctrl+P 

rrmi  rreview... 

Page  Setup … 

Recent  File 

Send... 

Exit 

% 

Western 


T 


▼  b  /  u  濟 [F|i 

•  i  •  •  •  4  •  •  •  i  •  •  •  f 


Select  [Print]  from  the  [File]  menu  of 
WordPad. 


The  menu  used  to  execute  printing  may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


Open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window. 

(1)  Select  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine. 

•  If  the  printer  drivers  appear  as  icons,  click  the  icon 
of  the  printer  driver  to  be  used. 

•  If  the  printer  drivers  appear  as  a  list,  select  the 
name  of  the  printer  driver  to  be  used  from  the  list. 

(2)  Click  the  [Preferences]  button. 

•  If  you  are  using  Windows  2000,  the  [Preferences] 
button  does  not  appear.  Click  a  tab  on  the  "Print" 
dialog  box  to  adjust  the  settings  on  that  tab. 

•  In  Windows  98/Me/NT  4.0,  click  the  [Properties] 
button. 


⑴  (2) 


The  button  that  is  used  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties  window  (usually  [Properties]  or  [Printing  Preferences]) 
may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


3-4 


Contents 


PRINTER 


(2) 


⑴ 


⑶ 


Select  print  settings. 

(1)  Click  the  [Paper]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  paper  size. 

To  select  settings  on  other  tabs,  click  the  desired  tab 
and  then  select  the  settings. 

(3)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


•  Make  sure  the  paper  size  is  the  same  as  the  paper  size  set  in  the  software  application. 

•  Up  to  eight  custom  paper  sizes  can  be  stored.  Storing  a  custom  paper  size  makes  it  easy  to  specify  that  size  each 
time  you  need  to  use  it. 

To  store  a  paper  size,  select  [Custom  Paper]  or  one  of  [Userl]  to  [User7]  from  the  pull-down  menu  and  click  the 
[Custom]  button. 


)n  C  Current  Page 
145535 

■a  single  page  number  or  a  single 
:. For  example,  5-12 


Number  of  copies: 


M 


0  Collate 


Click  the  [Print]  button. 

Printing  begins. 

In  Windows  98/Me/NT  4.0,  click  the  [OK]  button. 


Cancel  |  |  Apply 


Contents 


3-5 


PRINTER 


SELECTING  THE  PAPER 

This  section  explains  how  to  configure  the  "Paper  Selection"  setting  on  the  [Paper]  tab  of 
the  printer  driver  properties  window. 

Before  printing,  check  the  paper  sizes,  paper  types,  and  paper  remaining  in  the  machine's 
trays.  To  view  the  most  recent  tray  information,  click  the  [Tray  Status]  button. 


Paper  Selection 

Paper  Source: 

Auto  Select 

▼ 

Paper  Type: 

Auto  Select 

Tray  Status... 

•  When  [Auto  Select]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Source" 

The  tray  that  has  the  size  and  type  of  paper  selected  in  "Paper  Size"  and  "Paper  Type"  on  the  [Paper]  tab  is 
automatically  selected. 

•  When  other  than  [Auto  Select]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Source" 

The  specified  tray  is  used  for  printing  regardless  of  the  "Paper  Size"  setting. 

When  [Bypass  Tray]  is  selected 

The  "Paper  Type"  must  also  be  selected.  Check  the  bypass  tray  and  make  sure  that  the  desired  type  of  paper  is 
loaded,  and  then  select  the  appropriate  "Paper  Type"  setting. 


•  Special  media  such  as  envelopes  can  also  be  placed  in  the  bypass  tray.  For  the  procedure  for  loading  paper  and  other 
\^)  media  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY11  (page  1 -34)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE 

MACHINE11. 

•  When  "Enable  Detected  Paper  Size  in  Bypass  T ray 11  (disabled  by  factory  default)  or  "Enable  Selected  Paper  Type  in 
Bypass  T ray 11  (enabled  by  factory  default)  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  printing  will  not  take  place  if  the 
paper  size  or  paper  type  specified  in  the  printer  driver  is  different  from  the  paper  size  or  paper  type  specified  in  the  settings 
of  the  bypass  tray. 


•  When  [Auto  Select]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Type" 

A  tray  with  plain  paper  or  recycled  paper  of  the  size  specified  in  "Paper  Size"  is  automatically  selected.  (The  factory 
default  setting  is  plain  paper  only.) 

•  When  other  than  [Auto  Select]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Type" 

A  tray  with  the  specified  type  of  paper  and  the  size  specified  in  "Paper  Size"  is  used  for  printing. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Exclude  Bypass-Tray  from  Auto  Paper  Select 

When  [Auto  Select]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Selection",  specify  whether  or  not  the  paper  in  the  bypass  tray  will  be  excluded  from 
the  paper  that  can  be  selected.  This  setting  is  disabled  by  factory  default,  and  thus  paper  in  the  bypass  tray  is  included  in  the 
paper  that  can  be  automatically  selected.  If  special  media  are  frequently  loaded  in  the  bypass  tray,  it  is  recommended  that 
this  setting  be  enabled. 


3-6 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  ON  ENVELOPES 

The  bypass  tray  can  be  used  to  print  on  special  media  such  as  envelopes.  The  procedure  for  printing  on  an  envelope 
from  the  printer  driver  properties  screen  is  described  below. 

For  the  types  of  paper  that  can  be  used  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "IMPORTANT  POINTS  ABOUT  PAPER"  (page  1-27)  in 
"BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE11.  For  the  procedure  for  loading  paper  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "LOADING  PAPER  IN 
THE  BYPASS  TRAY"  (page  1-34)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 

Select  the  envelope  size  in  the  appropriate  settings  of  the  application  ("Page  Settings"  in  many  applications)  and  then 
perform  the  following  steps. 


⑴  (2)  (3) 


(4) 


(1)  Click  the  [Paper]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  envelope  size  from  the  "Paper 
Size"  menu. 

(3)  Select  [Bypass  Tray]  from  the  "Paper 
Source"  menu  of  "Paper  Selection". 

(4)  Select  [Envelope]  from  the  "Paper  Type" 
menu. 

Set  the  paper  type  of  the  bypass  tray  to  [Envelope]  and 
make  sure  the  envelope  is  loaded  in  the  bypass  tray. 


•  It  is  recommended  that  you  do  a  test  print  to  check  the  print  result  before  using  an  envelope. 

•  In  the  case  of  media  that  can  only  be  loaded  in  a  certain  orientation  such  as  an  envelope,  you  can  rotate  the  image  180 
degrees  if  needed.  For  more  information,  see  "ROTATING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  180  DEGREES  (Rotate  180  degrees)11 
(page  3-36). 

•  For  more  information  on  "Paper  Selection",  see  "SELECTING  THE  PAPER"  (page  3-6). 


3-7 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER 
AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED 

When  the  user  authentication  function  is  enabled  in  the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator),  your  user  information 
(login  name,  password,  etc.)  must  be  entered  in  the  printer  driver  properties  window  before  you  can  print.  The 
information  that  must  be  entered  varies  depending  on  the  authentication  method  being  used, so  check  with  the 
administrator  of  the  machine  before  printing. 


⑴ 


(2) 


Open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window  from  the  print  window  of  the 
software  application. 

(1)  Select  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine. 

(2)  Click  the  [Preferences]  button. 


The  button  that  is  used  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties  window  (usually  [Properties]  or  [Printing  Preferences]) 
may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


3-8 


Contents 


PRINTER 


⑴ (2) 


Enter  your  login  name  and  password. 

(1)  Click  the  [Job  Handling]  tab. 

(2)  Enter  your  user  information. 

•  When  authentication  is  by  login  name/password 

Select  the  [Login  Name]  and  [Password] 
checkboxes  so  that  checkmarks  appear,  and 
enter  your  login  name  and  password.  Enter  1  to  32 
characters  for  the  password. 

•  When  authentication  is  by  user  number 

Click  the  [User  Number]  checkbox  and  enter  a 
user  number  (5  to  8  digits). 

(3)  Enter  the  user  name  and  job  name  as 
necessary. 

•  User  Name 

Click  the  [User  Name]  checkbox  and  enter  your 
user  name  (maximum  of  32  characters).  Your 
entered  user  name  will  appear  at  the  top  of  the 
operation  panel.  If  you  do  not  enter  a  user  name, 
your  computer  login  name  will  appear. 

•  Job  Name 

Click  the  [Job  Name]  checkbox  and  enter  a  job 
name  (maximum  of  30  characters).  The  entered  job 
name  will  appear  at  the  top  of  the  operation  panel 
as  a  file  name.  If  you  do  not  enter  a  job  name,  the 
file  name  set  in  the  software  application  will  appear. 

(4)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


To  have  a  confirmation  window  appear  before  printing  starts,  select  the  [Auto  Job  Control  Review]  checkbox  so  that  a 
checkmark  appears. 


Number  of  copies: 1 

)n  01  Current  Page 

1-65535  [7]  Collate 

■a  single  page  number  or  a  single 
:. For  example,  5-12 


Start  printing. 


Cancel  |  |  Apply 


•  Even  when  user  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  normally  printing  is  possible  without 
entering  user  information.  The  number  of  pages  printed  is  added  to  the  "Other  User"  count.  In  this  case,  other  print 
functions  may  be  restricted.  For  more  information,  ask  your  administrator. 

•  The  machine's  user  authentication  function  cannot  be  used  when  the  PPD  file*  is  installed  and  the  Windows  standard  PS 
printer  driver  is  used.  For  this  reason,  printing  will  not  be  possible  if  printing  by  invalid  users  is  prohibited  in  the  system 
settings  (administrator). 

*  The  PPD  file  enables  the  machine  to  print  using  the  standard  PS  printer  driver  of  the  operating  system. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disabling  of  Printing  by  Invalid  User 

This  is  used  to  prohibit  printing  of  print  jobs  by  users  whose  user  information  is  not  stored  in  the  machine.  When  this  function 
is  enabled,  printing  is  not  allowed  when  user  information  is  not  entered  or  incorrect  information  is  entered. 


Contents 


3-9 


PRINTER 


VIEWING  PRINTER  DRIVER  HELP 

When  selecting  settings  in  the  printer  driver,  you  can  display  Help  to  view  explanations  of  the  settings. 


⑴ 


(2) 


Open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window  from  the  print  window  of  the 
software  application. 

(1)  Select  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine. 

(2)  Click  the  [Preferences]  button. 


The  button  that  is  used  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties  window  (usually  [Properties]  or  [Printing  Preferences]) 
にク  may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


Click  the  [Help]  button. 

The  Help  window  will  open  to  let  you  view  explanations  of 
the  settings  on  the  tab. 

To  view  Help  for  settings  in  a  dialog  box,  click  the 
underlined  text  at  the  top  of  the  Help  window. 


Pop-up  help 

Help  can  be  displayed  for  a  setting  by  clicking  the  setting  and  pressing  the  [FI]  key. 

*  To  view  Help  for  a  setting  in  Windows  98/Me/NT  4 . 0/2000/X P/Se rve r  2003,  click  the  Q  button  in  the  upper  right-hand 
corner  of  the  printer  driver  properties  window  and  then  click  the  setting. 

You  can  also  view  the  same  Help  by  right-clicking  the  setting  and  clicking  the  [Help]  box  that  appears. 


Information  icon 

Some  restrictions  exist  on  the  combinations  of  settings  that  can  be  selected  in  the  printer  driver  properties  window. 
When  a  restriction  exists  on  a  selected  setting,  an  information  icon  ((|/*)  will  appear  next  to  the  setting.  Click  the  icon  to 
view  an  explanation  of  the  restriction. 


3-10 


Contents 


PRINTER 


SAVING  FREQUENTLY  USED  PRINT 
SETTINGS 

Settings  configured  on  each  of  the  tabs  at  the  time  of  printing  can  be  saved  as  user  settings.  Saving  frequently  used 
settings  or  complex  settings  under  an  assigned  name  makes  it  easy  to  select  those  settings  the  next  time  you  need  to 
use  them. 

SAVING  SETTINGS  AT  THE  TIME  OF  PRINTING 

Settings  can  be  saved  from  any  tab  of  the  printer  driver  properties  window.  Settings  configured  on  each  tab  are  listed  at 
the  time  of  saving,  allowing  you  to  check  the  settings  as  you  save  them. 


Open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window  from  the  print  window  of  the 
software  application. 

(1)  Select  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine. 

(2)  Click  the  [Preferences]  button. 


⑴ 


(2) 


The  button  that  is  used  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties  window  (usually  [Properties]  or  [Printing  Preferences]) 
may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


每  Printing  Preferences 


(1)  (2) 


Save  the  print  settings. 

(1)  Configure  print  settings  on  each  tab. 

(2)  Click  the  [Save]  button. 


3-11 


Contents 


PRINTER 


(i) 


User  Settings 


G 


Setting  Name: 
Userl 


Current  Settings: 


Main 

Copies 

Document  Style 
N-Up  Printing 
N-Up  Border 
N-Up  Order 
Binding  Edge 
Staple 
Punch 
No  Offset 
Margin  Shift 
Image  Orientation 
Rotate  180  degrees 

Paper 
Paper  Size 
Zoom  Settings 
Poster  Printing 
Dash  Border 
Overlap 


Check  and  save  the  settings. 

(1)  Check  the  displayed  settings. 

(2)  Enter  a  name  for  the  settings  (maximum 
of  20  characters). 

(3)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


Image  Orientation 
Portrait 

C1  Landscape 
B  Rotate  180  degrees 


OK  |  Cancel  ]  |  Help  j 


Click  the  [OK]  button. 


)n  Current  Page 


1-65535 

■a  single  page  number  or  a  single 
:. For  example.  E-1 2 


Number  of  copies: 1 

0  Collate 


Cancel  |  |  Apply 


Start  printing. 


Up  to  30  sets  of  user  settings  can  be  saved. 

The  following  items  cannot  be  saved  in  user  settings. 

- A  watermark  that  you  created 
- Paper  insertion  settings 
-  Overlay  file 

- [Tab  Paper  Print]  settings  on  the  [Special  Modes]  tab  (PCL6  only) 

- The  login  name,  password,  user  name,  and  job  name  entered  in  the  [Job  Handling]  tab 


Contents 


1 1-sid f  S  l Lefl r s  1 1  s Lette J r s  I 


Hi 


3-12 


PRINTER 


USING  SAVED  SETTINGS 


⑴  (2) 


Open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window  from  the  print  window  of  the 
software  application. 

(1)  Select  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine. 

(2)  Click  the  [Preferences]  button. 


The  button  that  is  used  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties  window  (usually  [Properties]  or  [Printing  Preferences]) 
may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


(1) 


Select  the  print  settings. 

(1)  Select  the  user  settings  that  you  wish  to 
use. 

(2)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


■a  single  page  number  or  a  single 
:. For  example,  5-12: 


1 

1 

Print 

Cancel  |  丨  Apply 

Start  printing. 


Deleting  saved  settings 

Select  the  user  settings  that  you  want  to  delete  in  (1)  of  step  2  above,  and  click  the  [Delete]  button. 


3-13 


Contents 


PRINTER 


CHANGING  THE  PRINTER  DRIVER 
DEFAULT  SETTINGS 

The  default  settings  of  the  printer  driver  can  be  changed  using  the  procedure  below.  The  settings  selected  using  this 
procedure  are  saved  and  become  the  default  settings  when  printing  from  a  software  application.  (Settings  selected  in 
the  printer  driver  properties  window  when  printing  from  an  application  remain  in  effect  only  while  the  application  is  in 
use.) 


Click  the  [Start]  button  (n)  and  select  [Control  Panel]  and  then  [Printer]. 

•  In  Windows  XP/Server  2003,  click  the  [start]  button  and  then  click  [Printers  and  Faxes]. 

•  In  Windows  98/Me/NT  4.0/2000,  click  the  [Start]  button,  point  to  [Settings],  and  then  select  [Printers]. 


In  Windows  XP,  if  [Printers  and  Faxes]  does  not  appear  in  the  [start]  menu,  select  [Control  Panel],  select  [Printers  and 
Other  Hardware],  and  then  select  [Printers  and  Faxes]. 


(2)  (1) 


倫 一, 


Cut 

Copy 

Paste 

Undo 

Redo 


Status 


Select  All 
|H|  し  ay  out 

Folder  and  Search  Options 


Delete 

Rename 


Properties. 


Close 


⑶ 


Open  the  printer  properties  window. 

(1)  Click  the  icon  of  the  printer  driver  of  the 
machine. 

(2)  Click  the  [Organize]  menu. 

In  Windows  98/Me/NT  4.0/2000/XP/Server  200 3,  click 
the  [File]  menu. 

(3)  Select  [Properties], 

In  Windows  NT  4.0,  select  [Document  Defaults]  from 
the  [File]  menu  to  open  the  printer  driver  properties 
window.  Go  to  step  4. 


General  [ Sharing  丄  Ports  ]  Advanced  I  Color  Management^  Security  ]  Lontiauration^ 


SHARP  MX-xxxx 


Location: 

Comment: 


Model:  SHARP  MX-xxxx 


Features 

|  Paper  available: 
Custom  Paper 


I  Printina  Preferences...  1 1  Pnrrt  Test  Paae  I 


Click  the  [Printing  Preferences]  button 
on  the  [General]  tab. 

In  Windows  98/Me,  click  the  [Setup]  tab. 


3-14 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Configure  the  settings  and  click  the 
[OK]  button. 

For  explanations  of  the  settings,  see  printer  driver  Help. 


Contents 


3-15 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  FROM  A  MACINTOSH 


BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE 


The  following  example  explains  how  to  print  a  document  from  the  standard  accessory  program  "TextEdit"  in  Mac  OS  X 
("SimpleText"  in  Mac  OS  9). 


To  use  the  machine  as  a  printer  for  the  Macintosh,  the  PS3  expansion  kit  must  be  installed  in  the  machine  and  the  machine 
must  be  connected  to  a  network.  To  install  the  PPD  file  and  configure  printer  driver  settings,  see  "3.  SETUP  IN  A 
MACINTOSH  ENVIRONMENT11  in  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 


SELECTING  PAPER  SETTINGS 


Select  paper  settings  in  the  printer  driver  before  selecting  the  print  command. 


Fffe 


Edit 


Format  Windc 


New 

Open... 

其〇 

Open  Recent 

► 

Close 

謂 

Save 

Save  As  ■■■ 

Save  All 

Revert  to  Saved 

Show  Properties 

Page  Setup … 

⑽ p 

tb  im … 

dbr 

Select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File] 
menu  of  TextEdit. 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu  of 
SimpleText. 


(1) 


Paper  Size 


Page  Attributes 

T) 

I  SCxxxxxx 

^1 

SHARP  MX-xxxx  PPD 

US  Letter 

T' 

8.50  in  x  11.00  in 

關 _ 匠 

100% 

⑦ 


i  Cancel  OK 


Select  paper  settings. 

(1)  Make  sure  that  the  correct  printer  is 
selected. 

(2)  Select  paper  settings. 

The  paper  size,  paper  orientation,  and  enlarge/reduce 
can  be  selected. 

(3)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


The  machine  name  that  appears  in  the  "Format  for"  menu  is  normally  [SCxxxxxx].  ("xxxxxx"  is  a  sequence  of 
characters  that  varies  depending  on  your  machine  model.) 


3-16 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING 


a  Edit  Format 

Windc 

New 

Open... 

筅〇 

Open  Recent 

► 

Close 

其 W 

Save 

Save  As... 

Save  All 

Revert  to  Saved 

Show  Properties 

Paae  Setuo 

O 拭 P 

Prints. 

詫 p 

Select  [Print]  from  the  [File]  menu  of 
TextEdit. 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Print]  from  the  [File]  menu  of 
SimpleText. 


The  menu  used  to  execute  printing  may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


Printer  ■  Slxxxxxx 
Presets:  Standard 


Copies  &  Pages 


Copies: 1  ^Collated 

Pages:  ©All 

◦  From: 1  to: 1 


⑦ ( PDF, 〉 r Preview  ) 


( Cancel  J  ^  Print  ) 


Make  sure  that  the  correct  printer  is 
selected. 


The  machine  name  that  appears  in  the  "Printer"  menu  is  normally  [SCxxxxxx].  ("xxxxxx"  is  a  sequence  of  characters 
that  varies  depending  on  the  machine  model.) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 


「  Layout 


Copies 

Pages 


⑦ ( pdft  )  (Tt 


out 
Scheduler 
Paper  Handling 
ColorSync 
Cover  Page 
Error  Handling 
Paper  Feed 
Job  Handling 
Watermarks 


Cancel  •  (  Print  ) 


Select  print  settings. 

•  In  Mac  OS  X,  dick  丄  next  to  [Copies  &  Pages]  and 
select  the  settings  that  you  wish  to  configure  from  the 
pull-down  menu.  The  corresponding  setting  screen  will 
appear.  If  the  settings  do  not  appear  in  Mac  OS  X  v10.5 
to  10.5.5,  click  "Q"  next  to  the  printer  name. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  click  拿  I  next  to  [General]  and  select  the 
settings  that  you  wish  to  configure  from  the  pull-down 
menu.  The  corresponding  setting  screen  will  appear. 


3-17 


Contents 


〕 


PRINTER 


Presets:  Standard 


Copies  &  Pages 


Copies: 1  0  Collated 

Pages:  ©All  _ 

O  From: 1  to: 


⑦ ( PDFv  )  (  Preview  ) 


、'  Cane  ^Ll  (  prin 卜^ 


Click  the  [Print]  button. 

Printing  begins. 


3-18 


Contents 


PRINTER 


SELECTING  THE  PAPER 

This  section  explains  the  [Paper  Feed]  settings  ("Paper  Source"  setting  in  [General]  in  Mac  OS  9)  in  the  print  settings 
window. 

•  When  [Auto  Select]  is  selected 

A  tray  with  plain  paper  or  recycled  paper  (the  factory  default  setting  is  plain  paper  only)  of  the  size  specified  in  "Paper 
Size"  in  the  page  settings  window  is  automatically  selected. 

•  When  a  paper  tray  is  selected 

The  specified  tray  is  used  for  printing  regardless  of  the  "Paper  Size"  setting  in  the  page  settings  window. 

For  the  bypass  tray,  a  paper  type  can  also  be  specified.  Make  sure  that  the  paper  type  setting  for  the  bypass  tray  is 
correct  and  that  the  set  type  of  paper  is  actually  loaded  in  the  bypass  tray,  and  then  select  the  appropriate  bypass  tray 
(paper  type). 


•  Special  media  such  as  envelopes  can  also  be  placed  in  the  bypass  tray.  For  the  procedure  for  loading  paper  and  other 
media  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "LOADING  PAPER  IN  THE  BYPASS  TRAY11  (page  1 -34)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE11. 

•  When  "Enable  Detected  Paper  Size  in  Bypass  T ray 11  (disabled  by  factory  default)  or  "Enable  Selected  Paper  Type  in 
Bypass  T ray 11  (enabled  by  factory  default)  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  printing  will  not  take  place  if  the 
paper  size  or  paper  type  specified  in  the  printer  driver  is  different  from  the  paper  size  or  paper  type  specified  in  the  settings 
of  the  bypass  tray. 


•  When  a  paper  type  is  selected 

A  tray  with  the  specified  type  of  paper  and  the  size  specified  in  "Paper  Size"  in  the  page  settings  window  is  used  for 
printing. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Exclude  Bypass-Tray  from  Auto  Paper  Select 

When  [Auto  Select]  is  used  for  printing,  this  setting  determines  whether  or  not  the  paper  in  the  bypass  tray  will  be  excluded 
from  the  paper  that  can  be  selected.  This  setting  is  disabled  by  factory  default,  and  thus  paper  in  the  bypass  tray  is  included 
in  the  paper  that  can  be  automatically  selected.  If  special  media  are  frequently  loaded  in  the  bypass  tray,  it  is  recommended 
that  this  setting  be  enabled. 


3-19 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  ON  ENVELOPES 

The  bypass  tray  can  be  used  to  print  on  special  media  such  as  envelopes.  The  procedure  for  printing  on  an  envelope 
from  the  printer  driver  properties  screen  is  described  below. 

For  the  types  of  paper  that  can  be  used  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "IMPORTANT  POINTS  ABOUT  PAPER"  (page  1-27)  in 
"BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE11.  For  the  procedure  for  loading  paper  in  the  bypass  tray,  see  "LOADING  PAPER  IN 
THE  BYPASS  TRAY"  (page  1-34)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 

Select  the  envelope  size  in  the  appropriate  settings  of  the  application  ("Page  Settings"  in  many  applications)  and  then 
perform  the  following  steps. 


Settings:  Page  Attributes 


Format  for:  SCxxxxxx 


SHARP  MX  XXXX PPD 


Paper  Size  !  #10  Envelope 


4.12  in  x  9-50  in 


Orientation: 


t ど 攸 


⑴ 


Scale: 100  % 


Select  the  paper  size. 

(1)  Select  the  envelope  size  from  the  "Paper 
Size"  menu  on  the  page  setup  screen. 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  the  envelope  size  from  the 
"Paper"  menu  on  the  page  setup  screen. 

(2)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


⑦ 


Cancel 


: 1 


(2) 


In  the  case  of  media  that  can  only  be  loaded  in  a  certain  orientation  such  as  an  envelope,  you  can  rotate  the  image 
180  degrees  if  needed.  For  more  information,  see  "ROTATING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  180  DEGREES  (Rotate  180 
degrees)11  (page  3-36). 


(1) 


Select  the  bypass  tray. 

(1)  Select  [Paper  Feed]  on  the  print  screen. 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [General]. 

(2)  Select  [Bypass  Tray(Envelope)]  from  the 

"All  pages  from"  menu. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Bypass  Tray(Envelope)]  from 
the  "All  pages  from"  menu  of  "Paper  Source". 

•  Set  the  paper  type  of  the  bypass  tray  to  [Envelope] 
and  make  sure  the  envelope  is  loaded  in  the  bypass 
tray. 


For  more  information  on  "Paper  Feed",  see  "SELECTING  THE  PAPER"  (page  3-19). 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER 
AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED 

When  the  user  authentication  function  is  enabled  in  the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator),  you  must  enter  your 
user  information  (login  name,  password,  etc.)  in  order  to  print.  The  information  that  must  be  entered  varies  depending  on 
the  authentication  method  being  used,  so  check  with  the  administrator  of  the  machine  before  printing. 


Fffe 


Edit 


Format  Wirdc 


New 

Open... 

SO 

Open  Recent 

► 

Close 

Save 

Save  As... 

Save  All 

Revert  to  Saved 

Show  Properties 

x 其 p 

Priap  Sftur> 

Print …  詫 P 


Select  [Print]  from  the  application's 
[File]  menu. 


The  menu  used  to  execute  printing  may  vary  depending  on  the  software  application. 


(1) 


Printer:  I  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 


Copies: 

Pages: 


I  ✓  Copies  &  Pages 
Layout 
Scheduler 
Paper  Handling 
' ColorSync 
Cover  Page 
Error  Handling 


⑦ (PDF 


1 


Display  the  job  handling  screen. 

(1)  Make  sure  that  the  machine's  printer 
name  is  selected. 

(2)  Select  [Job  Handling]. 

•  In  Mac  OS  X  v10.5  to 1 0.5.5,  select  [Job  Handling] 
and  then  click  the  [Authentication]  tab  in  the  screen 
that  appears. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [User  Authentication]. 


The  machine  name  that  appears  in  the  "Printer"  menu  is  normally  [SCxxxxxx].  ("xxxxxx"  is  a  sequence  of  characters 
that  varies  depending  on  the  machine  model.) 


3-21 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Printer: 

Presets: 


SCxxxxxx 

T) 

Standard 

3 

Job  Handling 

Start  printing. 

(1)  Enter  your  user  information. 

•  When  authentication  is  by  login  name/password 

Enter  your  login  name  in  "Login  Name"  and  your 
password  in  "Password" (1  to  32  characters). 

•  When  authentication  is  by  user  number 

Enter  your  user  number  (5  to  8  digits)  in  "User 
Number". 

(2)  Enter  the  user  name  and  job  name  as 
necessary. 

•  User  Name 

Enter  your  user  name  (maximum  of  32  characters). 
Your  entered  user  name  will  appear  at  the  top  of  the 
operation  panel.  If  you  do  not  enter  a  user  name, 
your  computer  login  name  will  appear. 

•  Job  Name 

Enter  a  job  name  (maximum  of  30  characters).  The 
entered  job  name  will  appear  at  the  top  of  the 
operation  panel  as  a  file  name.  If  you  do  not  enter  a 
job  name,  the  file  name  set  in  the  software 
application  will  appear. 

(3)  Click  the  [Print]  button. 


In  Mac  OS  X,  you  can  click  the  ^  (lock)  button  after  entering  your  login  name  and  password,  or  user  number,  to 
simplify  operation  the  next  time  you  wish  to  print  based  on  the  same  user  authentication. 


Even  when  user  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  normally  printing  is  possible  without 
entering  user  information.  The  number  of  pages  printed  is  added  to  the  "Other  User"  count.  In  this  case,  other  print  functions 
may  be  restricted.  For  more  information,  ask  your  administrator. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disabling  of  Printing  by  Invalid  User 

This  is  used  to  prohibit  printing  of  print  jobs  by  users  whose  user  information  is  not  stored  in  the  machine.  When  this  function 
is  enabled,  printing  is  not  allowed  when  user  information  is  not  entered  or  incorrect  information  is  entered. 


3-22 


Contents 


PRINTER 


FREQUENTLY  USED  FUNCTIONS 


This  section  explains  frequently  used  functions. 

•  SELECTING  A  PRINT  MODE  SETTING 
•TWO-SIDED  PRINTING  (page  3-25) 

•  FITTING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  TO  THE  PAPER  (page 
3-27) 


•  PRINTING  MULTIPLE  PAGES  ON  ONE  PAGE  (page 
3-28) 

•  STAPLING  OUTPUT/PUNCHING  HOLES  IN 
OUTPUT  (page  3-30) 


The  explanations  assume  that  the  paper  size  and  other  basic  settings  have  already  been  selected.  For  the  basic 
procedure  for  printing  and  the  steps  for  opening  the  printer  driver  properties  window,  see  the  following  section: 
暖  Windows:  BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE  (page  3-4) 

暖  Macintosh:  BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE  (page  3-16) 


In  Windows,  view  printer  driver  Help  for  details  on  printer  driver  settings  for  each  printing  function. 


SELECTING  A  PRINT  MODE  SETTING 

This  section  explains  the  procedure  for  selecting  a  print  mode  setting.  The  "Print  Mode  Settings"  consist  of  the  following 
three  items: 

Normal:  This  mode  is  suitable  for  printing  data  such  as  regular  text  or  a  table. 

Fine:  Select  this  when  you  want  to  print  a  photo  with  greater  clarity  or  print  graphics  with  gradations,  etc. 


Windows 


(This  function  is  not  available  when  using  the  PCL5e  printer  driver.) 


(1)  (2) 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  "Print  Mode". 


3-23 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Macintosh 


(i) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 


Printer  Features 


Feature  Sets:l  Advanced 


□  Toner  Save 

□  No  Offset 

Print  Model  Normal 


_  Document  Control 


(2)  (3) 


13J 


Ti 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  [Advanced]. 

(3)  Select  the  "Print  Mode". 


3-24 


Contents 


PRINTER 


TWO-SIDED  PRINTING 


The  machine  can  print  on  both  sides  of  the  paper.  This  function  is  useful  for  many  purposes,  and  is  particularly 
convenient  when  you  want  to  create  a  simple  pamphlet.  Two-sided  printing  also  helps  conserve  paper. 


Windows 


(i) 

ド 


aper  Advanced  Special  Modes  Job  Handling 


User  Settings: [Untitled 


Save... 

Defaults 

Watermarks 


Finishing 


Binding  Edge: 
[Left 


ONo  Offset 
Margin  Shift: 


(1)  Configure  the  settings  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [2-Sided(Book)]  or  [2-Sided(Tablet)]. 


3-25 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Macintosh 


(i) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 


D 


Pages  per  Sheet: 、上 
Layout  Direction: 


國圓圓 


Border:  None 


〇 Off 

©  Long-edged  binding  ^ 
O  Short-edged  binding  I 


(1)  Select  [Layout]. 

(2)  Select  [Long-edged  binding]  or 
[Short-edged  binding]. 


•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8,  select  the  settings  in 
\^)  [Advanced]. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Output/Document  Style]  and 
then  select  [Flip  on  long  edge]  or  [Flip  on  short 
edge]. 


3-26 


Contents 


PRINTER 


FITTING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  TO  THE  PAPER 

This  function  is  used  to  automatically  enlarge  or  reduce  the  printed  image  to  match  the  size  of  the  paper  loaded  in  the 
machine. 

This  is  convenient  for  such  purposes  as  enlarging  a  letter  or  A4  size  document  to  ledger  or  A3  size  to  make  it  easier  to 
view,  and  to  print  when  the  same  size  of  paper  as  the  document  image  is  not  loaded  in  the  machine. 


The  following  example  explains  how  to  print  a  letter  size  document  on  ledger  size  paper. 


Windows 


(1)  Click  the  [Paper]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  size  of  the  print  image  (for 
example:  Letter). 

(3)  Select  [Fit  To  Paper  Size]. 

(4)  Select  the  actual  paper  size  to  be  used  for 
printing  (for  example:  Ledger). 


Macintosh 


(This  function  can  only  be  used  in  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.4.1 1  and  v10.5  to  10.5.5.) 


(1)  (2) 

Printer:  '  Stxxxxxx 

Presets: こ Standard  t  ' 


I  Paper  Handling 


Page  Order:  ©  Automatic 

0  Normal 
〇  Reverse 

Print:  ©All  Pages 

〇 Odd  numbered  pages 
〇  Even  numbered  pages 

Destination  Paper  Size: 

C  Use  documents  DaDer  siz< 

t _ 

[®  Scale  to  fit  paper  size:  | 

1  Ledger 

一  bcaie  aovTi  omy 

I 

(3) 

■ 

(4) 

(1)  Select  [Paper  Handling]. 

(2)  Check  the  size  of  the  print  image  (for 
example:  Letter). 

To  change  the  print  image  size,  use  the  "Paper  Size" 
menu  that  appears  when  [Page  Setup]  is  selected. 

(3)  Select  [Scale  to  fit  paper  size]. 

(4)  Select  the  actual  paper  size  to  be  used  for 
printing  (for  example:  Ledger). 


3-27 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  MULTIPLE  PAGES  ON  ONE  PAGE 

This  function  can  be  used  to  reduce  the  print  image  and  print  multiple  pages  on  a  single  sheet  of  paper. 

This  is  convenient  when  you  want  to  print  multiple  images  such  as  photos  on  a  single  sheet  of  paper,  and  when  you 
want  to  conserve  paper.  This  function  can  also  be  used  in  combination  with  two-sided  printing  for  maximum 
conservation  of  paper. 

For  example,  when  [2-Up]  (2  pages  per  sheet)  and  [4-Up]  (4  pages  per  sheet)  are  selected,  the  following  print  results  will 
be  obtained,  depending  on  the  order  selected. 


N-Up 

(Pages  per 
sheet) 


Right,  and  Down  Down,  and  Right 


Left,  and  Down 


Down,  and  Left 


4-Up 

(4  pages  per 
sheet) 


12 

34 


13 

24 


21 

43 


31 

42 


•  The  page  orders  for  6-Up,  8-Up,  9-Up,  and  16-Up  are  the  same  as  for  4-Up. 

•  In  a  Windows  environment,  the  page  order  can  be  viewed  in  the  print  image  in  the  printer  driver  properties  window. 
In  a  Macintosh  environment,  the  page  orders  are  displayed  as  selections. 

•  In  a  Macintosh  environment,  the  number  of  pages  that  can  be  printed  on  a  single  sheet  is  2,  4,  6,  9,  or  16. 


3-28 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Windows 


(i) 


厂  Main 


I  Special  Modes  Job  Handling  Watermarks 


User  Settings:!  Untitled 


二 II: 


]匚 


\ 

0 


m 


Copies: 

1 


0  Collate 

Document  Style 
(參 1 -Sided 
C'  2-Sided  (Book) 
©  2-Sided  (Tablet) 

^  Pamphlet  Style 

「Tiled  Pamphlet 


Finishing 
Binding  Edge: 


iLeft 


I  Staple: 

I  None 

I  □  Punch 

□  No  Offset 
Margin  Shift: 


会 


I  N-Up  Printing 

1f2-uP  ▼  | 

Border  | 


|None 


Image  Orientation 
(#•  Portrait 
<£  Landscape 

n  Rotate  180  dearees 


⑵⑶ 


(4) 


Macintosh 


(1)  (2) 


Presets:  Standard 


Pages  per  Sheet 

Layout  Direction 

Border 

2  t! 

J 

Single  Thin  Line  :  | 

Two-Sided: 

0Off 

0 Long-ed 
0  Short-ed 

sd  binding 
ed  binding 

(4)  (3) 


(1)  Configure  the  settings  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  number  of  pages  per  sheet. 

(3)  If  you  wish  to  print  borderlines,  click  the 
[Border]  checkbox  so  that  a  checkmark  j 
appears. 

(4)  Select  the  order  of  the  pages. 


(1)  Select  [Layout]. 

(2)  Select  the  number  of  pages  per  sheet. 

(3)  Select  the  order  of  the  pages. 

(4)  If  you  wish  to  print  borderlines,  select  the 
desired  type  of  borderline. 


Contents 


3-29 


PRINTER 


STAPLING  OUTPUT/PUNCHING  HOLES  IN 
OUTPUT 


Staple  function 

The  staple  function  can  be  used  to  staple  output. 

This  function  saves  considerable  time  when  preparing  handouts  for  a  meeting  or  other  stapled  materials.  The  staple 
function  can  also  be  used  in  combination  with  two-sided  printing  to  create  materials  with  a  more  sophisticated 
appearance. 

Stapling  positions  and  the  number  of  staples  can  be  selected  to  obtain  the  following  stapling  results. 


*  The  staple  orientation  (■■■■■  or  ■■■  ■■)  varies  depending  on  the  size  and  orientation  of  the  paper. 

Punch  function 


The  punch  function  can  be  selected  to  punch  holes  in  printed  output.  Punch  hole  positions  can  be  set  by  selecting  the 
binding  edge. 


Left 


Right 


Top 


o  o 


•  To  use  the  staple  function,  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  required. 

•  To  use  the  punch  function,  a  punch  module  must  be  installed  on  the  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher. 

•  For  the  maximum  number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled,  see  "SPECIFICATIONS"  in  the  Safety  Guide. 

The  maximum  number  of  sheets  that  can  be  stapled  at  once  includes  any  covers  and/or  inserts  that  are  inserted. 

•  The  staple  function  cannot  be  used  in  combination  with  the  offset  function,  which  offsets  the  position  of  each  output  job 
from  the  previous  job. 

•  When  the  finisher  is  disabled  in  the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator),  the  staple  function  and  punch  function 
cannot  be  used. 

•  When  the  staple  function  or  the  punch  function  is  disabled  in  the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator),  stapling  or 
punching  is  not  possible. 

•  For  information  on  the  saddle  stitch  function,  see  "CREATING  A  PAMPHLET  (Pamphlet/Pamphlet  Staple)11  (page  3-32). 


3-30 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Windows 


⑴  (3)  (2) 


(1)  Configure  the  settings  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge". 

(3)  Select  the  staple  function  or  the  punch 
function. 

•  For  the  staple  function,  select  the  number  of  staples  in 
the  "Staple"  menu. 

•  For  the  punch  function,  click  the  [Punch]  checkbox  so 
that  a  checkmark  »  appears. 


Macintosh 


(i) 


Presets:  Standard 


Printer  Features 


Feature  Sets:  Output 


Output:  Finisher  Upper  Tray 


Binding  Edge|  Left 


Staple:  2  Staples 


Punch 


Margin  Shift:  None  _ 
Pamphlet  Style:  Off 


m 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge". 

(3)  Select  the  staple  function  or  the  punch 
function. 

•  For  the  staple  function,  select  the  number  of  staples  in 
the  "Staple"  menu. 

•  For  the  punch  function,  click  the  [Punch]  checkbox  so 
that  a  checkmark  ^  appears. 


•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8,  select  the  settings  in 
[Advanced]. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  the  settings  in 
[Output/Document  Style]. 


3-31 


Contents 


PRINTER 


CONVENIENT  PRINTING  FUNCTIONS 


This  section  explains  convenient  functions  for  specific  printing  objectives. 


•  CONVENIENT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  CREATING 
PAMPHLETS  AND  POSTERS 

•  FUNCTIONS  TO  ADJUST  THE  SIZE  AND 
ORIENTATION  OF  THE  IMAGE  (page  3-36) 

•  IMAGE  ADJUSTMENT  FUNCTION  (page  3-40) 


•  FUNCTIONS  THAT  COMBINE  TEXT  AND  IMAGES 
(page  3-42) 

•  PRINT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  SPECIAL  PURPOSES 
(page  3-45) 

•  CONVENIENT  PRINTER  FUNCTIONS  (page  3-54) 


The  explanations  assume  that  the  paper  size  and  other  basic  settings  have  already  been  selected.  For  the  basic 
procedure  for  printing  and  the  steps  for  opening  the  printer  driver  properties  window,  see  the  following  section: 
暖  Windows:  BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE  (page  3-4) 

隊  Macintosh:  BASIC  PRINTING  PROCEDURE  (page  3-16) 


In  Windows,  view  printer  driver  Help  for  details  on  printer  driver  settings  for  each  printing  function. 


CONVENIENT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  CREATING 
PAMPHLETS  AND  POSTERS 


CREATING  A  PAMPHLET  (Pamphlet/Pamphlet  Staple) 


The  pamphlet  function  prints  on  the  front  and  back  of 
each  sheet  of  paper  so  that  the  sheets  can  be  folded  and 
bound  to  create  a  pamphlet.  This  is  convenient  when 
you  wish  to  compile  printed  output  into  a  pamphlet. 
When  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed  and  saddle 
stitch  printing  and  the  staple  function  are  selected,  the 
output  is  automatically  folded  and  stapled  at  the  center. 
This  allows  you  to  conveniently  use  the  output  as  a 
handout  or  pamphlet  without  the  need  for  any  further 
work. 


Windows 


(1)  Configure  the  settings  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Pamphlet  Style] 

The  pamphlet  printing  method  can  be  selected  from  the 
pull-down  menu. 

(3)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge". 

[2  Staples]  can  be  selected  for  "Staple"  when  a  saddle 
stitch  finisher  is  installed. 


3-32 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Macintosh 


(i) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 


Printer  Features 


Feature  Sets:  Output 


了  I 


了  I 


了, 


Output:  Saddle  Stitch  T ray 
Binding  Edgc|  Left 


Staple  I  2  Staples 


C  Punch 

Margin  Shift:  None 


Pamphlet  Style  I  Tiled  Pamphlet 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge". 

[2  Staples]  can  be  selected  in  the  "Staple"  menu  when  a 
saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed. 

(3)  Select  [Tiled  Pamphlet]  or  [2-Up  Pamphlet], 


•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8,  select  from  the  "2-Side 
Printing"  and  "Binding  Edge"  menus  in  [Advanced]. 
•In  Mac  OS  9,  select  the  settings  in 
[Output/Document  Style]. 


3-33 


Contents 


PRINTER 


INCREASING  THE  MARGIN  (Margin  Shift) 


This  function  is  used  to  shift  the  print  image  to  increase 
the  margin  at  the  left,  right,  or  top  of  the  paper.  This  is 
convenient  when  you  wish  to  staple  or  punch  the  output 
but  the  binding  area  overlaps  the  text.  When  a  finisher  or 
saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  the  staple  function  or 
the  punch  function  can  be  used  with  this  function. 


Windows 


⑴  (2) 


Macintosh 


⑴ 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 


Presets:  Standard 

I  Printer  heatures 
Feature  Sets:  Output 


Output:  Finisher  Upper  Tray 
Binding  Edge!  Left 
Staple:  Off  _ 

□  Punch 

Margin  Shifl  0.4  in.  _ 

Pamphlet  Style:  Off 


⑶ 


m 


(1)  Configure  the  settings  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge". 

(3)  Select  the  "Margin  Shift". 

Select  from  the  "Margin  Shift"  menu.  If  you  wish  to 
configure  another  numeric  setting,  select  the  setting  from 
the  pull-down  menu  and  click  the  [Settings]  button.  Click 
the  ::  button  or  directly  enter  the  number. 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  the  "Binding  Edge" 

(3)  Select  the  "Margin  Shift". 


•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8,  select  from  the  "Binding 
Edge"  and  "Margin  Shift"  menus  in  [Advanced]. 

•In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Advanced]  and  then  select  the 
binding  edge  and  margin  shift  from  the  margin  shift 
menu. 


Contents 


3-34 


PRINTER 


CREATING  A  LARGE  POSTER  (Poster  Printing) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


One  page  of  print  data  can  be  enlarged  and  printed 
using  multiple  sheets  of  paper  (4  sheets  (2x2),  9  sheets 
(3  x  3)  or  16  sheets  (4  x  4)).  The  sheets  can  then  be 
attached  together  to  create  a  large  poster.  To  enable 
precise  alignment  of  the  edges  of  the  sheets  during 
attachment,  borderlines  can  be  printed  and  overlapping 
edges  can  be  created  (overlap  function). 


A 岭 


Windows 


(This  function  can  be  used  when  the  PCL6  or  PS  printer  driver  is  used.) 


(1) 


(1)  Click  the  [Paper]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  [Poster  Printing]  checkbox  [7] 
and  click  the  [Poster  Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  poster  settings. 

Select  the  number  of  sheets  of  paper  to  be  used  from  the 
pull-down  menu.  If  you  wish  to  print  borderlines  and/or 
use  the  overlap  function,  select  the  corresponding 
checkboxes 


3-35 


Contents 


PRINTER 


FUNCTIONS  TO  ADJUST  THE  SIZE  AND 
ORIENTATION  OF  THE  IMAGE 


ROTATING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE  180  DEGREES 
(Rotate  180  degrees) 

This  feature  rotates  the  image  180  degrees  so  that  it  can 
be  printed  correctly  on  paper  that  can  only  be  loaded  in 
one  orientation  (such  as  envelopes  or  paper  with  punch 
holes).  (In  Mac  〇 S  X, a  portrait  image  cannot  be  rotated 
180  degrees.) 


aoav  abcd 


Windows 


⑴  (2) 


(1)  Select  the  setting  on  the  [Main]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  [Rotate  180  degrees]  checkbox 

軋 


Macintosh 


Settings:  Page  Attributes 

Format  for:  SCxxxxxx 

SHARP  MX-xxxx  PPD 

Paper  Size:  US  Letter  t  ' 

8.50  in  x  11.00  in 

Orientation:  “  t  |[T  • 

Scale: 100  96 

3 

⑦ 

Cancel  J(  OK  )| 

(1)  (2) 

(1)  Select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu 
and  click  the  u  button. 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu 
and  select  [PostScript  Options].  Then  select  the  [Flip 
Horizontal]  and  [Flip  Vertical]  checkbox  [v] . 

(2)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


3-36 


Contents 


PRINTER 


ENLARGING/REDUCING  THE  PRINT  IMAGE 
(Zoom/XY-Zoom) 

This  function  is  used  to  enlarge  or  reduce  the  image  to  a 
selected  percentage.  This  allows  you  to  enlarge  a  small 
image  or  add  margins  to  the  paper  by  slightly  reducing 
an  image. 

When  using  the  PS  printer  driver  (Windows),  you  can  set 
the  width  and  length  percentages  separately  to  change 
the  proportions  of  the  image.  (XY-Zoom) 


Windows 


⑴ 


(1)  Click  the  [Paper]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Zoom]  and  click  the  [Settings] 
button. 

The  actual  paper  size  to  be  used  for  printing  can  be 
selected  from  the  pull-down  menu. 

(3)  Select  the  zoom  ratio. 

Directly  enter  a  number  (%)  or  click  the  :  button  to 
change  the  ratio  in  increments  of  1%.  You  can  also  select 
[Upper  し eft]  or  [Center]  for  the  base  point  on  the  paper. 


Macintosh 


⑦ 


Settings: 

Page  Attributes 

レ 

Format  for: 

SCxxxxxx 

SHARP  MX-xxxx  PPD 

Paper  Size: 

US  Letter 

8.50  in  x  11.00  in 


Orientation: 

t  •. 

t 

Scale 

100  96 

(1) 


、 Cancel  y|  (  OK 

(2) 


(1)  Select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu 
and  enter  the  ratio  (%)■ 

In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu 
and  enter  the  ratio  (%). 

(2)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


Contents 


3-37 


PRINTER 


ADJUSTING  LINE  WIDTHS  WHEN  PRINTING 
(Line  Width  Settings) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 

When  lines  in  special  applications  such  as  CAD  cannot 
be  printed  correctly,  this  setting  can  be  used  to  adjust 
line  widths,  such  as  making  overall  line  widths  wider. 

(This  setting  is  only  effective  for  vector  data;  raster  data 
such  as  bitmap  images  cannot  be  adjusted.)  When  the 
data  includes  lines  of  varying  widths,  you  can  also  print 
all  lines  at  the  minimum  width. 


Windows 


(This  function  can  be  used  when  the  PCL6  printer  driver  is  used.) 


⑴ 


Main  ^  Pape  I  Advanced  |)edal  Modes  [  Job  Handling  ]  Watermarks 


;:|  Untitled 

▼]l 

Save...  ]  [  Defaults 

Print  Mode: 

Overlays 

[ Normal 

|  No  Overlay  ▼ 

Graphics  Mode: 

Edit  … 

[Vector 

Bitmap  Compression: 

Font... 

[ Very  High  Quality 

(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Adjust  the  line  width. 

Select  a  number  from  the  pull-down  menu. 


•  The  units  of  line-width  adjustment  can  be  set  to 
\^)  "Fixed  Width11  or  "Ratio11.  Click  the  [Compatibility] 

button  and  select  the  units  from  the  "Line  Width 
Unit"  menu. 

•  To  print  all  lines  in  the  data  at  the  minimum  line 
width,  click  the  [Compatibility]  button  and  select  the 
[Minimum  Line  Width]  checkbox  ( ). 


3-38 


Contents 


PRINTER 


REVERSING  THE  IMAGE  (Mirror  Image) 

The  image  can  be  reversed  to  create  a  mirror  image. 

This  function  can  be  used  to  conveniently  print  a  design 
for  a  woodblock  print  or  other  printing  medium. 


Windows 


(This  function  can  be  used  when  the  PS  printer  driver  is  used.) 


Main  J^Pape 


(1) 

I  .Advanced  |)ec “ 


: ial  Modes  |」j 


Handling  Watermarks 


User  Settings  :|  Untitled 

H[ 

Save...  |  |  Defaults 

inwgg 

へ 

Print  Mode: 

Overiays 

|  Normal 

|  No  Overlay  ▼] 

1 

Minor  Image: 

Edit  … 

|  Vertical 

rosi^cnpi  upiions 
|y]  PS  Error  Information 
0  PS  Pass-Through 


Image  Adjustment... 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Select  a  mirror  image  setting. 

If  you  wish  to  reverse  the  image  horizontally,  select 
[Horizontal].  If  you  wish  to  reverse  the  image  vertically, 
select  [Vertical]. 


Macintosh 


(This  function  can  only  be  used  in  Mac  OS  9.) 


(1) 


LaserWriter  8  Page  Setuj 

L 

1  |  PostScript™  Options 

制 


Visual  Effects: 

□  Flip  Horizontal 

□  Flip  Vertical 

□  Invert  Image 


Image  &Text: 

0  Substitute  Fonts 
0  Smooth  Text 
0  Smooth  Graphics 

□  Precision  Bitmap  Alignment 

□  Unlimited  Downloadable  Fonts 


Cancel  ] 


|_^J 


(1)  Select  [Page  Setup]  from  the  [File]  menu 
and  select  [PostScript  Options]. 

(2)  Select  "Visual  Effects' 

To  reverse  the  image  horizontally,  select  [Flip  Horizontal]. 
To  reverse  the  image  vertically,  select  [Flip  Vertical]. 

(3)  Click  the  [OK]  button. 


3-39 


Contents 


PRINTER 


IMAGE  ADJUSTMENT  FUNCTION 

ADJUSTING  THE  BRIGHTNESS  AND  CONTRAST  OF 
THE  IMAGE  (Image  Adjustment) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 

The  brightness  and  contrast  can  be  adjusted  in  the  print  settings  when  printing  a  photo  or  other  image.  These  settings 
can  be  used  for  simple  corrections  when  you  do  not  have  image  editing  software  installed  on  your  computer. 


Windows 


(This  function  is  not  available  when  using  the  PCL5e  printer  driver.) 


(1) 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Click  the  [Image  Adjustment]  button. 

(3)  Adjust  the  image  settings. 

To  adjust  a  setting,  drag  the  slide  bar  or  click  the 
4  or  卜  button. 


3-40 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  FAINT  TEXT  AND  LINES  IN  BLACK 
(Text  To  Black/Vector  To  Black) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


When  printing  a  color  image,  color  text  and  lines  that  are 
faint  can  be  printed  in  black.  (Raster  data  such  as  bitmap 
images  cannot  be  adjusted.)  This  allows  you  to  bring  out 
color  text  and  lines  that  are  faint  and  difficult  to  see. 

•  [Text  To  Black]  can  be  selected  to  print  all  text  other 
than  white  text  in  black. 

•  [Vector  To  Black]  can  be  selected  to  print  all  vector 
graphics  other  than  white  lines  and  areas  in  black. 


ABCD 

ABCD 

u 

峥 

B 

Windows 


⑴ 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  [Text  To  Black]  checkbox  [7] 
and/or  the  [Vector  To  Black]  checkbox 


3-41 


Contents 


PRINTER 


■  ^ 

Font: 

Helvetica  

G  Outline  Text 
□  On  First  Page  Only 


FUNCTIONS  THAT  COMBINE  TEXT  AND 
IMAGES 

ADDING  A  WATERMARK  TO  PRINTED  PAGES 
(Watermark) 


Faint  shadow-like  text  can  be  added  to  the  background 
of  the  printed  image  as  a  watermark.  The  size,  density, 
and  angle  of  the  watermark  text  can  be  adjusted.  The 
text  can  be  selected  from  a  pre-stored  list,  or  entered  to 
create  an  original  watermark. 


⑴  (2) 


(2)  (1) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 

Presets:  Standard 

(^Watermark 


Text: 

[top  secret  M 

TOP  SECRET 

Size:  48  Angle:  45 


(1)  Click  the  [Watermarks]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  watermark  settings. 

Select  a  stored  water  mark  from  the  pull-down  menu.  You 
can  click  the  [Edit]  button  to  edit  the  font  and  select  other 
detailed  settings. 


If  you  wish  to  create  a  new  watermark... 

Enter  the  text  of  the  watermark  in  the  "Text"  box  and 
click  the  [Add]  button. 


(1)  Select  [Watermarks]. 

(2)  Click  the  [Watermark]  checkbox  and 
configure  watermark  settings. 

Detailed  watermark  settings  can  be  configured  such  as 
selection  of  the  text  and  editing  of  the  font.  Adjust  the  size 
and  angle  of  the  text  by  dragging  the  slide  bar  ' 、 ■ 


In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Watermark]  and  configure  the 
settings. 


三 @ 


Macintosh 


Windows 


s 

nt 

e 

nt 

o 

c 


V. 


2 

3- 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  AN  IMAGE  OVER  THE  PRINT  DATA 
(Image  Stamp) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


A  bitmap  or  JPEG  image  stored  on  your  computer  can 
be  printed  over  the  print  data.  The  size,  position,  and 
angle  of  the  image  can  be  adjusted.  This  feature  can  be 
used  to  "stamp"  the  print  data  with  a  frequently  used 
image  or  an  icon  of  your  own  creation. 


Windows 


(This  function  can  be  used  when  the  PCL6  or  PS  printer  driver  is  used.) 


(1) 


(1)  Click  the  [Watermarks]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  image  stamp  setting. 

If  an  image  stamp  has  already  been  stored,  it  can  be 
selected  from  the  pull-down  menu. 

If  you  have  not  stored  an  image  stamp,  click  the  [Image 
File],  select  the  file  you  wish  to  use  for  the  image  stamp, 
and  click  the  [Add]  button. 


3-43 


Contents 


PRINTER 


CREATING  OVERLAYS  FOR  PRINT  DATA  (Overlays) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


The  print  data  can  be  printed  in  a  previously  created 
overlay.  By  creating  table  rulings  or  a  decorative  frame 
in  an  application  different  from  that  of  the  text  file  and 
registering  the  data  as  an  overlay  file,  an  attractive  print 
result  can  be  easily  obtained  without  the  need  for 
complex  manipulations. 


xxxx 


XXX  1 100 

XXXX  10 150 
XXX  0 120 

XXXX  10  250 


XXXX 


XXX 

1 

100 

xxxx 

10 

150 

XXX 

0 

120 

xxxx 

10 

250 

し aaabbbccc  1-2-3 


■ 

■ 

■ 


Overlay  file 


Windows 


Create  an  overlay  file. 


⑴ 


⑵ 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

Configure  the  printer  driver  settings  from  the  software 
application  that  you  wish  to  use  to  create  the  overlay  file. 

(2)  Click  the  [Edit]  button. 

(3)  Create  an  overlay  file. 

Click  the  [Create  Overlay]  button  and  specify  the  name 
and  folder  to  be  used  for  the  overlay  file  that  you  wish  to 
create.  The  file  will  be  created  when  the  settings  are 
completed  and  printing  is  started. 


•  When  printing  is  started,  a  confirmation  message 
will  appear.  The  overlay  file  will  not  be  created  until 
the  [Yes]  button  is  clicked. 

•To  register  a  previously  existing  overlay  file,  click 
the  [Load  Overlay]  button. 


Printing  with  an  overlay  file 


Main  ]  Pape 


(1) 

|  .Advanced  I 


pecial  Modes  |  Job  Handling  I  Watermarks 


User  Settings: I  Factory  Defaults 


[ Noimal 

▼1 

■ 1  No  Overlay 

H| 

Graphics  Mode: 

Edit  … 

ill 

[Vector 

▼1 

— 

Bitmap  Compression: 

L 

Font  … 

1 

[ Veiy  High  Quality 

▼1 

(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

Configure  the  printer  driver  settings  from  the  application 
from  which  you  wish  to  print  using  the  overlay  file. 

(2)  Select  the  overlay  file. 

A  previously  created  or  stored  overlay  file  can  be  selected 
from  the  pull-down  menu. 


3-44 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINT  FUNCTIONS  FOR  SPECIAL 
PURPOSES 


PRINTING  SPECIFIED  PAGES  ON  DIFFERENT  PAPER 
(Different  Paper) 


•  Using  this  function  in  a  Windows  environment 

The  front  and  back  cover  and  specified  pages  of  a 
document  can  be  printed  on  paper  that  is  different 
from  the  other  pages.  Use  this  function  when  you  wish 
to  print  the  front  and  back  cover  on  heavy  paper, or 
insert  colored  paper  or  a  different  paper  type  at 
specified  pages.  You  can  also  insert  paper  as  an 
insert  without  printing  on  it. 

•  Using  this  function  in  a  Macintosh  environment 

The  front  cover  and  last  page  can  be  printed  using 
paper  that  is  different  from  the  other  pages.  This 
function  can  be  used,  for  example,  when  you  want  to 
print  only  the  front  cover  and  last  page  on  thick  paper. 


ク 


Windows 


(i) 


か  Difrerart  P  併 


Paper  Selection 
Paper  Source: 


I  Bypass  Tray 


Paper  Ty 
I  Plain 


o  Cover  Page 
〇  Last  Page 


Enter  page  numbers  separated  by  commas. 
Enter  page  ranges  separated  by  hyphen. 
For  example  :  3.5-10 
However,  inserts  cannot  be 


[l-Sided 


Information 

Page 


Paper  Type 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Different  Paper]  and  click  the 
[Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  paper  insertion  settings. 

Select  the  insertion  position,  paper  source,  and  printing 
method  from  the  corresponding  menus.  Click  the  [Add] 
button  to  show  the  selected  settings  in  "Information". 
When  you  have  completed  the  settings,  click  the  [Save] 
button  in  "User  Settings"  to  save  the  settings. 


When  [Bypass  T ray]  is  selected  in  "Paper  Source", 
be  sure  to  select  the  "Paper  Type"  and  load  that 
type  of  paper  in  the  bypass  tray. 


•  About  paper  insertion  settings 

When  [Other  Page]  is  selected  for  "Insert  Position", 
the  insert  position  can  be  specified  by  directly 
entering  a  page  number.  However,  inserts  cannot 
be  successively  inserted  at  the  same  page.  When 
"Printing  Method"  is  set  to  [2-Sided],  the  specified 
page  and  the  next  page  after  it  will  be  printed  on  the 
front  and  reverse  side  of  the  paper,  and  thus  an 
insert  setting  at  a  page  printed  on  the  reverse  side 


will  not  be  effective. 


3-45 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Macintosh 


(This  function  can  only  be  used  in  Mac  OS  9,  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.4.1 1  and  v10.5  to 10.5 .5.) 


(1)  (2)(3) 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  [Different  Paper], 

(3)  Select  cover  insertion  settings. 

Select  the  print  setting,  paper  tray,  and  paper  type  for  the 
cover  page  and  last  page. 


In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Different  Paper]  and  then  select 
the  settings  for  the  cover  page  and  last  page. 


3-46 


Contents 


PRINTER 


ADDING  INSERTS  WHEN  PRINTING  ON 
TRANSPARENCY  FILM  (Transparency  Inserts) 


When  printing  on  transparency  film,  this  function  helps 
prevent  the  sheets  of  transparency  film  from  sticking 
together  by  inserting  a  sheet  of  paper  between  each 
sheet  of  film.  It  is  also  possible  to  print  the  same  content 
on  each  inserted  sheet  of  paper  as  is  printed  on  the 
corresponding  sheet  of  transparency  film. 


Windows 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Transparency  Inserts]  and  click  the 
[Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  transparency  insert  settings. 

To  print  the  same  content  on  the  insert  as  is  printed  on 
the  sheet  of  transparency  film,  select  the  [Printed] 
checkbox  .  Select  the  paper  source  and  type  if 
needed. 


Set  [Transparency]  for  the  "Paper  Type"  of  the  bypass 
tray. 


Macintosh 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  [Transparency  Inserts], 

(3)  Select  transparency  insert  settings. 

To  print  the  same  content  on  the  insert  as  is  printed  on  the 
sheet  of  transparency  film,  select  [Print]  in  "Transparency 
Inserts".  Select  the  paper  source  and  type  if  needed. 


•  Set  [Transparency]  for  the  "Paper  Type"  of  the 
bypass  tray. 

•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8,  select  the  [Transparency 
Inserts]  checkbox  ダ  in  [Advanced]. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Transparency  Inserts]  and 
select  from  the  "Transparency  Inserts"  menu.  Select 
the  paper  source  and  type  if  needed. 


3-47 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  A  CARBON  COPY  (Carbon  Copy) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


This  function  is  used  to  print  an  additional  copy  of  the 
print  image  on  paper  that  is  the  same  size  but  from  a 
different  paper  tray. 

For  example,  if  carbon  copy  print  is  selected  when 
standard  paper  is  loaded  in  tray  1  and  colored  paper  is 
loaded  in  tray  2,  a  print  result  similar  to  a  carbon  copy 
slip  can  be  obtained  with  a  single  selection  of  the  print 
command.  As  another  example,  if  standard  paper  is 
loaded  in  tray  1  and  recycled  paper  is  loaded  in  tray  2, 
Carbon  Copy  can  simultaneously  print  one  copy  for 
presentation  and  one  copy  as  a  duplicate. 


Windows 


(i) 


Main  Paper 


|  Advance  I  Special  Modes  job  Handling 


I  Watermarks  | 


User  Settings: |  Untitled 


▼||  Save...  |  ( _ Defaults 一 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Carbon  Copy]  and  click  the 
[Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  the  carbon  copy  settings. 

Select  the  tray  for  the  "Top  Copy"  and  then  select  the  tray 
for  the  carbon  copy  (or  copies)  in  "Carbon  Copy". 


When  the  bypass  tray  is  selected,  be  sure  to  select 
the  "Paper  Type11. 


3-48 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  TEXT  ON  TABS  OF  TAB  PAPER 
(Tab  Paper  Print/Tab  Paper  Settings) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


This  function  is  used  to  print  text  on  the  tabs  of  tab  paper. 

Tab  Paper  Print  (PCL6  only) 

You  can  print  on  each  sheet  of  tab  paper  that  you  insert 
in  the  desired  page  position. 

Text  to  be  printed  on  tabs  can  be  entered  in  [Tab  Paper 
Print]  on  the  [Special  Modes]  tab  of  the  printer  driver 
properties  window,  and  detailed  settings  can  be 
configured  such  as  the  size  of  the  tabs,  the  starting 
position,  the  distance  between  tabs,  and  the  page 
numbers  where  tab  sheets  will  be  inserted. 


Tab  Paper  Settings 

Text  to  be  printed  on  tab  papers  can  be  created  in  a 
software  application,  and  then  [Tab  Paper  Settings]  on 
the  [Advanced]  tab  of  the  printer  driver  properties 
window  can  be  used  to  specify  how  far  the  text  needs  to 
be  shifted  for  tab  printing. 


Original  image  Printed  on  the  tab  paper 


- -1 

3-49 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Windows 


Tab  Paper  Print  (PCL6  only) 

Open  the  data  that  you  wish  to  print  on  the  tab  paper  and  then  select  the  settings. 


(1)  (2) 

Paper  Advance  f  Special  Modes  J  >b  Handling 


User  Settings:!  Untitled 


o 


Watermarks 


Save... 

M 

Defaults 

Special  Option 
if)  Normal 
^ 1  Different  Paper 
^  •  Transparency  Inse 
Carbon  Copy 
(d1  Tab  Paper  Print 
^  Chapter  Inserts 


yt 


Settings... 


i> 


Position  of  the  First  Tab: 

0.24  ^  in.  [0.00 .. 10.00] 


Defaults 


Interval: 
0.24  : 


Tab  Width: 
0.500  t 


Tab  Length: 
2.05  4 - 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Tab  Paper  Print]  and  click  the 
[Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  the  tab  position  settings. 

For  commercially  available  tab  paper,  you  can  use  the 
existing  settings  in  "User  Settings"  such  as  [A4-5tab-D]. 
For  other  types  of  tab  paper,  the  position  of  the  first  tab, 
the  distance  between  tabs,  and  the  horizontal  and  vertical 
dimensions  of  the  tab  can  be  directly  entered  or  changed 
using  the  !  button.  In  addition,  the  size  of  the  tab  paper 
can  be  selected  in  "Paper  Size". 

(4)  Select  the  page  settings. 

Specify  the  pages  where  you  wish  to  insert  tab  paper  and 
enter  the  text  that  you  wish  to  print  on  the  tabs.  You  can 
also  select  the  font  and  adjust  the  layout. 


I  Letter 


□  Use  tab  papers  by  sets 
Text  Settings 
Text  Alignment: 


(Center 

▼1 

1 

Font  … 

Page: 

Text: 

[〇  Rotate  180  degrees 


Information 

Page 


•  Set  [Tab  Paper]  for  the  "Paper  Type"  of  the  bypass 
tray. 

•  The  tab  paper  settings  can  be  stored  and  a  stored 
file  opened  in  "User  Settings". 


3-50 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Tab  Paper  Settings 


When  you  have  finished  preparing  the  data  to  be  printed  on  the  tabs  in  the  software  application,  select  the  following 
settings: 


(4) (1) 


Image  Shift 
Width: 

[0.000 ..  0.62 5] 
0.000 圏  in. 

millimeters 


(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Click  the  [Tab  Paper  Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  the  tab  paper  settings. 

To  shift  the  image,  directly  enter  a  number  or  click  the 
令 |  button. 

(4)  Select  the  paper  source  and  type. 

Click  the  [Paper]  tab,  and  select  [Bypass  Tray]  for  "Paper 
Source"  and  [Tab  Paper]  for  "Paper  Type". 


Set  [Tab  Paper]  for  the  "Paper  Type"  of  the  bypass 
tray. 


Contents 


3-51 


PRINTER 


TWO-SIDED  PRINTING  WITH  SPECIFIC  PAGES  PRINTED 
ON  THE  FRONT  SIDE  (Chapter  Inserts) 

(This  function  is  only  available  in  Windows.) 


You  can  have  specific  pages  printed  on  the  front  side  of 
the  paper. 

When  a  page  (such  as  the  first  page  of  a  chapter)  is 
specified  as  a  front  side  page,  the  page  will  be  printed  on 
the  front  side  of  the  paper  even  if  would  normally  be 
printed  on  the  reverse  side  (the  reverse  side  will  be  left 
blank  and  the  page  will  be  printed  on  the  front  side  of  the 
next  sheet  of  paper). 


Example: 

When  pages  4  and  8  are  specified  as  page  settings. 


1 

2 

Si 

3 

14 

\6 

8 

Back  is  blank 


Windows 


(This  function  can  be  used  when  the  PCL6  printer  driver  is  used.) 


Main  Paper  Advance 


(1) 


>b  Handling  ]  Watermarks 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  [Chapter  Inserts]  and  click  the 
[Settings]  button. 

(3)  Select  the  chapter  settings. 

Enter  the  page  numbers  that  are  to  begin  chapters  in 
"Page  Settings".  Click  the  [Add]  button  and  your  settings 
will  appear  in  "Information".  When  you  have  finished 
selecting  settings,  click  the  [Save]  button  in  "User 
Settings"  to  save  the  settings. 


3-52 


Contents 


PRINTER 


FOLDING  PRINTED  PAPER  IN  HALF  (Fold) 


When  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed,  the  fold 
function  can  be  used  to  fold  printed  output  in  half.  You 
can  select  whether  the  paper  is  folded  with  the  printed 
side  on  the  inside  or  the  outside. 

When  printing  data  that  is  in  a  pamphlet  layout,  the 
"Mult-Sheet  Fold  -  Staple"  function  can  be  used  to 
conveniently  fold  and  staple  the  printed  output  to  create 
a  pamphlet.  The  "Mult-Sheet  Fold  -  Staple"  function  is 
available  in  the  PCL6  printer  driver. 


Half  Fold  -  Inside  Half  Fold  -  Outside  Mult-Sheet  Fold  -  Staple 

(PCL6  only) 


When  two-sided  printing  is  disabled  in  the  machine's 
system  settings  (administrator),  the  paper  folding 
function  cannot  be  used. 


Windows 


(1)  Click  the  [Special  Modes]  tab. 

(2)  Select  "Fold". 

Select  the  desired  folding  method  from  the  pull-down 
menu. 


Macintosh 


(3)  (1)  (2) 


Printer:  SCxxxxxx 
Presets:  Standard 


Feature  Set;l  Paper  Folding  Settings 


(1)  Select  [Printer  Features]. 

(2)  Select  [Paper  Folding  Settings]. 

(3)  Select  the  paper  folding  settings. 


In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Paper  Folding  Settings]  and  then 
select  the  settings. 


3-53 


Contents 


PRINTER 


CONVENIENT  PRINTER  FUNCTIONS 


USING  TWO  MACHINES  TO  PRINT  A  LARGE  PRINT 
JOB  (Tandem  Print) 


Two  machines  are  required  to  use  this  function. 

Tandem  Print  allows  you  to  divide  a  large  print  job 
between  two  machines  connected  to  your  network. 

The  machines  simultaneously  print  each  half  of  the  job, 
making  it  possible  to  shorten  the  printing  time  when 
printing  a  large  number  of  sets. 

To  use  Tandem  Print,  the  IP  address  of  the  slave 
machine  configured  in  "Tandem  Connection  Setting"  in 
the  machine's  system  settings  (administrator)  must  be 
configured  in  the  printer  driver.  In  a  Windows 
environment,  this  can  be  accomplished  automatically  by 
clicking  the  [Auto  Configuration]  button  on  the 
[Configuration]  tab  of  the  printer  driver.  In  a  Macintosh 
environment,  this  can  be  accomplished  automatically  by 
clicking  the  [Tandem  Settings]  button. 


Example:  Printing  4  sets  of  copies 


Windows 


(i) 


|l  pedal  Modes  |  Job  Handling  | 

Watermarks 

:[ Untitled  ▼  || 

Save...  ]  [  Defaults 

Print  Mode: 

Overlays 

|  Normal 

|  No  Overiay  ▼ 

Graphics  Mode: 

, |  Edit  … 

[Vector 

3  - 

Bitmap  Compression: 

、 [  Font  … 

[Very  High  Quality 

3  - 

Image  Adjustment... 

Tab  Paper  Settings... 

Compatibility 

[7]  Tandem  Print  1 
d  ILJ  lexr  io  twacK 

(1)  Click  the  [Advanced]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  [Tandem  Print]  checkbox 


Tandem  Print  function  can  only  be  used  when  the 
printer  driver  is  installed  using  a  "Standard 
installation",  or  a  "Custom  installation"  with  "LPR 
Direct  Print  (Specify  Address/Auto  Search)11  selected. 


Macintosh 


(This  function  can  only  be  used  in  Mac  OS  X.) 
(2)  (1) 


SCxxxxxx 

Standard 

| Tandem  Print  *| 

This  feature  is  available  when  LPD/LPR  or  Socket/HP  Jet  Direct  is  used. 


|  @  Tandem  Print  I  ~ Tandem  Settings. 


(1)  Select  [Tandem  Print], 

(2)  Select  the  [Tandem  Print]  checkbox  M . 


To  use  the  tandem  print  function,  the  protocol  to  be 
used  must  be  selected  in  accordance  with  the 
message  that  appears  in  the  left  screen  when  adding 
the  printer  driver  with  the  "Printer  Setup  Utility"  ("Print 
Center"  in  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.2.8). 


3-54 


Contents 


PRINTER 


SAVING  AND  USING  PRINT  FILES 
(Retention/Document  Filing) 

This  function  is  used  to  store  a  print  job  as  a  file  on  the 
machine's  hard  drive,  allowing  the  job  to  be  printed  from 
the  operation  panel  when  needed.  The  location  for 
storing  a  file  can  be  selected  to  prevent  the  file  from 
being  mixed  together  with  files  of  other  users. 

When  printing  from  a  computer,  a  password  (5  to  8 
digits)  can  be  set  to  maintain  the  secrecy  of  information 
in  a  stored  file. 

When  a  password  is  set,  the  password  must  be  entered 
to  print  a  stored  file  from  the  machine. 


Hold  Only 

This  setting  is  used  to  hold  a  print  job  on  the  machine's  hard  drive  without  printing  it. 

Hold  After  Print 

This  setting  is  used  to  hold  a  print  job  on  the  machine's  hard  drive  after  it  is  printed. 

Sample  Print 

When  a  print  job  is  sent  to  the  machine,  only  the  first  set  of  copies  is  printed.  After  checking  the  contents  of  the  first  set 
of  copies,  you  can  print  the  remaining  sets  from  the  operation  panel  of  the  machine.  This  prevents  the  occurrence  of 
excessive  misprints. 

To  print  files  stored  on  the  machine's  hard  drive,  see  "PRINTING  A  STORED  FILE"  (page  6-31)  in  "6.  DOCUMENT 
FILING". 


ク 


Windows 


(1) (2) 


User  Settings :  |  Untitled  ▼  |  [ 

Save...  ]  [  Defaults 

Main  |  Paper  |  Advanced  |  Special  Mode 


|「 Job  Handlina  十 


®  Retention 
Retention  Settings 
%  Hold  Only 
〇  Hold  /tfter  Print 
〇  Sample  Print 

®  Password 


Document  Filing  Settings 
©  Quick  File 
%  Main  Folder 
0  Custom  Folder 

Stored  to... 


Notify  Job 
0  Auto  Job  ( 


Brmarks 1 


User  Authentication 
〇  10 gin  Name 


□  Password 


〇  User  Number 


〇  Job  Name 


nd 

ntrol  Review 


⑶ 


(1)  Click  the  [Job  Handling]  tab. 

(2)  Select  the  retention  setting. 

Click  the  [Retention]  checkbox  .  Select  the  retention 
method  in  "Retention  Settings".  To  enter  a  password  (5  to 
8  digit  number),  click  the  [Password]  checkbox  0. 

(3)  Select  document  filing  settings. 

Select  the  folder  for  storing  the  file  in  "Document  Filing 
Settings".  If  you  selected  [Custom  Folder],  click  the 
[Stored  to]  button  to  select  the  folder. 


•  When  [Quick  File]  is  selected,  "Retention  Settings" 
will  be  set  to  [Hold  After  Print]  only. 

•  When  [Quick  File]  is  selected,  the  password  entered 
in  "Retention  Settings"  is  cleared  and  cannot  be  used. 

•  To  store  a  file  in  a  custom  folder,  the  custom  folder 
must  first  be  created  using  "Document  Filing  Control" 
in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  If  a  password 
has  been  established  for  a  custom  folder,  enter  the 
"Folder  Password"  in  the  folder  selection  screen. 

•  In  an  IPV6  environment,  files  can  only  be  stored  in 
the  main  folder. 


3-55 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Macintosh 


(2)  (1) 


⑶ 


(1)  Select  [Job  Handling]. 

(2)  Select  the  retention  setting. 

Click  the  [Retention]  checkbox  .  Select  the  retention 
method  in  "Retention  Settings".  To  simplify  operation  the 
next  time  the  same  password  is  set,  click  the  (lock) 
button  after  entering  the  password  (5  to  8  digit  number). 

(3)  Select  document  filing  settings. 

Select  the  folder  for  storing  the  file  in  "Document  Filing 
Settings".  If  you  selected  [Custom  Folder],  click  the 
[Stored  to]  button  to  select  the  folder. 


/^v  •  When  [Quick  File]  is  selected,  "Retention  Settings" 

will  be  set  to  [Hold  After  Print]  only. 

•  When  [Quick  File]  is  selected,  the  password  entered 
in  "Retention  Settings"  is  cleared  and  cannot  be 
used. 

•  To  store  a  file  in  a  custom  folder,  the  custom  folder 
must  first  be  created  using  "Document  Filing 
Control"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  If  a 
password  has  been  established  for  a  custom  folder, 
enter  the  "Folder  Password"  in  the  folder  selection 
screen. 

•  In  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.5  to 1 0.5.5,  if  you  wish  to  store 
document  filing  settings  in  a  custom  folder,  click  the 
[Custom  Folder]  tab. 

•  In  Mac  OS  9,  select  [Job  Handling]  and  then  select 
the  retention  setting.  (The  document  filing  function 
cannot  be  used.) 


Automatically  print  all  stored  data 

When  user  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  all  retained  (stored)  print  jobs  of  a  user  who 
logs  in  can  be  printed  automatically  after  log  in. 

After  all  jobs  are  printed,  the  files  are  deleted. 

To  use  the  print  all  function,  the  following  steps  are  necessary: 

•  "Automatically  print  stored  jobs  after  login"  must  be  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  of  the  machine. 

•  At  the  time  of  retention  print,  in  addition  to  user  authentication  information,  the  user  name  stored  in  the  machine 
must  be  entered  in  "User  Name"  of  the  job  ID  in  the  printer  driver. 

隊  Windows:  PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER  AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED  (page  3-8) 

暖  Macintosh:  PRINTING  WHEN  THE  USER  AUTHENTICATION  FUNCTION  IS  ENABLED  (page  3-21) 

(1)  Log  into  the  machine. 

Enter  your  user  number  or  login  name  and  password  in  the  user  authentication  screen  of  the  machine. 

(2)  Perform  print  all. 

A  confirmation  prompt  will  appear.  Touch  the  [OK]  key.  The  print  files  stored  in  the  quick  file  folder,  main  folder,  and  custom 
folder  will  be  printed  automatically  and  then  deleted. 


Files  with  a  password  and  files  that  are  protected  by  the  document  filing  function  of  the  machine  will  not  be  printed.  Files  in  a 
folder  (excluding  My  Folder)  that  has  a  password  will  also  not  be  printed. 


@lf  you  do  not  wish  to  "print  all"... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  step  (2). 


3-56 


Contents 


PRINTER 


PRINTING  WITHOUT  THE  PRINTER 
DRIVER 


When  you  do  not  have  the  printer  driver  installed  on  your  computer,  or  when  the  software  application  used  to  open  a  file 
that  you  wish  to  print  is  not  available,  you  can  print  directly  to  the  machine  without  using  the  printer  driver. 

The  file  types  (and  corresponding  extensions)  that  can  be  printed  directly  are  shown  below. 


File  Type 

TIFF 

JPEG 

PCL 

PDF/ 

Encrypted 

PDF 

PS 

XPS 

Extension 

tiff,  tif 

jpeg,  jpg, 
jpe,  jfif 

pel 

pdf 

ps 

xps 

•To  print  PDF  and  PS  files,  the  PS3  expansion  kit  must  be  installed. 

•  To  print  XPS  files,  the  XPS  expansion  kit  must  be  installed. 

•  Depending  on  the  file  type,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  print  some  files  in  the  above  table. 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  FROM  THE  MACHINE 

A  file  on  an  FTP  server,  in  a  network  folder  or  in  a  USB  memory  device  connected  to  the  machine  can  be  selected  and 
printed  from  the  operation  panel  of  the  machine  without  using  the  printer  driver. 


Contents 


3-57 


PRINTER 


Touch  the  key  of  the  FTP  server  that  you 
wish  to  access. 


Server  1 

[File  or  Folder  Name 

4| 

[ g  |  File-01. tiff  ハ 

f  CD  |  FolderOl  ^  ^ 

丄 

1  •  l 

〇  File-02. tiff 

- 1  1 

[  0  |  File-03. tiff 

IS 

[ □  |  Folder02 

( |E)  |  File-04. tiff 

1  L±J 

( File-05. tiff 

Touch  the  key  of  the  file  that  you  wish  to 
print. 

•  The  0  icon  appears  to  the  left  of  keys  of  files  that  can  be 
printed. 

•  The  icon  is  displayed  to  the  left  of  keys  of  folders  on  the 
FTP  server.  To  display  the  files  and  folders  in  a  folder,  touch 
the  key  of  the  folder. 


A  total  of  100  keys  of  files  and  folders  can  be  displayed. 

Touch  the  t  1  key  to  move  up  one  folder  level. 

When  you  move  down  a  folder  level  by  touching  a  folder  key,  the  1 1  key  appears  in  the  top  right  corner  of  the 
screen.  Touch  this  key  to  return  to  the  file  or  folder  name  selection  screen. 

Touch  the  [File  or  Folder  Name]  key  to  change  the  order  of  the  files  and  folders  displayed  on  the  screen.  The  order 
switches  between  ascending  order  and  descending  order  each  time  you  touch  the  key. 


3-58 


Contents 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  ON  AN  FTP  SERVER 

When  an  FTP  server  is  configured  in  the  machine's  Web  pages,  you  can  specify  and  print  a  file  on  the  FTP  server  from 
the  operation  panel  of  the  machine.  This  saves  you  the  trouble  of  downloading  the  file  and  printing  it  from  a  computer. 
For  the  procedure  for  accessing  the  Web  pages,  see  the  Quick  Start  Guide. 


To  configure  FTP  server  settings,  click  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Setting  for  Print  from  the  MFP(FTP)]  in  the  Web  page 
menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.)  Up  to  20  FTP  servers  can  be  configured. 


(1) (2) 


1 

|  €)  CQ£I_ J  IP  imGE  SEND  |@  

H 

External  Data  Access 


Access  the  FTP  server. 

(1)  Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Ex  Data  Access]  tab. 

(3)  Touch  the  [FTP]  key. 

The  [FTP]  key  cannot  be  touched  when  any  FTP  server 
has  not  been  configured. 


It 


1 l> 二 l> ] 一 


PRINTER 


Print  [  Cancel 

File-01. tiff 

Paper  Select 

1  2 -Sided  j 

[ Quick  File  ] 

Number  of  Prints 

(1-999) 

QQ 

1 

- T ― ! 

v/j  'Fit  To  Page 

Print 

—— I —— J 

(1)  (2) 


Print  the  selected  file. 

(1)  Select  print  conditions. 

If  you  selected  a  file  (PCL,  PS,  or  XPS)  in  step  3  that 
includes  print  settings,  the  settings  will  be  applied. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Print]  key. 

Printing  begins.  When  the  message  appears  in  the  touch 
panel,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  you  select  a  PDF  file  that  has  a  password,  you  must  enter  the  password  in  the  job  status  screen  to  begin  printing. 
隊  PRINTING  AN  ENCRYPTED  PDF  FILE  (page  3-69) 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  IN  USB  MEMORY 

A  file  in  a  USB  memory  device  connected  to  the  machine  can  be  printed  from  the  operation  panel  of  the  machine  without 
using  the  printer  driver.  When  the  printer  driver  of  the  machine  is  not  installed  on  your  computer,  you  can  copy  a  file  into 
a  commercially  available  USB  memory  device  and  connect  the  device  to  the  machine  to  print  the  file  directly. 


3-59 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Access  the  USB  memory  device. 

(1)  Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Ex  Data  Access]  tab. 

(3)  Touch  the  [USB  Memory]  key. 


System  Settings(Administrator) :  Disabling  of  USB  Memory  Direct  Print 

This  setting  is  used  to  disable  printing  of  files  in  a  USB  memory. 

When  this  setting  is  enabled,  [USB  Memory]  key  cannot  be  touched. 


Touch  the  key  of  the  file  that  you  wish  to 
print. 

•  The  0  icon  appears  to  the  left  of  keys  of  files  that  can  be 
printed. 

•  The  i  i  icon  is  displayed  to  the  left  of  keys  of  folders  in  the 
USB  memory.  To  display  the  files  and  folders  in  a  folder, 
touch  the  key  of  the  folder. 


•A  total  of  100  keys  of  files  and  folders  can  be  displayed. 

•  Touch  the  t  1  key  to  move  up  one  folder  level. 

•  When  you  move  down  a  folder  level  by  touching  a  folder  key,  the  |  ^  I  key  appears  in  the  top  right  corner  of  the 
screen.  Touch  this  key  to  return  to  the  file  or  folder  name  selection  screen. 

•  Touch  the  [File  or  Folder  Name]  key  to  change  the  order  of  the  files  and  folders  displayed  on  the  screen.  The  order 
switches  between  ascending  order  and  descending  order  each  time  you  touch  the  key. 


Print 

Cancel 

: File-01. tiff 

Paper  Select 

(  2-Sided  J 

Number  of  Prints 

(1-999) 

aa 

1 

T 

ゾ  |  'Fit  To  Page 

f  Quick  File  ] 

Print 

—— I —— j 

(1)  (2) 


Print  the  selected  file. 

(1)  Select  print  conditions. 

If  you  selected  a  file  (PCL,  PS,  or  XPS)  in  step  3  that 
includes  print  settings,  the  settings  will  be  applied. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Print]  key- 

printing  begins  after  the  selected  file  is  transferred.  When 
the  message  appears  in  the  touch  panel,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 


@To  cancel  printing... 

To  cancel  printing  while  the  file  is  being  transferred,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  message  screen  that  appears  in  the 
touch  panel. 


3-60 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Remove  the  USB  memory  device  from 
the  machine. 


When  you  select  a  PDF  file  that  has  a  password,  you  must  enter  the  password  in  the  job  status  screen  to  begin  printing. 
隊  PRINTING  AN  ENCRYPTED  PDF  FILE  (page  3-69) 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  A  FILE  IN  A  NETWORK  FOLDER 

You  can  use  the  machine's  operation  panel  to  select  and  print  a  file  on  a  server  or  in  a  shared  folder  of  an  individual's 
computer  on  the  same  network  as  the  machine. 


Access  the  network. 

(1)  Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Ex  Data  Access]  tab. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Network  Folder]  key. 


System  Settings(Administrator) :  Disabling  of  Network  Folder  Direct  Print 

This  setting  is  used  to  disable  printing  of  files  in  a  network  folder. 

When  this  setting  is  enabled,  [Network  Folder]  key  cannot  be  touched. 


3-61 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Access  the  network  folder. 

(1) Touch  the  key  of  the  workgroup  that  you 
wish  to  access. 


(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  server  or  computer 
that  you  wish  to  access. 

If  a  screen  appears  prompting  you  to  enter  a  user  name 
and  password,  check  with  your  server  administrator  and 
enter  the  appropriate  user  name  and  password. 


(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  network  folder. 


•  You  can  touch  the  [Search]  key  and  enter  a  keyword  to  search  for  a  workgroup,  server,  or  network  folder.  For  the 
procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT11  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 

•  Up  to 100  workgroups, 100  servers,  and  100  network  folders  can  be  displayed. 

•  Touch  the  ft )  key  to  move  up  one  folder  level. 

•To  return  to  the  workgroup  selection  screen,  touch  the  ^  J  key. 

•To  change  the  sorting  order  of  the  displayed  keys,  touch  the  key  that  shows  Ao  f  in  each  screen.  The  order 
switches  between  ascending  order  and  descending  order  each  time  you  touch  the  key. 

•  To  go  to  a  particular  page,  touch  the  Q  key  that  shows  the  current  page  number  and  enter  the  desired  page 
number. 


3-62 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Touch  the  key  of  the  file  that  you  wish  to 
print. 

•  The  0  icon  appears  to  the  left  of  keys  of  files  that  can  be 
printed. 

•  The  □  icon  is  displayed  to  the  left  of  keys  of  folders  in  the 
network  folder.  To  display  the  files  and  folders  in  a  folder, 
touch  the  key  of  the  folder. 


•A  total  of  100  keys  of  files  and  folders  can  be  displayed. 

•  Touch  the  ft )  key  to  move  up  one  folder  level. 

•To  return  to  the  network  folder  selection  screen,  touch  the  ^  j  key. 

•  Touch  the  [File  or  Folder  Name]  key  to  change  the  order  of  the  files  and  folders  displayed  on  the  screen.  The  order 
switches  between  ascending  order  and  descending  order  each  time  you  touch  the  key. 


Print  the  selected  file. 

(1)  Select  print  conditions. 

If  you  selected  a  file  (PCL,  PS,  or  XPS)  in  step  3  that 
includes  print  settings,  the  settings  will  be  applied. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Print]  key. 

Printing  begins  after  the  selected  file  is  transferred.  When 
the  message  appears  in  the  touch  panel,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 


When  you  select  a  PDF  file  that  has  a  password,  you  must  enter  the  password  in  the  job  status  screen  to  begin  printing. 
隊  PRINTING  AN  ENCRYPTED  PDF  FILE  (page  3-69) 


3-63 


Contents 


] 


PRINTER 


DIRECTLY  PRINTING  FROM  A  COMPUTER 

Settings  can  be  configured  in  the  Web  pages  of  the  machine  to  enable  direct  printing  from  a  computer  without  using  the 
printer  driver.  For  the  procedure  for  accessing  the  Web  pages, see  the  Quick  Start  Guide. 

SUBMIT  PRINT  JOB 

You  can  specify  a  file  to  be  printed  directly  without  using  the  printer  driver. 

In  addition  to  a  file  on  your  computer,  this  procedure  can  be  used  to  print  any  file  that  can  be  accessed  from  your 
computer,  such  as  a  file  on  another  computer  connected  to  the  same  network. 

To  directly  print  a  file  on  a  computer,  click  [Document  Operations]  and  then  [Submit  Print  Job]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

FTP  PRINT 

You  can  print  a  file  from  your  computer  by  simply  dragging  and  dropping  the  file  onto  the  FTP  server  of  the  machine. 


•  Configuring  settings 

To  enable  FTP  Print,  click  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Setting  for  Print  from  the  PC]  in  the  Web  page  menu,  and 
configure  the  port  number.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.) 


•  Performing  FTP  Print 

Type  "ftp://11  and  then  the  IP  address  of  the  machine  in  the  address  bar  of  your  computer's  Web  browser  as  shown 
below. 

(Example) 
ftp:// 192.168 .1.28 


Drag  and  drop  the  file  that  you  wish  to  print  onto  the  "Ip"  folder  that  appears  in  your  Web  browser.  The  file  will 
automatically  begin  printing. 


•If  you  printed  a  file  (PCL,  PS,  or  XPS)  that  includes  print  settings,  the  settings  will  be  applied. 

•  When  user  authentication  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  of  the  machine,  the  print  function  may  be 
restricted.  For  more  information,  ask  your  administrator. 


3-64 


Contents 


PRINTER 


E-MAIL  PRINT 

An  e-mail  account  can  be  configured  in  the  machine  to  have  the  machine  periodically  check  your  mail  server  and 
automatically  print  received  e-mail  attachments  without  using  the  printer  driver. 

•  Configuring  settings 

To  use  E-mail  Print,  you  must  first  configure  an  e-mail  account  in  the  machine.  To  configure  an  account,  click 
[Application  Settings]  and  then  [E-mail  Print  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.)  For 
the  procedure  for  accessing  the  Web  pages,  see  the  Quick  Start  Guide. 


•  Using  E-mail  Print 

To  print  a  file  using  E-mail  Print,  use  your  e-mail  program  on  your  computer  to  send  the  file  as  an  attachment  to  the 
machine's  e-mail  address. 

Control  commands  can  be  entered  in  the  message  of  the  e-mail  to  specify  the  number  of  copies  and  print  format. 
Commands  are  entered  in  the  format  "command  name  =  value". 

As  an  example,  the  control  commands  include  the  following: 


*1 Only  effective  when  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed. 

*2  Only  effective  when  a  punch  module  is  installed  on  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher. 
*3  Can  be  omitted  except  when  authentication  is  by  user  number. 


Example 


COPIES=2 
DUPLEX 二 LEFT 
ACCOUNTNUMBER 二 11111 
PAPER 二 LETTER 


Function 

Command  name 

Values 

Copies 

COPIES 

1-999 

Staples*1 

STAPLEOPTION 

NONE,  ONE,  TWO,  SADDLE 

Punch*2 

PUNCH 

OFF,  ON 

Output 

COLLATE 

OFF,  ON 

2-sided  print 

DUPLEX 

OFF,  TOP,  LEFT,  RIGHT 

Account 

number*3 

ACCOUNTNUMBER 

Number  (5  to  8  digits) 

File  type 

LANGUAGE 

PCL,  PCLXL,  POSTSCRIPT,  PDF,  TIFF, 

JPG,  XPS 

Paper 

PAPER 

Name  of  available  paper  (LETTER,  A4,  etc.) 

Document  Filing 

FILE 

OFF,  ON 

FOLDERNAME 

Maximum  of  28  characters 

Quick  File 

QUICKFILE 

OFF,  ON 

Output  tray 

OUTTRAY 

CENTER,  RIGHT,  FINISHER 

Fit  to  page 

FITIMAGET  〇  PAGE 

OFF,  ON 

•  Enter  the  commands  in  Plain  Text  format.  If  entered  in  Rich  Text  format  (HTML),  the  commands  will  have  no  effect. 
•To  receive  a  list  of  the  control  commands,  enter  the  command  "Config"  in  the  e-mail  message. 

•If  nothing  is  entered  in  the  body  text  (message)  of  the  e-mail,  printing  will  take  place  according  to  the  "Printer  Default 
Settings"  in  the  system  settings.  If  you  printed  a  file  (PCL,  PS,  or  XPS)  that  includes  print  settings,  the  settings  will  be 
applied. 


•  Only  enter  a  "File  type"  when  you  are  specifying  a  page-description  language.  Normally  there  is  no  need  to  enter  a  file 
type. 


3-65 


Contents 


PRINTER 


CHECKING  THE  PRINT  STATUS 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  is  displayed  when  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  on  the  operation  panel  is  pressed.  The  job  status 
screen  shows  the  status  of  jobs  by  mode.  When  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  is  pressed,  the  job  status  screen  of  the  mode 
that  was  being  used  before  the  key  was  pressed  appears. 


JOB  STATUS 


昼  Print  Job  |  Scan  to  [  Pax  Job  J" 培  Internet  Fax  J 


Job  Queue 

Sets  / 

Progress 

Status 

1 

2  (〇 

copy 

002 

/  000 

Waiting 

3  ru 

ICopy 

020 

/  000 

Waiting 

、な 

0312345678 

001 

/  000 

Waiting 

S' 


f Stop/Delete l 


The  job  status  display  (A)  is  in  the  lower  left  corner  of  the  touch  panel.  The  job  status  display  can  be  touched  to  display  the 
job  status  screen.  You  can  check  the  first  four  print  jobs  in  the  print  queue  (the  job  in  progress  and  reserved  jobs)  in  the  job 
status  display  (B). 


Contents 


3-66 


PRINTER 


Use  these  tabs  to  select  the  mode  that  is  shown  in  the 
job  status  screen. 

The  status  of  print  jobs  can  be  checked  by  touching  the 
[Print  Job]  tab. 

(2)  Job  status  screen  selector  key 

Touch  this  key  to  switch  through  the  job  queue  screen, 
the  completed  jobs  screen,  and  the  spool  screen. 

(3)  Job  list  (spool  screen) 

Spooled  print  jobs  and  encrypted  PDF  print  jobs  that 
require  a  password  to  be  entered  are  displayed. 

(4)  Job  list  (job  queue  screen) 

Jobs  waiting  to  be  printed  appear  in  the  job  queue  as 
keys.  The  jobs  are  printed  in  order  from  the  top  of  the 
queue.  Each  job  key  shows  information  on  the  job  and 
the  current  status  of  the  job. 

(5)  [Detail]  key  (job  queue  screen) 

Touch  this  key  to  display  detailed  information  on  a  job. 


1 

Computer02 

11 

00 

04/01 

001/001 

OK 

2 

Computer 03 

10 

33 

04/01 

010/010 

OK 

3 

皆 

Computer 04 

10 

31 

04/01 

013/013 

OK 

I4 

% 

file-01 

10 

30 

04/01 

010/010 

OK 

L 

% 

copy 

10 

13 

04/01 

001/001 

OK 

6 

m 

Copy 

10 

03 

04/01 

001/001 

OK 

7 

安 

Computer 05 

10 

01 

04/01 

003/003 

OK 

8 

% 

Copy 

10 

00 

04/01 

010/010 

OK 

a 

ai:= 


(8) 
(9) 
卜 (10) 


(6)  [Priority]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  give  priority  to  a  selected  job. 

(7)  [Stop/Delete]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  stop  or  delete  a  selected  job. 

(8)  Job  list  (completed  jobs  screen) 

This  shows  up  to  99  completed  jobs.  The  result  (status) 
of  each  completed  job  is  shown. 

(9)  [Detail]  key  (completed  jobs  screen) 

When  a  job  is  shown  as  a  key  in  the  job  list,  the  [Detail] 
key  can  be  touched  to  show  detailed  information  on  the 
job. 

(10)  [Call]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  retrieve  and  use  a  print  job  stored  using 
the  document  filing  function. 


Contents 


Mode  select  tabs 


SPOOL  SCREEN/JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN/COMPLETED 
JOB  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  consists  of  the  job  queue  screen  that  shows  copy  and  print  jobs  waiting  to  be  printed  and  the  job 
currently  in  progress,  the  completed  job  screen  that  shows  jobs  that  have  been  completed,  and  the  spool  screen  that 
shows  print  jobs  that  have  been  spooled  and  encrypted  PDF  jobs  that  are  waiting  for  a  password  to  be  entered. 


⑴ f  Print  Job  Scan  to  ]  Fax  Job  ] 贷 Internet  PajcjJ 


2  S1 

Computer02 

020  / 

Spooling 

3 

Computer 03 

Spooling 

•  4  ^ 

Computer 04 

— / 

Spooling 

卜 

Computer 05 

002  /  ― 

Encrypt  PDF 

Job  Queue 
1  Complete  •  ■  (2) 


3 

a 


rr 


^Internet  Fax  I 


j  益  Print  Jo  bl  Q1  Scan  to  |  tP  Fax  Job  j  internet  Fax| 


Spool 


Job  Queue 


\17  \—/ 

5  6  7 

/V  /V  Av 


1 l> ls 


3-67 


PRINTER 


Job  key  display 


Each  job  key  shows  the  position  of  the  job  in  the  job  queue  and  the  current  status  of  the  job. 


W 

(1) (2) 


IcomputerOl 


]^〇 2,1000" 


Waiting 


(4)  (5) 


(1)  Indicates  the  number  (position)  of  the  job  in  the  job 
queue. 

When  the  job  currently  being  printed  is  finished,  the  job 
moves  up  one  position  in  the  job  queue. 

This  number  does  not  appear  in  keys  in  the  completed 
jobs  screen. 

(2)  Mode  icon 

The  ^  icon  appears  when  the  job  is  a  print  job. 

(3)  User  name 

The  computer  login  name  of  the  user  will  appear  in  the 
print  job. 

A  "User  Name"  can  be  entered  in  the  printer  driver  to 
display  the  name  of  the  user  who  executed  the  job. 

(4)  Number  of  sets  entered 

This  shows  the  number  of  sets  specified. 

(5)  Number  of  completed  sets 

This  shows  the  number  of  sets  completed.  "000"  appears 
while  the  job  is  waiting  in  the  job  queue. 


(6)  Status 

Shows  the  job  status. 


Message 

Status 

"Printing11 

Printing  is  in  progress. 

"Waiting11 

The  job  is  waiting  to  be  executed. 

"Toner 

Empty" 

The  toner  cartridge  is  out  of  toner. 
Replace  the  toner  cartridge  with  a 
new  cartridge. 

"Paper 

Empty" 

The  paper  used  for  the  job  has  run 
out.  Add  paper  or  change  to  a 
different  paper  tray. 

■■Limit" 

The  printing  page  limit  has  been 
exceeded.  Check  with  the 

administrator  of  the  machine. 

"Error11 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed.  Clear  the  error 
condition. 

"Rendering" 

Analyzing  print  data. 

"Spooling" 

Print  data  is  being  received  or  a  job  is 
waiting  for  analysis  after  being 
spooled. 

"Encrypt 

PDF11 

Upon  analysis,  if  a  spooled  job  is 
found  to  be  an  encrypted  PDF,  it 
changes  to  the  password  entry  wait 
state. 

3-68 


Contents 


PRINTER 


(i) 


J  ^  Print  Job  J 

Scan  to  T  fP  Fax  Job  Inte 

Job  Queue 

Sets  /  Progress 

Status 

[  2  ^  Computer 02 

020  /  --- 

Spooling 

f  3  ^  Computer 03 

— /  一 

Spooling 

[  4  1^  Computer04 

一./  一 

Spooling 

f  5  Computer 05 

002  / 

Encrypt  PDF 

J 


Enter  the  password? 


][ 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

A  text  entry  screen  appears.  Enter  the  password  (32  characters 
or  less)  and  touch  the  [OK]  key.  The  print  job  is  released  and 
moved  to  the  [Job  Queue]. 


When  both  a  master  password  and  a  user  password  (which  is  used  to  open  the  file)  have  been  set,  enter  the  master 


password. 


^  : 


To  print  an  encrypted  PDF  file  using  the  printer  driver,  enter  the  password  when  opening  the  file  on  your  computer. 
Printing  is  not  possible  if  you  do  not  know  the  password  for  an  encrypted  PDF  file.  To  delete  a  spooled  print  job,  touch  the 
[No]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  and  touch  the  [Stop/Delete]  key. 

Encrypted  PDF  versions  that  can  be  directly  printed  are  1 .6  (Adobe®  Acrobat®  7.0)  and  earlier. 


3-69 


Contents 


Select  the  encrypted  PDF  print  job. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Print  Job]  tab, 

(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to 
[Spool]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  print  job  key  of  the  PDF  file  that 
has  the  password. 


PRINTING  AN  ENCRYPTED  PDF  FILE 

Encrypted  PDF  is  used  to  protect  a  PDF  file  by  requiring  the  entry  of  a  password  to  print  or  edit  the  file.  To  directly  print 
an  encrypted  PDF  file  on  an  FTP  server  or  in  a  USB  memory  device,  etc.  connected  to  the  machine,  follow  the  steps 
below  to  enter  the  password  and  begin  printing. 

The  PS3  expansion  kit  is  required  to  use  this  function. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


PRINTER 


(3)  (4) 


Give  the  desired  job  priority. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Print  Job]  tab. 

(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to  [Job 
Queue]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  print  job  to  which  you 
want  to  give  priority, 

(4)  Touch  the  [Priority]  key. 

The  job  being  printed  stops  and  the  job  selected  in  (3)  is 
printed. 


(1) 


Print  Job  I  Scan  Fax  Job  ]^Int  e: 


Sets  /  Progress  Status 


M 

Computer 01 

020  /  001 

Printing 

) 

m 

(3 な. 

0312345678 

002/000 

Waiting 

□ 

[4  ¢1 

Copy 

002  /  000 

Waiting 

j 

[5 の 

Copy 

002  /  000 

Waiting 

j 

(  6 

Copy 

002/000 

Waiting 

□ 

|7  CD 

Copy 

002/000 

Waiting 

j 

(8  ¢1 

Copy 

002  /  000 

Waiting 

j 

J 


To  check  print  information  on  the  selected  job,  touch  the  [Detail]  key. 


3-70 


Contents 


GIVING  A  PRINT  JOB 
PRIORITY/CANCELING  A  PRINT  JOB 

GIVING  A  PRINT  JOB  PRIORITY 

When  the  machine  is  busy  copying  or  printing  a  received  fax  or  other  job,  you  can  give  priority  to  a  print  job  that  is 
waiting  to  be  printed  and  print  it  ahead  of  the  other  jobs. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


t  Fax] 

1  Co 

l ョ 

Spool 

mplete 

1 

a 

rrii  d 

etail  | 

L±J ' — 

Pr 

1  (stoi 

iority  j 

^/Delete j 

PRINTER 


Cancel  the  job. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Print  Job]  tab, 

(2)  Change  the  print  job  status  mode  to  [Spool] 
or  [Job  Queue]. 

Touch  this  key  to  change  modes.  The  selected  mode  will 
be  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  print  job  that  you  wish 
to  cancel. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Stop/Delete]  key. 

(5)  A  message  appears  to  confirm  the 
cancelation.  Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

A  Delete  the  job? 

療  Computer02 

No  卜  Yes 

- 

The  selected  job  key  is  deleted  and  printing  is  canceled. 


© 


It  is  also  possible  to  cancel  printing  with  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  on  the  operation  panel.  When  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  is 
pressed,  a  message  will  appear  asking  you  if  you  want  to  cancel  the  job. 

If  you  do  not  want  to  cancel  the  selected  print  job... 

Touch  the  [No]  key  in  step  (5). 


3-71 


Contents 


CANCELING  A  PRINT  JOB 

A  job  being  printed,  a  job  waiting  to  be  printed,  or  a  spooled  job  can  be  canceled. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


「1 ^1 

1 & 


s a 

onn a nn 


(4) 

(3) 


PRINTER 


CHANGING  TO  ANOTHER  PAPER  SIZE  AND 
PRINTING  WHEN  PAPER  RUNS  OUT 

If  printing  stops  because  the  machine  ran  out  of  paper,  or  if  the  size  of  paper  specified  in  the  printer  driver  is  not  loaded 
in  the  machine,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  touch  panel.  Printing  will  begin  automatically  when  the  [OK]  key  is  touched 
and  paper  is  loaded  in  the  machine.  If  you  wish  to  print  on  paper  in  another  tray  because  the  desired  size  of  paper  is  not 
immediately  available,  follow  the  steps  below. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


Display  details  on  the  print  job  for  which 
there  is  no  paper. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  job  for  which  "Paper 
Empty"  appeared. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Detail]  key. 


Touch  the  [Paper  Select]  key. 


Detail  i  OK 


^Computer 01  020  /  001  Paper  Empty 


Touch  the  key  of  the  tray  that  has  the 
paper  you  wish  to  use. 

Printing  begins. 


If  you  changed  to  a  different  paper  size,  printing  may  not  take  place  correctly;  for  example  part  of  the  text  or  image  may  run 
off  the  paper. 


3-72 


Contents 


PRINTER 


APPENDIX 


PRINTER  DRIVER  SPECIFICATION  LIST 


Function 

PCL6 

PCL5e 

PS 

Windows 

PPD*1 

Macintosh 

PPD*1 

Frequently  used 
functions 

Copies 

1-999 

1-999 

1-999 

1-999 

1-999 

Orientation 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

N-Up 

Numberof 

pages 

2,4,6,8,9,16 

2,4,6,8,9,16 

2,4, 6, 8, 9,16 

2,4,6,9,16*2.3 

2,4,6,9,16 

Order 

Selectable 

Selectable 

Selectable 

Selectable 

Selectable 

Border 

On/Off 

On/Off 

On/Off 

Yes 

Selectable 

2-Sided  Print 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Fit  To  Page 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes*4 

Binding  Edge 

Selectable 

Selectable 

Selectable 

No 

Yes 

Staple*5 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Punch*5 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Paper 

Paper  Size 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Custom  Paper 

8  size 

8  size 

8  size 

Yes*2 

Yes 

Paper  Selection 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Output  tray 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Convenient 
printer  functions 

Pamphlet/Pamphlet 

Staple^ 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Margin  Shift 

0  inch  to 

1.2  inch 

0  inch  to 

1.2  inch 

0  inch  to 

1.2  inch 

Yes 

Yes 

Poster  Printing 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

No 

No 

Rotate  180  degrees 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Zoom/XY-Zoom 

Yes*7 

Yes*7 

Yes 

Yes*7 

Yes*7 

Line  Width  Settings 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

No 

Mirror  Image 

No 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes*8 

Special 

functions 

Different  Paper 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes*9, 10 

Transparency  Inserts 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Carbon  Copy 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

Tab  Printing 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes*11 

No 

No 

Chapter  Inserts 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

No 

Fold*6 

Half  Fold/ 
Mult-Sheet  Fold 

Half  Fold 

Half  Fold 

Half  Fold 

Half  Fold 

Tandem  Print 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes”  2 

Retention 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Document  Filing 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes”  2 

3-73 


Contents 


PRINTER 


Function 

PCL6 

PCL5e 

PS 

Windows 

PPD*i 

Macintosh 

PPD*i 

Image  adjusting 
function 

Image  Adjustment 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

No 

No 

Text  To  Black/ 

Vector  To  Black 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

Functions  to 

combine  text 
and  images 

Watermark 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Image  Stamp 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

No 

No 

Overlay 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

Image  Quality 

Print  Mode 

Normal/Fine 

No 

Normal/Fine 

Normal/Fine 

Normal/Fine 

Graphics  Mode 
Selection 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

No 

No 

Toner  Save*13 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Font 

Resident  font 

80  fonts 

80  fonts 

136  fonts 

136  fonts*14 

35  fonts 

Selectable  download 

font 

bitmap, 

TrueType, 

Graphics 

bitmap, 

TrueType, 

Graphics 

bitmap, 

TrueType, 

Typel 

bitmap, 

TrueType, 

Typel 

No*i5 

Other  functions 

Auto  Configuration 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes*16 

User  Authentication 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

No 

Yes 

*1  The  specifications  of  each  function  in  Windows  PPD  and  Macintosh  PPD  vary  depending  on  the  operating  system 
version  and  the  software  application. 

*2  Cannot  be  used  in  Windows  NT  4.0. 

*3  Only  2-Up  and  4-Up  printing  can  be  used  in  Windows  98. 

*4  Only  Mac  OS  X  vl 0.4.1 1  and  v10.5  to  10.5.5  can  be  used. 

*5  Can  be  used  when  a  finisher  or  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed.  (To  use  the  punch  function,  a  punch  module  must 
be  also  installed.) 

*6  Can  be  used  when  a  saddle  stitch  finisher  is  installed. 

*7  The  horizontal  and  vertical  proportion  cannot  be  set  separately. 

*8  Only  Mac  OS  9.0  to  9.2.2  can  be  used. 

*9  Only  covers  can  be  inserted. 

*10  Cannot  be  used  in  Mac  OS  X  vl  0.2.8  or  vl  0.3.9. 

*11 Only  the  amount  of  the  shift  of  the  text  string  data  created  in  the  software  application  can  be  set. 

*12  Cannot  be  used  in  Mac  OS  9.0  to  9.2.2. 

*13  This  setting  may  not  operate  in  some  software  applications  and  operating  systems. 

*14  The  number  of  available  resident  fonts  is  35  in  Windows  NT  4.0. 

*15  True  Type  and  Typel  can  be  selected  in  some  versions  of  LaserWriter. 

*16  Cannot  be  used  in  Mac  OS  X  vl  0.2.8. 


3-74 


Contents 


CHAPTER  4 
FACSIMILE 


This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  fax  function. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A  FAX 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  FAX . 4-4 

•  CONNECTION  TO  THE  TELEPHONE 

LINE . 4-4 

•  SETTING  THE  TELEPHONE  LINE  TYPE . 4-5 

•  MAKE  SURE  THE  MAIN  POWER  SWITCH 

IS  IN  THE  "ON"  POSITION . 4-5 

•  CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME . 4-6 

•  STORING  THE  SENDER  FAX  NUMBER . 4-6 

BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE . 4-7 

•  BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE . 4-8 

•  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN . 4-10 

•  CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF 
ONE-TOUCH  KEYS  IN  THE  ADDRESS 

BOOK  SCREEN . 4-11 

FAX  TRANSMISSION  SEQUENCE . 4-13 


ENTERING  DESTINATIONS 


ENTERING  A  FAX  NUMBER  WITH  THE 
NUMERIC  KEYS . 4-16 

RETRIEVING  A  FAX  NUMBER  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK . 4-17 

•  RETRIEVING  A  STORED  DESTINATION  ■… 4-18 

•  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  ENTERED 

DESTINATIONS . 4-19 

USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE 
A  DESTINATION . 4-20 

RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A 

GLOBAL  ADDRESS  BOOK . 4-21 

USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION . 4-23 

CHAIN  DIALING . 4-24 


BASIC  TRANSMISSION  METHODS 


TRANSMISSION  METHODS . 4-25 

•  PLACEMENT  ORIENTATION  OF  THE 

ORIGINAL . 4-27 

•  AUTOMATIC  REDUCTION  OF  THE 

TRANSMITTED  IMAGE . 4-27 

•  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES . 4-28 

•  THE  SIZE  OF  THE  PLACED  ORIGINAL . 4-28 

•  WHEN  THE  LINE  IS  BUSY . 4-29 

•  WHEN  A  COMMUNICATION  ERROR 

OCCURS . 4-29 

•  FAX  DESTINATION  CONFIRMATION 

MODE . 4-30 

USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 

FEEDER  FOR  TRANSMISSION . 4-31 

•  USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 

FEEDER  TO  SEND  A  FAX  IN  DIRECT 
TRANSMISSION  MODE . 4-32 

USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  FOR 
TRANSMISSION . 4-34 

•  USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  TO 

SEND  A  FAX  IN  DIRECT  TRANSMISSION 
MODE . 4-36 

TRANSMISSION  USING  THE  SPEAKER . 4-38 

SENDING  THE  SAME  FAX  TO  MULTIPLE 
DESTINATIONS  (Broadcast  Transmission) _ 4-39 

SENDING  A  FAX  DIRECTLY  FROM  A 
COMPUTER  (PC-Fax) . 4-44 

IMAGE  SETTINGS . 4-45 

•  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH 
SIDES  OF  AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided 

Original) . 4-46 

•  SPECIFYING  THE  SCAN  SIZE  AND 

SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce) . 4-47 

•  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE . 4-54 

•  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION . 4-55 

CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE 

TRANSMITTED  (Preview) . 4-56 

•  PREVIEW  CHECK  SCREEN . 4-57 


4-1 


FACSIMILE 


FAX  RECEPTION 


RECEIVING  FAXES . 4-58 

•  RECEIVING  A  FAX . 4-59 

•  RECEIVING  A  FAX  MANUALLY . 4-60 

PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX 
(Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print) . 4-61 

CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING  … 4-62 

•IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN . 4-63 

FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  (Fax  Data 
Forward) . 4-64 

FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  TO  A 
NETWORK  ADDRESS  (Inbound  Routing 
Settings) . 4-65 

•  CONFIGURING  INBOUND  ROUTING 

SETTINGS . 4-65 


SPECIAL  MODES 


SPECIAL  MODES . 4-69 

STORING  FAX  OPERATIONS  (Program) . 4-71 

ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase) . 4-73 

TRANSMITTING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO 
SEPARATE  PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan) . 4-75 

SENDING  A  FAX  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME 

(Timer) . 4-77 

SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE 
(2in1) . 4-79 

SENDING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  AS  A 
SINGLE  PAGE  (Card  Shot) . 4-82 

SENDING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF  PAGES 

(Job  Build) . 4-85 

TRANSMITTING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 
SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original) . 4-87 

FAXING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode).  ■ .  4-89 

CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE 

TRANSMISSION  (Original  Count) . 4-91 

STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif. 

Stamp) . 4-93 

CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 

TRANSACTION  REPORT  (Transaction 

Report) . 4-95 

ADDING  YOUR  SENDER  INFORMATION  TO 
FAXES  (Own  number  sending) . 4-97 

•  TEMPORARILY  CHANGING  THE 
SENDER  INFORMATION  (Own  Name 
Select) . 4-98 


CALLING  A  FAX  MACHINE  AND  INITIATING 
RECEPTION  (Polling) . 4-99 

•  INITIATING  POLLING  RECEPTION 

MANUALLY . 4-101 

SENDING  A  FAX  WHEN  ANOTHER 
MACHINE  POLLS  YOUR  MACHINE  (Polling 
Memory) . 4-102 

•  RESTRICTING  POLLING  ACCESS 

(Polling  security) . 4-102 

•  SCANNING  A  DOCUMENT  INTO 

POLLING  MEMORY . 4-103 

•  CHECKING  THE  DOCUMENT  IN  THE 

PUBLIC  BOX . 4-105 

•  DELETING  A  DOCUMENT  FROM  THE 

PUBLIC  BOX . 4-106 


PERFORMING  F-CODE  COMMUNICATION 


F-CODE  COMMUNICATION . 4-107 

•  HOW  F-CODES  WORK . 4-107 

•  CREATING  MEMORY  BOXES  IN  THE 
MACHINE  FOR  F-CODE 

COMMUNICATION . 4-108 

•  F-CODE  DIALING . 4-108 

CONFIDENTIAL  COMMUNICATION  USING 
F-CODES . 4-109 

•  F-CODE  CONFIDENTIAL 

TRANSMISSION . 4-110 

•  CHECKING  FAXES  RECEIVED  BY 

F-CODE  CONFIDENTIAL  RECEPTION  ....  4-111 

POLLING  RECEPTION  USING  F-CODES . 4-113 

POLLING  MEMORY  TRANSMISSION  USING 
F-CODES . 4-115 

•  SCANNING  A  DOCUMENT  INTO  A 

MEMORY  BOX  FOR  F-CODE  POLLING 
TRANSMISSION . 4-115 

•  CHECKING  THE  DOCUMENT  IN  THE 

F-CODE  MEMORY  POLLING  BOX . 4-118 

•  DELETING  A  DOCUMENT  STORED  FOR 

F-CODE  POLLING  TRANSMISSION . 4-119 

RELAY  REQUEST  TRANSMISSION  USING 
F-CODES . 4-120 

RELAY  BROADCAST  TRANSMISSION 

USING  F-CODES . 4-122 


4-2 


USING  AN  EXTENSION  PHONE 


CONNECTING  AND  USING  AN  EXISTING 

PHONE  (Extension  Phone  Connection) . 4-123 

•  RECEIVING  A  FAX  AFTER  ANSWERING 
A  CALL  ON  THE  EXTENSION  PHONE 

(Remote  Reception) . 4-124 

•  MAKING  AND  RECEIVING  PHONE 

CALLS . 4-124 


CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF  FAX  JOBS 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN . 4-125 

•  JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED 

JOB  SCREEN . 4-126 

•  OPERATION  WHEN  A  JOB  IN  THE  JOB 

QUEUE  IS  COMPLETED . 4-129 

•  CHECKING  A  RESERVED  JOB  OR  THE 

JOB  IN  PROGRESS . 4-130 

•  CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS . 4-131 

CANCELING  A  FAX  IN  PROGRESS  OR  A 
RESERVED  FAX . 4-132 

GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  RESERVED  FAX 

JOB . 4-133 

CHECKING  THE  ACTIVITY  LOG  (Image 

Sending  Activity  Report) . 4-134 

•  IMAGE  SENDING  ACTIVITY  REPORT . 4-134 

•  INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE 

RESULT  COLUMN . 4-135 


4-3 


FACSIMILE 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A 
FAX 


This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  using  the  machine  as  a  fax  machine. 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  FAX 

To  use  the  machine  as  a  fax,  the  telephone  line  must  be  connected  and  the  type  of  line  set. 


CONNECTION  TO  THE  TELEPHONE  LINE 

Be  sure  to  use  the  provided  telephone  line  cord  to  connect  the  machine  to  the  wall  telephone  jack.  Connect  the  end  of 
the  line  cord  that  has  the  core  to  the  "LINE"  jack  on  the  machine.  Insert  the  other  end  (the  end  without  the  core)  into  a 
telephone  line  jack. 


"LINE"  jack 


Insert  the  end  of  the  cord  with  the 
core  into  the  "LINE"  jack. 


4-4 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Main  power  indicator 


@ 


击 

⑩ 

© 


Main  power  switch 


[POWER  SAVE]  key/indicator 


4-5 


Contents 


SETTING  THE  TELEPHONE  LINE  TYPE 

The  machine's  dial  mode  setting  must  be  set  to  the  type  of  telephone  line  you  are  using. 

If  the  setting  is  not  correct,  dialing  will  not  be  possible. 

Touch  the  [Auto  Select]  key  in  "Dial  Mode  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The  machine  will  automatically 
set  the  dial  mode  to  the  type  of  line  you  are  using. 


You  can  also  set  the  "Dial  Mode  Setting"  manually. 


\^\  After  setting  the  dial  mode,  do  not  change  the  setting  unless  you  have  a  specific  reason  for  changing  it. 


MAKE  SURE  THE  MAIN  POWER  SWITCH  IS  IN  THE 
"ON"  POSITION 

When  the  main  power  indicator  on  the  operation  panel  is  lit,  the  main  power  is  on. 

If  the  main  power  indicator  light  is  not  lit,  the  main  power  is  "off".  Switch  the  main  power  switch  to  the  "on"  position  and 
press  the  [POWER]  key  (©)  on  the  operation  panel. 

If  the  fax  function  will  be  used,  and  in  particular  if  reception  or  timer  transmission  will  take  place  at  night,  always  keep  the 
main  power  switch  in  the  "on"  position. 

When  the  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  indicator  light  is  blinking,  the  machine  is  in  auto  power  shut-off  mode.  If  the  [POWER 
SAVE]  key  ((§))  is  pressed  when  the  indicator  is  blinking,  the  indicator  will  turn  off  and  the  machine  will  return  to  the  ready 
state  after  a  brief  interval. 


©  @ 
^ J ^ M  s  j  ( 0  j 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME 

Verify  that  the  correct  date  and  time  are  set  in  the  machine. 

The  date  and  time  are  set  in  the  system  settings  of  the  machine.  When  the  [SYSTEM  SETTINGS]  key  is  pressed,  the 
system  settings  menu  screen  appears  on  the  touch  panel.  Select  [Default  Settings],  [Clock],  and  [Clock  Adjust],  and  set 
the  year,  month,  day,  hour,  and  minute. 


If  "Disabling  of  Clock  Adjustment"  has  been  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  date  and  time  cannot  be  set. 


STORING  THE  SENDER  FAX  NUMBER 


Store  the  user  name  and  fax  number  in  "Sender  Data  Registration". 

Be  sure  to  configure  this  information,  as  it  is  required  for  communication. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Sender  Data  Registration 

Use  this  setting  to  program  the  sender  name  and  sender  fax  number. 


4-6 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE 


To  use  the  fax  function,  select  settings  and  operations  in  the  base  screen  of  fax  mode.  To  display  the  base  screen  of  fax 
mode,  touch  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  and  then  touch  the  [Fax]  tab. 


This  screen  only  appears 
when  the  fax  function  and 
Internet  fax  function  have 
been  installed. 

The  contents  of  the  screen 
will  vary  depending  on  the 
devices  that  are  installed. 


Each  of  the  other  modes  that  can  be  displayed  by  touching  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  (scan,  Internet  fax,  USB  memory, 
PC  scan  and  data  entry  modes)  also  have  base  screens. 

Transmission  destinations  can  be  stored  in  one-touch  keys  in  the  address  book  and  retrieved  from  the  address  book 
screen  when  you  need  to  use  them.  The  address  book  is  shared  by  fax  mode,  scan  mode,  Internet  fax  mode  and  data 
entry  mode. 

To  display  the  address  book  screen,  touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base  screen.  To  display  the  base  screen,  touch 
the  [Condition  Settings]  key  in  the  address  book  screen.  This  chapter  refers  to  the  base  screen  of  fax  mode  as  the  "base 
screen". 


Base  screen  of  fax  mode 


Address  book  screen 


1 

( 

I 

1 

( 

1 

5  ►  EE  ► 15  ) 

[eTto  1W  (Sec  ) 

^  Condition 
tings 

[AAA  AAA  印] fBBB  BBB  □  1 1 

AddqJ  '^iew 

,む〒:^^ 變  [DDD  DDD  Z 

Address  Entry 

[eEE  EEE  [FFF  FFF  ^)  |  ^  | 

Global 

Address  Search 

fGGG  GGG  fHHH  HHH  f  | 

Sub  Address  j 

L _ J 

[hi.  hi  Kt\  fjjj  jjj  %] 

Sort  Address 

Freq.  j|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview 

1^3^  女' Auto  Reception 

Fax  Memory: 100% 

The  procedures  in  this  chapter  begin  from  the  base  screen  of  fax  mode. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

One  of  the  following  screens  can  be  selected  for  the  initial  screen  that  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched. 
•  Base  screen  of  each  mode  (scan,  Internet  fax,  fax,  or  data  entry  mode) 


•  Address  book  screen 


4-7 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


(14)  (15)  (16) 

(1)  Mode  select  keys  (7) 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send,  and 
document  filing  modes. 

To  switch  to  fax  mode,  touch  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key. 

(2)  This  shows  various  messages  and  the  destinations  (8) 

that  have  been  entered. 

The  聞  icon  on  the  left  indicates  fax  mode. 

(3)  Send  mode  tabs 

Use  these  keys  to  change  the  mode  of  the  image  send 
function.  ⑼ 

Tabs  of  modes  that  cannot  be  used  because  the 
appropriate  options  are  not  installed  do  not  appear. 

If  the  [Fax]  tab  does  not  appear,  touch  the  国 ♦  ••  • 1 
tab  to  move  the  screen. 

隊  BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE  (page  4-7) 

(4)  [Address  Book]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  dial  using  a  one-touch  key  or  group 
key.  When  the  key  is  touched,  the  address  book  screen 
appears. 

瞭  RETRIEVING  A  FAX  NUMBER  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  4-17) 

(5)  [Direct  TX]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  send  a  fax  by  direct  transmission. 

When  the  [Direct  TX]  key  is  not  highlighted,  normal 
transmission  (memory  TX  mode)  is  selected. 

隊  To  fax  a  large  number  of  sheet  originals,  use  the 
automatic  document  feeder,  (page  4-25) 

隊  If  you  wish  to  send  a  fax  ahead  of  other  previously 
reserved  fax  transmissions,  use  direct  transmission 
mode,  (page  4-26) 

(6)  [Sub  Address]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  sub-address  and  passcode  for 
F-code  transmission. 

隊  F-CODE  DIALING  (page  4-108) 


Customized  keys 

The  keys  that  appear  here  can  be  changed  to  show 
settings  or  functions  that  you  prefer. 

隊  Customizing  displayed  keys  (page  4-9) 

[Preview]  key 

Touch  to  check  the  image  that  will  be  sent  in  the  touch 
panel  before  transmission. 

隊  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED 
(Preview)  (page  4-56) 

[Speaker]  key  /  [Pause]  key  /  [Space]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  dial  using  the  speaker. 

When  entering  a  fax  number  to  be  dialed,  the  key 
changes  to  the  [Pause]  key.  When  entering  a 
sub-address,  the  key  changes  to  the  [Space]  key. 

瞭  TRANSMISSION  USING  THE  SPEAKER  (page  4-38) 

(10)  [Resend]  key  /  [Next  Address]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  redial  a  fax  number.  When  entering  a  fax 
number  to  be  dialed,  this  key  changes  to  the  [Next  Address]  key. 
暖  USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION  (page  4-23) 

(11)  Image  settings 

Image  settings  (original  size,  exposure,  resolution)  can 
be  selected. 

暖  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 

(12)  回  key 

This  key  appears  when  a  special  mode  or  2-sided  scanning  is 
selected.  Touch  the  key  to  display  the  selected  special  modes. 
瞭  Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected  (page  4-9) 

(13)  [Special  Modes]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  use  a  special  mode. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(14)  团  key 

Touch  this  key  to  dial  a  fax  destination  using  a  search 
number. 

隊  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE  A 
DESTINATION  (page  4-20) 


Contents 


BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE 

This  screen  is  used  to  select  settings  and  operations  in  fax  mode. 


4-8 


FACSIMILE 


(15)  \W\  /  \j^_  /  ^  key  (16)  This  shows  the  currently  selected  fax  reception 

When  "Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  or  mode  and  the  amount  of  free  memory  remaining. 

"Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the  暖  RECEIVING  FAXES  (page  4-58) 

system  settings  (administrator),  this  will  appear  when  a 
fax  is  received. 

[W\  :  Only  "Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  is  enabled 
£1 '  :  Only  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled 
a3..  :  Both  settings  are  enabled 
隊  PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX  (Hold 
Setting  For  Received  Data  Print)  (page  4-61) 

暖  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING  (page 
4-62) 


Customizing  displayed  keys 

Special  mode  keys  and  other  keys  can  be  displayed  in  the  base  screen.  You  can  assign  frequently  used  functions  to  these 
keys  to  access  the  functions  with  a  single  touch.  To  change  the  function  that  is  assigned  to  a  key,  use  "Customize  Key 
Setting"  in  the  Web  pages.  The  following  keys  appear  by  factory  default: 


•  [Address  Review]  key 

Touch  this  to  view  a  list  of  the  destinations  that  have  been  selected  in  the  address  book  and  the  numbers  that  have  been 
directly  entered  with  the  numeric  keys.  This  is  the  same  key  as  the  [Address  Review]  key  in  the  address  book  screen. 

•  [File]  key,  [Quick  File]  key 

Touch  either  key  to  use  Quick  File  or  File  in  document  filing  mode. 

Example:  When  "Dual  Page  Scan",  "Job  Build",  and  "Mixed  Size  Original"  are  assigned  to  the  customized  keys. 


Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected 

The  key  appears  in  the  base  screen  when  a  special  mode  or  2-sided  scanning  is  selected. 

The  \W\  key  can  be  touched  to  display  the  selected  special  modes.  To  close  the  screen,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Function  Review 

纏  «  1 

Erase 

. Edge :  V2inch 
*  Center: Winch 

Timer 

. Day  of  the  Week: Monday 
' Time:  21:30 

1 

Mixed  Size 
Original 

:  On 

B 

E 

The  special  mode  settings  cannot  be  changed  from  the  function  review  screen.  To  change  a  setting,  touch  the  [OK]  key  to 
close  the  function  review  screen  and  then  touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key  and  select  the  setting  that  you  wish  to  change. 


4-9 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN 


This  screen  is  used  to  select  a  destination  from  the  list  of  stored  destinations. 

(10)  (11) 


(1)^— ?— 

[qto  )  [Sec  j 

1  1  ^  Condition 

\^i)  I  |  r  Settings 

, 1  i 

[AAA  AAA  餐] BBB  BBB  衫, 

2 

s 

a 

1  r 

[DDD  DDD  ^ 

[eEE  EEE  tt\  |fff  FFF 

/ハ\  1  L  Global 

l り)  1  ,Address  Search 

[ggg  ggg  |hhh  hhh  ^ 

fill  III  fjjj  細  t 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  j  MN0P  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  j|  etc.J< 

な ’Auto  Reception 

Fax  Memory: 100% 

■(12) 


■(13) 


(14) 


(1)  This  shows  the  destination  that  has  been  selected. 

(2)  Number  of  displayed  items  selector  key 

Touch  to  change  the  number  of  destinations  (one-touch 
keys)  displayed  in  the  address  book  screen.  Select  5, 10, 
or  15  destinations. 

(3)  [Condition  Settings]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  transmission  settings  and 
operations.  When  the  key  is  touched,  the  base  screen 
appears. 

隊  BASE  SCREEN  OF  FAX  MODE  (page  4-8) 

(4)  [Address  Review]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  view  a  list  of  the  selected  destinations. 
The  selected  destinations  can  be  changed. 

瞭  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  ENTERED 
DESTINATIONS  (page  4-19) 

(5)  [Address  Entry]  key 

Not  used  in  fax  mode. 

(6)  [Global  Address  Search]  key 

When  the  use  of  an  LDAP  server  has  been  enabled  in 
the  machine's  Web  page,  a  fax  number  can  be  obtained 
from  a  global  address  book. 

^  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A  GLOBAL 
ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  4-21) 

(7)  [Sub  Address]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  sub-address  and  passcode  for 
F-code  transmission. 

暖  F-CODE  DIALING  (page  4-108) 


(8)  [Sort  Address]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  change  the  index  tabs  to  custom 
indexes  or  to  display  one-touch  keys  by  send  mode. 

^  CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF  ONE-TOUCH  KEYS 
IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN  (page  4-11) 

(9)  [Preview]  key 

Touch  to  check  the  image  that  will  be  sent  in  the  touch 
panel  before  transmission. 

隊  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED 
(Preview)  (page  4-56) 

(10)  [To]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  selected  destination  (one-touch 
key). 

^  RETRIEVING  A  STORED  DESTINATION  (page 
4-18) 

(11)  [Cc]  key 

Not  used  in  fax  mode. 

(12)  One-touch  key  display 

This  shows  the  one-touch  keys  of  the  destinations  that 
have  been  stored  in  the  address  book.  This  chapter 
refers  to  keys  in  which  single  destinations  and  groups  are 
stored  as  one  touch  keys.  Keys  that  have  fax  numbers 
stored  are  indicated  by  . 

^  RETRIEVING  A  STORED  DESTINATION  (page 
4-18) 

(13)  Index  tabs 

Touch  this  to  change  indexes. 

^  RETRIEVING  A  STORED  DESTINATION  (page 
4-18) 

(14)  团  key 

Touch  this  key  to  retrieve  a  destination  using  a  search 
number. 

瞭  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE  A 
DESTINATION  (page  4-20) 


4-10 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [Sort  Address]  key. 


(i) 


Change  the  display  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  mode  or  tab  that  you 
wish  to  display. 

•  To  show  only  the  one-touch  keys  of  a  particular  send 
mode,  touch  the  desired  mode  key  under  "Address 
Type11. 

•  To  change  the  index  tabs  to  the  custom  indexes,  touch 
the  [User]  key  under  "Tab  Switch". 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


4-11 


Contents 


When  using  the  network  scanner  function  or  the  Internet  fax  function,  a  different  icon  will  appear  in  the  one-touch  key  display 


(^)  if  a  non-fax  destination  (address)  is  stored. 

^  RETRIEVING  A  FAX  NUMBER  FROM  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  4-17) 


© 


System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  fax  numbers  in  one-touch  keys. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  The  Number  of  Direct  Address  Keys  Displayed  Setting 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  setting  for  the  number  of  one-touch  keys  displayed  in  the  address  book  screen. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

One  of  the  following  screens  can  be  selected  for  the  initial  screen  that  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched. 
- Base  screen  of  each  mode  (scan,  Internet  fax,  fax,  or  data  entry  mode) 

- Address  book  screen 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Address  Book  Default  Selection 

The  following  settings  are  available  for  the  method  of  sorting  the  addresses  that  appear  in  the  address  book. 

- Index  type  (alphabetical,  custom) 

- Address  type  (all,  group,  E-mail,  FTP/Desktop,  Network  Folder,  Internet  fax,  fax) 


CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF  ONE-TOUCH  KEYS  IN 
THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN 

You  can  show  only  destinations  of  a  specific  transmission  mode  in  the  address  book  screen,  or  change  the  displayed 
index  tabs  from  the  alphabetical  tabs  to  the  custom  tabs.  The  procedure  for  selecting  destinations  does  not  change. 


匿 


1 3  0 


luii 


巨 


7 一 


i 


FACSIMILE 


Index  display 


Indexes  make  it  easy  to  search  for  a  destination  (one-touch  key).  The  destinations  are  displayed  separately  using 
alphabetical  search  characters  and  index  numbers.  To  display  a  stored  destination,  touch  the  appropriate  index  tab.  It  is 
convenient  to  store  frequently  used  destinations  in  the  [Freq.]  index.  Specify  that  a  destination  be  displayed  in  the  [Freq.] 
index  when  you  store  the  destination. 


f  5  ►  EQ  ► 15 1 (eTto  ]  (S  Cc  ] 

[ ^  Condition 

^  Settings 
r 

[AAA  AAA  糾 [BBB  BBB  】 1 

Address  Review 

fcttf  ccc  %J  |ddd  DDD  2 

\  Address  Entry 

EEE  EEE  ^  FFF  FFF  1  令  1 

Global 

| Address  Search 

[ggg  ggg  |hhh  hhh  [ = ) 

[ill  lit  fjjj  JJJ 

|  Sort  Address  1 

1  Freq.  J  ABCD  j  EFGH 』 IJKL  J  MNOP  J  QRSTU 』 VWXYZ  J  etc.jl 

Preview  1  1  ^Auto  Receftion 

Index  tabs 


The  destinations  can  be  displayed  in  alphabetical  order  by  their  initials. 

Each  time  the  displayed  index  tab  is  touched,  the  display  order  changes  in  the  following  order:  search  numbers  (page 
4-20),  ascending  names,  descending  names,  search  numbers...  When  the  display  order  is  changed,  the  display  order  of 
the  other  index  tabs  also  changes. 

Ordered  by  search  number  (default)  Ascending  names  Descending  names 


Index  names  can  be  changed  using  "Custom  Index"  in  the  system  settings,  allowing  you  to  create  groups  of  one-touch 
keys  that  can  be  easily  recognized. 


System  Settings:  Custom  Index  (page  7-18) 

This  is  used  to  store  custom  index  names.  The  custom  index  where  a  one-touch  key  appears  is  specified  when  the 
transmission  destination  is  stored  in  the  key. 


Narrowing  the  search  letter  range 

An  alphabet  tab  on  an  index  tab  can  be  touched  to  display  keys  to  further  narrow  the  search  range.  For  example,  when 
the  [ABCD]  tab  is  touched,  keys  from  "A"  to  "D"  appear.  If  the  [B]  key  is  touched,  only  destinations  starting  with  the  letter 
"B"  will  appear.  To  cancel,  touch  the  key  again.  Note  that  the  search  letter  range  cannot  be  narrowed  on  the  [Freq.]  tab, 
the  [etc.]  tab,  or  on  a  user  index  tab. 


|  5  ►  EB  ► 15  I  (eTto  )  (Sec  ] 

[ ^  Condition 
|  ^  Settings 

[ 

[BBB  AAA  ^|l] f BBB  BBB  1 

Address  Review 

(BBB  CCC  [BBB  DDD 

f  Address  Entry 

(BBB  EEE  (BBB  FFF  ^ 

[  Global  | 

| Address  Search] 

[BBB  GGG  %J  1  BBB  HHH  [  B  | 

lil 

[bbb  hi  |bbb  JJJ  tj 

1  Sort  Address 

Freq.  j  ABCD  ||  EFGH  ||  IJKL  ||  MNOP  ||  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc .  | 

Preview 

iHl  ||一1圔—]一|| 

4-12 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


•  [Address  Book]  key:  Select  a  destination  that  is  stored  in 

the  address  book  or  look  up  a 
destination  in  a  global  address  book. 
暖  RETRIEVING  A  FAX  NUMBER 
FROM  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK 
(page  4-17) 

•  [^}  key:  Use  a  search  number  to  specify  a  destination 

stored  in  the  address  book. 

隊  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE 
A  DESTINATION  (page  4-20) 

•  [Resend]  key:  Select  a  fax  number  from  the  last  eight 

destinations  used  for  transmission. 

隊  USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION  (page 
4-23) 

•  Numeric  keys:  Enter  a  fax  number. 

瞭  ENTERING  A  FAX  NUMBER  WITH  THE 
NUMERIC  KEYS  (page  4-16) 


Speaker  |[  Resend 

Scan 

Internet  Fax  1  Fax  1  USB  Mem.  Scan  1  PC  Scan 

|  ►Address  Book 

[  Original ] Scan:  J j8y2xll  Send: 

|  Direct  TX  ] 

[  Exposure  j 

\  Sub  Address  j 

[ Resolution  ]  Standard 

f Address  Review 

f  Special  Modes  ]  | 

file 

f  Quick  File 

Preview  j 

1  r 1 1  な 1 副 :〇  Reception 

■1 關 「■届  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number 


FAX  TRANSMISSION  SEQUENCE 

This  section  explains  the  basic  procedure  for  sending  a  fax. 


Place  the  original. 


Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  of  the  automatic 
document  feeder,  or  on  the  document  glass. 


♦ 


4-13 


Contents 


® ® ® @ 
or © ® ® ® 

0 ® ® ® 


FACSIMILE 


Select  image  settings. 

Select  settings  for  the  original  to  be  faxed. 

•  [Original]  key:  Use  this  key  to  select  the  original  size,  the 
original  send  size,  and  2-sided  original 
scanning. 

暖  SPECIFYING  THE  SCAN  SIZE  AND 
SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce)  (page 
4-47), AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING 
BOTH  SIDES  OF  AN  ORIGINAL 
(2-Sided  Original)  (page  4-46) 

•  [Exposure]  key:  Use  this  key  to  adjust  the  exposure  of  the 
image. 

隊  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  (page 
4-54) 

•  [Resolution]  key:  Use  this  key  to  adjust  the  resolution  of  the 
image. 

^  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION 
(page  4-55) 


Special  mode  settings 


Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key  to  select  special  modes  such 
as  timer  transmission  and  the  erase  function. 


4-14 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Begin  transmission 

Scan  the  original  and  send  the  fax. 

If  the  original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass,  follow  these  steps  to  start  scanning  and  transmission: 

When  sending  a  fax  normally  (memory  transmission) 

(1)  Press  the  [START]  key. 

(2)  When  scanning  is  finished,  replace  the  original  with  the  next  original. 

(3)  Press  the  [START]  key. 

(4)  Repeat  steps  (2)  and  (3)  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 

(5)  Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

When  sending  a  fax  in  direct  transmission  mode 

Multiple  originals  cannot  be  scanned  in  direct  transmission  mode. 

Press  the  [START]  key  to  start  transmission. 


When  transmission  ends,  image  settings  and  convenient  special  mode  settings  are  cleared. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

The  settings  can  be  kept  in  effect  a  fixed  period  of  time  after  scanning  is  completed. 


4-15 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


ENTERING  DESTINATIONS 


This  section  explains  how  to  enter  destination  fax  numbers. 

Destination  fax  numbers  can  be  entered  using  the  numeric  keys,  or  by  retrieving  a  previously  stored  fax  number  using 
the  address  book  or  a  search  number. 


ENTERING  A  FAX  NUMBER  WITH  THE 
NUMERIC  KEYS 


®@© 

@©® 

⑦®® 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number  with 
the  numeric  keys. 


Take  care  to  enter  the  correct  number. 


@lf  an  incorrect  number  is  entered... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  to  clear  the  number  and  then  enter  the  correct  number. 


Entering  a  pause  between  digits  of  the  number 

Enter  a  pause  after  the  number  used  to  dial  out  from  a  PBX  (for  example,  after  "O"),  or  after  the  country  code  when 
dialing  an  international  number. 


iSS  | 


Address  Reviewl 


Next  Address 


IE 


Exposure  j 


Resolution  I  Standard 


[Special  Modes  ^ 


5^1 


な _ Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory: 100%  


Touch  the  [Pause]  key. 

A  hyphen  is  entered  when  the  [Pause]  key  is  touched  once. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Pause  Time  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  length  of  pauses.  The  default  setting  is  2  seconds. 


Contents 


4-16 


FACSIMILE 


RETRIEVING  A  FAX  NUMBER  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK 


The  address  book  screen  shows  stored  destinations  as  one-touch  keys. 

A  destination  fax  number  is  retrieved  by  simply  touching  the  one-touch  key  of  that  destination.  This  is  called  "one-touch 
dialing".  It  is  also  possible  to  store  multiple  fax  numbers  in  a  one-touch  key, allowing  you  to  retrieve  all  the  numbers  by 
simply  touching  the  key.  This  is  called  "group  dialing".  This  dialing  method  is  convenient  when  you  wish  to  send  a  fax  to 
(or  poll)  multiple  fax  destinations. 


When  destinations  of  other  scan  modes  are  stored  in  addition  to  fax  destinations,  an  icon  indicating  the  mode  appears 
together  with  the  name  of  the  destination  in  each  one-touch  key. 


Icon 

Mode 

Fax 

Scan  to  E-mail 

珍 

Internet  fax  (Direct  SMTP) 

Scan  to  FTP 

£ 

Scan  to  Network  Folder 

Scan  to  Desktop 

Group  key  with  multiple  destinations 

System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  destinations  (names  and  fax  numbers)  in  the  address  book. 


4-17 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


RETRIEVING  A  STORED  DESTINATION 

A  destination  fax  number  is  retrieved  by  simply  touching  the  one-touch  key  of  that  destination. 


Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key. 


(2) 


Pause 

厘  Next  Address  ■ 

( 

5  ►  ffil ► 15  ) 

(eTto 

fecc  ] 

i_ 

^  Condition 

1 

1 

I 

Settings 

(AAA  AAA 

秘] (bbb  bbb 

¢1  i 

i. 

Address  Review 

[DDD  DDD 

i. 

_ ,  r~r~] 

1 

Address  Entry 

|fff  fff 

i 

Global 

Address  Search 

|ggg  ggg 

[hhh  hhh 

— ^13 

1 

Sub  Address  j 

(hi  lit: 

fjjj  jjj 

1 

Sort  Address  | 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTuJ|vWXYzJ|  etc. 

Preview 

公 •  Auto  Rece|:ion 

1. 旧  i  Fax  Memory:  1C ll 

(1) 


Select  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  index  tab  where  the  destination 
is  stored. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

If  you  select  an  incorrect  destination,  touch  the  key  again 
to  cancel  the  selection. 


•  Frequently  used  destinations  can  be  displayed  in  the  [Freq.]  index.  Specify  that  a  destination  be  displayed  in  the 
[Freq.]  index  when  you  store  the  destination. 

•  To  continue  specifying  other  destinations... 

Touch  the  [Next  Address]  key  and  repeat  (1) and  (2)  of  this  step. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Must  Input  Next  Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting 

This  setting  determines  whether  or  not  the  [Next  Address]  key  can  be  omitted  before  specifying  the  next  destination. 
Factory  default  setting:  The  [Next  Address]  key  can  be  omitted. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disable  Switching  of  Display  Order 

This  is  used  to  disable  switching  of  the  order  of  display  of  the  one-touch  keys  in  the  address  book  screen.  The  currently 
selected  display  order  will  be  the  order  that  is  used  after  this  setting  is  enabled. 


Contents 


4-18 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  AND  DELETING  ENTERED  DESTINATIONS 

When  multiple  destinations  have  been  entered,  you  can  display  and  check  the  destinations.  You  can  also  delete  a 
destination  (cancel  selection  of  the  destination). 


[  5  ►  EE  ► 15  )  IEITo  I  |©Cc 


Preview 


《Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory: 100% 


Touch  the  [Address  Review]  key. 


: Address  Review 

巧 

10011 .ccc  ccc 

002 [kKK  KKK 

1003  [:LLL  LLL 

oo4  [mmm  mmm 

1 

1005  f,NNN  NNN 

O  006 [000  000 

]  2 

10071 Wp  PPP 

008 1 姻  QQQ 

^)0 

1009  f^RR  RRR 

010  fsss  sss 

- ^  m 

1011 (;TTT  TTT 

012  fouu  UUU 

El  To 

a  cc 

Check  the  destinations  and  then  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 


© 


To  delete  a  destination... 

Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  destination  that  you  wish  to  delete.  A  message  will  appear  to  confirm  the  deletion. 
Touch  the  [Yes]  key.  Touch  the  [Detail]  key  to  check  the  specified  destination  type  and  name. 


Contents 


4-19 


FACSIMILE 


USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE 
A  DESTINATION 

A  destination  stored  in  the  address  book  can  be  retrieved  using  the  团  key.  This  can  be  done  in  the  base  screen  of  any 
of  the  modes  or  in  the  address  book  screen. 


Touch  the  Jn)  key. 

Scan 

Internet  Fax  1  Fax  |  USB  Mem.  Scan  J  PC  Scan 

\  ►Address  Book 

f  Original  j  scan:  Send: 

[ Direct  TX  ] 

[  Exposure  j 

[ Sub  Address  ] 

[|  Resolution  ]  Standard 

f Address  Review 

f  Special  Modes  ] 

File 

1  Quick  File  | 

[ j  な. Auto  Reception 

Fax  Memory: 100% 

Preview  J 

怒 

Enter  the  4-digit  search  number  of  the 

@©® 

address  with  the  numeric  keys. 

⑦®® 

When  the  4-digit  search  number  is  entered,  the  stored  address 

is  retrieved  and  specified  as  a  destination. 

© 


•  The  search  number  is  programmed  when  the  destination  is  stored  in  the  address  book. 

•If  you  do  not  know  the  search  number,  print  the  one-touch  address  list  using  "Sending  Address  List"  in  the  system 
settings. 

•  When  entering  search  numbers  such  as  "0001 ■■  and  "0011", "0"  can  be  omitted.  For  example,  to  enter  "0001 ",  enter 
"I"  and  touch  the  [^j  key  or  the  [Next  Address]  key. 

If  an  incorrect  search  number  is  entered... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  to  clear  the  number  and  enter  the  correct  number. 


Contents 


4-20 


FACSIMILE 


RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A 
GLOBAL  ADDRESS  BOOK 

If  an  LDAP  server  is  stored  in  the  Web  pages,  you  can  look  up  a  destination  fax  number  in  a  global  address  book. 


(2) 


[  5  ►  EE  ► 15  J 

Q'To  ]  (^Cc  ) 

I  ^  Condition 
|  r  Settings 

[aAA  AAA  [BBB  BBB  1 

Address  Review 

fccc  ccc  [ddd  DDD 

f Address  Entry 

[eee  eee  [fff  fff  1  令  1 

Global  L 

| Address  Search 厂 

[ggg  ggg  %]  |hhh  hhh  f  = ] 

r 

fill  III  [jjj  JJJ  t>) 

Sort  Address 

Freq.  J  ABCD  J|  EFGH 』 IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  Jetc. 

Preview 

[ ^Auto  Reception 

1. ^  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Open  the  global  address  search  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Global  Address  Search]  key. 


(1)  (2) 


Search  for  the  destination. 

If  only  one  LDAP  server  has  been  stored, (1) and  (2)  are  not 
necessary.  Go  directly  to  (3).  If  an  authentication  screen  for  the 
し DAP  server  appears,  enter  your  user  name  and  password. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  LDAP  server  that  you 
wish  to  use. 

If  an  authentication  screen  for  the  し DAP  server  appears, 
enter  your  user  name  and  password. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

(3)  Search  for  the  destination  in  the  search 
screen. 

Enter  search  characters  for  the  destination  and  touch  the 
[Search]  key.  The  search  results  will  appear  after  a  brief 
interval. 

For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING 
TEXT"  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE11. 


How  to  search 

Enter  a  maximum  of  64  characters  for  the  search  characters.  The  system  will  look  for  names  starting  with  the  entered 
letters. 

An  asterisk  氺  can  be  used  as  follows: 

XXX  氺:  Names  beginning  with  MXXXM. 

木  XXX:  Names  that  end  with  MXXXM. 

木 XXX 木: Names  that  include  nXXX__. 

AA  氺  XX:  Names  that  start  with  MAAM  and  end  with  MXXM. 


Contents 


4-21 


FACSIMILE 


(i) 


Select  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  destination. 

If  no  names  are  found  that  match  the  search  letters,  a 
message  will  appear.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  to  close  the 
message  and  touch  the  [Search  Again]  key  to  search 
again. 

(2)  Touch  the  [To]  key. 

This  enters  the  selected  destination. 

If  you  wish  to  select  another  destination,  repeat  steps  (1) 
and  (2)  above. 


•  If  30  or  more  matches  are  found,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  screen.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  to  close  the  message.  A 
maximum  of  300  search  results  are  displayed.  If  the  desired  destination  was  not  found,  touch  the  [Search  Again] 
key  to  add  more  search  letters. 

•  To  check  the  information  stored  in  a  destination... 

Touch  the  key  of  the  destination  and  then  touch  the  [Detail]  key.  The  information  stored  for  the  selected  destination 
will  appear.  Check  the  information  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key  to  return  to  the  search  results  screen. 

•  If  a  screen  for  selecting  the  item  to  be  used  appears... 

If  the  selected  destination  includes  an  E-mail  address  or  other  address  in  addition  to  the  fax  number  or  telephone 
number,  you  will  need  to  select  which  item  you  wish  to  use.  Touch  the  [Fax]  key  to  retrieve  the  fax  number. 


Storing  a  destination  from  a  global  address  book  in  the  machine's 
address  book 


A  destination  from  a  global  address  book  can  be  stored  in  the  machine's  address  book  as  a  one-touch  key. 

Touch  the  [Detail]  key  in  the  search  results  screen  of  the  global  address  book  (the  screen  of  step  3  above)  to  display 
information  on  the  selected  destination.  Touch  the  [Register]  key  in  the  detailed  information  screen  and  then  touch  the 
item  to  be  used  (the  [Fax]  key  in  this  case).  The  following  screen  will  appear. 


Direct  Address  /  Individual 


J  E-mail 


□ 


Internet 


|  ノ  j  Fax 


f  Search  Number 

j  0001 

Name  ]  ]  AAA  AAA 

Initial 

( 

Index 

j  User  1 

Fax  No. 

1 0123456789 

f  Key  Name  j  AAA  AAA 

Mode 

1  33.6  kbps/None 

The  information  stored  in  the  global  address  book  is  automatically  entered.  (The  settings  can  be  changed  if  needed.  For 
detailed  information  on  each  item,  see  "Address  Control"  (page  7-16)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS11.)  However,  configure 
the  items  below  manually.  To  complete  the  storing  procedure,  touch  the  [Exit]  key. 


•  [Initial]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  enter  the  initials  that  determine  where  the  destination  will  appear  in  the  alphabetical 

index  and  the  order  of  one-touch  key  display.  Enter  up  to 10  characters  for  the  initials. 

•  [Index]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  select  the  custom  index  in  which  the  address  will  appear.  You  can  also  select  whether 

or  not  the  destination  will  be  included  on  the  [Freq.]  tab  of  the  address  book. 

•  [Mode]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  configure  the  "Transmission  Speed"  and  "International  Correspondence  Mode" 

settings.  These  settings  have  already  been  configured,  however,  if  the  destination  is  an  international 
destination,  or  if  you  find  that  communication  errors  frequently  occur  when  communicating  with  that 
destination,  you  can  try  changing  the  settings. 


4-22 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION 

The  destinations  of  the  most  recent  8  transmissions  by  fax,  Scan  to  E-mail,  and/or  Internet  fax  are  stored.  One  of  these 
can  be  selected  to  resend  to  that  destination. 


Touch  the  [Resend]  key. 


Resend 


Cancel 


fwo.01  ^AAA  AAA 

|  |no.02  t>BBB  BBB 

[No.03  ^CCC  CCC  p. 

1  |no.04  %DDD  DDD 

[no.  05  VEEE  EE3^  *  ^ 

|  (no.06  t^FFF  FFF 

[no.  07  ^GGG  GGG 

] [no.  08  ^HHH  HHH 

Touch  the  key  of  the  fax  destination  that 
you  wish  to  redial. 

The  last  8  transmission  destinations  appear. 


•  If  numeric  keys  were  pressed  during  the  previous  transmission,  the  [Resend]  key  may  not  dial  the  correct  number. 

•  The  fax  addresses  below  are  not  stored  as  addresses  for  which  resend  is  possible. 

- A  one-touch  key  in  which  multiple  destinations  are  stored  (group  key). 

- Broadcast  destinations 


- Destinations  transmitted  to  using  a  program 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disable  [Resend]  on  Fax/Image  Send  Mode 

This  prohibits  use  of  the  resend  function.  When  this  setting  is  enabled,  the  [Resend]  key  cannot  be  used  in  the  base  screen 
of  image  send  mode. 


Contents 


4-23 


FACSIMILE 


CHAIN  DIALING 

Number  sequences  entered  with  the  numeric  keys  and/or  one-touch  keys  can  be  linked  together  with  pauses  and  dialed 
as  a  single  number. 

Use  chain  dialing  to  dial  a  long  number  (such  as  an  international  number)  when  the  country  code  and/or  area  code  are 
stored  separately  in  one-touch  keys. 

Example:  Using  chain  dialing  to  dial  an  international  number 


Number  to  be  dialed 


Entry 


XXX 


Using  the 
numeric  keys 


XXX 


Number  to  access 

international  telephone 
service 

010 

Country 

code 

Area  code 

Number  of  other 
party 

010 

1 _ 

00 

XX 

xxxx 

Using  a 
key 

one-touch 

fccc  ccc 

4 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Pause  Time  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  length  of  pauses.  The  default  setting  is  2  seconds. 


4-24 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


BASIC  TRANSMISSION  METHODS 


This  section  explains  the  basic  procedures  for  sending  a  fax. 


TRANSMISSION  METHODS 

The  methods  that  can  be  used  to  send  a  fax  from  the  machine  are  explained  below.  Select  the  method  that  best  suits 
your  needs. 

To  fax  a  large  number  of  sheet  originals, use  the  automatic  document  feeder. 

The  originals  will  be  scanned  into  memory  and  then  transmitted  (memory  transmission). 

When  memory  transmission  is  selected  and  multiple  originals  are  placed  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  (and  the  line 
is  free),  transmission  will  begin  as  soon  as  the  first  page  is  scanned  and  will  take  place  while  the  remaining  pages  are 
being  scanned  (Quick  Online  transmission). 

If  transmission  cannot  begin  immediately  because  the  line  is  in  use,  all  pages  will  be  scanned  into  memory  and  the 
transmission  will  be  reserved. 

瞭  USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  FOR  TRANSMISSION  (page  4-31) 

When  a  fax  transmission  or  reception  is  already  in  progress,  the  following  procedure  can  be  performed  to  reserve  a 
transmission  job.  To  check  reserved  transmission  jobs,  display  the  job  status  screen. 

暖  CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF  FAX  JOBS  (page  4-125) 


•  If  memory  becomes  full  while  the  first  original  page  is  being  scanned,  transmission  will  stop. 

•In  the  following  situations,  the  transmission  will  be  automatically  reserved  (memory  transmission) 

- When  the  line  is  busy  or  a  communication  error  occurs  and  automatic  resending  is  enabled. 

隊  WHEN  THE  LINE  IS  BUSY  (page  4-29),  WHEN  A  COMMUNICATION  ERROR  OCCURS  (page  4-29) 

- The  machine  is  already  using  the  line  to  send  or  receive  a  fax. 

- Another  fax  transmission  was  reserved  ahead  of  your  fax. 

-  One  of  the  following  functions  is  being  used  for  transmission. 

Broadcast  transmission,  F-code  transmission,  timer  transmission,  Dual  Page  Scan,  2in1,  Card  Shot,  Job  Build,  Original 
Count 


- The  document  glass  is  being  used  (except  when  the  speaker  is  being  used  to  dial). 

•  Up  to  94  transmission  jobs  can  be  reserved. 

•  When  the  transmission  is  finished,  the  scanned  original  pages  are  cleared  from  memory.  However,  when  the  document 
filing  function  is  used,  the  transmitted  fax  is  stored. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Quick  On  Line  Sending 

This  is  used  to  disable  Quick  Online  transmission.  In  this  case,  fax  transmissions  will  be  sent  by  memory  transmission 
(reserved  and  then  transmitted). 


4-25 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


To  fax  thick  originals  or  pages  of  a  book,  use  the  document  glass. 

隊  USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  FOR  TRANSMISSION  (page  4-34) 


When  the  document  glass  is  being  used  for  a  transmission,  Quick  Online  transmission  will  not  operate. 


If  you  wish  to  send  a  fax  ahead  of  other  previously  reserved  fax 
transmissions,  use  direct  transmission  mode. 

The  original  is  transmitted  directly  to  the  receiving  fax  machine  without  being  scanned  into  memory. 

When  direct  transmission  mode  is  used,  transmission  will  begin  as  soon  as  the  transmission  in  progress  is  completed 
(ahead  of  any  previously  reserved  transmissions). 

To  send  a  fax  by  direct  transmission,  touch  the  [Direct  TX]  key  in  the  base  screen. 

^  USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  TO  SEND  A  FAX  IN  DIRECT  TRANSMISSION  MODE  (page  4-32) 
隊  USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  TO  SEND  A  FAX  IN  DIRECT  TRANSMISSION  MODE  (page  4-36) 


•  When  transmission  in  direct  transmission  mode  ends,  the  mode  automatically  changes  back  to  memory  transmission 
mode. 


•  When  the  document  glass  is  used,  multiple  original  pages  cannot  be  scanned. 


4-26 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


PLACEMENT  ORIENTATION  OF  THE  ORIGINAL 

When  an  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  original  is  placed  in  vertical  orientation  (_ ),  the  image  is  automatically  rotated  90  degrees 
and  transmitted  in  horizontal  orientation  (圓) (Rotation  Sending).  If  the  original  is  placed  in  horizontal  orientation  (画), it 
is  transmitted  in  that  orientation  (_)  without  being  rotated. 


Rotated  to  8-1/2"  x  11MR 
(A4R)  orientation 


Transmission 


8-1/2"  x11"R(A4R) 
image  is  transmitted. 


8-1/2"  x  1 1 "R  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A4R,  B5  and  A5)  size  originals  are  not  rotated  for  transmission. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Rotation  Sending  Setting 

The  factory  default  setting  is  rotate  before  transmission.  If  this  setting  is  disabled,  the  original  will  be  transmitted  in  the 
orientation  in  which  it  is  placed. 


AUTOMATIC  REDUCTION  OF  THE  TRANSMITTED 
IMAGE 

If  the  width  of  the  transmitted  image  is  larger  than  the  width  of  the  paper  in  the  receiving  machine,  the  image  will  be 
automatically  reduced  to  fit  the  receiving  machine's  paper  width. 


Example:  Reduced  sizes  and  reduction  ratios 


Transmitted  image 

Receiving  machine's 

Reduced  size 

Ratio 

width 

paper  width 

A3 

B4 

B4 

1 :  0.84 

11nx17"  (A3) 

8-1/2"  x14M,  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 

8-1/2"  x  14",  8-1/2"  x11nR(A4R) 

1 :  0.71 

B4 

A4 

A4R 

1 :  0.84 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Auto  Reduction  Sending  Setting 

The  factory  default  setting  is  automatic  reduction  enabled.  If  this  setting  is  disabled,  the  image  will  be  sent  at  full  size  and  part 
of  the  image  may  be  cut  off. 


4-27 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES 

The  following  original  sizes  can  be  transmitted. 


Minimum  original  size 

Maximum  original  size 

Using  the  automatic  document 
feeder 

5-1/8"  (height)  x  5-1/2"  (width) 

(131  mm  (height)  x  140  mm  (width)) 

11-5/811  (height)  x  39-3/811*  (width) 

(297  mm  (height)  x  1000  mm*  (width)) 

Using  the  document  glass 

一 

11-5/8"  (height)  x  17"  (width) 

(297  mm  (height)  x  432  mm  (width)) 

*A  long  original  can  be  transmitted. 

THE  SIZE  OF  THE  PLACED  ORIGINAL 

When  a  standard  size  original  is  placed,  the  original  size  is  automatically  detected  and  displayed  in  "Scan"  in  the  base 
screen. 

When  the  automatic  original  detection  function  is  operating  and  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size,  the  closest  standard 
size  may  be  displayed  or  the  original  size  may  not  appear.  In  this  event,  manually  set  the  correct  original  size. 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  4-48) 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values)  (page  4-50) 

STANDARD  SIZES 

Standard  sizes  are  sizes  that  the  machine  can  automatically  detect.  The  standard  sizes  are  set  in  "Original  Size 
Detector  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The  factory  default  setting  is  "Inch-111. 

List  of  original  size  detector  settings 


Selections 

Standard  sizes  (detected  original  sizes) 

Document  glass 

Document  feeder  tray 
(automatic  document  feeder) 

lnch-1 

1  r  x  1 7n,  8-1 /2n  x  1 4", 8-1/2"  x  1 1 ",  8-1/2"  x  1 1nR, 
5-1/2"  x8-1/2n 

11n  x  17M,  8-1/2"  x  14",  8-1/2"  x  IT,  8-1 /2M  x  1TR, 
5-1/211  x  8-1/2",  A4,  A3 

Inch-2 

1 1 ■■  x  1 7", 8-1/211  x  1 3"  (216  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1n, 8-1/2Mx  11MR,  5-1/211  x  8-1/211 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  13"  (216  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1 8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1/211,  A4,  A3 

Inch-3 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/2Mx  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1n,  8-1/2Mx  11MR,  5-1/211  x  8-1/211 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1/2"  x  1 1 ■■, 8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1/211,  A4,  A3 

AB-1 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1 

8-1/2Mx14M,  11"x17" 

AB-2 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  330  mm 
(8-1/2Mx  13M) 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17M,  216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13M) 

AB-3 

A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17M,  216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13M) 

AB-4 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  340  mm 
(8-1 /2M  x  13-2/5") 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

1  r  x  17M,  216  mm  x  340  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13-2/5") 

AB-5 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  343  mm 
(8-1/2Mx13-1/2M) 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

1  r  x  17", 216  mm  x  343  mm  (8-1 /2Mx  13-1/211) 

4-28 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


WHEN  THE  LINE  IS  BUSY 

If  the  line  is  busy  when  you  send  a  fax,  transmission  will  be  re-attempted  automatically  after  a  preset  interval.  This 
function  only  operates  in  memory  transmission  mode.  In  direct  transmission  mode  or  manual  transmission  mode,  the 
transmission  will  be  canceled.  Wait  briefly  and  then  try  sending  the  fax  again. 


To  cancel  transmission... 

Cancel  the  transmission  from  the  job  status  screen. 

隊  CANCELING  A  FAX  IN  PROGRESS  OR  A  RESERVED  FAX  (page  4-132) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Recall  in  Case  of  Line  Busy 

This  is  used  to  set  the  number  of  recall  attempts  and  the  interval  between  attempts  when  the  connection  cannot  be 
established  because  the  line  is  busy.  The  factory  default  setting  is  2  attempts  at  an  interval  of  3  minutes. 


WHEN  A  COMMUNICATION  ERROR  OCCURS 

If  a  communication  error  occurs  or  the  other  fax  machine  does  not  answer  the  call  within  a  preset  period  of  time, 
transmission  will  be  re-attempted  automatically  after  a  preset  interval.  This  function  only  operates  in  memory 
transmission  mode. 


To  cancel  transmission... 

Cancel  the  transmission  from  the  job  status  screen. 

隊  CANCELING  A  FAX  IN  PROGRESS  OR  A  RESERVED  FAX  (page  4-132) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Recall  in  Case  of  Communication  Error 

This  is  used  to  set  the  number  of  recall  attempts  and  the  interval  between  attempts  when  a  transmission  fails  due  to  an  error. 
The  factory  default  setting  is  attempt  at  an  interval  of  3  minutes. 


4-29 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


FAX  DESTINATION  CONFIRMATION  MODE 

The  fax  destination  confirmation  mode  displays  a  destination  confirmation  message  when  a  fax  transmission  is 
performed  to  prevent  accidental  transmission  to  the  wrong  destination.  This  function  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator).  When  the  function  is  enabled,  a  message  will  appear  to  confirm  the  destination  when  the  [START]  key  is 
pressed  to  begin  fax  transmission. 

The  message  that  appears  will  vary  depending  on  the  method  used  to  specify  the  destination. 


Destination  specified  by  one-touch  key/search 
number 


Number  Confirmation 

^  BBB  BBB 
0312345678 

Cancel  I  i  OK 


Make  sure  that  the  destination  indicated  in  the  message 
is  correct  and  touch  the  [OK]  key.  Scanning  will  begin. 

If  the  destination  is  not  correct,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key 
and  select  the  destination  again. 


Destination  specified  by  the  numeric  keys,  [Resend] 
key,  or  [Global  Address  Search]  key 


/\  Enter  the  number  again  and 
press  the  Start  key. 


- 

Touch  the  [OK]  key,  re-enter  the  destination  with  the 
numeric  keys,  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

If  the  re-entered  destination  is  correct,  scanning  will 
begin. 

If  the  re-entered  destination  is  not  correct,  a  message 
will  appear.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  and  re-enter  the 
destination.  If  an  incorrect  number  is  entered  for 
confirmation  3  times  in  a  row,  the  screen  will  revert  to  the 
base  screen. 


•  If  the  [Sub  Address]  key  was  used  to  enter  a  sub-address  and  passcode,  the  fax  number  must  be  re-entered  during 
confirmation.  After  re-entering  the  fax  number,  touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key  and  enter  the  sub-address  and  passcode. 
•If  chain  dialing  was  used,  touch  the  [Pause]  key  to  enter  during  confirmation. 


Functions  that  cannot  be  used 

When  the  fax  destination  confirmation  function  is  enabled,  only  one  destination  is  allowed,  and  thus  the  following 
functions  cannot  be  used. 

•  Broadcast  transmission  to  multiple  destinations  including  fax  destinations 

Group  keys  and  program  keys  that  contain  multiple  fax  destinations  cannot  be  used.  After  one  destination  is  specified, 
keys  such  as  another  one-touch  key,  the  [Next  Address]  key,  the  [Address  Entry]  key,  and  the  [Global  Address 
Search]  key  cannot  be  touched. 

•  Transmission  using  the  speaker  key 

A  destination  cannot  be  specified  after  the  [Speaker]  key  is  pressed. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Fax  Dest.  Confirmation  Mode 

This  setting  is  used  to  have  a  destination  confirmation  message  appear  when  a  fax  is  sent. 


4-30 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT 
FEEDER  FOR  TRANSMISSION 

This  section  explains  how  to  use  the  automatic  document  feeder  to  send  a  fax. 


Place  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray  with  the  edges 
aligned  evenly. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


When  sending  a  multi-page  fax,  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  document  glass  cannot  both  be  used  to  scan 
the  original  pages. 


(2) 


f_5  >  班 卜 :15  | 

1 

|EfT。  I  (Sec 

^  Condition 
|  r  Settings 
r 

1 

[AAA  AAA  糾  fBBB  BBB  i 

Address  Review 

DDD 

\  Address  Entry 

[eee  eee  [fff  fff  1  ♦  J 

Global 

| Address  Search 

GGG  GGG  V]  [HHH  HHH  %)  (  s  j 

f  Sub  Address  ] 

(ill  III  q  |JJJ  JJJ 

J  Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc.J 

Preview 

^'Auto  Reception 
i.  ^  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 


In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can  also 
directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

When  scanning  is  completed,  the  machine  sounds  a  beep. 


When  scanning  is  completed,  "Job  stored."  will  be  displayed  together  with  a  job  control  number.  This  number  can  be 
used  to  locate  the  job  in  the  Transaction  Report  or  in  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report. 


•  If  a  fax  is  being  received  when  the  transmission  operation  is  performed,  the  transmission  will  be  reserved  and  transmitted 
after  fax  reception  is  completed. 

•  If  the  memory  becomes  full  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  a  message  will  appear  and  scanning  will  stop.  If  Quick 
Online  transmission  is  taking  place,  the  originals  that  were  scanned  will  be  transmitted.  If  Quick  Online  is  not  enabled,  the 
transmission  will  be  canceled. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Scan  Complete  Sound  Setting 

The  scan  complete  sound  can  be  selected. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


Contents 


4-31 


FACSIMILE 


USING  THE  AUTOMATIC  DOCUMENT  FEEDER  TO 
SEND  A  FAX  IN  DIRECT  TRANSMISSION  MODE 


Place  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray  with  the  edges 
aligned  evenly, 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


(3)  (2) 


|| 

[ 

( 

( 

[ 

i 

[ 

i 

5 卜  EB  卜 15 

l^fTo  1 (SCc  )  1 

^  Condition  J 
^  Settings  | 

[aAA  AAA  ^|l]  fBBB  BBB  喊 ]_ 

Address  Review 

DDD 

Address  Entry 

[EEE  EEE  fFFF  FFF  1  令  1 

Global 

Address  Search 

[GGG  GGG  fHHH  HHH  [  s  | 

Sub  Address  j 

|III  III  |jJJ  JJJ 

Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  Jetc.J 

1 

Preview 

な ’Auto  Reception 

I. 四  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Condition  Settings]  key. 


•  Only  one  destination  can  be  entered.  A  one-touch  key  in  which  multiple  destinations  are  stored  (group  key)  cannot 
be  used. 

•In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 


Touch  the  [Direct  TX]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Transmission  begins. 


@To  cancel  transmission... 

While  "Dialing.  Press  [◎]  to  cancel."  appears  or  while  the  fax  is  being  transmitted,  press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Contents 


4-32 


FACSIMILE 


•  The  following  functions  cannot  be  used  with  direct  transmission: 

Program,  Timer  Transmission,  2in1,  Card  Shot,  Job  Build,  Original  Count,  File,  Quick  File,  Memory  Box,  2-Sided  Original 
Scanning,  Global  Address  Search  (When  the  [Direct  TX]  key  is  highlighted) 

•  Resending  will  not  take  place  when  a  direct  transmission  is  not  successful  due  to  a  communication  error  or  other  reason. 

•  If  a  fax  transmission  is  already  in  progress  when  the  direct  transmission  operation  is  performed,  the  direct  transmission  will 
wait  until  the  previous  transmission  is  finished.  When  the  previous  transmission  is  completed,  the  direct  transmission  will 
begin.  While  the  direct  transmission  is  waiting,  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  can  be  pressed  to  display  the  job  status  screen.  No 
other  operations  are  possible. 

隊 CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF  FAX  JOBS  (page  4-125) 


Contents 


4-33 


FACSIMILE 


USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  FOR 
TRANSMISSION 

To  fax  a  thick  original  or  other  original  that  cannot  be  fed  through  the  automatic  document  feeder,  open  the  automatic 
document  feeder  and  place  the  original  on  the  document  glass. 


Open  the  automatic  document  feeder, 
place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass,  and  then  gently  close 
the  automatic  document  feeder. 


Document  glass  scale 


Document  glass  scale 


•  Align  the  corner  of  the  original  with  the  tip  of  the  arrow  mark 
金 on  the  document  glass  scale. 

•  Place  the  original  in  the  appropriate  position  for  its  size  as 
shown  above. 


Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector.  Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and  prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


•  When  faxing  a  multi-page  original,  scan  each  page  in  order  starting  from  the  first  page. 

•  When  sending  a  multi-page  fax,  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  document  glass  cannot  both  be  used  to 
scan  the  original  pages. 


(2) 


[■5 卜班卜 :15  | 

1 

l^iTo  |  (Sec 

^  Condition 
|  r  Settings 
r 

i 

fAAA  AAA  ^l] fBBB  BBB  i 

Address  Review 

_T' 麵  [DDD  DDD  V| 

f  Address  Entry  | 

[eEE  EEE  fFFF  FFF  1  f  j 

Global 

| Address  Search 

[ggg  ggg  v]  |hhh  HHH  v)  (  s  j 

f  Sub  Address  | 

[ill  III  fjjj  JJJ  tj 

f  Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview 

^f'Auto  Reception 
i.  ^  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 


In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can  also 
directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 


Contents 


4-34 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 


If  you  have  another  page  to  scan,  change  pages  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the  transmission  is  reserved. 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  sounds. 

Open  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  remove  the  original. 


•  When  scanning  is  completed,  "Job  stored."  will  be  displayed  together  with  a  job  control  number. 

This  number  can  be  used  to  locate  the  job  in  the  Transaction  Report  or  in  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report. 

•  If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

•  The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  M2in1M  or  "Card  Shot"  is  selected  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure  can  be 
changed,  and  this  can  only  be  done  when  scanning  each  even  page  number  of  the  original  pages. 

To  cancel  transmission... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (® )  before  the  [Read-End]  key  is  touched. 


•  If  a  fax  is  being  received  when  the  transmission  operation  is  performed,  the  transmission  will  be  reserved  and  transmission 
will  take  place  after  fax  reception  is  completed. 

•If  the  memory  becomes  full  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  a  message  will  appear  and  transmission  will  be 
canceled. 


Contents 


4-35 


FACSIMILE 


USING  THE  DOCUMENT  GLASS  TO  SEND  A  FAX  IN 
DIRECT  TRANSMISSION  MODE 

When  sending  a  fax  from  the  document  glass  in  direct  transmission  mode,  only  one  page  can  be  transmitted. 


Open  the  automatic  document  feeder, 
place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass,  and  then  gently  close 
the  automatic  document  feeder. 


Document  glass  scale 


Document  glass  scale 


•  Align  the  corner  of  the  original  with  the  tip  of  the  arrow  mark 
M  on  the  document  glass  scale. 

•  Place  the  original  in  the  appropriate  position  for  its  size  as 
shown  above. 


① 


Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector.  Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and  prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


|| 

[ 

( 

( 

[ 

i 

( 

i 

1 

5 卜  EEI  卜 15  j| 

l^fTo  1 (SCc  )  1 

^  Condition  J 
Settings  | 

(aAA  AAA  秘 j  [BBB  BBB  ||()  ]_ 

Address  Review 

DDD 

Address  Entry 

[EEE  EEE  fFFF  FFF  1  专  1 

Global 

Address  Search 

fGGG  GGG  fHHH  HHH  [  s  | 

Sub  Address  j 

[ill  III  [jjj  JJJ 

Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview 

<^Auto  Reception 

I. 四  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Condition  Settings]  key. 


•  Only  one  destination  can  be  entered.  A  one-touch  key  in  which  multiple  destinations  are  stored  (group  key)  cannot 
be  used. 

•In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS"  (page  4-16). 


Contents 


4-36 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [Direct  TX]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Transmission  begins. 


@To  cancel  transmission... 

While  "Dialing.  Press  [◎]  to  cancel"  appears  in  the  display,  press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  The  following  functions  cannot  be  used  with  direct  transmission: 

Program,  Timer  Transmission,  2in1 , Card  Shot,  Job  Build,  Polling  Memory,  Original  Count,  File,  Quick  File,  Memory  Box, 
2-Sided  Original  Scanning,  Global  Address  Search 

•  Resending  will  not  take  place  when  a  direct  transmission  is  not  successful  due  to  a  communication  error  or  other  reason. 


•  If  a  fax  transmission  is  already  in  progress  when  the  direct  transmission  operation  is  performed,  the  direct  transmission  will 
wait  until  the  previous  transmission  is  finished.  When  the  previous  transmission  is  completed,  the  direct  transmission  will 
begin.  While  the  direct  transmission  is  waiting,  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  can  be  pressed  to  display  the  job  status  screen.  No 
other  operations  are  possible. 

隊 CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF  FAX  JOBS  (page  4-125) 


Contents 


4-37 


FACSIMILE 


TRANSMISSION  USING  THE  SPEAKER 

When  the  speaker  is  used  to  dial,  the  fax  is  sent  after  the  number  is  dialed  and  the  connection  is  established.  If  a  person 
answers,  you  will  be  able  to  hear  his  or  her  voice,  but  you  will  not  be  able  to  speak. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 

When  the  document  glass  is  used,  only  one  page  can  be 
transmitted. 


⑶ 


⑴ 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Speaker]  key, 

You  will  hear  the  dial  tone  through  the  machine's  speaker. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(3)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

A  group  key  cannot  be  used. 


•In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 

•  After  touching  the  [Speaker]  key,  you  can  touch  the  [Speaker  Volume]  key  to  adjust  the  volume  of  the  speaker.  The 
speaker  volume  changes  each  time  the  [Speaker  Volume]  key  is  touched.  Adjust  the  volume  to  the  desired  level. 


Wait  until  the  connection  is  made  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

Transmission  begins. 


@To  cancel  transmission... 

Touch  the  [Speaker]  key  before  the  [START]  key  is  pressed.  The  line  will  be  disconnected  and  transmission  will  stop. 


•  When  the  speaker  is  used,  transmission  takes  place  without  scanning  the  original  into  memory. 
•A  destination  that  includes  an  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  cannot  be  used. 

•A  one-touch  key  that  has  multiple  destinations  or  has  a  non-fax  destination  cannot  be  used. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Speaker  Settings 

The  default  volume  level  of  the  speaker  can  be  changed  in  the  "Speaker  Settings". 


Contents 


4-38 


FACSIMILE 


It  is  convenient  to  store  destinations  to  which  you  frequently  send  faxes  by  broadcast  transmission  in  group  keys.  Group 
dialing  allows  you  to  retrieve  multiple  fax  numbers  stored  in  a  one-touch  key  by  simply  pressing  the  one-touch  key.  To 
store  group  keys,  see  "Address  Control"  (page  7-16)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 

When  a  group  key  is  used  to  dial,  the  number  of  fax  numbers  that  are  dialed  is  the  number  of  destinations  that  are 
stored  in  the  group  key.  When  a  group  key  that  has  10  destinations  is  used, 10  fax  numbers  are  dialed. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


SENDING  THE  SAME  FAX  TO  MULTIPLE 
DESTINATIONS  (Broadcast  Transmission) 

This  function  is  convenient  when  you  need  to  send  the  same  fax  to  multiple  destinations,  such  as  sending  a  report  to 
branch  offices  in  different  regions.  You  can  transmit  to  as  many  as  500  destinations  in  one  broadcast  operation. 
(Combined  maximum  of  200  file  server,  desktop,  and  shared  folder  destinations.) 


Originals 


Transmission 


4-39 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


(2) 


[qTo  J  (pec 


Freq.  Jl  ABCD  ||^EFGH  ■[  IJKL  |l  MNOP  ■[  QRSTU  |l  VWXYZ  儿 etc. 


ぢ ■Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory: 100% 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

(3)  Repeat  step  (2)  until  all  destinations  are 
selected. 


•In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 

•  It  is  convenient  to  use  a  group  key  to  enter  the  destinations. 

•  After  entering  a  destination  with  the  numeric  keys,  if  you  wish  to  enter  another  destination  with  the  numeric  keys, 
touch  the  [Next  Address]  key  before  entering  the  next  destination.  The  [Next  Address]  key  can  be  omitted  before  or 
after  a  destination  entered  using  a  one-touch  key.  However,  if  "Must  Input  Next  Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting" 
is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  [Next  Address]  key  must  be  touched  before  entering  the  next 
destination. 


Fax  number  entered 

[Next  Address] 

Fax  number 

[Next  Address] 

Destination  entered  with 

with  the  numeric  keys 

key 

entered  with  the 

key 

a  one-touch  key 

numeric  keys 

Cannot  be  omitted 


Can  be  omitted* 


*  Cannot  be  omitted  if  "Must  Input  Next 
Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting"  is  enabled 
in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Must  Input  Next  Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting 

This  setting  is  used  to  prohibit  omission  of  the  [Next  Address]  key  when  entering  destinations  for  broadcast 
transmissions. 


( 

i 

( 

I 

[ 

( 

1 

5^ 

ESI  ► 15 1 

(eTto  ]  (Sec  1 

^  Condition 
^  Settings 

fAAA  AAA  移] [BBB  BBB  ■!_  1 

Address  Review 

(CCC  CCC  |DDD  DDD  ' 

Addre] 

1 卜^ ry 

|eee  eee  [fff  fff  (令 ) 

Globdi 

Address  Search 

|ggg  ggg  [hhh  HHH  1 

L?J 

Sub  Address  ] 

[in  iiS:  fjJJ  jjj  %] 

Sort 

Address 

Freq.  Jl  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJICL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc.J 

Preview 

^'Auto  Reception 

1  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Touch  the  [Address  Review]  key. 


4-40 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


•Address  Review  |  OK 

1001  ccc 

■こ』 麵 002  [KKK  KKK 

1003  fiLLL  LLL 

004  [MMM  MMM 

1 

1005  f.NNN  NNN 

006 [000  000 

2 

10071 Wp  PPP 

%]  008 [qQQ  QQQ 

m  s 

1009  f:RRR  RRR 

010  [sss  sss 

- ^  m 

1011  f.TTT  TTT 

u\  012  fouo  uuu 

El  To 

a  cc 

Check  the  destinations  and  then  touch 
the  [OK]  key, 


© 


To  cancel  a  specified  destination... 

Touch  the  key  of  the  destination  that  you  wish  to  cancel.  A  message  will  appear  to  confirm  the  deletion.  Touch  the 
[Yes]  key. 

隊  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  ENTERED  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-19) 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•A  broadcast  transmission  takes  place  by  memory  transmission  only. 

•A  broadcast  transmission  can  be  used  in  combination  with  the  timer  transmission  function  to  transmit  at  night  or  any  other 
desired  time.  A  broadcast  transmission  can  also  be  used  in  combination  with  other  convenient  functions. 


•  The  broadcast  transmission  can  include  Scan  to  E-mail  and  Internet  fax  destinations.  In  this  case,  the  image  sent  to  the 
Scan  to  E-mail  and  Internet  fax  destinations  will  be  black  and  white. 


Contents 


4-41 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [Complete]  key. 

If  the  job  status  screen  of  fax  mode  does  not  appear,  touch  the 
[Fax  Job]  tab. 


If  the  broadcast  transmission  included  destinations  of  different  modes,  the  same  broadcast  transmission  key  will 
appear  in  each  of  those  modes. 


(1) 


1 

A  Print  Job  |  ^  Scan  to  |  Fax  Job  |  培 Internet  Fax 

Address  1  Start  Time  Pages  Status 

Job  Queue 

1  Broadcast0002  10:05  04/01  001/001  Send  OK  j  1 

V  B  CCC  CCC  10:22  04/01  004/004  Send  OK 

#  Detail ] 

^  J  0123456789  10:30  04/01  010/010  Send  OK 

Lj_ 

& 

[ cal1  s 

Display  details  on  the  broadcast 
transmission. 


Touch  the  key  of  the  completed  broadcast 
transmission. 


(1) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Detail]  key 


"Broadcastxxxx"  will  appear  as  the  destination  of  the  broadcast  job  key.  The  job  control  number  that  appeared  in  the 
touch  panel  when  scanning  ended  appears  in  "xxxx". 


Contents 


Resending  to  unsuccessful  broadcast  transmission  destinations 

The  results  of  a  completed  broadcast  transmission  can  be  checked  in  the  job  status  screen.  If  transmission  to  any  of  the 
destinations  failed,  resend  the  fax  to  those  destinations. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


4-42 


FACSIMILE 


(1) (2) 


Resend  to  unsuccessful  destinations. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Failed]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Retry]  key. 


•  The  procedure  after  the  [Retry]  key  is  touched  varies  depending  on  whether  or  not  the  document  filing  function  was 
used. 

Not  using  document  filing 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  with  the  unsuccessful  destinations  entered.  Place  the  original  and  perform  the 
broadcast  transmission  operation. 

Using  document  filing 

The  document  filing  operation  selection  screen  will  appear  with  the  unsuccessful  destinations  entered.  Perform  the 
document  filing  resend  procedure.  (There  is  no  need  to  rescan  the  original.) 

If  the  job  was  stored  in  a  confidential  folder  or  was  stored  as  confidential  file,  a  password  entry  screen  will  appear 
after  you  touch  the  [Retry]  key.  Enter  the  password. 

•  If  the  [All  Destinations]  key  is  touched  in  (1),  all  destinations  will  be  displayed.  The  [Retry]  key  that  appears  in  the 
screen  can  be  touched  to  resend  to  all  destinations. 


4-43 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


SENDING  A  FAX  DIRECTLY  FROM  A 
COMPUTER  (PC-Fax) 

A  document  in  a  computer  can  be  transmitted  via  the  machine  as  a  fax.  Faxes  are  sent  using  the  PC-Fax  function  in  the 
same  way  as  documents  are  printed.  Select  the  PC-Fax  driver  as  the  printer  driver  on  your  computer  and  then  select  the 
Print  command  in  the  software  application.  Image  data  for  transmission  will  be  created  and  sent  as  a  fax. 


For  more  information  on  using  PC-Fax,  see  the  Help  file  for  the  PC-Fax  driver. 


•To  use  the  PC-Fax  function,  the  PC-Fax  driver  must  be  installed.  For  more  information,  see  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 

•  This  function  can  only  be  used  on  a  Windows®  computer. 

•  This  function  can  only  be  used  for  transmission.  Faxes  cannot  be  received  to  your  computer. 


4-44 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


IMAGE  SETTINGS 


Settings  for  scanning  the  original  are  selected  in  the  base  screen  of  each  mode.  The  current  state  of  each  setting 
appears  to  the  right  of  the  key  used  to  select  the  setting. 


1 


USB  Mem.  Scan 


コ E 


Resolution  I  Standard 


| Address  Reviewj 

i - '  i 

[ Special  Modes  ] 

Pile 

1  I  Reception 

1 旧 J  Fax  Memory: 100% 

f  Quick  File  | 

Preview  j 

⑴ 

(2) 

⑶ 


(1)  [Original]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  set  the  scan  size,  send  size,  and 
orientation  of  the  original,  and  select  2-sided  scanning 
settings. 

^  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF 
AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original)  (page  4-46), 
SPECIFYING  THE  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND  SIZE 
(Enlarge/Reduce)  (page  4-47) 

(2)  [Exposure]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  exposure  for  scanning. 

暖  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  (page  4-54) 

(3)  [Resolution]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  scanning  resolution. 

隊  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION  (page  4-55) 


4-45 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  AN 
ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original) 

The  automatic  document  feeder  will  automatically  scan  both  sides  of  the  document. 


Transmission 


2-sided  original 


Front  and  back  are 
sent  as  two  pages 


D  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


⑴ 


Specify  the  binding  style  of  the  2-sided 
original  (book  or  tablet)  and  the 
orientation  in  which  the  original  is  placed. 

(1) Touch  the  [2-Sided  Booklet]  key  or  the 
[2-Sided  Tablet]  key. 

A  book  and  a  tablet  are  bound  as  shown  below. 


Booklet  Tablet 


(2)  Touch  the  appropriate  [Image  Orientation]  key, 

If  the  wrong  orientation  is  selected  here,  the  image  may 
not  be  sent  properly. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


@ 


To  cancel  2-sided  scanning,  touch  the  highlighted  key  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


•  2-sided  scanning  automatically  turns  off  after  the  transmission  operation  is  completed. 

•  2-sided  scanning  is  not  possible  when  direct  transmission  or  speaker  transmission  is  performed. 


4-46 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


SPECIFYING  THE  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND  SIZE 
(Enlarge/Reduce) 


When  the  original  is  placed,  its  size  is  automatically  detected  and  displayed  in  the  base  screen. 

The  size  of  the  placed  original  is  indicated  as  the  scan  size,  and  the  size  to  be  transmitted  is  indicated  as  the  send  size. 


In  the  above  screen,  the  scan  size  (the  placed  original)  is  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  and  the  send  size  is  auto.  If,  for  example,  the 
scan  size  were  8-1/2"  x  1 1" (A4)  and  the  send  size  were  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5),  the  image  would  be  reduced  before 
transmission. 


"Scan  Size" 


Transmission 


"Send  Size"  is  set  to 
5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5) 


8-1/2"  x  1 1" (A4)  The  image  is  reduced 

to  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5) 
before  transmission 


•  Only  standard  original  sizes  can  be  automatically  detected. 

隊  STANDARD  SIZES  (page  4-28) 

•  When  the  original  size  is  a  non-standard  size,  or  if  the  size  is  not  detected  correctly,  manually  specify  the  original  scan 
size. 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  4-48) 

瞭  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values)  (page  4-50) 


4-47 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.) 

If  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size  or  you  wish  to  change  the  scan  size,  touch  the  [Original]  key  to  specify  the  original 
size  manually.  Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  and  follow  the  steps  below. 


Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

The  automatically  detected  original  size  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Original]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


OK 


100%  Send  Size 


Auto  8%xll 

1 


I  fe  2 -Sided  1  fftrL  2-Sided 
I  all  Booklet  J  I  LJ  Tablet 


Image  Orientation 

PEI  [  ag 


Touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


(1)  (2) 


Fax/Original 

1  ~ OK  ^ ) 

Auto 

「 Manual 

8MxllR  11x17  ] 

1 

5 你哪  ] f  8^x13  (213x330)  j 

8^x11  8^x14  f  Long  Size  ] 

f  Size  Input  j 

Specify  the  scan  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  original  size  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


•  If  you  are  sending  a  long  original,  touch  the  [Long  Size]  key.  Use  the  automatic  document  feeder  to  scan  a  long 
original.  The  maximum  length  that  can  be  scanned  is  39-3/8" (1000  mm)  (the  maximum  height  is  11-5/8" 

(297  mm)). 

隊  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  4-28) 

•  To  specify  an  AB  size  for  the  scan  size,  touch  the  [AB 令  Inch]  key  to  highlight  the  [AB]  side  and  then  specify  the 
scan  size. 


Contents 


4-48 


FACSIMILE 


Fax/Original 


Scan  Size  100%  Send  Size 

5V2X8V2  J  ^  1  Auto 


Image  Orientation 

[ 2-Sided  1  2-Sided  j 

I  _  Booklet  丨  |  琶  Tablet  J 

FEB  [sal 

Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  [Long  Size]  is  selected,  the  2-sided  scanning  setting  and  send  size  cannot  be  changed. 


Contents 


4-49 


FACSIMILE 


Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values) 

When  scanning  a  non-standard  size  original  such  as  a  postcard  or  card,  follow  these  steps  to  specify  the  original  size. 
The  width  can  be  from  1 11  to 1 7"  (25  mm  to  432  mm),  and  the  height  can  be  from  1" to 1 1 -5/8"  (25  mm  to  297  mm). 


Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

The  automatically  detected  original  size  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Original]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


OK 


100%  Send  Size 


Auto  8%xll 


I  fe  2 -Sided  1  fftrL  2-Sided 
I  all  Booklet  J  I  LJ  Tablet 


Image  Orientation 

PEI  [  ag 


Touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


Touch  the  [Size  Input]  key. 


(1),(2)  (3) 


1 ― 

Fax/Original 

I  — OK  — 1 

Size  Input 

Cancel  OK 

& 

S  IV 

Bl 

Enter  the  scan  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  [X]  key  and  enter  the  X 
(horizontal)  dimension  with  the  HS  keys. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  Y  (vertical) 
dimension  with  the  keys. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

To  complete  the  setting  and  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3, 
touch  the  [OK]  key  next  to  the  [Cancel]  key. 


Contents 


4-50 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

The  specified  size  appears  in  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


•  When  the  scan  size  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  the  send  size  cannot  be  specified. 

•  When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  an  original  longer  that  17"  (432  mm)  can  be  scanned  (maximum  width 
39-3/8" (1000  mm)).  In  this  case,  touch  the  [Long  Size]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 

暖  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  4-48) 

隊  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  4-28) 


Contents 


4-51 


FACSIMILE 


Specifying  the  send  size  of  the  original 

Specify  the  send  size  as  a  paper  size.  If  a  send  size  bigger  than  the  scan  size  is  selected,  the  image  will  be  enlarged.  If 
a  send  size  smaller  than  the  scan  size  is  selected,  the  image  will  be  reduced. 


The  send  size  cannot  be  specified  when  [Long  Size]  is  selected  for  the  scan  size,  or  when  the  scan  size  is  specified  by 
numerical  values. 


Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


Fax/Original 


Scan  Size  100%  Send  Size 


[ Auto  8V2xll 


[m  E 


2-Sided 

Tablet 


Image  Orientation 

PEil  1001 


Touch  the  [Send  Size]  key. 


(1)  (2) 


1 — 

Fax/Original 

1  ^ OK  ~ 1 

Auto 

|  Manual 

[  5Mx8^  ]  (  8MxllR  j  ■ 

AB 

{  5^x8MR  ]  [8^x13 (213x330)] 

(  8Mxll  |  [  8MX14  ) 

Specify  the  send  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  desired  send  size  key, 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  Depending  on  the  "Scan  Size"  setting,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  select  some  sizes  for  the  "Send  Size".  Size  keys 
that  cannot  be  specified  for  the  "Send  Size"  are  grayed  out  to  prevent  selection. 

•  To  specify  an  AB  size  for  the  send  size,  touch  the  [AB^Inch]  key  to  highlight  the  [AB]  side  and  then  specify  the 
send  size. 


Contents 


4-52 


FACSIMILE 


⑴ (2) 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  [Image  Orientation] 
key. 

If  the  wrong  orientation  is  selected  here,  the  image  may 
not  be  sent  properly  when  using  enlargement/reduction. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


The  ratio  used  for  reduction  or  enlargement  of  the  original  will  appear  between  the  "Scan  Size"  and  the  "Send  Size". 


4-53 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE 

The  exposure  can  be  changed  to  match  the  darkness  of  the  original. 
Refer  the  following  tables  to  select  appropriate  settings. 


Exposure  settings 


Exposure 

When  to  select 

Auto 

This  setting  automatically  adjusts  the  exposure  for  light  and  dark  parts  of  the  original. 

Manual 

1-2 

Select  this  setting  when  the  original  consists  of  dark  text. 

3 

Select  this  setting  for  a  normal  original  (neither  dark  nor  light). 

4-5 

Select  this  setting  when  the  original  consists  of  faint  text. 

Touch  the  [Exposure]  key. 

The  current  exposure  setting  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Exposure]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


Select  the  exposure. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Manual]  key. 

(2)  Adjust  the  exposure  with  the  m  m  keys. 

When  the  exposure  is  set  to  [Auto],  the  ,  (T1  _  )  keys 

cannot  be  used. 

The  exposure  darkens  when  the  I  ]  key  is  touched, 
and  lightens  when  the  i  Q  ]  key  is  touched. 

To  return  to  auto  exposure  adjustment,  touch  the  [Auto] 
key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  using  the  document  glass  to  scan  multiple  original  pages,  the  exposure  setting  can  be  changed  each  time  you  change 
pages.  When  using  the  automatic  document  feeder,  the  exposure  setting  cannot  be  changed  once  scanning  has  begun. 
(However,  when  "Job  Build"  in  the  special  modes  is  used,  the  exposure  can  be  changed  each  time  a  new  set  of  originals  is 
inserted.) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Exposure  Settings 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  exposure  setting. 


4-54 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION 

The  resolution  can  be  selected  to  match  the  characteristics  of  the  original,  such  as  text  or  photo,  the  size  of  the  text,  and 
the  darkness  of  the  image. 

Refer  the  following  tables  to  select  appropriate  settings. 

Resolution  settings 


Resolution 

When  to  select 

Standard 

Select  this  setting  when  your  original  consists  of  normal-sized  text  (like  the  text  in  this  manual). 

Fine 

Select  this  setting  when  your  original  has  small  text  or  diagrams  with  fine  lines. 

The  original  will  be  scanned  at  twice  the  resolution  of  the  [Standard]  setting. 

Super  Fine 

Select  this  setting  when  your  original  has  intricate  pictures  or  diagrams. 

A  higher-quality  image  will  be  produced  than  with  the  [Fine]  setting. 

Ultra  Fine 

Select  this  setting  when  your  original  has  intricate  pictures  or  diagrams. 

This  setting  gives  the  best  image  quality.  However,  transmission  will  take  longer  than  with  the 
other  settings. 

Half  Tone 

Select  this  setting  when  your  original  is  a  photograph  or  has  gradations  of  color  (such  as  a 
color  original). 

This  setting  will  produce  a  clearer  image  than  [Fine],  [Super  Fine],  or  [Ultra  Fine]  used  alone. 
Halftone  cannot  be  selected  when  [Standard]  is  used. 

Touch  the  [Resolution]  key. 

The  current  resolution  setting  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Resolution]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  4-45) 


⑴  (2) 


Select  the  resolution. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  resolution. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  [Fine],  [Super  Fine],  or  [Ultra  Fine]  is  selected,  the  [Half  Tone]  key  can  be  touched  to  select  halftone. 


•  When  using  the  document  glass  to  scan  multiple  original  pages,  the  resolution  setting  can  be  changed  each  time  you  change  pages. 
When  using  the  automatic  document  feeder,  the  resolution  setting  cannot  be  changed  once  scanning  has  begun.  (However,  when 
"Job  Build"  in  the  special  modes  is  used,  the  resolution  can  be  changed  each  time  a  new  set  of  originals  is  inserted.) 

•  When  a  fax  is  sent  at  [Ultra  Fine],  [Super  Fine],  or  [Fine]  resolution,  a  lower  resolution  will  be  used  if  the  receiving  machine 
does  not  have  that  resolution. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Resolution  Setting 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  resolution  setting. 


Contents 


4-55 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE 
TRANSMITTED  (Preview) 

If  you  touch  the  [Preview]  key  before  scanning  the  original,  you  can  check  the  scanned  image  in  the  touch  panel  before 
sending  the  image. 

*  The  factory  default  setting  is  disabled. 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  transmission  data,  part  of  the  preview  image  may  not  appear  in  the  preview  screen  in  the  touch 
panel. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Touch  the  [Preview]  key  to  highlight  it. 


Select  transmission  settings  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

"Originals  are  being  read"  appears  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  and  when  scanning  is  finished,  the  preview  screen 
appears  on  the  touch  panel.  Transmission  will  not  take  place  until  you  touch  the  [Start  Sending]  key  in  the  preview  screen. 


Check  the  preview  image  and  then  touch 
the  [Start  Sending]  key. 

Transmission  begins. 

For  information  on  the  preview  screen,  see  "PREVIEW  CHECK 
SCREEN"  (page  4-57). 


System  settings  (administrator):  Default  Preview 

You  can  specify  whether  or  not  the  [Preview]  key  function  will  be  enabled  in  the  base  screens  of  the  image  send  modes  and 
in  the  address  book. 


Contents 


4-56 


FACSIMILE 


PREVIEW  CHECK  SCREEN 

This  section  explains  the  preview  check  screen. 


(1)  Preview  image 

A  preview  of  the  scanned  original  appears. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and  slide 
it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to  scroll.) 

(2)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages,  use  these  keys  to 
change  pages. 

•  EILS  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page, 
•as  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display: 

This  shows  the  total  number  of  pages 
and  the  current  page  number.  You  can 
touch  the  current  page  number  key  and 
enter  a  number  with  the  numeric  keys 
to  go  to  that  page  number. 


(3)  [Function  Rev.]  key 

Touch  to  check  special  mode  settings  or  scan  settings  for 
two-sided  originals. 

(4)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  "Full  Page",  "Twice", 

■■4  Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in 
the  file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(5)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(6)  [Start  Sending]  key 

Touch  to  begin  transmission. 


•A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  It  will  differ  from  the  actual  send  result. 
•  The  preview  image  reflects  certain  scanning  and  special  mode  settings. 

Settings  reflected  in  the  preview  image  are  as  follows: 

Scanning  settings:  Original 

Special  modes:  Erase,  Dual  Page  Scan,  Card  Shot,  2in1 


4-57 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


FAX  RECEPTION 


This  section  explains  the  basic  procedures  for  receiving  faxes. 


RECEIVING  FAXES 

When  the  reception  mode  is  set  to  "Auto  Reception",  the  machine  will  receive  and  print  faxes  automatically.  The  fax 
reception  mode  is  displayed  in  the  base  screen. 


Internet  Fax 


r 


: TX  | 


ISS  \ 


Address  Review 


Resolution  I  Standard 


] ® 


な. Auto  Reception  j 
pax  Memory: 100% 


This  shows  the  current  fax 
reception  mode  and  the  amount 
of  free  memory  remaining. 


(§) 


When  fax  reception  is  in  progress,  it  is  possible  to  reserve  a  transmission  by  performing  the  transmission  in  memory 
transmission  mode. 

瞭 TRANSMISSION  METHODS  (page  4-25) 

To  print  received  faxes,  make  sure  that  the  required  paper  is  loaded  in  the  machine's  paper  trays.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
load  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  paper  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5)  paper  in  both  the  vertical  (園) and  horizontal  (\M)  orientations. 
Differences  in  orientation  are  automatically  adjusted  when  faxes  are  received. 

When  a  fax  smaller  than  8-1/2"  x  1 1 ■■  (A4)  size  is  received,  the  size  of  the  paper  used  for  printing  will  vary  depending  on  the 
orientation  (vertical  or  horizontal)  in  which  the  sender  placed  the  original. 

System  Settings:  Receive  Setting  (page  7-102) 

This  is  used  to  change  the  fax  reception  mode.  "Auto  Reception"  should  normally  be  used. 

Select  "Manual  Reception"  when  an  extension  phone  is  connected  to  the  machine. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Allow/Reject  Number  Setting 

You  can  store  numbers  and  specify  whether  or  not  reception  is  allowed  from  those  numbers. 


4-58 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


RECEIVING  A  FAX 

When  a  fax  is  transmitted  to  the  machine,  the  machine  automatically  receives  and  prints  the  fax. 


The  machine  rings  and  fax  reception 
begins  automatically. 

A  beep  sounds  when  reception  ends. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Speaker  Settings 

This  is  used  to  change  the  volume  and  tone  of  the  reception  beep. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Number  of  Calls  in  Auto  Reception 

This  is  used  to  change  the  number  of  rings  on  which  fax  reception  begins  automatically.  To  receive  faxes  without 
the  machine  ringing,  select  "0"  rings. 


The  fax  is  automatically  printed. 


•  If  a  password  entry  screen  appears... 

A  password  must  be  entered  to  print  the  received  fax.  When  the  correct  password  is  entered,  the  received  fax  is 
printed. 

暖 PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX  (Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print)  (page  4-61) 

•  The  output  tray  and  stapling  (when  a  finisher  is  installed)  can  be  selected. 

The  number  of  copies  of  received  faxes  that  are  printed  and  the  output  tray  can  be  selected.  When  a  finisher  is 
installed,  the  number  of  copies  printed,  the  output  tray,  and  stapling  can  be  selected. 


•If  printing  of  a  copy  job  or  print  job  is  in  progress  when  a  fax  is  received,  the  fax  will  not  be  printed  until  the  previously 
reserved  job  is  completed. 

•  Received  faxes  will  not  be  printed  when  the  machine  cannot  print  due  to  an  error  condition  such  as  out  of  paper,  out  of 
toner,  or  a  paper  misfeed.  The  faxes  will  be  printed  automatically  when  the  error  condition  is  cleared.  (If  the  machine  ran 
out  of  paper,  touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  touch  panel  after  loading  paper. 

•  When  received  faxes  cannot  be  printed,  the  faxes  can  be  forwarded  to  another  fax  machine. 

隊 FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  (Fax  Data  Forward)  (page  4-64) 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Duplex  Reception  Setting 

This  is  used  to  have  received  faxes  printed  on  both  sides  of  the  paper. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print 

Use  this  to  select  whether  or  not  the  date  and  time  of  reception  is  added  when  a  received  image  is  printed. 


Contents 


4-59 


FACSIMILE 


RECEIVING  A  FAX  MANUALLY 


A  fax  can  be  received  manually  using  the  touch  panel.  While  the  machine  rings,  touch  the  [Speaker]  key  in  the  base 
screen  and  then  touch  the  [Fax  Manual  Reception]  key  that  appears. 


[speaker  Volume^ 


Address  Review! 


f  Exposure 


Resolution  j  Standard 


[W] 


Fax  Memory : 100% 


Fax  Manual 
Reception 


When  a  call  is  answered  by  touching  the  [Speaker]  key,  you  will  be  able  to  hear  the  other  party,  however,  you  will  not  be 
able  to  speak. 

Even  when  you  use  an  extension  phone  to  answer  a  call,  you  can  touch  the  [Fax  Manual  Reception]  key  in  the  touch  panel 
to  begin  fax  reception.  You  can  also  use  the  extension  phone  to  begin  fax  reception. 

^RECEIVING  A  FAX  AFTER  ANSWERING  A  CALL  ON  THE  EXTENSION  PHONE  (Remote  Reception)  (page  4-124) 


4-60 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX 
(Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print) 

"Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  can  be  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  to  have  faxes  received  to 
memory  without  being  printed.  To  print  the  faxes,  a  password  must  be  entered.  When  this  function  is  used,  a  password 
entry  screen  appears  in  the  touch  panel  when  a  fax  is  received. 


Received  data  is  stored. 

Enter  password  via  the  10 -key. 


When  the  previously  programmed  4-digit  password  is  entered  with  the  numeric  keys,  printing  begins. 

The  [Cancel]  key  can  be  touched  to  close  the  password  entry  screen.  If  this  is  done,  the  data  in  memory  key  (回) will 
blink  in  the  touch  panel.  The  password  entry  screen  will  reappear  when  you  touch  the  blinking  key  (L^j)  or  change 
modes. 

When  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  a  password  can  be 
entered  to  display  the  received  data  list  screen.  If  you  wish  to  check  an  image  before  printing  it,  continue  from  step  1 on 
the  next  page. 


•  The  received  faxes  will  be  retained  in  memory  regardless  of  whether  they  were  received  automatically  or  manually. 
•If  "Fax  Data  Receive/Forward 11  is  executed  in  the  system  settings  to  forward  received  faxes  to  another  machine,  faxes 
retained  in  memory  will  also  be  forwarded.  At  that  time,  the  same  password  entry  screen  as  for  printing  will  appear. 
Forwarding  will  not  take  place  unless  the  password  is  entered. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print 

Enable  this  setting  to  have  received  faxes  retained  in  memory  until  a  password  is  entered.  This  setting  is  also  used  to 
program  the  password. 


4-61 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING 


When  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled*  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  you  can  check  a  received 
image  in  the  touch  panel  before  printing  it  out.  When  this  function  is  enabled,  follow  the  steps  below  to  print  a  received  image. 
*  The  factory  default  setting  is  disabled. 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  received  data,  part  of  the  image  in  the  image  check  screen  on  the  touch  panel  may  not  appear. 


The  memory  has  received  data. 
Check  the  data? 


If  ) 


When  an  image  is  received,  a  confirmation 
prompt  will  appear.  Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

If  this  message  appears  while  you  are  configuring  settings  of 
any  type  and  you  touch  the  [Yes]  key,  the  settings  that  you  are 
configuring  will  be  cancelled.  If  this  message  appears  in 
another  mode,  you  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  image  send 
mode  after  checking  the  image. 


(1) 


(2) 


Select  the  received  image 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  received  image  that 
you  want  to  check. 

Multiple  received  images  can  be  checked. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Image  Check]  key, 

•  To  show  thumbnails  of  the  received  images,  touch  the 
[Thumbnail]  key. 

•  To  delete  an  image  that  has  been  selected,  touch  the 
[Delete]  key.  To  print  an  image  that  has  been  selected, 
touch  the  [Print]  key. 


When  the  [Select  All]  key  is  touched,  it  will  change  into  the  [Cancel  All]  key.  When  all  received  data  has  been  selected 
using  the  [Select  All]  key,  the  selection  can  be  canceled  by  touching  the  [Cancel  All]  key. 


Check  the  received  image  and  then 
touch  the  [Print]  key. 

Printing  begins. 

For  information  on  the  image  check  screen,  see  "IMAGE 
CHECK  SCREEN11  (page  4-63). 


If  the  screen  of  step  1  appears  when  you  are  configuring  settings  in  the  setting  screens  of  any  of  the  modes,  the  configured 
settings  will  be  cancelled  if  you  view  the  image.  After  viewing  the  image,  you  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  image  send 
mode,  regardless  of  which  mode  you  were  in  previously. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting 

Use  this  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  received  fax  can  be  viewed  before  it  is  printed. 


4-62 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN 

This  section  explains  the  image  check  screen. 


(1)  Information  display 

This  shows  information  on  the  displayed  image. 

(2)  Preview  image 

An  image  of  the  selected  received  image  appears. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and 
slide  it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to 
scroll.) 

(3)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages,  use  these  keys  to 
change  pages. 

•  N]  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page, 
•aa  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display:  This  shows  the  total  number  of 

pages  and  the  current  page 
number.  You  can  touch  the 
current  page  number  key  and 
enter  a  number  with  the 
numeric  keys  to  go  to  that  page 
number. 


(4)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(5)  [Print]  key 

Touch  to  start  printing. 

(6)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  "Full  Page",  "Twice", 
"4  Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in 
the  file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(7)  Image  select  key 

When  multiple  images  are  selected  for  preview  display, 
use  this  to  change  the  displayed  images. 


A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  It  will  differ  from  the  actual  print  result. 


Contents 


4-63 


FACSIMILE 


FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES 
(Fax  Data  Forward) 

When  the  machine  cannot  print  because  it  is  out  of  paper  or  out  of  toner,  received  faxes  can  be  forwarded  to  another 
previously  programmed  fax  machine. 

This  function  is  convenient  in  an  office  or  work  area  that  has  two  or  more  telephone  lines  and  another  fax  machine  is 
connected  to  a  different  line  than  the  machine. 


The  machine  The  machine  cannot  print 


Forwarding 

destination 


Received  fax 


Printing 


Forwarding  of  received  faxes  is  executed  in  the  system  settings  of  the  machine.  Press  the  [SYSTEM  SETTINGS]  key  on 
the  operation  panel  to  display  the  system  setting  menu  screen  in  the  touch  panel.  Select  [Fax  Data  Receive/Forward]  - 
[Fax  Settings],  and  then  touch  the  key  that  executes  received  fax  forwarding. 


•If  some  pages  of  a  fax  that  is  being  forwarded  were  successfully  printed,  only  those  pages  that  were  not  printed  will  be 
forwarded. 

•A  forwarded  fax  becomes  a  fax  transmission  job.  If  transmission  does  not  take  place  because  the  transmission  was 
canceled  or  an  error  occurred,  the  fax  will  be  held  in  memory  until  it  can  be  printed. 

•  All  faxes  received  are  forwarded.  Note,  however,  that  faxes  received  to  an  F-code  confidential  memory  box  cannot  be 
forwarded. 


•  If  a  password  entry  screen  appears  after  touching  the  [OK]  key,  "Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  has  been  enabled. 
Enter  the  password  with  the  numeric  keys  to  begin  forwarding. 

隊 PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX  (Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print)  (page  4-61) 


•  System  Settings:  Fax  Data  Receive/Forward  (page  7-20) 

Use  this  to  forward  received  faxes  when  the  machine  is  unable  to  print. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Set  the  Telephone  Number  for  Data  Forwarding 

This  is  used  to  store  the  forwarding  fax  number. 


4-64 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  TO  A 
NETWORK  ADDRESS 
(Inbound  Routing  Settings) 

You  can  have  received  faxes  automatically  forwarded  to  an  e-mail  address,  file  server  address,  desktop  address,  or 
network  folder  address.  This  function  can  be  used  to  forward  received  faxes  to  a  specified  address  without  printing  them. 


•  This  function  cannot  be  used  for  faxes  received  by  confidential  reception. 

•  When  faxes  forwarded  using  this  function  are  printed  at  the  forwarding  destination,  the  date  and  time  of  reception  cannot 
be  printed  on  the  faxes.  ("Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print"  is  disabled.) 


CONFIGURING  INBOUND  ROUTING  SETTINGS 


All  inbound  routing  settings  are  configured  in  the  Web  pages.  For  the  procedure  for  accessing  the  Web  pages,  see  the 
Quick  Start  Guide. 

The  following  explanation  assumes  that  the  Web  pages  have  been  accessed  with  administrator  rights. 

To  configure  inbound  routing  settings,  follow  the  steps  below. 


Administration  Settings 


[So6»wl<Uj  R|  ) 


|  Inbound  Routing  Scdingt 

Inbound  Routing 

□  Dttjibl#  R^gistnrtion  ol  Foiwwri 

口  of  Forwmt$  TaMt 

LJ  Dtsablt  Chan^t  of  Forward  Appcovil 
Pfint  Scylt  SfCting 


[Submit  ][Up<l«*(R|  ] 


|h<mi)I 


O  Print  Out  AAR«po(t 
®  Pfim  飙  Enoi 


B»ck  \o  tNt  Top  on  Tbrt  P»g«  4 


Enabling  the  inbound  routing  function. 

(1)  In  the  Web  page  menu,  click  [Application 
Settings],  [Inbound  Routing  Settings],  and 
then  [Administration  Settings]. 

(2)  Select  [Enable]  in  "Inbound  Routing"  and 
click  the  [Submit]  button. 


Users  without  administrator  rights  can  be  prohibited  from  storing,  editing,  and  deleting  forwarding  tables  in  this  screen, 
and  from  specifying  which  table  is  used.  To  do  so,  select  the  checkboxes  below  0. 


•  Disable  Registration  of  Forward  Table  •  Disable  Change/Delete  of  Forward  Table  •  Disable  Change  of  Forward 
Approval 

When  inbound  routing  is  enabled,  you  can  also  specify  whether  or  not  you  wish  the  machine  to  print  the  forwarded 
faxes. 

To  have  all  received  faxes  printed  before  being  forwarded,  select  "Print  Out  All  Report"  in  "Print  Style  Setting".  To 
have  received  faxes  printed  only  when  an  error  prevents  forwarding,  select  "Print  at  Error". 

After  configuring  the  settings,  be  sure  to  click  the  [Submit]  button. 


4-65 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Sender  Number/Address  Registration 


I  Submit(U)  ]  [  Update(R)  I 

Address  to  be  Entered: 

012345678 

abc@aaa.bbb.ccc 


Delete(O)  I 


I  Help(l)  | 


Fax  Number: 


コ (Up  to  1500 

characters) 

(  Global  Address  Search(C)  j 

[ Add  to  L_  1 


Internet  Fax  Address:  丨  丨 (Up  to  1500 

characters) 

l  Global  Address  Search(N)  ) 

[ Add  to  List(M)  | 

Back  to  the  Top  on  This  Page  4 

I  Submit fU)  |[Update(R)  I 


Storing  sender  addresses. 

If  you  wish  to  have  only  faxes  from  specified  addresses 
forwarded,  store  the  desired  sender  addresses.  Send 
addresses  stored  here  can  be  selected  from  a  list  when  you 
store  a  forwarding  table. 

(1)  Click  [Sender  Number/Address 
Registration]  in  the  [Inbound  Routing 
Settings]  menu  in  the  Web  page. 

(2)  Enter  the  sender  address  in  "Internet  Fax 
Address"  or  "Fax  Number"  as  appropriate, 
and  click  the  [Add  to  List]  button. 

The  entered  address  will  be  added  to  the  "Address  to  be 
Entered"  list. 

•  Specify  whether  the  address  will  be  directly  entered 
(maximum  of  1500  characters)  or  selected  from  a 
global  address  book  by  clicking  the  [Global  Address 
Search]  button. 

•  To  store  multiple  addresses,  repeat  this  step. 

(3)  When  you  have  finished  adding  addresses, 
click  the  [Submit]  button. 


•A  maximum  of  500  sender  numbers/addresses  can  be  stored. 

•To  delete  an  entered  address,  select  the  address  in  "Address  to  be  Entered"  and  click  the  [Delete]  button. 


4-66 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


(2)  (3)(4) 


(8)  (7)  (6)  (5) 


Store  a  forwarding  table. 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  store  a  forwarding  table  that 

combines  a  specified  sender  and  forwarding  address. 

(1)  Click  [Inbound  Routing  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu  and  click  the  [Add]  button. 

(2)  Enter  a  "Table  Name". 

(3)  Select  the  line  used  for  reception. 

(4)  Select  the  sender  whose  faxes  will  be 
forwarded. 

•  To  forward  all  received  faxes,  select  [Forward  All 
Received  Data]. 

•  To  forward  only  data  received  from  specific  senders, 
select  [Forward  Received  Data  from  Below  Sender]. 

To  forward  all  data  except  data  from  specific  senders, 
select  [Forward  Received  Data  from  Senders  except 
Below].  Select  the  appropriate  senders  from  the  list  and 
click  the  [Add]  button. 

(5)  Select  the  forwarding  conditions. 

•  To  always  forward  received  data,  select  [Always 
Forward]. 

•  To  specify  a  day  and  time  on  which  received  data  will 
be  forwarded,  select  [Forward  on  Selected  Day  &  Time] 
and  select  the  checkbox  0  of  the  desired  day  of  the 
week.  To  specify  a  time,  select  the  [Set  Forwarding 
Time]  checkbox  [  and  specify  the  time. 

(6)  Select  the  file  format. 

The  format  can  be  set  separately  for  each  forwarding 
address  (for  each  of  forwarding  addresses  1, 2,  and  3  in 
the  table). 

(7)  Select  the  forwarding  address. 

Forwarding  addresses  can  be  selected  from  the 
machine's  address  book.  (Multiple  addresses  can  be 
selected.)  A  maximum  of  1000  forwarding  addresses  can 
be  stored  (a  combined  maximum  of  100  file  server, 
desktop,  and  network  folder  addresses  can  be  stored). 

(8)  Click  [Submit]. 


•  When  selecting  senders  from  the  "Sender  Number/Address  Setting"  list,  you  can  use  the  [Shift]  key  or  the  [Ctrl]  key 
on  your  keyboard  to  select  multiple  senders. 

•A  maximum  of  50  forwarding  tables  can  be  stored. 

•  Images  sent  in  TIFF  format  may  not  display  correctly  in  some  recipient  environments.  In  this  event,  change  the  file 
format  to  PDF. 

•  Up  to  three  forwarding  day  and  time  settings  can  be  set  for  one  forwarding  table,  and  a  forwarding  destination  can 
be  set  for  each  set  time.  To  configure  these  settings,  use  the  forwarding  list  tabs  to  access  each  setting. 

•  When  the  forwarding  destination  is  a  file  server,  desktop,  or  shared  folder,  the  computer  of  that  destination  must  be 
powered  on. 


4-67 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Inbound  Routing  Settings 

1  Login(P)  | 

fH^ipFI 

|  Submit(U)  ||  Update(R)  | 

Inbound  Routing  Settings:  Enable 

Display  Items:  110  v 

Forward  Destination  1 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 
O  Forward  on  Sele 

cted  Day  &Time 

Forward  Destination  2 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  3 

©Not  Forward 
〇  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  1 

□  Table  2 

©Not  Forward 
〇  Always  Forward 

O  Forward  on  Selected  Day  &Time 

Forward  Destination  2 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  1 

®  Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

O  Forward  on  Selected  Day  &Time 

□  Table  3  c  n  n 

Forward  Destination  2 

©Not  Forward 
〇  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  3 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Total  Table:3 

[ Previous(M)  ]  y^\  [  Next(N) ] 

|  Select  AII(S)  1 1  Clear  Checked の  | 

|  Delete(O) ] 

|[  Add(Y)  | 

Back  to  the  Top  on  This  Page  ▲ 

|Subrr>it(U) 

II  Update(R)  | 

Specifying  forwarding  tables  to  be  used. 

To  use  the  inbound  routing  function,  enable  the  forwarding 
tables  that  you  wish  to  use  from  among  the  stored  tables. 

(1)  Click  [Inbound  Routing  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu. 

(2)  Select  [Always  Forward]  or  [Forward  on 
Selected  Day  &  Time]  from  the  forwarding 
table. 

The  forwarding  permission  settings  that  appear  here  are 
linked  to  the  forwarding  conditions  set  in  step  3.  If  you 
wish  to  use  different  forwarding  conditions  than  those  set 
in  step  3,  set  the  forwarding  permission  settings 

(3)  Click  [Submit]. 


To  delete  a  forwarding  table,  click  the  checkbox  next  to  the  table  name  so  that  it  is  selected  |  and  click  [Delete]. 


4-68 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


V  Venf .  |  下  Transactioi 

I  uJ  Stamp  I  _ Report 


i  Name 
jlect 


ft 


2 

a 

a 


(1) - 

Program 

(2) - 

Erase 

(1 2 3 4 卜 離 

f5 6 7}m  ^ 

v  Arj=n  Mixed  S 
|  哪 Origin, 

ize  r-,  Slo^ 

al  |  try  ^ 

^  Original 

| し國  Count 

-(1M - 

File 

-/1 2) 

P  Quick 

SPECIAL  MODES 


This  section  explains  special  modes  that  can  be  used  for  fax  transmission. 


SPECIAL  MODES 

When  the  [Special  Modes]  key  is  touched  in  the  base  screen,  the  special  modes  menu  screen  appears.  The  special 
modes  menu  consists  of  two  screens.  Touch  the  \±]  Q  key  to  switch  between  the  two  screens.  When  the  [OK]  key  is 
touched  in  the  special  modes  screen,  the  selected  settings  are  entered  and  the  base  screen  reappears. 

1st  screen  2nd  screen 


(1)  [Program]  key 

隊  STORING  FAX  OPERATIONS  (Program)  (page 
4-71) 

(2)  [Erase]  key 

^  ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase)  (page  4-73) 

(3)  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key 

^  TRANSMITTING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO 

SEPARATE  PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan)  (page  4-75) 

(4)  [Timer]  key 

隊  SENDING  A  FAX  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME  (Timer) 
(page  4-77) 

(5)  [2in1]  key 

隊  SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE  (2in1) 
(page  4-79) 

(6)  [Card  Shot]  key 

^  SENDING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  AS  A  SINGLE 
PAGE  (Card  Shot)  (page  4-82) 

(7)  [Job  Build]  key 

隊  SENDING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF  PAGES  (Job 
Build)  (page  4-85) 


(8)  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key 

^TRANSMITTING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 
SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original)  (page  4-87) 

(9)  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key 

暖  FAXING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode)  (page 
4-89) 

(10)  [Original  Count]  key 

暖  CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  TRANSMISSION 
(Original  Count)  (page  4-91) 

(11)  [File]  key 

Touch  this  to  use  the  File  function  of  document  filing 
mode. 

(12)  [Quick  File]  key 

Touch  this  to  use  the  Quick  File  function  of  document 
filing  mode. 

(13)  [Verif.  Stamp]  key* 

瞭  STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif.  Stamp) 
(page  4-93) 


Contents 


1 2 S a 


4-69 


FACSIMILE 


(14)  [Transaction  Report]  key 

隊  CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 
TRANSACTION  REPORT  (Transaction  Report) 
(page  4-95) 

(15)  [Own  Name  Select]  key 

隊  TEMPORARILY  CHANGING  THE  SENDER 
INFORMATION  (Own  Name  Select)  (page  4-98) 


(16)  [Memory  Box]  key 

暖  SENDING  A  FAX  WHEN  ANOTHER  MACHINE 
POLLS  YOUR  MACHINE  (Polling  Memory)  (page 
4-102) 

(17)  [Polling]  key 

瞭  CALLING  A  FAX  MACHINE  AND  INITIATING 
RECEPTION  (Polling)  (page  4-99) 


Does  not  appear  when  the  stamp  unit  is  not  installed. 


Special  modes  can  generally  be  combined  with  other  special  modes,  however,  there  are  some  combinations  that  are  not 
possible.  If  a  prohibited  combination  is  selected,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  touch  panel. 


[OK]  key  and  [Cancel]  key 

In  some  cases  two  [OK]  keys  and  one  [Cancel]  key  will  appear  in  the  special  mode  screens.  The  keys  are  used  as 
follows: 


(A)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  setting  and  return  to  the  base  screen. 

(B)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  setting  and  return  to  the  special  modes  menu  screen.  Touch  this  key  when  you 
wish  to  continue  selecting  other  special  mode  settings. 

(C)  During  selection  of  special  mode  settings,  this  key  returns  you  to  the  special  modes  menu  screen  without  saving  the 
settings.  When  settings  have  been  completed,  this  cancels  the  settings  and  returns  you  to  the  special  modes  menu 
screen. 


4-70 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


STORING  FAX  OPERATIONS  (Program) 

A  program  is  a  group  of  transmission  settings  stored  together.  When  transmission  settings  are  stored  in  a  program,  the 
settings  can  be  retrieved  and  used  for  a  fax  job  by  means  of  a  simple  operation. 

For  example,  suppose  that  the  same  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  size  documents  are  distributed  to  branch  offices  in  various 
regions  once  a  month. 

(1)  The  same  documents  are  faxed  to  each  branch  office 

(2)  To  save  paper,  two  document  pages  are  faxed  as  a  single  page 

(3)  Smudges  on  the  edges  of  the  documents  are  erased  before  transmission 

8-1/2"  x  1 1" (A4)  size  Fax  received  by  recipients, 

documents  to  be  distributed 


Programs  are  stored,  edited,  and  deleted  using  "Address  Control"  in  the  system  settings.  See  "Program"  (page 
7-19)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 

•  Programs  can  also  be  stored  using  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Job  Programs]  and  then  [Image  Send]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

•  The  settings  stored  in  a  program  will  be  retained  even  after  the  program  is  used  for  transmission.  The  same  settings  can 
be  used  repeatedly  for  transmission. 

•  The  following  settings  can  be  stored  in  programs. 

Destinations:  One-touch  keys,  group  keys,  search  numbers 

Image  settings:  Original  scan  size,  Image  orientation,  duplex  scanning,  exposure,  resolution 

Special  modes:  Polling  reception,  Erase,  Dual  Page  Scan,  Job  Build,  Mixed  Size  Original,  Slow  Scan  Mode, 

Original  Count,  Verif.  Stamp,  2in1 

Preview 

F-code  communication:  A  destination  that  includes  an  F-code  can  be  stored  to  perform  an  F-code  operation. 

•  Up  to  48  programs  can  be  stored. 

•  Up  to  500  destinations  can  be  stored  in  each  program. 


When  a  job  program  is  not  stored 

When  a  job  program  is  stored 

Enter  the  fax  numbers  of  the  branch  offices 

及 

Retrieve  the  stored  program. 

及 

▼ 

Select  the  2in1  function. 

+ 

▼ 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

The  originals  are  scanned  and  transmitted. 

Select  erase  settings 

及 

▼ 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

The  originals  are  scanned  and  transmitted. 

Considerable  time  is  required  to  send  the  documents  each 
month  because  the  above  settings  must  be  selected. 

In  addition,  mistakes  may  occasionally  be  made  when 
selecting  the  settings,  so  incorrect  transmissions  may  occur. 

When  a  program  is  stored,  settings  are  selected  with  ease  by 
simply  pressing  the  program  key. 

In  addition,  transmission  takes  place  based  on  the  stored 
settings  so  there  are  no  chances  for  mistakes. 

I  ■ 

n 


□圓 □コ 

□  □□ E 


s 

nt 

e 

nt 

o 

c 


V. 


FACSIMILE 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  as  appropriate  for  the  functions  stored  in  the 
program. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Program]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


(1) 


(2) 


Retrieve  the  stored  program. 

(1)  Touch  the  desired  program  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Scan  1  Internet  Fax  |  Fax  |  USB  Mem.  Scan  [  PC  Scan 

f  Original  _  Scan:  Send: 

[  Exposure  j 

[ Resolution  j  Standard 

f Address  Review 

[ Special  Modes  ]  |  [T||  j 

File 


Quick  File 


な ••Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory : 100% 


Select  additional  settings. 

When  a  program  is  used,  the  following  settings  can  be 
additionally  specified: 

•  Image  settings:  Original  scan  size*,  send  size 

•  Special  modes:  Timer  Transmission,  Card  Shot,  File,  Quick 

File,  Own  Name  Select,  Transaction  Report 

•  When  stored  in  the  program,  this  cannot  be  additionally 
specified. 


•  The  screen  that  appears  will  vary  depending  on  the  destination  stored  in  the  program. 

•  The  mode  cannot  be  changed  here. 

•  Functions  stored  in  the  program  cannot  be  canceled  here. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Contents 


4-72 


FACSIMILE 


ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase) 

The  erase  function  is  used  to  erase  shadows  on  images  produced  when  scanning  thick  originals  or  books.  (This  function 
erases  the  parts  of  the  image  where  shadows  tend  to  form.  The  function  does  not  detect  shadows  and  erase  only  the 
shadows.) 


Scanning  a  thick  book 


Not  using  the  erase 
function 


Using  the  erase 
function 


□ 


No  shadows  appear. 


Erase  modes 


Edge  Erase 


Center  Erase 


Edge  +  Center  Erase 


Side  Erase 


三 p 

ニ ロ —— 

三  口  !=□:: 

!  |  !  1 

三 □ 

' - J 

— — 

1  1 

パ —— r 

Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

暖  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Erase]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


4-73 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


⑴  P) ⑶ 


Select  the  erase  settings. 

(1) Touch  the  desired  erase  mode. 

Select  one  of  the  4  erase  modes. 

Touch  the  [Side  Erase]  key  to  open  the  following  screen. 


Erase 

Side  Erase 

_ 

Cancel  |(  OK  j 

□di 

) 

Erase  position 
for  Original  Side  2 

i 

LeftQ 

j~j  Right 

□Dc 

>wn 

[Different  Side 

1  from  Side  1 

Touch  the  checkbox  of  the  edge  that  you  wish  to  erase 
and  make  sure  that  a  checkmark  (i>/|)  appears. 

When  performing  two-sided  scanning,  set  the  erase  edge 
on  the  reverse  side. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Same  Side  as  Side  1] key,  the  edge  in 
the  same  position  as  on  the  front  side  will  be  erased. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Different  Side  from  Side  1], the  edge  in 
the  position  opposite  to  the  erased  edge  on  the  front 
side  will  be  erased. 

When  you  have  completed  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 

(2)  Set  the  erasure  width  with  the  keys, 

0"  to 1 11  (0  mm  to  20  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


When  the  erase  function  is  used,  erase  takes  place  at  the  edges  of  the  original  image.  If  you  also  use  a  reduction  or  an 
enlargement  setting,  the  erase  width  will  change  according  to  the  selected  ratio.  For  example,  if  the  erase  width  setting  is  1 
(20  mm)  and  the  image  is  reduced  to  50%,  the  erase  width  will  be  1/2" (10  mm). 


@To  cancel  an  erase  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Erase  Width  Adjustment 

The  default  erase  width  setting  is  linked  to  the  copy  mode  system  setting,  and  can  be  set  from  0"  to 1" (0  mm  to  20  mm).  The 
factory  default  setting  is  1/2" (10  mm). 


Contents 


4-74 


FACSIMILE 


TRANSMITTING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO 
SEPARATE  PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan) 

The  left  and  right  sides  of  an  original  can  be  transmitted  as  two  separate  pages.  This  function  is  useful  when  you  wish  to 
fax  the  left  and  right  pages  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document  as  separate  pages. 


Example:  Faxing  the  left  and  right  pages  of  a  book 


Example: 


Original  scan  size 

Transmitted  image 

11nx17"  (A3)  x  1  page 

8-1/2Mx11M  (A4)  x  2  pages 

•  When  using  dual  page  scan,  the  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  The  send  size  cannot  be  changed. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 

Align  the  center  of  the  original  with  the  appropriate  size  mark 


Size  mark 

圔 

▼  ▼ 

_  •  i 

r 

Centerline  of 

Centerline  of 

A3  original 

11nx17"  original 

B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


Contents 


4-75 


FACSIMILE 


Program  j 

i  f  -ase  (shhi 

Timer 

[画 2  ini 

Card  Shot 

ユ I 

P-n  Slow  Scan 
Mode 

lan 丨 心  | 

Quick  File 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


© 


To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


@ マ 


To  erase  shadows  caused  by  the  binding  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document,  use  the  erase  function.  (Note,  however,  that 
Center  Erase"  and  "Edge  +  Center  Erase"  cannot  be  used.) 

When  the  scan  size  of  the  original  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  this  function  cannot  be  used. 


© 


To  cancel  Dual  Page  Scan... 

Touch  the  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


Contents 


Select  Dual  Page  Scan. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

瞭  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


1 1 0 0 


4-76 


FACSIMILE 


SENDING  A  FAX  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME 
(Timer) 

When  this  function  is  used,  transmission  takes  place  automatically  at  a  specified  time. 

The  timer  transmission  function  makes  it  easy  to  perform  reserved  transmissions,  broadcast  transmissions  and  other 
transmissions  at  night  or  other  times  when  phone  rates  are  low. 

A  timer  setting  can  also  be  specified  for  polling  reception  to  receive  a  fax  when  you  are  not  present. 


n. 


During  the  day,  set  up  a  At  20:00,  the  broadcast 

broadcast  transmission  to  transmission  begins  automatically 

take  place  at  20:00  (Transmission  to  the  first  destination 

takes  place) 


When  a  timer  transmission  is  set,  keep  the  main  power  switch  on  .  Transmission  will  not  take  place  if  the  main  power  is 
turned  off  at  the  specified  time. 

When  performing  a  timer  transmission,  you  must  scan  the  original  into  memory  when  you  set  up  the  transmission.  It  is  not 
possible  to  leave  the  document  in  the  auto  document  feeder  or  on  the  document  glass  and  have  it  scanned  at  the  reserved 
time  of  transmission. 

Settings  selected  for  a  timer  transmission  (exposure,  resolution,  special  modes,  etc.)  are  automatically  cleared  after  the 
transmission  is  finished.  (However,  when  the  document  filing  function  is  used,  the  scanned  original  and  settings  are  stored 
on  the  built-in  hard  drive.) 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Timer]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


□  □□「 
□  □□r 


4-77 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


⑴  (2)  (3) 


Fax/Special  Modes 

0 

= i ~ j 

timer 

Cancel 

OK 

Day  of 

the  Week 

Time 

■ 

BL  SOL 

QQ 

S3  Q  Q 

Set  the  time  with  the  _  _  keys. 

(1)  Specify  the  day. 

If  you  do  not  wish  to  specify  a  day,  select  [---].  In  this 
case,  transmission  will  begin  when  the  time  specified  in 
(2)  arrives. 

(2)  Specify  the  time  (hour,  minute) 

Select  the  time  in  24-hour  format. 

You  can  also  directly  touch  a  numeric  display  key  to 
change  the  setting  with  the  numeric  keys. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


When  this  screen  is  opened,  the  setting  will  show  the  current  time.  If  the  time  is  not  correct,  press  the  [CLEAR  ALL] 
key  (©)  to  cancel  the  operation.  Correct  the  time  in  the  system  settings  and  then  perform  the  timer  transmission 
procedure. 

隊  CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME  (page  4-6) 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


•  The  time  can  be  specified  up  to  a  week  in  advance. 

•  Up  to  94  timer  transmissions  can  be  stored  at  once. 

•  Only  one  timer  polling  operation  can  be  stored  at  once.  If  you  wish  to  poll  multiple  machines,  store  a  serial  polling  timer 
operation. 

•If  another  transmission  is  in  progress  when  the  specified  time  arrives,  the  timer  operation  will  begin  after  that  transmission 
is  finished. 


•  Other  operations  can  be  performed  after  a  timer  transmission  is  set  up. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  direct  transmission  mode  or  when  the  speaker  is  used  to  dial. 

•  If  a  timer  transmission  is  given  priority  in  the  job  status  screen,  the  time  specification  is  canceled.  The  transmission  will 
begin  as  soon  as  the  job  in  progress  is  completed. 

暖  GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  RESERVED  FAX  JOB  (page  4-133) 


@To  cancel  timer  transmission... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


Contents 


4-78 


FACSIMILE 


SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE 
(2in1) 

Two  original  pages  can  be  reduced  and  sent  as  a  single  page.  This  function  is  convenient  when  you  have  a  large 
number  of  original  pages  and  wish  to  reduce  the  number  of  pages  sent. 

Portrait-oriented  originals 


Transmission 


Landscape-oriented  originals  Transmission 


Place  the  original. 


When  placing  the  originals,  orient  them  as  shown  below. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


4-79 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Select  2in1. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

瞭  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [2in1]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Scan 

Internet  Fax  1  Fax  1  USB  Mem.  Scan  1  PC  Scan 

1  ►Address  Book 

[  Original  j  Scan:  Send: 

[ Direct  TX  ] 

1  y  I  ^9 

[ Sub  Address  \ 

[|  Resolution  ]  Standard 

| Address  Review 

[ Special  Modes  j  |  [T|| 

File 

1  Quick  File  | 

[ — i  W  Fa,=:r 

Touch  the  [Original]  key. 


(1) (2) 


Scan  Size  100%  Send  Size 


Auto  8^x11 


=」匬 


2 -Sided 
Tablet  


Image  Orientation 


PBil  f  00 1 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  [Image  Orientation] 
key. 

If  this  setting  is  not  correct,  a  suitable  image  may  not  be 
transmitted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  in  the  scan-end  confirmation  screen  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan 
size,  and  send  size.  (However,  when  scanning  each  even-numbered  page  of  the  original,  only  the  exposure  can  be 
changed.) 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Contents 


a a 


4-80 


FACSIMILE 


•  Transmission  is  not  possible  at  a  size  smaller  than  the  original  size. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  direct  transmission  mode  or  when  the  speaker  is  used  to  dial. 

•  The  2in1  function  cannot  be  used  when  the  original  is  other  than  8-1/2"  x  1 T  (A4)  or  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5  or  A5)  size. 

•  When  the  scan  size  of  the  original  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  this  function  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  2in1... 

Touch  the  [2in1]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


4-81 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


SENDING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  AS  A 
SINGLE  PAGE  (Card  Shot) 

This  function  lets  you  send  the  front  and  reverse  sides  of  a  card  as  a  single  page,  without  the  need  to  send  each  side 
separately. 

Transmitted  image 


Originals 


Front 


Back 


Transmission 


_  Example  of  an  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 

Example  of  an  8-1/2"  x  1 1" (A4)  size  landscape  scan  transmission 
size  portrait  scan  transmission 


When  using  card  shot,  the  original  must  be  scanned  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 

B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Card  Shot]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 


4-82 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


(i) 


(A) 


Fax/ Special  Modes 


S3 


a 

m 


(1~8 1 
inch 


■i は1 


aa 


(B)  (2) 


Is, 


OK  J 


Fit  to  I 
lend  Size  I 


Y 

X 

Specify  the  original  size. 

(1)  Enter  the  original  size. 

•  Touch  the  [X]  key  and  enter  the  horizontal  dimension 
(X)  of  the  original  with  the  ェ J  Q  keys. 

•  Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  vertical  dimension  (Y) 
of  the  original  with  the  Q  Q  keys. 

(A)  To  return  the  original  size  to  the  default  size,  touch 
the  [Size  Reset]  key. 

(B)  To  automatically  enlarge  or  reduce  the  image  size  to 
the  send  size,  touch  the  [Fit  to  Send  Size]  key.  Do  not 
touch  this  key  if  you  wish  to  scan  the  original  at  the 
original  size  that  you  entered. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  The  send  size  is  automatically  selected  based  on  the  original  size  you  entered. 

•  After  selecting  Card  Shot,  you  can  touch  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen  to  change  the  original  scan  size  or  the 
send  size.  In  this  case,  the  screen  of  step  3  appears  when  you  touch  the  scan  size  key.  For  the  procedure  for 
setting  the  send  size,  see  "Specifying  the  send  size  of  the  original"  (page  4-52). 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  front  of  the  card. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Turn  the  card  over  so  that  the  back  is  face  down,  and  press  the  [START]  key  to 
scan  the  back  of  the  card. 


Before  scanning  the  back  of  the  card,  you  can  touch  the  [Configure]  key  in  the  touch  panel  to  change  the  exposure. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


Contents 


4-83 


FACSIMILE 


Place  next  original .  (Pg.No.x) 

Press  [Start] . 

When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


If  you  will  continue  by  scanning  the  front  of  the  card,  you  can  touch  the  [Configure]  key  to  change  the  exposure, 
resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size. 


•  The  ratio  cannot  be  specified  and  "Rotation  Sending  Setting"  cannot  be  selected. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  direct  transmission  mode  or  when  the  speaker  is  used  to  dial. 


@To  cancel  Card  Shot- 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


4-84 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Select  job  build  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key, 

瞭  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Contents 


Fax/Special  Modes 


[HP 


1 


i. 


画 


Mixed  Size 
Original 


I; 


i  Quick  File 


SENDING  A  LARGE  NUMBER  OF  PAGES 
(Job  Build) 

This  function  lets  you  separate  an  original  consisting  of  numerous  pages  into  sets,  scan  each  set  using  the  automatic 
document  feeder,  and  transmit  the  pages  in  a  single  transmission.  Use  this  function  when  there  are  more  original  pages 
than  can  be  placed  at  once  in  the  auto  document  feeder. 

When  scanning  originals  that  are  separated  into  sets,  scan  the  set  that  has  the  first  page  first.  The  settings  that  you 
select  for  the  first  set  can  be  used  for  all  remaining  sets. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


s a 


J 


Q 


4-85 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  first  set. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


Insert  the  next  set  of  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  this  step  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)).  All  scanned  data  will  be  cleared. 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


•  If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

•  The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  Job  Build  is  used  in  combination  with  2in1  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure 
can  be  changed  when  scanning  each  even-numbered  page  of  the  original  pages. 


•  If  the  memory  becomes  full  during  scanning,  a  message  will  appear  and  the  transmission  will  be  canceled. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  direct  transmission  mode  or  when  the  speaker  is  used  to  dial. 


@To  cancel  Job  Build.... 

Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


Contents 


4-86 


FACSIMILE 


TRANSMITTING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 
SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original) 

This  feature  lets  you  scan  and  transmit  originals  of  different  sizes  at  the  same  time;  for  example,  8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  size 
originals  mixed  together  with  11" x  17"  (A3)  size  originals.  When  scanning  the  originals,  the  machine  automatically 
detects  the  size  of  each  original. 


This  feature  can  only  be  used  with  the  following  combinations  of  original  sizes: 

• 11M  x  17"  and  8-1/2"  x  14"  •11"  x17M  and  8-1/2"  x  13"  • 11" x  17"  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

•A3  and  B4  •  A3  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4  •  A4  and  B5 

•  A4R  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4R  •  B4  and  A5  •  B5  and  A5 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  with  the  corners  aligned  together  in  the  far 
left  corner  of  the  document  feeder  tray. 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


Select  the  mixed  size  original  setting. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key, 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  so  that 
it  is  highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


If  an  original  scan  size  has  been  specified,  a  message  will  appear  when  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  is  touched.  To 
enable  the  Mixed  Size  Original  setting,  change  the  scan  size  setting  to  auto  and  then  touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original] 
key  again. 


Contents 


4-87 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


•  Once  mixed  size  originals  has  been  selected,  an  original  scan  size  cannot  be  specified. 

•  When  mixed  size  originals  are  set,  automatic  duplex  scanning  cannot  be  used.  (When  using  the  MX-M283N.) 

•  When  the  mixed  size  original  setting  is  selected,  rotation  sending  does  not  operate. 


@To  cancel  the  mixed  size  original  setting... 

Touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

The  original  feeding  mode  can  be  set  to  always  scan  mixed  size  originals. 


4-88 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Fax/Special  Modes 


D 


s 


Dual  Page 
Scan 


] 匡 


Job 

Build 


(o 


Mixed  Size 
Original 


IfSl  Original  | 

しし 幽  Count  |  し 


Select  slow  scan  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Contents 


FAXING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode) 

Use  this  function  when  you  wish  to  scan  thin  originals  using  the  automatic  document  feeder.  This  function  helps  prevent 
thin  originals  from  misfeeding. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Adjust  the  document  guides  slowly. 


\^\  If  the  originals  are  inserted  with  too  much  force,  they  may  crumple  and  misfeed. 

Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


0  0 


4-89 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


© 


When  this  function  is  selected,  automatic  2-sided  scanning  is  not  possible. 


To  cancel  slow  scan  mode... 

Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

This  is  used  to  have  scanning  always  take  place  using  slow  scan  mode. 


Contents 


4-90 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  TRANSMISSION 
(Original  Count) 

The  number  of  scanned  original  sheets  can  be  counted  and  displayed  before  transmission.  Checking  the  number  of 
scanned  original  sheets  before  transmission  helps  prevent  transmission  mistakes. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

暖  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


(2 

!)  (3) 

且 

Fax/Special  Modes 

a  「念, 

Program 

Erase 

|  lii^Scan96 

Timer 

|  \M  2ini 

|  Card  Shot  2 

(1  bSm 

Mixed  Size 
| 響 Original 

f  Slow  Scan 

|  hJ  Mode  LJ_J 

File 

|  Quick  File  '■  ) 

Select  the  original  count  function. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation.  All  scanned  data  will  be  cleared. 


Contents 


4-91 


FACSIMILE 


When  scanning  ends,  check  the  number 
of  original  sheets  scanned  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key. 

Transmission  will  begin. 

•  When  Job  Build  mode  is  used,  the  confirmation  message  will 
appear  after  the  [Read-End]  key  is  touched. 

•  The  message  on  the  screen  shows  the  number  of  sheets 
scanned  in  (A),  and  the  number  of  pages  (sheet  sides) 
scanned  in  (B).  For  example,  if  both  sides  of  one  original 
sheet  are  scanned, "1" will  appear  in  (A)  and  "2"  will  appear 
in  (B). 


If  this  step  is  not  performed  for  one  minute  while  the  above  confirmation  screen  appears,  the  scanned  image  and 
settings  will  be  cleared  and  the  base  screen  will  reappear.  Scanning  will  not  be  completed  automatically  and  the 
image  will  not  be  reserved  for  transmission. 

If  the  displayed  number  of  original  sheets  is  different  from  the  actual  number  of  sheets... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  message  screen  to  clear  all  scanned  data.  Scan  settings 
and  destination  settings  will  not  be  cleared.  Insert  the  original  sheets  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  again  and 
press  the  [START]  key  to  re-scan. 


© 


When  original  count  is  enabled  for  a  broadcast  transmission  that  includes  destinations  of  different  modes,  original  count  will 
operate  in  all  modes. 

To  cancel  the  Original  Sheet  Count  function... 

Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Original  Count  Setting 

This  can  be  enabled  to  have  the  number  of  original  sheets  always  counted.  The  setting  can  be  enabled  separately  for  each 
mode. 


Contents 


4-92 


FACSIMILE 


STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif.  Stamp) 

This  function  stamps  each  original  that  is  scanned  using  the  automatic  document  feeder, allowing  you  to  verify  that  all 
originals  were  correctly  scanned. 

Position  of  stamp 


An  "O"  mark  is 
stamped 
in  fluorescent 
pink. 


To  use  this  function,  the  optional  stamp  unit  must  be  installed. 


B  Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


(3)  (2)  (4) 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 


Select  "Verif.  Stamp". 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Verif.  Stamp]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Contents 


4-93 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  When  two-sided  originals  are  used,  the  front  of  each  original  is  stamped  twice.  (MX-M283N  only) 

•  If  an  error  occurs  during  scanning,  an  original  that  was  not  scanned  may  be  stamped. 

•  When  the  "〇" mark  that  is  stamped  on  originals  starts  to  become  faint,  replace  the  stamp  cartridge.  For  the  procedure  for 
replacing  the  stamp  cartridge,  see  "REPLACING  THE  STAMP  CARTRIDGE11  (page  1-68)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE". 


@To  cancel  the  stamp  function... 

Touch  the  [Verif.  Stamp]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Verification  Stamp 

This  setting  is  used  to  always  have  originals  stamped. 


4-94 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 
TRANSACTION  REPORT 
(Transaction  Report) 

A  transaction  report  is  automatically  printed  out  to  alert  you  when  a  transmission  fails  or  when  a  broadcast  transmission 
is  performed.  The  transaction  report  contains  a  description  of  the  transmission  (date,  start  time,  name  of  other  party, 
time  required,  number  of  pages,  result,  etc.). 

暖  INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE  RESULT  COLUMN  (page  4-135) 


Transaction  reports  are  printed  based  on  conditions  set  in  the  system  settings;  however,  you  can  temporarily  select 
different  conditions  for  a  transmission.  To  change  the  transaction  report  print  conditions  at  the  time  of  transmission, 
follow  the  steps  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  H  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Transaction  Report]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Select  print  conditions. 

(1)  Select  the  print  conditions. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  The  print  conditions  for  a  transaction  report  are  as  follows: 

"Always  Print":  A  transaction  report  is  printed  no  matter  whether  the  transmission  succeeds  or  fails. 

"Print  at  Error":  A  transaction  report  is  printed  when  transmission  fails. 

"Do  not  Print":  Do  not  print  a  transaction  report. 

•  When  the  [Print  Original  Image]  checkbox  is  selected  0, part  of  the  transmitted  original  is  included  on  the 
transaction  report. 

•  Even  if  the  [Print  Original  Image]  checkbox  is  selected  ゾ I, the  original  cannot  be  printed  when  speaker  dialing, 
direct  transmission,  polling  reception,  or  F-code  transmission  is  used. 


Contents 


4-95 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


For  a  broadcast  transmission,  changes  to  the  transaction  report  print  conditions  apply  to  all  destinations. 

广、 To  cancel  the  transaction  report  setting... 

\3 /  Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 

/^\  •  System  Settings  (Administi 

This  is  used  to  set  the  conditi 
The  factory  default  setting  is 
Single  Sending:  Print  Out  A 
Broadcastina:  |  Print  Out/ 

Receiving:  Print  Out  A 

Confidential  Reception  (fax 

•  System  Settings  (Administi 

The  first  page  of  a  transmitter 

^ator):  Tr 

ons  for  pi 

ansaction  Report  Print  Select  Setting 

rinting  transaction  reports. 

1. 

1  I 

II  Report/I  Print  Out  Error  Report  Only  |/n0  Printed  Report 

Ml  Report  /Print  Out  Error  Report  Only/No  Printed  Report 

II  Report/Print  Out  Error  Report  Onlv/lNo  Printed  Report  | 
mode):  Print  Out  Notice  Page  /No  Printed  Report 

,ator):  Original  Print  on  Transaction  Report 

d  fax  can  be  printed  on  the  transmission  report. 

4-96 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


ADDING  YOUR  SENDER  INFORMATION  TO 
FAXES  (Own  number  sending) 

Your  sender  information  (date,  time,  sender  name,  sender  fax  number,  number  of  pages)  is  automatically  added  to  the 
top  of  each  fax  page  you  transmit. 


Example  of  the  sender  information  printed 


, APR/04/201 0/Sat  3:00  PM  ,  ,AAAAAM  FAX  No.  012345 6789, ,  P.001/001, 

(1)  (2)  (3)  ⑷ 


(1)  Date,  time:  The  date  and  time  of  transmission. 

(2)  Sender  name:  The  sender  name  programmed  in  the  machine. 

(3)  Sender  fax  number:  The  sender  fax  number  programmed  in  the  machine. 

(4)  Page  numbers:  Page  number/ total  pages  (the  total  page  number  is  only  printed 

when  the  fax  is  sent  by  memory  transmission.) 


Information  programmed  in  Own  Number  Sending 

Date,  time:  Adjust  the  setting  in  "Clock  Adjust"  in  the  system  settings. 

Sender  name,  sender  fax  number:  Program  the  sender  name  and  fax  number  in  "Sender  Data  Registration"  in  the  system 

settings  (administrator).  If  you  intend  to  use  own  number  sending,  be  sure  to  configure 
this  information. 


Page  numbers:  Select  whether  or  not  to  include  page  numbers  in  "Printing  Page  Number  at  Receiver"  in 

the  system  settings  (administrator). 

Page  numbers  appear  in  the  format  "page  number/ total  pages".  Only  the  page  number 
is  printed  when  manual  transmission  or  quick  online  transmission  is  used. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Date/Own  Number  Print  Position  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  position  where  the  sender  information  is  printed.  The  sender  information  can  be  printed  outside  the 
scanned  original  image  or  inside  the  scanned  original  image. 


Outside  scanned  image  (factory  default  setting) 

H —  Sender 
information 

—  Originals 


00000 


Inside  scanned  image 


y\ —  Sender 
information 


00000 


—  Originals 


The  transmitted  image  length  will  be:  length  of  sender 
information  +  length  of  original  image.  When  the  fax  is 
printed  by  the  receiving  machine,  it  may  be  reduced  or 
divided  onto  two  pages. 


The  sender  information  is  printed  inside  the  original 
image,  and  thus  the  transmitted  image  length  is  the 
length  of  the  original.  Note  that  the  sender  information 
will  overlap  part  of  the  original  image  (the  overlapped 
part  of  the  original  image  will  not  appear). 


4-97 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


TEMPORARILY  CHANGING  THE  SENDER 
INFORMATION  (Own  Name  Select) 

You  can  select  the  sender  information  printed  on  a  transmitted  fax  from  a  list  of  stored  senders. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  3  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Own  Name  Select]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Select  the  sender  information. 

(1)  Touch  the  desired  sender  information  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Fax/Special  Modes 


fe  =  I  [ 


Transaction 
Report  


Memory  Box 


哭  I 

w 


Polling  2 

a 

a 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Registration  of  Own  Name  Select 

This  is  used  to  store  sender  information  for  Own  Name  Select. 


Contents 


4-98 


FACSIMILE 


CALLING  A  FAX  MACHINE  AND  INITIATING 
RECEPTION  (Polling) 

The  Polling  function  allows  the  receiving  machine  to  call  the  transmitting  machine  and  initiate  reception  of  a  document  in 
that  machine. 

Because  the  receiving  machine  initiates  reception  of  a  document,  this  is  called  "Polling  Reception". 


document  is  transmitted. 


Make  sure  that  an  original  is  not  placed  in  the  machine  when  using  the  polling  reception  function. 


(3)  (2)  (4) 


Select  polling  reception. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Polling]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  4-16) 


•  Multiple  fax  numbers  can  be  entered. 

Polling  will  take  place  in  the  order  that  the  numbers  were  entered. 

Polling  multiple  machines  is  called  "Serial  Polling". 

Up  to  500  fax  numbers  can  be  entered.  In  this  procedure,  one-touch  keys  that  have  a  sub-address  and  passcode 
cannot  be  used. 


•  To  enter  multiple  fax  numbers,  touch  the  [Next  Address]  key  after  entering  a  fax  number  and  enter  the  next  fax 
number. 


Contents 


4-99 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Your  machine  will  call  the  other  machine  and  initiate  reception  of  the  fax. 


•  Polling  reception  can  be  used  in  combination  with  the  timer  function  to  poll  at  any  specified  time,  such  as  at  night  or  when 
you  are  not  present  (Only  one  timer  polling  reception  can  be  set.). 

•  This  function  can  only  be  used  when  the  other  machine  is  Super  G3  or  G3  compatible  and  has  a  polling  function. 

•  The  receiving  machine  bears  the  expense  (phone  charges)  of  the  polling  reception. 


@To  cancel  polling  reception... 

Touch  the  [Polling]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  1  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


Contents 


4-100 


FACSIMILE 


INITIATING  POLLING  RECEPTION  MANUALLY 


Use  this  procedure  when  you  must  start  polling  after  listening  to  a  recorded  greeting,  such  as  when  using  a  fax 
information  service. 


•  Make  sure  that  an  original  is  not  placed  in  the  machine  when  using  the  polling  reception  function. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  to  poll  multiple  machines  (serial  polling). 


(1) 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Speaker]  key, 

You  will  hear  the  dial  tone  through  the  machine's  speaker. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(3)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

A  group  key  cannot  be  used. 


•  In  addition  to  specification  by  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  using  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  directly  enter  a  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more 
information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  4-16). 

•  After  touching  the  [Speaker]  key,  you  can  touch  the  [Speaker  Volume]  key  to  adjust  the  volume  of  the  speaker.  The 
speaker  volume  changes  each  time  the  [Speaker  Volume]  key  is  touched.  Adjust  the  volume  to  the  desired  level. 


(3)  (2) 


Fax/Special  Modes 

OK 

2 

[ Transaction 

Report 

f  Own  Name  1 

Select 

1  Memory  Box  |  :  P 

oiling 

1 

Receive  the  fax. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  When  you  hear  the  fax  tone,  touch  the 
[Polling]  key. 

The  fax  is  received. 


•  This  function  can  only  be  used  when  the  other  machine  is  Super  G3  or  G3  compatible  and  has  a  polling  function. 

•  The  receiving  machine  bears  the  expense  (phone  charges)  of  the  polling  reception. 


Contents 


4-101 


FACSIMILE 


SENDING  A  FAX  WHEN  ANOTHER 
MACHINE  POLLS  YOUR  MACHINE 
(Polling  Memory) 

Sending  a  document  that  has  been  scanned  into  memory  when  another  machine  polls  your  machine  is  called  "Polling 
Memory". 

Prior  to  polling,  the  document  that  will  be  faxed  to  the  other  machine  must  be  scanned  into  a  polling  memory  box. 

This  function  can  only  be  used  when  the  other  machine  is  Super  G3  or  G3  compatible  and  has  a  polling  function. 


(1) Requests  fax  transmission. 


RESTRICTING  POLLING  ACCESS  (Polling  security) 

To  only  allow  specified  machines  to  poll  your  machine,  you  can  restrict  polling  to  machines  whose  programmed  sender 
fax  number  matches  a  fax  number  stored  in  your  machine  as  a  polling  passcode  number.  This  is  called  "Polling 
Security". 

To  use  this  function,  first  store  polling  passcode  numbers  (the  sender  fax  numbers  programmed  in  the  other  machines) 
in  the  machine's  system  settings,  and  then  enable  polling  security. 


Up  to 10  fax  numbers  can  be  stored  as  polling  passcode  numbers. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Fax  Polling  Security 

This  is  used  to  enable  polling  security.  This  is  used  to  store  fax  numbers  as  polling  passcode  numbers. 


4-102 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


SCANNING  A  DOCUMENT  INTO  POLLING  MEMORY 

Follow  these  steps  to  scan  a  document  into  the  memory  box  for  polling  transmission  (Public  Box). 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Touch  the  [Data  Store]  key. 


Touch  the  [Public  Box]  key. 


Specify  the  number  of  polling  times. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  for  the  desired  number  of 
times. 

Touch  the  [Once]  key  if  you  want  the  document  cleared 
from  memory  after  it  is  transmitted.  Touch  the  [Unlimited] 
key  to  allow  polling  an  unlimited  number  of  times. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Contents 


4-103 


FACSIMILE 


^j''Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory : 100% 


Select  image  settings  and  special 
modes. 


•A  program,  timer  setting,  transaction  report,  polling,  verif.  stamp  and  filing  cannot  be  selected. 
•  To  return  to  the  screen  of  step  4,  touch  the  [Memory  Box  List]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  while  the  original  is  being  scanned. 


If  another  document  remains  in  the  memory  box  (Public  Box),  the  newly  scanned  document  is  added  to  the  previous 
document.  In  this  case,  the  number  of  polling  times  will  be  the  number  set  for  the  newly  scanned  document. 


4-104 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  DOCUMENT  IN  THE  PUBLIC  BOX 

You  can  check  the  document  stored  in  the  machine's  public  box  for  memory  polling. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Memory  Box  |  Exit 

Polling  Memory 

Confidential 

Reception 

1  Data  Store  j  1  Data  Check  j  |  Delete  Data  j 

|  Data  Check  J 

Touch  the  [Data  Check]  key. 


Touch  the  [Public  Box]  key. 


When  nothing  is  stored  in  the  Public  Box,  the  [Public  Box]  key  will  be  grayed  out. 


Press  [Image  Check]  to  check  data. 
Press  [Print]  to  output  data. 


Image  Check  I 


Touch  the  [Image  Check]  key. 

The  content  of  the  document  can  be  viewed  in  the  image  check 
screen.  For  information  on  the  image  check  screen,  see 
"IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN"  (page  4-63). 

To  print  the  document,  touch  the  [Print]  key. 


Contents 


4-105 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [Public  Box]  key. 


When  nothing  is  stored  in  the  Public  Box,  the  [Public  Box]  key  will  be  grayed  out. 


Delete  the  data  in  the  memory  box? 
Press  [ Image  Check]  to  check  data. 


Image  Check  j  i  No 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

•  The  document  is  deleted  and  you  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3. 

•  You  can  touch  the  [Image  Check]  key  to  check  the  image  in 
the  touch  panel  before  deleting  it.  For  information  on  the 
image  check  screen,  see  "IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN"  (page 
4-63). 


© 


To  cancel  the  deletion... 

Touch  the  [No]  key.  You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3. 


Contents 


DELETING  A  DOCUMENT  FROM  THE  PUBLIC  BOX 

Delete  a  document  from  the  Public  Box  when  it  is  no  longer  needed. 

Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  U  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Memory  Box  |  Exit 

Polling  Memory 

Confidential 

Reception 

1  Data  Store  j  1  Data  Check  j  |  Delete  Data  j 

|  Data  Check  J 

Touch  the  [Delete  Data]  key. 


4-106 


FACSIMILE 


PERFORMING  F-CODE 
COMMUNICATION 


This  section  explains  how  to  perform  F-code  communication  operations.  F-code  communication  is  possible  with 
machines  of  other  manufacturers  that  also  support  F-code  communication. 


F-CODE  COMMUNICATION 


Exchange  of  confidential  documents  (confidential  communication),  retrieval  (polling)  and  distribution  (polling  memory)  of 
information,  distribution  of  information  to  multiple  destinations  (relay  broadcast  transmission)  are  possible  with  other 
machines  that  support  F-code  communication. 

An  F-code*  is  specified  in  each  communication,  enabling  a  higher  level  of  security. 

*  F-code  is  a  communication  function  based  on  the  G3  standard  of  the  ITU-T. 


The  ITU-T  is  a  United  Nations  organization  that  establishes  communications  standards.  It  is  a  department  of  the  International 
Telecommunication  Union  (ITU),  which  coordinates  global  telecommunications  networks  and  services. 


HOW  F-CODES  WORK 


A  fax  that  is  transmitted  with  an  F-code  is  received  to  the  memory  box  in  the  receiving  machine  specified  by  the  F-code 
(sub-address  and  passcode).  If  the  F-code  sent  by  the  transmitting  machine  does  not  match  the  F-code  in  the  receiving 
machine,  reception  will  not  take  place. 


— F~Cviu© 

Sub-address:  A  A  A  A  A  A  A  A 
Passcode:  XXXXXXXX 


The  products  of  other  manufacturers  may  use  different  terms  for  "sub-address"  and  "passcode".  If  you  need  to  contact  the 
operator  of  another  machine  regarding  sub-addresses  and  passcodes,  refer  to  the  terms  used  by  the  ITU-T  in  the  table  below. 


The  machine 

ITU-T 

F-code  polling  memory  box 

F-code  confidential  box 

F-code  relay  broadcast 
memory  box 

Sub  Address 

SEP 

SUB 

SUB 

Passcode 

PWD 

SID 

SID 

[^\  An  F-code  consists  of  a  sub-address  and  passcode,  and  cannot  be  longer  than  20  digits. 


4-107 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CREATING  MEMORY  BOXES  IN  THE  MACHINE  FOR 
F-CODE  COMMUNICATION 

Before  the  F-code  communication  function  can  be  used,  special  memory  boxes  must  be  created  using  "F-Code  Memory 
Box"  in  the  system  settings. 

A  box  name  and  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  are  programmed  in  each  box, and  an  F-code  communication 
function  is  assigned  to  each  box. 

After  you  have  created  a  memory  box,  inform  the  other  party  of  the  sub-address  and  passcode  of  the  box. 


To  use  the  following  F-code  communication  functions,  F-code  memory  boxes  must  be  created  in  your  machine. 

F-code  confidential  reception,  F-code  polling  memory,  F-code  relay  broadcast  transmission 
To  use  the  following  F-code  communication  functions,  F-code  memory  boxes  must  be  created  in  the  other  machine. 
F-code  confidential  transmission,  F-code  polling  reception,  F-code  relay  request  transmission 


System  Settings:  F-Code  Memory  Box  (page  7-100) 

This  is  used  to  configure  memory  boxes  for  F-code  communication. 

•  Up  to 100  memory  boxes  can  be  created. 

•  The  memory  box  name  cannot  be  longer  than  18  characters,  and  the  sub-address  and  passcode  cannot  be  longer  than  20 
digits. 


F-CODE  DIALING 

When  performing  an  F-code  operation,  the  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  is  appended  to  the  fax  number  that  is 
dialed.  Check  the  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  programmed  in  the  memory  box  in  the  other  machine  before  you 
perform  an  F-code  transmission.  It  is  convenient  to  store  an  F-code  together  with  the  fax  number  in  a  one-touch  key  or 
group  key. 


0123456789  /  AAAAAAAA  /  XXXXXXXX 

i _ 1 1 __ i  i _ i  i __ 1 1 _ i 


Fax  number  of  other  *  Sub  Address  *  Passcode 
machine 


Touch  the  [Sub  Address] 
key  in  the  screen  to  enter 


When  the  following  F-code  functions  are  used,  your  machine  dials  the  other  machine. 

F-code  confidential  transmission,  F-code  polling  reception,  F-code  relay  request  transmission 
When  the  following  F-code  functions  are  used,  the  other  machine  dials  your  machine. 

F-code  confidential  reception,  F-code  polling  memory,  F-code  relay  broadcast  transmission 


•  If  the  destination  machine  does  not  have  a  passcode  configured  in  the  F-code,  do  not  enter  a  passcode  when  dialing  that 
machine. 

•  F-code  communication  cannot  be  performed  when  using  the  speaker  or  performing  manual  transmission. 


System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  and  edit  one-touch  keys  and  group  keys. 


Contents 


4-108 


FACSIMILE 


CONFIDENTIAL  COMMUNICATION  USING 
F-CODES 

By  sending  a  fax  to  an  F-code  memory  box  (confidential)  in  the  receiving  machine  (your  machine  or  the  other  machine), 
the  sender  can  direct  the  transmission  specifically  to  the  user  of  the  box. 

This  is  convenient  for  sending  sensitive  documents  that  you  do  not  wish  people  other  than  the  recipient  to  see,  or  when 
the  receiving  machine  is  shared  by  multiple  departments. 

To  print  an  F-code  confidential  fax,  the  print  passcode  must  be  entered. 


Receiver 


Sender 


4-109 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


⑶, ⑼ 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

If  the  destination  is  not  stored  in  the  address  book,  enter 
the  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys. 

If  the  sub-address  and  passcode  are  stored  in  the  one-touch 
key,  the  following  sub-steps  are  not  necessary.  Go  to  step  3. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(4)  Enter  the  sub-address  with  the  numeric 
keys, 

(5)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(6)  Enter  the  passcode  with  the  numeric  keys. 


© 


If  a  passcode  has  been  omitted  in  the  memory  box  of  the  other  machine,  (5)  and  (6)  are  not  necessary. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


This  function  can  be  used  in  combination  with  a  broadcast  transmission  or  timer  transmission.  This  function  can  also  be 
stored  in  a  program. 


Contents 


F-CODE  CONFIDENTIAL  TRANSMISSION 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  send  a  confidential  fax  by  adding  an  F-code  to  the  fax  number. 

Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


十 a a 


4-110 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  FAXES  RECEIVED  BY  F-CODE 
CONFIDENTIAL  RECEPTION 

When  an  F-code  confidential  fax  is  sent  to  your  machine,  the  fax  is  received  to  the  memory  box  specified  by  the  F-code. 
To  check  received  faxes,  enter  the  print  passcode. 


The  machine  rings  and  the  fax  is 
received. 

A  beep  sounds  when  reception  ends. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  3  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Touch  the  [Data  Check]  key. 


Memory  Box  - 

- Confidential  Reception 

1 ♦  Back  | 

|box  1 

oj  [box  2  门 

ej 

[box  3 

[box  5 

j  [Box  6 

1 上 1 

a 

Touch  the  key  of  the  memory  box 
containing  the  confidential  fax. 

"Qj"  appears  in  the  keys  of  memory  boxes  that  have  received 
faxes.  The  keys  of  memory  boxes  that  have  not  received  faxes 
are  grayed  out  and  cannot  be  selected. 


Contents 


4-111 


FACSIMILE 


Enter  the  print  passcode  with  the 
numeric  keys. 

As  each  digit  is  entered,  ■■-"  changes  to  ■■氺 ■■■ 


Take  care  to  enter  the  correct  print  passcode.  If  you  make  a  mistake,  a  message  will  appear  and  you  will  return  to  the 
entry  screen.  You  can  touch  the  [Cancel]  key  to  return  to  step  4. 


Press  [ Image  Check]  to  check  data. 
Press  [Print]  to  output  data. 


Touch  the  [Image  Check]  key. 

The  content  of  the  document  can  be  viewed  in  the  image  check 
screen.  For  information  on  the  image  check  screen,  see 
"IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN"  (page  4-63). 

To  print  the  document,  touch  the  [Print]  key. 


•  The  confidential  fax  is  automatically  given  priority  in  the  print  job  queue. 

•  The  fax  is  automatically  cleared  from  the  memory  box  after  printing. 

•If  you  forget  the  print  passcode... 

There  is  no  way  to  check  a  forgotten  passcode  on  the  machine.  Take  care  not  to  forget  the  passcode.  In  the  event  that  you 
forget  the  passcode  or  need  to  verify  the  passcode,  contact  your  dealer  or  nearest  SHARP  Service  Department. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Transaction  Report  Print  Select  Setting 

You  can  specify  whether  or  not  a  transmission  report  is  printed  when  an  F-code  confidential  fax  is  received. 


4-112 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


POLLING  RECEPTION  USING  F-CODES 

This  function  enables  your  machine  to  call  another  machine  and  initiate  reception  of  a  fax  stored  in  an  F-code  memory 
box  (polling  memory)  in  the  other  machine.  During  the  polling  operation,  your  machine  must  correctly  specify  the  F-code 
(sub-address  and  passcode)  configured  in  the  other  machine  or  polling  reception  will  not  take  place. 


Transmission  request  (polling) 
using  an  F-code 


•  Verify  the  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  of  the  memory  box  in  the  other  machine  before  you  perform  F-code  polling 
reception. 


•  Do  not  place  an  original  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  or  on  the  document  glass  when  using  this  function. 

•  The  receiving  machine  bears  the  phone  charges  of  the  transmission. 


(3)  (2)  (4) 


Select  polling. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

瞭  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 

(2)  Touch  the  33  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Polling]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlight. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


4-113 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Sort  Address 


Freq.  Jl  ABCD  ||  EFGH  II  IJKL  ||  MNOP  儿 QRSTu|l  VWXYZ  Jletc .  | 


IT 


《Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory: 100% 


⑶, ⑼ 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

If  the  destination  is  not  stored  in  the  address  book,  enter 
the  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys. 

If  the  sub-address  and  passcode  are  stored  in  the  one-touch 
key,  the  following  sub-steps  are  not  necessary.  Go  to  step  3. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(4)  Enter  the  sub-address  with  the  numeric 
keys, 

(5)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(6)  Enter  the  passcode  with  the  numeric  keys. 


If  a  passcode  has  been  omitted  in  the  memory  box  of  the  other  machine,  (5)  and  (6)  are  not  necessary. 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

Your  machine  will  call  the  other  machine  and  initiate  reception  of  the  fax. 


®  : 


© 


Polling  multiple  machines  (serial  polling)  is  not  possible. 

F-code  polling  reception  can  be  used  in  combination  with  a  timer  setting.  Only  one  polling  reception  operation  with  a  timer 
setting  can  be  stored  at  a  time. 

暖  SENDING  A  FAX  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME  (Timer)  (page  4-77) 


To  cancel  polling... 

Touch  the  [Polling]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  1  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


Contents 


1  j a a 


4-114 


FACSIMILE 


POLLING  MEMORY  TRANSMISSION  USING 
F-CODES 


When  your  machine  receives  a  transmission  request  from  another  machine,  this  function  sends  a  fax  stored  in  an 
F-code  memory  box  (polling  memory)  in  your  machine  to  that  machine.  The  other  machine  must  correctly  specify  the 
F-code  configured  in  your  machine  or  transmission  will  not  take  place. 

The  document  to  be  transmitted  must  be  scanned  into  an  F-code  polling  memory  box. 


Transmission  request  (polling) 
using  an  F-code 


System  Settings:  F-Code  Memory  Box  (page  7-100) 

This  is  used  to  create  memory  boxes  (polling  memory)  for  F-code  polling  memory  transmission. 
A  memory  box  name,  sub-address,  and  passcode  are  programmed  in  each  box. 


SCANNING  A  DOCUMENT  INTO  A  MEMORY  BOX  FOR 
F-CODE  POLLING  TRANSMISSION 

Follow  these  steps  to  scan  a  document  into  a  memory  box  (polling  memory)  for  F-code  polling  transmission. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


4-115 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Touch  the  [Data  Store]  key. 


Memory  Box 

- Data  Store 

f  ♦  Back 

Public  Box 

("box  1 

-Tk 

j  [Box  2 

□ 

[box  3 

<7 

] [box  4 

J  + 

(box  5 

j  [Box  6 

- '  m 

[box  7 

j  [box  8 

1 」 

(box  9 

j  [box  10 

コ S 

[Box  11 

j  | Box  12 

□ 

Touch  the  key  of  the  F-code  memory 
polling  box. 


(1)  (2) 


Memory  Box  -  Data  Store 

Specify  the  number  of  polling  times. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  for  the  desired  number  of 
times. 

Touch  the  [Once]  key  if  you  want  the  document  cleared 
from  memory  after  it  is  transmitted.  Touch  the  [Unlimited] 
key  to  allow  polling  an  unlimited  number  of  times. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Memory  Box  -  Data  Store 

k  Memory  Box 
[ List 

[  Original  j  scan:  Send: 

[  Exposure  ] 

( Resolution  j  Standard 

[ Special  Modes  | 

^*^uto  Reception 
Fax  Memory : 100% 


Select  image  settings  and  special 
modes. 


•A  program,  timer  setting,  transaction  report,  polling,  verif.  stamp  and  filing  cannot  be  selected. 
•To  return  to  the  screen  of  step  4,  touch  the  [Memory  Box  List]  key. 


Contents 


4-116 


FACSIMILE 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  while  the  original  is  being  scanned. 


•If  other  documents  have  already  been  stored  in  the  memory  box,  the  document  is  added  to  the  previously  stored 
documents. 

•  The  factory  default  setting  for  the  number  of  polling  times  is  "Once"  (after  the  document  is  transmitted  to  the  receiving 
machine,  it  is  automatically  cleared). 


4-117 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  DOCUMENT  IN  THE  F-CODE  MEMORY 
POLLING  BOX 


You  can  check  the  document  stored  in  the  F-code  memory  polling  box. 


A  document  in  a  memory  box  cannot  be  printed  while  the  document  is  being  transmitted. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Memory  Box  [  Exit  ] 

Polling  Memory 

Confidential 

Reception 

J  Data  Store  j  J  Data  Check  j  J  Delete  Data  j 

|  Data  Check  j 

方 

Touch  the  [Data  Check]  key. 


Memory  Box  - 

- Data  Check 

|  ♦  Back  ] 

Public  Box  ^|] 

[Box  1 

=ru — 

■  j  [Box  2 

[Box  3 

IOj  [box  4 

[box  5 

] [Box  6 

[Box  7 

] [Box  8 

(box  9 

] [Box  10 

コ a 

[Box  11 

] [Box  12 

□ 

Touch  the  key  of  the  F-code  memory 
polling  box  where  the  document  you 
wish  to  print  is  stored. 

Q  appears  in  keys  that  have  documents  stored. 


Press  [ Image  Check]  to  check  data. 
Press  [Print]  to  output  data. 


I  (  Print  j  f 


Touch  the  [Image  Check]  key. 

The  content  of  the  document  can  be  viewed  in  the  image  check 
screen.  For  information  on  the  image  check  screen,  see 
"IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN11  (page  4-63). 

To  print  the  document,  touch  the  [Print]  key. 


Contents 


4-118 


FACSIMILE 


DELETING  A  DOCUMENT  STORED  FOR  F-CODE 
POLLING  TRANSMISSION 


When  a  document  in  an  F-code  memory  polling  box  is  no  longer  needed,  follow  the  steps  below  to  delete  it. 


A  document  in  a  memory  box  cannot  be  deleted  while  the  document  is  being  transmitted. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Memory  Box]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  4-69) 


Touch  the  [Delete  Data]  key. 


Memory  Box 

- Delete  Data 

丨  f  Back  ] 

Public  Box  Q J 

[Box  1 

I3lj  [box  2 

[box  3 

Jb 

3lj  (box  4 

bbbbbi^b  t- 

[box  5 

] [Box  6 

- ) m 

[Box  7 

] [Box  8 

コ s 

[box  9 

j  [Box  10 

コ 3 

[Box  11 

j  [Box  12 

□ 

Touch  the  key  of  the  F-code  memory 
polling  box  that  has  the  document  you 
wish  to  delete. 

Q  appears  in  keys  that  have  documents  stored. 


Delete  the  data  in  the  memory  box? 
Press  [ Image  Check]  to  check  data. 


Image  Check  |  f  No 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

•  The  document  is  deleted  and  you  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3. 

•  Printing  will  begin. 

You  can  touch  the  [Image  Check]  key  to  check  the  image  in 
the  touch  panel  before  deleting  it.  For  information  on  the 
image  check  screen,  see  "IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN"  (page 
4-63). 


@To  cancel  the  deletion... 

Touch  the  [No]  key.  You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3  without  deleting  the  document. 


Contents 


4-119 


FACSIMILE 


RELAY  REQUEST  TRANSMISSION  USING 
F-CODES 

This  function  is  used  to  send  a  fax  to  an  F-code  relay  broadcast  memory  box  in  another  machine  and  have  that  machine 
relay  the  fax  to  multiple  end  receiving  machines. 

When  the  end  receiving  machines  are  far  from  your  machine,  sending  the  fax  to  a  relay  machine  that  is  close  to  the  end 
receiving  machines  can  help  reduce  phone  charges.  A  relay  request  transmission  can  be  used  in  combination  with  the 
timer  transmission  function  to  further  reduce  phone  costs. 

隊  SENDING  A  FAX  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME  (Timer)  (page  4-77) 


The  machine 


Relay  machine 

F-code  relay  broadcast 
memory  box 


The  fax  is  transmitted  to 
each  of  the  end  receiving 
machines  programmed  in 
the  F-code  relay 
broadcast  memory  box. 


Transmission 


End  receiving 
machines 


■  ■  ■ 

■  ■  ■ 

- 

曙 

Transmission  specifying  an  F-code 


Sub-address:  AAAAAAAA 
Passcode:  XXXXXXXX 


Box  name:  BBBB 

Sub-address:  AAAAAAAA 
Passcode:  XXXXXXXX 

End  receiving  machines  are 
programmed  in  this  box 


』  - ^  V 

A 

1111111 

1111111 

=ti 

/  ' - s 

n 

Verify  the  F-code  (sub-address  and  passcode)  and  end  receiving  machines  programmed  in  the  relay  broadcast  memory 
box  in  the  relay  machine  before  you  perform  an  F-code  relay  request  transmission. 

•  Before  this  function  can  be  used,  the  end  receiving  machines  must  be  programmed  in  the  F-code  relay  broadcast  memory 
box  in  the  relay  machine. 

•  The  end  receiving  machines  do  not  need  to  support  F-code  communication. 

•  This  function  can  be  used  in  combination  with  a  broadcast  transmission  or  timer  transmission.  An  F-code  relay  request 
transmission  can  also  be  stored  in  a  program. 

•  Your  machine  (the  machine  that  requests  a  relay  broadcast  transmission)  only  bears  the  cost  of  sending  the  fax  to  the 
relay  machine.  The  relay  machine  bears  the  cost  of  sending  the  fax  to  each  of  the  end  receiving  machines. 

•  When  faxes  forwarded  using  this  function  are  printed  at  the  forwarding  destination,  the  date  and  time  of  reception  cannot 
be  printed  on  the  faxes.  ("Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print"  is  disabled.) 

System  Settings:  F-Code  Memory  Box  (page  7-100) 

/  This  is  used  to  create  memory  boxes  for  F-code  relay  broadcast  transmission. 

A  memory  box  name,  sub-address,  passcode,  and  end  receiving  machines  are  programmed  in  each  box. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


□  □□r 


4-120 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


Sort  Address 


Freq.  Jl  ABCD  ||  EFGH  II  IJKL  ||  MNOP  儿 QRSTu|l  VWXYZ  Jletc .  | 


IT 


《Auto  Reception 
Fax  Memory: 100% 


⑶, ⑼ 


Enter  the  destination  fax  number. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

If  the  destination  is  not  stored  in  the  address  book,  enter 
the  fax  number  with  the  numeric  keys. 

If  the  sub-address  and  passcode  are  stored  in  the  one-touch 
key,  the  following  sub-steps  are  not  necessary.  Go  to  step  3. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(4)  Enter  the  sub-address  with  the  numeric 
keys, 

(5)  Touch  the  [Sub  Address]  key. 

7"  appears. 

(6)  Enter  the  passcode  with  the  numeric  keys. 


If  a  passcode  has  been  omitted  in  the  memory  box  of  the  other  machine,  (5)  and  (6)  are  not  necessary. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

When  the  relay  machine  receives  the  fax,  it  will  automatically  transmit  the  fax  to  each  of  the  end  receiving  machines 
programmed  in  the  memory  box. 


© 


To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  while  the  original  is  being  scanned. 


Contents 


1  j a a 


4-121 


FACSIMILE 


RELAY  BROADCAST  TRANSMISSION 
USING  F-CODES 

When  your  machine  receives  an  F-code  relay  request  transmission,  the  fax  is  received  to  an  F-code  relay  broadcast 
memory  box  in  your  machine.  Your  machine  then  relays  the  fax  to  each  of  the  end  receiving  machines  programmed  in 
the  memory  box.  Transmission  to  the  end  receiving  machines  takes  place  automatically. 


The  other 
machine 


The  machine 

F-code  relay  broadcast 
memory  box 


Transmission  specifying  an  F-code 


The  fax  is  transmitted  to 
each  of  the  end  receiving 
machines  programmed  in 
the  F-code  relay 
broadcast  memory  box. 


Transmission 


End  receiving 
machines 


n 


Box  name: 

BBBB 

Sub-address: 

AAAAAAAA 

Passcode: 

XXXXXXXX 

End  receiving  machines  are 
programmed  in  this  box 

Sub-address:  AAAAAAAA 
Passcode:  XXXXXXXX 


Prior  to  the  operation,  inform  the  requesting  party  of  the  sub-address  and  passcode  of  the  relay  broadcast  memory  box  in 
your  machine. 

Program  the  end  receiving  machines  in  the  F-code  relay  broadcast  memory  box  when  you  create  the  box  in  your  machine. 
暖  CREATING  MEMORY  BOXES  IN  THE  MACHINE  FOR  F-CODE  COMMUNICATION  (page  4-108) 

The  end  receiving  machines  do  not  need  to  support  F-code  communication. 

The  machine  that  requests  a  relay  broadcast  transmission  only  bears  the  cost  of  sending  the  fax  to  your  machine  (the  relay 
machine).  Your  machine  bears  the  cost  of  sending  the  fax  to  each  of  the  end  receiving  machines. 

When  faxes  forwarded  using  this  function  are  printed  at  the  forwarding  destination,  the  date  and  time  of  reception  cannot 
be  printed  on  the  faxes.  ("Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print"  is  disabled.) 


□  □□「 
□  □□r 


4-122 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


USING  AN  EXTENSION  PHONE 


This  section  explains  how  to  use  an  extension  phone  to  make  voice  calls  and  receive  a  fax  after  talking  with  the  other 
party. 


CONNECTING  AND  USING  AN  EXISTING 
PHONE  (Extension  Phone  Connection) 

You  can  connect  an  existing  extension  phone  to  the  machine. 

The  phone  can  be  used  for  voice  calls  and  to  start  fax  reception  on  the  machine. 

As  an  example,  you  can  make  a  phone  call  using  the  existing  phone,  speak  to  the  other  party,  and  then  press  the 
[START]  key  to  fax  an  original  that  has  been  placed  to  that  party.  You  can  also  press  the  [START]  key  when  an  original 
is  not  placed  to  receive  a  fax. 

Connect  the  extension  phone  as  shown  below. 


Extension  phone  jack 


r 


Attach  the  provided  core  to 
your  extension  telephone  cord 
and  then  connect  the  cord  to 
the  machine. 


cord  is  securely  connected. 


•  Connect  an  extension  phone  that  has  a  modular  jack.  Use  standard  phone  line  cable  to  connect  the  phone.  If  other  than  a 
standard  phone  line  cable  is  used,  the  connection  may  not  work  correctly. 

•If  the  plug  on  the  telephone  line  cord  does  not  fit  into  the  jack  on  your  extension  phone,  contact  your  dealer  or  nearest 
SHARP  Service  Department. 


4-123 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


RECEIVING  A  FAX  AFTER  ANSWERING  A  CALL  ON 
THE  EXTENSION  PHONE  (Remote  Reception) 

Follow  the  steps  below  if  you  need  to  start  fax  reception  after  answering  a  call  and  speaking  on  the  extension  phone. 
If  you  are  on  a  pulse-dial  (rotary)  line,  set  the  extension  phone  to  issue  tone  signals. 


When  you  hear  ringing,  answer  the  call 
on  the  extension  phone. 


Signal  the  machine  to  start  fax 
reception. 

Press  ©  ©  ©  on  the  keypad  of  the  extension  phone. 


Replace  the  extension  phone. 

The  machine  sounds  a  beep  when  reception  ends. 


•  System  Settings:  Receive  Setting  (page  7-102) 

To  use  remote  fax  reception,  set  this  setting  to  "Manual  Reception". 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Remote  Reception  Number  Setting 

This  is  used  to  change  the  number  used  for  remote  fax  reception.  The  factory  default  setting  is  "5". 


MAKING  AND  RECEIVING  PHONE  CALLS 

You  can  make  and  receive  calls  like  normal  on  your  extension  phone.  A  phone  call  can  also  be  made  by  dialing  on  the 
machine. 


Contents 


4-124 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF  FAX 
JOBS 


This  section  explains  how  to  check  the  status  of  reserved  transmission  jobs  and  received  faxes. 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  is  displayed  when  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  on  the  operation  panel  is  pressed.  The  job  status 
screen  shows  the  status  of  jobs  by  mode.  When  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  is  pressed,  the  job  status  screen  of  the  mode 
that  was  being  used  before  the  key  was  pressed  appears. 

Reserved  transmissions  and  received  faxes  are  referred  to  as  jobs  here. 


Example:  Pressing  the  key  in  fax  mode 


JOB  STATUS 

/•  \ 


ni 


V  0123456789 


V 


4  V  BBB  BBB 


5  .,秘  Broadcast 


? Internet  Fax  I 


Pages  Status 


10:05  04/01  000/004  Waiting 


:10:22  04/01  000/004  Waiting 


10:30  04/01  000/010  Waiting 


:10:33  04/01  000/010  Waiting 


温 


f Stop/Delete  I 


The  job  status  display  is  in  the  lower  left  corner  of  the  touch  panel.  The  job  status  display  can  be  touched  to  display  the  job 
status  screen. 


4-125 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


(1)  Mode  select  tabs 

Use  these  tabs  to  select  the  job  status  screen  of  each 
mode. 

(2)  Job  status  screen  selector  key 

Touch  this  key  to  switch  between  the  job  queue  screen 
and  the  completed  jobs  screen. 

(3)  Job  queue  screen  [Detail]  key 

This  shows  detailed  information  on  a  broadcast 
transmission  or  serial  polling  job  that  is  reserved  or  in 
progress.  Select  the  key  of  the  desired  job  in  the  job 
queue  screen  (6)  and  then  touch  the  [Detail]  key. 

^  CHECKING  A  RESERVED  JOB  OR  THE  JOB  IN 
PROGRESS  (page  4-130) 

(4)  [Priority]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  give  priority  to  a  selected  job. 

^  GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  RESERVED  FAX  JOB 
(page  4-133) 

(5)  [Stop/Delete]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  stop  or  delete  a  selected  job. 

^  CANCELING  A  FAX  IN  PROGRESS  OR  A 
RESERVED  FAX  (page  4-132) 


4-126 


JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED  JOB  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  consists  of  two  screens:  the  job  queue  screen,  which  shows  reserved  jobs  and  the  job  currently  in 
progress, and  the  completed  jobs  screen.  To  switch  between  the  two  screens,  touch  the  job  status  screen  selector  key 
((2)  below). 

Job  queue  screen 
(1) 

■ 总  Print  Job  J  Scan  to  J  虔  Fax  Job  |  慘  Internet 


Completed  job  screen 


(1) 


Job  queue  screen 

Jobs  are  shown  as  keys  in  the  order  they  were  reserved. 
Each  key  shows  information  on  a  job  and  its  current 
status. 

瞭  Job  key  display  (page  4-127) 

Completed  jobs  screen  [Detail]  key 

This  shows  detailed  information  on  the  results  of 
completed  broadcast  transmission  jobs,  completed  serial 
polling  jobs,  and  completed  jobs  that  used  the  document 
filing  function.  Select  the  key  of  the  desired  job  in  the 
completed  jobs  screen  (9)  and  then  touch  the  [Detail] 
key. 

From  the  details  screen,  it  is  possible  to  resend  the  fax  to 
destinations  to  which  transmission  was  not  successful. 
隊  CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS  (page  4-131) 

[Call]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  retrieve  and  use  a  transmission  or 
reception  job  that  was  stored  using  the  document  filing 
function. 

Completed  jobs  screen 

This  shows  up  to  99  completed  transmission/reception 
jobs.  A  description  of  each  job  and  the  result  (status)  are 
shown. 

Broadcast  transmission  jobs,  serial  polling  jobs,  received 
fax  forwarding  jobs,  and  transmission/reception  jobs  that 
used  the  document  filing  function  are  indicated  as  keys. 


Contents 


\17 

2  3  4  5 

/V 


FACSIMILE 


Job  key  display 

The  following  information  is  shown  in  the  job  queue  keys  and  completed  job  keys  that  appear  in  the  job  status  screen. 


10:22  04/01 


000/004 


Waiting 


(1) (2) 


(1)  Indicates  the  number  (position)  of  the  job  in  the  job 
queue. 

When  the  job  currently  being  transmitted  is  finished,  each 
job  moves  up  one  position  in  the  job  queue. 

This  number  does  not  appear  in  keys  in  the  completed 
jobs  screen. 

(2)  Mode  icon 

This  indicates  the  type  of  job.  In  the  completed  jobs 
screen,  a  color  bar  indicating  black  &  white  will  appear 
next  to  the  icon.  (However,  the  color  bar  icon  does  not 
appear  in  the  key  of  a  job  that  used  document  filing  or  in 
the  key  of  a  transmission/reception  job  that  was 
canceled.) 


Icon 

Job  type 

V 

Fax  transmission 

% 

Fax  reception 

Broadcast  transmission,  Serial  polling 
or  Inbound  routing 

¥ 

PC-Fax  transmission 

(3)  Name  of  other  party 

For  a  transmission,  the  name  or  fax  number  of  the 
destination.  For  a  reception,  the  fax  number  of  the 
sending  party. 

In  the  case  of  a  broadcast  transmission  or  serial  polling 
operation,  "Broadcast"  or  "Multi  Polling"  appears  together 
with  a  broadcast  control  number  (4-digits). 


(4)  Time  reserved  /  Time  started 

In  the  job  queue  screen,  the  date  and  time  the  job  was 
reserved.  In  the  completed  jobs  screen,  the  date  and 
time  the  job  was  started. 

(5)  Number  of  pages 

Shows  the  number  of  pages  transmitted  /  total  number  of 
original  pages. 

(6)  Status 

Shows  the  job  status. 

•  Job  in  progress 


Message 

Status 

"Connecting" 

Connecting 

"Sending" 

Sending 

■■Receiving" 

Receiving 

"Tel11 

Speaking  with  the  other  party  using 
an  extension  phone 

"Stopped" 

The  job  has  been  stopped. 

■■Error" 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed. 

•  Job  waiting  to  be  executed 


Message 

Status 

"Waiting11 

The  job  is  waiting  to  be  executed. 

"Retry  Mode11 

The  job  is  being  re-attempted  due 
to  a  communication  error  or  other 
problem. 

The  day  and 
time  are 
displayed. 

Timer  transmission  job  (the 
specified  time  is  displayed) 

4-127 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


•  Completed  job 


Message 

Status 

"Send  OK11 

Transmission  completed. 

"In  Memory" 

Reception  completed  but  the  fax 
has  not  been  printed. 

"Received11 

Printed  received  fax  data. 

"Forward  OK" 

The  received  fax  has  been 

forwarded. 

"Stopped" 

The  job  was  stopped. 

"Delete" 

Deleted  received  data  in  the  image 
check  screen. 

"Number  of 

successful 

transmission 

destinations  / 

Total 

destinations 

OK11 

Completion  of  a  broadcast 
transmission,  serial  polling  or 
inbound  routing  operation. 

If  transmission  to  3  destinations 
was  successful  out  of  a  total  of  5, 
M003/005M  will  appear. 

"No 

response" 

An  error  occurred  because  there 
was  no  response  from  the 
destination. 

"Busy" 

An  error  occurred  because  the 
other  party  was  busy. 

"Reject 

Reception" 

A  fax  was  sent  from  a  party  that 
has  been  blocked  by  the  anti  junk 
fax  function. 

"NGxxxxxx" 

Transmission/reception  was  not 
successful  because  a 
communication  error  occurred  (a 
6-digit  error  code  appears  in 
xxxxxx.) 

"Error" 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed. 

4-128 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


OPERATION  WHEN  A  JOB  IN  THE  JOB  QUEUE  IS 
COMPLETED 

When  a  normal  transmission  job  is  completed,  it  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "Send  OK"  appears  in  the 
status  column. 

Received  faxes,  timer  transmission  jobs,  retry  jobs,  and  forwarding  jobs  are  handled  in  the  job  status  screen  as 
explained  below. 

Fax  reception  jobs 

While  a  fax  is  being  received,  "Receiving"  appears  in  the  job  queue  screen. 

When  reception  is  completed,  the  job  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "In  Memory"  appears. 

After  the  fax  is  printed,  the  status  changes  to  "Printed". 

Timer  transmission  jobs 

A  timer  transmission  job  appears  at  the  bottom  of  the  job  queue  screen  until  the  specified  time  arrives. 

When  the  specified  time  arrives,  the  job  is  executed.  If  another  job  is  in  progress,  the  timer  job  is  started  when  the  other 
job  is  completed. 

Retry  jobs 

A  retry  job  appears  at  the  bottom  of  the  job  queue  screen.  When  the  set  retry  interval  elapses,  the  job  is  executed.  If 
there  are  jobs  reserved  ahead  of  the  retry  job,  the  retry  job  is  reserved  at  the  bottom  of  the  job  queue  and  executed 
when  its  turn  arrives. 

Fax  reception  jobs  when  Inbound  Routing  is  enabled 

When  Inbound  Routing  is  enabled  in  the  Web  pages,  fax  reception  jobs  are  handled  as  follows  depending  on  the  print 
setting. 

暖  FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  TO  A  NETWORK  ADDRESS  (Inbound  Routing  Settings)  (page  4-65) 

•  Received  fax  is  not  printed 

"Receiving"  appears  in  the  job  queue  screen  while  the  fax  is  being  received.  When  reception  is  completed,  the  job 
moves  to  the  job  queue  of  the  job  status  screen  of  scan  mode. 

•  Received  fax  is  printed 

When  reception  is  completed,  the  job  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "In  Memory"  appears.  After  the  fax  is 
printed,  "Printed"  appears.  The  job  being  sent  is  added  to  the  job  status  screen  of  scan  mode.  When  forwarding  is 
finished,  "Forward  OK"  appears. 


4-129 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  A  RESERVED  JOB  OR  THE  JOB  IN 
PROGRESS 

The  detailed  contents  of  a  broadcast  transmission  or  serial  polling  job  can  be  displayed.  Select  (touch)  the  key  of  the  job 
that  you  wish  to  check  and  touch  the  [Detail]  key.  The  job  details  screen  will  appear  (see  below). 


The  job  name  and  progress  (number  of  completed  destinations  /  total  destinations)  appear  at  the  top  of  the  screen. 
Touch  a  tab  to  display  the  information  that  appears  on  that  tab.  The  following  information  appears  on  each  tab. 


Tab  name 

Information  displayed 

Fax  Connecting 

Information  on  the  current  destination  appears. 

Fax  No.:  The  fax  number  of  the  destination. 

Name:  The  name  of  the  destination. 

Number:  The  broadcast  control  number  (3-digits). 

Pages:  Number  of  pages  completed  /  total  number  of  pages 

Fax  Waiting 

This  shows  information  on  the  destinations  that  are  waiting.  A  broadcast  control 
number  (3-digits)  appears  in  front  of  each  destination. 

Address:  The  name  of  the  other  destination. 

Status:  The  status  of  communication. 

Failed 

This  shows  information  on  destinations  for  which  communication  failed.  A  broadcast 
control  number  (3-digits)  appears  in  front  of  each  destination. 

Address:  The  name  or  fax  number  of  each  destination. 

Start  Time:  The  time  when  communication  began. 

Status:  The  status  of  communication. 

All  Destinations 

This  shows  all  destinations  specified  in  the  job.  A  broadcast  control  number  (3-digits) 
appears  in  front  of  each  destination. 

Address:  The  name  or  fax  number  of  the  destination. 

Start  time:  The  time  at  which  communication  began. 

Status:  The  status  of  communication. 

4-130 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS 

You  can  check  a  list  of  the  destinations,  the  destinations  for  which  transmission  failed,  and  other  detailed  information  on 
completed  broadcast  transmission  jobs,  received  fax  forwarding  jobs,  serial  polling  jobs,  and  jobs  that  used  document 
filing.  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  job  in  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  touch  the  [Detail]  key.  The  job  detail  screen 
(see  below)  will  appear. 


The  job  name  appears  at  the  top  of  the  job  detail  screen. 

To  view  details  on  the  job,  touch  one  of  the  tabs.  The  following  information  appears  on  each  tab. 


Tab  name 

Information  displayed 

File 

Information  on  a  transmission/reception  that  used  document  filing. 

To  retrieve  the  file  and  use  it,  touch  the  [Call]  key. 

Failed 

This  shows  information  on  destinations  for  which  communication  failed.  A  broadcast 
control  number  (3-digits)  appears  in  front  of  each  destination. 

Address:  The  name  or  fax  number  of  each  destination. 

Start  time:  Time  at  which  communication  began. 

Status:  Description  of  failure  (error) 

The  [Retry]  key  can  be  touched  to  re-attempt  transmission  to  that  destination.* 

All  Destinations 

Shows  all  addresses  specified  in  the  job.  A  broadcast  control  number  (3-digits) 
appears  in  front  of  each  destination. 

Address:  The  name  or  fax  number  of  each  destination. 

Start  time:  Time  at  which  communication  began. 

Status:  Communication  result 

The  [Retry]  key  can  be  touched  to  transmit  to  all  destinations  again.* 

Recalling  is  not  possible  for  a  broadcast  transmission  that  includes  a  Scan  to  FTP  address,  Scan  to  Network  Folder 
address,  or  Scan  to  Desktop  address. 


4-131 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CANCELING  A  FAX  IN  PROGRESS  OR  A 
RESERVED  FAX 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  cancel  a  fax  transmission  that  is  in  progress  or  a  reserved  fax  job. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


蟲  Print  Job  [ Scan  to  [ Fax  Job  丨燈 Internet  Fax] 

\  1  ^  Broadcast  10:00  ,04/01  020/003  Connecting  j 

1 

1 丄 

1  1 

Complete 

f  2  V  0123456789  10:05  04/01  000/004  Waiting 

(  3  ^  AAA  AAA  10:22  04/01  000/004  Waiting 

[5  .•相  Broadcast  10:33  04/01  000/010  Waiting 

罕 


(i) 


Select  the  fax  job  that  you  wish  to 
cancel. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  fax  job  to  be  canceled. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Stop/Delete]  key. 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

A  Delete  the  job? 

V  BBB  BBB  10:30  04/01 


If  you  do  not  wish  to  cancel  the  selected  fax  job... 

Touch  the  [NO]  key. 


Printing  of  received  faxes  and  forwarding  jobs  set  using  "Inbound  Routing  Settings"  cannot  be  canceled. 

暖  FORWARDING  RECEIVED  FAXES  TO  A  NETWORK  ADDRESS  (Inbound  Routing  Settings)  (page  4-65) 


4-132 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  RESERVED  FAX 
JOB 

When  multiple  jobs  are  waiting  to  be  transmitted,  the  jobs  are  normally  transmitted  in  the  order  they  were  reserved. 
If  you  need  to  give  priority  to  a  job  and  send  it  ahead  of  the  other  jobs,  follow  the  steps  below. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


[ ^  Print  Job  \  Scan  to  |  Fax  Job  |  ^  Internet  Fax  I 

Address  Set  Time  Pages  : Status 

[ 1  M  Broadcast  10:00  04/01  020/003  Connecting  j 

1  Complete 

f  2  V  0123456789  10:05  04/01  000/004  Waiting 

f  3  V  AAA  AAA  10:22  04/01  000/004  Waiting 

1 

a 

X  |  (1  Detail  | 

1 

f  5  Broadcast  10:33  04/01  000/010  Waiting 

\  Priority 

f Stop/Delete] 

i  r 

(i) 


Select  the  fax  job  to  which  you  wish  to 
give  priority. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  job. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Priority]  key. 

The  selected  job  moves  up  to  the  position  immediately 
following  the  job  in  progress.  The  job  will  be  executed 
when  the  job  in  progress  is  completed. 


If  the  job  in  progress  is  a  broadcast  transmission  job  or  a  serial  polling  job,  the  priority  job  will  be  transmitted  between 
destinations  of  the  broadcast  transmission  or  serial  polling  job.  However,  if  the  priority  job  is  a  broadcast  transmission  job  or 
a  serial  polling  job,  it  will  be  executed  after  the  current  job  is  completed. 


4-133 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


CHECKING  THE  ACTIVITY  LOG 
(Image  Sending  Activity  Report) 

IMAGE  SENDING  ACTIVITY  REPORT 

You  can  have  the  machine  print  a  log  of  recent  image  sending  activity  (date,  name  of  other  party,  time  required,  result, 
etc.).  The  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  contains  useful  information  such  as  the  types  of  errors  that  occurred. 

The  most  recent  200  transactions  are  included  in  the  report. 

You  can  have  the  machine  print  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  each  time  the  number  of  transactions  reaches  201, 
or  at  a  specified  time  (once  a  day  only). 


The  contents  of  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  are  erased  when  the  report  is  printed,  and  thus  it  cannot  be  reprinted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Activity  Report  Print  Select  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  conditions  for  printing  activity  reports.  The  factory  default  setting  is  not  to  print. 

The  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  can  be  set  to  print  each  time  the  number  of  transactions  reaches  201 ,  or  at  a  specified 
time  (once  a  day  only). 


4-134 


Contents 


FACSIMILE 


INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE  RESULT  COLUMN 


Error  types  and  other  information  are  printed  in  the  result  column  of  transaction  and  activity  reports.  When  a  transaction 
report  or  activity  report  is  printed,  check  the  result  of  the  transaction  in  the  result  column  and  take  action  as  needed. 

Examples  of  messages  that  are  printed  in  the  result  column 


Message 

Explanation 

OK 

The  transaction  was  completed  normally. 

G3 

Communication  took  place  in  G3  mode. 

ECM 

Communication  took  place  in  G3  ECM  mode. 

SG3 

Communication  took  place  in  Super  G3  mode. 

Forwarding 

The  received  data  was  forwarded. 

NO  RESPONSE 

No  response  from  the  receiving  party. 

BUSY 

Transmission  was  not  possible  because  the  other  party  was  already  using  the  line. 

CANCEL 

The  transmission  was  canceled  while  in  progress. 

MEMORY  OVER 

The  memory  became  full  during  quick  on-line  transmission. 

MEM. FULL 

The  memory  became  full  during  reception. 

LENGTH  OVER 

The  transmitted  fax  was  over  1 .5  m  (59")  long  and  therefore  could  not  be  received. 

ORIGINAL  ERROR 

Direct  transmission  or  manual  transmission  was  not  successful  because  a  misfeed  occurred. 

PASS#  NG 

The  connection  was  broken  because  the  polling  passcode  was  not  correct. 

NO  RX  POLL 

The  machine  that  was  polled  does  not  have  a  polling  function. 

RX  POLL  FAIL 

The  other  machine  refused  the  polling  operation,  or  your  machine  broke  the  connection  when 
polled  because  no  data  was  in  memory. 

NO  F-CODE  POLL 

The  other  machine  refused  an  F-code  polling  operation,  or  your  machine  broke  the  connection 
when  polled  because  no  data  was  in  its  F-code  memory  polling  box. 

RX  POLL#  NG 

The  connection  was  broken  because  the  sub-address  for  F-code  polling  memory  was  not  valid. 

F  POLL  PASS#  NG 

The  connection  was  broken  because  the  passcode  for  F-code  polling  memory  was  not  valid. 

BOX  NO.  NG 

Your  machine  broke  the  connection  because  the  specified  sub-address  for  an  F-code  memory 
box  does  not  exist. 

F  PASS#  NG 

Your  machine  broke  the  connection  because  the  other  machine  sent  an  incorrect  passcode  for 
F-code  communication. 

RX  NO  F-CODE  POLL 

F-code  polling  was  attempted,  however,  the  other  machine  did  not  have  an  F-code  polling  memory  box. 

NO  F FUNC 

F-code  communication  was  attempted,  however,  the  other  machine  does  not  support  F-code 
communication. 

NO  F-CODE 

F-code  communication  was  refused  by  the  other  machine  because  of  an  incorrect  sub-address  or 
other  reason. 

M.  BOX:  [xxxxxx] 

Data  was  received  to  a  confidential  or  relay  broadcast  memory  box,  or  data  was  sent  from  a 
memory  polling  box. 

The  name  of  the  memory  box  appears  in  [xxxxxx],  and  the  type  of  F-code  operation  (relay  request 
reception,  polling  memory  transmission,  or  confidential  reception)  appears  in  氺 氺氺氺 氺氺. 

FAIL  xx  (xxxx) 

The  transaction  failed  due  to  a  communication  error. 

First  2  digits  of  communication  error  number:  Error  code  from  00  to  99. 

Last  4  digits  of  communication  error  number:  Code  for  use  by  service  technicians. 

REJECTED 

A  fax  was  sent  from  a  party  from  which  reception  is  blocked. 

4-135 


Contents 


CHAPTER  5 

SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  scanner  function  and  the  Internet  fax  function. 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A 


NETWORK  SCANNER 


NETWORK  SCANNER  FUNCTION . 5-3 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  USE  AS  A  NETWORK 
SCANNER . 5-5 

•  MAKE  SURE  THE  MAIN  POWER  SWITCH 

IS  IN  THE  "ON"  POSITION . 5-5 

•  CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME . 5-5 

•  STORING  SENDER  INFORMATION . 5-5 

•  SETTINGS  REQUIRED  IN  THE  WEB 

PAGES . 5-6 

•  STORING  DESTINATION  ADDRESSES 
FOR  EACH  SCAN  MODE  IN  THE 

ADDRESS  BOOK . 5-6 

•  STORING  A  DESTINATION  FOR  SCAN 

TO  DESKTOP . 5-7 

•  BEFORE  SENDING  TO  A  DIRECT  SMTP 

ADDRESS . 5-8 

BASE  SCREEN . 5-9 

•  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN . 5-12 

•  CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF 
ONE-TOUCH  KEYS  IN  THE  ADDRESS 

BOOK  SCREEN . 5-13 

SCAN  SEND  SEQUENCE . 5-15 

ORIGINAL  SIZES . 5-17 

•  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES . 5-17 

•  THE  SIZE  OF  THE  PLACED  ORIGINAL . 5-17 


ENTERING  DESTINATIONS 


RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK . 5-18 

•  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION . 5-19 

•  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  THE 

SELECTED  DESTINATIONS . 5-20 

USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE 
A  DESTINATION . 5-21 

ENTERING  AN  ADDRESS  MANUALLY . 5-22 

•  SPECIFYING  A  NETWORK  FOLDER . 5-23 

RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A 

GLOBAL  ADDRESS  BOOK . 5-25 

USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION . 5-27 


TRANSMITTING  AN  IMAGE 


SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  SCAN  MODE . 5-28 

•  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME, 

REPLY-TO,  AND  BODY  TEXT . 5-32 

SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  USB  MEMORY 

MODE . 5-35 

•  SPECIFY  THE  FOLDER  IN  WHICH  THE 

FILE  WILL  BE  STORED . 5-39 

•  ENTERING  A  FILE  NAME . 5-40 

SENDING  A  FAX  IN  INTERNET  FAX  MODE . 5-41 

•  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME, 

AND  BODY  TEXT . 5-44 


SENDING  THE  SAME  IMAGE  TO  MULTIPLE 
DESTINATIONS  (Broadcast  Transmission) _ 5-47 


•  BROADCAST  TRANSMISSIONS  THAT 
INCLUDE  INTERNET  FAX 

DESTINATIONS . 5-50 

SENDING  AN  INTERNET  FAX  FROM  A 
COMPUTER  (PC ■卜 Fax) . 5-52 

IMAGE  SETTINGS . 5-53 

•  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH 
SIDES  OF  AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided 

Original) . 5-54 

•  SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE 

AND  SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce) . 5-55 

•  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND 

ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE . 5-61 

•  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION . 5-63 

•  CHANGING  THE  FILE  FORMAT . 5-64 

•  CHANGING  THE  COLOR  MODE . 5-68 

CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE 

TRANSMITTED  (Preview) . 5-69 

•  PREVIEW  CHECK  SCREEN . 5-70 


5-1 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SPECIAL  MODES 


SPECIAL  MODES . 5-71 

STORING  SCAN  OPERATIONS  (Programs)  ....  5-73 

ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase) . 5-75 

SCANNING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO 

SEPARATE  PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan) . 5-77 

SENDING  AN  IMAGE  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME 
(Timer  Transmission) . 5-79 

WHITENING  FAINT  COLORS  IN  THE  IMAGE 
(Suppress  Background) . 5-81 

SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ONTO 
A  SINGLE  PAGE  (Card  Shot) . 5-83 

SCANNING  MANY  ORIGINALS  AT  ONCE 

(Job  Build) . 5-86 

SCANNING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 

SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original) . 5-88 

SCANNING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode). . .  5-90 

CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE 

TRANSMISSION  (Original  Count) . 5-92 

STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif.  Stamp). . .  5-94 

SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE 
(2in1) . 5-96 

CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 
TRANSACTION  REPORT  (Transaction  Report) … 5-99 


CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF 
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION  JOBS 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN . 5-101 

•  JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED 

JOB  SCREEN . 5-102 

•  OPERATION  WHEN  A  JOB  IN  THE  JOB 

QUEUE  IS  COMPLETED . 5-105 

•  CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS . 5-106 

STOPPING  A  SCAN  JOB  BEING  TRANSMITTED 
OR  WAITING  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED . 5-107 

GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  SCAN 

TRANSMISSION  JOB . 5-108 

CHECKING  THE  INTERNET  FAX  ACTIVITY 

LOG  (Image  Sending  Activity  Report) . 5-109 

•  IMAGE  SENDING  ACTIVITY  REPORT . 5-109 

•  INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE 

RESULT  COLUMN . 5-109 


INTERNET  FAX  RECEPTION  FUNCTIONS 


RECEIVING  AN  INTERNET  FAX . 5-110 

•  MANUALLY  RECEIVING  INTERNET 

FAXES . 5-111 

PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX 
(Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print) . 5-112 

CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING  .  .  5-113 

•IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN . 5-114 

FORWARDING  RECEIVED  INTERNET 

FAXES  TO  A  NETWORK  ADDRESS 

(Inbound  Routing  Settings) . 5-115 

•  CONFIGURING  INBOUND  ROUTING 

SETTINGS . 5-115 


SCANNING  FROM  A  COMPUTER  (PC 


Scan  Mode) 


BASIC  SCANNING  PROCEDURE . 5-119 


METADATA  DELIVERY 


METADATA  DELIVERY  (Data  Entry) . 5-124 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  METADATA 
TRANSMISSION . 5-125 

•  SETTINGS  REQUIRED  IN  THE  WEB 

PAGES . 5-125 

•  METADATA  TRANSMISSION  FOR  SCAN 

TO  DESKTOP . 5-125 

TRANSMITTING  METADATA . 5-126 

•  METADATA  FIELDS . 5-128 


5-2 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE  AS  A 
NETWORK  SCANNER 


This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  using  the  machine  as  a  network  scanner. 


NETWORK  SCANNER  FUNCTION 

The  network  scanner  function  of  the  machine  can  be  used  to  scan  an  original,  create  an  image  file,  and  send  the  file 
over  a  network  to  a  computer,  FTP  server,  or  other  destination.  Scanning  is  also  possible  from  your  computer  using  a 
TWAIN-compliant  application. 

The  network  scanner  function  provides  the  following  scanning  modes. 


Scan  modes 


瞭  SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  SCAN  MODE  (page  5-28) 


Scan  to  E-mail 


The  scanned  file  is  sent  to  an  e-mail  address. 

_ □ 


Scan  to  FTP 


The  scanned  file  is  sent  to  a  specified  directory  of  an  FTP  server. 

When  the  file  is  sent,  it  is  also  possible  to  send  an  e-mail  to  a  previously  stored  e-mail 
address  to  inform  the  recipient  of  the  location  of  the  file.  (This  is  called  "Scan  to  FTP 
(Hyperlink)".) 

Scan  to  Desktop 


The  scanned  file  is  sent  to  a  specified  folder  on  your  computer. 

To  use  Scan  to  Desktop,  software  must  be  installed  from  the  "Sharpdesk/Network  Scanner 
Utilities"  CD-ROM  that  accompanies  the  machine.  For  the  system  requirements  of  the 
software,  see  the  manual  (PDF  format)  or  the  Readme  file  on  the  CD-ROM.  For  the 
procedures  for  installing  the  software,  see  the  "Sharpdesk  Installation  Guide". 

Scan  to  Network  Folder 


The  scanned  file  is  sent  to  a  Network  Folder  on  a  Windows  computer  on  the  same  network 
as  the  machine. 


5-3 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


USB  memory  mode 


隊  SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  USB  MEMORY  MODE  (page  5-35) 

USB  Memory  Scan 

The  scanned  file  is  sent  to  and  stored  in  a  USB  memory  device  connected  to  the  machine. 


Internet  fax  mode 


To  use  the  Internet  fax  function,  the  Internet  fax  expansion  kit  must  be  installed. 

隊  SENDING  A  FAX  IN  INTERNET  FAX  MODE  (page  5-41) 

Internet  fax  transmission 

The  scanned  file  is  sent  as  an  Internet  fax.  Reception  of  Internet  faxes  is  also  possible. 

The  machine  supports  Direct  SMTP, which  lets  you  directly  send  Internet  faxes  within  your 
company  without  using  a  mail  server. 


PC  scan  mode 


隊  SCANNING  FROM  A  COMPUTER  (PC  Scan  Mode)  (page  5-119) 

PC  Scan 

A  TWAIN-compliant  application  on  a  computer  connected  to  the  same  network  as  the 
machine  is  used  to  scan  a  document  or  image. 

To  use  PC  Scan,  the  scanner  driver  must  be  installed  from  the  "Software  CD-ROM"  that 
accompanies  the  machine. 

Operating  systems  that  can  be  used  are  Windows  98/Me/ 2000 /XP/Server  2003/Vista/ 

Server  2008. 


Data  entry  mode 


The  application  integration  module  is  required  to  use  the  metadata  transmission  function. 

^  隊  METADATA  DELIVERY  (page  5-124) 


Metadata  delivery 

The  application  integration  module  can  be  combined  with  the  network  scanner  function  to  append  a  metadata*  file  to  a 
scanned  image  file.  (This  is  called  metadata  delivery.) 

Information  entered  using  the  touch  panel  or  automatically  generated  by  the  machine  can  be  sent  to  a  directory  on  an 
FTP  server  or  an  application  on  a  computer  as  a  metadata  file  in  XML  format. 

*  Metadata  is  information  about  a  file,  how  it  is  to  be  processed,  and  its  relation  to  other  objects. 


5-4 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  USE  AS  A  NETWORK 
SCANNER 


MAKE  SURE  THE  MAIN  POWER  SWITCH  IS  IN  THE 
"ON"  POSITION 


The  main  power  is  "on"  when  the  main  power  indicator  on  the  right  side  of  the  operation  panel  is  lit. 

If  the  main  power  indicator  is  not  lit,  the  main  power  is  "off".  Switch  the  main  power  switch  to  the  "on"  position  and  press 
the  [POWER]  key  (©)  on  the  operation  panel. 

If  the  Internet  fax  function  will  be  used,  and  in  particular  if  reception  or  timer  transmission  will  take  place  at  night,  always 
keep  the  main  power  switch  in  the  "on"  position. 


When  the  [POWER  SAVE]  key  ((§))  indicator  light  is  blinking,  the  machine  is  in  auto  power  shut-off  mode.  If  the  [POWER 
SAVE]  key  ((§))  is  pressed  when  the  indicator  is  blinking,  the  indicator  will  turn  off  and  the  machine  will  return  to  the  ready 
state  after  a  brief  interval. 


Main  power  indicator  Main  power  switch 


CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME 


Verify  that  the  correct  date  and  time  are  set  in  the  machine. 

The  date  and  time  are  set  in  the  system  settings  of  the  machine.  When  the  [SYSTEM  SETTINGS]  key  is  pressed,  the 
system  settings  menu  screen  appears  on  the  touch  panel.  Select  [Default  Settings],  [Clock],  and  [Clock  Adjust],  and  set 
the  year,  month,  day,  hour,  and  minute. 


If  "Disabling  of  Clock  Adjustment"  has  been  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  date  and  time  cannot  be  set. 


STORING  SENDER  INFORMATION 

Be  sure  to  configure  this  information,  as  it  is  required  for  communication. 

Before  using  Scan  to  E-mail 

Store  a  default  sender  name  in  "Sender  Name"  and  a  reply  e-mail  address  in  "Reply  E-mail  Address".  These  will  be 
used  when  a  sender  is  not  selected. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Sender  Set 

This  is  used  to  store  the  sender  name  and  e-mail  address  that  is  used  when  a  sender  is  not  selected. 


Before  using  Internet  fax 

Store  a  sender  name  in  "Sender  Name"  and  a  sender  Internet  fax  address  in  "Own  Address". 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Sender  Data  Registration 

Use  this  setting  to  program  the  sender  name  and  sender  address. 


5-5 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SETTINGS  REQUIRED  IN  THE  WEB  PAGES 

To  use  scan  mode  and  Internet  fax  mode,  the  basic  network  scanner  settings,  server  settings  such  SMTP  and  DNS 
server  settings,  and  sender  addresses  must  be  configured  in  the  Web  pages. 

•  Server  settings 

To  configure  server  settings,  click  [Network  Settings]  and  then  [Services  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 
(Administrator  rights  are  required.) 

•  Basic  network  scanner  settings 

To  configure  network  scanner  settings,  click  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Network  Scanner  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.) 

•  Internet  fax  settings 

To  configure  the  network  scanner  settings,  click  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Internet  Fax  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.) 


STORING  DESTINATION  ADDRESSES  FOR  EACH 
SCAN  MODE  IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK 


To  use  Scan  to  FTP  or  Scan  to  Desktop,  the  destination  must  be  stored  in  the  address  book.  For  Scan  to  E-mail, 
Internet  Fax,  and  Scan  to  Network  Folder,  the  destination  can  be  directly  entered  or  looked  up  in  a  global  address  book 
at  the  time  of  transmission,  however,  the  procedure  is  simpler  when  the  destination  is  stored  in  the  address  book.  Store 
each  type  of  destination  as  explained  below. 


Types  of  transmission  in  scanner  mode 

•  Scan  to  FTP:  Click  [Address  Book]  in  the  Web  page  menu  and  then  click  the  [Add]  button.  Select  [FTP]  in 

[Address  Type]  and  store  an  address. 

•  Scan  to  Network  Folder:  Click  [Address  Book]  in  the  Web  page  menu  and  then  click  the  [Add]  button.  Select  [Network 

Folder]  in  [Address  Type]  and  store  an  address. 

•  Scan  to  E-mail:  Click  [Address  Book]  in  the  Web  page  menu  and  then  click  the  [Add]  button.  Select  [E-mail] 

in  [Address  Type]  and  store  an  address.  Addresses  can  also  be  stored  in  the  system 
settings. 

•  Scan  to  Desktop:  See  "STORING  A  DESTINATION  FOR  SCAN  TO  DESKTOP"  (page  5-7).  Scan  to  Desktop 

destinations  can  also  be  stored  in  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Address  Book]  in  the  Web  page 
menu  and  then  click  the  [Add]  button.  Select  [Desktop]  in  [Address  Type]  and  store  an 
address. 


A  total  of  1000  addresses  can  be  stored.  Among  these,  a  combined  maximum  of  200  Scan  to  Network  Folder,  Scan  to  FTP, 
and  Scan  to  Desktop  addresses  can  be  stored. 


Transmission  in  Internet  fax  mode: 

Click  [Address  Book]  in  the  Web  page  menu  and  then  click  the  [Add]  button.  Select  [Internet 
Fax]  or  [Direct  SMTP]  for  the  [Address  Type],  and  store  the  address.  Addresses  can  also  be 
stored  in  the  system  settings. 


System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  destination  addresses  for  Scan  to  E-mail  and  Internet  fax. 


5-6 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


STORING  A  DESTINATION  FOR  SCAN  TO  DESKTOP 

To  store  your  computer  in  the  machine  as  a  destination  for  Scan  to  Desktop,  Network  Scanner  Tool  must  be  installed 
from  the  "Sharpdesk/Network  Scanner  Utilities"  CD-ROM  that  accompanies  the  machine.  To  scan  an  image  to  your 
computer,  Network  Scanner  Tool  must  be  running  on  your  computer. 

INSTALLING  NETWORK  SCANNER  TOOL 

To  install  Network  Scanner  Tool,  see  the  "Sharpdesk  Installation  Guide"  that  accompanies  the  machine.  When  a 
standard  installation  is  performed,  Network  Scanner  Tool  is  installed  with  Sharpdesk. 


When  you  restart  your  computer  after  installing  Network  Scanner  Tool,  the  Setup  Wizard  will  start  automatically.  Follow 
this  wizard  to  set  up  Network  Scanner  Tool.  This  will  store  your  computer  in  the  machine  as  a  destination  for  Scan  to 
Desktop.  The  stored  destination  will  be  displayed  as  a  one-touch  key  in  the  address  book  screen. 

The  following  window  appears  while  Network  Scanner  Tool  is  being  set  up.  The  item  selected  in  "My  Profiles"  (C)  will  be 
the  name  of  the  one-touch  key. 


The  profile  name  is  determined  by  the  combination  of  the  text  entered  in  "Prefix"  (A)  and  the  profile*. 

The  one-touch  key  is  assigned  to  an  index  tab  in  the  address  book  screen  based  on  the  text  entered  in  "Initial"  (B). 

*  This  defines  how  an  image  sent  to  your  computer  is  processed.  For  more  information,  see  profile  explanation  (D). 


ADDING  DESTINATIONS 

For  the  number  of  computers  that  can  be  stored  in  the  machine  as  destinations  of  Scan  to  Desktop,  see  the  number  of 
licenses  indicated  in  the  "Sharpdesk  Installation  Guide".  To  store  more  destinations,  a  license  kit  is  required.  Store  Scan 
to  Desktop  destinations  by  installing  Network  Scanner  Tool  on  each  computer. 


5-7 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


BEFORE  SENDING  TO  A  DIRECT  SMTP  ADDRESS 

The  machine  supports  Direct  SMTP, which  lets  you  directly  send  Internet  faxes  within  your  company  without  using  a 
mail  server.  For  the  procedure  for  storing  a  Direct  SMTP  address  in  the  address  book,  see  "STORING  DESTINATION 
ADDRESSES  FOR  EACH  SCAN  MODE  IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK"  (page  5-6).  Stored  Direct  SMTP  addresses  are 
included  in  the  address  book  for  Internet  fax  mode. 

If  the  destination  is  busy 

If  the  destination  is  busy,  the  machine  will  wait  briefly  and  then  automatically  resend. 


To  cancel  transmission... 

Cancel  the  transmission  from  the  job  status  screen. 

隊  STOPPING  A  SCAN  JOB  BEING  TRANSMITTED  OR  WAITING  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED  (page  5-107) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Recall  in  Case  of  Line  Busy 

This  is  used  to  set  the  number  of  recall  attempts  and  the  interval  between  attempts  when  the  connection  cannot  be 
established  because  the  line  is  busy.  The  factory  default  setting  is  2  attempts  at  an  interval  of  3  minutes. 


When  a  communication  error  occurs 

If  a  communication  error  occurs  or  the  other  fax  machine  does  not  answer  the  call  within  a  preset  period  of  time, 
transmission  will  be  re-attempted  automatically  after  a  preset  interval. 


To  cancel  transmission... 

Cancel  the  transmission  from  the  job  status  screen. 

瞭  STOPPING  A  SCAN  JOB  BEING  TRANSMITTED  OR  WAITING  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED  (page  5-107) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Recall  in  Case  of  Communication  Error 

This  is  used  to  set  the  number  of  recall  attempts  and  the  interval  between  attempts  when  a  transmission  fails  due  to  an  error. 
The  factory  default  setting  is  attempt  at  an  interval  of  3  minutes. 


5-8 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


BASE  SCREEN 


Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  Internet  fax  mode,  and  PC  scan  mode  are  used  by  selecting  operations  and  settings  in 
the  base  screens  of  those  modes.  To  display  the  base  screen  of  a  mode,  touch  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  in  the  touch 
panel  and  then  touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

Base  screen  of  scan  mode 


⑺. 


•  J  ll) COPY 

Resend 

J;  Scan 

Internet  Fax  |  Fax  |  USB  Mem.  Scan  |  PC  Scan 

■♦►Address  Book| 

1  f 

[  Original ] Scan:  Send: 

■#  Address  Entry 

f  Exposure  ] 

1 し  _ 

Send  Settings  | 

[ Resolution  _  2 00X2 00dpi  # 

| Address  Review 

f  File  Format  j  pP  PDF 

•  File 

[ Color  Mode  丨  J  Mono2 

j  Quick  File  | 

Preview 

®  1 

■(10) 


(11) 


Base  screen  of  USB  memory  mode 


(12)  (13) 


Base  screen  of  Internet  1 


(1 )  ©  copy  j  i 

(2) 

(3)4. 


USB  Mem.  Scan  I 


(14)  Stored  to 

File  Name 


(15) 


⑻ 

(1) 


(4) - 

(5) . 


Resolution  I  200X200dpi 


_(10) ⑹  + 


D  cP 1 


f  Color  Mode  I  |~p  h 


f Special  Modes  | 


⑺. 


■(13) 


•J  ©  COPY 

皿 GE  S 讎 ㈣ 

を國 

f:  Scan 

Internet  Fax  |[  Fax  |  USB 

Mem.  Scan  |  PC  Scan 

►Address  Book  1 

1  ' - 

[  Original  ] Scan: 

Send: 

_ Address  Entry 

[ Exposure  j  ■ 

1 ' - 

Send  Settings  j 

f  Resolution  ]  200X100dpi 

| Address  Review! 

\  File  Format  丨  TIFF-F 

•[  File 

j  Quick  File  j 

■#  Preview  | 

mm 

f  I -Fax  Manual  Lll 
し  Reception 

■(10) 


■(13) 

■(12) 

■(16) 

■(17) 


Mode  select  keys 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send,  and 
document  filing  modes. 

To  use  scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  Internet  fax 
mode,  PC  scan  mode,  or  data  entry  mode,  touch  the 
[IMAGE  SEND]  key. 

Various  messages  are  displayed  here. 

The  icon  of  the  selected  mode  appears  on  the  left. 

Send  mode  tabs 

Touch  one  of  these  tabs  to  change  the  image  send 
mode. 

Tabs  of  modes  that  cannot  be  used  because  the 
corresponding  options  are  not  installed  do  not  appear. 

If  the  [USB  Mem.  Scan]  and  [PC  Scan]  tabs  do  not 
appear,  touch  the 「  __»  |  tab  to  move  the  screen. 

If  the  [Scan],  [Internet  Fax],  [Fax],  and  [Data  Entry]  tabs 
do  not  appear,  touch  the 「  ♦_  ]  tab  move  the 

screen. 

The  [Data  Entry]  tab  appears  when  the  application 
integration  module  is  installed.  For  information  on 
metadata  delivery  using  the  [Data  Entry]  tab,  see 
"METADATA  DELIVERY11  (page  5-124). 


[Address  Book]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  use  a  one-touch  key  or  a  group  key.  When 
the  key  is  touched,  the  address  book  screen  appears. 

^  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  5-18) 

[Address  Entry]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  manually  enter  an  destination  address 
instead  of  using  a  one-touch  key. 

瞭  ENTERING  AN  ADDRESS  MANUALLY  (page  5-22) 

[Send  Settings]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  or  enter  the  subject,  file  name, 
sender  name,  or  body  text,  which  has  been  previously 
stored  in  the  Web  page. 

Scan  modes: 

隊  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME, 

REPLY-T 〇, AND  BODY  TEXT  (page  5-32) 

Internet  fax  mode: 

暖  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME,  AND 
BODY  TEXT  (page  5-44) 


Contents 


5-9 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(7)  Customized  keys 

The  keys  that  appear  here  can  be  changed  to  show 
settings  or  functions  that  you  prefer. 

隊  Customizing  displayed  keys  (page  5-11) 

(8)  [Preview]  key 

Touch  to  check  the  image  that  will  be  sent  in  the  touch 
panel  before  transmission. 

隊  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED 
(Preview)  (page  5-69) 

(9)  [Resend]  key/[Next  Address]  key 

The  destinations  of  the  most  recent  8  transmissions  by  Scan 
to  E-mail,  fax  and/or  Internet  fax  are  stored.  Touch  this  key 
to  select  one  of  these  destinations.  After  a  destination  is 
selected,  this  key  changes  to  the  [Next  Address]  key. 

暖  USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION  (page  5-27) 
RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  (page  5-19) 

(10)  Image  settings 

Image  settings  (original  size,  exposure,  resolution,  file 
format,  and  color  mode)  can  be  selected. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 

(11)  固  key 

This  key  appears  when  a  special  mode  or  2-sided 
scanning  is  selected.  Touch  the  key  to  display  the 
selected  special  modes. 

隊  Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected  (page  5-11) 

(12)  \W]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  specify  a  destination  using  a  search  number . 
*  4-digit  number  assigned  to  a  destination  when  it  is  stored. 
隊  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE  A 
DESTINATION  (page  5-21) 


(13)  [Special  Modes]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  use  a  special  mode. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 

(14)  [Stored  to]  key 

Touch  to  select  the  folder  in  USB  memory  where  a  file 
will  be  stored. 

暖  SPECIFY  THE  FOLDER  IN  WHICH  THE  FILE  WILL 
BE  STORED,  (page  5-39) 

(15)  [File  Name]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  a  file  name  when  storing  a  file  to 
USB  memory. 

隊  ENTERING  A  FILE  NAME  (page  5-40) 

(16)  匿], 画  /  區  key 

When  "Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  or 
"Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the 
system  settings  (administrator),  this  will  appear  when  an 
Internet  fax  is  received. 

[W\  :  Only  "Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  is 
enabled 

[ ^  :  Only  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is 
enabled 

[a3  :  Both  settings  are  enabled 
暖  PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX 
(Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print)  (page  5-112) 
隊  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING 
(page  5-113) 

(17)  [1-Fax  Manual  Reception]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  receive  an  Internet  fax  manually. 

隊  MANUALLY  RECEIVING  INTERNET  FAXES  (page  5-111) 


When  sending  an  image,  you  can  retrieve  and  use  a  stored  transmission  destination  from  the  address  book  screen.  The 
address  book  screen  is  shared  by  scan  mode,  Internet  fax  mode,  fax  mode  and  data  entry  mode. 

Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base  screen  to  switch  to  the  address  book  screen.  Touch  the  [Condition  Settings] 
key  in  the  address  book  screen  to  switch  to  the  base  screen. 


Base  screen  of  scan  mode 


Address  book  screen 


f|  5  ►  EB  ► 15  I  (eT  To  (Sec  ] 

I  w  Condition  1 

1  Settings  | 

[aAA  AAA  q]  (bBB  BBB  创  1 

Addro4  *^iew 

[ccc  ccc  [d®  DDD  b]  L 

Address  Entry 

[eee  eee  Vj  |fff  FFF  aj  l  ^  1 

Global 

| Address  Search 

[ggg  GGG  _ffl  HHH  贷  1  f  = ] 

LlJ 

fill  III-  q]  fjjj  JJJ 

|  Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview  |  ^'Auto  RecePtion 

1.  1.  Fax  Memory: 100% 

•  This  chapter  uses  the  base  screen  of  scan  mode  as  an  example  when  operations  common  to  all  modes  are  explained. 

•  The  procedures  in  this  chapter  assume  that  the  base  screen  of  scan  mode  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

One  of  the  following  screens  can  be  selected  for  the  initial  screen  that  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched. 

•  Base  screen  of  each  mode  (scan,  Internet  fax,  fax,  or  data  entry  mode) 

•  Address  book  screen 


5-10 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Customizing  displayed  keys 

Special  mode  keys  and  other  keys  can  be  displayed  in  the  base  screen.  Set  these  keys  to  functions  that  you  frequently 
use  to  access  the  functions  with  a  single  touch.  The  customized  keys  are  configured  using  "Customize  Key  Setting"  in 
the  Web  pages.  The  following  keys  appear  by  factory  default: 


•  [Address  Review]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  display  a  list  of  the  destinations  that  have  been  selected  in  the  address  book.  This  is  the  same  key 
as  the  [Address  Review]  key  in  the  address  book  screen. 

•  [File]  key,  [Quick  File]  key 

Touch  either  of  these  keys  to  use  the  File  function  or  Quick  File  function  of  document  filing  mode. 

In  USB  memory  mode... 

Customized  keys  do  not  initially  appear,  however,  up  to  three  keys  can  be  added. 

Example:  When  "Dual  Page  Scan",  "Job  Build",  and  "Mixed  Size  Original"  are  assigned  to  the  customized  keys 


These  three  keys  can  be  changed 
as  desired. 


Displaying  a  program  key  in  the  base  screen  will  enable  you  to  retrieve  the  program  by  simply  touching  the  key. 
隊 STORING  SCAN  OPERATIONS  (Programs)  (page  5-73) 

•  The  functions  that  can  be  selected  for  the  customized  keys  vary  depending  on  the  mode. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Customize  Key  Setting 

Registration  is  performed  in  [System  Settings]  -  [Operation  Settings]  -  "Customize  Key  Setting"  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


Checking  what  special  modes  are  selected 

The  加  key  appears  in  the  base  screen  when  a  special  mode  or  2-sided  scanning  is  selected. 

The  Si  I  key  can  be  touched  to  display  the  selected  special  modes.  To  close  the  screen,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


J 

Scan 

Internet  Fax  |  Fax  J  USB  Mem.  Scan  1  PC  Scan 

►Address  Book 

[  Original  j  Scan:  ■QJJ  Send: 

Address  Entry 

f  Exposure  j 

Send  Settings 

\  Resolution  j  2 00X2 00dpi 

Address  Review 

f  File  Format  ]  pP  PDF 

File 

f  Color  Mode  j  pP  Mono2 

Quick  File  | 

[ Special  Modes  j  |  |  ij|  | 

Preview 

Function  Review 

[  0K  1 

Erase 

. Edge: 1/2 inch 
' Center : l/2inch 

Timer 

b Day  of  the  Week: Monday 
: Time: 21: 30 

1 

Mixed  Size 

Original 

:  On 

E 

E 

The  special  mode  settings  cannot  be  changed  from  the  review  screen.  To  change  a  setting,  touch  the  [OK]  key  to  close  the 
review  screen  and  then  touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key  and  select  the  setting  that  you  wish  to  change. 


Contents 


5-11 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN 


This  screen  is  used  to  select  transmission  destinations. 


(1) 


(1)  This  shows  the  selected  destination. 

(2)  Number  of  displayed  items  selector  key 

Touch  this  key  to  change  the  number  of  destinations 
(one-touch  keys)  displayed  in  the  address  book  screen. 
Select  5, 10,  or  15  keys. 

(3)  [Condition  Settings]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  transmission  settings.  When  the 
key  is  touched,  the  base  screen  appears. 

隊  BASE  SCREEN  (page  5-9) 

(4)  [Address  Review]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  view  a  list  of  the  selected  destinations. 
Destination  selections  can  be  changed. 

隊  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  THE  SELECTED 
DESTINATIONS  (page  5-20) 

(5)  [Address  Entry]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  manually  enter  a  destination  address 
instead  of  using  a  one-touch  key. 

隊  ENTERING  AN  ADDRESS  MANUALLY  (page  5-22) 

(6)  [Global  Address  Search]  key 

When  the  use  of  an  LDAP  server  has  been  enabled  in 
the  machine's  Web  pages,  a  transmission  address  can 
be  obtained  from  a  global  address  book. 

^  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A  GLOBAL 
ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  5-25) 

(7)  [Sort  Address]  key 

Touch  to  change  the  index  tabs  to  custom  indexes  or  to 
display  one-touch  keys  by  send  mode. 

^  CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF  ONE-TOUCH  KEYS 
IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN  (page  5-13) 

(8)  [Preview]  key 

Touch  to  check  the  image  that  will  be  sent  in  the  touch 
panel  before  transmission. 

暖  CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED 
(Preview)  (page  5-69) 


(9)  [To]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  enter  the  selected  destination 
(one-touch  key). 

暖  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  (page  5-19) 

(10)  [Cc]  key 

When  using  Scan  to  E-mail,  touch  the  [Cc]  key  when  you 
wish  to  send  a  "Carbon  copy"  of  the  e-mail  to  an 
additional  destination. 

(11)  [Bcc]  key 

When  using  Scan  to  E-mail,  touch  the  [Bcc]  key  when 
you  wish  to  send  a  "Blind  carbon  copy"  of  the  e-mail  to  an 
additional  destination. 

When  an  address  is  specified  as  a  Bcc  recipient,  other 
recipients  will  not  know  that  the  address  is  a  recipient. 
This  key  only  appears  when  Bcc  has  been  enabled  using 
"Bcc  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

(12)  One-touch  key  display 

The  destinations  (one-touch  keys)  stored  in  each  index 
are  displayed.  This  chapter  refers  to  keys  in  which 
destinations  and  groups  are  stored  as  one-touch  keys. 
暖  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  (page  5-19) 

(13)  Index  tabs 

Touch  this  to  change  the  displayed  index  tab. 

瞭  Index  display  (page  5-14) 

(14)  [W\  key 

Touch  this  key  to  specify  a  destination  using  a  search 
number*. 

*  4-digit  number  assigned  to  a  one-touch  key  or  group 
key  when  it  is  stored. 

隊  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE  A 
DESTINATION  (page  5-21) 


5-12 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Icons  appear  in  the  one-touch  keys  in  the  address  book  to  indicate  which  mode  is  used  for  transmission. 

隊 RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  5-18) 

•  For  information  on  storing  addresses  in  the  address  book,  see  "STORING  DESTINATION  ADDRESSES  FOR  EACH 
SCAN  MODE  IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK11  (page  5-6). 

•  For  information  on  storing  destinations  for  Scan  to  Desktop,  see  "STORING  A  DESTINATION  FOR  SCAN  TO  DESKTOP" 
(page  5-7). 


•  System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  Scan  to  E-mail  and  Internet  fax  addresses  in  one-touch  keys. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  The  Number  of  Direct  Address  Keys  Displayed  Setting 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  setting  for  the  number  of  one-touch  keys  displayed  in  the  address  book  screen. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Bcc  Setting 

This  setting  enables  or  disables  Bcc  delivery.  When  enabled,  the  [Bcc]  key  appears  in  the  address  book  screen. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

One  of  the  following  screens  can  be  selected  for  the  initial  screen  that  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched. 
- Base  screen  of  each  mode  (scan,  Internet  fax,  fax,  or  data  entry  mode) 

- Address  book  screen 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Address  Book  Default  Selection 

The  following  settings  are  available  for  the  method  of  sorting  the  addresses  that  appear  in  the  address  book. 
- Index  type  (alphabetical,  custom) 

- Address  type  (all,  group,  E-mail,  FTP/Desktop,  Network  Folder,  Internet  fax,  fax) 


CHANGING  THE  DISPLAY  OF  ONE-TOUCH  KEYS  IN 
THE  ADDRESS  BOOK  SCREEN 

You  can  show  destinations  of  only  a  specific  transmission  mode  in  the  address  book  screen,  or  change  the  displayed 
index  tabs  from  the  alphabetical  tabs  to  the  custom  tabs.  The  procedure  for  selecting  destinations  does  not  change. 


Touch  the  [Sort  Address]  key. 


⑴  (2) 


Change  the  display  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  mode  or  tab  that  you 
wish  to  display. 

•  To  show  only  the  one-touch  keys  of  a  particular  send 
mode,  touch  the  desired  mode  key  under  "Address 
Type". 

•  To  change  the  index  tabs  to  the  custom  indexes,  touch 
the  [User]  key  under  "Tab  Switch". 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Contents 


5-13 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Narrowing  the  search  letter  range 

An  alphabet  tab  on  an  index  tab  can  be  touched  to  display  keys  to  further  narrow  the  search  range.  For  example,  when 
the  [ABCD]  tab  is  touched,  keys  from  "A"  to  "D"  appear.  If  the  [B]  key  is  touched,  only  destinations  starting  with  the  letter 
"B"  will  appear.  To  cancel,  touch  the  key  again.  Note  that  the  search  letter  range  cannot  be  narrowed  on  the  [Freq.]  tab, 
the  [etc.]  tab,  or  on  a  user  index  tab. 


5-14 


Contents 


Index  display 

Indexes  make  it  easy  to  search  for  a  destination  (one-touch  key).  The  destinations  are  displayed  separately  using 
alphabetical  search  characters  and  index  numbers.  To  display  a  stored  destination,  touch  the  appropriate  index  tab.  It  is 
convenient  to  store  frequently  used  destinations  in  the  [Freq.]  index.  Specify  that  a  destination  be  displayed  in  the  [Freq.] 
index  when  you  store  the  destination. 


Index  tabs 


The  destinations  can  also  be  displayed  in  alphabetical  order  by  initial. 

Each  time  the  displayed  index  tab  is  touched,  the  display  order  changes  in  the  following  order:  search  numbers  (page 
5-21),  ascending  names,  descending  names.  When  the  display  order  is  changed,  the  display  order  of  the  other  index 
tabs  also  changes. 

Ordered  by  search  number  (default)  Ascending  names  Descending  names 

Freq.  II  ABCD 

一 

Index  names  can  be  changed  using  "Custom  Index"  in  the  system  settings,  allowing  you  to  create  groups  of  one-touch 
keys  that  can  be  easily  recognized. 


System  Settings:  Custom  Index  (page  7-18) 

This  setting  is  used  to  store  custom  index  names.  The  custom  index  where  a  one-touch  key  appears  is  specified  when  the 
transmission  destination  is  stored  in  the  key. 


1 la 


0 0 


Iny 


ill 


6 


i 


□ 

□ 

國 

□ 


I® 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCAN  SEND  SEQUENCE 

This  section  explains  the  basic  procedure  for  scanning  and  transmission.  Select  settings  in  the  order  shown  below  to 
ensure  smooth  transmission. 

For  the  detailed  procedures  for  selecting  the  settings,  see  the  explanation  of  each  setting  in  this  chapter. 


Place  the  original. 


Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  of  the  automatic 
document  feeder,  or  on  the  document  glass. 

隊  SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  SCAN  MODE  (page  5-28) 

^  SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  USB  MEMORY  MODE  (page 
5-35) 

隊  SENDING  A  FAX  IN  INTERNET  FAX  MODE  (page  5-41) 


Enter  the  destination 


Specify  the  destination  of  the  scan  transmission. 

•  [Address  Book]  key: 

^  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  THE  ADDRESS 
BOOK  (page  5-18) 

^  RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A  GLOBAL 


ADDRESS  BOOK  (page  5-25) 

•  [Address  Entry]  key: 

隊  ENTERING  AN  ADDRESS  MANUALLY  (page  5-22) 

•  \W\  key: 

隊  USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE  A 


DESTINATION  (page  5-21) 

•  [Resend]  key: 

暖  USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION  (page  5-27) 


Select  settings 

Settings  can  be  selected  for  scanning  the  original. 

•  Original  (2-sided  original,  scan  size,  send  size) 

•  Exposure  •  Resolution  •  File  Format  •  Color  Mode 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 

•  Send  Settings  (File  Name) 

Scan  mode,  Data  entry  mode: 

隊  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME,  REPLY-TO, 
AND  BODY  TEXT  (page  5-32) 

USB  memory  mode: 

隊  ENTERING  A  FILE  NAME  (page  5-40) 

Internet  fax  mode: 

隊  CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME,  AND  BODY 
TEXT  (page  5-44) 


Scan  1  Internet  Fax  |  Fax  丨  USB  Mem.  Scan  J  PC  Scan 

f  ►Address  Book 

[  Original  j  Scan:  [18%xll  Send: 

f  Address  Entry  | 

[  Exposure  j 

|l  Send  Settings 

f  Resolution  j  2 00X2 00dpi 

| Address  Review 

f  File  Format  丨  J  PDF 

File 

|  Color  Mode  丨  pP  Mono2 

j  Quick  File 

f Special  Modes  J 

Preview 

5-15 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Special  mode  settings 


Special  modes  can  be  selected. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


Start  scanning  and  transmission 

Start  scanning  and  transmission. 

If  the  original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass,  follow  these  steps  to  start  scanning  and  transmission: 

(1)  Press  the  [START]  key. 

(2)  When  scanning  is  finished,  replace  the  original  with  the  next  original. 

(3)  Press  the  [START]  key. 

(4)  Repeat  (2)  and  (3)  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 

(5)  Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


After  the  original  is  scanned,  the  settings  revert  to  the  default  settings. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Display  Settings 

The  settings  can  be  kept  in  effect  a  fixed  period  of  time  after  scanning  is  completed. 


5-16 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ORIGINAL  SIZES 

TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES 

The  following  original  sizes  can  be  transmitted 


Minimum  original  size 

Maximum  original  size 

Using  the  automatic  document  feeder 

5-1/8"  (height)  x  5-1/2"  (width) 

(131  mm  (height)  x  140  mm  (width)) 

11-5/8"  (height)  x  39-3/811*  (width) 

(297  mm  (height)  x  1000  mm*  (width)) 

Using  the  document  glass 

一 

11-5/8"  (height)  x  17"  (width) 

(297  mm  (height)  x  432  mm  (width)) 

A  long  original  can  be  transmitted.  (When  only  scan  destinations  are  selected  for  scan  transmission  or  metadata  transmission, 
scanning  will  take  place  in  Mono2  at  a  resolution  of  300 X300dpi  or  less.  When  a  resolution  of  600 X600dpi  is  used  for  Internet  fax 
transmission,  the  maximum  original  size  is  31-1/2"  (800  mm).) 


THE  SIZE  OF  THE  PLACED  ORIGINAL 

When  a  standard  size  original  is  placed,  the  original  size  is  automatically  detected  and  displayed  in  "Scan"  in  the  base  screen. 
When  the  automatic  original  detection  function  is  operating  and  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size,  the  closest  standard 
size  may  be  displayed  or  the  original  size  may  not  appear.  In  this  event,  manually  set  the  correct  original  size. 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  5-56) 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values)  (page  5-57) 

STANDARD  SIZES 

Standard  sizes  are  sizes  that  the  machine  can  automatically  detect.  The  standard  sizes  are  set  in  "Original  Size 
Detector  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The  factory  default  setting  is  "Inch-111. 

List  of  original  size  detector  settings 


Selections 

Standard  sizes  (detected  original  sizes) 

Document  glass 

Document  feeder  tray 
(automatic  document  feeder) 

Inch-1 

1 1n  x  1 7n,  8-1/2"  x  1 4", 8-1/2"  x  1 1 ",  8-1/2"  x  1 1nR, 
5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

11n  x  17M,  8-1/2"  x  14",  8-1/2"  x  IT,  8-1 /2M  x  1TR, 
5-1/211  x  8-1/2",  A4,  A3 

Inch-2 

1 1 ■■  x  1 7", 8-1/2Mx13n  (21 6  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  11M,  8-1/211  x  11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1 /2M 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  13"  (216  mm  x  330  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1 8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1/211,  A4,  A3 

Inch-3 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/2Mx  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1 /2M  x  1 1n,  8-1/2Mx  11MR,  5-1 /2M  x  8-1/211 

1 1n  x  17", 8-1/211  x  13-2/5"  (216  mm  x  340  mm), 

8-1/2"  x  1 1 ■■, 8-1/2Mx11MR,  5-1 /2Mx  8-1/211,  A4,  A3 

AB-1 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

8-1/2"  x  14n,  11"x  17" 

AB-2 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  330  mm 
(8-1/2Mx  13M) 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17M,  216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13M) 

AB-3 

A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  8K, 16K,  16KR,  8-1/2"  x  11", 

1 1n  x  17M,  216  mm  x  330  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13M) 

AB-4 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  340  mm 
(8-1 /2M  x  13-2/5") 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1  __, 

1  r  x  17M,  216  mm  x  340  mm  (8-1/2"  x  13-2/5") 

AB-5 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B5,  B5R,  216  mm  x  343  mm 
(8-1/2Mx13-1/2M) 

A3,  A4,  A4R,  A5,  B4,  B5,  B5R,  8-1/2"  x  1 1", 

1  r  x  17", 216  mm  x  343  mm  (8-1 /2Mx  13-1/211) 

5-17 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ENTERING  DESTINATIONS 


This  section  explains  how  to  specify  destination  addresses,  including  selecting  an  address  from  the  address  book  and 
retrieving  an  address  by  entering  a  search  number. 


RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  THE 
ADDRESS  BOOK 

The  address  book  screen  shows  stored  destinations  as  one-touch  keys. 

The  destinations  are  displayed  in  order  by  search  number. 


The  address  book  screen  shows  the  destinations  of  all  modes  of  the  image  send  function.  Each  one-touch  key  shows 
the  name  of  the  destination  and  an  icon  indicating  the  mode  to  be  used. 


Icon 

Mode 

Fax 

Scan  to  E-mail 

珍 

Internet  fax  (Direct  SMTP) 

Scan  to  FTP 

S 

Scan  to  Network  Folder 

Scan  to  Desktop 

Group  key  with  multiple  destinations 

•  For  information  on  storing  addresses  in  the  address  book,  see  "STORING  DESTINATION  ADDRESSES  FOR  EACH 
SCAN  MODE  IN  THE  ADDRESS  BOOK11  (page  5-6). 

•  For  information  on  storing  destinations  for  Scan  to  Desktop,  see  "STORING  A  DESTINATION  FOR  SCAN  TO  DESKTOP" 
(page  5-7). 


System  Settings:  Address  Book  (page  7-16) 

This  is  used  to  store  Scan  to  E-mail  and  Internet  fax  addresses  in  one-touch  keys. 


5-18 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION 

A  destination  is  retrieved  by  selecting  its  one-touch  key. 


Scan 

Internet  Fax  1  Fax  I  USB  Mem.  Scan  J  PC  Scan 

►Address  Book! 

|  AddJ  つ ry] 

[  Original ] Scan:  ■■  8ypcll  Send: 

[  Exposure  ] 

f  Send  Settings 

[ Resolution  j  2 00X2 00dpi 

f Address  Review 

f  File  Format  丨  J  PDF 

File 

[ Color  Mode  ]  [~p  Mono2 

1  Quick  File  | 

I  Special  Modes  ] 

Preview 

Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key. 


(3)  (2) 


(1) 


Specify  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  index  tab  where  the  destination 
is  stored. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

If  you  select  an  incorrect  destination,  touch  the  key  again 
to  cancel  the  selection. 

(3)  Touch  the  [To]  key. 

This  enters  the  selected  destination. 


•  It  is  convenient  to  store  frequently  used  destinations  in  the  [Freq.]  index.  Specify  that  a  destination  be  displayed  in 
the  [Freq.]  index  when  you  store  the  destination. 

•  To  continue  specifying  other  destinations... 

It  is  possible  to  specify  multiple  scan  mode  (Scan  to  E-mail,  Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Desktop,  Scan  to  Network 
Folder),  Internet  fax,  and  fax  mode  destinations  when  performing  a  broadcast  transmission  (maximum  of  500 
destinations).  To  specify  multiple  destinations,  repeat  (1) through  (3)  of  this  step. 

When  performing  Scan  to  E-mail,  you  can  select  a  one-touch  key  and  then  touch  the  [Cc]  key  or  the  [Bcc]  key  to 
send  Cc  or  Bcc  copies  of  the  e-mail. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Bcc  Setting 

This  setting  enables  or  disables  Bcc  delivery.  When  enabled,  the  [Bcc]  key  appears  in  the  address  book  screen. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Must  Input  Next  Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting 

This  setting  determines  whether  or  not  the  [Next  Address]  key  can  be  omitted  before  specifying  the  next  destination. 
Factory  default  setting:  the  [Next  Address]  key  can  be  omitted. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disable  Switching  of  Display  Order 

This  is  used  to  disable  switching  of  the  order  of  display  of  the  one-touch  keys  in  the  address  book  screen.  The  currently 
selected  display  order  will  be  the  order  that  is  used  after  this  setting  is  enabled. 


Contents 


5-19 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHECKING  AND  DELETING  THE  SELECTED 
DESTINATIONS 

When  multiple  destinations  have  been  selected,  you  can  display  and  check  the  destinations.  You  can  also  delete  a 
destination  from  the  list  (cancel  selection  of  the  destination). 


Touch  the  [Address  Review]  key. 


Address  Review 

f  OK  I 

001 [^AA  AAA 

B]  1002  fBBB  BBB 

003 fKKK  KKK 

b]  1004  [lll  lll 

q] 1 

005  1 .MMM  MMM 

1006  fNNN  NUN 

007  f|00  000 

q]  008fppp  PPP 

m  s 

009  fQQQ  QQQ 

B]  lOlof'RRR  RRR 

- ^  m 

01l(:SSS  sss 

创  1012  [,TTT  TTT 

焓] □ 

Q’  To 

1  S  CC  1 

Check  the  destinations  and  then  touch 
the  [OK]  key, 


To  check  Cc  or  Bcc  destinations,  touch  the  corresponding  tab. 


@ 


To  cancel  selection  of  a  destination... 

Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  destination  that  you  wish  to  cancel.  A  message  will  appear  to  confirm  the  deletion. 
Touch  the  [Yes]  key.  Touch  the  [Detail]  key  to  check  the  specified  destination  type  and  name. 


Deselect  the  address? 


Detail  |  i  No  \  i  Yes 


Contents 


5-20 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Enter  the  4-digit  search  number  of  the 
address  with  the  numeric  keys. 

When  the  4-digit  search  number  is  entered,  the  stored  address 
is  retrieved  and  specified  as  a  destination. 


•  The  search  number  is  programmed  when  the  destination  is  stored  in  the  address  book. 

•  If  you  do  not  know  the  search  number,  print  the  one-touch  address  list  using  "Sending  Address  List"  in  the  system 
settings. 

•  When  entering  search  numbers  such  as  "0001" and  "0011", "0"  can  be  omitted.  For  example  to  enter  "0001", enter 
■■1 " and  touch  the  key  or  the  [Next  Address]  key. 


© 


If  an  incorrect  search  number  is  entered... 

Press  the  [CLEAR]  key  (©)  to  clear  the  number  and  enter  the  correct  number. 


Contents 


USING  A  SEARCH  NUMBER  TO  RETRIEVE 
A  DESTINATION 

A  destination  stored  in  the  address  book  can  be  retrieved  using  the  \W]  key.  This  can  be  done  in  the  base  screen  of  any 
of  the  modes  or  in  the  address  book  screen. 


Touch  the  [W]  key. 


® ® ® © 
® ® ® @ 
① @ ⑦ ® 


5-21 


Display  the  address  input  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

Before  touching  the  [Address  Entry]  key  in  the  base 
screen,  touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Address  Entry]  key. 


Select  the  destination  type. 


DG 


E-mail  I  Network  Folderl 


Internet  Fax  \  Direct  t 


Enter  the  destination  address. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  delivery 
method. 

•  Touch  the  [E-mail]  key  to  open  the  delivery  method 
selection  screen.  Normally  the  [To]  key  is  touched. 

•  Touch  the  [Network  Folder]  key  to  open  the  network 
folder  entry  screen.  To  specify  a  network  folder,  see 
"SPECIFYING  A  NETWORK  FOLDER11  (page  5-23). 

•  If  you  touched  the  [Address  Entry]  key  in  the  base 
screen  in  step  1 , the  delivery  methods  that  can  be 
selected  vary  depending  on  the  mode  being  used. 

(2)  Enter  the  destination  address  in  the  text 
entry  screen  that  appears. 

Enter  the  destination  address  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 
For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING 
TEXT11  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE11. 


If  you  wish  the  destination  to  be  a  Cc  destination,  touch  the  [Cc]  key. 

The  [Bcc]  key  only  appears  when  Bcc  has  been  enabled  using  "Bcc  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 
If  you  wish  the  destination  to  be  a  Bcc  destination,  touch  the  [Bcc]  key. 

When  Internet  fax  mode  is  selected,  the  base  screen  appears  after  the  destination  address  is  entered.  However,  if 
"l-Fax  Reception  Report  On/Off  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  reception  report 
request  screen  will  appear.  If  you  wish  to  receive  a  report,  touch  the  [Yes]  key.  If  not,  touch  the  [No]  key.  (When 
Direct  SMTP  is  used,  transmission  confirmation  is  not  performed.) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  1-Fax  Reception  Report  On/Off  Setting 

This  setting  is  used  to  request  a  reception  report  when  an  Internet  fax  is  sent.  When  the  destination  is  specified  by  directly 
entering  the  address,  a  message  will  appear  asking  you  if  you  wish  to  receive  a  report.  (When  Direct  SMTP  is  used, 
transmission  confirmation  is  not  performed.) 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Bcc  Setting 

This  setting  enables  or  disables  Bcc  delivery.  When  enabled,  the  [Bcc]  key  appears  in  the  address  book  screen  and  the 
delivery  type  selection  screen. 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ENTERING  AN  ADDRESS  MANUALLY 

Scan  to  E-mail,  Internet  fax,  Network  Folder  and  data  entry  mode  addresses  can  be  manually  entered. 


匿 


a a 


一一 Ji 


LU 


一 ccc 


I fir 


5-22 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SPECIFYING  A  NETWORK  FOLDER 

A  network  folder  on  a  server  or  computer  connected  to  the  same  network  as  the  machine  can  be  directly  specified. 
Select  [Network  Folder]  in  step  2  on  the  previous  page  and  follow  the  steps  below. 


Network  Folder 


Folder  Path 


1  User  Name  | 

Browse 

Jb 

|  Password  | 

- 1  i 

Touch  the  [Browse]  key. 

•  To  directly  enter  a  folder,  touch  the  [Folder  Path]  key.  A 
text  entry  screen  will  appear. 

•  If  a  user  name  and  password  are  required,  check  with 
the  administrator  of  the  server  and  enter  the  user  name 
and  password. 


For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT11  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


5-23 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(i) 


Access  the  network  folder. 

(1) Touch  the  key  of  the  workgroup  that  you 
wish  to  access. 


⑵ 


(3)  (4) 


lo 

Network  Folder 

Cancel  ||  0J 

1 

\\ Server  1 

fretwork  Folder  Name 

▲  | 

|  蟲  |  User  1  | 

f  蟲  |  User  2 

3 

f  蟲  |  User  3 

0 

丨蟲  |  User  4  j 

m 

[ 蟲  |  User  5 

LiJ 

|  蟲  |  User  6 

(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  server  or  computer 
that  you  wish  to  access. 

If  a  screen  appears  prompting  you  to  enter  a  user  name 
and  password,  check  with  your  server  administrator  and 
enter  the  appropriate  user  name  and  password. 


(3)  Touch  the  key  of  the  network  folder. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  1 . Touch  the  [OK]  key 
again  to  enter  the  folder. 


•  You  can  touch  the  [Search]  key  and  enter  a  keyword  to  search  for  a  workgroup,  server,  or  network  folder.  For  the 
procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT11  (page  1 -70)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE11. 

•  Up  to 100  workgroups, 100  servers,  and  100  network  folders  can  be  displayed. 

•To  move  up  one  level,  touch  the  1 1  key. 

•  The  [Cancel]  key  can  be  pressed  to  return  to  the  screen  of  step  1 . 

•  To  change  the  sorting  order  of  the  displayed  keys,  touch  the  key  that  shows  Ao  f  in  each  screen.  The  order 
switches  between  ascending  order  and  descending  order  each  time  you  touch  the  key. 

•  To  go  to  a  particular  page,  touch  the  Q  key  that  shows  the  current  page  number  and  enter  the  desired  page 
number. 


Contents 


5-24 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


RETRIEVING  A  DESTINATION  FROM  A 
GLOBAL  ADDRESS  BOOK 

When  an  LDAP  server  is  configured  in  the  Web  pages,  you  can  look  up  an  address  in  a  global  address  book  and 
retrieve  the  address  for  Scan  to  E-mail  or  Internet  fax  transmission  (excluding  Direct  SMTP  addresses). 


(2) 


1 

i 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

5  ►  EE  ► 15  ] 

Ef  To  ]  (SCc  ) 

w  Condition 
^  Settings 

|aAA  AAA  q|  fBBB  BBB  珍 |  1 

Address  Review 

f;CCC  CCC  (ddd  ddd  q]  ‘ 

Address  Entry 

[eee  EEE  vl  fFFF  FFF  d  |  令  1 

Global  ^ 

Address  Search: 

: GGG  GGG  q]  [hHH  HHH  s  j 

L?J 

in  hi  fj®  jjj 

Sort  Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  :  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview  |  ㈣  ^'Aut0  Reception 

l.  Fax  Memory: 100% 

Open  the  global  address  search  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Global  Address  Search]  key. 


Search  for  the  destination. 

If  only  one  LDAP  server  has  been  stored, (1) and  (2)  are  not 
necessary.  Go  directly  to  (3).  If  an  authentication  screen  for  the 
し DAP  server  appears,  enter  your  user  name  and  password. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  LDAP  server  that  you 
wish  to  use. 

If  an  authentication  screen  for  the  し DAP  server  appears, 
enter  your  user  name  and  password. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

(3)  Search  for  the  destination  in  the  search 
screen. 

Enter  search  characters  for  the  destination  and  touch  the 
[Search]  key.  The  search  results  will  appear  after  a  brief 
interval. 

For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING 
TEXT"  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE11. 


How  to  search 

Enter  the  search  characters  (maximum  of  64  characters).  The  system  will  look  for  names  starting  with  the  entered 
letters. 

An  asterisk  氺  can  be  used  as  follows: 

XXX  氺: Names  beginning  with  MXXXM. 

木  XXX:  Names  that  end  with  nXXX". 

木 XXX 木: Names  that  include  "XXX". 

AA  氺  XX:  Names  that  start  with  MAAM  and  end  with  ■■XX11. 


Contents 


5-25 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(2)  (1) 


Select  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  destination. 

If  no  names  are  found  that  match  the  search  characters,  a 
message  will  appear.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  to  close  the 
message  and  touch  the  [Search  Again]  key  to  search 
again. 

(2)  Touch  the  [To]  key. 

This  enters  the  selected  destination. 

If  you  wish  to  enter  another  destination,  repeat  (1) and  (2) 
of  this  step. 


•  If  30  or  more  matches  are  found,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  screen.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  to  close  the  message.  Up 
to  300  matches  can  appear.  If  no  names  are  found  that  match  the  search  letters,  touch  the  [Search  Again]  key  to 
search  again  using  more  search  letters. 

•  To  check  the  information  stored  in  a  destination... 

Touch  the  key  of  the  destination  and  then  touch  the  [Detail]  key.  The  information  stored  for  the  selected  destination 
will  appear.  Check  the  information  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key  to  return  to  the  search  results  screen. 

•  If  a  screen  for  selecting  the  item  to  be  used  appears... 

If  the  selected  destination  includes  a  fax  number,  telephone  number,  or  other  contact  information  in  addition  to  the 
e-mail  address  or  Internet  fax  address,  you  will  need  to  select  which  item  you  wish  to  use.  Touch  the  [E-mail]  key  or 
the  [Internet  Fax]  key  to  retrieve  the  address  for  Scan  to  E-mail  or  Internet  fax  transmission. 


Storing  a  destination  from  a  global  address  book  in  the  machine's 
address  book 


A  destination  address  obtained  from  a  global  address  book  can  be  stored  as  a  destination  (one-touch  key)  in  the 
address  book  of  the  machine. 

Touch  the  [Detail]  key  in  the  search  results  screen  of  the  global  address  book  (the  screen  of  step  3  above)  to  display 
information  on  the  selected  destination.  Touch  the  [Register]  key  in  the  detailed  information  screen  and  then  touch  the 
item  to  be  used  (the  [E-mail]  key  or  the  [Internet  Fax]  key).  The  following  screens  will  appear. 


E-mail  address  registration  screen 


Internet  fax  address  registration  screen 


Direct  Address  /  Individual 


し  y/J  E-mail 


_ j  Internet  Fax 


■  Fax 


Exit 


f  Search  Number 

m  0001 

Name  |  AAA  AAA 

Initial 

1  A  f  Index 

j  User  1 

Address 

] AAA@xx.xxx.com 

f  Key  Name  |  AAA  AAA 

[ File  Format 

■  Color/ Grayscale  : PDF/Medium 

B/W  : PDF/MMR(G4) 


Direct  Address  /  Individual 


OB 


Internet  Fax 


Search  Number  I  0001 


I -Fax  Report 


AAA@xx. xxx . com 


The  information  stored  in  the  global  address  book  is  automatically  entered.  (The  settings  can  be  changed  if  needed.  For 
detailed  information  on  each  item,  see  "Address  Control"  (page  7-16)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS11.)  However,  configure 
the  items  below  manually.  To  complete  the  storing  procedure,  touch  the  [Exit]  key. 


•  [Initial]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  enter  the  initials  that  determine  where  the  destination  will  appear  in  the  alphabetical 

index  and  the  order  of  one-touch  key  display.  Enter  up  to 10  characters  for  the  initials. 

•  [Index]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  select  the  custom  index  in  which  the  address  will  appear.  You  can  also  select  whether 

or  not  the  destination  will  be  included  on  the  [Freq_]  tab  of  the  address  book. 

•  [File  Format]  key:  Set  the  format  for  Scan  to  E-mail.  Default  format  settings  have  already  been  configured;  however, 

selecting  format  settings  when  you  store  a  destination  saves  you  the  trouble  of  selecting  the 
settings  each  time  you  transmit  to  that  destination. 

•  [Compression]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  set  the  compression  mode  when  sending  an  Internet  fax. 

•  [1-Fax  Report]  key:  Touch  this  key  to  request  a  reception  report  when  sending  an  Internet  fax. 


5-26 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


USING  THE  RESEND  FUNCTION 

The  destinations  of  the  most  recent  8  transmissions  by  Scan  to  E-mail,  Internet  fax  (including  Direct  SMTP  addresses) 
and/or  fax  are  stored.  One  of  these  can  be  selected  to  resend  to  that  destination. 


ItNo.Ol 、AAA  AAA 
[ko.03  QCCC  CCC 

卜 0.05  t^EEE  EEE 

mo.  01  QGGG  GGG 


[No.  02  ^  BBB  BBB 

[No.  04 资 DDD  DDD 

[no.06 贷 FFF  FFF 

[No.  08  ^  HHH  HHH 


Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  address. 

The  last  8  addresses  used  for  transmission  are  displayed. 


•  When  the  [Resend]  key  is  touched  and  a  destination  selected,  the  mode  of  the  selected  destination  is  automatically 
selected. 

•  The  following  types  of  addresses  are  not  stored  for  resending. 

- A  one-touch  key  in  which  multiple  destinations  are  stored  (group  key). 

- Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Desktop,  and  Scan  to  Network  Folder  addresses. 

- Broadcasting  destinations 
- Addresses  used  only  for  BCC  delivery 
- Destinations  transmitted  to  using  a  program 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disable  [Resend]  on  Fax/Image  Send  Mode 

This  prohibits  use  of  the  resend  function.  When  this  setting  is  enabled,  the  [Resend]  key  cannot  be  used  in  the  base  screen 
of  image  send  mode. 


Contents 


5-27 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


TRANSMITTING  AN  IMAGE 


SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  SCAN  MODE 

This  section  explains  the  basic  procedure  for  transmission  in  scan  mode  (Scan  to  E-mail,  Scan  to  FTP, Scan  to 
Desktop,  and  Scan  to  Network  Folder). 


When  a  default  address  is  configured  in  "Default  Address  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  mode  cannot  be 
changed,  the  destination  cannot  be  changed,  and  destinations  cannot  be  added.  If  you  wish  to  change  the  mode  or 
destination,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  touch  panel  and  then  follow  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector. 
Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and 
prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


•  When  placing  the  originals,  orient  them  as  shown  below. 


" To  place  a  large  portrait-oriented  original,  place  it  as  shown  above  in  "Landscape  orientation"  and  specify  the 
placement  orientation  in  step  3. 

•  Place  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A5)  size  originals  in  portrait  (vertical)  orientation  (園) ■  If  placed  in  landscape  (horizontal) 
orientation  (_), an  incorrect  size  will  be  detected.  For  a  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"R  (A5R)  size  original,  enter  the  original  size 
manually. 

•  Originals  cannot  be  scanned  in  succession  from  both  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  document  glass  and 
sent  in  a  single  transmission. 


Contents 


5-28 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(4)  (3)  (2) 


1  1 

f  5  ►  EE  ► 15  || 

fbJ  To 

_ )  1  fa cc  ) 

f  ^  Condition 

|  f  Settings 

(bbb  bbb 

i 

( 

Address  Review 

[ccc  ccc 

DDD  DDD 

[ 

Address  Entry 

[eee  eee 

FFF  FFF 

令.. I 

Global 

| Address  Search 

[ggg  ggg 

q]  |hhh  hhh 

fill  III 

q]  [jjj  JJJ 

f  Sort  Address 

Freq  •  Jl 

ABCD  J|  ;  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J| 

VWXYZ  |  etc. 

Preview  j 丨 担 デ 

《Auto  Reception 

Fax  Memory: 100% 

Specify  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

The  icon  on  the  key  indicates  the  type  of  destination 
stored  in  the  key. 

:  Scan  to  E-mail 

d  :  Scan  to  FTP 
S  :  Scan  to  Network  Folder 
E  :  Scan  to  Desktop 

(3)  Touch  the  [To]  key, 

The  destination  is  specified. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Condition  Settings]  key. 


•  After  a  one-touch  key  is  touched,  if  the  screen  is  changed  without  touching  the  [To]  key,  the  destination  is 
automatically  specified. 

•  When  performing  Scan  to  E-mail,  you  can  also  send  Cc  or  Bcc  copies  to  other  destinations.  Touch  the  desired 
destination  and  then  touch  the  [Cc]  key  or  the  [Bcc]  key. 

•  Multiple  destinations  can  be  specified.  To  specify  multiple  destinations,  repeat  steps  (2)  and  (3). 

•  You  can  also  select  multiple  one-touch  keys  and  then  touch  the  [To]  key  (or  the  [Cc]  or  [Bcc]  key)  to  specify  all 
selected  keys  at  once. 

•  In  addition  to  specification  by  a  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  by  a  search  number.  Destinations 
for  Scan  to  E-mail  and  Scan  to  Network  Folder  can  also  be  manually  entered  or  looked  up  in  a  global  address  book. 
For  more  information,  see  "ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  5-18). 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Bcc  Setting 

This  setting  enables  or  disables  Bcc  delivery.  When  enabled,  the  [Bcc]  key  appears  in  the  address  book  screen. 


Switch  to  scan  mode  and  display  the 
image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Scan]  tab, 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key, 


The  current  settings  for  [Original],  [Exposure],  [Resolution],  [File  Format],  and  [Color  Mode]  are  indicated  at  the  right  of 
each  key.  To  change  a  setting,  touch  the  appropriate  key. 

隊  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original)  (page  5-54),  SPECIFYING 
THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce)  (page  5-55),  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE 
AND  ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE  (page  5-61),  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION  (page  5-63),  CHANGING  THE  FILE 
FORMAT  (page  5-64),  CHANGING  THE  COLOR  MODE  (page  5-68),  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


Contents 


5-29 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1) (2) 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

To  enable  the  original  to  be  scanned  in  the  correct  orientation 
(the  orientation  of  the  top  edge  of  the  original  that  is  shown  at 
the  top  of  the  display),  specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  was  placed  in  step  1 . 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  orientation  key. 

If  the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  up,  touch  the  [  key.  If 
the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  to  the  left,  touch  the  [W0 1 
key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  2. 


The  original  orientation  is  initially  set  to  Qa] .  If  the  original  was  placed  with  the  top  edge  up,  this  step  is  not 
necessary. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•  If  the  original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass,  the  [Read-End]  key  appears  in  the  touch  panel.  If  the  original  is  only  one 
page,  go  to  step  7.  To  scan  more  pages,  go  to  the  next  step. 

•If  the  original  was  inserted  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  a  beep  will  sound  when  scanning  is  completed  and  transmission 
will  take  place. 


•  The  image  is  scanned  in  the  mode  set  in  "Color  mode".  For  the  color  mode  settings,  see  "CHANGING  THE  COLOR 
MODE11  (page  5-68). 

•  If  Encrypt  PDF  is  selected  for  the  file  format  ([PDF]  is  selected  in  the  format  settings  screen  and  the  [Encry.] 
checkbox  is  set  to  VJ),  you  will  be  prompted  to  enter  a  password  when  you  press  the  [START]  key. 


Please  enter  encrypt  PDF 
password. 


Cancel  1  f  Entry 


Touch  the  [Entry]  key  to  open  the  keyboard  screen,  enter  a  password  (maximum  of  32  characters),  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key.  The  recipient  must  use  the  password  entered  here  to  open  the  Encrypt  PDF  file. 

To  cancel  Encrypt  PDF,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key.  The  format  settings  screen  will  appear  to  let  you  change  the  file 
type.  Select  a  new  file  type  and  press  the  [START]  key  to  begin  transmission. 


If  the  original  was  placed  on  the  document  glass,  replace  it  with  the  next  original 
and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


Contents 


5-30 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Place  next  original .  (Pg.N' 

Press  [Start] . 

When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


Contiaure  ^ 


誓 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  the  operation  is  completed. 
Open  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  remove  the  original. 


•  If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

•  The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  "Card  Shot"  is  selected  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure  can  be  changed 
when  scanning  an  even-numbered  original  page. 


•  When  all  originals  have  been  scanned,  "Job  stored."  will  be  displayed  together  with  a  job  control  number.  This  number  can 
be  used  to  locate  the  job  in  the  Transaction  Report  or  in  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report.  If  the  job  is  a  broadcast 
transmission,  this  number  will  also  appear  in  the  key  of  the  job  in  the  job  status  screen.  For  this  reason,  making  a  note  of 
the  number  is  useful  for  checking  the  result. 

•If  the  memory  becomes  full  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  a  message  will  appear  and  scanning  will  stop. 

•  When  performing  Scan  to  E-mail,  take  care  not  to  send  a  file  that  is  too  large.  In  particular,  multi-page  files  tend  to  be  large. 
When  sending  a  multi-page  file  or  other  large  file,  it  may  be  necessary  to  reduce  the  number  of  scanned  pages  or  reduce 
the  send  size. 


•  Storing  a  mail  signature 

You  can  have  preset  text  automatically  added  at  the  end  of  e-mail  messages  as  a  mail  signature.  This  is  convenient  when 
you  wish  to  have  a  corporate  policy  or  other  preset  text  appear  at  the  bottom  of  e-mail  messages.  To  store  the  text  for  the 
mail  signature,  click  [Application  Settings],  [Network  Scanner  Settings]  and  then  [Administration  Settings]  in  the  Web  page 
menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.)  Up  to  900  characters  can  be  entered.  (The  mail  signature  is  not  included  in  the 
maximum  number  of  characters  that  can  be  entered  in  the  e-mail  message.) 

Use  "Pre-Setting  Mail  Signature"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  mail  signature  is  added. 

@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Image  Send  Settings 

Use  this  to  configure  scanner  transmission  settings,  including  the  default  resolution  and  exposure  settings,  the  default 
color  mode  and  file  format,  the  file  compression  method  for  broadcasting,  the  file  size  limit  for  Scan  to  E-mail,  and  the 
default  sender  and  destination. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Pre-Setting  Mail  Signature 

Use  this  setting  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  mail  signature  is  added  at  the  end  of  e-mail  messages.  By  factory  default,  a 
mail  signature  is  not  added. 


5-31 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME,  REPLY-TO, 
AND  BODY  TEXT 

The  subject,  file  name,  reply-to,  and  body  text  can  be  changed  when  performing  a  scan  transmission.  Preset  items  can 
be  selected  or  text  can  be  directly  entered. 


•  When  performing  Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Desktop,  or  Scan  to  Network  Folder,  only  the  file  name  is  used. 

•If  the  subject  and  file  name  are  not  changed,  the  settings  in  the  Web  page  are  used. 

•If  the  sender  name  is  not  changed,  the  name  set  in  "Default  Sender  Set"  in  the  system  settings  is  used.  If  this  is  not 
configured,  the  reply  address  in  [Network  Settings]  -  [Services  Settings]  -  [SMTP  Settings]  in  the  Web  pages  is  used. 
(Administrator  rights  are  required.) 

•  Selections  for  the  subject,  file  name,  and  body  text  are  configured  by  clicking  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Network 
Scanner  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

•  For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT"  (page  1-70)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


Touch  the  [Send  Settings]  key  in  the  base  screen. 

隊  BASE  SCREEN  (page  5-9) 

If  you  are  sending  to  a  Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Desktop,  or  Scan  to  Network  Folder  destination,  go  to  step  4. 


Send  Settings 


I  Reply-To  I 

l  Body  Text  I 

] Add  ' Reply  to 丨  to  Cc 


To  change  the  subject,  touch  the 
[Subject]  key. 


⑴ 


Subject 


jj  |  No 


03  Sub:  Minutes  of  planning  ml  |^o 


] E 


] E 


02  Sub:  Monthly  Schedule 


Enter  the  subject. 

(1)  Touch  a  Pre-Set  text  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•If  you  wish  to  directly  enter  the  text,  touch  the  [Direct  Entry]  key  to  open  the  text  entry  screen.  Enter  the  text  and 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 

•  The  text  in  a  pre-set  text  key  can  be  edited  by  touching  the  pre-set  text  key  and  then  the  [Direct  Entry]  key.  The  text 
entry  screen  will  appear  with  the  selected  pre-set  text  entered.  (When  a  destination  is  stored  using  the  Web  pages, 
up  to  80  characters  can  be  entered.  However,  only  54  characters  can  be  entered  in  the  touch  panel.) 


Contents 


5-32 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Subiect  j  Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 


疆 


□ 


Add  ' Reply  to'  to  Cc 


To  change  the  file  name,  touch  the  [File 
Name]  key. 

•  The  file  name  is  entered  in  the  same  way  as  the  subject. 

•  If  you  are  sending  to  a  Scan  to  FTP,  Scan  to  Desktop,  or 
Scan  to  Network  Folder  destination,  go  to  step  9. 


Send  Settings 


Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 


Material  for  planning  meeting 


i  Reply-To  J 


To  change  "Reply-To",  touch  the 
[Reply-To]  key. 


If  user  authentication  is  being  used,  the  information  of  the  user  that  logged  in  will  be  applied,  and  thus  "Reply-To" 
cannot  be  changed. 


[  6  ►  SB  ► 18  J 

Global 

| Address  Search 

画 [bbb 

fccc  CCC  I  I  麵 

[eee  eee  j  [fff 

Address  Entry 

[gGG  GGG  1  [HHH 

fm  hi  H 

|kkk  KKK  31 

令 

User 

All  Jl  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL 

哭  1 


a 

a 


Specify  a  user  for  "Reply-To"  and  touch 
the  [OK]  key, 

•  Touch  the  key  that  you  wish  to  use  for  "Reply-To". 

•  You  can  touch  the  [Global  Address  Search]  key  to  specify  a 
user  stored  in  a  global  address  book  for  "Reply-To".  You  can 
also  touch  the  [Address  Entry]  key  to  directly  enter  an  e-mail 
address. 


•  To  specify  the  return  address,  you  can  touch  the  [tj  key  and  enter  a  user  number  that  has  been  previously  stored 
using  "User  List"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

•A  key  can  only  be  selected  for  the  return  address  if  an  e-mail  address  has  been  stored  for  that  user  in  "User  List"  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator). 


Contents 


5-33 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Send  Settings 

■  0K  1 

Subject 

j  Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 

[  File  Name 

j  Material  for  planning  meeting 

\  Reply-To  )  AAA  AAA 

( ~t  J 

Ly  to'  to  Cc 

To  change  the  body  text,  touch  the 
[Body  Text]  key. 


Body  Entry 


Thank  you  for  your  continuous  support . 
which  you  have  requested.  I 


We  have  attached  scannedi 


w 


Pre-Set  select 


as 


Enter  the  body  text  and  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 

•  To  select  a  pre-set  text  previously  stored  in  the  Web  page, 
touch  the  [Pre-Set  Select]  key. 

•  To  directly  enter  the  body  text,  touch  the  [Edit]  key. 


• 1800  characters  can  be  entered.  (A  line  break  counts  as  one  character.) 

•  To  clear  all  entered  text,  touch  the  [Clear  All]  key.  When  this  key  is  touched,  the  entire  body  of  the  message  is 
erased  immediately;  not  just  the  selected  line. 

•  Each  line  of  the  entered  text  can  be  selected  with  the  Q  Q  keys.  To  edit  the  selected  line,  touch  the  [Edit]  key. 
The  text  entry  screen  will  appear  with  the  selected  text  entered. 


Send  Settings 

Subject 

ぎ 

I  Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 

f  File  Name  ] 

I  Material  for  planning  meeting 

f  Reply-To  ] 

AAA  AAA 

f  Body  Text  | 

I  Thank  you  for  your  continuous  support .  We  have  attached  sea 

!|  Add  'Reply  to'  to  Cc 

Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


The  [Add  'Reply  to1  to  Cc]  checkbox  can  be  selected  ど] to  send  a  Cc  copy  to  the  sender. 


When  storing  pre-set  text  for  the  subject  and  file  name  in  the  Web  pages,  up  to  80  characters  can  be  entered. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  The  Number  of  File  Name/Subject/Body  Keys  Displayed  Setting 

The  setting  for  the  number  of  subject  keys  and  file  name  keys  displayed  in  one  screen  can  be  changed  to  6, 12,  or  18. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Sender  Set 

This  is  used  to  store  the  sender  name  and  e-mail  address  that  is  used  when  a  sender  is  not  selected. 


Contents 


5-34 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  AN  IMAGE  IN  USB  MEMORY  MODE 


Follow  the  steps  below  to  send  a  scanned  image  to  a  commercially  available  USB  memory  device  that  has  been 
connected  to  the  machine.  This  stores  the  file  in  the  USB  device. 


•  Use  a  FAT32  USB  memory  with  a  capacity  of  no  more  than  32  GB. 

•  When  a  default  address  is  configured  in  "Default  Address  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  mode  cannot 
be  changed.  To  switch  to  USB  memory  mode,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  touch  panel  and  then  follow  the  steps  below. 


Connect  the  USB  memory  to  the  USB 
connector  (Type  A)  on  the  machine. 


Place  the  original. 

Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector. 
Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and 
prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


•  When  placing  the  originals,  orient  them  as  shown  below. 


" To  place  a  large  portrait-oriented  original,  place  it  as  shown  above  in  "Landscape  orientation"  and  specify  the 
placement  orientation  in  step  4. 

•  Place  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A5)  size  originals  in  portrait  (vertical)  orientation  (國) ■  If  placed  in  landscape  (horizontal)  orientation 
(rfinl).  an  incorrect  size  will  be  detected.  For  a  5-1/2"  x  8-1 /2MR  (A5R)  size  original,  enter  the  original  size  manually. 

•  Originals  cannot  be  scanned  in  succession  from  both  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  document  glass  and 
sent  in  a  single  transmission. 


Contents 


5-35 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(2)  (1) 


Scan  f  Internet  Fax  ||  Fax  |  USB  Mem.  Scan  ||  PC  Scan 

1: 

[  Stored  to 

[  Original  J  Scan:  8$xll  Send: 

File  Name 

[  Exposure  ] 

f  Resolution  ]  200X200dpi 

[ File  Format  )  J  PDF 

( Color  Mode  ]  ^  Mono2 

( Special  Modes  ] 

Preview 

Switch  to  USB  memory  mode  and 
display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [USB  Mem.  Scan]  tab 

If  the  [USB  Mem.  Scan]  tab  does  not  appear,  touch  the 
"»  1  tab  to  move  the  screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 


•  When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination. 

•  If  a  destination  of  another  mode  has  been  previously  specified,  a  message  will  appear  when  you  change  to  USB 
memory  mode  indicating  that  the  destination  setting  will  be  cleared.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  message  screen  and 
go  to  the  next  step. 

•  The  current  settings  for  [Original],  [Exposure],  [Resolution],  [File  Format],  and  [Color  Mode]  are  indicated  at  the  right 
of  each  key.  To  change  a  setting,  touch  the  appropriate  key. 

隊  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  〇  FAN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original)  (page  5-54),  SPECIFYING 
THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce)  (page  5-55),  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE 
AND  ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE  (page  5-61),  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION  (page  5-63),  CHANGING  THE 
FILE  FORMAT  (page  5-64),  CHANGING  THE  COLOR  MODE  (page  5-68),  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


(1) (2) 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

To  enable  the  original  to  be  scanned  in  the  correct  orientation 
(the  orientation  in  which  the  top  edge  of  the  original  appears  at 
the  top  of  the  display),  specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  was  placed  in  step  2. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  orientation  key. 

If  the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  up,  touch  the key.  If 
the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  to  the  left,  touch  the  r^3l 
key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3. 


The  original  orientation  is  initially  set  to  QQ  | .  If  the  original  was  placed  with  the  top  edge  up,  this  step  is  not 
necessary. 


Contents 


5-36 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•  If  the  original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass,  the  [Read-End]  key  appears  in  the  touch  panel.  If  the  original  is  only  one 
page,  go  to  step  7.  To  scan  more  pages,  go  to  the  next  step. 

•If  the  original  was  inserted  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  a  beep  will  sound  when  scanning  is  completed  and  transmission 
will  begin.  Go  to  step  8. 


Do  not  disconnect  the  USB  memory  until  "Sending  data  has  been  completed."  appears  in  the  touch  panel. 

•  The  image  is  scanned  in  the  mode  set  in  "Color  mode".  For  the  color  mode  settings,  see  "CHANGING  THE  COLOR 
MODE11  (page  5-68). 

•  If  Encrypt  PDF  is  selected  for  the  file  format  ([PDF]  is  selected  in  the  format  settings  screen  and  the  [Encry.] 
checkbox  is  set  to  ノ I), you  will  be  prompted  to  enter  a  password  when  you  press  the  [START]  key. 


Please  enter  encrypt  PDF 
password. 


Cancel  I  T  Entry 

Touch  the  [Entry]  key  to  open  the  keyboard  screen,  enter  a  password  (maximum  of  32  characters),  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key.  The  recipient  must  use  the  password  entered  here  to  open  the  Encrypt  PDF  file. 

To  cancel  Encrypt  PDF,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key.  The  format  settings  screen  will  appear  to  let  you  change  the  file 
type.  Select  a  new  file  type  and  press  the  [START]  key  to  begin  transmission. 


If  the  original  was  placed  on  the  document  glass,  replace  it  with  the  next  original 
and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  the  operation  is  completed. 
Open  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  remove  the  original. 


•  If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

•  The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  "Card  Shot"  is  selected  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure  can  be  changed 
when  scanning  an  even-numbered  original  page. 


Contents 


5-37 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


When  "Sending  data  has  been 
completed."  appears  in  the  touch  panel, 
disconnect  the  USB  memory. 


① 


Do  not  disconnect  the  USB  memory  while  "Processing  data."  or  "Sending  data."  appears  in  the  touch  panel. 


•  When  transmission  to  USB  memory  is  completed,  "Sending  data  has  been  completed."  is  displayed.  After  a  brief  interval 
the  message  is  cleared  and  the  base  screen  of  image  send  mode  reappears.  (The  base  screen  of  image  send  mode  is  the 
screen  that  appears  when  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key  is  touched.) 

•  If  the  USB  memory  becomes  full  during  scanning... 

A  message  will  appear  and  scanning  will  stop.  The  scanned  data  will  not  be  stored.  However,  if  the  file  format  is  set  to 
JPEG  and  the  [Specified  Pages  per  File]  checkbox  is  selected,  files  for  which  scanning  is  completed  will  be  stored  in  USB 
memory. 


© 


•  To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 

•  To  cancel  scanning  to  USB  memory... 

While  scanned  data  is  being  stored  in  the  USB  memory,  the  message  "Sending  data."  and  the  [Cancel]  key  appear  in  the 
touch  panel.  To  cancel  the  storing  operation,  touch  the  [Cancel]  key. 


•  System  Settings:  USB-Device  Check  (page  7-25) 

This  is  used  to  check  the  connection  of  a  USB  device  to  the  machine. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Scan  Settings 

This  is  used  to  set  the  default  color  mode  and  file  format. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Disable  Scan  Function 

The  use  of  PC  scan  mode  and  USB  memory  mode  can  be  prohibited. 


Contents 


5-38 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SPECIFY  THE  FOLDER  IN  WHICH  THE  FILE  WILL  BE 
STORED. 

When  sending  a  file  to  USB  memory,  a  folder  can  be  specified  in  USB  memory.  A  new  folder  can  also  be  created  in  USB 
memory. 


If  a  folder  is  not  specified,  the  file  will  be  stored  on  the  first  level  of  the  USB  memory. 


Touch  the  [Stored  to]  key. 


(A)  (1)  (2) 


_ 1 

J 

Stored  to  1 

Cancel  |  OK  ] 

1  1 

[ New  Folder  ] 

[Folder  Name 

4  1 

f  CD  |  Folder  1 

1 

f  01  I  Folder  2 

1 

f  C3  |  Folder  3 

S 

f  Q  |  Folder  4 

s 

Select  the  folder. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  folder  in  which  you 
wish  to  store  the  file. 

If  the  selected  folder  contains  another  folder,  you  can 
select  that  folder.  The  current  folder  level  appears  in  (A). 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen.  The  [Stored  to]  key  will 
be  highlighted. 


•  To  create  a  new  folder  on  the  currently  displayed  level,  touch  the  [New  Folder]  key.  A  text  entry  screen  will  appear. 
Enter  a  folder  name  and  touch  the  [OK]  key.  For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT"  (page 
1-70)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE11. 

•  To  move  up  one  level,  touch  the  t  j  key.  This  key  appears  when  a  folder  on  the  second  level  or  lower  is  selected. 
•To  change  the  order  of  the  keys  that  appear  in  a  screen,  touch  the  key  that  shows  Aorf.  Each  time  the  key  is 

touched,  the  order  changes  between  ascending  and  descending. 


Specify  a  folder  name  and  file  name  that  are  within  the  allowed  number  of  display  characters  of  your  operating  system.  If  the 
file  name  or  folder  name  exceeds  the  allowed  number  of  characters,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  display  the  scanned  file. 


Contents 


5-39 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ENTERING  A  FILE  NAME 


The  file  name  can  be  directly  entered  when  performing  a  scan  transmission. 


(A) 


Touch  the  [File  Name]  key.  A  text  entry  screen  will  appear.  Enter  the  file  name  and  touch  the  [OK]  key.  The  entered  file 
name  will  appear  in  (A). 


5-40 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  A  FAX  IN  INTERNET  FAX  MODE 


The  basic  procedure  for  sending  a  fax  in  Internet  fax  mode  is  explained  below.  This  procedure  can  also  be  used  to 
perform  direct  transmission  by  Direct  SMTP. 


When  a  default  address  is  configured  in  "Default  Address  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  mode  cannot  be 
changed,  the  destination  cannot  be  changed,  and  destinations  cannot  be  added.  To  switch  to  Internet  fax  mode,  touch  the 
[Cancel]  key  in  the  touch  panel  and  follow  the  steps  below. 


Place  the  original. 

•  Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or 
face  down  on  the  document  glass. 

•  Do  not  place  any  objects  under  the  original  size  detector. 
Closing  the  automatic  document  feeder  with  an  object 
underneath  may  damage  the  original  size  detector  plate  and 
prevent  correct  detection  of  the  document  size. 


•  Place  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A5)  size  originals  in  portrait  (vertical)  orientation  (國) ■  If  placed  in  landscape  (horizontal)  orientation 
(¢[11]),  an  incorrect  size  will  be  detected.  For  a  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2MR  (A5R)  size  original,  enter  the  original  size  manually. 

•  Image  rotation 

8-1/2"  x  11" and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"R  (A4,  B5R,  A5R,  and  16K)  originals  are  rotated  90  degrees  and  transmitted  in 
8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  or  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A4R,  B5,  A5,  or  1 6KR)  orientation.  (8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A4R,  B5,  and 
A5)  originals  cannot  be  rotated  for  transmission.) 


;  Transmission 

9 

ハ > 

•  Originals  cannot  be  scanned  in  succession  from  both  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  the  document  glass  and 
sent  in  a  single  transmission. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Rotation  Sending  Setting 

This  is  used  to  select  whether  or  not  a  scanned  original  image  is  rotated  before  transmission. 

The  default  setting  is:  rotate  8-1 /2M  x  1 1 11  to  8-1/211  x  1 1MR,  and  5-1 /2M  x  8-1/2MRto  5-1 /2M  x  8-1 /2M  (A4  to  A4R,  B5R  to 
B5,  and  A5R  to  A5). 


(4)  (3)  (2) 


1  I 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

5  ►  ffl  ► 15  ]| 

Mto  ]  I  ®Cc  ] 

^  Condition 
^  Settings 

1 

[aAA  AAA  Q] 

Address  Review 1 

fccc  ccc  (ddd  ddd  b]  乙 

Address  Entry 

[eEE  EEE  (fFF  FFF  Q]  ♦ 

'Global 

Address  Search| 

[ggg  ggg  El|  |hhh  hhh  f  _=_  I 

L _ J 

fm  hi  aj  fjjj  jjj 

Sort  Address  | 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J|  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc . 

Preview  [  ^"Aut0  RecePtion 

1.  Fax  Memory; inn% 

Specify  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  destination. 

The  培  icon  appears  in  one-touch  keys  in  which  Internet 
fax  addresses  are  stored. 

(3)  Touch  the  [To]  key, 

The  destination  is  specified. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Condition  Settings]  key. 


•  After  a  one-touch  key  is  touched,  if  the  screen  is  changed  without  touching  the  [To]  key,  the  destination  is 
automatically  specified. 

•In  addition  to  specification  by  a  one-touch  key,  a  destination  can  also  be  specified  by  a  search  number.  You  can 
also  manually  enter  a  destination  or  look  up  a  destination  in  a  global  address  book.  For  more  information,  see 
"ENTERING  DESTINATIONS11  (page  5-18). 


Contents 


5-41 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1) (2) 


Scan 

Internet  Fax  1  Fax  I  USB  Mem.  Scan  1 

PC  Scan 

1 

►Address  Book 

f  Original  j  Scan:  J ^8^x11  Send: 

1 

Address  Entry 

[  Exposure  ] 

i 

Send  Settings 

[ Resolution  jj  2 00X1 00dpi 

i 

Address  Review 

f  File  Format  )  TIFF-F 

1 

File 

f Special  Modes  1 

1: 

Quick  File  | 

1 

Preview  j 

|  |irl  [ 

I -Fax  Manual 
Reception 

Switch  to  Internet  fax  mode  and  display 
the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Internet  Fax]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 


The  current  settings  for  [Original],  [Exposure],  [Resolution],  and  [File  Format]  are  indicated  at  the  right  of  each  key.  To 
change  a  setting,  touch  the  appropriate  key. 

隊  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original)  (page  5-54),  SPECIFYING 
THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce)  (page  5-55),  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE 
AND  ORIGINAL  IMAGE  TYPE  (page  5-61),  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION  (page  5-63),  CHANGING  THE  FILE 
FORMAT  (page  5-64),  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


(1) (2) 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

When  specifying  the  orientation  of  the  image  to  be  transmitted, 
specify  the  orientation  of  the  original  placed  in  step  1 . 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  orientation  key. 

If  the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  up,  touch  the 「卿1  key.  If 
the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  to  the  left,  touch  the  r^3l 
key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

You  will  return  to  the  screen  of  step  2. 


The  original  orientation  is  initially  set  to  QQ  |  .If  the  original  was  placed  with  the  top  edge  up,  this  step  is  not 
necessary. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  the  original  is  placed  on  the  document  glass,  the  [Read-End]  key  appears  in  the  touch  panel.  If  the  original  is  only  one  page, 
go  to  step  7.  To  scan  more  pages,  go  to  the  next  step. 

•If  the  original  was  inserted  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  a  beep  will  sound  when  scanning  is  completed  and  transmission 
will  take  place. 


If  the  original  was  placed  on  the  document  glass,  replace  it  with  the  next  original 
and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


Contents 


5-42 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Place  next  original .  (Pg.N' 

Press  [Start] . 

When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


Contigure  1 


Read-End  ) 

w 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  the  operation  is  completed. 
Open  the  automatic  document  feeder  and  remove  the  original. 


•  If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

•  The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  M2in1M  or  "Card  Shot"  is  selected  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure  can  be 
changed  when  scanning  an  even-numbered  original  page. 


•  When  all  originals  have  been  scanned,  "Job  stored."  will  be  displayed  together  with  a  job  control  number.  This  number  can 
be  used  to  locate  the  job  in  the  Transaction  Report  or  in  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report.  If  the  job  is  a  broadcast 
transmission,  this  number  will  also  appear  in  the  key  of  the  job  in  the  job  status  screen.  For  this  reason,  making  a  note  of 
the  number  is  useful  for  checking  the  result. 

•If  the  memory  becomes  full  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  a  message  will  appear  and  scanning  will  stop. 


•  Storing  a  mail  signature 

You  can  have  preset  text  automatically  added  at  the  end  of  e-mail  messages  as  a  mail  signature.  This  is  convenient  when 
you  wish  to  have  a  corporate  policy  or  other  preset  text  appear  at  the  bottom  of  e-mail  messages.  To  store  the  text  for  the 
mail  signature,  click  [Application  Settings],  [Network  Scanner  Settings]  and  then  [Administration  Settings]  in  the  Web  page 
menu.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.)  Up  to  900  characters  can  be  entered.  (The  mail  signature  is  not  included  in  the 
maximum  number  of  characters  that  can  be  entered  in  the  e-mail  message.) 

Use  "Pre-Setting  Mail  Signature"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  mail  signature  is  added. 

@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  1-Fax  Send  Settings 

This  is  used  to  select  Internet  fax  transmission  settings  such  as  the  receive  report  setting,  rotation  setting,  size  restriction 
setting,  and  sender  information  attachment  setting. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Pre-Setting  Mail  Signature 

Use  this  setting  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  mail  signature  is  added  at  the  end  of  e-mail  messages.  By  factory  default,  a 
mail  signature  is  not  added. 


5-43 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  SUBJECT,  FILE  NAME, AND  BODY 
TEXT 

The  subject,  file  name,  and  body  text  can  be  changed  when  performing  an  Internet  fax  transmission.  Preset  items  can 
be  selected  or  text  can  be  directly  entered. 


•If  the  subject  and  file  name  are  not  changed,  the  settings  in  the  Web  page  are  used. 

•  Selections  for  the  subject,  file  name,  and  body  text  are  configured  by  clicking  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Network 
Scanner  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

•  For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT11  (page  1-70)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


Touch  the  [Send  Settings]  key  in  the  base  screen. 

隊  BASE  SCREEN  (page  5-9) 


To  change  the  subject,  touch  the 
[Subject]  key. 


(i) 


(2) 

^3 


雇 (^2. 


Wo 


[to 


i  Sub:  Minutes  of  planning  m 


J  t 

〕 E 


] E 


02  Sub:  Monthly  Schedule 


■ 


Enter  the  subject. 

(1)  Touch  a  pre-set  text  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  If  you  wish  to  directly  enter  the  text,  touch  the  [Direct  Entry]  key  to  open  the  text  entry  screen.  Enter  the  text  and 
touch  the  [OK]  key. 

•  The  text  in  a  pre-set  text  key  can  be  edited  by  touching  the  pre-set  text  key  and  then  the  [Direct  Entry]  key.  The  text 
entry  screen  will  appear  with  the  selected  pre-set  text  entered.  (When  a  destination  is  stored  using  the  Web  page, 
up  to  80  characters  can  be  entered.  However,  only  54  characters  can  be  entered  in  the  touch  panel.) 


Contents 


5-44 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


To  change  the  file  name,  touch  the  [File 
Name]  key. 

The  file  name  is  entered  in  the  same  way  as  the  subject. 


Send  Settings 


Subiect  1  Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 


File  Name  I  Material  for  planning  meeting 


To  change  the  body  text,  touch  the 
[Body  Text]  key. 


Enter  the  body  text  and  touch  the  [OK] 
key. 

•  To  select  a  pre-set  message  previously  stored  in  the  Web 
page,  touch  the  [Pre-Set  Select]  key. 

•  To  directly  enter  the  message,  touch  the  [Edit]  key. 


• 1800  characters  can  be  entered.  (A  line  break  counts  as  one  character.) 

•To  clear  all  entered  text,  touch  the  [Clear  All]  key.  When  this  key  is  touched,  the  entire  body  of  the  message  is 
erased  immediately;  not  just  the  selected  line. 

•  Each  line  of  the  entered  text  can  be  selected  with  the  國 ■  keys.  To  edit  the  selected  line,  touch  the  [Edit]  key. 
The  text  entry  screen  will  appear  with  the  selected  text  entered. 


Contents 


5-45 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Send  Settings 

1 _ ^ ~ ) 

Subject 

J  Sub:  Schedule  coordination  meeting 

[ File  Name  j 

I  Material  for  planning  meeting 

f  Body  Text  j 

Thank  you  for  your  continuous  support .  We  have  attached  sea 

Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  storing  pre-set  text  for  the  subject  and  file  name  in  the  Web  pages,  up  to  80  characters  can  be  entered. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  The  Number  of  File  Name/Subject/Body  Keys  Displayed  Setting 

The  setting  for  the  number  of  subject  keys  and  file  name  keys  displayed  in  one  screen  can  be  changed  to  6, 12,  or  18. 


Contents 


5-46 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  THE  SAME  IMAGE  TO  MULTIPLE 
DESTINATIONS  (Broadcast  Transmission) 


The  same  scanned  image  can  be  sent  to  multiple  scan  modes,  Internet  fax  mode,  and  fax  mode  destinations  in  a  single 
operation.  Up  to  500  destinations  can  be  selected  in  one  broadcast  operation.  (Combined  maximum  of  200  file  server, 
desktop,  and  shared  folder  destinations.) 


If  you  frequently  use  broadcasting  to  send  images  to  the  same  group  of  destinations,  it  is  convenient  to  store  those 
destinations  in  a  group  key. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


5-47 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(3)  (2) 


Specify  the  destination. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Address  Book]  key  in  the  base 
screen. 

(2)  Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  desired 
destination. 

(3)  Touch  the  [To]  key. 

The  destination  is  specified. 

(4)  Repeat  steps  (2)  and  (3)  until  all 
destinations  are  selected. 


To  add  Cc  or  Bcc  recipients,  select  a  recipient  and  touch  the  [Cc]  key  or  the  [Bcc]  key. 

If  "Must  Input  Next  Address  Key  at  Broadcast  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  touch  the 
[Next  Address]  key  before  specifying  the  next  destination. 


•  One-touch  keys  that  cannot  be  used  for  broadcast  transmission  are  grayed  out  to  prevent  selection. 


•  If  a  Scan  to  FTP  (Hyperlink)  address  is  specified  in  a  broadcast  transmission,  hyperlink  e-mail  transmission  will  not 
take  place. 


•  If  you  frequently  use  broadcasting  to  send  images  to  the  same  group  of  destinations,  it  is  convenient  to  store  those 
destinations  in  a  group  key. 


1 

1 

! 

1 

5  ►  EB  ► 15  ) 

(eTto  Cc  ] 

^  Con 
r  Se- 

Addresi 

Ldition 
匕 tings 

s  Review! 

Q)  (bbb  bbb  设] i 

fccc  CCC  DDD  DDD  b] 

Addr^ 

[eee  eee  [fff  fff  sj  |  ♦  j 

Global 

Address  Search 

[ggg  ggg  q)  [hhh  hhh  设 j  f  丄 1 

LlJ 

fill  III  q]  fjjj  JJJ 

Sort 」 

Address 

Freq.  J|  ABCD  J|  EFGH  J|  IJKL  J  MNOP  J|  QRSTU  J|  VWXYZ  J|  etc .  J 

Preview  I  ^'Aut0  Reception 

i.  i.  Fair  MAmDry: 1  DO% 

Touch  the  [Address  Review]  key. 


Address  Review 

[  OK  ) 

001 [AAA  AAA 

q]  1002  [bbb  BBB 

003 |KKK  KKK 

qJ  1004  [lLL  LLL 

Sj  1 

005  [mMM  MMM 

1006  [nNN  NNN 

q) 

0071000  000 

Q]  1008  [PPP  PPP 

y  s 

009 [qQQ  QQQ 

[" ; aj  lOlof'RRR  RRR 

- ^  m 

onfsss  sss 

劍 012[TTTTTT 

El  To 

a  cc 

Check  the  destinations  and  then  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 


If  the  transmission  includes  Cc  or  Bcc  destinations,  touch  the  [Cc]  tab  or  the  [Bcc]  tab  to  check  those  destinations. 


© 


To  cancel  a  specified  destination... 

Touch  the  one-touch  key  of  the  destination  that  you  wish  to  cancel.  A  message  will  appear  to  confirm  the  deletion. 
Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

隊  CHECKING  AND  DELETING  THE  SELECTED  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-20) 


Contents 


5-48 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  of  one  page  finishes,  replace  it  with  the  next  page  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have 
been  scanned  and  then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


If  Internet  fax  or  fax  destinations  are  included  in  the  broadcast  transmission,  scanning  will  take  place  in  [Mono2]. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


5-49 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


BROADCAST  TRANSMISSIONS  THAT  INCLUDE 
INTERNET  FAX  DESTINATIONS 

When  a  broadcast  transmission  includes  both  scan  mode  and  Internet  Fax  mode  destinations,  the  Internet  Fax  mode 
settings  (original  orientation  and  other  various  settings)  are  given  priority.  When  performing  this  type  of  broadcast 
transmission,  note  the  information  below. 


Original  placement  orientation 

The  orientation  of  Internet  fax  mode  is  given  priority.  When  "Rotation  Sending  Setting" 
is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  image  is  rotated  90  degrees.  For 
this  reason,  in  some  cases  the  image  may  not  be  displayed  in  the  correct  orientation. 

Send  size 

When  the  file  format  is  set  to  [TIFF-S]  in  Internet  fax  mode,  transmission  is  only 
possible  in  8-1/2"  x  1 TR  (A4R)  size. 

Exposure 

The  Internet  fax  settings  are  given  priority. 

Resolution 

When  the  file  format  is  set  to  [TIFF-S]  in  Internet  fax  mode  and  a  high  resolution 
setting  is  selected  in  scan  mode,  the  resolution  will  be  changed  to  [200X200dpi]. 

File  compression  mode 

The  compression  mode  will  be  changed  to  the  compression  mode  set  in 
"Compression  Mode  at  Broadcasting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

Color  scanning 

Scanning  will  take  place  in  Mono2  regardless  of  the  color  mode  setting. 

Special  modes  2in1 

This  cannot  be  selected  in  scan  mode,  however,  if  selected  in  Internet  fax  mode,  it  will 
also  be  applied  to  scan  destinations. 

Scan  file  size 

If  a  broadcast  transmission  is  performed  that  includes  destinations  for  which  an 
attachment  size  limit  has  been  set  using  "Maximum  Size  of  E-mail  Attachments 
(E-mail)11  or  "Maximum  Size  of  Data  Attachments  ( FT  P/D  es  ktop/N  et  wo  rk  Folder)11  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator),  the  limit  will  also  apply  to  destinations  for  which  a 
limit  is  not  set.  (The  limitation  setting  of  Scan  to  E-mail  or  Internet  fax  is  given  priority.) 

Resending  to  unsuccessful  broadcast  transmission  destinations 

The  results  of  a  completed  broadcast  transmission  can  be  checked  in  the  job  status  screen.  If  transmission  to  any  of  the 
addresses  failed,  resend  the  image  to  those  addresses. 


JOB  STATUS 

Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 

v  J 

(1) 


总  Print  Job  J 


2  S’  AAA'  AAA 


10:05  04/01  1000/001  Waiting 


(1)  (2) 

1  1  Complete 


: ゴ  BBB  BBB 


10:22  04/01  1000/004  Waiting 


4  eT  ccc  CCC 


10:30  04/01  1000 /010  Waiting 


5  eT  ddd  ddd 


10:33  04/01  1000/010  Waiting 


〕 1 

© 


fstop/DeleteJ 


Display  the  jobs  completed  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to 
display. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Complete]  key. 


If  the  broadcast  transmission  included  destinations  of  different  modes,  the  same  broadcast  transmission  key  will 
appear  in  each  of  those  modes. 


5-50 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(i) 


[K. 


Internet  Fax  I 


Start  Time  Pages  : Status 


1 

|  ^  1  .Broadcast  00  02 

10:05 

04/01  1001/001  Send  OK 

1 と 

["  部丨  Broadcast0003 

10:22 

04/01  1004/004  Send  OK 

1  1 

bDD  DDD 

10:30 

04/01  1010 /010  Send  OK 

■01 


Display  details  on  the  broadcast 
transmission. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  completed  broadcast 
transmission. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Detail]  key, 


"Broadcastxxxx"  will  appear  as  the  address  of  the  broadcast  job  key.  The  job  control  number  that  appeared  in  the 
touch  panel  when  scanning  ended  appears  in  "xxxx". 


Detail 

OK 

I 

•薄  Broadcast 0001 

Address 

Start  Time  Status  (  ^txy 

002  EEE  EEE 

10:01  04/01  NG000000 

i 

010  FFF  FFF 

10:10  04/01  NG000000 

i 

[i 

[i 

File 

Failed  |  All  Destinat 

)ns  J 

I 

(1) 


Resend  the  image  to  the  unsuccessful 
destinations. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Failed]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Retry]  key. 


•  The  steps  to  follow  after  the  [Retry]  key  is  touched  differ  depending  on  whether  or  not  the  document  filing  function  is 
used. 

Not  using  document  filing 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  with  the  unsuccessful  destinations  entered.  Place  the  original  and  perform  the 
steps  of  the  broadcast  transmission. 

Using  document  filing 

You  will  return  to  the  document  filing  resend  screen  with  the  unsuccessful  destinations  entered.  Perform  the 
document  filing  resend  procedure.  (There  is  no  need  to  rescan  the  original.) 

•  If  the  [All  Destinations]  tab  is  touched  in  (1), all  destinations  will  be  displayed.  The  [Retry]  key  that  appears  in  the 
screen  can  be  touched  to  resend  to  all  the  destinations. 


Contents 


5-51 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  AN  INTERNET  FAX  FROM  A 
COMPUTER  (PC-l-Fax) 

A  file  on  a  computer  can  be  sent  via  the  machine  as  an  Internet  fax  (PC-l-Fax  function).  Internet  faxes  are  sent  using  the 
PC-l-Fax  function  in  the  same  way  as  documents  are  printed.  Select  the  PC-Fax  driver  as  the  printer  driver  for  your 
computer  and  then  select  the  Print  command  in  the  software  application.  Image  data  for  transmission  will  be  created  and 
sent  as  an  Internet  fax. 


For  the  procedures  for  using  this  function,  see  the  PC-Fax  driver  Help. 


•To  send  an  Internet  fax  using  the  PC-l-Fax  function,  the  PC-Fax  driver  must  be  installed  and  then  updated  using  the 
CD-ROM  that  accompanies  the  Internet  fax  expansion  kit.  For  more  information,  see  the  Software  Setup  Guide. 

•  This  function  can  only  be  used  on  a  Windows  computer. 

•  This  function  can  only  be  used  for  transmission.  Internet  faxes  received  on  the  machine  cannot  be  received  to  a  computer 
that  is  connected  to  the  machine. 


5-52 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


IMAGE  SETTINGS 

Settings  for  scanning  the  original  are  selected  in  the  base  screen  of  each  mode.  The  current  state  of  each  setting 
appears  to  the  right  of  the  key  used  to  select  the  setting. 


J 

Scan 

Internet  Fax  |  Fax  \  USB  Mem.  Scan  \  PC  Scan 

►Address  Book 

f  Original ] Scan:  Send:  #■ 

!r ⑴ 

Address  Entry 

1 1  Exposure  ]  #| 

L ⑵ 

卜⑶ 
卜 (4) 

Send  Settings 

[f  Resolution  j  2 00X2 00dpi  春! 

Address  Reviewj 

|  f  File  Format  ]  |~P  PDF 

File 

|  (  Color  Mode  j  qP  Mono2  ^ 

-⑼ 

Quick  File  | 

f  Special  Modes  ] 

Preview  j 

[ sr 

(1)  [Original]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  set  the  scan  size,  send  size,  and 
orientation  of  the  original,  and  select  2-sided  scanning 
settings. 

^  AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF 
AN  ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original)  (page  5-54), 
SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE  AND 
SEND  SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce)  (page  5-55) 

(2)  [Exposure]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  exposure  for  scanning. 

^  CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL 
IMAGE  TYPE  (page  5-61) 

(3)  [Resolution]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  resolution  for  scanning. 
隊  CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION  (page  5-63) 


(4)  [File  Format]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  change  the  format  (file  type)  of  the 
scanned  image  file. 

暖  CHANGING  THE  FILE  FORMAT  (page  5-64) 

(5)  [Color  Mode]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  color  mode  for  scanning. 
This  key  does  not  appear  in  Internet  fax  mode. 

瞭  CHANGING  THE  COLOR  MODE  (page  5-68) 


Contents 


5-53 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


AUTOMATICALLY  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  AN 
ORIGINAL  (2-Sided  Original) 

The  automatic  document  feeder  can  be  used  to  automatically  scan  both  sides  of  an  original. 


2-sided  original 


Front  and  reverse  sides  are  scanned 


Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

ぼ  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


⑶ 


曇 

Scan/Original  f  OK  || 

Scan  Size  100%  Send  Size 

( Auto  8^x11 )  4  [  Auto  ) 

Image  Orientation 

2-Sided 

I  眉  Tablet 

PE1I  [  00 1 

1 ^ 

1 

(1)  (2) 


Specify  the  binding  style  of  the  2-sided 
original  (book  or  tablet)  and  the 
orientation  in  which  the  original  is  placed. 

(1) Touch  the  [2-Sided  Booklet]  key  or  the 
[2-Sided  Tablet]  key. 

A  book  and  a  tablet  are  bound  as  shown  below. 


Book  Tablet 


l_ 

t  , 

A 

イ 

c 

J 

l  . 

A  B 

C 

p 

0 

ン 

L 

lE  F\, 

K  L 

(2)  Touch  the  appropriate  [Image  orientation]  key. 

If  this  setting  is  not  correct,  a  suitable  image  may  not  be 
transmitted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


© 


To  cancel  2-sided  scanning,  touch  the  highlighted  key  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


2-sided  scanning  automatically  turns  off  after  the  transmission  operation  is  completed. 


Contents 


5-54 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SPECIFYING  THE  ORIGINAL  SCAN  SIZE  AND  SEND 
SIZE  (Enlarge/Reduce) 


When  the  original  is  placed,  its  size  is  automatically  detected  and  displayed  in  the  base  screen. 

The  size  of  the  placed  original  is  indicated  as  the  scan  size,  and  the  size  to  be  transmitted  is  indicated  as  the  send  size. 


In  the  above  screen,  the  scan  size  (the  placed  original)  is  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  and  the  send  size  is  auto.  For  example,  if  the 
scan  size  is  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  and  the  send  size  is  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5),  the  image  will  be  reduced  before  transmission. 


"Scan  Size11 


"Send  Size"  is  set 
to  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 
(B5) 


8-1/2"  x  11" (A4) 


The  image  is  reduced 
to  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (B5) 
before  transmission 


•  Only  standard  original  sizes  can  be  automatically  detected. 

\^)  ^  STANDARD  SIZES  (page  5-17) 

•  When  the  original  size  is  a  non-standard  size,  or  if  the  size  is  not  detected  correctly,  manually  specify  the  original  scan 
size. 

隊  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  5-56) 

瞭  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values)  (page  5-57) 


5-55 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.) 

If  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size  or  you  wish  to  change  the  scan  size,  touch  the  [Original]  key  to  specify  the  original 
size  manually.  Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  and  follow  the  steps  below. 


Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

⑵  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

The  automatically  detected  original  size  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Original]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


Scan  Size  100%  Send  Size 


〔Auto  8^x11 ]  ^ 


Image  Orientation 

f  .fe  2 -Sided  1  f(gk  2-Sided 

1  M  Booklet  丨丨  ^  Tablet 

[sal 

Touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


(1)  (2) 


Specify  the  scan  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  original  size  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


•  If  you  are  sending  a  long  original,  touch  the  [Long  Size]  key.  Use  the  automatic  document  feeder  to  scan  a  long 
original.  The  maximum  width  that  can  be  scanned  is  39-3/8" (1000  mm)  (the  maximum  height  is  11-5/8"  (297  mm)). 
隊  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  5-17) 

•  To  specify  an  AB  size  for  the  scan  size,  touch  the  [AB^Inch]  key  to  highlight  the  [AB]  side  and  then  specify  the  scan  size. 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


When  [Long  Size]  is  selected,  the  2-sided  scanning  setting  and  send  size  cannot  be  changed.  In  addition,  when  only  scan 
destinations  are  selected  for  scan  transmission  or  metadata  transmission,  scanning  will  take  place  in  Mono2. 


Contents 


5-56 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (by  numerical  values) 

When  scanning  a  non-standard  size  original  such  as  a  card, follow  these  steps  to  specify  the  original  size.  The  width  can 
be  from  1 " to 1 7"  (25  mm  to  432  mm),  and  the  height  can  be  from  1 11  to 1 1 -5/8"  (25  mm  to  297  mm). 


Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

The  automatically  detected  original  size  appears  to  the  right  of  the  [Original]  key. 
隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


, Scan/Original  f  OK 

Scan  Size  1C 

_ 

)0%  Send  Size 
►  [  Auto 

[ 2 -Sided  |  f|gk  2-Sided 

|  l!il  Booklet  |  |  眉  Tablet 

Image  Orientation 

EH  [sa"| 

Touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


j]  Touch  the  [Size  Input]  key. 


Manual 

f  5^8%  ]  [  8^xllR  ) [  11x17  ] 

AB 

f  5 你 8你  |  [8^x13  (216x330)1 

872x11 ] [  872x14  j  Long  Size  j 

(1),(2)  (3) 


Enter  the  scan  size  (original  size). 

(1)  Touch  the  [X]  key  and  enter  the  X 
(horizontal)  dimension  with  the  QH  keys 

(2)  Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  Y  (vertical) 
dimension  with  the  Q&J  keys. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

Touch  the  [OK]  key  next  to  the  [Cancel]  key  to  complete 
the  setting  and  return  to  the  screen  of  step  3. 


c 


Contents 


5-57 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

The  specified  size  appears  in  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 


•  When  the  scan  size  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  the  send  size  cannot  be  specified. 

•  When  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used,  an  original  longer  than  17"  (432  mm)  can  be  scanned  (maximum  width 
39-3/8" (1000  mm)).  In  this  case,  touch  the  [Long  Size]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 

暖  Specifying  the  original  scan  size  (Specify  using  a  standard  size.)  (page  5-56) 

隊  TRANSMITTABLE  ORIGINAL  SIZES  (page  5-17) 


Contents 


5-58 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Specifying  the  send  size  of  the  image 

Specify  the  send  size  as  a  paper  size.  If  a  send  size  bigger  than  the  scan  size  is  selected,  the  image  will  be  enlarged.  If 
a  send  size  smaller  than  the  scan  size  is  selected,  the  image  will  be  reduced. 


•  The  send  size  cannot  be  specified  when  [Long  Size]  is  selected  for  the  scan  size,  or  when  the  scan  size  is  specified  by 
numerical  values. 

•  The  send  size  cannot  be  specified  when  [TIFF-S]  is  selected  for  the  format  in  Internet  fax  mode.  (The  send  size  is  fixed  at 
8-1/2"  x11MR(A4R).) 


Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Original]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


.Scan/Original 


Scan  Size  _ 

I  Auto  8^x11 j 


100%  Send  Size 


Auto 

^5 


( 1^  2 -Sided  I  f|gU  2-Sided 

Booklet  I  I  1^]  Tablet 


Image  Orientation 

PEI  (0a] 


Touch  the  [Send  Size]  key. 


(1)  (2) 


Specify  the  send  size. 

(1)  Touch  the  desired  send  size  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


•  Depending  on  the  paper  size  specified  for  the  "Scan  Size",  it  may  not  be  possible  to  select  some  sizes  for  the  "Send 
Size".  Size  keys  that  cannot  be  specified  for  the  "Send  Size"  are  grayed  out  to  prevent  selection. 

•  To  specify  an  AB  size  for  the  send  size,  touch  the  [AB^Inch]  key  to  highlight  the  [AB]  side  and  then  specify  the 
send  size. 


Contents 


5-59 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(2) 


Scan/Original 

f ^ i — )1 

Scan  Size  129%  Send  Size 

[Auto  8^1 1|  4  |  11x17 

[ iPjq  2 -Sided  I  [ (gU  2-Sided 

|  m  Booklet  ||  LJ  Tablet 

Image  Orientation 

EE11 10011 

1 

Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

(1)  Touch  the  appropriate  [Image  Orientation] 
key. 

If  this  setting  is  not  correct  when  sending  an  image  with  a 
changed  ratio,  a  suitable  image  may  not  be  transmitted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


(i) 


The  ratio  used  for  reduction  or  enlargement  of  the  original  will  appear  between  the  "Scan  Size"  and  the  "Send  Size". 


5-60 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  EXPOSURE  AND  ORIGINAL  IMAGE 
TYPE 


The  exposure  and  original  image  type  can  be  set  appropriately  for  the  original  to  enable  optimum  scanning. 
Refer  the  following  tables  to  select  appropriate  settings. 

How  to  select  the  exposure 


Exposure 

When  to  select 

Auto 

This  setting  automatically  adjusts  the  exposure  for  light  and  dark  parts  of  the  original.  (Only 
when  mono2  is  set.) 

Manual 

1-2 

Select  this  setting  when  the  original  consists  of  dark  text. 

3 

Select  this  setting  for  a  normal  original  (neither  dark  nor  light). 

4-5 

Select  this  setting  when  the  original  consists  of  faint  text. 

How  to  select  the  original  image  type  (Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode  and  Data  entry  mode) 


Setting 

Description 

Text/P rtd.  Photo 

This  mode  provides  the  best  balance  for  scanning  an  original  which  contains  both  text  and 
printed  photographs,  such  as  a  magazine  or  catalogue. 

Text/Photo 

This  mode  provides  the  best  balance  for  scanning  an  original  which  contains  both  text  and 
photographs,  such  as  a  text  document  with  a  photo  pasted  on. 

Text 

Use  this  mode  for  regular  text  documents. 

Photo 

Use  this  mode  to  scan  photos. 

Printed  Photo 

This  mode  is  best  for  scanning  printed  photographs,  such  as  photos  in  a  magazine  or 
catalogue. 

Map 

This  mode  is  best  for  scanning  the  color  shading  and  fine  details  found  on  most  maps. 

I  Select  the  mode  and  display  the  exposure  settings  screen. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Exposure]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


When  Fax/ エ -Fax  address  is  included, 
exposure  setting  shared  among  Fax/ 

I -Fax/  Scanner  mode  is  selected. 


Read  the  displayed  message  and  touch 
the  [OK]  key, 

This  message  does  not  appear  in  USB  memory  mode  or 
Internet  fax  mode.  Go  to  the  next  step. 


If  a  broadcast  transmission  is  performed  that  includes  both  scan  mode  destinations  and  Internet  fax  destinations,  the 
exposure  settings  for  Internet  fax  mode  will  have  priority. 


5-61 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  Data  entry  mode 
(2)  (1)  (3) 


Internet  fax  mode 


(1)  (2)  (3) 


Select  the  exposure  and  original  image 
type. 

(1)  Select  the  original  image  type. 

Touch  the  original  image  type  key  that  matches  the 
original  image  type. 

(2)  Adjust  the  exposure  with  the  m  m  keys. 

The  exposure  darkens  when  the  I  I  key  is  touched, 
and  lightens  when  the  f  G  I  key  is  touched. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


(1)  Touch  the  [Manual]  key. 

(2)  Adjust  the  exposure  with  the  m  :  T]  keys. 

The  exposure  darkens  when  the  I  1  key  is  touched, 
and  lightens  when  the  ^  G  J  key  is  touched. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


•  In  Internet  fax  mode,  the  original  image  type  and  moire  reduction  cannot  be  selected. 

•To  reduce  the  occurrence  of  line  patterns  (moire  effect)  when  scanning  printed  matter,  touch  the  [Moire  Reduction] 
checkbox  so  that  a  checkmark  ノ]  appears. 


When  using  the  document  glass  to  scan  multiple  original  pages,  the  exposure  setting  can  be  changed  each  time  you  change 
pages.  When  using  the  automatic  document  feeder,  the  exposure  setting  cannot  be  changed  once  scanning  has  begun. 
(However,  when  "Job  Build"  is  used  in  the  special  modes,  the  exposure  can  be  changed  each  time  a  new  set  of  originals  is 
inserted.) 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Exposure  Settings 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  exposure  setting. 


Contents 


5-62 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  RESOLUTION 

The  resolution  setting  can  be  selected. 


Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Resolution]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  Data  entry  mode 

(1)  (2) 


Select  the  resolution. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  resolution. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Internet  fax  mode 


⑴ 


(2) 


In  Internet  fax  mode,  the  [Half  Tone]  key  can  be  touched  to  select  halftone  (except  when  [200X1 00dpi]  is  selected). 
When  the  original  has  many  gradations  of  light  and  dark  such  as  a  photo  or  color  illustration,  halftone  provides  a  more 
attractive  image  than  regular  transmission. 


Contents 


5-63 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


How  to  select  the  resolution 

For  normal  text  originals,  200X200dpi  (200X1 00dpi  in  Internet  fax  mode)  produces  an  image  that  is  sufficiently  legible. 
For  photos  and  illustrations,  a  high  resolution  setting  (600X600dpi,  etc.)  will  produce  a  sharp  image.  However,  a  high 
resolution  setting  will  result  in  a  large  file,  and  if  the  file  is  too  large,  transmission  may  not  be  possible.  In  this  event, 
reduce  the  number  of  pages  scanned  or  take  other  measures  to  decrease  the  file  size. 

暖  CHANGING  THE  FILE  FORMAT 

Specifying  the  send  size  of  the  image  (page  5-59) 


•  When  using  the  document  glass  to  scan  multiple  original  pages,  the  resolution  setting  can  be  changed  each  time  you 
change  pages.  When  using  the  automatic  document  feeder,  the  resolution  setting  cannot  be  changed  once  scanning  has 
begun.  (However,  when  "Job  Build"  is  used  in  the  special  modes,  the  resolution  can  be  changed  each  time  a  new  set  of 
originals  is  inserted.) 

•  When  [TIFF-S]  is  selected  for  the  format  in  Internet  fax  mode,  only  [200X1 00dpi]  or  [200X200dpi]  can  be  selected. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Resolution  Setting 

This  is  used  to  change  the  default  resolution  setting. 


CHANGING  THE  FILE  FORMAT 

Changing  the  format 

(Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode  and  Data  entry  mode) 

The  file  format  (file  type  and  compression  mode/compression  ratio)  for  sending  a  scanned  image  can  be  changed  at  the 
time  of  transmission.  In  addition,  if  the  scanned  originals  are  divided  into  separate  files,  the  number  of  pages  per  file  can 
be  changed. 


The  file  format  for  sending  a  scanned  image  is  specified  when  the  destination  is  stored  in  a  one-touch  key;  however,  you  can 
change  the  format  at  the  time  of  transmission. 


I  Select  the  mode  and  display  the  image  settings  screen. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [File  Format]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


Read  the  displayed  message  and  touch 
the  [OK]  key, 

The  message  does  not  appear  in  USB  memory  mode.  Go  to 
the  next  step. 


5-64 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Set  the  format. 


•  Scanning  in  Mono2 


(1)  (2) 


(1)  Select  the  file  type. 

To  send  a  file  using  Encrypt  PDF,  touch  the  [Encry.] 
checkbox  to  select  it  (  ノ 1). 

(2)  Select  the  compression  mode. 


•  Scanning  in  color/grayscale 


(i) 


(1)  Touch  the  indicated  key  to  select  [Color/Gray]  mode. 

When  [Color/Gray]  is  highlighted,  [Color/Gray]  mode  is  selected. 

(2)  Select  the  file  type. 

•  To  send  a  file  using  Encrypt  PDF,  touch  the  [Encry.] 
checkbox  to  select  it  (  ノ  1). 

•  When  Enhanced  compression  kit  is  installed,  the  [High]  and 
[U-Fine]  checkboxes  appear.  To  suppress  image  quality 
deterioration  and  reduce  the  data  size  of  a  file  to  be 
transmitted,  Compact  PDF  can  be  selected.  [U-Fine]  can  only 
be  selected  when  Compact  PDF  is  set. 

(3)  Select  the  compression  ratio. 

•  High  compression  results  in  a  smaller  file  size, 
however,  the  image  quality  is  slightly  degraded. 

•  When  [High]  is  selected  in  the  file  format  settings,  the 
compression  ratio  cannot  be  selected. 


•  The  [Programmed]  key  does  not  appear  in  USB  memory  mode. 

•  When  this  screen  is  displayed,  the  setting  screen  of  [B/W]  mode  initially  appears. 

•  The  format  setting  of  [B/W]  mode  is  the  file  format  when  the  color  mode  is  set  to  [Mono2]. 

•  The  format  setting  of  [Color/Gray]  mode  is  the  file  format  when  the  color  mode  is  set  to  [Full  Color]  or  [Grayscale]. 

•  The  file  type  of  [B/W]  mode  and  the  file  type  of  [Color/Gray]  mode  are  linked.  The  file  type  cannot  be  set  separately 
for  each.  (When  [JPEG]  is  selected  for  [Color/Gray]  mode,  [TIFF]  is  automatically  selected  for  [B/W]  mode.) 

•  Note  the  following  when  the  file  format  is  set  to  Compact  PDF  ([PDF]  is  selected  and  the  [High]  checkbox  is  set  to  y  l): 

- When  Compact  PDF  is  set  for  one  address  in  a  broadcast  transmission,  the  file  will  be  sent  as  a  Compact  PDF 
file  to  all  scanner  addresses. 


- When  Compact  PDF  format  or  Compact  PDF  (Ultra  Fine)  format  is  set  for  one  address  in  a  broadcast  transmission,  the 
file  will  be  sent  in  Compact  PDF  (Ultra  Fine)  format  to  all  scanner  addresses. 

- If  a  fax  destination  is  specified  or  the  resolution  is  set  after  Compact  PDF  is  set,  the  Compact  PDF  setting  will  be 
canceled,  the  file  format  will  be  [PDF],  and  the  compression  ratio  will  be  [High]. 

-If  Compact  PDF  is  set  when  a  resolution  setting  has  been  specified  in  scanner  (or  other)  mode,  the  resolution 
setting  will  be  canceled  and  the  Compact  PDF  resolution  will  be  used  for  transmission. 

- When  Compact  PDF  is  selected,  [Resolution]  cannot  be  changed  while  waiting  for  the  next  original  or  in 
[Configure]  in  the  job  build  settings. 


5-65 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


⑶ 


(i) 


(2) 


To  change  the  number  of  pages  per  file, 
enter  the  number  of  pages  and  exit  the 
format  settings. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Specified  Pages  per  File] 
checkbox  so  that  a  checkmark  0  appears. 

(2)  Set  the  number  of  pages  per  file  with  the 
SS  keys. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  When  a  checkmark  does  not  appear  in  the  [Specified  Pages  per  File]  checkbox  ^ _ ),  one  file  is  created  for  all 
scanned  pages. 

•  When  [Specified  Pages  per  File]  is  selected,  consecutive  numbers  are  added  to  the  created  file  names. 

•  When  [JPEG]  is  selected  for  the  file  type,  one  file  is  created  for  each  page  (a  file  cannot  be  created  for  multiple 
pages).  For  this  reason,  the  [Specified  Pages  per  File]  checkbox  does  not  appear. 


•  When  the  file  format  is  set  to  Encrypt  PDF  ([PDF]  is  selected  in  the  format  settings  screen  and  the  [Encry.]  checkbox  is  set 
to0),  a  screen  prompting  you  to  enter  a  password  will  appear  when  the  [START]  key  is  pressed  to  start  scan  send 
transmission. 

•  Touch  the  [Entry]  key  in  the  displayed  screen  to  open  the  keyboard  screen.  Enter  a  password  (maximum  of  32  characters) 
and  touch  the  [OK]  key.  Scanning  and  transmission  will  begin. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  File  Format  Setting 

This  sets  the  default  file  format  setting  for  scanner  transmission. 


5-66 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Changing  the  format  (Internet  fax  mode) 

The  file  format  for  sending  an  Internet  fax  is  normally  set  to  [TIFF-F].  If  the  destination  Internet  fax  machine  does  not 
support  full  mode  (it  only  supports  simple  mode),  follow  the  steps  below  to  select  [TIFF-S]. 


I  Switch  to  Internet  fax  mode  and  display  the  file  format  settings  screen. 

(1) Touch  the  [Internet  Fax]  tab, 

(2)  Touch  the  [File  Format]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


Select  the  file  format. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  format. 

If  you  selected  [TIFF-F],  select  the  compression  mode. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


When  [TIFF-S]  is  selected,  the  transmission  settings  are  restricted  as  follows: 

•  Resolution:  The  selections  are  [200X1 00dpi]  and  [200X200dpi].  If  [TIFF-S]  is  selected  after  [200X400dpi], 

[400X400dpi]  or  [600X600dpi]  is  selected,  the  resolution  automatically  changes  to  [200X200dpi]. 


•  Send  size:  Always  8-1/2"  x  1 1 "R  (A4R).  If  [TIFF-S]  is  selected  after  the  send  size  is  changed,  the  send  size  is 

automatically  changed  to  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  (A4R).  If  a  size  larger  than  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  is  scanned,  the  size 
will  automatically  be  reduced  to  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  (A4R).  When  this  format  is  included  in  a  broadcast 
transmission,  the  image  will  be  transmitted  to  all  destinations  at  8-1/2"  x  1 1"R  (A4R). 


•  Special  modes:  When  a  ratio  setting  is  selected  and  the  original  size  is  entered,  Dual  Page  Scan,  Card  Shot,  2in1,  and 
Mixed  Size  Original  cannot  be  used. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Compression  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  default  compression  mode  for  Internet  fax  transmission. 


Contents 


5-67 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  COLOR  MODE 


This  procedure  is  used  to  change  the  color  mode  used  to  scan  the  original  when  the  [START]  key  is  pressed. 


This  function  cannot  be  used  in  Internet  fax  mode. 


Mode 

Scanning  method 

Full  Color 

The  original  is  scanned  in  full  color.  This  mode  is  best  for  full  color  originals  such  as  catalogues. 

Grayscale 

The  colors  in  the  original  are  scanned  in  black  and  white  as  shades  of  gray  (grayscale). 

Mono2 

Colors  in  the  original  are  scanned  as  black  or  white.  This  mode  is  best  for  text-only  originals. 

I  Select  the  mode  and  display  the  color  mode  settings  screen. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Color  Mode]  key. 

隊  IMAGE  SETTINGS  (page  5-53) 


Image  will  be  sent  in  [Mono 2 ] 

if  Fax  or  I-Fax  destination  is  included. 


Read  the  displayed  message  and  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 

A  message  does  not  appear  in  USB  memory  mode.  Go  to  the 
next  step. 


When  a  broadcast  transmission  is  performed  using  mixed  send  modes,  the  image  is  sent  in  Mono2. 


Select  the  color  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  desired  color  mode. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Color  Mode  Settings 

The  default  color  mode  can  be  changed. 


Contents 


5-68 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  TO  BE 
TRANSMITTED  (Preview) 

If  you  touch  the  [Preview]  key  before  scanning  the  original,  you  can  check  the  scanned  image  in  the  touch  panel  before 
sending  the  image. 

*  The  factory  default  setting  is  disabled. 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  transmission  data,  part  of  the  preview  image  may  not  appear  in  the  preview  screen  in  the  touch 
panel. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  as  appropriate  for  the  functions  stored  in  the  program. 


Touch  the  [Preview]  key  to  highlight  it. 


Select  transmission  settings  and  touch  the  [START]  key. 

"Originals  are  being  read"  appears  while  the  originals  are  being  scanned,  and  when  scanning  is  finished,  the  preview  screen 
appears  on  the  touch  panel.  Transmission  will  not  take  place  until  you  touch  the  [Start  Sending]  key  in  the  preview  screen. 


Preview 


B/W 


[Function  R 


s — 4 ― y —— i 

[©DCS 


Display  Rotation 

P  响 ] 


Check  the  preview  image  and  then  touch 
the  [Start  Sending]  key. 

Transmission  begins. 

For  information  on  the  preview  screen,  see  "PREVIEW  CHECK 
SCREEN11  (page  5-70). 


System  settings  (administrator):  Default  Preview 

You  can  specify  whether  or  not  the  [Preview]  key  function  will  be  enabled  in  the  base  screens  of  the  image  send  modes  and 
in  the  address  book. 


Contents 


5-69 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


PREVIEW  CHECK  SCREEN 

This  section  explains  the  preview  check  screen. 


(1)  Preview  image 

A  preview  of  the  scanned  original  appears. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and  slide 
it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to  scroll.) 

(2)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages,  use  these  keys  to 
change  pages. 

•  JlJ  LWj  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page. 

•  T)  LEJ  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display: 

This  shows  the  total  number  of  pages 
and  the  current  page  number.  You  can 
touch  the  current  page  number  key  and 
enter  a  number  with  the  numeric  keys 
to  go  to  that  page  number. 


(3)  [Function  Rev.]  key 

Touch  to  check  special  mode  settings  or  scan  settings  for 
two-sided  originals. 

(4)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  "Full  Page",  "Twice", 

■■4  Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in 
the  file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(5)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(6)  [Start  Sending]  key 

Touch  to  begin  transmission. 


•A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  It  will  differ  from  the  actual  print  result. 

•  The  preview  image  reflects  certain  scanning  and  special  mode  settings. 

Settings  reflected  in  the  preview  image  are  as  follows: 

Scanning  settings:  Original 

Special  modes:  Erase,  Dual  Page  Scan,  Card  Shot,  2in1,  Suppress  Background,  Mixed  Size  Original 


5-70 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(r 


(2> 


(4 卜 雜 ](5r  Bs=  j(6f: 


{7b 

(1  %  °?otr  f1  P  —  f1 


a 

a 


SPECIAL  MODES 


This  section  explains  special  modes  that  can  be  used  in  scan  send  mode. 


SPECIAL  MODES 


When  the  [Special  Modes]  key  is  touched  in  the  base  screen,  the  special  modes  menu  screen  appears.  The  special 
modes  menu  consists  of  two  screens.  Touch  the  [±] 令  I  key  to  switch  between  the  two  screens.  When  the  [OK]  key  is 
touched  in  the  special  modes  screen,  the  selected  settings  are  entered  and  the  base  screen  reappears. 

瞭  Internet  fax  mode  (page  5-72) 

Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode, Data  entry  mode 

1st  screen  2nd  screen 


Scan/ Special  Modes 


Scan/Special  Modes 


(1)  [Program]  key*1,2 

隊  STORING  SCAN  OPERATIONS  (Programs)  (page  5-73) 

(2)  [Erase]  key 

^  ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase)  (page  5-75) 

(3)  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key 

^  SCANNING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO  SEPARATE 
PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan)  (page  5-77) 

(4)  [Timer]  key*1 

隊  SENDING  AN  IMAGE  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME 
(Timer  Transmission)  (page  5-79) 

(5)  [Suppress  Background]  key 

^  WHITENING  FAINT  COLORS  IN  THE  IMAGE 
(Suppress  Background)  (page  5-81) 

(6)  [Card  Shot]  key 

^  SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ONTO  A 
SINGLE  PAGE  (Card  Shot)  (page  5-83) 

(7)  [Job  Build]  key 

瞭  SCANNING  MANY  ORIGINALS  AT  ONCE  (Job 
Build)  (page  5-86) 

*1  Does  not  appear  in  USB  memory  mode. 

*2  Does  not  appear  in  data  entry  mode. 

*3  Does  not  appear  when  the  stamp  unit  is  not  installed. 

In  USB  memory  mode,  this  appears  in  the  1st  screen. 


(8)  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key 

^  SCANNING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT  SIZES 
(Mixed  Size  Original)  (page  5-88) 

(9)  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key 

隊  SCANNING  THIN  ORIGINALS  (Slow  Scan  Mode) 
(page  5-90) 

(10)  [Original  Count]  key*1 

瞭  CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  TRANSMISSION 
(Original  Count)  (page  5-92) 

(11)  [File]  key*1 

Touch  this  to  use  the  File  function  of  document  filing  mode. 

(12)  [Quick  File]  key*1 

Touch  this  to  use  the  Quick  File  function  of  document 
filing  mode. 

(13)  [Verif.  Stamp]  key*3 4 5 6 7 

瞭  STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif.  Stamp) 
(page  5-94) 


Contents 


2 2 0 0 


t 

o 


5-71 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Scan/Special  Modes 


Special  modes  can  generally  be  combined  with  other  special  modes,  however,  there  are  some  combinations  that  are  not 
possible.  If  a  prohibited  combination  is  selected,  a  message  will  appear  in  the  touch  panel. 


[OK]  key  and  [Cancel]  key 


In  some  cases  two  [OK]  keys  and  one  [Cancel]  key  will  appear  in  the  special  mode  screens.  The  keys  are  used  as 
follows: 


Internet  Fax/Special  Modes 


Dual  Page 
— Scan 


(1fe~ 


Job 

Build 


画 


Mixed  Size 
Original 


[D 


Slow  Scan 
Mode 


|fe~|  Original 
| し 國  Count 


Edge  Center  Edge+Center 

Erase  _  _ Erase 


Erase 

國 


圍 


|  (o-i) 


aa 


(A)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  setting  and  return  to  the  base  screen. 

(B)  Enter  the  selected  special  mode  setting  and  return  to  the  special  mode  menu  screen.  Touch  this  key  when  you  wish 
to  continue  selecting  other  special  mode  settings. 

(C)  During  selection  of  special  mode  settings,  this  key  returns  you  to  the  special  mode  menu  screen  without  saving  the 
settings.  When  settings  have  been  completed,  this  cancels  the  settings  and  returns  you  to  the  special  mode  menu 
screen. 


5-72 


Contents 


Internet  fax  mode 


The  keys  explained  below  can  only  be  used  in  Internet  fax  mode.  The  other  keys  are  the  same  as  those  explained  in 
"Scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  Data  entry  mode"  (page  5-71). 


1st  screen 


2nd  screen 


(1) [2in1]  key 

隊  SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE  (2in1) 
(page  5-96) 


[Transaction  Report]  key 

隊  CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 
TRANSACTION  REPORT  (Transaction  Report) 
(page  5-99) 


g  1  一 2 m 二-- 令 一 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


STORING  SCAN  OPERATIONS  (Programs) 

A  destination,  original  settings,  and  functions  can  be  stored  in  a  program.  When  you  wish  to  use  those  settings  to  send 
an  image,  they  can  be  retrieved  with  ease. 

For  example,  suppose  8-1/2"  x  11" (A4)  size  documents  are  scanned  into  a  file  and  sent  to  each  branch  office  once  a  month. 


(1) The  same  documents  are  sent  to  each  branch  office 

(2)  Each  page  of  a  bound  document  is  successively  transmitted 

(3)  Smudges  on  the  edges  of  the  documents  are  erased  before  transmission 


When  a  job  program  is  not  stored 

When  a  job  program  is  stored 

Enter  the  address  of  each  branch  office. 

Touch  a  stored  program  key. 

Select  Dual  Page  Scan. 

♦ 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

The  originals  are  scanned  and  transmitted. 

Select  Erase  settings. 

Press  the  [START]  key. 

The  originals  are  scanned  and  transmitted. 

Considerable  time  is  required  to  send  the  documents  each 
month  because  the  above  settings  must  be  selected. 

In  addition,  mistakes  may  occasionally  be  made  when 
selecting  the  settings,  so  incorrect  transmissions  may  occur. 

When  a  program  is  used,  settings  are  selected  with  ease  by 
simply  pressing  the  stored  key. 

In  addition,  transmission  takes  place  based  on  the  stored 
settings  so  there  are  no  chances  for  mistakes. 

•  Programs  are  stored,  edited,  and  deleted  using  "Address  Control"  in  the  system  settings.  See  "Program"  (page 

④  7-19)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 

•  Programs  can  also  be  stored  in  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Job  Programs]  and  then  [Image  Send]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

•  The  settings  stored  in  a  program  will  be  retained  even  after  the  program  is  used  for  transmission.  The  same  settings  can 
be  used  repeatedly  for  transmission. 

•  The  following  settings  can  be  stored  in  programs. 

Image  send  mode:  Scan,  Internet  fax 
Destinations 

Image  settings:  Original  scan  size,  Image  orientation,  duplex  scanning,  exposure,  resolution 

Special  modes:  Erase,  Dual  Page  Scan,  Suppress  Background,  Job  Build,  Mixed  Size  Original,  Slow  Scan  Mode,  Original 
Count,  Verif.  Stamp,  2in1 

Preview 

•  Up  to  48  programs  can  be  stored. 

•  Up  to  500  destinations  can  be  stored  in  one  program. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  USB  memory  mode  or  data  entry  mode. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  in  the  document  feeder  tray  or  on  the  document  glass  as  appropriate  for  the  functions  stored  in  the  program. 


5-73 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Program]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


(1 

1)  (2) 

1 

Program 

^Program  2 

[program  3 

S]  \ Program  4 

Q| 丄 

("program  5 

设 J  [Program  6 

_ V) 

[Program  7 

q]  [ Program  8 

_  0 

[Program  9 

qJ  [program  10 

— ^  rn 

[program  11 

f  Program  12 

Retrieve  the  stored  program. 

(1)  Touch  the  desired  program  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


圉  Program: Prog] 
xxx@xx.xxx. cc 

"am  1 

)m 

[  Original ] Scan:  Send: 

f  Exposure  ] 

Send  Settings 

[ Resolution  ]  200X200dpi 

Address  Review 

f  File  Format  )  ^  PDF 

File 

\  Color  Mode  丨  Mono2 

Quick  File  | 

[ Special  Modes  j  |  [Tj|J 

_ 

Preview 

Select  additional  settings. 

When  a  program  is  used,  the  following  settings  can  be 
additionally  specified: 

•  Image  Settings:  Original  scan  size*,  send  size,  file  format, 

color  mode 

•  Send  settings 

•  Special  modes:  Timer  Transmission,  Card  Shot,  File,  Quick 

File,  Transaction  Report 

•  When  stored  in  the  program,  this  cannot  be  additionally 
specified. 


•  The  screen  that  appears  will  vary  depending  on  the  destination  stored  in  the  program. 

•  The  mode  cannot  be  changed  here. 

•  Functions  stored  in  the  program  cannot  be  canceled  here. 


Press  the  [START]  Key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


Contents 


5-74 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


ERASING  PERIPHERAL  SHADOWS  ON  THE 
IMAGE  (Erase) 

The  erase  function  is  used  to  erase  shadows  on  images  produced  when  scanning  thick  originals  or  books.  (This  function  erases 
the  parts  of  the  image  where  shadows  tend  to  form.  The  function  does  not  detect  shadows  and  erase  only  the  shadows.) 


Scanning  a  thick  book 


Erase  modes 


Not  using  the  erase 
function 


Using  the  erase 
function 


三 □ 


Shadows  appear  in  the 
image. 


No  shadows  appear. 


Edge  Erase  Center  Erase  Edge  +  Center  Erase  Side  Erase 

i=n|  「三 □ 


•  Shadows  at  the  edges  of  the  original  can  also  be  erased  when  the  automatic  document  feeder  is  used. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Erase]  key, 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-75 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(i) 


(2)  (3) 


Scan/Special  Modes 


1 


OK  | 


Edge  Center  Edge+Center 

Erase  Erase  Erase 

圍  ra 

(o~i) 

f  Side  Erase 

a  s h 

Select  the  erase  settings. 

(1) Touch  the  desired  erase  mode. 

Select  one  of  the  4  erase  modes. 

Touch  the  [Side  Erase]  key  to  open  the  following  screen. 


Erase 

Side  Erase 

_ 

Cancel  |(  OK  j 

□  U! 

) 

Erase  position 
for  Original  Side  2 

i 

LeftQ 

j~j  Right 

□Dc 

>wn 

[Different  Side 

1  from  Side  1 

Touch  the  checkbox  of  the  edge  that  you  wish  to  erase 
and  make  sure  that  a  checkmark  ([vj)  appears. 

When  performing  two-sided  scanning,  set  the  erase  edge 
on  the  reverse  side. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Same  Side  as  Side  1] key,  the  edge  in 
the  same  position  as  on  the  front  side  will  be  erased. 

•  If  you  touch  the  [Different  Side  from  Side  1], the  edge  in 
the  position  opposite  to  the  erased  edge  on  the  front 
side  will  be  erased. 

When  you  have  completed  the  settings,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

(2)  Set  the  erasure  width  with  the  00  keys, 

0"  to 1 11  (0  mm  to  20  mm)  can  be  entered. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  of  one  page  finishes,  replace  it  with  the  next  page  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have 
been  scanned  and  then  press  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


When  the  erase  function  is  used,  erase  takes  place  at  the  edges  of  the  original  image.  If  you  also  use  a  reduction  or  an 
enlargement  setting,  the  erase  width  will  change  according  to  the  selected  ratio.  For  example,  if  the  erase  width  setting  is  1 
(20  mm)  and  the  image  is  reduced  to  50%,  the  erase  width  will  be  1/2" (10  mm). 


@To  cancel  the  erase  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Erase  Width  Adjustment 

The  default  erase  width  setting  is  linked  to  the  copy  mode  system  setting,  and  can  be  set  from  0"  to 1 " (0  mm  to  20  mm).  The 
factory  default  setting  is  1/2" (10  mm). 


Contents 


5-76 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  AN  ORIGINAL  AS  TWO 
SEPARATE  PAGES  (Dual  Page  Scan) 

The  left  and  right  sides  of  an  original  can  be  scanned  as  two  separate  pages.  This  function  is  useful  when  you  wish  to 
successively  scan  each  page  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document. 

Example:  Scanning  the  left  and  right  pages  of  a  book 


Example: 


Original  scan  size 

Transmitted  image 

11nx17"  (A3)  x  1  page 

8-1/2Mx11M  (A4)  x  2  pages 

•  When  using  dual  page  scan,  the  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  The  send  size  cannot  be  changed. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 

Align  the  center  of  the  original  with  the  appropriate  size 
mark  ▼ . 


Size  mark 

r 

Centerline  of 
A3  original 


圔 


Centerline  of 
11" x  17"  original 


1^1 

r 

11"x  17" 

(A3) 

V. 

The  page  on  this 
side  is  scanned  first. 

Centerline  of  original 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Contents 


5-77 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(i) 


Scan/Special  Modes 


Program  j 

Erase 

i 

Timer 

Suppress 
|  Background 

( 

Job 

Build 


固 


Mixed  Size 
Original 


ffWl  Original 

I  Upa]  Count 


] I 


{G 


Slow  Scan 
Mode 


Select  Dual  Page  Scan. 

(1)  Press  the  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


© 


To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


© 


•  To  erase  shadows  caused  by  the  binding  of  a  book  or  other  bound  document,  use  the  erase  function.  (Note,  however,  that 
"Center  Erase"  and  "Edge  +  Center  Erase"  cannot  be  used.) 

•  When  the  scan  size  of  the  original  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  this  function  cannot  be  used. 

To  cancel  the  dual  page  scan  setting... 

Touch  the  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted,  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Contents 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


a a 


5-78 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  AN  IMAGE  AT  A  SPECIFIED  TIME 
(Timer  Transmission) 

This  function  lets  you  specify  a  time  at  which  a  transmission  or  broadcast  transmission  will  automatically  take  place. 
Transmission  begins  automatically  at  the  specified  time. 


take  place  at  20:00  begins  automatically 


•  When  a  timer  transmission  is  stored,  keep  the  main  power  switch  in  the  "on"  position.  If  the  main  power  switch  is  in  the  "off" 
position  at  the  specified  time,  transmission  will  not  take  place. 

•  When  performing  a  timer  transmission,  you  must  scan  the  original  into  memory  when  you  set  up  the  transmission.  It  is  not 
possible  to  leave  the  document  in  the  auto  document  feeder  or  on  the  document  glass  and  have  it  scanned  at  the  specified 
time  of  transmission. 


•  Settings  selected  for  a  timer  transmission  (exposure,  resolution,  special  modes,  etc.)  are  automatically  cleared  after  the 
transmission  is  finished.  (However,  when  the  document  filing  function  is  used,  the  scanned  original  and  settings  are  stored 
on  the  built-in  hard  drive.) 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  USB  memory  mode. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Timer]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


Contents 


5-79 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1)  (2)  (3) 


.Scan/Special  Modes 

® 

[ ^ ま] 

ITimer 

Cancel  j  f  OK 

Day  of  the  Week 

■ 

as 

Time 

IlfflL  鼠 

as  as 

Set  the  time  with  the  y  \j±]  keys. 

(1)  Specify  the  day. 

If  you  do  not  wish  to  specify  a  day,  select  [---].  In  this 
case,  transmission  will  begin  when  the  time  specified  in 
(2)  arrives. 

(2)  Specify  the  time  (hour,  minute) 

Select  the  time  in  24-hour  format. 

You  can  also  directly  touch  a  numeric  display  key  to 
change  the  setting  with  the  numeric  keys. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


When  this  screen  is  opened,  the  setting  will  show  the  current  time.  If  the  time  is  not  correct,  press  the  [CLEAR  ALL]  key 
(© )  to  cancel  the  operation.  Correct  the  time  in  the  system  settings  and  then  perform  the  timer  transmission  procedure. 
隊  CHECKING  THE  DATE  AND  TIME  (page  5-5) 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


The  original  is  scanned  into  memory.  The  original  cannot  be  scanned  at  a  specified  time. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  The  time  can  be  specified  up  to  a  week  in  advance. 

•  Up  to  94  timer  transmissions  can  be  stored  at  once. 

•If  another  transmission  is  in  progress  when  the  specified  time  arrives,  the  timer  transmission  will  begin  after  that 
transmission  is  finished. 


•  Other  transmissions  can  be  performed  as  usual  after  a  timer  transmission  is  stored. 

•A  timer  transmission  can  be  deleted  in  the  job  status  screen. 

•  If  a  timer  transmission  is  given  priority  in  the  job  status  screen,  the  time  specification  is  canceled.  The  transmission  will 
begin  as  soon  as  the  job  in  progress  is  completed. 

隊 GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  SCAN  TRANSMISSION  JOB  (page  5-108) 


@To  cancel  timer  transmission... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


Contents 


5-80 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


WHITENING  FAINT  COLORS  IN  THE  IMAGE 
(Suppress  Background) 

This  feature  is  used  to  suppress  light  background  areas. 


Level  [+] 


The  lightness  level  at  which 
suppression  takes  place 
can  be  adjusted. 


Level  [-] 


•  This  function  cannot  be  used  in  Internet  fax  mode. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Suppress  Background]  key. 

Read  the  message  that  appears  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key. 
隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-81 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1)  (2) 


Select  the  suppress  background  setting. 

(1)  Adjust  the  background  suppression  level. 

Touch  the  [+]  key  to  suppress  only  faint  background. 
Touch  the  [-]  key  to  suppress  faint  to  dark  background. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


When  the  original  is  scanned  in  [Mono2],  the  suppress  background  function  will  not  operate. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


@To  cancel  the  background  suppression  setting... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


5-82 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  BOTH  SIDES  OF  A  CARD  ONTO 
A  SINGLE  PAGE  (Card  Shot) 


This  function  lets  you  send  the  front  and  reverse  sides  of  a  card  as  a  single  page,  without  the  need  to  send  each  side 
separately. 


Originals 


Front 


Back 


Transmission 


Scanned  image 


Example  of  an  8-1/2"  x  1 1 ■■  (A4)  size  landscape  scan  transmission 
size  portrait  scan  transmission 


•  When  using  card  shot,  the  original  must  be  placed  on  the  document  glass. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  original  face  down  on  the 
document  glass. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Card  Shot]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


Contents 


5-83 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1)  (A)  (B)  (2) 


Scan/Special  Modes 

1 

Card  Shot 

Cancel 

OK  | 

S3 

SI  3 

OE 

Q 

%  (1 〜 8 1/2) 

^1(1-8 

3 

Fit  to 
Send  Size 

Size  Reset 

1 

Y 

X 

Specify  the  original  size. 

(1)  Enter  the  original  size. 

•  Touch  the  [X]  key  and  enter  the  horizontal  dimension 
(X)  of  the  original  with  the  3  Q  keys. 

•  Touch  the  [Y]  key  and  enter  the  vertical  dimension  (Y) 
of  the  original  with  the  Q  Q  keys. 

(A)  To  return  the  original  size  to  the  default  size,  touch  the 
[Size  Reset]  key. 

(B)  To  automatically  enlarge  or  reduce  the  image  to  fit  the 
send  size,  touch  the  [Fit  to  Send  Size]  key.  If  you  wish 
to  scan  the  original  at  the  entered  original  size,  there 
is  no  need  to  touch  this  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  The  send  size  will  be  selected  automatically  based  on  the  entered  original  size. 

•  After  selecting  Card  Shot,  you  can  touch  the  [Original]  key  in  the  base  screen  to  change  the  original  scan  size  or  the 
send  size.  In  this  case,  the  screen  of  this  step  appears  when  you  touch  the  scan  size  key.  For  the  procedure  for 
setting  the  send  size,  see  "Specifying  the  send  size  of  the  image"  (page  5-59). 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  front  side  of  the  card. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


Turn  the  card  over  and  Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  reverse  side  of  the 
card. 


Before  scanning  the  back  of  the  card,  you  can  touch  the  [Configure]  key  in  the  touch  panel  to  change  the  exposure. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


Contents 


5-84 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Place  next  original .  (Pg.N' 

Press  [Start] . 

When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


Contiaure  ^ 


等 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


If  you  will  continue  by  scanning  the  front  of  the  card,  you  can  touch  the  [Configure]  key  to  change  the  exposure, 
resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size. 


The  ratio  cannot  be  specified  and  "Rotation  Sending  Setting"  cannot  be  selected. 


@To  cancel  Card  Shot- 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 


5-85 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  MANY  ORIGINALS  AT  ONCE 
(Job  Build) 

This  function  lets  you  separate  an  original  consisting  of  numerous  pages  into  sets,  scan  each  set  using  the  automatic 
document  feeder,  and  transmit  the  pages  in  a  single  transmission.  Use  this  function  when  the  number  of  originals  that 
you  wish  to  scan  exceeds  the  maximum  number  of  sheets  that  can  be  inserted  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  at 
once. 

When  scanning  originals  that  are  separated  into  sets,  scan  the  set  that  has  the  first  page  first.  The  settings  that  you 
select  for  the  first  set  can  be  used  for  all  remaining  sets. 


Originals  Originals  are 


•  Up  to  999  pages  can  be  scanned.  Note  that  when  the  memory  is  being  used  for  other  jobs,  fewer  pages  can  be  scanned. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-86 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  job  build  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key  to  scan  the  first  set  of  originals. 


To  cancel  scanning... 


Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


Insert  the  next  set  of  originals  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  originals  have  been  scanned. 


To  cancel  scanning... 


Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation.  All  scanned  data  will  be  cleared. 


Touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 


Place  next  original .  (Pg.N> 

Press  [Start] . 

When  finished,  press  [Read-End] . 


Conticrure  \ 


等 


If  no  action  is  taken  for  one  minute  after  the  confirmation  screen  appears,  scanning  automatically  ends  and  the 
transmission  is  reserved. 

The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan  size,  and  send  size  for  each  original 
page  scanned.  However,  when  Job  Build  is  used  in  combination  with  M2in1M  in  the  special  modes,  only  the  exposure 
can  be  changed  when  scanning  each  even-numbered  page  of  the  original  pages. 


If  the  memory  becomes  full  during  scanning,  a  message  will  appear  and  the  transmission  will  be  canceled. 


© 


To  cancel  the  job  build  function.... 

Touch  the  [Job  Build]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


Contents 


一 M a 


5-87 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  ORIGINALS  OF  DIFFERENT 
SIZES  (Mixed  Size  Original) 


This  feature  lets  you  scan  originals  of  different  sizes  at  the  same  time;  for  example,  8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  size  originals 
mixed  together  with  11" x  17"  (A3)  size  originals.  When  scanning  the  originals,  the  machine  automatically  detects  the 
size  of  each  original. 


Originals 

(8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  original  mixed 
in  with  11"x  17"  (A3)  originals) 


Files  created 


1st  page 


8-1/2"  x14M 

Scanned  in  at 
8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4) 
size 


2nd  to  4th  pages 


irxi7" 


Scanned  in  at 
11nx  17"  (A3) 
size 


This  feature  can  only  be  used  with  the  following  combinations  of  original  sizes: 

• 11" x  17"  and  8-1/2"  x  14"  •11"  x17"  and  8-1/2"  x  13"  • 11" x  17"  and  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2" 

•A3  and  B4  •  A3  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4  •  A4  and  B5 


•  A4R  and  B5  •  B4  and  A4R  •  B4  and  A5  •  B5  and  A5 


When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Place  the  originals  with 
the  corners  aligned 
together  in  the  far  left 
corner.  _ 


11Mx17M  (A3) ― 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  with  the  corners  aligned  together  in  the  far 
left  corner  of  the  document  feeder  tray. 


Specify  the  destination. 

瞭  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-88 


Contents 


(1) 


Scan/Special  Modes 


m 


Program  j 

Erase 

Timer 

[  Suppress 
|  Background 

£ 


Job 

Build 


Slow  Scan 
Mode 


\m  Original ] 

(L-S  Count  | 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  the  mixed  size  original  setting. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  so  that 
it  is  highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


If  an  original  scan  size  has  been  specified,  a  message  will  appear  when  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  is  touched.  To 
enable  the  Mixed  Size  Original  setting,  change  the  scan  size  setting  to  auto  and  then  touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original] 
key  again. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


To  cancel  scanning... 


Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


(g) : 


Once  mixed  size  originals  has  been  selected,  an  original  scan  size  cannot  be  specified. 

When  mixed  size  originals  are  set,  automatic  duplex  scanning  cannot  be  used.  (When  using  the  MX-M283N.) 
Rotate  cannot  be  used  when  Mixed  Size  Original  is  enabled. 


© 


To  cancel  the  Mixed  Size  Original  setting... 

Touch  the  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

The  original  feeding  mode  can  be  set  to  always  scan  mixed  size  originals. 


Contents 


13 a 


5-89 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  THIN  ORIGINALS 
(Slow  Scan  Mode) 

Use  this  function  when  you  wish  to  scan  thin  originals  using  the  automatic  document  feeder.  This  function  helps  prevent 
thin  originals  from  misfeeding. 


When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Adjust  the  original  guides  slowly. 


If  the  originals  are  inserted  with  too  much  force,  they  may  crumple  and  misfeed. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-90 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  slow  scan  mode. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  When  this  function  is  selected,  automatic  2-sided  scanning  is  not  possible. 

•  Rotate  cannot  be  used  when  Mixed  Size  Original  is  enabled. 


© 


To  cancel  slow  scan  mode... 

Touch  the  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 

System  Settings  (Administrator):  Original  Feeding  Mode 

This  is  used  to  have  scanning  always  take  place  in  slow  scan  mode. 


Contents 


5-91 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(i) 


Scan/Special  Modes 


a 


] 匾 


Dual  Page  | 
Scan  I 


Suppress 

Background 


Job 

Build 


Mixed  Size  | 

REf1  Original  141 ^ 


つ  Slow  Scan 
Mode 


i、n  zi i 


Select  the  original  count  function. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Contents 


CHECKING  THE  NUMBER  OF  SCANNED 
ORIGINAL  SHEETS  BEFORE  TRANSMISSION 
(Original  Count) 

The  number  of  scanned  original  sheets  can  be  counted  and  displayed  before  transmission.  Checking  the  number  of 
scanned  original  sheets  before  transmission  helps  prevent  transmission  mistakes. 


®  : 


This  function  cannot  be  used  in  USB  memory  mode. 
The  setting  can  be  enabled  separately  for  each  mode. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 

Insert  the  originals  all  the  way  into  the  document  feeder  tray. 
Multiple  originals  can  be  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray. 
The  stack  of  originals  must  not  be  higher  than  the  indicator  line 
on  the  tray. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


Select  the  special  modes. 

(1)  Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


B a 


5-92 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

/^\  To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation.  All  scanned  data  will  be  cleared. 

(A)  (B) 

I  I 

When  scanning  ends,  check  the  number 
of  original  sheets  scanned  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key. 

Transmission  will  begin. 

•  When  Job  Build  mode  is  used,  the  confirmation  message  will 
appear  after  the  [Read-End]  key  is  touched. 

r  i  r% 

1  XX  J ages  of  original  have  been  scanned.  1  (P.x)l 

oeiid.  the  scanned  data? 

1  Cancel  |  f  OK  | 

•  The  message  on  the  screen  shows  the  number  of  sheets 
scanned  in  (A),  and  the  number  of  pages  (sheet  sides) 
scanned  in  (B).  For  example,  if  both  sides  of  one  original 
sheet  are  scanned, "1" will  appear  in  (A)  and  "2"  will  appear 
in  (B). 

© 


If  this  step  is  not  performed  for  one  minute  while  the  above  confirmation  screen  appears,  the  scanned  image  and 
settings  will  be  cleared  and  the  base  screen  will  reappear.  Scanning  will  not  be  completed  automatically  and  the 
image  will  not  be  reserved  for  transmission. 

If  the  displayed  number  of  original  sheets  is  different  from  the  actual  number  of  sheets... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  and  then  touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  message  screen  to  clear  all  scanned  data.  Scan  settings 
and  destination  settings  will  not  be  cleared.  Insert  the  original  sheets  in  the  automatic  document  feeder  again  and 
press  the  [START]  key  to  re-scan. 


When  a  broadcast  transmission  is  performed,  if  the  original  count  function  is  selected  in  any  of  the  modes,  the  function  will 
operate  for  all  destinations. 


@To  cancel  the  Original  Sheet  Count  function... 

Touch  the  [Original  Count]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Initial  Original  Count  Setting 

This  can  be  enabled  to  have  the  number  of  original  sheets  always  counted.  The  setting  can  be  enabled  separately  for  each 
mode. 


Contents 


5-93 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


STAMPING  SCANNED  ORIGINALS  (Verif.  Stamp) 

This  function  stamps  each  original  that  is  scanned  using  the  automatic  document  feeder, allowing  you  to  verify  that  all 
originals  were  correctly  scanned. 

Position  of  stamp 


An  "O"  mark  is 
stamped 
in  fluorescent 
pink. 


•  To  use  this  function,  the  optional  stamp  unit  must  be  installed. 

•  When  using  USB  memory  mode,  connect  the  USB  memory  device  to  the  machine  before  performing  the  procedure  below. 


Insert  the  originals  face  up  in  the 
document  feeder  tray. 


Specify  the  destination. 

隊  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


When  scanning  to  USB  memory,  there  is  no  need  to  specify  the  destination.  Go  to  step  3. 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  tab  of  the  mode  that  you  wish  to  use. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

暖  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


5-94 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  "Verif.  Stamp". 

(1)  Touch  the  [±}±\  keys  to  switch  through  the 
screens. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Verif.  Stamp]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins.  A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®)  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  When  two-sided  originals  are  used,  the  front  of  each  original  is  stamped  twice.  (MX-M283N  only) 

•  If  an  error  occurs  during  scanning,  an  original  that  was  not  scanned  may  be  stamped. 

•  When  the  ■■〇 ■■  mark  that  is  stamped  on  originals  starts  to  become  faint,  replace  the  stamp  cartridge.  For  the  procedure  for 
replacing  the  stamp  cartridge,  see  "REPLACING  THE  STAMP  CARTRIDGE11  (page  1-68)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE 
MACHINE11. 


@To  cancel  the  stamp  function... 

Touch  the  [Verif.  Stamp]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Default  Verification  Stamp 

This  setting  is  used  to  always  have  originals  stamped. 


Contents 


5-95 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SENDING  TWO  PAGES  AS  A  SINGLE  PAGE 
(2in1) 

Two  original  pages  can  be  reduced  to  half  their  original  size  and  sent  together  as  a  single  page. 

Portrait-oriented  originals 

Transmission  _ 


Landscape-oriented  originals 


Transmission 


This  function  cannot  be  used  in  scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  or  data  entry  mode. 


Place  the  original. 

When  placing  the  originals,  orient  them  as  shown  below. 


© 


Originals 


Document  feeder  tray 

Place  the  originals  face  up. 


Document  glass 

Place  the  originals  face  down. 


Portrait  orientation 


T^T 


] 議:。 


Specify  the  destination. 

暖  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 


5-96 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Select  2in1. 

(1)  Touch  the  [2in1]  key  so  that  it  is 
highlighted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 


Scan 

Internet  Fax  Fax  f  USB  Mem.  Scan  丨  PC  Scan 

1  ►Address  Book 

f  Original  J  Scan:  Send: 

\  Address  Entry 

f  Send  Settings 

「  Resolution  ]  200Xl00dpi 

^Address  Review 

f  File  Format  j  TIFF-F 

Fill: 

f  Special  Modes  j  |  Q 

Quick  File 

Preview 

I  I  ェ -Fax  Manual 1 

|  W  l  [  Reception  J 

Touch  the  [Original]  key. 


Internet  Fax/Original 


(2) 

^3 


Scan_Size _  100%  Send  Size  _ 

I  Auto  8^x11  ^  岭  I  Auto 


Specify  the  orientation  in  which  the 
original  is  placed. 

(1)  Touch  the  "Image  Orientation"  key  with  the 
same  orientation  as  the  original  image. 

If  this  setting  is  not  correct,  a  suitable  image  may  not  be 
transmitted. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Contents 


B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Internet  Fax]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


11 l> .l a 


5-97 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


The  [Configure]  key  can  be  touched  in  the  scan-end  confirmation  screen  to  change  the  exposure,  resolution,  scan 
size,  and  send  size.  (However,  when  scanning  each  even-numbered  page  of  the  original,  only  the  exposure  can  be 
changed.) 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


•  Transmission  is  not  possible  at  a  size  smaller  than  the  original  size. 

•  The  2in1  function  cannot  be  used  when  the  original  is  other  than  8-1/2"  x  1 1"  or  5-1/2"  x  8-1/2"  (A4,  B5,  or  A5)  size. 

•  When  the  scan  size  of  the  original  is  specified  by  numerical  values,  this  function  cannot  be  used. 


@To  cancel  2in1... 

Touch  the  [2in1]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted. 


5-98 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHANGING  THE  PRINT  SETTINGS  FOR  THE 
TRANSACTION  REPORT 
(Transaction  Report) 

A  transaction  report  is  automatically  printed  out  to  alert  you  when  an  Internet  fax  transmission  fails  or  when  a  broadcast 
transmission  is  performed.  The  transaction  report  contains  a  description  of  the  transmission  (date,  start  time,  name  of 
other  party,  time  required,  number  of  pages,  result,  etc.). 

隊  INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE  RESULT  COLUMN  (page  5-109) 


This  function  cannot  be  used  in  scan  mode,  USB  memory  mode,  or  data  entry  mode. 


Transaction  reports  are  printed  based  on  conditions  set  in  the  system  settings;  however,  you  can  temporarily  select 
different  conditions  for  a  transmission.  To  change  the  transaction  report  print  conditions  at  the  time  of  transmission, 
follow  the  steps  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face  down  on  the  document  glass. 


B  Specify  the  destination. 

暖  ENTERING  DESTINATIONS  (page  5-18) 

B  Select  the  special  modes. 

(1) Touch  the  [Internet  Fax]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Special  Modes]  key. 

(3)  Touch  the  [£)  S  keys  to  switch  through  the  screens. 

(4)  Touch  the  [Transaction  Report]  key. 

隊  SPECIAL  MODES  (page  5-71) 


(1)  (2) 


1 _ 

Internet  Fax/Special  Modes 

I - OK  — ) 

Transaction  Report 

Cancel  ][  OK 

Print  at  Error  |  Do  not  Print 

Print  Original  Image 

Select  print  conditions. 

(1)  Select  the  print  conditions. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  The  print  conditions  for  a  transaction  report  are  as  follows: 

"Always  Print":  A  transaction  report  is  printed  no  matter  whether  the  transmission  succeeds  or  fails. 

"Print  at  Error":  A  transaction  report  is  printed  when  transmission  fails. 

"Do  not  Print":  Do  not  print  a  transaction  report. 

•  When  the  [Print  Original  Image]  checkbox  is  selected  ^},  part  of  the  transmitted  original  is  included  on  the 
transaction  report. 


Contents 


5-99 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 

•  If  you  are  scanning  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  finishes,  place  the  next  original  and  press  the  [START]  key.  Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and 
then  touch  the  [Read-End]  key. 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  scanning  is  finished. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§))  to  cancel  the  operation. 


For  a  broadcast  transmission,  changes  to  the  transaction  report  print  conditions  apply  to  all  destinations. 

广、 To  cancel  the  transaction  report  setting... 

\3 /  Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  4. 

/^\  •  System  Settings  (Administi 

This  is  used  to  set  the  conditi 
The  factory  default  setting  is 
Single  Sending:  Print  Out  A 
Broadcastina:  | Print  Out/ 

Receiving:  Print  Out  A 

•  System  Settings  (Administi 

This  is  used  to  have  part  of  th 

^ator):  Tr 

ons  for  pi 

ansaction  Report  Print  Select  Setting 

rinting  transaction  reports. 

1. 

1  I 

II  Report/I  Print  Out  Error  Report  Only  |/No  Printed  Report 

VII  Report  /Print  Out  Error  Report  Only/No  Printed  Report 

II  ReDort/Print  Out  Error  Report  Onlv/lNo  Printed  Report  | 

^ator):  Original  Print  on  Transaction  Report 

le  transmitted  original  printed  on  the  transaction  report. 

5-100 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


j  益  Print  Job  J  Scan  to  1 Fax  Job  |  扮 
Address  Set  Time  Pages  : Status 


JOB  STATUS  SCREEN 


The  job  status  screen  is  displayed  when  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  on  the  operation  panel  is  pressed.  The  job  status 
screen  shows  the  status  of  jobs  by  mode.  When  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key  is  pressed,  the  job  status  screen  of  the  mode 
that  was  being  used  before  the  key  was  pressed  appears. 

Reserved  transmissions  and  received  Internet  faxes  are  referred  to  as  jobs  here. 


Example:  Pressing  the  tab  in  scan  mode 


JOB  STATUS 


The  job  status  display  is  in  the  lower  left  corner  of  the  touch  panel.  The  job  status  display  can  be  touched  to  display  the  job 
status  screen. 


j 

( 

1 

I 

Scan 

Internet  Fax  |  Fax  I  USB  Mem.  Scan  j  PC  Scan 

►Address  Book 

[  Original  j  Scan:  Send: 

Address  Entry 

[ Exposure  |  ■ 

Send  Settings 

f  Resolution  |  200X200dpi 

1 

i 

! 

1 

Address  Review 

[ File  Format  j  J  PDF 

File 

f  Color  Mode  j  j-P  Mono2 

Quick  File 

[ Special  Modes  ] 

Preview 

Contents 


CHECKING  THE  STATUS  OF 
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION  JOBS 


This  section  explains  how  to  check  the  status  of  reserved  transmission  jobs  and  received  Internet  faxes. 


T 


_ 

Detai 

1  1 

lP] 

1  Sto 

riori 

p/De 

Lty  | 
lete| 

S IT I 


5-101 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1)  Mode  switch  tabs 

Use  these  tabs  to  change  the  job  status  screen  mode. 

(2)  Job  status  screen  selector  key 

Touch  this  key  to  switch  between  the  job  queue  screen 
and  the  completed  jobs  screen. 

(3)  Job  queue  screen  [Detail]  key 

This  shows  detailed  information  on  broadcast 
transmission  jobs  and  the  status  of  jobs.  Select  the  key  of 
the  desired  job  in  the  job  queue  screen  (6)  and  then 
touch  the  [Detail]  key. 

(4)  [Priority]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  give  priority  to  a  selected  job. 

^  GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  SCAN  TRANSMISSION 
JOB  (page  5-108) 

(5)  [Stop/Delete]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  stop  or  delete  a  selected  job. 

^  STOPPING  A  SCAN  JOB  BEING  TRANSMITTED 
OR  WAITING  TO  BE  TRANSMITTED  (page  5-107) 


(7; 


(8: 


5-102 


JOB  QUEUE  SCREEN  AND  COMPLETED  JOB  SCREEN 

The  job  status  screen  consists  of  two  screens:  the  job  queue  screen  that  shows  reserved  jobs  and  the  job  currently  in 
progress,  and  the  completed  jobs  screen.  To  switch  between  the  two  screens,  touch  the  job  status  screen  selector  key 
((2)  below). 


Job  queue  screen 


Complete  screen 


(1) 


(1) 


-I 


^  Print  Job  I  ^  Scan  to  Fax  Job  丨皮  Internet  Fax  ■ 


I  Job  queue  screen 

Jobs  are  shown  as  keys  in  the  order  they  were  reserved. 
Each  key  shows  information  on  the  job  and  its  current 
status. 

隊  Job  key  display  (page  5-103) 

I  Completed  jobs  screen  [Detail]  key 

This  shows  detailed  information  on  the  results  of 
completed  broadcast  transmissions  and  jobs  that  used 
the  document  filing  function.  Select  the  key  of  the  desired 
job  in  the  completed  jobs  screen  (9)  and  then  touch  the 
[Detail]  key. 

隊  CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS  (page  5-106) 

|  [Call]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  call  up  and  use  a  transmission  or 
reception  job  stored  with  the  document  filing  function. 

) Completed  jobs  screen 

This  shows  up  to  99  completed  transmission  or  reception 
jobs  in  each  mode.  A  description  of  the  job  and  the  result 
(status)  are  shown. 

Jobs  that  used  document  filing  function,  broadcast 
transmission  jobs,  and  received  Internet  fax  forwarding 
jobs  are  indicated  as  keys. 


Contents 


3  4  5 

/V 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Job  key  display 

The  following  information  is  shown  in  the  job  queue  keys  and  completed  job  keys  that  appear  in  the  job  status  screen. 
Direct  SMTP  information  is  also  included  in  Internet  fax  transmission/reception  information. 


1^1^: 

(1) (2) 


AAA 

10:22  04/01 

000/004 

Waiting 

T  I 

⑶  W 

1 

(5) 

T 

(6) 

(1)  Displays  the  number  (position)  of  the  job  in  the  job  queue. 

When  the  job  currently  being  transmitted  is  finished,  the 
job  moves  up  one  position  in  the  job  queue. 

This  number  does  not  appear  in  keys  in  the  completed 
jobs  screen. 

(2)  Mode  icon 

This  indicates  the  type  of  job.  In  the  completed  jobs 
screen,  a  color  bar  appears  next  to  the  icon  to  indicate 
whether  the  job  was  executed  in  color  or  black  &  white. 
(However,  the  color  bar  icon  does  not  appear  in  the  key 
of  a  job  that  used  document  filing  or  in  the  key  of  a 
transmission/reception  job  that  was  canceled.) 


Icon 

Job  type 

eT 

Scan  to  E-mail 

Scan  to  FTP 

Scan  to  Network  Folder 

■P 

Scan  to  Desktop 

& 

Internet  fax  transmission 

6 

Internet  fax  reception 

PC-l-Fax  transmission 

Broadcast  transmission  or  Inbound 
routing 

,1 

Metadata  transmission 

(3)  Name  of  communicating  party  (address) 

For  a  transmission,  the  name  or  address  of  the  destination. 
For  a  reception,  the  address  of  the  sending  party. 

In  the  case  of  a  broadcast  transmission,  "Broadcast" 
appears  together  with  a  broadcast  control  number 
(4-digits). 


(4)  Time  reserved/Time  started 

In  the  job  queue  screen,  the  date  and  time  the  job  was 
reserved.  In  the  completed  jobs  screen,  the  date  and 
time  the  job  was  started. 

(5)  Number  of  pages 

Shows  the  number  of  pages  transmitted/total  number  of 
original  pages. 

(6)  Status 

Shows  the  job  status. 

•  Job  in  progress 


Display 

Status 

"Connecting" 

Connecting  to  the  destination. 

"Sending" 

Sending  data. 

■■Receiving" 

Receiving  an  Internet  fax. 

"Stopped" 

The  job  has  been  stopped. 

■■Error" 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed. 

•  Job  waiting  to  be  executed 


Display 

Status 

"Waiting11 

The  job  is  waiting  to  be  executed. 

"Retry  Mode11 

The  job  is  being  re-attempted  due 
to  a  communication  error  or  other 
problem. 

"Report  Wait11 

An  Internet  fax  has  been  sent  for 
which  a  receive  report  was 
requested,  and  the  machine  is 
waiting  for  the  receive  report. 

A  day  and 
time  is 
displayed 

Timer  transmission  job  (the 
specified  time  is  displayed) 

5-103 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


•  Completed  job 


Display 

Status 

"Send  OK11 

Transmission  was  completed. 

"In  Memory" 

An  Internet  fax  has  been  received 
but  has  not  yet  been  printed. 

"Received11 

Printed  received  fax  data. 

"Forward  OK" 

A  received  Internet  fax  has  been 

forwarded. 

"Stopped" 

The  job  was  stopped. 

"Delete" 

Deleted  received  data  in  the  image 
check  screen. 

"Number  of 

successful 

transmission 

destinations/ 

Total 

destinations 

OK11 

Completion  of  a  broadcast 
transmission  or  inbound  routing 
operation. 

If  transmission  to  3  destinations 
was  successful  out  of  a  total  of  5, 
■■003/005  OK11  will  appear. 

"No 

Response" 

An  error  occurred  because  there 
was  no  response  from  the 
destination. 

■■OK  Report11 

A  receive  report  was  requested  for 
a  transmission,  the  transmission 
was  completed  normally,  and  the 
receive  report  was  received  from 
the  destination. 

MNG  Report11 

A  receive  report  was  requested  for 
a  transmission,  however,  the 
transmission  did  not  take  place 
correctly  and  a  transmission  failed 
report  was  received. 

__No  Report" 

An  e-mail  was  received  without  an 
attached  file  and  thus  printing  was 
not  possible. 

"Received11 

An  e-mail  was  received,  however, 
the  attached  file  was  not  a  TIFF-F 
file  or  there  was  no  attached  file, 
and  thus  printing  was  not  possible. 

"Rejected" 

An  Internet  fax  was  sent  from  a 
party  that  is  blocked. 

"NGxxxxxx" 

Transmission/reception  was  not 
successful  because  a 
communication  error  occurred  (a 
6-digit  error  code  appears  in 
xxxxxx.) 

■■Error" 

An  error  occurred  while  the  job  was 
being  executed. 

5-104 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


OPERATION  WHEN  A  JOB  IN  THE  JOB  QUEUE  IS 
COMPLETED 

When  a  normal  transmission  job  is  completed,  it  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "Send  OK"  appears  in  the 
status  column. 

Received  Internet  faxes,  timer  transmission  jobs,  and  forwarding  jobs  are  handled  in  the  job  status  screen  as  explained 
below. 

Internet  fax  reception  jobs 

While  an  Internet  fax  is  being  received,  "Receiving"  appears. 

When  reception  is  completed,  the  job  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "In  Memory"  appears. 

When  printing  ends,  the  status  changes  to  "Printed"  and  the  job  is  completed. 

Timer  transmission  jobs 

A  timer  transmission  job  appears  at  the  bottom  of  the  job  queue  until  the  specified  time  arrives. 

When  the  specified  time  arrives,  the  job  is  executed.  If  another  job  is  in  progress,  the  timer  job  is  started  when  the  other 
job  is  completed. 

Internet  fax  transmission  jobs  that  request  a  receive  report 

After  completion  of  an  Internet  fax  transmission  job  (excluding  Direct  SMTP  transmission  jobs)  that  requests  a  receive 
report,  the  job  is  placed  on  standby  at  the  bottom  of  the  job  queue  screen.  "Report  Wait"  appears  in  the  status  column. 
When  the  receive  report  is  received  from  the  destination,  or  if  the  report  is  not  received  within  the  timeout  time,  the  job 
moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen. 

Reception  jobs  when  "Inbound  Routing  Settings"  are  enabled 

When  "Inbound  Routing  Settings"  are  enabled,  reception  jobs  are  handled  as  follows  depending  on  the  print  setting. 

隊  FORWARDING  RECEIVED  INTERNET  FAXES  TO  A  NETWORK  ADDRESS  (Inbound  Routing  Settings)  (page  5-115) 

•  Received  Internet  fax  is  not  printed 

"Receiving"  appears  while  the  Internet  fax  is  being  received.  When  reception  is  completed,  the  job  moves  to  the  job 
queue  of  the  job  status  screen  of  scan  mode. 


•  Received  Internet  fax  is  printed 

When  reception  is  completed,  the  job  moves  to  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  "In  Memory"  appears.  When  printing 
ends,  the  status  changes  to  "Printed"  and  the  job  is  completed.  In  addition,  the  job  is  added  to  the  job  queue  of  the  job 
status  screen  of  scan  mode.  When  forwarding  received  Internet  faxes  is  finished,  "Forward  OK"  appears. 


5-105 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHECKING  COMPLETED  JOBS 

You  can  check  a  list  of  the  destinations,  the  destinations  for  which  transmission  failed,  and  other  detailed  information  on 
completed  jobs  that  used  document  filing  function,  broadcast  transmission  jobs,  and  received  Internet  fax  forwarding 
jobs.  Touch  the  key  of  the  job  for  which  you  wish  to  display  information  in  the  completed  jobs  screen  and  touch  the 
[Detail]  key.  The  job  detail  screen  (see  below)  will  appear. 


Detail 

1  0K  1 

^  BroadcastOOOl 

Address 

Start  Time  Status  丨  Retry  ] 

002  eT  EEE  EEE 

10:01  04/01  NG000000  1 

010  FFF  FFF 

1 

10:10  04/01  NG000000 

— 1 丄 1 

E 

Pile 

Failed  f  All  Destinations  j 

The  job  name  appears  at  the  top  of  the  job  detail  screen. 

To  view  details  on  the  job,  touch  one  of  the  tabs.  The  following  information  appears  on  each  tab. 


Tab  name 

Information  displayed 

File 

Shows  information  on  a  transmission/reception  that  used  document  filing  function. 

To  call  up  the  file  and  use  it,  touch  the  [Call]  key. 

Failed 

Shows  information  on  addresses  for  which  communication  failed. 

Address:  Address  name  or  number 

Start  time:  Time  at  which  communication  began. 

Status:  Description  of  failure  (error) 

The  [Retry]  key  can  be  touched  to  re-attempt  transmission  to  that  address.* 

All  Destinations 

Shows  all  addresses  specified  in  the  job. 

Address:  Address  name  or  number 

Start  time:  Time  at  which  communication  began. 

Status:  Communication  result 

The  [Retry]  key  can  be  touched  to  transmit  to  all  addresses  again.* 

Recalling  is  not  possible  for  a  broadcast  transmission  that  includes  a  Scan  to  FTP  address,  Scan  to  Network  Folder 
address,  or  Scan  to  Desktop  address. 


5-106 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


STOPPING  A  SCAN  JOB  BEING 
TRANSMITTED  OR  WAITING  TO  BE 
TRANSMITTED 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  stop  a  job  that  is  being  transmitted  or  is  waiting  to  be  transmitted. 


JOB  STATUS 

/  \ 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


(i) 


(i) 


|  蟲  Print  Job  j  Scan  to  |  Fax  Job  [  ^  Internet  Fax] 

Address  Time  Parrp.Q  : 

1 •,想  Broadcast  10:00  04/01  020/003  : Connecting  ] 

1 

1 丄 

1  1 
im 

Complete 

:2 ゴ  AAA  AAA  10:05  04/01  000/001  Waiting 

3  ^  BBB  BBB  10:22  04/01  1000/004  Waiting 

a 


)p/Delete| 

-I- 


Select  the  job  that  you  wish  to  stop. 

(1)  Touch  the  mode  tab  of  the  job  to  be 
stopped. 

(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  job  to  be  stopped. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Stop/Delete]  key. 


A  Delete  the  job? 

eT ccc  CCC  10:31  04/01 


No 


If  you  do  not  want  to  stop  the  selected  job... 

Touch  the  [No]  key. 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 


Printing  of  a  received  Internet  fax  cannot  be  stopped. 


Contents 


5-107 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


GIVING  PRIORITY  TO  A  SCAN 
TRANSMISSION  JOB 

When  multiple  jobs  are  waiting  to  be  transmitted,  the  jobs  are  normally  transmitted  in  the  order  they  were  reserved.  If 
you  need  to  give  priority  to  a  job  and  send  it  ahead  of  the  other  jobs,  follow  the  steps  below. 


JOB  STATUS 


Press  the  [JOB  STATUS]  key. 


(i) 


(i) 


1 蟲  Print  Job  1  由 

Scan  to  |  tP  Fax  Job  j  ^  Interne 

;t  Fax] 

Address 

Set  Time  Pages  : Status 

[ 1 •激  Broadcast 

10:00  04/01  1020/003  : Connecting  ) 

1 

2 ゴ  AAA  AAA 

10:05  04/01  000/001  Waiting 

1 丄 

令 

Complete 

[3 ゴ  BBB  BBB 

10:22  04/01  1000/004  Waiting 

1  1 

IS 

S' 

[ Detail ] 

|  Priority  j 

f  Stop/Delete] 

(2) ⑶ 


Select  the  job  to  which  you  wish  to  give 
priority. 

(1)  Touch  the  mode  tab  of  the  job  to  be  given 
priority. 

(2)  Touch  the  key  of  the  job  to  be  given  priority. 

(3)  Touch  the  [Priority]  key. 

The  selected  job  moves  up  to  the  position  immediately 
following  the  job  in  progress.  The  job  will  be  executed 
when  the  job  in  progress  is  completed. 


5-108 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHECKING  THE  INTERNET  FAX  ACTIVITY 
LOG  (Image  Sending  Activity  Report) 

IMAGE  SENDING  ACTIVITY  REPORT 

You  can  have  the  machine  print  a  log  of  recent  image  sending  activity  (date,  name  of  other  party,  time  required,  result, 
etc.).  The  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  contains  useful  information  such  as  the  types  of  errors  that  occurred. 

The  most  recent  200  transactions  are  included  in  the  report. 

You  can  have  the  machine  print  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  each  time  the  number  of  transactions  reaches  201, 
or  at  a  specified  time  (once  a  day  only). 


The  contents  of  the  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  are  erased  when  the  report  is  printed,  and  thus  it  cannot  be  reprinted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Activity  Report  Print  Select  Setting 

This  is  used  to  set  the  conditions  for  printing  activity  reports.  The  factory  default  setting  is  not  to  print. 

The  Image  Sending  Activity  Report  can  be  set  to  print  each  time  the  number  of  transactions  reaches  201 ,  or  at  a  specified 
time  (once  a  day  only). 


INFORMATION  APPEARING  IN  THE  RESULT  COLUMN 


Error  types  and  other  information  are  printed  in  the  result  column  of  transaction  and  activity  reports.  When  a  transaction 
report  or  activity  report  is  printed,  check  the  result  of  the  transaction  in  the  result  column  and  take  action  as  needed. 

Examples  of  messages  that  are  printed  in  the  result  column 


Message 

Explanation 

OK 

The  transaction  was  completed  normally. 

OK  REPORT 

A  receive  report  was  requested  for  a  transmission,  the  transmission  was  completed  normally,  and 
the  receive  report  was  received  from  the  destination. 

CANCEL 

A  transmission  was  stopped  while  in  progress,  or  a  reserved  transmission  job  was  canceled. 

MEM.  FULL 

The  memory  became  full  during  reception. 

REJECTED 

An  Internet  fax  was  sent  from  a  party  that  is  blocked. 

NG  REPORT 

A  receive  report  was  requested  for  a  transmission,  however,  the  transmission  did  not  take  place 
correctly  and  a  transmission  failed  report  was  received. 

NO  REPORT 

A  receive  report  was  requested  for  a  transmission,  however,  a  report  was  not  received  within  the 
timeout  time. 

NG  LIMIT 

Transmission  was  not  possible  because  the  file  size  exceeded  the  machine's  file  size  limit  setting. 

RECEIVED 

An  e-mail  was  received,  however,  the  attached  file  was  not  a  TIFF-F  file  or  there  was  no  attached 
file,  and  thus  printing  was  not  possible. 

FAIL  xx  (xxxx) 

The  transaction  failed  due  to  a  communication  error. 

First  2  digits  of  communication  error  number:  Error  code  from  00  to  99. 

Last  4  digits  of  communication  error  number:  Code  for  use  by  service  technicians. 

5-109 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


INTERNET  FAX  RECEPTION  FUNCTIONS 


This  section  explains  the  basic  procedures  for  receiving  Internet  faxes. 


RECEIVING  AN  INTERNET  FAX 


The  Internet  fax  function  periodically*  connects  to  the  mail  server  (POP3  server)  and  checks  whether  or  not  Internet 
faxes  have  been  received.  When  faxes  have  been  received,  the  faxes  are  automatically  retrieved  and  printed. 

*  The  default  setting  is  once  every  5  minutes. 


If  faxes  will  be  received  at  night,  keep  the  main  power  switch  in  the  "on"  position. 


Internet  faxes  are  received  automatically. 

A  beep  sounds  when  reception  ends. 


The  faxes  are  printed  automatically. 


If  the  machine  is  out  of  paper  or  there  is  no  paper  that  matches  the  size  of  the  received  fax,  a  message  will  appear  in  the 
touch  panel.  Follow  the  instructions  in  the  message  to  load  an  appropriate  size  of  paper. 


•  System  Settings:  Fax  Data  Receive/Forward  (page  7-20) 

When  printing  is  not  possible  because  the  machine  has  run  out  of  paper  or  toner,  received  Internet  faxes  can  be  forwarded 
to  and  printed  by  another  previously  stored  Internet  fax  machine. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  1-Fax  Default  Settings 

These  settings  are  used  to  select  how  received  faxes  are  handled  when  the  [POWER]  key  (@ )  is  "off"  (the  main  power  switch 
is  "on"),  the  volume  of  the  beep  that  sounds  when  reception  ends,  and  whether  or  not  received  e-mail  messages  are  printed. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  1-Fax  Receive  Settings 

Settings  related  to  Internet  fax  reception  can  be  configured  such  as  the  interval  for  checking  for  received  faxes,  duplex 
reception,  output  settings,  auto  reduction  printing,  and  storing  allow/reject  reception  addresses. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Allow/Reject  Mail  or  Domain  Name  Setting 
This  setting  is  used  to  allow/refuse  reception  from  stored  addresses  and  domains. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print 

Use  this  to  select  whether  or  not  the  date  and  time  of  reception  is  added  when  a  received  image  is  printed. 


Contents 


5-110 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


MANUALLY  RECEIVING  INTERNET  FAXES 

If  the  interval  for  checking  for  received  faxes  is  somewhat  long  and  you  wish  to  check  immediately,  you  can  manually 
initiate  reception. 

Touch  the  [1-Fax  Manual  Reception]  key  to  connect  to  the  mail  server  and  retrieve  received  faxes. 


5-111 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


PRINTING  A  PASSWORD-PROTECTED  FAX 
(Hold  Setting  For  Received  Data  Print) 

"Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator)  can  be  enabled  to  have  faxes  received  to 
memory  without  being  printed.  To  print  the  faxes,  a  password  must  be  entered.  When  this  function  is  enabled,  a 
password  entry  screen  appears  in  the  touch  panel  when  received  Internet  faxes  are  retrieved. 


Received  data  is  stored. 

Enter  password  via  the  10 -key. 


When  the  previously  programmed  4-digit  password  is  entered  with  the  numeric  keys,  printing  begins. 

The  [Cancel]  key  can  be  touched  to  close  the  password  entry  screen;  however,  the  data  in  memory  key  (回) will  blink 
in  the  touch  panel.  The  password  entry  screen  will  reappear  when  you  touch  the  blinking  key  (L®J)  or  change  modes. 
When  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  a  password  can  be 
entered  to  display  the  received  data  list  screen.  If  you  wish  to  check  an  image  before  printing  it,  continue  from  step  1 on 
the  next  page. 


•  The  received  faxes  will  be  retained  in  memory  regardless  of  whether  they  were  received  automatically  or  manually. 

•If  "Fax  Data  Receive/Forward"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  so  that  received  faxes  are  forwarded  to  another  machine, 
faxes  retained  in  memory  are  also  forwarded.  At  that  time,  the  same  password  entry  screen  will  appear  as  for  printing. 
Forwarding  will  not  take  place  unless  the  password  is  entered. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Hold  Setting  for  Received  Data  Print 

Enable  this  setting  to  have  faxes  received  to  memory  without  being  printed.  This  setting  is  also  used  to  program  the 
password  that  must  be  entered  to  print  the  faxes. 


5-112 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


CHECKING  THE  IMAGE  BEFORE  PRINTING 


When  "Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting"  is  enabled*  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  you  can  check  a  received 
image  in  the  touch  panel  before  printing  it  out.  When  this  function  is  enabled,  follow  the  steps  below  to  print  a  received  image. 
*  The  factory  default  setting  is  disabled. 


Depending  on  the  size  of  the  received  data,  part  of  the  image  in  the  image  check  screen  on  the  touch  panel  may  not  appear. 


The  memory  has  received  data. 
Check  the  data? 


No 


) i  汽  ) 


When  an  image  is  received,  a  confirmation 
prompt  will  appear.  Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 

If  this  message  appears  while  you  are  configuring  settings  of 
any  type  and  you  touch  the  [Yes]  key,  the  settings  that  you  are 
configuring  will  be  canceled.  If  this  message  appears  in  another 
mode,  you  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  image  send  mode 
after  checking  the  image. 


(1) 


Image  Check 


Delete 


Print 


(2) 


Select  the  received  image 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  received  image  that 
you  want  to  check. 

Multiple  received  images  can  be  checked. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Image  Check]  key. 

•  To  show  thumbnails  of  the  received  images,  touch  the 
[Thumbnail]  key. 

•  To  delete  an  image  that  has  been  selected,  touch  the 
[Delete]  key.  To  print  an  image  that  has  been  selected, 
touch  the  [Print]  key. 


When  the  [Select  All]  key  is  touched,  it  will  change  into  the  [Cancel  All]  key.  When  all  received  data  has  been  selected 
using  the  [Select  All]  key,  the  selection  can  be  canceled  by  touching  the  [Cancel  All]  key. 


Check  the  received  image  and  then 
touch  the  [Print]  key. 

Printing  begins. 

For  information  on  the  image  check  screen,  see  "IMAGE 
CHECK  SCREEN11  (page  5-114). 


If  the  screen  of  step  1  appears  when  you  are  configuring  settings  in  the  setting  screens  of  any  of  the  modes,  the  configured 
settings  will  be  canceled  if  you  view  the  image.  After  viewing  the  image,  you  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  image  send 
mode,  regardless  of  which  mode  you  were  in  previously. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Received  Data  Image  Check  Setting 

Use  this  to  specify  whether  or  not  a  received  Internet  fax  can  be  viewed  before  it  is  printed. 


Contents 


5-113 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN 

This  section  explains  the  image  check  screen. 


(1)  Information  display 

This  shows  information  on  the  displayed  image. 

(2)  Preview  image 

An  image  of  the  selected  received  image  appears. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and 
slide  it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to 
scroll.) 

(3)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages,  use  these  keys  to 
change  pages. 

•  N]  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page, 
•aa  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display:  This  shows  the  total  number  of 

pages  and  the  current  page 
number.  You  can  touch  the 
current  page  number  key  and 
enter  a  number  with  the 
numeric  keys  to  go  to  that  page 
number. 


(4)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(5)  [Print]  key 

Touch  to  start  printing. 

(6)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  "Full  Page",  "Twice", 
"4  Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in 
the  file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(7)  Image  select  key 

When  multiple  images  are  selected  for  preview  display, 
use  this  to  change  the  displayed  images. 


A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  It  will  differ  from  the  actual  print  result. 


Contents 


5-114 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


FORWARDING  RECEIVED  INTERNET 
FAXES  TO  A  NETWORK  ADDRESS 
(Inbound  Routing  Settings) 

Received  Internet  faxes  can  be  automatically  forwarded  to  an  e-mail  address,  file  server  address,  desktop  address,  or 
network  folder  address.  When  this  function  is  enabled,  you  can  also  have  received  Internet  faxes  forwarded  without 
printing  them. 


When  faxes  forwarded  using  this  function  are  printed  at  the  forwarding  destination,  the  date  and  time  of  reception  cannot  be 
printed  on  the  faxes.  ("Receiving  Date  &  Time  Print"  is  disabled.) 


CONFIGURING  INBOUND  ROUTING  SETTINGS 


All  inbound  routing  settings  are  configured  in  the  Web  pages.  For  the  procedure  for  accessing  the  Web  pages,  see  the 
Quick  Start  Guide. 

The  following  explanation  assumes  that  the  Web  pages  have  been  accessed  with  administrator  rights. 

To  configure  inbound  routing  settings,  follow  the  steps  below. 


Administration  Settings 

1  Subnwl(Uj  ||  VfOttMR)  \ 

1_,1 

Inboiind  Pouting  Sttdngt 

Inbound  Routing 

□  Ottaibl#  R*9»str«tion  of  Forward  Tabte 

□  of  Forward  TaWt 

□  Dttabi«  Chan9»or  Forward  Appcovil 

Print  Scyf*  Sfding 

II  | 

OPinmOiiiAlR#po(t 
©Pinm  ac  Enoi 

& »ck  to  tNf  Top  on  Tbr$  P»gt  4 

Enabling  the  inbound  routing  function. 

(1)  In  the  Web  page  menu,  click  [Application 
Settings],  [Inbound  Routing  Settings],  and 
then  [Administration  Settings]. 

(2)  Select  [Enable]  in  "Inbound  Routing"  and 
click  the  [Submit]  button. 


Users  without  administrator  rights  can  be  prohibited  from  storing,  editing,  and  deleting  forwarding  tables  in  this  screen, 
and  from  specifying  which  table  is  used.  To  do  so,  select  the  checkboxes  below  0. 


•  Disable  Registration  of  Forward  Table  •  Disable  Change/Delete  of  Forward  Table  •  Disable  Change  of  Forward  Approval 
When  inbound  routing  is  enabled,  you  can  also  specify  whether  or  not  you  wish  the  machine  to  print  the  forwarded  faxes. 
To  have  all  received  faxes  printed  before  being  forwarded,  select  "Print  Out  All  Report"  in  "Print  Style  Setting".  To 
have  received  faxes  printed  only  when  an  error  prevents  forwarding,  select  "Print  at  Error". 

After  configuring  the  settings,  be  sure  to  click  the  [Submit]  button. 


5-115 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Sender  Number/Address  Registration 


I  Submit(U)  ][  Update(R)  I 

Address  to  be  Entered: 

012345678 

abc@aaa.bbb.ccc 


Delete(O)  I 


I  Help(l)  | 


Fax  Number: 


コ (Up  to  1500 

characters) 

(  Global  Address  Search(C)  j 

[ Add  to  L_  1 


Internet  Fax  Address:  丨  丨 (Up  to  1500 

characters) 

l  Global  Address  Search(N)  ) 

[ Add  to  List(M)  | 

Back  to  the  Top  on  This  Page  4 

I  Submit fU)  |[Update(R)  I 


Storing  sender  addresses. 

If  you  wish  to  have  only  faxes  from  specified  addresses 
forwarded,  store  the  desired  sender  addresses.  Send 
addresses  stored  here  can  be  selected  from  a  list  when  you 
store  a  forwarding  table. 

(1)  Click  [Sender  Number/Address 
Registration]  in  the  [Inbound  Routing 
Settings]  menu  in  the  Web  page. 

(2)  Enter  the  sender  address  in  "Internet  Fax 
Address"  or  "Fax  Number"  as  appropriate, 
and  click  the  [Add  to  List]  button. 

The  entered  address  will  be  added  to  the  "Address  to  be 
Entered"  list. 

•  Specify  whether  the  address  will  be  directly  entered 
(maximum  of  1500  characters)  or  selected  from  a 
global  address  book  by  clicking  the  [Global  Address 
Search]  button. 

•  To  store  multiple  addresses,  repeat  this  step. 

(3)  When  you  have  finished  adding  addresses, 
click  the  [Submit]  button. 


•A  maximum  of  500  sender  numbers/addresses  can  be  stored. 

•To  delete  an  entered  address,  select  the  address  in  "Address  to  be  Entered"  and  click  the  [Delete]  button. 


5-116 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


⑶ (4) 


Table  Registration 

[ Submit(U)  |  [  Cancel(C)  I 


Table  Name: 

Receive  Line  Select: 


Sender  Number/Address  Setting:: 


□  Internet  Fax 

□  Fax 


[ Help(l)  | 


©Forward  All  Received  Data 

O forward  Received  Data  from  Below  Sender 
O forward  Received  Data  from  Senders  except  Below 
Sender  Number/Address:  Sender  Number/Address  to  be 

used  in  this  table.: 


011112222 

011113333 

011112222 

011113333 

022223333 

022223333 

022224444 

022224444 

033334444 

033335555 

033334444 

033335555 

044445555 

044446666 

044445555 

044446666 

ifax@sssss.co.jp 

ifax@sssss.co.jp 

ifaxaddress@aaaaa.cp.jp  v 

ifaxaddress^aaaaa.  cp.jp  v  j 

[Add(Y)J 


[Delete(D)  I 


] De: 


Switch  to  Single  Screen  Mode 


[Forward  Destination  1 


Forward  Condition: 


D  Set  Forwarding  Time 
Start  Time: 

Completing  Time: 

Format  for  Forwarding: 

Forwarding  Destination  Settings: 
Index: 

Display  Items: 

Forward  Destination 


©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

O  Forward  on  Selected  Day  &Time 

□  Monday  DTuesday  □  Wednesday 

□  Thursday  □  Friday  □  Saturday 

□  Sunday 


Select  AII(S)  ]  [_  Clear  Checked® 


00  v  Hour  1 00  v  Minute 
00  v  Hour  f  CO  v  Minute 


【 TIFF(Multi)  v  j 


All  Destina 
1 10  v 


〇  〇  ftddress  Name  A  T 

□ 

□ 

□  User  A 

匚 

□ 

□  User  B 

匚 

□ 

□  User  C 

门 

门 

1  leer  fl 

Total  Address:4 


[ Previous(M) い/ 2  [  Next(N) ] 


厂  Subj^t 


jt(U)  II  Cancel(C)  I 


in  v 

pe  A  W  Address  AT 

No.  AT 

ョ met  Fax  tanaka@aaa.bbl 

: cc.ddd  2 

nail  suzuki@aaa.bbl 

'cc.ddd  3 

twork  Folder  \\aaaaa\bbbbb 

4 

P  10.20 .30.40 

5 

Back  to  the  Top  on  This  Page  ^ 

⑻ 


⑺ (6) 


Store  a  forwarding  table. 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  store  a  forwarding  table  that 

combines  a  specified  sender  and  forwarding  address. 

(1)  Click  [Inbound  Routing  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu  and  click  the  [Add]  button. 

(2)  Enter  a  "Table  Name". 

(3)  Select  the  line  used  for  reception. 

(4)  Select  the  sender  whose  faxes  will  be 
forwarded. 

•  To  forward  all  received  faxes,  select  [Forward  All 
Received  Data]. 

•  To  forward  only  data  received  from  specific  senders, 
select  [Forward  Received  Data  from  Below  Sender].  To 
forward  all  data  except  data  from  specific  senders, 
select  [Forward  Received  Data  from  Senders  except 
Below].  Select  the  appropriate  senders  from  the  list  and 
click  the  [Add]  button. 

(5)  Select  the  forwarding  conditions. 

•  To  always  forward  received  data,  select  [Always 
Forward]. 

•  To  specify  a  day  and  time  on  which  received  data  will 
be  forwarded,  select  [Forward  on  Selected  Day  &  Time] 
and  select  the  checkbox  (0)  of  the  desired  day  of  the 
week.  To  specify  a  time,  select  the  [Set  Forwarding 
Time]  checkbox  (□)  and  specify  the  time. 

(6)  Select  the  file  format. 

The  format  can  be  set  separately  for  each  forwarding 
address  (for  each  of  forwarding  addresses  1, 2,  and  3  in 
the  table). 

(7)  Select  the  forwarding  address. 

Forwarding  addresses  can  be  selected  from  the 
machine's  address  book.  (Multiple  addresses  can  be 
selected.)  A  maximum  of  1000  forwarding  addresses  can 
be  stored  (a  combined  maximum  of  100  file  server, 
desktop,  and  network  folder  addresses  can  be  stored). 

(8)  Click  [Submit]. 


•  When  selecting  senders  from  the  "Sender  Number/Address  Setting"  list,  you  can  use  the  [Shift]  key  or  the  [Ctrl]  key 
on  your  keyboard  to  select  multiple  senders. 

•A  maximum  of  50  forwarding  tables  can  be  stored. 

•  Images  sent  in  TIFF  format  may  not  display  correctly  in  some  recipient  environments.  In  this  event,  change  the  file 
format  to  PDF. 

•  Up  to  three  forwarding  day  and  time  settings  can  be  set  for  one  forwarding  table,  and  a  forwarding  destination  can 
be  set  for  each  set  time.  To  configure  these  settings,  use  the  forwarding  list  tabs  to  access  each  setting. 

•  When  the  forwarding  destination  is  a  file  server,  desktop,  or  shared  folder,  the  computer  of  that  destination  must  be 
powered  on. 


5-117 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


Inbound  Routing  Settings 

1  Login(P)  | 

fH^ipFI 

|  Submit(U)  ||  Update(R)  | 

Inbound  Routing  Settings:  Enable 

Display  Items:  1 10  v 

Forward  Destination  1 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 
O  Forward  on  Sele 

cted  Day  &Time 

□  Table  1  -  . n  ..  ..  « 

Forward  Destination  2 

®  Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  3 

®  Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  1 

□  Table  2 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

O  Forward  on  Selected  Day  &Time 

Forward  Destination  2 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  1 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

O  Forward  on  Selected  Day  &Time 

□  Table  3  c  J  n  ^ 

Forward  Destination  2 

©Not  Forward 

O  Always  Forward 

Forward  Destination  3 

©Not  Forward 
〇  Always  Forward 

Total  Table:3 

|  Previous(M)  ]  y^\  [  Next(N) ] 

|  Select  AII(S)  1 1  Clear  Checked(Z)  | 

Delete(0)  |  [Add(Y)  | 


Back  to  the  Top  on  This  Page  ▲ 


|  Subi^(U) 


]] Update(R)  | 


Specifying  forwarding  tables  to  be  used. 

To  use  the  inbound  routing  function,  enable  the  forwarding 
tables  that  you  wish  to  use  from  among  the  stored  tables. 

(1)  Click  [Inbound  Routing  Settings]  in  the  Web 
page  menu. 

(2)  Select  [Always  Forward]  or  [Forward  on 
Selected  Day  &  Time]  from  the  forwarding 
table. 

The  forwarding  permission  settings  that  appear  here  are 
linked  to  the  forwarding  conditions  set  in  step  3.  If  you 
wish  to  use  different  forwarding  conditions  than  those  set 
in  step  3,  set  the  forwarding  permission  settings. 

(3)  Click  [Submit]. 


To  delete  a  forwarding  table,  click  the  checkbox  next  to  the  table  name  so  that  it  is  selected  ]  and  click  [Delete]. 


5-118 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


SCANNING  FROM  A  COMPUTER 
(PC  Scan  Mode) 


BASIC  SCANNING  PROCEDURE 

You  can  install  the  scanner  driver  on  your  computer  from  the  CD-ROM  that  accompanies  the  machine,  and  use  a 
TWAIN*  compliant  application  to  scan  an  image  using  your  computer. 

Scanning  from  your  computer  is  most  useful  for  scanning  a  single  original  such  as  a  photo,  particularly  when  you  want  to 
adjust  scan  settings  as  you  scan.  By  contrast,  scanning  at  the  machine  is  most  useful  for  continuous  scanning  of 
multiple  originals. 

*  An  interface  standard  used  for  scanners  and  other  image  input  devices.  When  the  scanner  driver  is  installed  on  your 
computer,  you  can  use  any  TWAIN-compliant  application  to  scan  an  image. 


•  Scanning  in  PC  scan  mode  is  only  possible  when  the  scanner  driver  has  been  installed  from  the  "Software  CD-ROM" 
using  the  integrated  installer.  For  the  procedures  for  installing  the  scanner  driver  and  configuring  settings,  see  the 
Software  Setup  Guide. 

•  This  function  cannot  be  used  when  it  has  been  disabled  using  "Disable  Scan  Function"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

•  The  procedures  for  selecting  the  scanner  driver  and  starting  scanning  vary  depending  on  the  TWAIN-compliant 
application.  For  more  information,  see  the  manual  for  the  application  or  Help. 

•  When  a  large  image  is  scanned  at  high  resolution,  the  amount  of  data  will  be  very  large  and  scanning  will  take  a  long  time. 
Be  sure  to  select  appropriate  scan  settings  for  the  original  (text,  photo,  etc.). 


As  an  example,  the  procedure  for  scanning  from  the  "Sharpdesk"  application  that  accompanies  the  machine  is 
explained  below. 


[At  the  machine] 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


USB  Mem.  Scan  I 


PC  Scan 

& 


This  machine  is  in  the  PC  scan  mode. 
Do  not  remove  the  original . 

Scanner  IP  address: 250.160 .102. 106 


Touch  the  [PC  Scan]  tab  to  switch  to  PC 
Scan  mode. 

If  the  [PC  Scan]  tab  does  not  appear,  touch  the  j  4  1  tab 

to  move  the  screen. 


When  PC  scan  mode  is  selected,  only  the  [Exit]  key  displayed  in  the  touch  panel  can  be  used  on  the  machine;  no 
other  keys  can  be  used. 


5-119 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


[At  your  computer] 


後  Sharpdesk 

File  |  Edit  View  Took  Internet  Output  Zone  Help 
New  Folder 

Open... 

Rename 
Delete 

Sharp  desk  Folders... 

Print... 

Acauire  Imacie... 

Select  Scanner... 

From  Scanner  or  Camera... 

Send  A&  ► 

Properties... 

Exit  Alt+F4 


Ctrl+N 

Ctrl+O  Split 


Ctrl+P 


Start  the  TWAIN-compliant  application 
on  your  computer  and  select  [Select 
Scanner]  from  the  [File]  menu. 


(i) 


(2) 


Select  the  scanner  driver  of  the 
machine. 

(1)  Select  [SHARP  MFP  TWAIN  K]. 

(2)  Click  the  [Select]  button. 


綫  Sharpdesk 

File  |  Edit  View  Tools  Internet  Output  Zone  Help 


New  Folder 

Ctrl+N 

Open... 

Ctrl+0 

Rename 

Delete 

Sharp  desk  Folders... 

Print... 

Ctrl+P 

Acquire  Image … 

delect  scanner... 

From  Scanner  or  Camera … 

Send  As 

► 

Properties... 

Exit 

Alt+F4 

Select  [Acquire  Image]  from  the  [File] 
menu. 

The  scanner  driver  opens. 


5-120 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


(1) (2) 


⑶ 


Preview  the  image. 

(1)  Select  the  location  where  the  original  is 
placed. 

"Scanning  Position"  menu: 

•  If  the  original  is  a  one-sided  original  and  is  placed  in  the 
document  feeder  tray,  select  [SPF(Simplex)]. 

•  If  the  original  is  a  2-sided  original  and  is  placed  in  the 
document  feeder  tray,  select  [SPF(Duplex  -  Book)]  or 
[SPF(Duplex  -  Tablet)]  depending  on  whether  the 
original  is  a  book-style  or  tablet-style  original.  In 
addition,  select  [Left  edge  is  fed  first]  or  [Top  edge  is 
fed  first]  depending  on  the  orientation  of  the  original. 

(2)  Select  scan  settings. 

"Scanning  Mode"  menu: 

Switch  between  the  "Preset"  screen  and  the  "Custom 
Settings"  screen.  In  the  "Preset"  screen,  select  "Web 
Pages11,  "Photo",  "FAX"  or  "OCR"  depending  on  the 
original  type  and  your  scanning  purpose. 

If  you  wish  to  change  the  initial  settings  of  any  of  the  four 
buttons  or  select  the  resolution  or  other  advanced 
settings,  change  to  the  "Custom  Settings"  screen. 

"Image  Area"  menu: 

Select  the  scan  area.  If  "Auto"  is  selected,  the  original  size 
detected  by  the  machine  will  be  scanned.  You  can  also 
set  the  scanning  area  in  the  preview  window  with  your 
mouse. 

(3)  Click  the  [Preview]  button. 

The  preview  image  will  appear  in  the  scanner  driver. 

If  you  are  not  satisfied  with  the  preview  image,  repeat  (2) 
and  (3). 

If  the  [Zoom  Preview]  checkbox  is  selected  before  the 
[Preview]  button  is  clicked,  the  selected  area  will  be 
enlarged  in  the  preview  window.  If  the  checkmark  is 
removed,  the  preview  image  will  return  to  normal.  Note 
that  if  SPF  is  selected  in  the  "Scanning  Position"  menu, 
the  [Zoom  Preview]  function  cannot  be  used. 


•  For  further  information  on  the  scan  settings,  click  the  f  |  button  in  the  preview  image  screen  of  step  7  to 
open  scanner  driver  Help. 

•If  the  [Preview]  button  is  clicked  when  scanning  from  the  document  feeder  tray,  only  one  original  page  will  be 
scanned  for  the  preview  image.  If  you  wish  to  include  that  original  in  the  scan,  return  it  to  the  document  feeder  tray. 


Contents 


5-121 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


[wl  ^  1 

B 球* 

|A|  JLI 

知 

Rfxkim 

Invg^Air み 

: 

:  Omtm 
: 抑 MR 

Select  scanning  settings  while  viewing 
the  image. 

[Rotate]  button: 

Each  time  this  button  is  clicked,  the  preview  image  rotates  90 
degrees.  This  lets  you  change  the  orientation  of  the  image 
without  picking  up  and  placing  the  original  again.  The  image  file 
will  be  created  using  the  orientation  that  appears  in  the  preview 
window. 

[Image  Size]  button: 

Click  this  button  to  specify  the  scan  area  by  entering  numerical 
values.  Pixels,  mm,  or  inches  can  be  selected  for  the  units  of 
the  numerical  values.  If  a  scanning  area  has  already  been 
specified,  the  entered  numbers  will  change  the  area  relative  to 
the  top  left  corner  of  the  specified  area. 

X|  button: 

When  a  preview  image  is  displayed  and  a  scanning  area  is  not 
specified,  you  can  click  the  Xj  button  to  automatically  set  the 
scanning  area  to  the  entire  preview  image. 


•  For  further  information  on  the  scan  settings,  click  the  _fj  button  to  open  scanner  driver  Help. 

•If  the  originals  are  placed  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  only  the  top  page  will  be  previewed.  The  top  page  will  be 
delivered  to  the  original  exit  tray.  Be  sure  to  return  the  previewed  page  to  the  document  feeder  tray  before 
previewing  again  or  scanning. 


Click  the  [Scan]  button. 

Scanning  begins.  The  image  appears  in  your  application. 
Assign  a  file  name  to  the  scanned  image  and  save  it  as 
appropriate  in  the  software  application  you  are  using. 


Contents 


5-122 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


[At  the  machine] 


This  machine  is  in  the  PC  scan  mode. 

Do  not  remove  the  original . 

Scanner  IP  address : 250 . 160 . 102 . 106 

f  Exit  j 


Touch  the  [Exit]  key  in  the  touch  panel. 


Touch  the  [Yes]  key. 


Contents 


5-123 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


METADATA  DELIVERY 


This  section  explains  metadata  delivery,  which  can  be  used  when  the  application  integration  module  kit  is  installed. 


METADATA  DELIVERY  (Data  Entry) 

When  the  application  integration  module  kit  is  installed  and  an  image  file  is  generated  for  a  scan  send  transmission, 
metadata  (data  indicating  the  attributes  of  the  image  file  and  how  it  is  to  be  processed)  can  be  generated  based  on 
pre-stored  information  and  transmitted  as  a  separate  file.  The  metadata  file  is  created  in  XML  format.  By  linking  the 
metadata  with  applications  such  as  document  management  software,  a  workflow  application,  or  an  encryption  server,  a 
sophisticated  document  solution  environment  can  be  built. 


Metadata 
(XML  file) 


1 


Image  file 


Scan  to 
Desktop 


Client  PC  that  uses  Network 
Scanner  Tool 


Fax  server,  document 
management  software, 
workflow  application, 
encryption  server,  etc. 


Scan  to  E-mail 

Scan  to  FTP 

Scan  to  Network  Folder 


Using  the  application  integration  module  kit,  information  on  a  generated  image  file  can  be  entered  at  the  touch  panel  and 
transmitted  along  with  the  image  as  an  XML  file. 


5-124 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  METADATA 
TRANSMISSION 

SETTINGS  REQUIRED  IN  THE  WEB  PAGES 

All  settings  related  to  metadata  are  configured  in  the  Web  pages.  (Administrator  rights  are  required.) 

To  configure  metadata  settings,  click  [Application  Settings]  and  then  [Metadata  Settings]  in  the  Web  page  menu. 

When  configuring  settings,  be  sure  to  enable  metadata  transmission. 

Storing  Metadata  Sets 

Store  the  items  (the  metadata  set)  that  are  written  to  the  XML  file  that  is  generated  during  scanning.  Up  to 10  metadata 
items  can  be  configured  in  a  metadata  set.  A  stored  metadata  set  can  be  selected  at  the  time  of  transmission. 


Addresses  specified  in  "Address  Type  Allowing  Metadata  Entry"  when  a  metadata  set  is  stored  can  be  selected  as 
transmission  destinations  at  the  time  of  transmission  using  one-touch  keys,  manual  entry,  and/or  a  global  address  book 
search.  (Addresses  for  which  metadata  entry  is  not  allowed  cannot  be  specified  as  transmission  destinations.) 


METADATA  TRANSMISSION  FOR  SCAN  TO  DESKTOP 

When  Network  Scanner  Tool  is  used  in  its  factory  default  configuration,  a  file  will  be  generated  with  a  new  file  name  on 
the  computer.  When  Network  Scanner  Tool  is  used  as  a  means  of  sending  a  metadata  file  to  a  third  party  software 
application,  this  setting  must  be  disabled  to  allow  cross  referencing  between  the  image  file  and  XML  file  by  means  of  the 
file  name  generated  by  the  computer.  (When  setting  the  file  name  in  [Send  Settings],  to  ensure  that  a  previously  existing 
file  on  a  computer  is  not  overwritten  by  a  transmitted  file  of  the  same  name,  be  sure  to  configure  the  file  name  so  that 
name  duplication  cannot  occur;  for  example,  by  including  a  unique  extension  (the  date,  etc.)  in  the  generated  file  name. 
If  the  file  name  setting  is  left  blank,  the  machine  will  automatically  generate  a  file  name  that  is  unique.) 


•  It  is  recommended  that  you  use  Network  Scanner  Tool  to  receive  metadata.  For  more  information,  see  the  Network 
Scanner  Tool  User's  Guide  (PDF  format)  on  the  "Sharpdesk/Network  Scanner  Utilities"  CD-ROM. 

•  For  information  on  the  license  agreement  and  how  to  use  the  CD-ROM  that  accompanies  the  application  integration 
module,  see  the  separate  "Sharpdesk  license  kit"  manual. 

•  Using  third  party  software  applications 

Various  types  of  third  party  software  applications  exist.  Some  applications  can  start  automatically  from  Network  Scanner 
Tool  and  some  cannot.  When  the  auto-run  function  of  an  application  is  enabled,  Network  Scanner  Tool  will  start  the 
application  with  the  M.exeM  command  using  the  file  name  as  a  parameter.  Normally  an  application  is  started  twice,  once  for 
the  image  file  and  once  for  the  XML  file.  For  example,  when  Network  Scanner  Tool  is  set  to  start  the  application 
"APP.EXE",  the  following  commands  are  applied  when  the  two  files  "IMG.TIF"  and  "IMG.XML"  are  received. 

APP.EXE  IMG.TIF 
APP.EXE  IMG.XML 


5-125 


Contents 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


The  keys  of  the  items  stored  in  the 
metadata  set  will  appear.  Touch  the  key 
of  the  item  that  you  want  to  enter. 


If  you  accidentally  selected  the  wrong  metadata  set  or  wish  to  use  a  different  metadata  set  when  a  default  metadata 
set  has  been  set,  touch  the  [Metadata  Set]  key.  Touch  the  [OK]  key  in  the  message  screen  that  appears.  You  will 
return  to  the  screen  of  step  1 ■  Metadata  items  entered  to  that  point  will  be  canceled. 


Contents 


TRANSMITTING  METADATA 

Follow  the  steps  below  to  select  a  metadata  set,  enter  each  item,  and  perform  metadata  transmission. 


(1) 


Scan 

Internet  Fax  I  Fax  |  Data  Entry  || 

1 

( 

( 

►Address  Book 

[  Original  j  Scan:  Send: 

Address  Entry 

f  Exposure  |  ■ 

Send  Settings  | 

f  Resolution  ]  2 00X2 00dpi 

( 

( 

1 

Address  Review j 

f  File  Format  丨  J  PDF 

File 

[ Color  Mode  J  J  Mono2 

Quick  File  j 

f  Special  Modes  j 

Preview 

[ 曲^^  [Metadata  Entry 

Switch  to  data  entry  mode  and  display 
the  metadata  set  screen. 

(1)  Touch  the  [Data  Entry]  tab. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Metadata  Entry]  key. 


If  no  metadata  sets  have  been  stored,  the  [Data  Entry]  tab  cannot  be  selected.  Store  a  metadata  set  in  the  Web 
pages  and  then  perform  the  transmission  procedure. 

If  a  specific  metadata  set  has  been  specified  as  the  default  set,  go  to  step  3. 


Metadata  Set 


Set  Name: Metadata  ] 


卜  etacU 


卜 et; 


(1) 


MMetadata  \ 


J  Metadata  ^ 
1  | Metadata  ( 
J  | Metadata  \ 
J  |  [Metadata  ■ 


Select  a  metadata  set. 


Touch  the  key  of  the  metadata  set  that  you 
wish  to  use. 


(1) 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


s  ■ 


i 


5-126 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


When  you  have  finished  entering  all 
items,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


Scan 

^Internet  Fax  |  Fax  j  Data  Entry  j 

1: 

( 

( 

►Address  Book 

[  Original  _  Scan:  Send: 

Address  Entry 

f  Exposure  丨 ■ 

Send  Settings  | 

f  Resolution  j  2 00X2 00dpi 

( 

( 

1. 

Address  Review 

[ File  Format  ]  J  PDF 

File 

[ Color  Mode  J  |~P  Mono2 

Quick  File 

f  Special  Modes  ] 

Preview  j 

|jl^ 

Select  image  settings  and  any  other 
settings,  and  perform  the  scan  send 
procedure. 

•  The  procedures  for  selecting  settings  and  performing 
transmission  are  the  same  as  in  the  other  modes. 

•  To  make  changes  to  entered  values,  touch  the  [Metadata 
Entry]  key  once  again.  The  entry  screen  of  the  selected 
metadata  set  will  appear. 


Transmission  cannot  be  performed  if  the  [Data  Entry]  tab  is  displayed  and  no  metadata  settings  have  been  configured.  To 
perform  transmission  without  sending  metadata,  switch  to  a  different  mode  by  touching  the  tab  of  that  mode  and  then 
perform  transmission. 

Before  configuring  metadata  settings,  you  can  specify  addresses  in  all  modes  to  be  used.  After  metadata  settings  have 
been  configured,  only  addresses  in  modes  that  are  allowed  in  the  selected  metadata  set  can  be  specified. 

When  metadata  settings  have  been  configured  or  an  address  is  specified  in  the  [Data  Entry]  tab,  it  will  not  be  possible  to 
switch  to  another  mode. 

Metadata  delivery  is  possible  using  the  document  filing  function.  The  [Data  Entry]  tab  appears  in  the  transmission  settings 
screen  of  document  filing  mode  to  allow  metadata  delivery.  In  addition,  metadata  delivery  using  document  filing  can  be 
performed  in  [Document  Operations]  in  the  Web  pages. 


Contents 


Enter  the  selected  metadata  item. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  value  that  you  wish  to 
enter. 

•  When  the  entry  values  of  the  metadata  item  are  in  the 
form  of  selections,  the  selections  are  shown  as  keys. 
When  a  value  is  editable,  you  can  touch  the  [Direct 
Entry]  key  to  manually  enter  the  value. 

•If  the  metadata  item  requires  the  entry  of  text,  a  text 
entry  screen  will  appear.  Enter  the  required  information. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


•  To  change  the  number  of  keys  displayed  in  the  screen,  touch  the  number  of  displayed  items  selector  key.  Select  6, 
12,  or  18  keys. 

•  For  the  procedure  for  entering  text,  see  "ENTERING  TEXT11  (page  1-70)  in  M1. BEFORE  USING  THE  MACHINE". 


⑴ 


I 

I  — 

Data  Entry 

| 

User  ID 

Cancel  ][  0 

K  — ^ ) 

6  ►  EB  ► 18  J 

Direct  Entry 

Value  1 

Value  2 

1 

Value  3 

|  Value  4 

2 

Value  5 

f  Value  6 

0 

Value  7 

f  Value  8 

a 

Value  9 

[ Value  10 

Value  11 

[ Value  12 

s  ■ 


5-127 


SCANNER/INTERNET  FAX 


METADATA  FIELDS 

The  following  three  types  of  metadata  are  included  in  the  XML  file  that  is  transmitted. 

•  Data  automatically  generated  by  the  machine:  These  data  are  always  included  in  the  XML  file  and  are  automatically 

stored  on  your  computer. 

•  Previously  defined  fields:  These  fields  are  automatically  recognized  by  the  machine  and 

assigned  to  appropriate  XML  tags.  These  fields  are  selectable,  and 
can  only  be  included  in  the  XML  file  if  enabled  in  the  Web  pages. 

•  User  defined  fields:  Custom  fields  can  be  added  to  the  XML  file.  These  fields  are  selectable 

and  can  be  defined  in  the  Web  pages. 


If  a  defined  metadata  field  is  one  of  the  following  fields,  a  message  will  appear  informing  you  that  the  field  cannot  be 
entered.  Enter  appropriate  information  in  the  related  items  of  the  send  settings. 


Name  entered  in 

metadata  field 

Description 

Where  entered 

fromName 

Name  of  the  user  who  sent  the  job.  If  the 
name  is  not  entered  as  metadata,  the  sender 
name  determined  by  the  usual  rules  for 
determining  the  sender  name  will  be  applied 
as  metadata. 

[Reply-To] 

(Sender  name  of  selected  sender) 

replyTo 

E-mail  address  to  which  the  transmission 

result  will  be  sent. 

[Reply-To] 

(E-mail  address  of  selected  sender) 

documentSubject 

Job  name  appearing  in  the  e-mail  "Subject" 
line,  or  job  name  on  the  fax  cover  sheet. 

When  the  user  enters  a  [Subject]  in  the  send 
settings  screen  in  the  touch  panel,  the 
entered  value  is  applied  as  metadata. 

[Subject] 

(Blank  until  a  value  is  set  in  the  send  settings 
screen.) 

fileName 

Enter  the  file  name  of  the  image  to  be  sent. 

[File  Name] 

(Only  when  the  [Allow  Custom  Filenames] 
checkbox  is  selected  0  in  the  metadata 
settings  screen  in  the  Web  pages.) 

(Blank  until  a  value  is  set  in  the  send  settings 
screen.) 

5-128 


Contents 


CHAPTER  6 
DOCUMENT  FILING 


This  chapter  provides  detailed  explanations  of  the  procedures  for  using  the  document  filing  function.  The  document  filing 
function  allows  you  to  save  the  document  data  of  a  copy  or  fax  job,  or  the  data  of  a  print  job,  as  a  file  on  the  machine's 
hard  drive.  The  file  can  be  called  up  as  needed. 

This  chapter  assumes  that  you  are  already  familiar  with  copy  mode,  scanner  mode,  and  the  other  modes  of  the 
machine. 

For  information  on  procedures  of  copy, scanner  and  other  modes  that  remain  the  same  when  those  modes  are  used  in 
conjunction  with  the  document  filing  function,  see  the  chapters  for  those  modes. 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


OVERVIEW . 6-2 

•  TYPES  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING . 6-2 

•  USES  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING . 6-3 

•  BEFORE  USING  DOCUMENT  FILING . 6-4 

•  IMPORTANT  POINTS  WHEN  USING 

DOCUMENT  FILING . 6-7 

•  USING  DOCUMENT  FILING  IN  EACH 

MODE . 6-8 

BASE  SCREEN  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING 

MODE . 6-10 


SAVING  FILES  WITH  DOCUMENT  FILING 


SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "Quick  File" . 6-11 

SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "File" . 6-13 

•FILE  INFORMATION . 6-15 

SAVING  A  DOCUMENT  FILE  ONLY  (Scan  to 
HDD) . 6-18 

•"Scan  to  HDD"  SCREEN . 6-18 

•  PERFORMING  "Scan  to  HDD" . 6-23 


USING  STORED  FILES 


SEQUENCE  FOR  USING  A  STORED  FILE . 6-24 

FOLDER  AND  FILE  SELECTION  SCREENS _ 6-26 

•  FOLDER  SELECTION  SCREEN . 6-26 

•  FILE  SELECTION  SCREEN . 6-27 

SELECTING  A  FILE . 6-29 

•  JOB  SETTINGS  SCREEN . 6-30 

PRINTING  A  STORED  FILE . 6-31 

•  PRINT  SETTINGS  SCREEN . 6-32 

•MULTI-FILE  PRINTING . 6-33 

SENDING  A  STORED  FILE . 6-37 

•  SEND  SETTINGS  SCREEN . 6-38 

PROPERTIES  OF  STORED  FILES . 6-39 

•  FILE  PROPERTIES . 6-39 

•  CHANGING  THE  PROPERTY . 6-39 

MOVING  A  STORED  FILE . 6-41 

DELETING  A  STORED  FILE . 6-43 

CHECKING  AN  IMAGE  OF  A  STORED  FILE _ 6-44 

•IMAGE  CHECK  SCREEN . 6-45 

RETRIEVING  AND  USING  A  FILE  FROM  THE 

JOB  STATUS  SCREEN . 6-46 

SEARCHING  FOR  A  STORED  FILE . 6-47 


6-1 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  using  the  document  filing  function,  including  an  overview 
of  document  filing,  the  features  and  functions  of  document  filing,  and  points  to  keep  in  mind  when  using  document  filing. 


OVERVIEW 

The  document  filing  function  allows  you  to  save  the  document  image  of  a  copy  or  image  send  job,  or  the  data  of  a  print 
job,  as  a  file  on  the  machine's  hard  drive. 

The  stored  file  can  be  retrieved  and  printed  or  transmitted  as  needed. 


TYPES  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING 


There  are  three  ways  to  save  a  file  using  document  filing:  "Quick  File",  "File",  and  "Scan  to  HDD". 


Quick  File 

As  a  copy,  scan  send,  or  other  job  is  performed,  this  function  saves  the  document  data  to  the  hard 
drive.  Use  this  function  when  you  want  to  quickly  and  easily  store  document  data  without  specifying  a 
file  name  or  other  information. 

The  stored  file  can  also  be  used  by  other  people.  Do  not  use  this  method  to  save  files  that  you  do  not 
want  others  to  use,  such  as  files  containing  sensitive  or  confidential  information. 

File 

As  a  copy,  scan  send,  or  other  job  is  performed,  this  function  saves  the  document  data  to  the  hard 
drive.  Unlike  Quick  File,  various  types  of  information  can  be  appended  to  the  file  when  the  file  is  saved 
to  enable  efficient  file  management. 

A  password  can  also  be  established  to  prevent  the  file  from  being  retrieved  up  by  others. 

Scan  to  HDD 

This  function  scans  a  document  and  stores  it  as  a  file.  Like  File,  various  types  of  information  can  be 
appended  to  the  file  when  it  is  stored. 

6-2 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


USES  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING 

Quickly  using  a  file 

Example:  You  prepared  handouts  consisting  of  numerous  pages  for  a  meeting,  however,  another  handout  is 
needed  for  a  newly  added  participant. 


The  handout  was  not  saved  using  document  filing 


The  handout  was  saved  using  document  filing 


门 


The  numerous  original  pages  must  all  be 
rescanned. 


The  stored  file  is  simply  retrieved  and 
printed. 


Not  likely  to  be  completed  in  time  for  the  meeting... 


Printing  is  accomplished  quickly  and  the  handout  is  ready  in 
time  for  the  meeting! 


Copy  settings  must  be  reselected  and  the  original  must  be 
rescanned. 

As  indicated  above,  to  obtain  another  set  of  output,  the 
settings  must  be  selected  all  over  again.  If  you  don't  remember 
the  settings,  much  effort  may  be  expended  to  get  the  same 
output  result  as  the  previous  time. 


By  retrieving  a  job  stored  using  document  filing,  there  is  no 
need  to  reselect  copy  settings  or  rescan  the  original. 

The  job  can  be  retrieved  and  printed  using  the  same  settings 
quickly  and  easily. 


As  shown  in  the  example,  storing  a  job  with  the  document  filing  function  frees  you  of  the  need  to  rescan  the  original  and 
select  settings,  saving  considerable  time. 


Convenient  for  managing  frequently  used  documents 

Example:  Managing  a  large  number  of  business  forms 


Not  using  document  filing 

It  takes  time  to  find  the  form  you  need. 


Using  document  filing 

The  required  form  can  be  easily  retrieved  from  the 
document  filing  list, 

and  document  management  is  much  more  efficient. 


Application  forms,  report  forms,  and  other  business  forms  can  be  stored  on  the  hard  drive  for  easy  retrieval,  letting  you 
print  the  number  of  copies  you  need  when  you  need  them. 


6-3 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


BEFORE  USING  DOCUMENT  FILING 

This  section  provides  information  that  you  should  know  before  using  the  document  filing  function. 

Folders 

Three  types  of  folders  are  used  to  store  files  by  document  filing. 


Documents  scanned  using  the  [Quick  File]  key  are  stored  in  this  folder.  A  user  name  and  file  name  are  automatically 
assigned  to  each  job. 

Main  Folder 

Documents  scanned  using  the  [File]  key  are  stored  in  this  folder. 

When  you  store  a  job  in  the  Main  folder,  you  can  specify  a  previously  stored  user  name  and  assign  a  file  name. 

A  password  can  also  be  set  when  storing  a  file  ([Confidential]  save). 

Custom  Folder 

Folders  with  custom  names  can  be  created  inside  this  folder. 

When  a  document  is  scanned  using  the  [File]  key  and  a  folder  is  selected,  the  document  is  stored  in  the  specified  folder. 
Like  the  Main  folder,  a  custom  folder  allows  you  to  specify  a  previously  stored  user  name  and  assign  a  file  name  when  storing  a  job. 
Passwords  can  be  established  for  custom  folders  and  for  files  saved  in  custom  folders. 


A  maximum  of  1000  custom  folders  can  be  created  on  the  hard  drive. 


Items  convenient  to  store 

When  storing  a  job  using  "File"  or  "Scan  to  HDD",  it  is  convenient  to  store  the  items  below.  These  settings  are  not 
needed  when  storing  a  job  using  "Quick  File". 


User  Name 

This  is  necessary  if  you  will  be  assigning  a  user  name  to  stored  files.  User  names  are  stored  in  "User  List"  in 
the  system  settings  (administrator).  A  user  name  is  also  used  as  a  search  condition  when  searching  fora  file. 

Custom  Folder 

The  Main  folder  is  initially  available  as  a  location  for  storing  files  by  "File"  and  "Scan  to  HDD".  When 
custom  folders  have  been  created  using  "Document  Filing  Control"  in  the  system  settings,  a  custom 
folder  can  be  specified  as  a  location  for  storing  files.  A  password  can  also  be  established  for  a  custom 
folder  to  restrict  access  to  the  folder. 

My  Folder 

"My  Folder"  is  specified  using  "User  List"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator).  The  main  folder  or  a 
previously  created  custom  folder  can  be  selected  as  "My  Folder",  or  a  new  folder  can  be  created  as 
"My  Folder".  When  user  authentication  is  used,  "My  Folder"  is  always  created  and  is  selected  as  the 
destination  of  "File"  and  "Scan  to  HDD". 

•  System  Settings:  Document  Filing  Control  (page  7-24) 

This  is  used  to  create  custom  folders  for  document  filing.  A  password  can  also  be  established  for  a  custom  folder. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  User  List 

This  is  used  to  store  a  user  name  and  specify  a  folder  as  "My  Folder". 


6-4 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Maximum  number  of  pages  and  files  that  can  be  stored  by  document  filing 

Combined  total  number  of  pages  and  total  number  of  files  that  can  be  stored  in  custom 
folders  and  in  the  Main  folder 


Maximum  number  of  pages 

Maximum  number  of  files 

20000 

3000 

Number  of  pages  and  number  of  files  that  can  be  stored  in  the  Quick  File  folder 


Maximum  number  of  pages 

Maximum  number  of  files 

10000 

1000 

Copying  in  sort  mode  uses  the  same  memory  area  as  the  Quick  File  folder.  For  this  reason,  when  too  much  data  has 
been  stored  in  the  Quick  File  folder,  it  may  not  be  possible  to  perform  a  large  copy  job  using  sort  mode.  Delete 
unneeded  files. 

The  actual  number  of  pages  and  number  of  files  that  can  be  stored  may  be  lower  depending  on  the  contents  of  the 
original  images  and  the  settings  selected  when  the  files  were  stored. 


6-5 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Automatic  deletion  of  files 

You  can  have  document  filing  data  in  specified  folders  automatically  deleted  at  regular  intervals  by  specifying  the  folders 
and  the  time.  Periodic  deletion  of  files  stored  in  the  machine  helps  to  prevent  the  leaking  of  sensitive  information  and 
frees  space  on  the  hard  drive. 

Every  day,  every  week,  or  every  month  can  be  selected  for  the  deletion  cycle,  and  a  time  can  be  set  for  each  selection. 
For  example,  you  can  set  file  deletion  to  take  place  every  week  on  Friday  at  6:00  PM. 

Automatic  file  deletion  settings  are  configured  in  "Automatic  Deletion  of  File  Settings"  in  the  system  settings 
(administrator). 

To  check  the  settings,  print  the  following  list  in  the  system  settings. 

To  check  information  on  the  deletion  cycle:  Print  the  "Administrator  Settings  List"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 
To  check  information  on  the  folders  selected  for  file  deletion:  Print  the  "Document  Filing  Folder  List"  in  the  system  settings. 


When  "Automatic  Deletion  of  File  Settings"  is  enabled  in  the  system  settings  (administrator),  all  files  in  the  specified  folders 
will  be  deleted  when  the  set  time  arrives.  Take  care  not  to  store  files  that  you  wish  to  keep  in  folders  specified  for  file  deletion. 


•  System  Settings:  Document  Filing  Control  (page  7-24) 

This  shows  a  list  of  the  folder  names  for  document  filing. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Automatic  Deletion  of  File  Settings 

Configure  settings  for  automatic  deletion  at  regular  intervals  of  files  stored  using  the  document  filing  function. 

•  System  Settings  (Administrator):  Administrator  Settings  List 

Use  this  to  print  a  list  of  the  administrator  settings,  including  document  filing  settings. 


6-6 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Files 

When  a  file  is  saved  using  "File", the  following  information  can  be  appended. 


Saving  a  file  with  this  information  allows  you  to  distinguish  it  from  other  files. 


User  name:  Use  this  to  specify  the  owner  of  the  file.  The  user  name  must  first  be  stored  in  "User  List"  in  the  system 
settings. 


File  Name:  A  file  name  can  be  entered. 

Folder:  Select  which  folder  the  file  will  be  saved  in. 

Confidential:  A  password  (5  to  8  digits)  can  be  established  to  prevent  others  from  using  the  file. 


The  above  information  cannot  be  specified  when  a  file  is  saved  with  Quick  File. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  User  List 

This  is  used  to  store  user  names. 


IMPORTANT  POINTS  WHEN  USING  DOCUMENT  FILING 

Note  the  following  when  using  document  filing: 

•  Files  saved  using  "Quick  File"  are  assigned  the  "Sharing"  property.  "Sharing"  files  can  be  retrieved  and  printed  or 
transmitted  by  anyone, and  thus  Quick  File  should  not  be  used  to  save  sensitive  or  confidential  documents  that  you  do 
not  wish  others  to  use. 

•  When  saving  a  file  with  "File",  use  the  "Confidential"  property.  A  password  can  be  set  for  a  "Confidential"  file  to 
prevent  the  file  from  being  used  by  other  people.  Take  care  to  keep  the  password  of  a  stored  "Confidential"  file  secret. 

•  The  property  of  a  stored  "Confidential"  file  can  be  changed  to  "Sharing"  by  "Property  Change"  when  the  file  is  used. 
Do  not  store  sensitive  documents  or  documents  that  you  do  not  want  to  be  used  by  others. 

•  Except  in  cases  provided  for  by  law,  SHARP  Corporation  bears  no  responsibility  for  any  damages  that  result  from  the 
leaking  of  sensitive  information  due  to  manipulation  by  a  third  party  of  any  data  saved  using  the  Quick  File  function  or 
File  function,  or  incorrect  operation  of  the  Quick  File  function  or  File  function  by  the  operator  that  saves  the  data. 


6-7 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


USING  DOCUMENT  FILING  IN  EACH  MODE 

In  copy  or  image  send  mode,  the  original  can  be  saved  as  a  file  on  the  hard  drive  at  the  same  time  it  is  copied  or 
transmitted.  In  addition,  Scan  to  HDD  can  be  used  to  save  the  scanned  data  of  an  original  to  the  hard  drive  without 
copying  or  transmitting  the  data. 


Copy  mode 

The  original  is  saved  as  an  image  file  at  the  same  time  it  is  copied. 


(1)  Touch  the  [COPY]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [File]  key  or  the  [Quick  File] 
key- 


image  Send  mode 

Example:  Base  screen  of  scan  mode 

The  original  is  saved  as  an  image  file  at  the  same  time  it  is  scanned  and  transmitted. 


(1) 

㊄  COPY  j  慮:1  IMAGE  SEND  T  @1^ 


eady  to  send. 

Resend 

Scan 

PC  Scan 

Special  Modes 


□F 瓣 


区 


(1)  Touch  the  [IMAGE  SEND]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Scan]  tab. 

(3)  Touch  the  [File]  key  or  the  [Quick  File] 
key. 


6-8 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Scan  to  HDD  mode 

The  scanned  original  is  saved  as  an  image  file.  Neither  printing  nor  transmission  are  performed  when  Scan  to  HDD  is 
used. 


(1)  Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Scan  to  HDD]  tab. 


[File]  key  and  [Quick  File]  key 

The  "File"  key  and/or  "Quick  File"  key  will  not  appear  in  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  or  image  send  mode  if  one  or  both  of 
the  keys  has  been  changed  to  a  different  function  using  "Customize  Key  Setting"  in  the  Web  page  menu.  In  this  case,  touch 
the  [Special  Modes]  key  in  the  base  screen  of  either  mode.  Document  filing  can  be  performed  by  touching  the  [Quick  File] 
key  or  [File]  key  in  the  special  modes  menu. 

Using  document  filing  in  print  mode 

To  use  document  filing  in  print  mode,  select  document  filing  in  the  printer  driver.  For  more  information  on  using  document 
filing  in  print  mode,  see  "CONVENIENT  PRINTER  FUNCTIONS11  (page  3-54)  in  "3.  PRINTER". 

Using  document  filing  in  PC-Fax/PC-l-Fax  mode 

To  use  document  filing  in  PC-Fax  or  PC-l-Fax  mode,  select  document  filing  settings  in  the  PC-Fax  driver.  For  more 
information,  see  Help  in  the  PC-Fax  driver. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Customize  Key  Setting 

Registration  is  performed  in  [System  Settings]  -  [Operation  Settings]  -  "Customize  Key  Setting"  in  the  Web  page  menu. 


6-9 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


⑺ 


(1)  Mode  switch  keys 

Use  these  keys  to  switch  between  copy,  image  send,  and 
document  filing  modes. 

To  switch  to  document  filing  mode,  touch  the 
[DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

(2)  [File  Retrieve]  tab 

Touch  this  tab  to  retrieve  a  file  stored  by  document  filing. 
The  folder  selection  screen  will  appear. 

^  FOLDER  SELECTION  SCREEN  (page  6-26) 

(3)  [Scan  to  HDD]  tab 

Touch  this  key  to  select  Scan  to  HDD.  Neither  printing 
nor  transmission  are  performed. 

The  file  will  be  stored  in  the  Main  folder  or  a  custom 
folder. 

暖  SAVING  A  DOCUMENT  FILE  ONLY  (Scan  to  HDD) 
(page  6-18) 

(4)  [HDD  Status]  tab 

Touch  this  key  to  check  how  much  of  the  machine's  hard 
drive  is  being  used. 

The  amount  used  is  shown  as  a  percentage. 


(5)  [External  Data  Access]  tab 

This  can  be  selected  when  an  FTP  server  is  stored  or  a 
USB  memory  device  is  connected  to  the  machine. 

隊 "DIRECTLY  PRINTING  FROM  THE  MACHINE" 
(page  3-57)  in  "3.  PRINTER11 

(6)  [Search]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  search  for  a  file  stored  in  a  folder. 

You  can  search  using  the  user  name,  file  name,  or  folder 
name. 

暖  SEARCHING  FORA  STORED  FILE  (page  6-47) 

(7)  When  retrieving  a  stored  file,  use  this  to  select  the 
folder  where  the  file  is  stored. 

^  FOLDER  SELECTION  SCREEN  (page  6-26) 


Contents 


BASE  SCREEN  OF  DOCUMENT  FILING 
MODE 

Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key  in  the  touch  panel  to  open  the  base  screen  of  document  filing  mode. 

Files  stored  on  the  hard  drive  in  the  machine  can  be  retrieved  from  this  screen. 

When  user  authentication  is  used  and  My  Folder  is  configured,  the  file  selection  screen  of  My  Folder  will  appear. 
If  the  user  that  logged  in  does  not  have  My  Folder  configured,  the  folder  selection  screen  will  appear. 


隊  FOLDER  SELECTION  SCREEN  (page  6-26) 
隊  FILE  SELECTION  SCREEN  (page  6-27) 


1¢!  i 


)CUMENT 

[LING 


j  File  Retrieve  | 

Scan  to  HDD  |  HDD  Status  |  Ex  Data  Access 

|  Folder  Select 

■1  c 

Search  # 

ii 

|  Main  Folder 

[ Quick  File  Folder 

n 

f  User  1 

\  User  2 

― 1  ~r 

f  User  3 

[  User  4 

丨 n 

f  User  5 

[  User  6 

一 

f  User  7 

f  User  8 

)g 

f  User  9 

( User  10 

— i 

All  Folders  1 

ABCD  J  EPGHI  J  JKLMN  |  OPQRST  |  UWXYZ  | 

1国1  Main  Folder: 10% 
111  Custom  Folder  : 40% 


Free  Space: 50% 


l^ll  Quick  File  Folder  : 20% 


100% 

Free  Space: 80% 


\J  )/  \7 

4  5  6 

/V  /V 


6-10 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


SAVING  FILES  WITH  DOCUMENT 
FILING 


This  chapter  explains  how  to  save  an  original  as  an  image  file  using  the  Quick  File,  File,  and  Scan  to  HDD  functions  of 
document  filing  mode. 


SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "Quick  File" 

When  copying,  printing  or  transmitting  a  document  in  copy  mode,  print  mode,  or  image  send  mode  (excluding  USB 
memory  scan  mode),  "Quick  File"  can  be  selected  to  save  an  image  of  the  document  to  the  Quick  File  folder. 

The  image  can  retrieved  at  a  later  time,  allowing  you  to  print  or  transmit  the  document  without  having  to  locate  the 
original. 

As  an  example,  the  procedure  for  storing  a  document  in  the  Quick  File  folder  while  copying  is  explained  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


也 


Scanned  data  is  automatically  stored 
in  the  quick  rue  folder.  Do  not  store 
confidential  data  to  the  folder. 


ok  1 

る— 


Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  the  [Quick 
File]  key  will  be  highlighted. 


@To  cancel  Quick  File- 

Touch  the  [Quick  File]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  not  highlighted  after  you  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


6-11 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


■  Select  copy  settings  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

•  Copying  begins  and  the  scanned  document  image  is  saved  to  the  hard  drive. 

The  selected  copy  settings  are  also  saved. 

•  To  prevent  accidental  saving  of  the  document,  the  message  "The  scanned  data  is  stored  in  the  quick  file  folder."  appears 
for  6  seconds  (default  setting)  after  the  [START]  key  is  pressed. 

The  message  display  time  can  be  changed  using  "Message  Time  Setting"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 

•If  you  inserted  the  original  pages  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  all  pages  are  scanned. 

•  If  you  placed  the  original  on  the  document  glass,  scan  each  page  one  page  at  a  time. 

When  scanning  of  one  page  finishes,  replace  it  with  the  next  page  and  press  the  [START]  key. 

Repeat  until  all  pages  have  been  scanned  and  then  press  the  [Read-End]  key. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  ((§)). 


When  a  file  is  stored  using  Quick  File,  the  following  user  name  and  file  name  are  automatically  assigned  to  the  file. 
User  Name:  User  Unknown 

File  Name:  Mode_Month-Day-Year— Hour-Minute-Second 
(Example:  Copy_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM) 

Stored  to:  Quick  File  Folder 

When  user  authentication  is  used,  the  user  name  that  was  used  for  login  is  automatically  selected. 

Only  the  file  name  and  location  of  a  file  stored  in  the  Quick  File  Folder  can  be  changed. 


@To  cancel  Quick  File... 

Touch  the  [Quick  File]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  2  so  that  it  is  no  longer  highlighted. 


System  Settings  (Administrator):  Delete  All  Quick  Files 

With  the  exception  of  protected  files,  all  files  in  the  quick  file  folder  can  be  deleted  at  once. 

Settings  can  be  configured  to  delete  all  files  by  key  operation  and  to  have  all  files  automatically  deleted  when  the  power  is 
turned  on. 


6-12 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "File" 

When  copying, printing  or  transmitting  a  document  in  copy  mode,  print  mode,  or  image  send  mode  (excluding  USB 
memory  scan  mode),  "File"  can  be  selected  to  save  an  image  of  the  document  to  the  Main  folder  or  a  previously  created 
custom  folder.  The  image  can  retrieved  at  a  later  time,  allowing  you  to  print  or  transmit  the  document  without  having  to 
locate  the  original. 

As  an  example,  the  procedure  for  using  "File"  while  copying  is  explained  below. 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


Select  the  "File"  settings. 

(1)  Select  file  information  settings. 

To  select  the  user  name,  file  name,  folder,  and 
confidential  setting,  see  "FILE  INFORMATION11  (page 
6-15). 

•  Specifying  a  user  name:  (page  6-15) 

•  Assigning  a  file  name:  (page  6-16) 

•  Specifying  the  folder:  (page  6-16) 

•  Storing  a  file  as  a  confidential  file:  (page  6-17) 

After  configuring  the  above  settings,  you  will  return  to  this 
screen.  Go  to  the  next  step. 

If  you  do  not  wish  to  assign  a  user  name  or  other 
information  to  the  file,  go  to  the  next  step. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

You  will  return  to  the  base  screen  of  copy  mode  and  the 
[File]  key  will  be  highlighted. 


6-13 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Select  copy  settings  and  then  press  the  [START]  key. 

•  Copying  begins  and  the  scanned  document  image  is  saved  to  the  hard  drive. 

The  selected  copy  settings  are  also  saved. 

•  For  the  procedure  for  placing  the  original,  see  step  4  of  "SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "Quick  File"11  (page  6-11). 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


When  a  file  is  stored  using  File  without  appending  file  information,  the  following  user  name  and  file  name  are  automatically 
assigned  to  the  file. 

User  Name:  User  Unknown 

File  Name:  Mode_Month-Day-Year— Hour-Minute-Second 
(Example:  Copy_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM) 

Stored  to:  Main  Folder 

When  user  authentication  is  used,  the  user  name  that  was  used  for  login  is  automatically  selected. 


@To  cancel  the  File  operation... 

Touch  the  [Cancel]  key  in  the  screen  of  step  3. 


6-14 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


FILE  INFORMATION 

This  section  explains  the  settings  that  are  configured  in  step  3  of  "SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "File1111  (page  6-13).  Specifying 
a  user  name,  file  name,  folder,  and  confidential  setting  makes  it  easier  to  manage  and  search  for  a  file.  In  addition,  when 
confidential  is  selected  and  a  password  is  established,  other  people  will  not  be  able  to  view  the  file  without  permission. 

Specifying  a  user  name 


Touch  the  [User  Name]  key. 

When  user  authentication  is  used,  the  user  name  that  was  used 
for  login  is  automatically  selected.  In  this  case,  this  step  is  not 
needed. 


The  user  name  must  be  previously  stored  in  "User  List"  in  the  system  settings  (administrator). 


(B) 


(A) 


f  6  ►  EB  ► 18  ) 

•2V, 

国 「Name  2 

(Name  3  ]  [Name  4  j  1 

2 

[Name  5  |  f  Name  6 

[Name  7  |  (Name  8 

[Name  9  |  [Name  10  )  1  4,  j 

(Name  11  |  [Name  12 

▲ 

User 

All  I  ABCD  ||  EFGH  1  IJKL  ||  MNOP  |  QRSTU  ||  VWXYZ  |  etc. 

Touch  the  desired  user  name  in  the  list 
of  user  names  that  is  displayed. 

(1)  Select  the  user  name. 

There  are  two  ways  to  select  the  user  name: 

(A)  Touch  the  key  of  the  user  name. 

The  touched  user  name  is  highlighted. 

If  you  accidentally  select  the  wrong  user  name,  touch 
the  key  of  the  correct  name. 

(B)  Touch  the  key. 

An  area  for  entering  the  "Registration  No." 
appears  in  the  message  display.  Enter  the 
"Registration  No."  set  during  user  registration.  This 
will  allow  you  to  select  the  user  name. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

The  user  name  that  you  touched  is  selected  and  you 
return  to  the  screen  of  step  1 ■  The  selected  user  name 
appears. 


6-15 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Assigning  a  file  name 

A  file  name  can  be  assigned  to  the  file. 


Touch  the  [File  Name]  key. 

A  text  entry  screen  will  appear.  Enter  the  file  name  and  touch 
the  [OK]  key. 

A  maximum  of  30  characters  can  be  entered. 


Specifying  the  folder 


Touch  the  [Stored  to:]  key. 


If  a  user  name  with  a  "My  Folder"  setting  is  selected,  "My  Folder"  of  that  user  will  automatically  be  selected. 


(1)  (2) 


1 

Stored  to: 

1  ~ ok  ~ ! 

[Main  Folder 

] 

f  User  2  J  1 

f  User  3 

j  [  User  4  )  2 

[ User  5 

J  1  User  6  ]  ^  ] 

f  User  7 

] ( User  8  1 ( , 

f  User  9 

- 1  |  User  10  |  IjJ 

All  Folders  | 

ABCD  |  EFGHI  ]  JKLMN  |  OPQRST  |  UVWXYZ  J 

Select  the  folder  in  which  you  want  to 
store  the  file. 

(1)  Touch  the  key  of  the  folder  where  you  want 
to  store  the  file. 

If  a  password  has  been  set  for  the  folder,  a  password 
entry  screen  appears.  Enter  the  password  of  the  touched 
folder  with  the  numeric  keys  (5  to  8  digits)  and  touch  the 
[OK]  key. 

(2)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 


6-16 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Storing  a  file  as  a  confidential  file 

A  password  can  be  set  for  the  file  to  prevent  others  from  viewing  it.  Set  a  password  (5  to  8  digits)  with  the  numeric  keys. 


(1) (2) 


User  Name  D  Name  1 


[ File  Name  1  file-01 
f  Stored  to  jj  User  1 


Enable  the  confidential  property. 

(1)  Select  the  [Confidential]  checkbox  so  that  a 
checkmark  0  appears. 

Confidential  mode  is  enabled  and  a  password  can  be 
entered. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Password]  key, 


Enter  a  password  (5  to  8  digits)  with  the 
numeric  keys  and  touch  the  [OK]  key. 

As  each  digit  is  entered, changes  to 


6-17 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


SAVING  A  DOCUMENT  FILE  ONLY  (Scan  to 
HDD) 

Scan  to  HDD  is  used  to  store  a  scanned  document  in  the  Main  folder  or  a  custom  folder.  Neither  printing  nor 
transmission  are  performed. 

"Scan  to  HDD"  SCREEN 

The  following  screen  appears  when  the  [Scan  to  HDD]  tab  is  touched  in  document  filing  mode.  Touch  the  keys  below  to 
select  Scan  to  HDD  settings. 

The  current  setting  of  each  key  appears  to  the  right  of  the  key. 


(1)  [File  Information]  key 

Information  can  be  appended  to  a  file  stored  by  Scan  to 
HDD.  The  settings  are  configured  in  the  same  way  as  file 
information  for  Tile". 

隊  FILE  INFORMATION  (page  6-15) 

(2)  [Special  Modes]  key 

Use  this  key  to  select  special  modes  for  Scan  to  HDD. 
隊  Special  modes  screen  for  Scan  to  HDD  (page  6-21) 

(3)  [Preview]  key 

Touch  to  check  the  image  to  be  stored  before  performing 
Scan  to  HDD. 

^  Checking  the  image  before  storing  it  (Preview)  (page 
6-22) 

(4)  [Original]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  set  the  scanning  size,  storing  size  and 
orientation  of  the  original,  and  select  2-sided  scanning  settings. 
隊 [Original]  key  (page  6-19) 

(5)  [Exposure]  key 

Touch  this  key  to  select  the  exposure  for  scanning. 

(6)  [Resolution]  key 

Use  this  to  select  the  resolution  that  will  be  used  when 


(7)  [Color  Mode]  key 

Use  this  key  to  select  the  color  mode  when  storing  a 
document. 

瞭 [Color  Mode]  key  (page  6-20) 

⑻圍 key 

This  key  appears  when  a  special  mode  or  2-sided 
scanning  is  selected.  Touch  the  key  to  display  the 
selected  special  modes. 


the  file  is  transmitted. 

When  "Long  Size"  is  specified,  only  resolution  settings  of 
300  X  300  dpi  and  under  can  be  selected. 


6-18 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


[Original]  key 

When  the  [Original]  key  is  touched,  the  following  screen  appears.  This  screen  is  used  to  change  the  original  size  and 
select  scanning  settings  for  2-sided  originals. 


(1)  (2)  (4) 


⑶ 


(1)  Touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key. 

If  the  original  is  a  non-standard  size  that  cannot  be  detected  by  auto  original  size  detection,  touch  the  [Scan  Size]  key  and  specify  the  original  size. 

(2)  Touch  the  [Store  Size]  key. 

If  you  wish  to  store  the  file  at  a  different  size  than  the  original  size,  touch  the  [Store  Size]  key  and  change  the  store  size. 

(3)  Touch  the  appropriate  orientation  key. 

If  the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  up,  touch  the  [QQ I  key.  If  the  top  edge  of  the  original  is  to  the  left,  touch  the  [^10 1  key. 

If  the  original  is  a  2-sided  original,  touch  the  [2-Sided  Booklet]  key  or  the  [2-Sided  Tablet]  key  as  appropriate  for  the  original  type. 

(4)  Touch  the  [OK]  key. 

The  settings  are  stored  and  you  return  to  the  Scan  to  HDD  screen. 

[Exposure]  key 

To  adjust  the  exposure,  touch  the  [Exposure]  key. 

Select  an  appropriate  exposure  mode  for  the  original  and  touch  the  [  G  1 or  [  I  1  key  to  adjust  the  exposure  level. 
When  finished,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


(2)  (A)  (1) 


(1)  Select  the  appropriate  original  type  for  the  original  to  be  scanned. 

(2)  Select  [Auto]  or  [Manual]. 

If  you  selected  [Manual],  touch  the  I  G  1 or  1,.  I  1  key  to  adjust  the  exposure.  (For  a  darker  image,  touch  the  , 1  key.  For  a 
lighter  image,  touch  the  i 0  i  key.) 

When  the  exposure  is  set  to  [Auto],  the  i  CJ  )  |  I  J  keys  cannot  be  used. 

(A):  Moire  Reduction 

To  reduce  the  moire  effect  when  scanning  printed  matter,  touch  the  [Moire  Reduction]  checkbox  so  that  a  checkmark  .^)  appears. 

(3)  Touch  the  [OK]  key, 

The  settings  are  stored  and  you  return  to  the  Scan  to  HDD  screen. 


6-19 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


[Color  Mode]  key 

Touch  the  [Color  Mode]  key  to  open  the  color  mode  setting  screen  for  Scan  to  HDD. 


The  following  settings  can  be  selected  for  the  scanning  color  when  the  [START]  key  is  pressed. 


Mode 

Scanning  method 

Full  Color 

The  original  is  scanned  in  full  color.  This  mode  is  best  for  full  color  originals  such  as  catalogues. 
Even  when  the  original  is  black  and  white,  it  is  scanned  as  a  full  color  original. 

Grayscale 

The  colors  in  the  original  are  scanned  in  black  and  white  as  shades  of  gray  (grayscale). 

Mono  2 

Colors  in  the  original  are  scanned  as  black  or  white.  This  mode  is  best  for  text-only  originals. 

[High  Capacity  Mode]  or  [Send  Allowed  Mode]  can  be  selected  as  the  storage  format  for  Mono2. 
High  Capacity  Mode: 

When  this  mode  is  selected,  the  stored  file  cannot  be  transmitted. 

Send  Allowed  Mode: 

When  this  mode  is  selected,  the  stored  file  can  be  transmitted. 

When  you  have  finished  selecting  the  mode,  touch  the  [OK]  key. 


6-20 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Special  modes  screen  for  Scan  to  HDD 

When  the  [Special  Modes]  key  is  touched,  the  following  screen  appears.  For  more  information  on  each  setting, see 
"SPECIAL  MODES"  (page  5-71)  in  "5.  SCANNER  /  INTERNET  FAX". 


(1)  (2)  (3) 


Scan  to  HDD/Spe 

.al  Modes 

f  OK  1 

Er; 

- B°ue 

il  Page 

Scan  |  Card 

Shot 

Job  I  |(^n  Mixed  Size  [  Slow  Scan 

Build  1  1 替 Original  \h^  Mode 

°c 

< 

iginal 

Hount 

(4)  (5)  (6)  ⑺ 


(1)  [Erase]  key 

The  erase  function  is  used  to  erase  shadow  lines  on 
images  produced  when  scanning  thick  originals  or  books 
on  the  document  glass. 

(2)  [Dual  Page  Scan]  key 

The  left  and  right  sides  of  an  original  can  be  scanned  as 
two  separate  pages.  This  function  is  useful  when  you 
wish  to  successively  scan  each  page  of  a  book  or  other 
bound  document. 

(3)  [Card  Shot]  key 

This  function  lets  you  store  the  front  and  reverse  sides  of 
a  card  as  a  single  page. 

⑷ [Job  Build]  key 

This  function  lets  you  separate  a  many-page  original  into 
sets,  scan  each  set  using  the  automatic  document 
feeder,  and  store  all  pages  as  a  single  file.  Use  this 
function  when  there  are  more  original  pages  than  can  be 
placed  at  once  in  the  auto  document  feeder. 

(5)  [Original  Count]  key 

When  using  the  automatic  document  feeder  to  scan  an 
original,  you  can  check  whether  or  not  the  correct 
number  of  pages  were  scanned  before  storing  the 
document. 


(6)  [Mixed  Size  Original]  key 

This  feature  lets  you  scan  originals  of  different  sizes  at 
the  same  time;  for  example,  8-1/2"  x  14"  (B4)  size 
originals  mixed  together  with  1 1" x  1 7"  (A3)  size 
originals.  When  scanning  the  originals,  the  machine 
automatically  detects  the  size  of  each  original. 

Originals  of  mixed  widths  and  sizes  can  be  scanned 
(1 1" x  1 7n  and  8-1/211  x  1 4", 11nx  17M  and  8-1/2"  x  13", 
11" x  17n  and  5-1/211  x  8-1/211  (A3  and  B4,  A3  and  B5,  A4 
and  B4,  A4  and  B5,  B4  and  A4R,  B4  and  A5,  B5  and 
A4R,  B5  and  A5)). 

(7)  [Slow  Scan  Mode]  key 

Use  this  function  when  you  wish  to  scan  thin  originals 
using  the  automatic  document  feeder.  This  function  helps 
prevent  thin  originals  from  misfeeding. 


6-21 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


Checking  the  image  before  storing  it  (Preview) 

If  you  touch  the  [Preview]  key  and  then  start  Scan  to  HDD,  the  screen  below  appears. 

Before  the  scanned  data  is  stored,  you  can  check  a  preview  of  the  scanned  image  in  this  screen  and  return  to  the  Scan 
to  HDD  settings  screen  to  change  settings 


(1)  (2)  (3)  (4)  (5)  (6)  (7) 


(1)  Preview  image 

This  shows  an  image  of  the  selected  file. 

If  the  image  is  cut  off,  use  the  scroll  bars  at  the  right  and 
bottom  of  the  screen  to  scroll  the  image.  Touch  a  bar  and 
slide  it  to  scroll.  (You  can  also  touch  the  ▼  ▲  keys  to 
scroll.) 

(2)  Change  page  keys 

When  there  are  multiple  pages,  use  these  keys  to 
change  pages. 

•  flVl  N)  keys:  Go  to  the  first  or  the  last  page. 

•as  keys:  Go  to  the  previous  page  or  the  next 

page. 

•  Page  number  display:This  shows  the  total  number  of 

pages  and  the  current  page  number. 
You  can  touch  the  current  page 
number  key  and  enter  a  number  with 
the  numeric  keys  to  go  to  that  page 
number. 


(3)  "Display  Rotation"  key 

This  rotates  the  image  right  or  left  by  90  degrees.  The 
rotation  applies  to  all  pages  in  the  file,  not  just  the 
displayed  page. 

(4)  [Start  Storing]  key 

This  starts  Scan  to  HDD. 

(5)  Display  zoom  key 

Use  this  to  set  the  zoom  ratio  of  the  displayed  image. 
Changes  from  the  left  in  the  order  "Full  Page",  "Twice", 
■■4  Times",  "8  Times".  The  setting  applies  to  all  pages  in 
the  file,  not  just  the  displayed  page. 

(6)  [Function  Rev.]  key 

Use  this  to  check  special  mode  settings  and  original 
settings. 

(7)  [Reset]  key 

Use  this  key  if  you  need  to  change  settings  after 
checking  an  image  or  settings.  You  will  return  to  the 
setting  screen. 


•A  preview  image  is  an  image  for  display  on  the  touch  panel.  Differs  from  the  actual  storage  result. 

•  Depending  on  the  size  of  the  image,  part  of  the  image  may  be  clipped  off  in  the  preview  screen  on  the  touch  panel. 


6-22 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


PERFORMING  "Scan  to  HDD" 


Place  the  original. 

Place  the  original  face  up  in  the  document  feeder  tray,  or  face 
down  on  the  document  glass. 


(4)  (2)  (1)  ⑶ 


Switch  to  document  filing  mode  and 
select  Scan  to  HDD  settings. 

Touch  the  [DOCUMENT  FILING]  key. 

Touch  the  [Scan  to  HDD]  tab. 

If  you  do  not  wish  to  select  settings,  go  to  the  step  3. 

Select  the  original  size,  exposure, 
resolution,  compression  ratio,  color  mode, 
and  special  modes. 

See  l,MScan  to  HDD11  SCREEN"  (page  6-18). 

Touch  the  [File  Information]  key, 

The  settings  are  the  same  as  for  "File".  See  "FILE 
INFORMATION11  (page  6-15). 


(1) 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 


If  the  original  is  2-sided,  be  sure  to  touch  the  [Original]  key  and  then  touch  the  [2-Sided  Booklet]  key  or  the  [2-Sided 
Tablet]  key  as  appropriate  for  the  original. 


Press  the  [START]  key. 

Scanning  begins. 

For  the  procedure  for  placing  the  original,  see  step  4  of  "SAVING  A  FILE  WITH  "Quick  File"11  (page  6-11). 
When  Preview  is  enabled,  the  preview  screen  appears. 

隊  Checking  the  image  before  storing  it  (Preview)  (page  6-22) 

A  beep  will  sound  to  indicate  that  Scan  to  HDD  is  completed. 


@To  cancel  scanning... 

Press  the  [STOP]  key  (®). 


When  Scan  to  HDD  is  performed  without  appending  file  information,  the  following  user  name  and  file  name  are  automatically 
assigned  to  the  file. 

User  Name:  User  Unknown 

File  Name:  Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second 
(Example:  HDD_ 0404201 0_1 1 2030AM) 

Stored  to:  Main  Folder 

When  user  authentication  is  used,  the  user  name  that  was  used  for  login  is  automatically  selected. 


6-23 


Contents 


DOCUMENT  FILING 


USING  STORED  FILES 


This  section  explains  how  to  retrieve  a  file  stored  by  document  filing  and  print  or  transmit  the  file. 


SEQUENCE  FOR  USING  A  STORED  FILE 

This  section  explains  the  basic  procedure  for  retrieving  and  using  a  stored  file.  The  screens  and  procedures  differ 
depending  on  whether  or  not  user  authentication  is  enabled. 

See  the  sequence  that  applies  to  your  situation. 

For  information  on  user  authentication  procedures,  see  "USER  AUTHENTICATION"  (page  1-17)  in  "1. BEFORE  USING 
THE  MACHINE".  For  information  on  enabling  user  authentication  and  storing  user  names,  see  "User  Control"  (page 
7-45)  in  "7.  SYSTEM  SETTINGS". 


Files  stored  by  document  filing  can  also  be  retrieved  and  used  from  the  Web  pages.  Click  [Document  Operation]  and  then 
[Document  Filing]  in  the  Web  page  menu,  and  select  the  folder  that  contains  the  file  you  wish  to  use. 

You  can  also  show  a  preview  of  a  stored  file  in  the